Full text of "The navigation of the Caribbean Sea and Gulf of Mexico"

See other formats

Google

This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on Hbrary shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project

to make the world's books discoverable online.

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject

to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books

are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.

Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the

publisher to a library and finally to you.

Usage guidelines

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we liave taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.

+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.

+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe.

About Google Book Search

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web

at|http : //books . google . com/|

(gomliUmen^s oi

Bicfiardson tflonen

(I91-12-'fl1-3.0tt7.)

U.d~ ^,< f C^'' t- ry. cf':

V. S.-HYDROGRAPHIC OFFrcE,

BUIEtli OF KAVIStTION, km DEPUTIIEIIT.

THE NAVIGATION

Caribbean Sea and Gulf of Mexico.

Vol. I.

THIRD EDITION.

THE WEST INDIA ISLANDS, INCLUDINQ THE BERHUIA
ISLANDS AND THE BAHAMA BANKS.

aOTEBNHERT PBIKTIRQ OPFIOB.
1892.

■i-

^T^RD c6^

^<c.^

'"!- n 1892

\ <

':iJ5f;;A'E<'l.

I ?

» . *»

N f

s.y

CONTENTS.

PrefiMMi...*. • y

Note ■ VI

Index ohArt

List of haiborand special charts vil

Index 607

CHAPTER I.
Bemarks on Winds, Hurricanes, Currents, and Passages 1

CHAPTER n.
The Bermuda Islands 11

CHAPTER m.
The Strait of Florida and the Florida Keys 22

CHAPTER IV.
The Bahama Islands and Banks 86

CHAPTER V.
Bahama Islands from the Great Bank to Navidad Bank 80

•

CHAPTER VI.
Cuba, north coast 106

CHAPTER VII.
Cuba^ south ooast 156

CHAPTER VIII.
'The Windward Channel and Jamaica, and the neighboring banks and cays. .. 198

CHAPTER IX.
The Island of Haiti w 261

CHAPTER X.
The Mona Passage and the Island of Puerto Rico 32?

CHAPTER XI.

The Virgin Islands 854

CHAPTER XII.
'le Windward Islands, Sombrero to Antigua, inclusive 3d3

CHAPTER Xin.
' Windward Islands, Guadeloupe, Dominica, and Martinique 480

CHAPTER XIV.

Windward Islands, St. Lucia to Barbados, inclusive 466

PREFACE.

The coasts of Caba, Haiti, and Paerto Rico are imperfectly laid down
on the charts, and doabtless many ehoala and dangers exist along these
coaatB of which there is no record.

The present edition of the work was compiled by Mr. K. C. Bay, D. 8..
Navy, from the following soorcee, viz : First edition by Commander F.
M. Green, U. S. Navy; second edition by Lients. 9. L. Graham and F.
E. Sawyer, IT. 8. Navy.
Hydrographic Office Archives.
Office Naval Intelligence, Navy Department.

Coneular Reports, 8tate Department, and reports from United States
Consuls in the West Indies, made to the Hydrographic Office especially
for this publication.

The latest Hydrographic Office, Coast and Geodetic Survey, and Brit-
ish Admiralty charts.

U. 8. Hydrographic Office, Coast and Geodetic Survey, and Light-
house Bofu^ Notices to Mariners.

Atlantic Local Coast Pilot, Subdivision 22, U. S. Coast and Oeodetio
Survey.
West India Pilot, Vol. n. 1887, Admiralty.

~ istrnctions Nautiques sur La Mer des Antilles, 1888, French Hydro-
>hie Office.

9rt Charges of the World, Theo. Hunter, 1839.
nd late reports from officers cruising on United States Vessels of
r.

RlOHAADSON CLOTEB,
Lieut. Commander, U. 8. Navy, Eydrographer,
. 8. Htdboobaphio Oppioe,

Wathingtw, D. 0., March 37, 1892.

HKbor and apAolal cttuta of ths Weat Infflea, psbUatiBd by tli« IT. B. Hydro-
graphlo Office.

B«rninda ialaotk i

- Qtb^pj Bay and Ireland Island

NUTowv oi Sbip ChaniiQl and St. Qeorge Harbar. .
Tbe Banks 8W. of tbe Bennodas

The Great Bahama Bank, Great laaac to ZS° iC north

-— Great Exmoa to New Providence

Old Bahama Cbannel toExnoM ,

Harbori of Great Exnma, Nuiie Channel

Raccoon Cut, Ragged Islands Anchorage

New Providenca Island

Nassau Harbor

Salt Cay Anchorage and Hanover Sound

Whale Cay Channel and Oreen Tortle Cay Aucborage

Crooked Island Anchorage

Coekbom Harbor

Tnrbs Islands

Alfred Sonud, Mathew Town Road

Egg Island to Elenthers Island

Flsamiug or Bis Shilling Channel, Ship Channel

Wide Opening, Exnma Sound

Clarence Harbor, Douglass Road, Bagged Island Harbor, Highborn
Waa Cay Cnt

QrMt Stirrup Cay, Berry islands. Great Harbor and northern part of
Qieat HaiborCay, Slaughter Harbor and eastern part of Little Stlrmp

Cay

rt Nelson, Rum Cay

CUBA.

lia Honda, Port Mariel

ana Harbor

. Hatonzaa, Cays Frances and Confites anchorages

■inaa and Santa Clara bays, Pledros, Mono and Uonlto anchorages,
t CaboOas

1241

vat

1326

LIST OF HARBOR AKD SPECIAL CHARTS.

Harbor and tpecial oiUirto of the Wetl IndieSf pubUthed by the U, S, Hydi>ographie

Oj^oe— Continued .

Title.

Port an Prince approaches

-Qonaives Bay

Acul, Tierra B^Ja, Tibnron, Chouchon, Salt River, Monstlque bays, Joan

Rabel Anchorage, Port h TEcu

Port Paix, St. Mark, Petit Goare, and Fond La Grange bays

"St. Nicholas Mole

Cape Haiti Harbor

Monte Chriflti to Fort Libert^ Bay, Fort Libert4$, Fort Danphin Bay ,

Manzanillo Bay

Fnerto Plata

8aman(( Bay, Barracota and Ynna rivers

Santo Domingo Harbor *.

Caldera Bay •.

Port Santa Barbara, Samanl( Bay

Port Cabaret

Las Canitas or Sanchez Road, Samana Bay

PCBRT0 BI€0 ABW TIBOIlf ISIiANDS.

May agues and Agnadilla bays, Mona Island, Puerto de Guanica

Agnadilla Anchorage

'Port San Juan ,..

Port Ponce ^

Virgin Passage, St. Thomas and adjacent islands

Anegada Passage, with adjacent islands

Santa Cmz, Christiansted Harbor

St. Thomas Harbor

Road Harbor

€h>rda Sound

Christiansted Harbor

WinrBWABD ISIiAlfl^li.

Number.

Sombrero Island

Crocus, Grande, and Marigot bays, Oyster Pond, Gustaf Harbor

Barbuda »

St. Enstatius, St. Christopher, Nevis, and Montserrat islands, Orangetown

and Plymouth anchorages

intigua •

^almonth and English harbors, Antigua

aadeloupe and adjacent islands

►rt Lonis, Grand Terre Island

rt du Moule, Guadeloupe, Grand Terre Island.

Francois Anchorage, Grand Terre ,

Anne Anchorage, Grand Terre ,

18402 ^n

1015
922

963

962

960

1231

1299

1210

969

917

911

1014

iieo

1269
1307

372

372a

720

966

1002

1068

977

137

669

1068

3716
371a
367

1011
1004

OOO

363

1065
1069
1073
1086

iv^-*^^

t«

XXOr^ tmJ WFJ^it^

CHAPTER I.

BSMASKS ON WINBS, HURRICANES, CURRENTS, AND PASSAGES.

The West India Islands and the neighboring l^anks lie within the
limits of the NE. trade winds, which blow from the eastward* so con-
stantly throughout the yjear as to have given rise to the terms " wind-
ward'' and "leeward," universally employed to signify that a point is
relatively to the eastward or westward.

These trade winds are subject to diurnal and annual modifications,
and are at times temporarily interrupted by other winds of varying force
and direction.

The diurnal variations to which the trade winds are subject near the
coast are called laud and sea breezes, which have especial characteris-
tics for each locality. The sea breeze generally sets in about 9 a. m.,
and, blowing either directly on shore, or, according to the trend of the
coast line, at an angle to it, continues till about sunset, when a calm
interval is succeeded by a light air off shore, atta.ining its greatest
strength about day dawn and being succeeded by an oppressive calm,
to be again followed by the sea breeze. On the coasts of Cuba, Haiti,
Puerto Bico, and Jamaica the regular sequence of land and sea breezes
is seldom interrupted^ In the Virgin and Windward Islands, as well
as among the Bahamas, the land breeze does not usually occur; but
during the night the trade winds are apt to die away, regaining their
strength in the morning. Sailing vessels therefore usually endeavor to
go to sea at early daylight. •

The changes of seasons in the West Indies, as elsewhere, are pro-
dneed by changes of the sun's declination. There is a dry and a rainy
season, the exact dividing line between them varying somewhat from
local causes; but, speaking generally, the rainy season lasts from June
till November. During this season the wind inclines towards the SE.,
witti torrents of rain. Calms and heavy squalls frequently occur, and
hardly a year passes without a hurricane of more or less severity. This
season is also knowmas the sickly season, from the great prevalence of
dangerous fevers.

From November to June the wind dri^vws more to theNB. and increases
1 strength, sometimes blowing a strong gale from this direction for two

three successive weeks in December, January, and February. Bain,
hough less frequent, is not of rare occurrence.

Occasionally strong winds from north and NW. interrupt the trades
ad bio Y very hard in the Gulf of Mexico and among the Bahama Islands.
' ^lese are called Northers and occur from November to April.

18402 ^1 1

\"--:r

irl

!■"■ '

S/ 2 WINDS ^HURRICANES.

[,; These gales of wind bear a strong resemblance to the pamperos of the

Eio de la Plata. Always heralding their approach by a heavy bank of

clouds in the IS^W. and preceded by a light air from the contrary direc-

'^ tion, accompanied by a falling barometer, they commence with a violent

squall, gradually settling down into a fresh gale, which hauls totheKE.

* and east, ending with fine weather.

As the sun gets toward its extreme northern declination the rainy or
hurricane season begins, and toward the middle of June rain falls in
abundance. Hurricanes are very rarely experienced south of the tenth
parallel, nor in the Caribbean Sea south of latitude 14^ or 15^ N., although
the heavy swell from a distant storm is often felt. In the Caribbean
Sea, east of the seventy-sixth or seventy-seventh meridian, the regular
easterly trade winds generally prevail, interrupted, occasionally, near
the land.

HURRICANES: GBI^RAL INFORMATION.

Season and Region. — Hurricanes are especially liable to be en-
countered from July to October, inclusive, in the tropics (north of the *
tenth parallel), the Gulf of Mexico, and Gulf Stream region. Earliest
indications : Barometer above the normal, with cool, very clear, pleasant
weather; a long, low, ocean swell from the direction of the distant
storm; light, feathery cirrus clouds, radiating from a point on the hori-
zon where a whitish arc indicates the bearing of the center. XJnmis*
takable signs: Falling barometer; halos about the sun and moon;
increasing ocean swell; hot, moist weather, with light, variable winds;
deep red and violet tints at dawn and sunset; a heavy, mountainous
cloud bank on the distant horizon; barometer falling more rapidly^
with passing rain squalls.

Cyclonic' Circulation. — One of the most important indications that
an approaching storm is of hurricane violence is the marked cyclonic
circulation of the wind, lower and upper clouds, etc. This may be
easily appre<riated by remembering that a cyclone of any great intensity
is an ascending spiral whirl, with a rotary motion (in the Northern
Hemisphere) against the hands of a watch, as shown on the diagrams.
The surface wind, therefore, blows spirally inward (7iot circularly, ex-
cept very near the center) ; the next upper current (carrying the low
scud and rain clouds), in almost an exact circle about the center; the
next higher current (the high cumidus), in an outward spiral; and so
on, up to the highest cirrus clouds, which radiate directtly outward-
The angle of divergence between the successive currents is almost
exai^tly two points of the com])ass Ordinarily, with a surface Wino
from n.orth for instance, the low clouds come from the north also; on
the edge of a hurricane, however, when the wind is north the cloud
come from XXE., invariably. In rear of a hurricane, the wind bloAvt
more neai-ly inward; with a SE. wind, for instance,. tlie center will beai
about west, the low clouds coming from SSE. (two x)oiuts to the right
of the wind). Great activity of movement of the upper clouds, whih

HUERICANE8. 3

the Btorm is still distant, indicates that the hurricane is of great vio-
lence. If the cirras plumes that radiate from the distant storm are
faint and opalescent in tint, fading gradually behind a slowly thicken-
ing haze or veil, the approaching storm is an old one, of large area; if
of snowy whiteness, projected against a clear blue sky, it is a young
cyclone of small area, but great intensity.

IntexiBified Trade-wind Belt. — Another very important fact may be
stated thus: When a hurricane ismoviug along the equatorial limits
of a trade- wind region there is a belt of intensified trades to windward
of its track; not until the barometer has fallen about ^ of an inch is it
safe to assume that, because the trade wind increases in force and re-
mains steady in direction, you are on the track of the storm. By at-
tempting too early to cross its track, running tree a« soon as the wind
begins to freshen, you are liable to plunge directly into the vortex.

The Bearing of the Center of a Hurricane. — The 8-point rule, it
should be understood, gives only an approximate idea of the bearing of
the center, and it is probably less reliable in the dangerous than in the
navigable semicircle. The best general rule is that the center bears
about 8 points to the right of the direction from which the low clouds comcj
€ftj what is practically the same thing, 8 points to the right of the wind
at the moment of a sudden shift in a heavy squall; after such a shift the
wind will remain steady in direction for a time but the center is mean-
while moving along and the angle of bearing changes until the next
shift, when it becomes 8 points again.

The accompanying diagrams are published every month on the Pilot
Chart of the North Atlantic Ocean, and serve to indicate, by means of
the direction of the windy the probable bearing of the center. The small
arrows fly with the wind, as stated at the margin. The shaded area
at the center is the especially dangerous region the core or Ji^art of the
hurricane.

In the tropics, for instance, withwsqually, threatening weather, falling
barometer, and wind KNE., your position is about A, on the lowest dia-
gram. The center bears about SE. by E., and you are in the dangerous
semicircle, in front of the approaching storm. See Bule 1.

If in about the latitude where hurricanes recurve, use the middle
diagram. With wind from SB., for example, your position is about B,
on the middle diagram, and the center bears about W. by S. See
Eule 2.

If in high latitudes, where hurricanes generally move along a track
bout NE. or ENB., use the first diagram. With a NE. wind your

•fiition is about C, and you are probably in the navigable .semicircle.

« Bule 3.

DIAGRAM — RULES.

IK moB
LATITUDES :

Velociiy
along irack,
20 lu 30 miles

per hour.

IH lODDLB LATITUDES.

>"**■ STOBH RIOUHVIHO:

f^^B''** Velocity along track.

5 to 10 miles per hour.

J^V U Note. — Hurricanen recurve

\/'. 'f . about the following latitude:

*■««•. !»«.»"«•««•».

in LOW

LATITUDES:

Velocity

along track,

about 17 miles

per hoar.

TV'

DIAO-EAns FOR PBACTIOAL USE IN WEST INDIAN HITBBICANES.
BRIEF BULKS FOR ACTION.

Caution: Read each of the following rulea carefully and follow them
strictly.

First. On the storm track. Second. Dangerous semicircle. Third.
Navigable semicircle.

Bute 1. — If the aquaOs freahen without any thift q/* wind, yon are on or
near the storm track; heave-to on the starboard tack and watch for
some indications of a shift, observing the low clouds particularly; if the
barometer falls decidedly (say half an inch) without any shift, and 1
wind and sea permit, run off with the wind on the starboard quartei
and keep your compass course.

Rule 3. — If the wind shift to the right, you are t« the right of the
storm track, in the dangerous semicircle; put the ship on the starbofurd

SQUALLS — CURRENTS. 5

tack and make as much headway as possible until obliged to lie-to
(starboard tack).

Rule 3. — If the wind shift to the leftj yon are to the left of the storm
track, in the navigable semicircle; bring the wind on the starboard
quarter and keep your compass coarse; if obliged to lie-to, do so on the
port tack.

OenereU rules j good for aU northern hemisphere storms, — In scudding,
always keep the wind well on the starboard quarter, in order to run out
of the storm. Always lie- to on the coming-up tack. Bemember that
the ususd ocean currents may be considerably changed for a time by
. the passage of a hurricane. Use oil to prevent heavy seas from break-
ing on board your vessel.

Squalls of more or less severity are common throughout the West
Indies, especially during the summer months. They are generally of
the arched form well known to sailors, and are almost always accom-
panied by thunder and lightning. They are most frequent near the
land. White squalls, so called, are said to occur, giving little or no
warning except the ripple on the water made by the wind. They are
fortunately of very rare occurrence. Flaws of wind are frequently met
with when coasting under high land, sudden gusts rushing down
through the valleys. They should be carefully guarded against.

CiirrentB. — Among the Windward and Virgin Islands, in the Mona,
Windward, and Bahama Passages, on the shores of Puerto Bico
Haiti, and Jamaica, and on the north coast of Cuba as far west as Ma-
tanzas, the current almost always sets to the westward with a force
varying from i Icnot to 3 and even at times 4 knots. This westerly cur-
rent is felt, but with less constancy, on the eastern side of the Bahama
banks and islands, and is due partly to the constant trade wind act-
ing on the surface of the sea, and is partly a continuation of the great
equatorial current which is deflected to the NW. by the coast of South
America and moves swiftly and steadily through the passage between
the islands of Trinidad and Oreuada.

Though not invariably experienced the navigator should vigilantly
guard against the effects of this probable current by never losing an
opportunity by night or day of verifying his position.

In very many places the currents are much affected by the tides and
still more affected by any interruption of the trade wind, as will be
"shown particularly when treating of such localities.

The leeward side of the Mona Passage in the vicinity of Gape Engano
id the shores of the island of Anegada, before the establishment of the

ht on Sombrero Island, have been strewn with numerous wreck8,owing

vessels being set to leeward by this current.

Uong the south coast of Haiti, inshore, a current of at least a knot

hour &as often been encountered setting to the eastward.

The most westerly point in the Florida Strait where the influence of
Gulf Stream may be felt is difficult to determine. * Sometimes an

b GULP STREAM.

easterly current of 2 miles an hour may be felt as far west as the me-
ridian of the mouth of the Mississippi, but more frequently it commences
between Havana and the Tortugas.

The navigator is referred to the general examination of the Atlantic
Ocean, published by the U. 8. Hydrographic Office, for detailed state-
ments concerning the winds and currents of the Atlantic Oc^an, which
constantly influence with greater or less force the winds and currents of
the Caribbean Sea and Gulf of Mexico.

Q-xHf Stream. — The following information is the result of the inves-
tigation of the currents of the Gulf Stream during 1885, 1886, and 1887,
by Lieut, J. B. Pillsbury, U. S. If avy, commanding the Coast Survey
steamer Blake:

BETWEEN FOWEY ROCKS, FLOBIDA, AND GUN CAY, BAHAMAS.

The current varies daily in velocity, at times as much as 2^ knots.
The greatest velocity is about 9 hours before the upper transit of the
moon. The variations are more excessive on the west side of the stream
than on the east. (See table below.)

The average daily current varies during the month, the strongest set
apparently coming a day or two after the moon's greatest declination,
but the observations are not as yet sufficiently numerous to definitely
establish the exact law of this variation.

The axis of the Gulf Stream at this point (the i)osition of the greatest
surface flow) is llj miles east of Fowey Bocks lighthouse. The direc-
tion is always within a few degrees of north. The strongest surface cur-
rent at the axis was 5| knots; the weakest. If knots; 'and the average
current was 3/o- knots. For the average at other places, see table
below.

There was evidence that the axis of the stream did not change its
position with wind blowing across it. It was found that wind blowing
against the current retarded the surface flow. It is probable that wind
with the current increases its velocity.

Observations taken hetireen April 6, 1885^ and June 1, 1836.

Stations I 1

DistAnce of fttations (•ai»t of Fowey Ro<'kB milen . . ■ 8

Time of maximum flow before the moon's trniLBit hours .J 9

Average current knots - . 2. 8

Average maximum do. ... 3. 06

Average minimum do 1. 89

Greatest current observed do \ 4.63

Least current observed do...., 0.31

3.6

4.87

2.85

5.25

1.73

15
9
3.2
3.86
2.54
4.53
2.12

22
9

2.8

3.06

2.56

3.20

2.07

29
9
2.4
3.32
1.86
2.54
1.80

36
9
1.8
1.99
1.47
2.50
•1.12

BETWEEN BEBECCA SHOAL AND CUBA.

The current varies daily in velocity in the same manner as previously
discovered off Fowey Eocks, but the maximum velocity arrives at about
9*» 20°» before the transit of the moon.

GULF HTEEAM.

The northern edge of the stream varies considerably in latitude, the
average position of this limit, avS shown by the observations made,
being about 30 miles to the southward of Bebecca Shoal lighthouse.

The axis of the stream is situated about 65 miles south of Bebecca
Shoal lighthouse, or 25 miles from the Cuban shore.

The direction of the flow at the axis is about east, but on either side
the flow inclines toward the middle. At 5 miles distant from the coast
o^ Cuba the average direction was K. 43^ B. (N. 39° E. mag.), and at 5
miles inside the northern edge of the stream it was S. 58^ £. (S. 62^ E.
mag.).

Ohsenations taken between February 9, 1887j and May 9, JSS7.

StationA.

Distance of stations sonth of
Sebecoa Shoal miles.

Time of maximum flow before
the moon's transit . .hrs. min.

Average current knots .

ATeraf(e maximum do. .

Average minimum do. .

GreatMt current observed. do..

Least current observed do..

Direction of flow 'Var

•i

" 35

9:20
O.M
1.56
0.67
2.42
0,16

S. W'3 E.

(S.«2<'E.
mag.)

9:20

2.20

1.77

2.71

2.20

1.87

1.80

3.73

2.21

1.56

1.25

1 S. 830 E.

S. 78° E.

(S. 870 E.

(8. 820 E.

mag.)

0:20
2.38
2.72
1.62
3.06
1.34

9:20
1.11

9:20
0.88
1.31
0.50
1.77
0.12

3.06 1.45 1.77

1.34 0.65 0.12

N. 83° E. I N. 66° E. I N. 43° E.
(N. 790 E. (N. 62° E. (N. 39^ E.
mag.) mag.) > mag.)

BETWEEN CUBA AND YUCATAN.

The current varies daily in velocity, the maximum arriviDg at IC*
b^ore the moon's transit.

The western limit of the stream is the Yucatan Bank, and its eastern
limit is found about 20 miles distant from Gape San Antonio. In the
space to the eastward of the stream (between its eastern limit and Gape
San Antonio) there is an ebb and flow close inshore, and a set to the
northward and eastward and to the southward and eastward between
this inshore ebb and flow and the eastern limit of the stream. Probably,
at times, there will be found a strong eddy current in this space to the
eastward of the stream, but at the time of the observations the direc-
tions NE. and 8E. were about equal on the surface, while below the
surface the direction was always 8E.

The axis of the stream is situated about 6 miles from the lOO-fathom
curve of the Yucatan Bank, in from 200 to 400 fathoms of water.

The direction of the flow in the stream is north at the axis, and about
^he same at all other parts.

A monthly variation, similar to that found off Fowey Eocks, is very
\arked here, the maximum arriving two or three days after the highest

)clination of the moon.

A trial anchorage, made off Cape Hatteras in 1,852 fathoms, indicated

at this variation may be looked for at all parts of the stream.

EARTHQUAKES-^ROUTEa,
Ob9ervationa taken between March g4, 1887, and April 22, 1887,

Stations

Bistanoe of station firam Tnoatan
toward Cape San Antonio. . .Miles. .

Time«of maximom flow before the
moon's transit ..Hours..

Average cnrrent Ejiots..

Average mazimnm...... do....

ATeragemininmm. do

Greatest current observed do. . . .

Least cnrrent observed, do —

Direction of (current

0.65

1.17

0.51

N.340W.&

N.8»o E.

(N. 390 W.

& N. 840 E.

mag.)

10
3.61
4.99
2.45
6.32
1.9»

K.50E.
(North
mag.)

10
2.73

10
1.55
1.89

3.31
2.51

1.05
1.21

K.50E. iN.7o"W.
(North i(N.lloW.
mag.) mag.)

10
1.06

10
0.4»

1.38
0.96

N. 70 W.

(N. HOW,

mag.)

0.«3»
0.24

S.410B.A;

N.490B.

(S.450S.

&:K.45»

£. mag.)

N'OTB. — ^The data for some of these stations are not complete, owing to the Blake having been unable
to remain at anchor a sufficient lensth of time. The results given are those obtained Arom observations
up to the preaent date, and are suqject to modification by airaitional data.

Earthquakes. — Slight shocks of earthquake are very frequent
among the islands of the West Indies, especially in the Virgin and
Windward islands. They are sometimes strong enough to do seriouB
damage on land, the most severe shocks having occurred at Guadeloupe
and St. Thomas. The large majority of the shocks are, however, slight;
the heavy sea waves, which frequently rise without any apparent cause
and dash heavily against the shores of the islands, may be due, in som@
cases, to them. These rollers are most frequent in the eastern part of
the West Indies, but occur at times on all the islands. They frequently
make landing dangerous, and have been knowii to tear vessels from their
anchorages and dash them ashore. They have been attributed to gales
of wind prevailing at a distance, to interference between or union -of
the ordinary waves caused by the trades, and to earthquake shocks.
Navigators, by noting all the attendant circumstances when these phe-
nomena are perceived, will assist greatly in finding out the laws that
govern them.

USUAL STEAMSB BOUTBS FROM NORTHERN PORTS OF THE UNITED
STATES TO THE WEST INDIES, PORTS IN THE aULF, AND CARIB-
BEAN SEA.

For Havana or the Qolf of Mexico. — The route to be taken
should be decided at Hatteras, according to the weather; but steamers
generally use the inside ti^ack, between the land and the Gulf Stream,
and make a straight course to Hatteras Shoal, thence in 17 fathoms of
water to Cape Canaveral, after passing which there is no trouble night
or day, the coast to Jupiter Inlet being clear from danger. By using
the lead a safe course can be steered, free from tide or current. From
Jupiter down, coast inside the stream; during the day keep the Florida
reefs just in sight and at night be guided by the lights, making a direct
course for Cuban or Mexican ports when clear of the keys. If bound
to United States Gulf ports, pass to the westward of the Tortugas.

BOUTES. d

In the homeward trip the strength of the stream is used, and steam-
ers do not leave it until oif, or north of, Hatteras, when a direct course for
port is made.

Steamers using the eastern route (outside the stream), when off Hat-
teras cross the Gulf Stream, then run for the NW. point of Matanilla
JBieeitj and where it bears S. 56^ W. (S. 55^ E. mag.) recross to Jupiter Light
and continue as before directed. (See last paragraph p. 35.)

To the BfthaniMi — ^The Boston steamers, after clearing Nantucket
shoals, make direct course for xK>rt of destkiation and return by same
route, except during winter months, when they tbllow the stream to
Hatteras, then north edge of the stream to latitude of Delaware Bay,
when a course is set for Nantucket. Other steamers make direct course
for Hatteras to port of destination and return by same route, -

From Cape Canaveral to Nassau the best route is to Jupiter, then
acro^ to Great Isaac, and through the NW. Providence Channel to
Nassau.

For South Shore of Cuba, Haiti, Jamaica, or Central American
Ports. — From Boston set direct course for Watling Island; from other
northern x>orts keep inside of stream until off Hatteras, then steer di-
rectly for Watling Island, pass through Crooked Island Passage, round
Cape Maysi, thence to destination, remembering and allowing for the
westerly current, which increases in strong easterly winds on north
shores of Cuba.

Ctoing north after leaving Watling Island, set course for Hatteras;
if bound to Boston and in good weather, shape course for Yinej'ard
sound; if weather threatens, keep inside the stream.

For Santo Domingo, Pnerto Rico, and ports on north shore of
Sonth America. — After making Hatteras as before stated, steer for
Mona Passage and then for destination.

For the Windward Islands and ports in Venesnela.— From Hat-
teras set course for Sombrero Island Light, through Anegada Passage,
and to destination.

SAILINa VESSELS.

In general, bound south, the object to be gained is to make eastings,

so that when the northern Hmit of the trades is reached the port to

which bound should bear a little west of south, in summer about SSW.,

excepting when bound into the Gulf of Mexico, when the course should

^e as far west as possible, the wind often being more favorable near

le eastern edge of the Gulf Stream than it is a degree or more to the

bstward. The Crooked Island Passage should not be used bound

uth and west, but the passage through Hole in the Wall and around

"eat Isaac is safe, and from Isaac's south the stream is not much felt

its eastern edge.

etnming to the United States. — From all ports to windward the
.t course is the direct one, using that passage which lies nearest the

ROUTES.

course. Vessels should run the trades out by the wind or a little free;
crossing the thirtieth parallel in about longitude 72o From the Golf
vessels should run in the stream as fiaj* north as latitude 36<^ and. lon-
gitude 740.

From the Windward Islands, with strong trades, many vessels ran.
through to leeward of the islands, cross Caribbean Sea round Gape
San Antonio, and follow the stream. If northerly or westerly winds
should be met, use the Windward and Crooked Island Passages, cross-
ing the Gulf Stream off Hatteras.

CHAPTER II.

THE BEBMTTDA ISLANDS.

This group wan formerly called the Somers Islands, from Sir .George
Somers, who was shipwrecked here in 1609.

They were first settled by the English 1612, and have remained- ever
since in their possession. The group consists of over 360 islands, most
of which are small and surrounded by dangerous reefs nearly even
with the surface of the water. Access is extremely difficult. The prin-
cipal ones which are inhabited are St. George, St. David, Hamilton,
Somerset, and Ireland. The population is about 14,500, of whom 6,000
are white.

The government is administered by a military governor appointed by
the British Government. This group forms a most important military
and naval station, all commanding points being strongly fortified.

The United States is represented by a consul and vice-consul.

There is a complete dockyard establishment at Ii^eland Island, with
every requisite for refitting and docking large ships.

The principal trade is with the United States, large quantities of
fresh vegetables being exi>orted there. Steamers from New York arrive
and depart every two weeks from July to December, inclusive, and
weekly during the rest of the year. There is a monthly steamer be-
tween Halifax, Turks Island, and Jamaica; also monthly st>eamers be-
tween St. John, New Brunswick, and the Windward Islands, all calling
at Hamilton going and returning.

There is a submarine cable between Halifax and Bermuda; office, at
Hamilton.

Being situated between the parallels of 32^ and 3:P N., about an
equal distance froijfi the West India Islands and British North America,
the climate is a mean between the two, partaking neither of the extreme
heat of the one nor of the excessive cold of the other. Owing to the
3-ulf S^eam, which passes between the Bermudas and the United
'tates, the climate is greatly ameliorated, the winter months resem-
ling the early part of October in England, but without its frost. Gar-

^ning is pursued during this part of the year, while the tropical pro-

ictions of the West Indies are cultivated during the heat of the sum-

er.

The winter, or cold season, is the most agreeable, and lasts from No-

mber to March. In the latter part of February spring commences,

12 THE BERMUDA ISLANDS.

and the weather usually continues mild, with refreshing showers and
gentle breezes from south and west, until ^he end of May. In June the
summer sets in, and the weather becomes hot. Calms now succeed to
ihe gentle breezes of May, the air is sultry and oppressive, and long
droughts are common, which are often broken up by heavy thunder-
storms. In September the weather changes its character, and becomes
again mild and agreeable. Hurricanes and tempests are frequent, and
few autumns pass without them, of more or less violence; the squalls
are heavy and sudden, occurring particularly in the winter season.

The whole of these islands lie on the SE. side of an oval-shaped coral
reef. On the northern and northeastern edge the reef is under water,
with a ledge here stnd there showing above it at low water, witii a single
rock called the "North Bock," rising to the height of 8 feet. Ap-
proaching from the southward the land is low, rising nowhere to a
greater height than 260 feet, but by far the greater part forming gentle
undulations of from 20 to 60 feet above the sea level. The area of the
islands is about 12,000 acres, but only 1,200 are under cultivation. The
principal islands are well wooded, chiefly with the Bermudian cedar,
which with its close and rigid foliage of the darkest green gives a
gloomy character to the woods at a distance. They are irregularly hilly,
and the valleys contain a rich vegetable soil, capable of producing
abundant crops of arrowroot, potatoes, and other vegetables, which are
largely exi)orted, as is also a small quantity of straw plat and tropical
fruits. There is a total want of springs and wells of fresh water, and it
has become an almost universal custom to collect the rain water from
the roojEs, which is carefully led into tanks and forms the only supply of
pore water. The roofs as well as the walls are whitewashed, and the
white roo& gleaming among the dark trees is characteristic of Bermuda.

Pilots can be obtained off St. David Head upon a signal being
given for one. Information is telegraphed from one part of the island
to another by the chain of signals. The pilots are competent, but for
the St. George Channel do not go out very far. They use small boats,
either whale boats or gigs, which are very sharp. They are divided
into two classes of government pilots. There are 27 in all, 12 at the
west end and 15 at the east end of the group. ^ The pilot charges are
reasonable, being so much per foot, more being charged for going in
than for coming out and more for sailing vessels than for steamers
When a vessel shifts her berth half pilotage is charged. Two dollars
and a half per day is charged for detention. The rates are regulated
by government. Complaints against pilots can be made before an^
Mayor or Justice of the Peace.

Light Daas are 8 cents per ton.

Coal can be obtiuned either at Grassy Bay, Murray Bay, or at St.
George. Anthracite, Cardiff, Welsh, or Cape Breton is kept on hand,
but the former in a limited quantity. Price varies from $7 to $9 pei
ton. In the port of St. George coaling is done with wheelbarrows and

THE REEF THE NARROWS, OR SHIP CHANNEL. 13

is rapid; at Murray Anchorage, from hulks with baskets, and very
rarely interrupted by storms; at Grassy Bay, from hulks and at the
rate of 10 tons per hour, and interrupted by winter gales. Water costs
half cent per gallon delirered in-4)asks from Hamilton. It is rain-
water. It can also be procured from the dockyard in steam tank ves-
sels. Provisions cost 30 per cent more than in New York. Butcher's
meat is imported from New York. Fruit is scarce, except bananas.

Wharfage. — Vessels of 100 tons when actually discharging, $1.20
per day; larger vessels pay in proportion; about 25 cents for every 60
tons over 100.

The Reef. — Prom North Eock the reef trends about E, by N., and
east for nearly 5 miles, passing 5^ miles northward of St. Oatherine
Point, when it sweeps around to the SE. and south and terminates ^
mile from St. David Head. There are several narrow openings through
this great barrier, leading into secure anchorages, but only one naviga-
ble for ships of large draft.

The SE. side of the remarkable reef, from which the Bermudas rise,
from St. David Head to the lighthouse, is bounded by the islands which
Ue in most parts within ^ of a mile of the edge with the 100-fathom
line about a mile beyond it; the depth of 10 fathoms being almost
alongside the reef. Nearly abreast Gibbs Hill lighthouse, the reef ex-
tends a mile from the shore and thence takes a westerly direction for
about 8 miles, and the outer detached parts are called the SW. break-
er, Ghaddock, Little, and Long Bars. It then sweeps round to the notth
and NB. passing about 6 miles from Somerset Island, continuing with
an outward curve to North Bock.

Ohannele. — ^The channels through the outer reef, commencing at
Nortl^ Eock, the most northern are as follows:

Vortli Rock OluumeL — ^There are two channels on either side of
this rock, but as they are narrow and intricate and only known to a
few pilots they are seldom used.

Mule Breaker Ohanael is the next to the eastward, and the en-
trance is i mile to the northward of the Mills Breaker, which is marked
by an iron buoy, bearing N. 22^ E. (N. 30^ E. mag.) 2} miles from St.
^ David Head. It is only used by Bermndian vessels.

The Narrows or Ship Channel is next south of Mills Breaker
Channel and is entered from the Five-Fathom Hole. It is narrow and
intricate, and without buoys it would be impassable, even with the help
-"^ pilots, who are guided mostly by the eye. No marks are available,

nd it is impossible to give directions.

Buoyage. — The following is now the buoyage of the Narrows or

lip Ohannel, which, as regards shap^and color, is in general accord
:;h the uniform system adopted in Great Britain.
Che buoys on the starboard hand entering from the seaward are

aieal buoys, painted black, and those on the port hand are can buoys,

inted black and white.

l«-». »

^/^ 14 THE BERMUDA ISLANDS.

The following are the starboard hand buoys :

1^. buoy is conical J black, with the words 24 feet painted on it;
moored on the northern side of the eastern entrance to the Narrows,
close southwestward of a 24-foot paAeh^ with the center of Fort Cun-
ningham bearing S. 60^ W. (S. 68o W. mag.), distant 1,220 yards; and
St. David Head S. 5o E. (S. 3° W. mag.).
^ No. 1 buoy is coniealj black; moored close southward of a 25-foot

\^::- patch, with the center of Fort Cunningham bearing 8. 47^ W. (S. 56^

'( W. mag.), distant 1,140 yards; and St. David Head 8. 11° E. (S. 3o E.

? mag.).

No. 2 buoy is oonicalj black; moored southward of a 27-foot patch,
with the center of Fort Cunningham bearing 8. 30^ W. (8. 38° W. mag.))
distant 1,180 yards; and eastern end of Fort Catherine N. 66^ W. (N.
580W. mag.).

No. 3 buoy is conical^ black; moored at the southern extreme of Sea
Venture Shoals, with the eastern end of Fort Catherine bearing N. 68^
W. (N. 60O W. mag.), distant 1,860 yards; and center of Fort Cunning-
ham 8. lOo W. (S. 180 W. mag.).

No. 4 buoy is conieaL black; moored at the southwestern extreme of
Sea Venture Shoals, with the eastern end of Fort Catherine bearing N.
730 W. (N. 650 W- mag.), distant 1,600 yards; and center of Fort CuH-
ningham South (8. 8° W. mag.).

No. 5 buoy is conical, black; moored southward of a23-fbot patch,
with the eastern end of Fort Catherine bearing 8. 19© W. (8. 27^ W.
mag.), distant 720 yards; and center of Fort Cunningham 8. 25^ E. (8.
170 E. mag.).

No. 6 buoy is oonical, blo^k; moored southward of a 6-foot patch,
with Tobacco Eock bearing 8. 31© W. (8. 39^ W. mag.), distant 860
yards; and center of Fort Cunningham 8. 25^ E. (8. 17^ E. mag.).

No. 7 buoy is conical, black; moored southwestward of a 17-foot
patch, with Tobacco Rock bearing S. 16^ W. (S. 24° W. mag.), distant
900 yards; and center of Fort Cunningham S. 28^ E. (S. 20^ E. mag.).
9 Inner Narrows buoy is a large conical buoy, black, with the words

Inner Nabbows painted on it, and surmounted by a pole. It is moored
on the northern side of the western end of the Narrows, with Tobacco
i- Rock bearing south (S. 8^ W. mag.), distant 980 yards; and center of

Fort Cunningham S. 31o E. (8. 23© E. mag.).
The following are port hand buoys:
, No. 1 buoy is can, checkered black and white, surmounted by a pole.

It is moored near the northeastern extreme of the shoals eastward of
Fort Cunningham, with the center of that fort bearing S. 76° W. (8.
840 W. mag.), distant 1,400 yards; and St. David Head S. 10^ W. (8.
I80 W. mag.).
Fairway buoy is ccuiy checkered black and white, with the word Faib-
^ WAY painted on it. It is mooned on the southern side of the eastern

'• entrance to the Narrows, close eastward of a 2 4 -foot patch, with the

BUOYAGE 8T, GEORGE CHANNEL. 15

center of Fort Caniiingbam bearing S. 61° W. (S. 69^ W. mag.)> distant
1,150 yards; and St. David Head 8. 7o B. (S. 1^ W. mag.).

No. 2 buoy is can, checkered black and wbite, surmoanted by a pole.
It is moored close northeastward of a 19-foot patch, with the center of
Port Cunningham bearing 8, 40° W. (8. 48o W. mag.), distant 1,080
yards; and St. David Head S. 16© E. (8. 8o E. mag.).

No. 3 buoy is can, checkered black and white. It is moored close
northward of a depth of 16 feet on the northern side of Southern Nar-
rows patch, with the .center of Fort Cunningham bearing 8. 12° W. (8.
20^ W. mag.), distant 1,220 yards; and east end of Port Catherine N.
670 W. (N. 590 W. mag.).

No. 4 buoy is can, checkered black and white. It is moored eastward
of a e-foot patch, with Tobacco Eock bearing N. 71^ W. (N. 63o W.
mag.), distant 1,660 yards; and center of Fort Cunningham ^. S^ E.,
(8. mag.) .

No. 5 buoy is can, checkered black and white. It is moored on a
12-foot patch, with Tobacco Eock bearing 8. 74^ W. (8. 82° W. mag.),
distant 720 yards; and center of Port Cunningham 8. 26oE. (8. 17° E.
mag.).

No. 6 buoy is can, checkered black and white. It is moored on the
eastern side of a shallow patch, with Tobacco Bock bearing 8. 29° W.
(8. 370 W. mag.), distant 660 yards; and center of Fort Cunningham 8.
290 E. (8. 210 E. mag.).

No. 7 buoy is carij checkered black and white. It is moored on the
southern side of the western end of the Narrows, with Tobacco Bock
bearing 8. 2^ E. (8. 60 W. mag.), distant 880 yards; and center of
Fort Cunningham 8. 31° E. (8. 23^ E. mag.).

The buoys hitherto marking the Narrows or Ship Channel have been
withdrawn.

St. Gtoorge Channel, south of the seaward extreme of the Narrows,
is the channel over the bar to St. George Harbor. On the northern
part of St. David Island are leading marks for crossing the bar. The
northern one is a tall stake painted white; the southern, a broad stone
pillar, white with a black stripe down the middle and sea face.

Halfway between these marks and Fort Cunningham is the entrance
to the harbor. A small rocky islet. Governors Island, lies nearly in
the center of the channel, and on its southeastern side is a white stake,
one of the marks for the Manhattan Shoal ; and about 150 yards 8. 50<^
W. (8.58^ W. mag.) of it is the inner stake. The shoalis close to the
•yitrance of the harbor and a black pole is moored on it in 14 feet of
p^ater, ro^ky bottom.

The bar channel is marked bv white buovs on the western side and

ack buoys on the eastern. From the Five-Fathom Hole, with the

liar and stake on St. David Island, in line bearing S. 17° W. (S. 26°

. mag.), the least depth carried is 18 feet. After passing the first

ir buoys a white pole will be seen on the Elbow, which leave to the

16 THE BERMUDA ISLANDS.

westward. When the marks for Manhattan Shoal are on, keep them
on until nearly np to the black pole, leaving it on the port hand or
to the southward and then steer in with Whale House, a low white
building on the north side of Smith Island, well open to Paget Island,
passing in midehannel, northward of Governors Island; thence the
best channel is rather nearer the north shore, avoiding the shoals ex-
tending northwestward of Paget Island. From 14 to 16 feet at low
water will be found on the bar connecting Ordnance and Hen Islands,
westward of which there is good and secure anchorage in St. George
Harbor in from 5 to 7 fathoms, stiff clay, perfectly landlocked.

Boiler Channel is southeastward of St. George Channel and along
by the shore of St. David Island, and is used when the weather is mod-
erate and the wind scant through St. George Channel. This channel
is very narrow and only available for vessels of moderate draft and
in charge of pilot. The leading mark through is Whale House, show-
ing over the SE. part of Paget Island, bearing S. 82^ W. (we«t mag.)
atid the least water (avoiding i)atches) is 15 feet.

Castle Harbor, the next opening, is about 2 miles south westward of
St. David Head. It leads into Castle Harbor, which is full of shallows
and never used for commercial purposes.

Hog Fish Cut is at the SW. end of the Principal Island, about 2
miles westward of the Gibbs Hill lighthouse, through which small
island vessels thread their way by the eye into Blies Harbor. This
snug little basin is formed between the ends of the Principal and Som-
erset Islands. On the NW. part of the former there is a small conical
hill about 150 feet high, called Wreck Hill, which is very conspicuous
and a usefril object in approaching from the north or south.

On the west side of the reef are three more openings, through
which small traders And their way into Grassy Bay and Hamilton Har-
bor, passing close along the NW. side of Ireland Island, but no direc-
tions can be given for them.

Tides. — It is high water full and change about 7h. 14m., both at St.
George and the Principal Islands. The rise at springs is about 4 feet,
but is uncertain. At neaps the rise is sometimes not more than one fi)ot.
Northerly winds cause the highest and southwesterly the lowest tides.
The force of the stream is also variable and probably afiPected by the
current prevailing outside.

The flood from the eastward round St. David Head sets into St. George
harbor and through the Narrows nearly in the direction of the channel
to off St. Catherine Point, where it sweeps around to about WSW. and
sets from \ knot to 2 knots an hour, according to the force of the wind.
The ebb runs with the same force from the SW. toward St. Catherine
Point, where it diverges to BSE., trending more southerly eastward.
Oflf St. George it is strengthened by the stream through the ferry and
harbor to seaward. About the Sea Venture Shoals, on the north side
of the Narrows, it sets in all directions and stronger about the buoys

ANCHORAGES — ST. GEOJtGE. 17

near these shoals, which is the narrowest part of the channel. The
floods in the offing set to the ^E. and the ebbs to the SW., but, as has
already been seen, nearer the shore they set in various directions.

Anchorages. — Murray Anchorage, lying inside the reef and entered
throngh the Narrows or Shij) Channel, is safe for well-found vessels,
there being from 6 to 10 fathoms of water and good holding ground.
With a NW. gale there is a heavy sea, which cuts off communication
from shore.

The boat landing at old naval tank is very poor, the sandy beach
]U8t beyond, sheltered by the rocks, being better.

At Murray Anchorage foreign vessels of war anchor till i>ermission is
received from the governor to go nearer the dockyard.

Grassy Bay, the man-of-war anchorage, is not much better than Murray
Anchorage, unless a vessel can go to a naval buoy, its advantage being
its proximity to thedrydock. A breeze from any direction raises a dis-
agreeable sea. There are four sets of moorilig buoys in the bay.

Five-Fathom Hole Anohoragei sometimes called Jervis Boadstead,
is open to all winds from WXW. round by north to SSW., with no pro-
tection from the sea except what the reefs afford, and that only from
the former bearing to NNE. It may therefore be (*onsidere4 nothing
more than a stopping place for a pilot. In favorable weather, witli the
wind from NW., a vessel may anchor in from 7 to 9 fathoms of water,
with St. Catherine Point bearing N. 70° W. (N. 62^ W. mag.), but
care should be taken to select a clear sandy spot; for the darker ones,
which may be generally detected from aloft, especially on a bright sunny
day, are rocky coral heads, and by anchoring on them the loss of the
anchor is lisked. Be prepared to leave the anchorage the moment the
winds begin to veer.

Leading Mark. — Cherrystone Hill, seen through the Town Cut, bear-
ing S. 850 W. (N. 87° W. mag.) leads in from seaward clear of all dan-
gers to Five-Fathom Hole Anchorage, whence vessels may enter the
Narrows of St. George Harbor.

St Oeorge is the northeastern island of the group. On the south
side of the northern part the land forms an elbow, and here there is a
considerable town, formerly the seat of government, and in front of it
a secure harbor, protected by St. David and other islands, for vessels of
16 or 18 feet draft, which can cross the bar at high water.

There is a marine railway at St. George, where vessels of 1,200 tons
~an be taken up, and repairs of all kinds, except to machinery, can be
well and quickly made.

On the blnff of St. Catherine Point, the NE. extreme of St. George

id of the whole group, Fort Catherine stands conspicuous from its

olated appearance, a narrow strip connecting it to the higher land at

e back, which is steep and moderately wooded on its north(»rn side.

>rt Victoria, crowning the summit about 150 feet above the sea, is dis-
18402 2

18 THE BERMUDA ISLANDS.

tinguished by its flagstaff and yard, and here every vessel approach-
ing the island is signaled. To the SW. of the latter is Fort George,
164 feet above the sea.

St. David Island. — Its shores are very irregular and its east end ter-
minates in a bold rocky promontory, between 70 and 80 feet high, thickly
covered with cedar, called St. David Head, which forms the eastern ex-
tremity of the group.

Light. — A lighthouse stands on Mount Hill about J mile SW. of St.
David Head, from which at an elevation of 208 feet above the sea a fixed
light is exhibited which should be visible 20 miles. The light is visible
between S. 46° E. (S. 38° E. mag.) and K 44© E. (N. 52o E. mag.) over
an arc of 270o. Bearing S. 42° E. (S. 34^ E. mag.) it is obscured by
the land about Fort Victoria. The light tower has been seen fipom the
masthead 25 miles distant; it shows up w^ and is the first object seen
when making the land from the northeastward.

Higgs Island is close SE. of the new fort on St. George Island and
divides the passage between that island and Paget Island into two boat-
passages, the northern of which is called Town Out.

Paget Island is about i mile in length, and at its SE. end is Fort
Cunningham.

The Principal Island of the group is connected with St. George by
a causeway and with Somerset by a bridge. Its shores, however, are
very irregular, and so is its surface. The highest part, called Gibbs
Hill, near the SW. end of the island, is 230 feet high.

Hamilton stands near the center of the island, on the north side of
Hamilton or Crow Lane Harbor, and is the seat of government. The
harbor is convenient, well sheltered, and capable of receiving vessels of
16 or 18 feet draft alongside the wharf in front of the town.

Large numbers of visitors, attracted by the mild climate, come hete
from the United States to spend the winter.

Light. — A white circular iron lighthouse stands on the round, barren,
rocky summit of Gibbs Hill, which exhibits at 362 feet above the sea
line a light revolving once every minute; the light should be visible in
clear weather 24 miles. It is obscured by the land between the bear-
ings S. 42-^ W. (S. 50O W. mag.) and S. 46o W. (S. 54o W. mag.) also
between S. 47^ W. (S. 55© W. mag.) and S. 56o W. (S. 04^ W. mag.)

Somerset Island is generally not so elevated as the others.

Ireland, the northern island, is entirely occupied by the Government
establishments.

Dock. — The iron floating dock is 381 feet long over all, 330 feet insi)
the breadth of entrance is 83| feet. To take a ship drawing 25 feet i
dock requires to be in at least 50 feet of water. All kind$ of repairs c
be made.

Time Signal — A time ball is dropped from a flagstaff at the do
yard, Ii-eland Island, at noon local mean time (Saturdays only), cor
spending to 4h. 19m. 18.3s. mean time at Greenwich.

ARGUS BANK GENERAL DIRECTIONS. 19

Bank of sotindingB outside encircling reef. — The somidings out-
side the reefs ^adually deepen from 7 to 8 fathoms to 30 and 36 fathoms,
and then suddenly to no bottom at 100 fathoms. Thus on the east
side the 100-fathom line is found at 3 miles distant from the reef,
on the south side 1^ miles, on the SW. extremity about 5 miles, and on
the north and west sides 2 to 3 miles.

Argus Bank is 6 miles in extent, east and west (between the 100-
£ithom lines of soundings), and 5^ miles north and south. The least
water obtained, 10 fathoms, is on a spot covering a small area, bottom
reddish brown coral, situated S. 42o W. (S. 50^ W. mag.), 26 miles from
Gibbs Hill lighthouse. Several easts of 20 fathoms have been obtained,
but the general depth is 30 fathoms, the bottom chiefly composed of
coral with occasional rock and sand patches. It is probable that in bad
weather the sea would break on the 10-fathom patch.

Argus Bank abounds in fish; snappers and large rockfish are plen-
tifhl.

The surface cilrrents during the sounding operations of the Argus were
found to be weak and irregular. On Argus Bank on one occasion the
current set to the SE. at the rate of | mile an hour.

General Directions. — In steering for Bermuda at night or in thick
weather it is advisable not to go to the northward of the parallel of
32^ 5'. In coming from the SE.,St. David light will likely be the first
seen, and should not be brought to the southward of S. 70^ W. (S. 78°
W. mag.), or during the night approached nearer than 6 or 7 miles.
Coming from the westward, Gibbs Hill light will be the first one seen,
and it should be kept at the distance of 10 or 12 miles until it bears
northward of K 48^ E. (S. 56o E. mag.). A vessel from the northward
sighting the light should haul off immediately, as the reefs extend off
in that direction 16 miles.

The Bermuda Islands are about 240 miles to the southward and 400
to the eastward of the outer limits of the Gulf Stream. Hence the
current in the neighborhood is exceedingly variable, both in force and
direction. Generally, however, it appears to be greatly influenced by
the wind, particularly if it has blown from the same point for several
days, when its velocity may be found to be one knot an hour, or more, in
the opposite direction. The utmost attention to the reckoning is there-
fore requisite, and should the vessel's position be at all doubtful, and
the weather unfavorable for seeing the light, the parallel should not be
xossed in the night time, for the edge of the bank is too close to the
eef for soundings to give safe warning.

The islands appear to lie near the northern limit of the variable
dnds, and also on the track of hurricanes and revolving storms passing

f and along the shore of America, which is distant about 600 miles.

he revolving winds which pass over the islands vary in strength from

*6ezes to storms. In the summer season the wfnds are light and

mally steady for a considerable time, blowing in straight lines or on

20 THE BERMUDA ISLANDS.

one point, with but little fluctuation in the barometer. But after the
commencement of November veering winds, of various degrees of force,
set in and gradually become frequent, yet they seldom follow in such
rapid succession as that one gale becomes confounded with another.
Light winds and very fine weather usually intervene between the pass-
ing of revolving mnds, while, at other times, hard-blowing straight-line
winds with a high barometer are experienced.

The arrival of such succeeding progressive rotary winds is indicated
by the barometer falling, as well as by the increase of the wind's force,
which will often occur suddenly. Except in the case of great storms
perfect regularity in the fall and rise of the barometer, and in th^
changes of the wind, will not be found; for the direction of the wind,
as well as the atmospheric pressure, is no. doubt modified by other
revolving gales or strong winds blowing at the same time, but when
whirlwind, tempest, or hurricanes blow they overpower such irregu-
larities.

In the winter season northerly winds sometimes blow hard without
veering for two and three days together. The air is then dry and
cold, and while the thermometer falls the barometer remains stationary,
or rises a little. Misty weather is very uncommon, but it constantly
happens that a change of weather is first announced by increase of both
temperature and moisture in the air. The December gales generally
commence from the south, veer round by the west, and terminate at
about I^W. or NNW.

During the winter months most of the gales which pass along the
coast of l^orth America are revolving gales. Vessels from Bermuda,
bound to that shore, should therefore put to sea when the NW. wind,
which is the conclusion of a passing gale, is becoming moderate, and
the barometer is rising to its usual level. The probability is, more par-
ticularly in the winter season, that after a short calm the next succeed-
ing wind will be easterly, the first part of a fresh revolving wind com-
ing up from the SW. quarter.

A ship bound to New York or the Chesapeake might sail while the
wind is still west and blqwing hard, provided the barometer indicates
that this west wind is owing to a revolving gale which will veer to the
northward. But as the usual track which gales follow in this hemi-
sphere is northerly or northeasterly, such a ship should be steered to the
southward. As the wind at west veers toward NW. and north, the
vessel would come up, and at last make a westerly course, ready tota'
advantage of the east wind at the setting in of the next revolving gal

A vessel at New York and bound to Bermuda, at the time when
revolving gale is passing along the American coast, should not wait i
port for the westerly wind, but sail as soon as the first portion of tl
gale has passed by and the NE. wiud is veering toward tiie nort
provided it should not blow too hard; for the north wind will veer ,
the westward, ^ud become every hour fairer for the voyage to Bermud*

GENERAL DIBECTIONS. 21

A great number of gales pass along the coast of America, following
nearly similar tracks, and in the winter make the voyage between Ber-
mnda and Halifax very boisterous. These gales, by revolving as ex-
tended whirlwinds, give a northerly wind along the American continent,
and a southerly wind on the whirlwind's opposite side far out in the
Atlantic. In sailing from Halifax to Bermuda, it is desirable for this
reason to keep to the westward, as affording a better chance of having
a wind blowing at north instead of one at south, as well as because the
Gulf Stream sets vessels to the eastward.

When vessels from Barbados or its neighboring West Indian Islands
bbU to Bermuda on a direct course, they sometimes fall to the eastward
of it, and find it very difficult to make when westerly winds prevail.
They should, therefore, take advantage of the trade wind to make the
meridian 68° or 70^ of longitude before they leave the parallel of 25° N.

►J

CHAPTER III.

THE STBAITS OF FLOBIBA AND THE FLOBIBA KEYS.

Gheneral DescriptioiL — The Straits of Florida commeuce in about
latitude 27^ 25' K, between the Little Bahama Bank and the east coast
of Florida. Thence they sweep around to the southward and westward
to the Dry Tortugas, a distance of about 300 miles. They are included
between the Florida coast and its outlying keys and reefs on the west
and north, and the Bahama Banks^ Gay Sal Bank, and the coast of
Ouba on the east and south.

Through this long and comparatiyely narrow passage the current
of the Gulf Stream sets to the eastward and northward with varyinjf
velocity but great regularity in direction. The strength of this cur-
rent on the surface is influenced by the wind and tides, and ^i^ries in
different parts of the straits. Eleven and a half miles east of Fowey
Bocks the strongest surface current was found to be 5^ knots, and the
weakest If knots, the average current being 3-^ knots, and the set
nearly north.

The general direction of the current follows the trend of the Florida
coast. On its eastern and southern edges it sets close home upon the
Bahama Banks, Cay Sal Bank, and the coast of Cuba in the vicinity
oi Havana. On its western edge it sets home on the Florida shore
from Alligator Reef to Jupiter Inlet. To the westward of Sombrero
Key a counter current or eddy, setting to the westward, will some-
times be found one to 2 miles outside of the line of reefs.

The great velocity of the Gulf Stream and the strength with which
it at times sets upon the reefs and banks render the navigation of
these straits, by sailing vessels bound to the southward and westward^
both tedious and dangerous, and the difficulties are enhanced by the
want of convenient anchorages and by the abrupt rise of the banks
and reefs from very deep water, which prevents the lead fi'om giving
warning of the proximity of danger until it may be too near to be
avoided. This combination of unfavorable conditions induces sailing
vessels bound to the southward and westward to avoid the straits a^
&r a« possible by entering through the Providence Channels, and if o:
sufficiently light draft crossing the Great Bahama Banks. Bound tr
the northward, the strong current is so greatly in their favor as t
more than counterbalance the difficulties of navigation. The naviga-
tion of the straits has been greatly facilitated by the establishment o
lights and numerous beacons along the Florida Beefs. By the aid o

WINDS— OHIO SHOAL. 23

these, steamers, or sailiug vessels if they have a leading wind, may
skirt the reefs in safety, sufficiently close to partly avoid the adverse
current, and often finding a favorable eddy after passing Alligator
Beef. Vessels drawing less than 10 feet, when down to Cape Florida,
may pass inside the reefs and follow the Hawk Channel to Key West,
thus avoiding the adverse current of the Gulf Stream in a most dan-
gerous part of the straits, and finding comparatively smooth water
with all winds.

Winds. — The Straits of Florida lie within the region of the NE.
trades, but these winds do not blow over the straits with the same
regularity as over the open ocean. The prevailing winds are from
the eastward, however, during the entire year — from the southward of
east in summer, and from the northward of east in winter. During
the hurricane months ^Hhe straits are liable to be swept by terrific
cyclones.'' As a rule the progressive motion of these storms, in this
latitude, is to the westward and northward. They are most liable to
occur during the months of July, August, September, and October. In
the winter heavy Northers are frequent. They blow generally from
"SW, to north, hauling as a rule to the northward and eastward, and
rarely backing. Their approach is nearly always heralded by a heavy
bank of clouds in the NW., preceded by light airs from the contrary
direction, and accompanied by a falling barometer; they commence
with a violent squall, gradually setting down to a fresh gale. Vessels
caught in the narrower parts of the straits in these gales are subject
tea most trying sea. SE. gales occur at intervals also during the
winter. They usually commence to blow at about ENE., freshing rap-
idly with a falling barometer and rising thermometer, and hauling to
the southward and eastward, obtain their greatest force at about SE.

Florida Coast. — Cape Canaveral is low and sandy. A shallow
bank, on which the sea nearly always breaks, extends from it in a
southeasterly direction.

There is good anchorage, sheltered from northerly and westerly
winds, with the lighthouse bearing about N. 34^ E. (N. 32o E, mag.)«

The Anchorage is marked by an iron can buoy with black and
white perpendicular stripes. A vessel seeking anchorage should bring
this buoy and the lighthouse in range, bearing N. 34^ E. (N. 32^ E.
mag.), and anchor when within J mile of the buoy.

Ohio Shoal lies N. 31° E. (N. 29© E. mag.) of the lighthouse.
Bull Shoal bears N. 48o E. (N. 46° E. mag.) of the same point.
These two shoals are quite small. North of the Ohio Shoal there is
also a small shoal patch. In rough weather the sea breaks on these
■shoals, but at other times they can not be seen, and as they are steep .
x), and quite dangerous to approach ; by keeping east of the whistling
juoy off Hetzel Shoal all danger will be avoided.

Shoal. — The steamer Saratoga drawing IS feet 4 inches, touched on
', shoal with Cape Canaveral lighthouse bearing S. 30^ W. (S. 28^ W.

24 STRAITS OF FLORIDA.

mag.) and buoy on Hetzel Shoal bearing S. 15^ E. (8. 17^ E. mag.)-
Soundings of 10 fathoms were obtained previously, and 5, 8, and 10
fathoms after striking. Sounding^ to the north and west of Hetzel
Shoal vary from those shown on the chart, and between Hetzel Shoal
and the latitude of Mosq^aito Inlet lighthouse on a course N. 4° W. (N".
6o W. mag.) from Hetzel Shoal buoys the soundings are not correct as
shown on the chart.

The Coast in the neighborhood of Cape Canaveral is like the cape
itself, low, barren, and sandy. All along the shore as far south as
•Jupiter Inlet a narrow lagoon extends, separated by a strip of sand
beach from the sea and having inshore of it extensive cypress swamps.

Life-saving stations have been established by the United States Grov-
•emment at intervals along the shore.

Prom Indian River to Jupiter Inlet the coast line has the same gen-
•eral direction, and continues low and sandy. Off this part of the coast
there are several small shoal lumps, which will be avoided by keeping
10 miles off* shore north of St. Lucie Inlet.

From Jupiter Inlet the coast takf s a southerly direction to Virginia
Key, where the sandy shore ends and the Florida Beefs commence. The
coast is generally formed of sandy hillocks covered scantily with brush-
wood, black rocks being interspersed here and there. The shore is gen-
erally clear of danger.

LIGHTS.

Cape Canaveral — ^On the !N^E. pitch of the cape, from a conical
tower, a light, flashing white every minute, is shown at an elevation of
139 feet, and should be visible 17J miles.

Jupiter Inlet. — On the north side of the inlet, from a brick tower, a
fixed white light, varied by a white flash every 90 seconds, is shown at
an elevation of 146 feet, and should be visible ISJ miles.

Powey Rocks. — On the rocks, from a dark brown pyramidal frame-
work on a pile foundation, a fixed white light is shown at an elevation
of 111 feet, and should be visible 16J miles.

Carysfort Reef. — On the reef, near the edge of the Gulf Stream, from
a dark brown pyramidal framework on pile foundation, a light, flashing
white and red, interval between flashes 5 seconds every third flash, is
shown at hn elevation of 143 feet, and should be visible 18 miles.

Alligator Reef. — On the NE. point of the reef, from a white pyramidal
framework on black pile foundation, a light, flashing white and red with
two flashing red sectors, intervals between flashes 5 seconds, is shown
at an elevation of 143 feet, and should be visible 18 miles. The light
will show flashing red between the bearings S. 42^ W. (S. 39^ W. mag.),
and 8. 60^ W. (S. 57^ W. mag.) over an arc of 18^, covering beacon ^E'
on Conche Eeef and black buoy No. 9; also between the bearings N". 67^
E. (N. 64^ E. mag) and Hf. 50^ E. (X. 47^ E. mag.), over an arc of 17^,
covering beacon 7 on Tennessee Reef and red buoy No. 12. In all other

LIGHTS — FLORIDA KEYS. 25

directions the light will show flashing red and white, every third flash
red.

Sombrero Key. — On Sombrero Shoal, from a brown pyramidal frame-
work on pile foundation, a light/ fixed white is shown at an elevation
of 144 feet, and should be visible 18 miles.

American ShoaL — On the shoal, from a dark brown pyramidal
framework on pile foundation, a light, flashing white every 5 seconds,
is shown at an elevation of 110 feet, and should be visible 16| miles.

Sand Key. — On the center of key, from a brown pyramidal frame*
work on pile foundation, a light is shown at an elevation of 110 feet,
and should be visible 16^ miles. The light is a flashing white and
red light with 2 flashing red sectors^ interval between flashes 5 sec-
onds. It will show red between the bearings 8. 50*^ 30' W. (8. 47^ 30'
W. mag.), and 8. 84^ 30' W. (8. 81© 30' W. mag.), over an arc of about
340. and between the bearings N. 87° E; (S. 84^ E. mag.), and K 73<5 E.
(N. TO^E. mag.), over an are of about 14^, covering Western Dry Rocks.
In all other directions the light will show white.

Blay VITest. — At the southern edge of the town, from a white tower
a light, fixed white, is shown at an elevation of 72 feet, and should be
visible 14 miles.

NortliweBt Passage. — On flats to mark channel of bar leading to
Northwest Channel from a white screw-pile structure, a light is shown
at an elevation of 50 feet, and should be visible 12} miles. The light is
fixed white with a fixed red ray between 8 14^ W. (S 11° W. mag.) and
S. I80 W. (S 150 W. mag.)

Rebecoa ShoaL — On the shoal, from a square dwelling surmounted*
by a lantern on pUe foundation, a light is shown at an elevation of 67
feet, and should be visible 13f miles. The light flashes alteniately red
and white; interval between flashes, 5 seex>nds.

Dry Tortngaa. — On Loggerhead Key, from a conical tower a light,
fixed white, is shown at an elevation of 152 feet, and should be visible
18} miles.

Tortngaa Harbor. — On SE. bastion of Port Jefferson, Garden Key,
from a black skeleton tower, a light, fixed white, is shown at an elevation
of 65 feet, and should be visible 13 J* miles.

Florida Keys. — From Virginia Key a chain of small islets, covered

with mangrove trees and called the Florida Keys, extend to the West

and SW. for nearly 200 miles, ending at the Dry Tortugas. They are

"Mrted on the side next to the straits, throughout their whole extent,

a chain of dangerous reefs and shoals lying at an average distance

^bout 6 miles from the line of keys.

^he reefs are the more dangerous from tlie fact that they seldom
w above water, and in smooth weather are not marked by breakers,
the outer edge of and between the reefs the water will be found to
al very abruptly.

STRAITS OF FLORIDA.

In approaching the reefs yon will generally be warned of their prox-
imity by a difference in the color of the water, which wDl change from
deep blue to light green. Too mnch dependence, however, must not be
placed upon tliis warning. In clear weather you may run in safely by
the lights and beacons. In thick weather you must depend almost
entirely upon the lead. Soundings in 100 fathoms will assure you of
being within about 5 miles of the reefs, and strangers should be cautious
about approaching nearer in thick weather. Fogs, however, are not
frequent in this locality.

Vessels standing to the southward along the Florida coast and in-
tending to pass outside the reefs, should haul off into 10 fathoms of
water on arriving off Virginia Key by day, or shortly after making
Fowey Eocks light at night. They will thus avoid a chain of shoal
spots with from 12 to 16 feet of water lying off Key Biscayne and running
parallel to that shore at a ditjtance of 3 miles. The northernmost
of these spots is marked by a first-class nun buoy, painted red and
miarked "Cape Florida '^ in large white letters. It lies due east from
Virginia Key, distant 2J miles. Vessels bound south through the
straits will leave this buoy on the starboard hand. SmaU vessels
bound into the Hawk Channel will leave it on their port hand.

Reef BeacoiMU — ^To warn vessels of their approach to these danger-
ous reefs, beacons have been planted at intervals along the seaward
edge of the dangers, and so marked as to distinguish them from each
other. These beacons are of iron, each of the series marking the line
of the reef being surmounted by a lattice- work cylinder, the top of
Fhich is 36 feet above high water. They are distinguished by vanes
marked by a letter or number large enough to be distinctly seen frooL a
safe distance, as they may be approached from seaward within a few
hundred yards.

In passing along the edge of the reefs it must be remembered that
the current frequently sweeps very strongly on to the reefs; the navi-
gator should, therefore, constantly verify his position by bearings of
the beacons and lighthouses.

Key West is the most important of the Florida Keys on account of
its excellent harbor and the city situated upon its western end.

The island is low, sandy, and in many places barren, yet a consider-
able portion of its surface is covered with trees and bushes. In ap-
proaching the city the most conspicuous objects are two white towers
on the south beach of the island, and Fort Taylor, a large brick fortifi-
cation near the city.

Key West Harbor is commodious and accessible to vessels dra
ing 30 feet The outer harbor is open to the southward, and affords
rough but safe anchorage with winds from that quarter. The inner
Man-of-War Harbor, into which 4 fathonfs may be carried, furnisher
smooth, safe anchorage in all kinds of weather. Vessels drawing k
than 10 feet of water may always enter this harbor with ease and safei

KEY WEST HARBOR ^DANGERS. 27

as there is nothing in the way of that draft that is not so plainly
marked as to be readily avoided. Sailing vessels with a greater draft
than 10 feet, unless with a good leading breeze, should always take a
pilot. Steamers and saiUug vessels with leading breezes, may enter
without difficulty by attention to the directions and the chart.

A United States naval storehouse and coal depot are located here.

Dock. — There is an " End Dock'' at Key West, belonging to the
United States Government, but vessels whose bottoms need repairing
amidship must be docked elsewhere.

CommnnicatioiUL — There is telegraphic communication between
Key West and the mainland, and with Havana. Steamers running
between New York and Galveston, between Tampa and Havana, and
between New Orleans and Havana stop at Key West en route.

"V^aather Signal Station. — There is a United States Weather Sig-
nal Station at Key West, where cautionary and storm signals give
timely warning of approaching bad weather.

Pilots are constantly cruising outside, and strangers should always
employ one. A pilot can also be obtained by making a signal off the
bar.

All vessels entering or leaving, which do not require a pilot, must
pay half pilotage if si>okeu. The pilot who brings a vessel in is entitled
to take her out.

RateB« — Vessels drawing 6 to 10 feet, 93 per foot; drawing 10 to 14
feet, $4; drawing 14 to 20 feet, $5; drawing over 20 feet, $6.

Quarantine. — The boarding station is at a buoy with a yellow flag
on it, off the marine hospital. Vessels must not pass this buoy until
fbey have obtained pratique. If at night, sailing vessels should anchor
outside the buoy; in the day they may heave to. The quarantine
anchorage is in Man-of-War Harbor, above Fleming Key.

Ho8pital.-^There is a United States Marine hospital which is open
to foreign as well as American seamen, but the former must pay $1 per
day.

Supplies of all kinds, coal, ice« fresh provisions, water, etc., can be
obtained in Key West at all times and in any desired quantities.

Sntrance Channels. — The principal passages into the harbor of Key
West are Southeast Channel, the Main Ship Channel, Southwest Chan-
nel, and Northwest Channel.

Dangers. — ^The most important dangers lying off the entrance are

Speculator Shoal, Eastern Sambo, Middle Sambo, Western Sambo,

'astern Dry Bocks, Eo(jk Key, Sand Key, Western Dry Rocks, and

iddle Ground. Besides these principal dangers there are numerous

her shoal spots and patches with from 10 to 18 feet of water over

em, which have no names, and of which it would be useless to attempt

letailed description. All are well shown on the charts, and many of

sm are marked by buoys.

"he south shore of tlie island of Key West should not be approached

28 STRAITS OF FLOBIDA.

nearer than f mite, as the shoals make oat nearly to tliat disti
TritliiD the 3-fathom line there are many spots with ouly frc
feet of water.

WUtehead Spit.— This spit makes off fh>iii the SW. poin
West IslaDd. Its extremity is marked by Bed Bnoy ITo. 6, wh
30 feet of water, and must be left on the starboard hand b
entering the liarbor.

l*ifl^1ft Q-romid Shool lies to the westward of the islan(
West, distant aboat } mile. Its sontheastem end forms the
boundary of the harbor and is marked by two buoys — Soat
Ground Buoy, black, No. 11, lyiug in 18 feet of wat«r on the 6
of the shoal, and Inner Middle Ground Buoy (black, fTo. 13), 1;
feet of water on the NW. side of the harbor, Both these bn
be left to port by vessels entering and anchoring in the harbo

Frankford Bank is an extensive shoal lying totheuorthwi
outer harbor and to the westward of the inner harbor and Ma
Harbor. Its south point is marked by a Black Buoy, So. 15, v
in 20 feet of water. It marks the northern limit of the ontei
and must be left to port by vessels entering the inner harbor.

Sonthsast ChanneL — The lei^t depth of water in this c1
4J fathoms, but it is narrow at some i>oints, having shoal si>o1
with from 14 to 18 feet over them. Sailing vessels should no1
to enter by it unless they have a good lending wind.

Directions. — Keep in 15 fathoms, and do not bring Sand I
house Ut bear to the southward of S. 88^ W. (S. 85o W. m;
Key West lightboase ha« l>eeii brought to bear N, 39^ W. (N
mag.). Eun for it, being careful to keep exactly on the bt
39° W. {N. 420 vf. mag.). Ton should pass on your starboa
about 100 yards distant, Western Sambo Buoy (red. No. 2), th
same hand and same distance Middle 15-foot Head Buo^ (rei
and continuing on the same bearing you should make Hawk
Turn Buoy (black and white iwrpendicular stripes). When
pass it on either hand and change your course to N. 77"^ W. (1
mag.). A run of 2 miles on this com'Se will lead up to ^Tiitel
* Buoy (red, No. 0).
• Note, — VcNsels drawing over 14 feet of water should not a
run this <!Uiuini'l in the night on account of the numerous IJ
18 foot heads on both sides of the ehaJinel, which is nan-ow.

To Enter the Harbor from Whitehead Spit Bnoy. — St
B, (north mag.), until South Middle Gmund Buoy (black, No.
N. 87° W. (west mag.), distunt about 350 yanls, and then ch(
coarse to N. 26'^ E. (N, 23° E, mag.). This course, if made |
take you along about the middle of the channel and diret^tly
city front, or, if conrinned, lead inh) Man-of-War Harbor,
pass on your port hand, distant abont 150 yai-ds, Black Buo
isarking the southern end of Frankford Bank, and then, on si

MAIN SHIP CHANNEL — SOUTHWEST CHANNEL. 29

and at about the same distance, Black Buoy No. 17, marking tlie eastern
edge of Frankford Bank and the western side of the harbor.

From Whitehead Spit Buoy (red, No. 6) you may steer N. 3® E. (north
mag.) for about 1^ miles, and anchor when nearly up to Black Buoys
Nos. 13 and 15, in the outer harbor, in 4 or 5 fathoms.

Main Ship ChanneL — The least depth of water in this channel is 30
feet. Ai)ortion of it is quite narrow, but the dangers are all well marked j
and steamers or sailing vessels with a leading wind should find no
trouble in entering by it in daytime, but those of over 15 feet draft
should not attempt to enter at night.

The entrance to this channel is about 5 miles from Key West lights
house, and is about | mile in width between a 17-foot 8i>ot to the east-
ward and a 13-foot spot to the westward. Neither of these spots is
marked, but about midway between them is the entrance buoy (black
and white perpendicular stripes), which should be passed close aboard
on either hand.

INrectiozis — ZSntering by Day. — When in not less than 15 fathoms
bring Key West lighthouse to bear north (N. 3^ W, mag.), and steer for
it till Sand Key lighthouse bears 8. 82^ W. (S. 79^ W. mag.), when you
should be up with the entrance buoy. Pass on either side of this buoy,
close aboard, and change course to N. 5^ W. (X. 8° W. mag.). On this
course stand in, passing about 200 yards to the eastward of Western
Head Buoy (black, No. 1), 100 yards to the westward of Mississippi
Shoal Buoy (red, Ko. 2), and about midway between the East and West
Triangle Buoys (Nos. 3 and 4). Continue your course ]S^. 6o W. (BT*
8° W. mag.), beyond the latter buoy for § mile, when Sand Key light-
house will bear 8. 47° W. (S. 44° W. mag.), then change course to N.
31^ W. (N. 340 W. mag.), and stand on, passing to the southward and
westward of Whitehead Spit Buoy (red, No. 6).

By Hight.-^ Vessels of more than 15 feet draft should not attempt tO
enter this channel at night, but those of less may enter by the follow-
ing directions: Bring Key West light to bear north (N. 3^ W. mag.),
and stand in for it, getting from 4f to 6j^ fathoms, with possibly a cast
or two of 17 feet. When Sand Key light bears S. 47° W. (8. 44© W.
mag.), you should open Northwest Channel light, bearing N. 42^ W.
(N. 450 W.mag.), and you will head for it on that course, getting 5 to
6 fathoms. Stand on N. 42o W. (N. 45° W. mag.) till Sand Key light
bears S. 31^ W. (8. 28° W. mag.), when bring that light over your
«tem and stand up the harbor N. 31^ E. (N. 28° E. mag.). Anchor in

fathoms when Key West light, which will be shut in by Fart Tay-

r as you i>a8S, is again oi>ened. Or you may continue on the same

urse and run xii) to the city wharves.

A. good lookout should be kept so as not to foul the buoys in the

lin Ship Channel.

Sonth'vreBt Channel — This channel is very convenient for vessels

proaching from the southward and westward. Five fathoms may be

(K*^,*,'

30 8TBAIT8 OF FLORIDA. ^

carried in by close attention to the sailing directions, bnt
recommended to strangers dramng more than 17 feet, anless
ers, or in sailing vessels with a good leading breeze for m
the courses. For 17 feet it gives a straight coarse right
entrance of the harbor. All the dangers but one, a 17-foo1
veil marked.

^, Directions.— Get Sand Key lighthouse to bear N. 79° E. i

i mag.) and nin for it until Key West lighthouse bears N. 55° ]

^ E. mag.). Bun for it on that bearing until abreast of Inner 16-

)r Buoy (red, Xo. 6), where change your course to N. 58° E. (S. 55'^

y Pass to the westward of Whitehead Spit Buoy.

' Vessels not dmwing over 18 feet may enter by this channel

ing Key West lighthouse to bear N. 55^ B. (N. 52^ E. mag.) an
}.; for it, keeping tlie bearing flne until up to Whitehead SpitBu

course passes close to the outer 16J-foot spot, marked by a
the 16-foot spot marked by Buoy No. i.
i' , ZTorthwest Channel. — This chauuel is a slue through

bank. For the greater part of its length it has from 3 to 4 f
■J- water and an average width of about J mile. Eleven feet can 1

L through.

* Directions — ^By Day. — Keep in 5 fathoms until you brii
'i west Passage Ughthouse to bear S. 14° W. (S. 11° W. mag.).
[., It on this bearing. Pass the bell buoy ou either hand cloi
'^- Buoy No. 1 about 300 feet, and Beacon No. 3 and Buoy Nt
^ 100 feet on the port hand. Haul sharp around No. 5 buoy, 1e
S; red pile beacon on the starboard hand, and steer S. 46° E.

* - mag.) for Key West lighthouse. Pass Mid-Channel Buoy

either hand, and when up to Black Buoy No. 7, Sand Key 1
•: bearing S. 9° W. (S. 6° W. mag.), change your course to S. .

f^> 340 E. mag.). Pass" Buoy No. 9 about J mile on your port '.

r^ Inner Mid-Channel Buoy close-to on either hand. When up :

t«r buoy you will have Sand Key lighthouse bearing S. 19° A

W. mag.) and Key West lighthouse S. 59° E. (S. 62° E. mai
' about 200 yards to the southward of " Governor Marvin " Wi

'i and then steer for the town. Black Buoys Nos. 11, 13, 15, ai

^ be passed on either side, as none of them are in less than

^ water.

h' By Wight— Bring Northwest Channel light to bear S. !■

^ 11° W. mag.) and run for it on that hearing, keeping in the nort

I of the red rays till Key West light bears S. 46° E. (S. 49o

f when steer for it on that bearing until Sand Key light b

P* W. (S. 6°W. mag.); now change course to S. 31° E. {S. 34°

^■. and run on it till you have Sand Key light bearing S. It

\fr 160 W. mag.) and Key West light S. 59° E. (S. 62° E. mo

*" change course to S. 53° E. (S. 56° E. mag.). Now, when I

light bears S. 30° W. {S. 27° W. mag.) change your course to

MARQUESAS KEYS — DRY TORTUGAS. 31

(N. 270 B. mag.), keeping the light exactly astern, for the city wharves
or anchorage.

ICarqnesas Keys are the westernmost of the Florida Keys. They
lie in about longitude 82^ 10' W., and are midway between Key West
and the western extremity of the bank. The group consists of a num-
ber of low, irregularly-shaped islands, occupying together a length of
about 4 and a breadth of about 3 miles. There is a wide channel across
the bank between Boca Grande Key and the Marquesas Key.

The shoal bank separating the Straits of Florida from the Oulf of
Mexico extends west from the Marquesas Keys 17 miles. It is called
The Quicksands. The depth of water varies from 5 to 18 feet. Its
extreme west end is known as the Halfmoon Shoal, on which there is
a least depth of only 6 feet. Isaac Shoal and Eebecca Shoal lie to the
westward of Halfinoon-Shoal, the former 4^ and the latter 6^ miles.

Boca Grande Channel. — ^This channel, lying just to the eastward of
Marquesas Keys, has a least depth of 11 feet. It is of very little impor-
tance to vessels going to or leaving Key West, but it forms a short cut
from the Gulf Stream into the Gulf of Mexico.

The dangers of this channel consist of the extensive flats to the
eastward and westward of it.

Directions. — Keep in 5 fathoms until you get Xorth Entrance Buoy
(black and white perpendicular stripes) to bear south (S. 3^ E. mag.),
in range with Mid-Channel Buoy (black and white perpendicular
stripes), when steer for it and leave it on your port hand. Steer a fine
south (S. 30 E. mag.) course, pass Mid-Channel Buoy on either side,
and continue the same course through to South Buoy (black and white
perpendicular stripes).

The Passage between the Quicksands and the Tortugas is obstructed
by Halfmoon, Isaac, Bebecca, and Few Ground Shoals. Halfmoon
Shoal is marked by a red can buoy 5 N"ew Ground Slioal by a red nuh
buoy, and Bebecca Shoal by an iron pile lighthouse. Vessels using this
passage should pass to the west of Bebecca Shoal and keep at least 2
miles from the lighthouse.

Dry Tortngas consists of a small cluster of low, sandy islets, form-
ing the extreme western limit of the Florida Keys. The Tortugas Keys
are nearly level and generally barren of vegetation, except Bush Key,
which is distinguished by a scanty growth of brush. Fort Jett'erson,
an extensive brick fortification, is situated upon Garden Key.

There are numerous excellent anchorages among the keys, and, as
his neighborhood is constantly frequented by fishermen who supply

\e Havana market, pilots may be readily obtained.

If temporary shelter is required it may be found to the southward of

>ggerhead Key in about 10 fathoms of water, with good, holding

ound well protected from northerly and easterly winds.

[fOggerhead Key, the westernmost and the largest of the group, is
dered by low bushes and is marked by Dry Tortugas lighthouse

i€^f^

^': 32 STRAITS OF FLORIDA.

|y. From both the northern and southern ends of the key shallow saDd-

'^V spits extend out having one or two spots nearly or quite bare at low

h water. It is f mile in length, NE. and SW., and has a width of about

fe ■; J mile. It is mostly covered with a growth of scrub brush, shows a

^;> bright, sandy beach all around, and has long sandy points at each end.

^^ Shoals make off from this key for a distance of 2^ miles to -the north-

fe* . ward and about 2 miles to the southward and westward. The SW.

spit is marked by breakers, and about ^ mile inside its point there is a
spot, bare at low water, called Southwest Key. On its east side Log-
«* gerhead is bold-to, and 8 to 10 fathoms will be found within J mile of

the beach, but there are numerous outlying Ahoals. On its west side 4
fathoms may be carried to within i mile of the beach.

Loggerhead Buoy. — A buoy painted red and marked ^^ Loggerhead'^
in large white letters is placed off the SW. end of Loggerhead Key
Reef.

Caution. — Vessels should not pass to the northward or eastward of
this buoy, but may pass close to the southward and westward.

General Remarks on Passing or Approaching Tortogas. — ^In
passing to the southward of the Tortugas the lighthouse on Loggerhead
Key should not be approached nearer than 2^ mUes, and that on Garden
Key no nearer than 3^ miles, on acxM)unt of shoals which make off to
the southward. The south point of the spit making off from Garden
f^ Key is marked by a buoy painted red and marked "Tortugas " in white

letters. It lies in 21 feet of water and should be left on the starboard
hand by vessels passing to the westward or entering the harbor. Large
ships in heavy weather should keep outside the 10-£athom curve.

In approaching the Tortugas in thick weather the soundings should
be cai*efully noted. If coming from the northward, westward, or south-
ward and westward, you will strike 10 fathoms in time to avoid danger;
but if coming in any direction from the eastward (after passing the
bank to the westward of the Florida Reefs), you will not strike 10 fath-
oms until close up to shoals surrounding the group. In coming from
the southward you will strike 100 fathoms at a distance of 16 miles^
and coming from the southward and westward, or westward, at about
20 miles. Coming from the northward and westward you will be inside
the 100-fathom curve when 70 to 100 miles from the group. When at
a distance of 15 miles from Dry Tortugas lighii and to the westward of
the meridian passing through it you will be in 30 to 40 fathoms; but if
to the eastward you will be in from 15 to 20 fathoms.

There is a large bank with from 6 J to 9 fathoms lying about 7 mi
to the westward of Loggerhead Key, and separated from it by a chj
nel 2 miles wide, with 1(> to 11) fathoms. This bank would be dangero
to large ships in heavy weather.

In approaching the Dry Tortugas from any direction the first obj
to be seen will be the lighthouse, which wiU seem to rise from the wat
Next you will raise Fort Jetlersou, on Garden Key, which may be sf

I
i

GENERAL DIRECTIONS. ?3

from 10 to 12 miles. Loggerhead Key, when neen, will show low and
partly covered with bushe8. The other keys, if seen a< all, will not
show very conspicaously.

Florida Straits— General Directions.~-The reefs are ligh ted through-
out so that a vessel can not approav^h nearer than 5 miles at night with-
out sighting a light, and in the daytime the vicinity of danger is indi-
cated in ample time by the change in the color of tlie water.

It must be borne in mind while in the vicinitv of tliese reefs that the
Gulf Stream, influenced by the wind, frequently sets strongly cmto the
reefs, especially in the space l>etween the Alligator and ('arysfort Reef
lighthouses. For this reason vessels when beating up the straits should
not stand close inshore in the nighttime, especially in thick weather.
Under the usual circumstiinces of wind and weather — that is, with a
^KEt. wind and the Gulf Stream nmning 2 or 3 knots — the navigation
of the straits by steamers and sailing vessels is entirely different.
They will therefore be considered separately.

Steamers bound south, running between the northern ports of the
United States and the Gulf of Mexico on their outward passage, gen-
erally steer a course to pass Cape Canaveral at a distance of from 12 to
15 miles; in thick weather or in the night sounding frequently and
taking (?are not to shoal the water to less than 11 fathoms. From abreast
of Canaveral light a course S. 13^ E. (S. 15^ E. mag.) may be steered,
keeping in not le^^s than 12 nor more than 16 fathoms, till Jupiter Inlet
light is seen from the deck, when the ship may be hauled in toward it
till a depth of 5 or 6 fathoms of water is reached, | mile or one mile off-
shore. This distance offshore may be preserved safely in the daytime
from Jupiter Inlet to Hillsboro Inlet, but as the shore curves outward
here, care must be taken in the nighttime not to come too close, and a
depth of 10 fathoms had better be kept, which will carry the vessel
about 2 miles offshore. From Hillsboro Inlet to the northern end of
the reef a south (S. 2^ B. mag.) course may be steered.

Fowey Bock light is a very valuable aid to navigation. All dangers

between it and the north end of Virginia Key will be avoided by taking

care not to bring the light to bear to the eastward of south (S. 2° E. mag.).

In eoasting along the reef in the daytime the beacons may be passed

at a distance of 500 to 800 yards, but in the night a vessel should haul

offshore as soon as Fowey Kocks light is made, and until abreast of it,

whence she can run on courses parallel to the reefs at a distance of one

1^ miles, constantly checking her positions by bearings of the lights

they are made and passed.

'^easels bound to Havana generally shape a course for that place
m abreast of Alligator Eeef light, but those bound to Key West or
Gidf of Mexico continue tfieir course between the Gulf Stream and
reef.

ipt Timmer man, a very skillful and experienced navigator, says:
y experience has been that from Fowey Rocks to Carysfort Reef the
18402 3

34 STRAITS OF FLORIDA.

Gulf Stream runs parallel to and seldom more than 3 mile from the
general line of the reefs ; but with fre.sh easterly breezes, which are the
prevalent winds, the current runs clo se to the reef, the color of the
water almost invariably mfirking its edge. To the westward and south-
ward of Carysfort Reef, the line of no current gradually widens until
abreast of Alligator Reef, where it is about 2 miles wide, or even
wider, with northerly winds. From abreast of beacon 'E' on Conch
Reef, there is frequently with northerly winds a strong westerly current
between the Gulf Stream and the reef.'' The courses and* general direc-
tions here given must, of course, be somewhat modified according to
circumstances of wind and weather.

Steamers bound to the northward will find it advantageous to pass
the liglits on the Florida Reefs and coast at such a distance that they
can be just seen from the deck. This course will give them the full
strength of the favoring currents and will enable them to frequently
verify their position, a point which can not be too urgently insisted
upon.

Sailing vessels bound from ports in Europe, or from the Atlantic
ports of the United States or Canada, to the Gulf of Mexico, and
intending to pass to the westward of the Great Bahama Bank, shai>e
a ccmrse for the southern end of Abaco Island, generally known
as the " Hole in the Wall." Hauling to the westward between the
south end-of Abaco and the north side of the Great Bahama Bank,
those vessels drawing not more than 12 feet may safely cross the bank,
leaving its westward edge at a point about 15 miles south of Orange
Cay. Vessels drawing more than 12 feet keep on to the westward
through the XW. Providence channel between the Great and Little
Bahama Banks, haul round the Great Isaacs lighthouse at a distance
of 3 or 4 miles and follow down the western edge of the bank to a point
about 15 miles south of Orange Cay. The wind is generally from the
eastward, so that the water is smooth, but vessels b^almed are some-
times carried helplessly by the Gulf Stream to the northward of the
Little Bahama Bank and have to make the best of their way to the
Hole in the Wall again.

From the edge of the bank 15 miles south of Orange Cay a course
should be steered to pass close along the northern edge of the Cay Sal
Bank, and having passed Elbow Cay Light haul over for the Pan of
Matanzas and coast along the Cuba shore at a distance of 3 or 4 miles
till westward of the Tortugas, when a course may be shaped for the
port of destination.

Vessels bound to Key West would, of course, haul to the northw?
sooner, being governed by the strength and direction of the wind
choosing a point to cross the Gulf Stream.

Sailing vessels bound north with a fair Wind would, of course, folic
the track used by steamers, skirting the circles of illumination of tl
lights along the reefs. As, however, the wind generally blows fro

«.•

GENERAX. DIRECTIONS. 35

between NE. and east, it is almost always necessary to beat for a por-
tion of the way at least, and it is while by the wind on the starboard
tack that most of the wrecks take place. While beating up through
the stream, if a vessel can not get hold of some landmark along the reefs
daring the afternoon, she should not approach the Florida shore after
dark in thick weather, but, remembering that current frequently sets
strongly over the reefs, the vessel should be kept under short sail on
the offshore tack during the night. By complyiny^ with this simple
precaution the much-dreaded navigation of the Florida Strait will be
deprived of all its dangers, which were formerly considered so great
that vessels were instructed to keep entirely away from the Florida
side of the channel.

During the past four and a half years it has been found that the axis
of the stream (the point of the maximum flow) is on the west side of
the Straits of Florida, and that the velocity of the current on the east
side along the great Bahama Banks, Bemini Island and Gun Cay is
always less than on the west side. Vessels navigating these waters can
save time on their passages south by following down on the east side
of the stream from Matauilla Shoal to Bernini or Gun Cay, and then
crossing to Fowey Bocks (instead of crossing the stream from Matanilla
Shoal to Jupiter Inlet), and then continuing the course on the west side
of the straits.

CHAPTER IV.

THE BAHAMA ISLANDS AND BANKS.

The Bahamas. — Until 1783 the Bahamas frequently changed mas-
ters, but since that time they have remained British possessions. Until
1848 they were under one government, but Turks Island and the Cai-
cos are now attached to Jamaica. The larger islands are inhabited, the
population being 44,000.

This remarkable group is composed of numerous irregularly shaped
white sandstone islets and rocks, thinly wooded, the loftiest about 400
feet high," most of them imder 100 feet, and many only a few feet above
the surface of the sea. They are generally situated on the edges of
coral and sand- banks, some of which are of the most dangerous char-
acter. They are remarkable for being steep-to, as the lead from 10
fathoms or less will frequently drop into 100 fathoms.

One or two of the largest islets are clothed with wood of moderate
dimensions, of sufficient size for the scantling of vessels of from 160 to
200 tons burden. Brazilletto, yellowwood, lignum- vita;, and fustic
are exported in small quantities. The soil in general is of so light and
stony a character that the vegetation is scanty, and it is only capable
of producing fruit, Indian com, and vegetables. r%)tton was at one
time a valuable article of commerce, but it is not now cultivated to any
large extent. Lately cocx)anut trees have been planted extensively.
Sugar cane*grows luxuriantly on many of the islands and is being more
largely cultivated.

The most important product is] salt, which is raked in great abun-
dance at many of the islands. Fruit and a coarse description of sponge
are also largely exported. Good water is rather scarce, and on some
of the islands the inhabitants depend chiefly on rain water. Poultry
is readily obtained at most of the inhabited islets, but cattle are scarce,
although generally obtainable at Nassau; the breed of sheep is excel-
lent.

A most remarkable feature is tile exceeding clearness of thee
wat^r, which enables the bottom to be seen from aloft at eonsideral
depths and at some distance,; the navigation of the banks is con
quently conducted almost entirely by the eye, but care must be tak
not to run with the sun ahead of the vessel.

Winds. — Tlie Bahama Islands aie all within the intiuence of
trade winds; their lowness, of course, exempts them from the regii.

NORTHERS CURliENTS — ^TIDES. 37

land wind, but in the summer season a light breeze frequently comes
from the Florida shore in the night and reaches the western side of the
Little Bahama Bank, but no farther. At this period the wind generally
prevails to the southward of east, and the more so as their NW. ex-
treme is approached ; the weather is then very variaole, and squalls
rush down with great violence, accompanied with heavy rains and an
oppressive atmosphere. They are within the zone of hurricanes, and a
year seldom passes without their being visited by a heavy gale at least
from the SE., which inflicts serious damage both on shore and at sea.

Northers. — In the winter months, from about November to the mid-
dle of March, the trade wind is frequently interrupted by N W. and north
winds. In December and January this may be exj:)ected almost weekly.
Previously to this change the wind will draw round to the south and
SW. About twenty-four hours sbfter or less, dark masses of clouds will
be seen rising from the westward, and in a short time the wind will
rush suddenly from that <iuarter with the force of a double or treble
reefed topsail breeze. It will soon veer round to N\V. and north with
clear weather, and remain between these points for two or three days.
It will then haul gradually to NE., perhaiis with increased force, accom-
panied by heavy squalls, and wear itself out at east in the course ot a
few days. •

The barometer is scarcely any guide; a small fall may be detected as
the wind draws to the south, and it will rise rapidly with the north wind.
The mariner may be sure of the action of the wind, and that it will not
back at this period, and this will enable him to seek shelter, it necessary,
with every confidence in the change that will follow. On the southern
edge of the group this change may be more sudden on account of the
partial interference' of the winds from the highlands of Haiti and Cuba
on the regular trade, but it sehlom takes place without a previous indi-
cation of dark masses of clouds to the westward.

Cnrrent — A feeble stream, seldom exceeding half a knot, generally
sets to the westward on the south side of the Bahama Islands and to
the !N'W. on the NE. side; but it is liable to change, and often sud-
denly, especially in the NW. Providence Channel and on the NE. side
of the Little Bahama Bank. Here it will sometimes be found running
8troug*to windward. Some observations tend to show that this is more
frequently the «ase after Northers, or on the increase of the moon. The
opinions of the wreckers and Caiman fishermen appear to agree on

ese points, but there is no certainty in the matter and, consequently,

)re than ordinary attention is required when navigating among the

ands. Near the northern and eastern bank of the Little Bahama the

"•rent sets strongly towards the bank.
Tides. — ^The tidal stream nins directly on and off all the banks at

. rate of from oiie to 2 knots, except in the narrow channels between
cays on the Great and Little Banks; here its velocity is greatly in-

jsed and in some places it is scarcely possible to contend against it.

▲t.

38 THE BAHAMAS.

Bank Blink is a phenoiiieuoQ described as a briglit reflected
hanging over the clc^r white sand bauks aiid serving to point tbe
for a long distance. From lengthened experience, however, the
gator is most strongly warned not to truat to so fallacious a gaid
will be far better for him to depend upqji the eye from aloft, the
the reckoning, and especially the latitude, which should be unremit
checked.

Pilotage. — The law of pilotage as enforced at luagiia is nearl;
ilar to the Hassan pilotage, the following are exceptions: Such v
as may enter any harbor or anchorage at Inagua for the piirpi
waiting a night's run or fair weather and not requiring or receivii
service of a pilot are ijot liable to pilot dues; vessels arriving t<
cure seamen are liable for half pilotage dues; and fees are chargi
cording to registered tonnage of a vessel.

The Inagua pilotage act extends also to Long Cay, Long Island
Cay, Bagged Island, and Exnma.

Abaco, Andros, Grand Bahama, Bernini, Berry Islands, Eleu
and San Salvador do not come under the juritidiction of any pi]
act. There are no licensed pilots thereat, the act of acceptiD
services of a pilot must be voluntary on the part of a master c
vessel.

Toonags and Light Dues. — Vessels employed on (Jtovernment
ice, vessels employed under mail contracts with tbe Bahama Oi
ment, vessels exclusively engaged in turtling, sponging, or lii
Yessels in pleasuring only and steamers are excused from paying

Vessels wholly loading or discharging, 2i cents for every ton <
proper measurement of sneh vessel.

Vessels partially loading or discharging, 2 cents for eauh and
ton of the proper tonnage of the vessel, and 2i cents per ton mei
ment or weight of the goods shipped or lauded.

Vessels in ballast or cargo for other port, 2 cents for ea^-li and
ton of the proper measurement of the vessel.

The Little Bahama Bank is of irregular shape and lies to tbe i
ward of the Ureat Bahama Bank, from which it is separated by th<
Providence Channel.

Great Abaco Island is the largest of the numerous islands
skirt the Little Bahama Bank on all sides but tlie X^'. and wi
rises on tlie eastern side of the bank and is inhabited. The S
treme is 2 miles in breadth and 90 feet high; at the eastern end <
headland there is a small, narrow tougue of low, flat rock, whicl
jects about 300 yanls to the southward, and close off it a very
rock. Tbis remarkable point is called the Hole in the Wall, froi
sea having worn a large arch through the rock, which is visible
3 miles off, from SSW. to WSW., and the opposite besfrings. A n
spit runs out southea-stward from the point with dei)tbs of from
15 £athous on it.

GREAT ABACO ANCHORAGE LITTLE HARB<.)R. 31)

Anchorage in 10 fathoms will be found on the west side ofl' the 8W.
point of Abaco, J mile from the shore, with the lighthouse bearing
X. 720 E. (X. no E. mag.).

laght — On the SE. point of Hole in the WaH from a couical tower, a
white light revolving every minute is shown at an elevation of ICO feet,
and should be visible 20 miles between S. 47° W. (S. 40° W. mag.) and
S. 6oO E. (8. 06^ E. mag.) through west and north. Reported irregular.

Cheroki Sound. — From the Hole in the Wall the eastern siiore of
the island rises gradually to a height of 120 feet, and the sandy beach
which borders it is* steep-to. Thence the coast bends in, forming a deep
bight, called Cheroki Sound, which is everywhere foul, except at the
NE. corner, where, with local knowledge, there is shelter for small
coasters.

From Cheroki Point to Little Harbor Point the coast again trends to
the northward. This part of the coast may be recognized by Ocean
Point, a bold cliffy i)oint 30 feet high at the north end of Winding Bay;
t:»ere is no other part of the coiust like it.

Light. — ^A fixed re«l light, shown from a small wooden tower, erected
on Duck Cay. The light is visible from a distance of a miles between
the bearings S. 48° W. (S. 47o W. mag.) and S. 87^ E. (S. 88^ E. mag.)
over an arc of 225^, except where obscured to the eastward by the high
land of Cheroki Point.

Caation. — ^There are several rocky ledges, on which the sea breaks
heavily off this part of the coast, which are not yet thoroughly examined.

From Little Harbor Point to the northwanl the Abaco Islands are
skirted, at a distance of Irom 2 to 6 miles, by a line of numerous cays,
.between which are niirrow channels leading into the large sheet of
water navigable by small craft within them.

Iiittle Harbor. — Three hundred yards north of Little Harbor Point
a small channel having a depth of 13 feet leads into Little Harbor, but
it is difficult to fnake out, even with local knowledge.

Ljrnard Cay is the tirst of the islets north of Little Harbor Point; the
reef extends i mile offshore, and there are 10 or 12 fathoms of water
the same distance farther out. About 400 yards from the north end,
between it and Channel Kock, there is another small cut. North Bar
Channel, which carries a depth of 15 feet and leads into Pelican Har-
bor, but all these places are too difficult for a stranger to enter without
a pilot.

Tides. — It is high water, full and change, in Pelican Harbor, at 8h.
m. Springs rise 4 feet.

Note. — On the bar the tides run N\V. and SE., 2J knots at springs.

Ziight. — A tlxed red light, shown at soutli side of entrance to Little

irbor from a small wooden tower. The light is visible from a dis-

ice of 6 miles* between the bearings S. 33^ E. (S 34^ E mag.) and
12<5 E. (N no E. mag.) over an arc of 255o.

40 THE BAHAMAS.

Falicao and Tilloo Cays, next northward, are skirted by
aoaudiugs extend 3 miles seaward fiom Pelican Cays.

Elbow Cay is separated from Tilloo Cay by a narrow channel
north end is a high sandy bluff, and about a mile to the Hoathi
the bluff there is a small settlement. This islet is at the ^E. e
of the Little Bahama Bank; the reef abreast the settlement is
off; at the northern end the reef extends one mile off and then t
the northwestward ; it is one of the most dangerous and fatal
in the Bahamas.

Light. — On Elbow Cay, ij mile inland, from a circular stone t
shown a lized whit« light, at an elevation of 123 feet, and 3h<
visible 15 miles.

Caotiou. — In thick weather, vessels hound to the SW. and fa
the westward of their reukoniug are liable to be wrecked on
Cay. It is therefore advisable for a vessel to strike the parallel
30' N. well to the eastward of ^he cay. Shonid the wind be
southward when in this neighborhood and the light not in sight
reckoning doubtful, it will be prudent to keep the vessel's head
eastward iu the night, as the letid will not give sufficient wan
the danger. The current generally sets to the XW., but someti
opposite dii'e<:tion, and the tides run through the openings at t
of from 2 to 3 knots.

From Elbow Cay the range of small islets takes a NTT . by W
tion for more than 100 miles, and skirts the shore of Abaco a:
t!ince of from 3 to 6 miles.

Ths Elbow Reef sweeps round these islets at the distance o
3 miles, and joins the XW". end of Man-of War Cay, leaving ar
ing, Mau-ofWar Channel, from J tt> i '"''e ^'•'e ''"''th a depth of
between it and the reef, which commences again to leeward
channel Iie< close to the eastward of some small rocks nearly
N. 23° W. (N. 24° W. mag.) of the cay, as there is a small rocky I
be avoided Ijing about 400 yards NW. of the end of the cay.

A snug harbor for coasters drawing under 12 feet, is about ft i
45<J W. (S. 44"^ W. mag.) of the opening. In a case of absolut*
a vessel of the above draft may save herself by running in hei
without local knowledge, it would be attended with very great

Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at Man of- War Cai
Om., and the rise 4^ feet.

Gotland and Great Guana Cays, separated by a narrow boa
nel, extend 9 miles from Manof-War Channel, fringed on tiieir *
sides by a broken reef to a distance of J mile.

The northern end of Great Guana Cay terminates in a l«)ld I
feet high, which is conspicuous from the eastwanl ; from it foni
extends N". 67^ W. (X. (W^ W, mag.) 2J miles.

Chub Rocks.— At 3^ miles N. 61° W. (X. f}20 W. mag.) from the
a small patch of rocks 4 feet high, which may be passed on any si

WHALE CAY CHANNEL MATANILLA REEFS. 41

distance of (JiK) yards. These rocks are a good guide to the Whale Cay
Channel, 2 miles to the SW. of them.

T^hale Cay Chaanel. — Vessels intending to visit the settlement on
Green Turtle Cay, the principal village on the Little Bahama Bank, must
use the Whale Cay Channel, through which a depth of 14 feet may be
carried. It lies between Whale Cay and the rocks to the NW. of it.
The deepest water on the bar is O'JO yards from the end of Whale Cay^
between the point and a sunken rock, which generally breaks, and lies
S. 58^ E. (S 59^ B. mag.) ^ mile from Channel Rock. From this position
the highest part of the Chub Rocks bears N. 03^ E. (N. <>2^ E. mag.)

Supplies. — At (xreen Turtle Cay wood and water may be obtained;
provisions are scarce..

Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at Green Turtle Cay at 8h.
Om^ Springs rise 4J feet.

l^alker Cay, about G.5 miles iiorthwestward of (rreeu Turtle Cay, is
the westernmost of the (Iraud Cays, and is woody ami 55 feet high. The
islets between are skirted, to the distance of from IJ to 4 miles, by a
reef, whii'h i)resents no s:ife opeuiug whatever.

Inner Cliannel. — Between the cays and Ab.Ko tliere is a passage for
vessels of 12 feet draft. Entering at Whale Cay channel it is from 200
to 400 yards from the shore of Great Abaco Island, passing north of
Little Sale Cay and the Double Bre.isted Bars, southward of the triangle
rocks, iuto the open water on the western portion of the bank.

Note, — In navigating these banks a stranger is very likely to be de-
ceived by what is known locally as " Fish muds," having all the appear-
ance of shallow banks of considerable extent.

Mfltanillfl Reefs. — From Walker Cay the Matanilla Reefs, on which
the sea breaks in moderate weather, run in a W. by N. direction about
25 miles, and being steep-to are extremely dangerous. The west end of
the reefs terminates on the meridian ot about 78^ 50' W., in lat. 27"^ 23'
N., and from this point the edge of the bank trends W. by N. 15 miles
to Its N W. end. At 7J miles westward of the reef there is a coral knoll
2 miles long north and south, called Middle Shoal. At its north end
there are 4^ fathoms water a mile within the edge of the bank, and on
the south side only 2 fathoms. The ground between it and the reef is
aLso foul.

Matanilla Shoal, a dangerous coral patch, lies 4 miles wcvstward of
Middle Shoal, 2 miles within the northern edge of the bank and 3.^ miles
from the NW. extreme, and at 5 miles S. GQo W. (S. 08^ W. mag.) of it

3 bank will be struck in 13 fathoms. The i)ateh is not ^ mile in ex-
it, and on one small spot there are only 12 feet. All this part of the
ik is extremely djingerous. The bottom being rocky and covered
h dark wet^d, the water is not discolored, and the shoals do not break;

' rock is so flat that no dependence can be placed on anchors.
idee. — ^The' tidal streams run oii and oft* the Little Bahama Bank^
\ near the edge are at times strong. The current in the offing is very
ertain for some distance to the northward.

42 THE BAHAMAS.

WeBt side of Little Bahama Bank.— From the UW. ext
biink tiikes a SSW. direction about 15 miles, wheii it rea<-hef
■western limit in lat, 27"= 10' S. and Iotir. 7!)° 13' W. Thence
of the bank sweeps rnmid to the soutli and SSE, 30 miles to
end »f Bitbama Island.

The wliole of this part is elosely skirted by narrow shal
ridyes and d«tiM;lied coral patches, and is extremely danyen
Gulf Stream strikes the edge of the hank sideways, with a al
from 2 til 3 knots, and the lead gives scarcely any warninfT,
small openings here and there with 3 and 4 fathoms water in
in a case of absolute danger a ves.sel niij^ht be guided by thi
safety <ra the bank, but it would be a mere matter of eliai
es<-aped shipwreck.

Memory Rock is a little, dark, barren, rugged islet, only 14
lying S. 23° W. (X. L'4o W. mag.) of the west end of Uaham
about midway between it and the western limit of the bai
mile within its edge. At 3 miles N W, of it there is a most <;
small coral patch, on which the sea generally breaks. Hetwee
and patch there are from 3 to 4 fathoms water, about a mile \
edge of soundings, under the lee of a sand ridge, on which t
fathoms. To the southward of the rock there ia uo safe oj
vessels drawing over 12 feet. The edge of the stream comes
cloijie home to the rock. Between it and Bahama Island vessel
intlueneed by the tides, which set regularly ou and off the ba
rate of from a half to a knot an liour.

Tides. — At Memory Kock it is high water, fiill and chan
60m., but at Walker Cay it is not high water before 8h. 50m.
rise about 3 feet.

Sandy Cay is very small and covered with bushes to the
14 fet^t above the sea, A narrow sand spit runs oflf from it to tl
for nearly 3 miles, and a dangerous coral le«Ige, showing at I
licit VVSW. of it on the edge of the bank.

Wood Cay, about 3^ miles south of Sandy Cay, is a ro
woody, J mile long and 2fi feet high.

Indian Cay lie-s close oil' the KW. point of Bahama Island
them is a channel, for small craft drawing 6 feet, I'oand to t
meiits on the north side of the latter island.

Bahama Island is inhabited, thickly wooded, but generally
about 40 or -JO feet high. At Settlement Point, the west e
mile broad, north and south, and anchorage will l>6 found urn
or a fathoms water, about i mile oft' shore, with the NW. poin
K. 50° E. (>'. 5.50 E. miig.) and the S\V. point S. '2$° E. (S. 20^
but a vessel must quit the moment the wind threatens to cha

Soondings appear to extend otf a short distance, and 1
is market on the chart under SW, Point; this part of the islai
little known. Thence the coast line takes an ENE. direc

GREAT ISAAC THE HEN AND CHICKENS. 43

toward the east end of the island sweeps round to tie scmthward, form-
ing a deep and dangerous bight, with soutlierly winds. This part
appears U) have a foul^ shore the whole way, without any anchorage*
From the SE. extreme of the island the Mr^e of the Little Bahama Bank
trends to the south and round to the SE., and connects itself to the
wegt side of Abaco at Rocky Point. It is closely skirted by numerous
small islets and dangerous ledges, without any navigable openings be-
tween them, as far as (lorda Cay, which lies N. o<P \V. (N. 57° \\\
mag.) of Rocky Point.

There is a well on (drorda Cay and anchorage under the west side.
There is also water to be found abieast the anchorage under S\V. Poiat
of Bahama Island.

Soundixigs extend If miles south of Gorda Cay, but this part as far
as Rocky Point has not been thoroughly examined.

Cross Harbor. — From Ro<*kv Point the coast of Great Abaco Island
treads to the SB., forming a large bight between it and C<»dav Point, S
miles distant; this bight is shallow and full of roiky ledges almost to
the edge of soundings.

Oreat Bahama Bcmk. — G-reat Isaac, at the KW. extreme of the
Great Bahama Bank, is a barren, narrow, honeycombed rock, about f
mile long and about 40 feet high, and being foul, yet very steep-to, land-
ing is sometimes difficult even in moderate weather. There are 4J
fathoms water between it and the NE. rock, and the same depth between
it and the Brothers; but, as before recomn»ended, it will be better to
pass outside of all. The ground to the S\V. of the (jreat Isaac is foul
for i mile.

Light. — On Great Isaac Island, from an iron tower, a white light^
revolving every i minute, is shown at an elevation of 158 feet, and
should be visible 16 miles. Eclipses not total within (> miles.

Dangerons Shoals. — The shoal has but 10^ feet of water over it and
lies with Great Isaac lighthouse bearing N, 44^ E. (N. 42^ E. mag.)
distant 9^ miles, and the south Cay of Hen and Cliickens bearing N. 49^
E. (X. 470 E. mag.), distant 0 miles.

Information has been received that the steamer Tangier, drawing 17
feet 10 inches of water, touched lightly on and passed over a coral
patch, approximately 9 miles S. 44^ W. (8. 42^ W. mag.) from Great
Isaac liglithouse, or about J mile NE. of the shoal described above.
Immediately after touching the lead gave 4, 4^, and then 5 fathoms*

The Hen and Chickens form a group of barren, rocky islets. A
^38el may round their north end at ^ mile, and anchor on the bank in

athoms^ but the ground to the SW. is foul to the distance of ^ mile,

lere the depth is 2^ fathoms. In passing this neighborhood in the

^ht, do not come within the depth of 10 fathoms.

i'rom the Hen and Chickens to the Moselle Bank the edge of the

ik is clear, and vessels can run just within the edge in from 6 to 1(>

hhoms.

44 THE BAHAMAS.

Moselle Bank is dangerous in the nighttime, having only 4 feet ot
water on its soutli end, but in the daytime it is very conspicuously
marked by a long black buoy with staff and basket- work ball upon it*

To avoid this shoal the Great Isaac lighthouse should not be brought
to bear to the northward of N. 42° E. (N. 40^ B. mag.) till the shoal is
passed^ or at night till the Gun Cay light is opened west of the Bernini
Islands bearing S. 5^ E. (S. 7° E. mag.).

The North and South Bernini are two iiTcgularly shaped, sandy
islands, covered with small wood to the height of about 40 feet, and oc-
cupy a space of nearly 0 miles north and south. They are separated
by a very narrow cut, which opens out to the eastward and forms a
secure harbor for wreckers drawing 8 feet. There is a small settlement,
customhouse, and a resident magistrate; and vessels in distress may
obtain water and supplies sufficient for the moment.

Anchorage will be found in 8 or 9 fathoms water, tine sand, about
midway between the extremes of the islands, and a mile off shore; be
careAil, however, not to shoot too far in, and look out for a clear spot.
A little more than a inile northward of the north end of the islands
there is a remarkable small black rock, 8 feet high, called North Rock.

Henry Bank is stated to lie about N. 22o W. (X. 24° W. mag.) i mile
from the south point of South Bernini Island, and J mile from the shore.
It is believed to have a depth of 3 feet upon it. This part of the bank
should be approached with caution, as the depths are irregular.

Spar Beacon. — ^There is a spar beacon, surmounted by a barrel, on
the north extremity of Picket Rock, to serve as a guide to Barnett Har-
bor. Vessels drawing less than 14 feet may find shelter against south-
westerly winds on the Great Bahama Bank by entering the channel
midway between the rock awash, north of the beacon and Triangle
Rocks. The course is east (N. 88° E. mag.) until clear sandy bottom is
struck in 3 fathoms; there anchpr with Gun Cay lighthouse bearing
S. 8o E. (S. lOo E. mag.).

G-un Cay is a mile long, and very narrow. Between it and South
Bernini is a range of smaU rocks, from 10 to 18 feet high, within | mile
of the edge of the bank.

Light. — Near the south point of the cay from a conical tower a light,
revolving red every 1 J minutes, is shown at an elevation of 80 feet, and
should be visible 12 miles, except between S. 17^ W. (S. 15° W. mag.)
and S. i>o E. (S. 8o E. mag.).

Anchorage. — When 5 miles to the northward of the light, it shou'''
not be brought to the southward of 8. 45^^ E. (S. 47° E. mag.) in ord
to avoid the low rocks between it and the Bemini Islands, which swev
slightly outward, and, being so close to the edge of soundings, the lek
will be of little use. There is temix)rary anchorage, with easterly wind'
in 7 or 8 fathoms water, about f mile off shore, with the lighthon;
bearing east (X. SS*^ E. mag.). Wreckers find good shelter within t
cay by passing round the south end.

CAT CAYS— ORANGE CAY. 45

Cat Cays are two narroi^ woody islets, 40 feet high, lying from oue to
2 miles within the edge of the bank, and extending about 4 miles S»
340 B. (S. 36° B. mag.) oflf Gun Oay, from which they are only separated
by the small channel mentioned above. Around the south point of the
southern cay there i* good anchorage for vessels drawing under 12
feet, called Dollar Harbor, where they will lie sheltered froul all points
but the south. The i>(>int is bold and steepto, and the only danger to
be avoided is the Rabbit Rock, which is nearly awash, and lies N. 66^
W. (N. 6S0 W. mag.), a mile from the point. The lighthouse, open west
(S. 880 W. mag.) of Round Roeks, clears the Rabbit. There are some
small barren rocks about 14 feet high at J mile to the 8W. of the point,
and they must beleft to the southward in going in. The small rocks^
Factory Cays, 12 feet high, extend nearly 2 J miles to the SE.

Some wells of good water will be found on the east side of North Cat
Oay, about ^ mile from its southern end.

The flood runs ENB.; the ebb, Wi"W.; springs rise 3 J feet.

Bro'wnB Cay is a barren rock, 13 feet high, lying S. 3()o W. (S. 28^
"W. mag.), 12 miles from Cxun Cay lighthouse, and 1^ miles nearly north
of it there is a small sandy cay of the same height. Otf the south end of
Browns Cay is a small black rock, and between it and the cay there is
a 9-tbot channel to the bank.

Beak Cay, 1^ miles farther southward, is partially clothed with
stunted bushes about 13 feet high. Thence to Riding Rock, 7 railea
distant, the space is filled with small rocks and coral ledges, and quite
impassable.

Riding Rock is 14 feet high and scantily covered with brushwood.
At 1^ miles southward of it is South Riding Rock, 13 feet liigh, which
has on it a small rough beacon of stones. At ^ mile eastward of South
Siding Rock is a small square islet 12 feet high, called Castle Rock^
SE. of which is an anchorage for small vessels.

Orange Cay, about 17 miles from Riding Rocks is the southernmost
islet on this side of the Great Bahama Bank. The ground between it
and Riding Rocks is foul and almost choked up with a line of small
rocky heads. In some places there are 3 and 4 fathoms water between
them, but except in a case of necessity it would not be prudent to pass
tbrongh. Orange Cay ^s a barren rock, about 13 feet high, lying about
2 miles within the edge of soundings. A ridge of low rocks runs off' 1 J
miles to the northward of it; and at the same distance southward there

a single small black rock, from which a coral ledge, with only 12 feet

ater on it, extends off 2 miles in the same direction. There is tem-

>rary anchorage westward of the cay in about 6 fatlioms water.

The SW. side of Great Bahama Bank trends southward from

range Cays, and for 20 miles, to the parallel of 24^ 35', there are

ry few shallow patches, although there are depths of 3 and 4 fathoms,
miles within the edges. Thence the bank inclines gradually to the

^tward of south, and is foul until latitude 23^ 30' N. is reached.

THE BAHAMAS.

Cay Sal Bank is somewhat in the shape of a pear, and is skirted by
islets, on all side but the south. Between it and the coast of Florida to
the NW. lies the Florida Channel on the eastern side lies the Santaren
Channel, and south of it is the Xidiolas Channel. To the SB. thi&se two
last channels unite to fcn^ni the Old Bahama Channel.

Double-headed Shot Cays are on tlie northwestern edge of the
bank. They are from 20 to 40 feet high. There ai*e several channels
between them and the anchorage ; inside is a fair one in KW. A\inds.

Water Cay is the easternmost and largest of them. Near the c>eiiter,
on the south side, there is a natural well of excellent wat^r, and opx)osite •
to it on the same side of the island is a good landing place.

Caution. — When approaching the Water Cay keep outside of a S. 5^
W. (S. 2° W. mag.) bearing of the lighthouse, or one mile outside the
cay.

Marion R6ck.-^This rocky ledge, having a least depth of 6 feet upon
the eastern extreme ( from which the west extreme of Water Cay
bears S. U^ W. (S. 11° W. mag.), distant i mile), extends about 500
yards in a WSW. and ENE. direction, and has a. general depth of
from 3 to 7 fathoms with three rocky heads upon it, over which there are
6, 7, and 8 feet respectively.

Light. — On the highest of the Double-heaiied Shot Cays, named
North Elbow, at the west edge of the bank, stands a conical lighthouse,
from which is exhibited a fixed white light 90 feet above the sea, visible
15 miles except when it bears approximately S. 66^ W. (S. 63° W. mag.)?
being then intercepted by Water Cay when 0 miles distant.

RompidaB Ledge. — From Double-headed Shot Cays the S W. side of
the bank trends to the southward and eastward for 12 miles to Cay Sal
the only islet on this part of the bank. From the southernmost of
Double-headed Shot Cays foul ground extends off 1^ miles to the SSW.
The Kompidas, 4J miles from the N W. end of Cay Sal, is a rocky ledge
awash, IJ miles in extent N W. and SE., close to the edge of soundings.
The opening on either side of the ledge is qu^te free of danger, but in
running on or off the bank it will be better to pass to the northward
of it.

Cay Sal, so named from its possessing a valuable salt x)ond, is in
the shape of a triangle. The NE. side is formed by a narrow ridge of
sand hills ; the other parts are very low and sandy and partially clothed
with brushwood. During the season for raking the salt it is inhabited.
There is temporary anchorage close under the west side, in about Tfiith-
oms, on the edge of soundings, but it is not good. The tides set aroun
it with great strength, and are sometimes influenced by the Florid
Stream running to the SE.

The Lavanderas is a small rocky ledge awash. Between this an^
the Anguila Islets there does not appear to be any danger along tl
southern limits of the bank; this part, however, has not been satii
factorily examined, and there is reas6n to believe many rocky head

CAY SAL BAXK. 47

may be found near the edge. The center of the bank is foul in many
places and had better be avoided.

In be I ting across the bank a vessel should keep within 7 or S miles
of the northern edge of tlie bank.

Anguila, the largest of tin* islets on Cay Sal Bank, is partially wooded
and from 40 to 50 feet high. It is cut through in several pla:es, but
there is no opening lit even for a boat; it may, therefore, be described
as one island. It lies at the 8E. extreme of the btnik, and its NE.
side is close to the edge of soundings.

Oood Anchorage will be found in 0 or 7 fathoms water, oft' the
SW. side. There are some wells of good water on it, but very difficult
to find.

Between Anguilaaud the Dog Rocks to the NW. are several chisters
of small, low rocks, with deep water between, but most of the openings
are dangerous.

Dog Rocks. — The northeastern most islet on Cay Sal Bank are bar.
ren and rocky. They are sei)arated near the center by a narrow but
deep navigable cut, and the eastern edge of soundings is about 2 miles
outside them. Vessels crossing over from the Gieat Bahama Bank in
the night by proper attenti<m to the lead will es<*.ape danger; and it may
be observed that accidents frequently happen here by neglecting tbis
safeguard. The opening between these islets and the nearest rocks to
the SE. is 7 miles wide, and although the soundings are irregular and
the bottom dark and alarming, it appears to be quite clear and is fre-
quently used by vessels crossing inside the cays.

MnertOB or Daadmen Cays lie about 3 miles within the edge ot
the bank, bat great care must be taken in the night, as they are steep-
to, and the soundings do not indicate the distance from them, and they
are likewise not in sight of the Elbow Cay light. Several of the rocks
are a considerable distance apart, but it would not be prudent to cross
the ledges between them.

Tides. — ^The direction and height of the tides are much influenced
by the wind, but generally the flood tides run from all sides on to the
bank and the ebb off. At the Double-headed Shot Cays the tides have
a gyratory coarse from north through east to south.

Directioiui. — It has been the almost universal custom for vessels pro.
ceeding westward from the Great Bahama Bank to endeavor to strike
soundings on the NE. end of Cay Sal Bank or to make Elbow Cay light.

With light winds or in thick weather this course is still preferable,

t with reasonably ctear weather and a good breeze the distance will

much shortened by crossing over at once to the Florida shore, mak-

r Alligator Reef light, and by bearings of this light with the ones on

mbrero and Sand Keys running along inside the Gulf Stream,
f the Cay Sal Bank route be taken and the wind be scant from the

tstward vessels may run in on the bank on either side of the Dog
^.ks and pass off to the southward of the Elbow ; or should the wind

THE BAHAMAS.

be light and tending to calm they may anchor within, to avoid being
set to the northward, otherwise it will be better to run down outside,
especially in the night, paying great attention to the lead. ,

Having passed Elbow Cay light, the course should be S. 48° W.
(S. 450 W. mag.) until close over to the Cuba shore, to avoid the
strength of the current. This course should lead direct toward the Pan
of Mataiizas, and within about 12 miles N W. of the light on Cay Piedraa^
but this will depend upon the set of the current, which is very uncer-
tain and sometimes strong, into the Xicholvis Channel.

If bound to the SW. ports of tlie United States it will be advisable
to run along the Cuba shore as far westward as Mariel, and then shape
a N"W. course, so as to pass at a proper distance westward of the Tor-
tugas. Sliould the Cuba shore be left in the daytime, an occasional
.bearing of the high land will enable the mariner to estimate the strength
of the stream and to regulate his course accordingly. £le may depend
upon finding the current right across, and probably with increased
strength, as he advances to the northward.

NW- .end of G-reat Bahama Bank. — From abreast Great Isaac
Island the edge of the bank gradually rounds that island at a distance
of about 6 miles and then extends for about 30 umIcs SE. by. E. to
abreast the Gingerbread Ground. The edge of the bank then takes^
a more easterly direction with a slight bend to the southward for 35
miles to the Stirrup Cays, and in this space it is quite free of danger
and the lead will be a safe guide.

The Gingerbread G-round is about the most extensive and most
fatal danger on the Great Bahama Bank, the current setting strongly
over it. The foul ground, ftiU of rocky heads, lies close to the edge of
deep soundings, on dark bottom, not easily seen from a distance, and
may be said to extend from the Great Isaac a distance of 30 miles, and
it is from 2 to 5 miles in breadth. There are several small low rocks on
it, and several cuts through, which are clearly pointed out in the chart,
but strangers had better not attempt them, unless forced to do so, and
then they must entirely depend upon the eye.

Northeast or Gull Rock is small and 12 feet high. It lies just KE.
of Great Isaac. Eocks with 12 feet of water over them have been re-
ported li miles northward of Northeast Rock in line with the ea«t end
of Great Isaac.

The Brothers are two very similar small black rocks 7 and 6 feet
high. They lie about 4 J and 5 miles eastward of Great Isaac.

The Little Isaacs are three in number. The easternmost, call
East Isaac, is 11 feet high, and lies 14 miles eastward of Great Isaa
18 miles from the east end of the Gingerbread, and about 3 from t
edge of the bank; at IJ miles to the eastward of it there is a smj
rock awash at high water. Middle Isaac is only ^ mile westward
the east rock, and 12 feet high, and Little Isaac, 2 miles farther in tl
same direction, is 8 feet high, and 3J miles within the edge of t
bank.

BERRY ISLANDS — SLAUGHTER HARBOR. ' 49

The Berry Islands are a group of small, narrow, wooded cays, from
50 to 60 feet high, which, from Great Stirrup Cay, sweep round to the
eastward, forming nearly a semicircle and a good guide in the night.
There are but few inhabitants, and supplies are scarce. The western
side is quite blocked up by shallow sand banks, but to the eastward the
islets are skirted by a iiat bank of soundings having from 10 to 14
fathoms water, extending off from 5 to 8 miles, and is a good guide at
night.

Great Stirmp Cay, the northernmost of the Berry Islands, is a neces-
sary landmark for vessels intending to cross the bank from the ISTW,
Providence Channel to the westward. At about J mile from the west
end there is a small sandy cove and some wells of good water, and
landing is generally easy, except with northerly winds. In moderate
weather, with the prevailing easterly winds, a vessel may anchor in 7
fathoms, sandy bottom, with a flagstaff on the hill S. 8^ E. (S. 9^ E.
mag.), about J mile off shore. A small supply of stock and vegetables
may be obtained.

Iiight. — ^From Great Stirrup Cay a fixed white light is shown at an
elevation of 81 feet,.visible 15 miles, between N. 54^ W. (N. 55^ W. mag.)
and N. 45o B. (N. 44^ E. mag.) over an arc of 261o.

Great Harbor.— ^Great Stirrup Cay is separated from Great Harbor
Oay by an opening 800 yards wide, and within it there is a limited
anchorage, Great Harbor, with a depth of 3^ fathoms. It is completely
exposed to the NE., and, except in a handy fore-and-after, a vessel might
meet with considerable detention. Those, under 10 feet draft can get
close up under Great Harbor Cay, or lie more snugly in Pan ton Cove at
the SB. end of Great Stirrup Cay. Goat Cay, which is about J mile
within the opening, forms a remarkable steep, rounded, woody hill 80
feet high.

Directions. — Should a vessel be forced to run for the anchorage in
Great Harbor, bring the south end of Goat Cay to bear S. 48° W. (8.
470 W. mag.) and just clear of the north end of Great Harbor Cay^
which is bold and steep to at the distance of 200 yards. This mark will
lead just clear of the east end of the bar which extends out from Stir-
rup Oay; give the north end of the Great Harbor Cay a berth of rather
more than 200 yards and anchor with it bearing east (N. 89^ E. mag.)
in 3 fathoms of water j or shoot the vessel farther in to the SE. of the
X>oint, according to her draft.

Slaughter Harbor is a small basin between Great and Little Stirrup
f 8, scarcely 400 yards in diameter, but has a depth of 15 to 18 feet.
B channel, however, is barred, and only navigable at high water, with

5 assistance of a pUotf for vessels drawing 12 feet. It is quite open
the northward, but the bar, which generally breaks across in this

id, protects the anchorage.

dttle Stirrup Cay is about a mile in length, 55 feet high, and
5p-to; there are 5 fathoms on the north side close to the rocks. A

18403 4

THE BAHAMAS.

fc-' ^

is"

:»v

shallow 8aiid spit runs aif a little more than a mile from the west end,
with a channel between for small craft, leading around to Slaughter
Harbor.

Tid6B. — It is liigh water, full and change, at C^l^reat Stirrup Cay, at
7h. Om. ; the rise at springs is 4 feet, and the tidal streams run directly
in and out of all the above openings with great rapidity. Between
Great Stirrup Cay and Great Isaac lighthouse the flood tide sets di-
rectly onto the bank, while the ebb tide sets off the bank.

0*1681 Harbor Cay, about 60 feet high, is nearly connected to Haines
Cay, and is the largest of the Berry Islands, and has a few settlers. Its
eastern shore forms several sandy bays, separat^^d by low whit^ stone
cliffs. Near the center, at about f mile off shore, there is a small islet
called Petit Cay, with a boat channel within it. Shallow, rocky ground
extends from the NW. end of this islet to within about 1 J miles of the
north end of Great Harbor Cay, and a wide berth should be given to
it. The soundings are so regular that in the night time they scarcely
give warning of approach, and great care must be taken not to come
within the depth of 10 fatlioms.

Lignum- Vit», Cistern, Bamboo, and Anderson Cays lie on the
west side of Great Harlxn* Cay, and are only separated by small boat
channels. On Cjstcrn and Anderson Cays there are remarkable clumps
of dark trees 100 feet above the sea. Between Cistern and Bamboo
there is a small snug inlet, called Bullock Harbor, for coasters drawing
8 feet. The channel is through Great Harbor, between Goat and Lig-
num-Vita) Cays, or from the westward round Little Stirrup Cay.

Haines Cay is about 3 miles long, and its north end terminates in a
white sandy bluff. To the northward of the bluff there is a small rocky
islet called the Hawks !N^cst, under which there is good boat shelter.

Market Fish, Holmes, and Little Harbor Cays occupy a space of
about 8 miles in a SSE. direction, and are only separated by small
shallow cuts; in the center of Holmes Cay are some conspicuous white
cliffs. The shore eastward of these cays is foul for nearly a mile.
Between Haines Cay and Market Fish Cay there is an opening 3 miles
wide, and an anchorage in it for small craft.

Bonds Cay is 3^ miles long, and the cnt between it and Frozen Gay
to the northwai*d is about i mile wide, but foul and impassable. The
latter cay, the easternmost of the group, is only a mile long, and round
its north end a vessel will carry 15 feet of water into an anchorage on
the west side, in 3 fathoms water, open, however, to the NE. .

Whale Cay lies at the SE. extreme of the group, ai^ forms
elbow to the NE. and north 4^ miles long; at the north end there i
single house. The Aat bank of soundings commences at the turn of
elbow. Between Whale and Bonds Cays the opening is about 1 J m'
wide, and near the center of it are two remarkably small rocks, cal
the Sisters, which are connected to the latter cay by a ledge nearly d
forming a breakwater to a snug anchorage for small craft. The ch

FRAZERS HOG CAY DIRECTIONS.

nel lies to the southward of the Sisters, and the eye will guide the
vessel through in from 10 to 15 feet. Whale Point forms the souths
western extremity of the cay. About a mile eastward of Whale Point
there are some remarkable white sand Miffs 80 feet high.

Fraxars Hog Cay lies close to the westward of the point, and under
it there is a good shelter, with northerly wiiuls, in 3 fathoms, and
vessels of light draft can get close in under Thompson Cay.

Frazers Hog Cay is locally known as South Whale Cay .and some-
times as Bird Island, and Thompson Cay as Frazers Hog.

From Frazers Hog Cay the cays sweep around to the westward, and
at 6J miles distant is South Stirrup Cay, wliich is covered with trees,
growing out of a swamp to a height of 35 feet. Next in order there is
a small low islet called Hum Cay, and at 1^ miles further on is Black-
woi^d Bush.

Northwest ChanneL — At the X W. end of tha Tongue of the Ocean
is a narrow intricate channel between sand ridges, through which may
be carried a depth of 10 feet at low water onto the b^uk, and it is
usually used by the wreckers. These small vessels leaving Nassau
generally anchor under the Chub Cays for the night, and contrive to be
at the entrance of the channel by sunrise in order to be able to see the
numerous heads which skirt the edge of the bank for about 1 J miles
inward before they come to tht? sand-bores. The clearest route will be
found by striking soundings with Blackwood Bush, bearing N. TC^ E.
(N. 750 E. mag.) 6 miles.

ICackie Bank. — A checkere<l black and white buoy with staff and
two checkered balls, in 2 fatlijoms at low water, lies (m the SE. edge
of the bank, in lat. 25° 28' N., long. 78^ 45' W. This buoy is intended
to guide vessels in crossing the Bahama Bank, and to correct their posi-
tions in running from Stirrup Cay to Orange Cjiy ; it is visible 5 or 6
miles.

Diractiona for croaaing Graat Bahama Bank.— The greater num-
ber of vessels proceeding from x>orts of the United States and of north-
em Europe bound to Matanzas, Havana and the 8 W. ports of the United
States in the Gulf of Mexico run through the NW. Providence Channel.
Those drawing under 12 feet ma^ cross the bank between Berry Islands
and the western cays* but those of heavier draft must pass outside all.
Being 5 or 6 miles south of the Abaco lighthouse, the course will be
about N. 840 W. (N. 85° W. mag.) 40 miles to the edge of soundings oflf
~ reat Stirrup Cay.
Having brought the lighthouse on Stirrup Cay to bear S. 67^ B. (8.
^ E. mag.) distant about 4 miles, steer 8. 57^ W. (8. 56^ W. mag.),
id from the edge of soundings run 33 miles to the commencement of
e flats of middle ground, which extends right across the bank, and is
out 16 miles in breadth. Thence a 8. 35^ W. (8. 34^ W. mag.) course
[>uld lead 5 or 6 miles eastward and in sight of Orange Cay and to tha
ge of the bank about 13 or 14 miles southward of it. A vessel may

62 THE BAHAMAS,

verify her position by sighting the buoy on the south edge of Mackie
Bank.

In crossing the flats the eye must guide the vessel between the nu*
merous clear white sand ridges and small black heads, which are easily
seen even in the night time if the weather is clear. Some attention,
however, should be paid to the tide on the first course. Should the
vessel enter upon the bank with the first of the flood and a commanding
breeze, she had better steer half a point farther to the westward, and
the contrary on the ebb, judging at the same tide according to the depth,
which should gradually decrease up to the sand ridges. (H. O. Chart,
No. 26a, shows various tracks across the bank.)

The course from the edge of the bank about 14 miles south of Orange
Cay to the edge of Cay Sal Bank northward of Dog Bocks is S. 47° W.
(S. 450 W. mag.) 50 miles.

Tides. — It is high water, full and change, on the bank, at 8h. Om.^
and the stream runs from one to half a knot an hour to within a short
distance of tl^p north side of the Middle Ground. On the flats there is
very little set, and on the south side of the Middle Ground the stream
goes regularly rouud the compass from east to south and west, from
high to low water and the contrary. On the parallel of 25^ N., about
16 miles eastward of Orange Cay, it is not high water, full and change,
before lOh. irjm., and the rise, is 3 feet, so that a vessel will carry two
hours more of high water across the shallowest part of the bank; there,
fore by entering upon the S. 35° W. (S. 34^ W. mag.) course at three-
quarters flood a steamer of 12 feet draft may cross the flats before the
tide begins to fall.

Caution — Elbow Bax^L. — ^Although the water is so shoal and clear,
the lead should be well attended and the line marked to feet (when
wet), as the vessel may be set by the tide too far to the windward on
the Long Banks, or on the Elbow Bank, to leeward, which will be indi-
cated by the gradual decrease of depth as she approaches either way
should the wind be scant. If she gets to the eastward of the track,
toward what Is called the Long Bank, the little heads of sponge and
dark fans will become more numerous. In the winter months, should
the wind haul to the southward, a sure indication of a northwester,
instead of beating about among the shoals, it will be better to anchor
and await the change that wiU soon follow.

Outer Passage. — Vessels drawing over 12 feet, as noticed above, must
pass through the XW. Providence Channel and close along the west€
edge of the Great Bahama Bank, and in the winter months, more pr
ticularly, the navigation reciuires the utmost care and attention. The
is generally but little current in the channel, except after northei
winds, when it frequently sets eastward about a knot an hour* Hj
ing rounded the Abaco light, as before directed, a N. 78^ W. (F. 79^ '
mag.) course for 90 miles should lead to a position nearly X. 70^ E. 1

DIRECTIONS. 53

68<^E. mag.), about 18 miles from, and, if the weather is clear, in sight
of Great Isaac lighthouvse, and 6 or 7 miles from the edge of the bank.

K it be found that the Isaac lighthouse will be made during day-
light, the course may be altered to west (S. 88^ W. mag.) for that pur-
pose, after running about 80 miles, but not before, in order to keep well
clear of the Gingerbread Ground, and the greatest caution and atten-
tion to soundings should be observed on approaching this most danger-
ous neighborhood. Having rounded Great Isaac, shape a course along
the cays, taking care in the night not to come within the depth of 10'
fathoms, or to bring the light to the northward of N. 42^ E. {N. 40^ E.
mag.) until Moselle Bank is passed, or, from alolt, Gun Cay light is
opened westward of Bernini Islands.

Alter passing North Bemiui, the cays umst be closely hugged, in
order to avoid the Florida Stream, which, as stated before, comes close
home to the rocks with its full strength. A short calm, within a mile
of the edge of this part of the bank, might drift a vessel so far to the
northward as to oblige her to run out around the Little Bahama Bank,
and to enter again from the eastward. Therefore, instead of attempt-
ing to beat along with a light wind, it will be more prudent to anchor
under North Bernini and await a slant to get round the Elbow.

Should a vessel be caught here in the winter, with the usual warning
of a northwester, it will be better to run back into the N W. Providence
channel, and be guided 6y bearings of Great Isaac until the wind draws
round to the northward, which it is sure to do generally in the course
of twenty-four or forty-eight hours. She may also run in between the
openings to the northward of Moselle Bank, and anchor on the bank in
4^ fathoms, 2 or 3 miles within the Hen and Chickens ; but she will be
exi>osed to a short, chopping sea, and might tiind some difficulty in weigh-
ing, and run the risk of losing her anchor.

It is advisable for sailing vessels not to attempt to cross over to Cay
Sal Bank until having reai'hed Orange Cays, as before indicated. In the
summer months, when light SE. winds prevail, a strong NW. current
frequently runs into the Florida Stream from Santaren Channel, and ves-
sels meeting with a calm or light airs at this period are frequently
drifted through the strait, even in sight of the Bahama Cays.

The NW. Providence Channel is seldom navigated from west to east,
except by vessels of war bound to Nassau. In this case, after sighting
the Elbow lighthouse on Cay Sal Bank, which should always be done if
Dossible, endeavor to make Gun Cay light well to the southward, clos-
ig in to the cays a» quickly as possible, getting on the edge of sound-
^gs at the Bernini Islands, and haul sharp round Great Isaac. Be ex-
remely cautious, however, to avoid Moselle Bank. A vessel will gen-
rally have to beat up from Great Isaac, and, as already stated, too
inch caution can not be observed in standing toward the Gingerbread

round. Should the wind hang to the southward of east, it will be

54 THE BAHAMAS.

equally necessary to guard against getting embayed in the bight be-
tween Gorda Cay and the south point of Great Bahama Island, for with
BE. winds there is frequently here a strong indraft, and no safe
anchorage.

Tongae of the Ocean. — This most remarkable inlet, or estuary of
ocean water, is about 100 miles in length, north and south, with a bight
to the eastward which comes within about 20 miles of the Exuma Cays.
This latter part is about 30 miles wide, but the northern portion, between
the west end of New Providence and Green Cay, is only about 15 to 20
miles across to Andros Island.

Andres Island, about the largest of the Bahama Islands, forms the
western side of the Tongue of the Ocean. It is low, swampy, thickly
wooded, and intersected by numerous shallow creeks, which almost cut
the island into three parts at high water. Along the eastern side, how-
ever, from High Cay to the southward, there is a narrow ridge of hills
from 70 to 90 feet high. This shore is skirted by numerous small cays
and reefs to the distance of from one to 2 miles, and, being steep-to,
is very dangerous, particularly in the neighborhood of High Cay, where
the tongue is only 15 miles across. The western shore of the island is
composed of shmy mud, like pipe clay, and is so low that in NW. gales
it is overflowed to a considerable distance inland. The water is here
80 shallow that in some places a boat can not come within many miles of
the shore.

There is no harbor whatever, but boats and small craft drawing 4 or
6 feet And their way through the reefs on the eastern side of the island
into some of the creeks, for the purpose of collecting sponge, which is
found in large quantities, and shipping the wood, which is floated into
them from the lagoons in the interior. There are but few inhabitants,
and the only settlement of consequence is at Red Bay, near the NW.
end of the island. From this end an extensive flat of sand, dry in
many places at low water, runs oft' 12 miles to the NW., and on it are
several small islets, the northernmost of whicdi are called Joulters Cays.
About 2 miles to the northward of Morgans Blufi*, a remarkable rocky
headland forming the NE. point of the island, there is an opening in
the reef, abreast of some small rocks called Golding Cays, and it will
admit a vessel of 9 feet draft into shelter within, in moderate weather.

Tides. — It is high water, full and change, on the east side of Andros
at 8h, Om. ; on the west side, off' the north end, at lOh. 30m., and off the
south end at Ih. 15m. The tidal streams meet in the center of the
bights, where the rise and fall is only from 12 to 18'inches, and the flood
runs to the eastward through the great bight, three hours after high
water.

South Cay is a small barren cay 18 feet high, and is the southern-
most of the chain of rocks and cays lining the SW, side of the Tongue
of the Ocean.

OMAXS CVT SEW PROVIDKSCE ISLAND. .■>5

i Cnt is about 5 milew NNVV. of South Cay. The
ide to the channel, which erosse--* the bank to the
e ehantiels should ever be atteni)>te<l with the wuu

be euC is to the nurtlnvaril of the l>ol)y Cays and
ith of I'igeon Cays. Through it, 13 feet may be car-

. — This entiiinee also lemls into Hurricane Hole, a
vessels of sniall dralt to the >'\V. of Pigeon Cays,
ui«l*. — On the south side of the Tongue of the
end small cliaiiuels leading ai-ross the bank to the
available for vessels of light draft.
Qiieeus, Bhtssom, Thunder, and Lark Channels,
iid Blossom Channels vessels of 14 feet draft may

ilH-iida entirely mion the eye, but is not difficult,
ithward, however, the channels are not so easily
les run rapidly through and sometimes across these
lavigatton is unsafe in the night. A vessel may,
nywhere between tliem. From the entrance to
i edge trends to the XW. and is clear for about 8
point it in tiili of ro<'ky hea^ls and reefs al) along
the Tongue of the Ocean.

* feet high near its center. To the simthward of it
e of the bank, which is here very steep-to, anchor-
It requires very great care not Ut shoot toi> far in.
^K. of the cay there are some small barren black
high, called Booby Rocks. Thence the edge of the
to the eastward, and then to the southward, am)
as received oidy a jtartial examination,
the edge of the bank takes a N\V. by N. direetion
. reef, and is very foul, there being several rocky
, ami it is consequently dangerous to approach in

'. — This very dangcnins riH-ky ledge lies on the edge
from ('litton Blnft'. It is nearly awa.sh, and the
mile to the northward of it.

le Island, beiufi the seat of government, and pos-
lOt for a few vessels of l'> feet draft, is the most
r the Bahumas, A nan-ow lidge of wooded hills
tiigh skirts the northern shoi-e almost the wliole way.
le island is .skirtwl by several small cays covered
nd within less than J mile of the edge of the
nthern part of the island Is low and covered in
nisive pine barren.^ or w(K>ds. The shore Is gener-
lallow; flat sands rnn off from it for some distance.

56 THE BAHAMAS.

An excellent carriage road runs along the northern shore, and another
crosses the island from the town to and over the BluiB Hills.

Besides Nassau and Delaport Bay the anchorages are West Bay and
Southwest Bay.

Hog Island is the earsternuiost of the cays which bound the north
side of Nassau Harbor; the western end gradually falls ft*om low sand
hills to a flat rocky point on which is the lighthouse.

Silver Cay lies 1,200 yards westward of Hog Island, and J mile from
the shore of New Providence. At about 400 vards further west^ward
is Long Cay, and 1 J miles beyond this is North Cay. There is a naviga-
ble opening for small vessels between the two lattiir cays; and also an
o])eiiing through the foul gtound about a mile to the westward of Xorth
Cay leading into Delaport Bay, a small anchorage for vessels of light
draft, but seldom used. The shore to the westward of these caya
should not be approa(*hed nearer than a mile.

Lights. — On the west point of Hog Island from a conical tower a fixed
white light is shown at an elevation of 68 feet, and should be visible 10
miles between N. 25o E. (N. 24^ E. mag.), and N. 26^ W. (N. 27o W.
mag.)> illuminating an arc of 309°. When the bar is dangerous or
impassable, a red light is shown from the flagstaff to the eastward of
the lighthouse. Obscured when bearing S. 80^ E. (S. 81^ tJ. mag.).

A light is shown from the cupola of the quarantine office on Atbol
Island, at an elevation of 50 feet, and should be visible 8 miles, between
N. 2.?^ W. (N. 240 W. mag.), and N. 68^ W. (N. 69^ W. mag.), through an
arc of 45^.

Nassan stands on the northern slope of a ridge about 5i miles from
the east end of the island, and is one of the most picturesque and well-
built towns in the West Indies. It is much frequented by visitors from
the United States and Canada, and has an excellent hotel, which is the
property of the government and i& leased to an American; open fr^om
November until May.

The health of the place is good. Yellow fever has been epidemic,
but not lately. The sickly season is from July 1 to October 15. There
is a health officer and quarantine is maintained. There are two hos-
pitals— the quarantine, which is situated on Athol Island; also a public
hospital, called the New Providence Hospital. Sick mariners are
admitted to this hospital at .$1.12 per day. The capacity is about three
hundred patients.

The authority to be called upon is the governor. The Unit<?d State?
is rei)resented by a consul and vice-consul.

Supplies. — Provisions can be obtained, but are high in price and
scarce in quantity. Rain water can be had and some of poor quahty
from the wells in the city. Beef and mutton can be had, but the price
is high.

Coal. — A moderate supply of both hard and soft coal can generally
be obtained, but at a high price, •

NASSAU — DIRECTIONS. 57

Railway. — ^Tbe mariue railway on the ^outli side of Hog
Island, suitable for vessels of 400 tons, is at present out of repair.

Dues. — ^Twenty-four cents i>er ton inward and outward for vessels
with ear^o. Fruit and salt-laden vessels are exempt outward. Wharfage,
$7.20 per KM) tons register. Light dues, 6 cents per ton register. Ves-
sels arri\'ing and departing in ballast pay 2 cents i)er register ton.

Pilots are found in numbers, and if services are offered pilotage is
compulsory, and it is necessary to take them if going over the bar inside.
Vessels under 30 tons are exempt. The pilotage fees are : 8 feet and
under, $5; 10 feet and under, $7; 12 feet and under, $10; 14 feet and
under, * Li; 10 feet and under, * 10; 17 feet and under, 824; 18 feet and
under, «2(>; and $1.20 for every half foot above 18 feet; 810 additional
is charged on steamers. Half pilotage is charged wlien vessels anchor
outside the bar.

For Cochrane Anchorage and Southwest Anchorage, one-fourth in
Mldition to the above rates. %

Steamers. — The New York and Cuba Steamship Company leave New
York every other Thursday, reaching Nassau the following Monday,
with mails, passengers, etc. The Bahama Steamship Company have a
monthly steamer to New York. A small steamer performs service
between the difterent islands.

Telegraph — A submarine cable connects Nassau with the land line
at Jupiter Inlet.

ITassan Harbor. — The entrance to this harbor lies between Hog
Island and Silver Cay; but between them a rocky bar runs right acrossf
which breiiks heavily with strong NW. and north winds, and is some-
times impassable for several days. The greatest <lepth at low water
springs is 17 feet, but this is only in a space not .V) yards wide, and ves-
sels drawing over 15 feet can not enter safely.

Direction. — When bound to Nassau from the north or NE., a wide
berth should be given to the NE. elbow of the Little Bahama Bank
until the parallel of 20^ 30' N. is reached. Approaching from the east-
ward the latitude of 25^ 45' N. should be most carefully maintained
until either the yorth end of Eleuthera, which may be seen about 12
miles off, is sighte<l, or the Abaco lighthouse, which is visible in clear
weather 16 miles away.

The current, as the Bahama Islands are ai)proaclie(l from these i)oints

and also from the east and SE., generally runs to the NW., but not

strong. To the northward of Eleuthera, however, a strong set in the

posite direction will sometimes be found aftei* NW. and ncnth winds,

d probably after fine weather on the increase of the moon, but it will

t safer not to depend ui^on this. Should the land of Eleuthera be

*de, haul round Egg Island Keef at the <listance of 3 or 4 miles, and

len Great Egg Island bears east (N. 81P E. mag.) the course will be

lont S. 340 W (S. 330 W. mag.) and the distance nearly 32 miles to

issau lighthouse.

58 THE BAHAMAS.

The first objects seeu when approfiching Nassau Harbor will be Forts
Fincastle and Charlotte, and soon after the government house, a large
square building on the top of the ridge, between them. When near the
entrance a stone obelisk will be observed on the hill a short distance to
th« eastward of Fort Charlotte, which is the westernmost fort ; and when
the lighthouse bears south (S. 1^ E. mag.) distant about ^ mile, a small,
low rock will be opened out close under the land, called Tony Rock, on
which is a pole bea(»on with a triangular frame on the top.

Tony Beac(m, open a Httle to the east of the obelisk, bearing S. 10^ W.
(S. 90 W. mag.), will lead over the deepest part of the bar, westward of
a red buoy (not always in place) on the extremity of the spit off Hog
Island; when the lighthouse bears N. 81° E. (N. 80^ E. mag.) turn sharply
to port till the western edge of Cathedral tower comes in line with west-
ern apex of roof of eastern l:)arracks bearing S. 48^ E. (S. 49^ E. mag.),
this will lead in clear of the sand heads.

Anchorage. — The best anchorage is abreast the ordnance wharf.
Vessels drawing 13 or more feet should moor head and stern, with the
heaviest anchor to the eastward. The anchors must be idanted in mid-
channel, with a suflftcient scope of chain to swing clear of the upper flukes,
and hove well taut.

The depth of water in the harbor is said to be decreasing; it is not
advisable for a vessel drawing more than 15 feet to attempt to enter.
The holding ground at the anchorage is not good.

Vessels merely wishing to communicate with Nassau, with the wind
to the southward, will find a temporary anchorage off the north side of
Hog Island, in about 14 fathoms, on the very edge of soundings. This
anchorage must, however, be approached under easy sail, and care must
be taken not to shoot too far in ; in the winter months be prepared to quit
the moment the wind threatens a change.

The best berth is with the government house bearing S. 21° \V. (S.
20° W. mag.) just open to the ea,stward of Christ Church and Hog Island
lighthouse S.VcP W. (8. 69^ W. mag.).

The lighthouse must not be brought to the westward of this bearing
on account of the shoals which run off the north side of Hog Island.

Abaco Anchorage. — Should a strong northwester overtake a vessel
at the entrance of either of the Providence (/hannels, it will perhaps be
better to remain under the lee of the south end of Abaco, or anchor un-
der the west side of the Hole the Wall, and wait until the wind moderates
and the sea goes down. It may still continue to Idow hard as the win'
draws round to tlie XE., but when it reaches this <iuarter the sea gen
erally subsides on the bar in a short time. A good sheltered berth wil.
be found under Ab.icii in II fathoms water, with the lighthouse N. 75^
E. (X. 74^ E. mag.), about J mile from shore.

^cles. — It is high water, full and cliange, in Nassau Harbor, at 7h.
30m.; si)rings rise 4 feet, neaps 3 feet. The floods set to the e^stwartl

EASTERN CHANNEL SOUTHWEST BAY. 59

and the ebb to the westward, about a knot an hour, aud at times with
greater strength.

Eastern Channel. — Vessels drawing under 11 feet may enter Nassau
Harbor from Douglas Road or tVK*!irane Anchorage, but this is only ^o be
done by the eye. A depth of \) feet may be carried at h>w water over
the eastern flats of Fort Mo!itngue, and the channel 'lies chme under the
i^outh sides of Athol and Hog Islands.

Boat Iiandinga. — ^There are two principal landings: the eastern or
government landing near the center of the town, at the foot of the pub-
Uc grounds; the other is about J mile to the we8tw%ird, at the foot of
the street leading down to the governor's house. At high water, boats
can land anywhere aUmg the sea-wall.

Bar Signals. — If the harl>or is approached with a northerly wind, and
there is an uncertainty as to the state of the bar, shouhl it be dangerous
to cross, a red flag will be hoisted (m the signal staff near the lighthouse,
and at nig^jt a red light exhibite<l. In this case it will he more prudent
to proceed to the Douglas Channel, or to the anchorage at the SW. end
of the island. Should it be passable, but too dangerous for a boat to get
out, a white flag will be hoisted, aiul the pilot boat will be seen waiting
just within the breakers, showing a flag with red and white horizontal
stripes. In this case, cross the bar, steer for the boat, and receive the
pilot. This, however, is a dangerous exjieriment for a vessel of heavy
draft, and, except in a case of great emergency, it will be far more pru-
dent to act as above stated. No attemx)t should be made to cross the
bar when dangerous.

NW. Coast. — From Nassau the shore trends westerly for 4J miles^
then WSW. 4^ miles, and thence with a slight southerly curve to the
8W. for 3J miles to Lyford Cay, which forms the northern part of West
Bay. The whole of this coast is fronted by cays and reefs, and the edge
of the bank is about a mile ofl' shore.

West Bay. — ^The west end of the island forms a small bay which
affords good shelter from all |)oints but the west, to small craft draw-
ing 7 feet water. Directly off the middle of the oitrance, nearly a mile
from either point, is Goulding Cay, a narrow, low, rocky islet about 600
yards in length east and west, and steep-to on the south side; but a
reef, which generally breaks, extends off J mile to the N W. from its west
end, and there are deep soundings about 400 yards beyond it.

Sonthwest Bay. — ^The SW. end of New Providence is formed of re-
markable bold white perpendicular cliffs about 30 feet high. The best
borage will be found with Clifton Bluff N.;J7o W.(N.38^ W.mag.),and
south extreme of the island S. 82^ E. (H. 83^ E. mag.), in 4^ fathoms
er, just on the edge of soundings, and about J mile off" shore. A vessel
y go farther in, according to her draft, and be guided by the lead,
uld she have to work up, be very careful to avoid a small rocky patch
• I feet, lying close to the edge of the bank with the bluff bearing N. 25^ •

60 THE BAHAMAS.

W. (E. 26^ W. mag.) nearly 2 miles, and the Oonch Rock S. 79° E. (S.
80^ E. mag.). The latter, however, is only about 8 feet high, and so small
that it will scarcely be visible from the deck of a small vessel. A vessel
maj^also anchor southward of this patch in 5J fathoms, with the bluft
N. 260 W. (N. 260 W. mag.) and the above rock east (K 89o E. mag.).

The Bank. — Prom New Provideace Island the bank runs to the north-
eastward about 35 miles to Eleuthera, and has on its edge a number of
small islands and rocky reefs, separated by narrow channels, the prin."
cipal of which are the Douglas and Fleeuiing Channels.

Among these small islands are several anchorages, whichmaybe picked
up from the chart.

Salt Cay Anchorage. — Salt Ca}' is a little more than 2 miles long,
but very narrow. Under its western point is a snug anchorage for two
or three vessels of 14 or 15 feet draft.

There is a rocky ledge with 13 feet of water on it, reaching off J mile
from the west end of iSalt Gay, where the sea only breaks with strong
N W. winds. The western and southern edges of the ledge are marked
by two black spar buoys, but they can not be depended upon; this chan-
nel requires a leading wind. Nassau lighthouse on with the center of
Pork Fish Eock leads up to the anchorage ; the tide runs across the fair-
way very strongly. i

Vessels leaving Salt Cay Anchorage after strong east or NE. winds
will probably meet with rollers on the bar, which will cause her to pitch
heavily, even after the wind has subsided for two or three days,

Tides. — It is high water, full and change, in Hanover Soimd, at 8h.
16m.; springs rise 4 feet, uea])s 3 feet.

Hanover Sound, between Salt Cay and Athol Island, is a good berth
for two or three vessels drawing under 18 feet. As the entrance is only
200 yards wide and open to the !NE., it is difficult for a sailing vessel
to get out, and in the winter season she may be detained for a long
time.

In a])proaching this anchorage from the XE. care must be taken to
avoid the range of low islets and coral patches which skirt the north
side of Kose Island to the distance of 1 J miles, and outside of which
soundings extend for J mile.

The leading mark into the harbor is a remarkable conical bush on New
Providence Island, near the creek village, just open east of the quar-
antine officer's house on Athol Island.

Steer in on this line till the east point of Salt Cay bears X. 20° W. ('^•
210 W. mag.) when haul up S. 20^ E. (S. 21^ E. mag.) and anchor ii J
fathoms of water with the west end of Kose Island Rocks bearing N. i ^
E. (N. 440 E. anag.)

A pilot should be taken, if one can be obtained.

Green Cay Anchorage. — To the S W. of Green Cay there is a sn f
anchorage for small vessels, well sheltered, except to the westwai .
Anchor in 3 fathoms of water with the west point of Green Cay bearu ^

DOUGLAS CHANNEL COCHRANE ANCHORAGE. 61

5". 230 W. (S. 240 W. mag.) and the south point of Sandy Cay bearing
▼est (8. 890 w. mag.).

This anchorage is unsafe with. ^W. winds.

Douglas Channel is distinguished by two pole beacons on small black
rocks in the center of the opening. It is navigable for vessels of 20 feet
draft, but it is so narrow and crooked, and the tide so rapid, that a pilot
is absolutely necessary. However, in the event of a vessel being forced
to run in without assistance, the following directions may be useful.

Directions. — Wait for the Aood tide, and strike the edge of soundings
with the beacons in one S. o3^ E. (S. 54^ E. mag.) which line will lead
close to the westward of Booby Island Ledge, and when the small pile
of stones on the west end of that island bears K 85"^ E. (X. 84° E. mag.)
haul up about S. 73^ E. (S. 74^ E. mag.) so as to pass to the windward
of the bhick buoy on the NE. edge of the shoal ground of the Douglas
Rocks. It is seldom, however, that the wind will allow a vessel to do
this, but the tide is so strong under the lee, that by proper attention she
may shoot through the narrows, which are only about 300 yards wide^
Should she be forced to make a board, it had better be done under the
west side of the Douglas Ro(?ks, where they are steep-to. If under 14
feet draft, she may shoot into the southward of the beacons; but there
is a very dangerous small roc'k, with 4 fathoms around it, right in the
middle of the opening between the Douglas and South Channel Eocks
which, on account of the strong lipplings over the dark bar that runs
across, is not seen.

If it be determined to take the latter channel a boat had better be
placed over this rock, for the tide runs here so strong that without a good
commanding breeze the vessel would be scarcely under control. Hav-
ing passed the buoy off Douglas Channel a 8. 39^ E. (S. 40° E. mag.)
course will lead between the Turtle Head and the black buoy off the
north end of the Hook Sand, whence the course maybe gradually shaped
to S. 450 W. (S. 440 W. mag.) for Douglas Boad or Cochrane Anchorage,
guided by the eye and chart. The buoys are not to be depended upon.

Cochrane Anchorage. — A convenient berth will be found in about
4 fathoms water, sand and marl, with the blockhouse on Potter Cay
nearly in one with Montague Fort on New Providence N. 79^ W. (N. 80^
W. mag,) and the house on Rose Island N, 6^ W. (N. 7° W. mag.) about 8
miles from the to;vn of Nassau. An anchorage may also be taken up a
short distance within the Douglas Channel in Shoe Hole Road, in 4 or
^ ' fathoms, but it is not good holding ground, and in a strong Norther
' isels are liable to drag. The sea in these winds seldom breaks across,
J i they may, therefore, run in here when the bar at Nassau is impas-
I )le.

ndes. — It is high water, full and change, in Douglas Channel, at 8
J 30 m ; springs rise 4 feet, neaps 2 J feet.

TSTater. — There are wells of excellent water near] the house on Rose
vidj but diflScult and inconvenient to get at.

62 THE BAHAMAS.

Fleeming or Six Shilling Channel. — ^The opeuing between the Six
Shilling Oays and the Samphire Cays is 6 miles wide, but the channel
is only about IJ miles in breadth, and lies about a mile southwestward
of the former islets. It is capable of admitting vessels of 20 feet draft
without much difficulty, provided they have some little knowledge of
the locality.

Shannon Beacon. — On the southwesternmost of the Six Shilling
Cays is the outer or Shannon Beacon, triangular shaped, 50 feet high,
and visible 7 or 8 miles. ' The inner beacons on Quintus Bocks are two
pole beacons, on the southern rocks; they bear !K. 22^ E. (X. 21° E. mag.)
and S. 220 W. (S. 21o W. mag.) from each other.

Directions. — When approaching the Fleeming Channel from the
northward run down close to the edge of the bank, which is about a
mile from the cays, and enter upon soundings with the Shannon Beacon
bearing S. 79^ E. (S. 80^ E. mag.) when the Quintus Beacon will be just
open south of it, and then steer S. 48^ E. (S. 49° E. mag.) This course
should lead about a mile southwest ward of the Shannon, and when it
bears K. 6o W. (N. 7^ W. mag.) bear up S. 25° W. (S. 24° W. mag.)
which will lead into Douglas Eoad or New Anchorage.

As the tides run right across the inner part of the channel, the flood
to the SE., the ebb to the N W., at the rate of 2 or 3 knots, steer accord-
ingly, so as to pass 400 yards to the eastward of a black buoy with flag,
moored S. 59° E. (S. 60^ E. mag.) 2 miles from the upper or NE. Samp-
hire Cay, and S. 34^ W. (S. 33^ W. mag.) 6J miles from the Quintus
Poles; these latter, therefore, will be a good guide. The buoy lies in 2
fathoms water, at the inner and narrowest part of the channel, which
is little more than a mile wide. A short distance to the NE. of the
buoy there is a small ledge of 14 feet, called the Middle Ground, with
21 feet on either side, but it had better be left to the eastward.

In beating out when the buoy eastward of the Samphire Cay bears
southward of S. 56^ W. (S. 55^ W. mag.) do not stand farther eastward
than to bring the Quintus beacons in line, and to the westward keep
the Pimlico Islands open eastward of the Six Shilling Cays. The edge
of the shoal ground on either side of the channel, however, may be seen
from aloft. A vessel may anchor in the channel, or take up a conven.
lent berth for quitting about a mile to the SW. of the Quintus Bocks, but
she will be exx)08ed to the westward. The shoal g;round extending
southward from the Shannon Beacon should be carefully avoided.

Tides. — It is high water fiill and change in Fleeming Channel at 9 T
0 m. ; springs rise 3^ feet, neaps 1^ feet.

The Pimlico Islands are a range of small, barren, low, rocky islet
At about 2 miles within the Pimlico Islands is Current Island, which
only separated from the west end of Eleuthera by a narrow channe
called Current Cut, through which the tide rashes with the force of a
rapid.

EGG REEF— GREAT EGG ISLAND. ^ 63

. — From Little Egg Lsland a chain of small islands extends
to the ENE. for nearly 10 miles, bounded ou the ntrth by a dangerous
re^ to the distance of about 2 miles. The northern pitch of this reef
lies N. 840 W. (N. 85o W. mag.) 4 mUes from Bridge Point, and X. 37^
£. (N. 36^ E. mag.) 5^ miles from tlie paps on Royal Island, which, irom
t^s direction, are seen nearly in one. From this pitch another narrow
spit of bank, equally valuable as a guide in the night as the XE. bank,
if proper attention be paid to tlie latitude and lead, runs off 3^ miles
ta the northward; it is about 2 miles broad, with a depth of from 7 to
12 fathoms on it.

The west end or elbow of the reef terminates 2^. 78*^ W. (N. 79^ W.
mag.) 2J miles from the paps, ami X. 3Do W.'(X. 40^ \V. mag.) nearly 2
mile;3 from the hill on Egg Island. Along the N W. the depths are 9 and
10 fJBbthoms at | mile from the reef, but at the elbow the edge of soundings
comes close home; this neighborhood is very dangerous, and requires
the greatest attention. George, Charles, and ftussell Islands, the east-
ernmost of this chain, lie so close together, that from the northward
they appear as one island 3^ miles in length east and west.

Rocks. — A short distance from this western elbow, and outside of
the reef, lie two dangerous rocks, called Landrail and Lortou Bocks.
Landrail Bock bears N. 12o W. (N. 13o W.) of the hill on Great Egg
Island, and !N^. 59^ W. (N. 60^ W. mag.) of the western pap on Boyai
Island. liorton Bock bears N. 14^ E. (N. 13^ E, mag.) of the hill on
Egg Island, and N. 32^ W. (K 33^ W. mag.) of the western hummock
of Boyal Island. There are numerous other rocks along the edge of
this reef having a depth of 3 J to 4J fathoms between them.

Soutliiiirast Reef lies close to the edge of soundings, and its north
end bears about S. 34^ E. (8. 35*^ E. mag.) 1^ mile from Little Egg
Island; it is 2 miles long north and south, and although nearly dry
it seldom breaks. About IJ miles S. lio E. (S 12^ E mag.) of the
south end of the reef is Current Bock, a low, black, rocky islet; and 2
miles southward of the latter is the north end of Pinilico Islands.

Uttle Egg Islands the westernmost of the chain, is a narrow rocky
islet, less than | mile long and only 15 feet high. The edge of the bank
comes within J mile to the westward of it.

Ghreat Egg Island, is a wooded islet about a mile long, ^ mile broad,

and 67 feet high, with a conspicuous white house at its center. The

opening between it and Boyal Island is little more than 200 yards

across, and the elbow at Egg Beef terminates near the middle of the

islet.

Anchorage. — There is anchorage in 8 fathoms of water on the edge
»f the bank, with Great Egg Island hill in one, with Little Egg Island
If. 230 E. (N. 220 E. mag.) about a mile from the latter, but the hold^
ng ground is not good, and a heavy swell generally rolls in round the
dbow of Egg Beef. Vessels drawing under 16 feet may go so f^r in as

-f^

-i

I' >

THE BAHAMAS.

to bring Little Egg to bear N. 68° W. (N. 69° W. mag.) and the paps
on Royal Island N. 6^ B. (N. 5° E. mag.) where they will have 3
fathoms at low water. In beating up they may stand towards the
cays by the lead, observing that the south end of Little Egg is^foul to
the distance of a long ^ mile. When standing to the southward be
careful when approaching the SW. reef.
Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at Egg Islands, at 7h. 45ni. ;
[y. springs rise 3 J feet.

Light. — A fixed white light is exhibited from the summit of Great
^^^ Island and is visible over an arc of 338^ between the bearings S.
460 W. (S. 450 W. mag.) and S. Q^^ W. (8. 67° W. mag^. Elsewhere
I the light will be pbscured^partially by the high lands of Royal Island

and Northern Eleuthera.
The light, shown at an elevation of 72 feet above the sea, should be
'': visible, in clear weather, from a distance of 10 miles.

i. As this light is erected principally for the use of coasting vessels,

J7 and is not a powerfiil light, it shimld be regarded only as a warning-

jj; hght for the dangerous reefs in the vicinity of Egg and Royal Islands.

[f . Royal Island, the largest of the group, lies parallel to and within

tf Egg Island Reef. Near the center of the island there is a conspicuous

*' large stone house, and about J mile to the S W. of it are two remark-

able woody paps or hummocks, close together, and about 74 feet high.
On the south side of the island there is a snug httle harbor for small
craft drawing less than 9 feet. In the middle of the entrance lie two
BmaU dry docks, and on entering it will be better to pass close to either
^;' ' of the points east or west of them. The best berth is with the house

% bearing K lio E. (K 10^ E. mag.) or N. 23o E. (N. 22© E. mag.) in 10

feet at low water. At about 1^ miles south of the harbor there is a
narrow rocky ledge, nearly dry, and in working up from the SW. it
\^ will be better to keep to the northward of it.

t Water. — A well of good water will be found near the house on

^^ Royal Island.

i^^ G-eorge Island, the easternmost of the group of islands I^W. of

Eleuthera, is separated from it by a narrow channel leading round to
Harbor Island. On the sandy point at the east end of the island there
is a small village of fishing huts. Russell Island is woody and about
85 feet high.

Eleuthera Island is of a very irregular shape, and may be said to-
form the NE. elbow of the Great Bahama Bank. It is thickly inhab
ited, and the soil is peculiarly adapted to the cultivation of pineapples,
which are largely exported. From Bridge Point, the northern point of
the island, to the Glass Window, the coast line trends generally south-
eastward but bends in to the westward, forming deep coves and bays
and is fronted by a range of small islets, which sweep around to the
southward, and within which there is good shelter for small coasters
drawing 8 or 9 feet.

fe^

:>.

NORTHEAST BANK — EAST HAfiBOR. 65

If ortheast Bank. — From Man Island, which forms the elbow of the
above cays, a spit or tongue of bank about 2^ miles broad, with 12 and 14
£githoms of water on it, runs off o miles X. 45^ E. (X. 44^ E. mag.), and,
with careful attention to the lead, it serves as a valuable safeguard
in approaching this very dangerous neighborhood in the night; but
the latitude is the great point to be attended to here, and, if not cer-
tain of tliis, a Avide berth should be given to this locality, which
is generally the landfall for vessels bound into the NE. Providence
Channel.

"West Harbor is entered through a small cut close off Bridge Point ;
bat it requires the aid of a pilot.

Harbor Island is the southernmost of the above-mentioned islets.
It is 3 miles long north and south, but scarcely J mile broad; the east
side is composed of sand hills about 50 feet high, and on the west side
is Dunmore Town, which is considered the healthiest spot in the
Bahamas; the south end is about the same height, but rocky and
woody, and is separated from the main by a. narrow channel, through
which vessels of 12 feet draft may enter into a small but well-sheltered
anchorage named East Harbor.
The United States is represented by an agent.
East Harbor ha^ a bar at the entrance on which the sea breaks in
heavy weather, but there is not less than 14 feet at low water. The
opening is easily recognized by the sand hills to the northward and the
ridge of bold rocky cliffs to the N W, of the Cow and Bull southward of
it. Bring the opening to bear S. 3.">o W. (S. 34° W. mag.) and run
boldly in, bordering towards Harbor Island, and anchor just within the
bar in 3J fathoms water. The tide runs through with great rapidity,
and it is therefore necessary to moor. Vessels are prevented from
going farther in by an extensive shallow sand tiat, wliich separates this
anchorage from that off the town, and, being eximsed to the NE., this
place is difficult to get out of, and consecjuently seldom visited. It
would be found, however, a safe refuge for a vessel caught in the bight
between it and James Point.

Vessels entering this harbor by the south bar should steer for the
entrance ona course S. 3o^ W. (S. 34^ W. mag.) and keep near the north
side of the channel, as the shoal extends from the vsoutli shore nearly
half way across. There is always a swell on the bar, even in light winds,
and the tides run strong.

Anchorage can be foun<l in 3} fathoms with Dunmore Point bearing
X. 10c> W. (X. 11^ W.mag.) and the south entrance point N. 74^ E. (X. 73^
C. mag).

Mail by sailing vessels fortnightly to Nassau. Xo telegraph com-
nunication. Water may be had, but no other supplies.

East Coast. — Cow and Bull, are two very remarkable round-
leaded black rocks from 20 to 30 feet high, at the south end of a very
iw neck of land which nearly divides the island into two parts, and
18402 5

THE BAHAMAS.

Li •

:if

b..

jUvSt SW. of Glass Window, where the sea has pierced a large arch
throuffh the low, flat ridge of cUfts. Tlie coast trends ESE. from them
for 14 miles to James Point.

At James Point the reef runs off a mile to the NE., and a small spit
of the bank 1 J miles beyond it. All this part of the island is low, with
some sand hills from 30 to 50 feet high, and is scarcely a mile broad.

From James to Palmetto Point, a distance of 17 miles, the (*oa.st
trends SE. by E. Close to the southward of Palmetto Point there is a
small opening throngh the reef carrying a depth of 8 feet, leading into
a little inlet called Savanna Sound, where there is also a settlement ,
containing about 300 inhabitants. There is here a small but good salt'
pond, but the fresh water is not good, the well being used by cattle.
To the NE. of Palmetto Point there are 10 fathoms water about 2J
miles off, but thence the edge gradually approacthes the Jjhore to a dis-
tance of a mile.

From Palmetto Point the eastern shore trends southerly 31 miles to
Eleuthera Point and is slightly indented. It is foul almost the whole
way, and closely skirted by a reef with deep soundings about ^ to a
mile outside it.

Miller Anchorage. — From Eleuthera Point the western shore trends
in\". 16 miles to Bamboo Point, and the bank extends off about a mile.
About 4 miles northward of Eleuthera Point, under Miller Ilill, which is
about 60 feet high, good anchorage will be found in 7 fathoms water,
just within the edge of the bank, but be careful to look out for a clear
spot, and leave on the approach of a westerly wind.

Rock Sonnd. — From Bamboo Point the western shore takes aNNW.
direction for 3J miles; it then turns abruptly to the SE. and round to
the eastward, forming Bock Sound, where is situated one of the largest
settlements, containing about 500 inhabitants. To the northwestward
of Powell Point there are many shallows and sand ridges, on several of
which low sand cays, called Schooner Cays, have formed, and between
which are channels capable of admitting vessels drawing less than 10
feet; those, however, bound here for fruit or stock above this draft
generally enter on the bank from the N W., through the Fleeming or
Douglas Channels. At i mile S. 17o W. (S. 16© W. mag.) of Powell
Point is a small islet called Chub Rock.

Tarpnm Bay is the next settlement on the west side of Eleuthera.
Small vessels may anchor here close to the shore, protected from the
westward by numerous sand bores nearly awash at high water. There
are 500 persons at this settlement, and there are good wells bored in
the rock.

Gtovemor Harbor is a small cove about 11 miles farther northward.
In entering this cove keep close to the south point to avoid a small rock
having only 12 feet of water over it, lying about 100 yards off, with 3
and 34 fathoms between it and the shore. The anchorage is exposetl
to westerly winds, but with good ground tackle and proper precaution

GOVERNOR HARBOR — SHIP CHANNEL. 67

there is no dauger. The best berth is in 3^ fathoms, with the north
point of Cupid Cay beiiring S. ^S^ W. {{S. 47^ W. mag.) and the south
point of Leavy Island N. .>(>^ W. (N. 57^ W. mag.)- '

The eay on the south side of tlie harbor is known lot^ally as Cupid
Cajf the one on the north side as Leavy Ishind, and the bluff inside it
as White Bluff.

PETater. — There are some wells m^ar the opposite shore about 1 J miles
finom the village, but the water is not very good. About 11 miles to the
northwestward of this, near the beach, is what is called James Cistern,
where after heavy rains abundance of good water may be obtained, but
it is scarce in the dry season.

The tTnited States is repres^^uted by an agent.

Pitman Cove, generally called The Cove, is the northernmost settle-
ment on Bleuthera. This part of the shore is bold and steep-to, and a
vessel may anchor in 4J or 5 fathoms within J a mile of it.

Directions. — Vessels bound to any of the above settlements from the
westward will not have less than 21 feet water across northward of the
Middle Ground, on a clear sandy bottom. The depth is 15 feet on the
northern edge of the Middle Ground, at about 4 miles from Finley Cay
which is very low and sandy, and in beating up the lead must be the
guide. The channel between the Middle Ground and the low rocks to
the N W. is about 4 miles wide in the narrowest part, abreast the Sam-
phire Cays, from whence it gradually opens out to the NE.

Tidas. — Itis high water, ftdl and change, on the west sideof Eleuthera,
at 9h. Om., and the rise and fall is from 2^ to 3 feet; but there is scarcely
any tidal stream until within 5 or G miles of the openings.

EzDma Bonnd. — ^From the south end of Eleuthera Island the edge
€i soundings sweeps around to the northwestward and westward as far
as the Ship Channel, then in a SB. direction for nearly 100 miles to
Great Exuma Island, forming Exuma Sound.

There are several small intricate o))enings between the cays leading
on to the bank.

Ship Channel is the northernmost and by far the best of all the
openings, and lies N. 09° W. (N. 70o W. mag.) 38 miles from the south
end of Eleuthera. At the south end of Ship Channel Cay, which
bounds the south eide of the channel and has a snmll beacon on it,
there are some conspicuous sand cliffs, which with Highborn Cay Jire a
good guide for the opening. The islets on the north side of the chan-
nel are very low barren rocks. As the opening is ai)i)roached an inner
inge of small cays, the northernmost being a bold black rock, will be
bserved at some distance within the outer islets. A stone beacon 50
set high stands on North liock, whic^h lies 100 yards southward of the
Inshroom, the northern rock, and 30 feet above low water.

With sufficient local knowledge there will be no difficulty in running

L to this opening by bringing the above beacon to bear N. 66^ W. (X.

\^ W. mag.), upon which line a vessel will carry 4 fathoms water over

_ * *

•-n'

•5.

^' •*

*,
U

•T

V-

68 THE BAHAMAS.

the bar. This channel is generally used by vessels drawing not over 12
feet, bound to or from Nassau, in this direction. The ground outside
and at the entrance is dark and deceptive, but the shallow part of the
bar on the north side generally shows itself by strong tide ripplings.

Directions. — Vessels bound to Nassau haAing entered Ship Channel,
and being about 800 yards north of Mushroom Rock, should steer S. 80^
' W. (S. 790 W. mag.) 8 miles, or until they have brought the sand cliffs
of Ship Channel Cay to bear S. 61^ E. (S. 62^ E. mag.) as the run may
be influenced by the tide. The course will then be N. 6I0 W. (K 62© W.
mag.), which ought to lead across the Middle Ground in 10 feet at low
water, avoiding the small heads, which are easily seen.

Vessels drawing over 12 feet, and as iimcli as 16, may cross the bank
westward into Tongue of the Oi'ean, and proceed to Nassau round the
west end ot New Providence Island. In this case, having brought the
sand cliffs of Ship Channel Cay to bear as above, steer S. 68^ TV. (S.
67° W. mag.) 18 miles, which course sliould take the vessel southward
of the Yellow and White Banks, and in a depth of 2^ fathoms at low
water; thence steer N. 89^ W. (west mag.) 8 miles to the edge of the
bank. Should the water not deepen as above, the tide will have set
the vessel too far northward, and she must haul a little more to the
southwarjd until it does so. As many small patches will be met with in

5«. ' the way, by no means attempt to run in the dark, or when the sun or
weather prevents the shoals from being distinctly seen. A vessel may

|f anchor anj^where, provided she has 2 feet to spare at low water.

^ . The small islets on the north si<le of Ship Channel terminate about

5 miles from the entrance.; thence the edge of the Bahama Bank sweeps
round to the eastward about 20 miles, and presents no opening what-

^ ever as far as Powell Point.

^ Tides. — It is high water, full, and change, in Sliip Channel, in High-
ly' . born Cut, and in Wax Cay Cut, at 7h. 45m., and in Wide Oi>ening, at 8h.

1*1- Om.; springs rise 4J feet, neaps 2 J. The tides run regularly in and

S out of all the above openings with great velocity, according to their

?'• breadth. In Ship Channel its rate is from 2 to 3 knots, gradually de-

*^^ creasing as the vessel advances upon the bank.

f; Allen Cays are on the north side of Highborn Cut. These cays are

V numerous, and on one of them, near the center of the group, are some

t cocoanut trees.

>f Highborn Cnt, 10 miles northward of Wax Cay Cut, is a much better

■V opening to nin through, but extremely difficult to beat out of. It is

% easily recognized by Highborn Cay, which bounds the south side of the

^ channel, being the highest of the whole range.

C V7ax Cay Cut has the same de]>th as Wide Opening, but is very

V- narrow and intricate. The channel lies close to the rocks on the south

\^ side and in the narrowest part is only 200 yards wide. Wax Cay, on
the north side of the cut is 93 feet high, while the cays to southward
are only 50 and 00 feet, this serves to point out the cut. The bank herf

{\ e:(tends out f mile from the islands.

WIDE OPENING EXUMA HARBOK. 69

Wide Opening, 10 miles southward of Wax Cay Cut, is more read-
ily recognized by the great distance between the large cays/which are
here 50 feet high and about 3 miles apart, forming a bight to the WNW.

VesselH- drawing 10 feet with the aid of a pilot may use this channel,
and run a<;ross to the Tongue of the Ocean, about 30 miles to the
westward; or under the lee (if the eays, and round the east end of 'Sew
Providence into Nastsau. Prom Cistern Cay, on the XW. side of this
opening, the range takes N. 10^ W. (N. 17^ \V. mag.) direction and
becomes somewhat more elevated.

Conch Cnt is difficult to recognize, txom the similarity in appear-
ance of the adjacent cays, which are from 30 to 50 feet high. It is only
adapted to small, handy, fore-and-aft coasters.

Gkdliot Cnt is 28 miles SE. of Conch Cut, but th^ opening is so dif-
ficult to recognize, so narrow and intricate, and the tides rush through
it with such velocity that it is seldom used by the smallest craft.

▲dderly Cay lies about 9 miles SB. of Galliot Cut and 25 miles to
the NW. of the beacon on Stocking Island. A stone beacon, 30 feet
high, stands on the cay. To the southward of this beacon there is a
channel and harbor for small craft. There is a well of good water on
the west end of Lee Stocking Island and a cultivated salt pond on
Norman Pond Cay, westward of it.

Great Exuma Island is merely separated from Little Exuma by a
small, shallow channel, almost fordable at low water.

The south shore is generally low and swampy, and skirted by sand
banks and small cays, among which boats can only navigate at high
water. The north shore is more firm and elevated, varying from 50 to
100 feet in height.

The island contains 2,300 inhabitants, but as there are no large salt
ponds they are scattered about and eiuploye<l in raising stock and pro-
visions; it is, consequently, only visited by small coasters, who convey
the produce to Nassau. The whole of the northern shore is skirted by
a hue of narrow, woody islets and small, barren rocks to the distance of
from one to IJ miles, and within them there are several secure harbors
for vessels drawing as much as 14 or 15 feet. The channels, however,
are so exceedingly narrow and intricate as to be quite impassable to
strangers, and even with the assistance of a pilot there would be con-
siderable risk in a vessel of this draft beating out. Those, however,
drawing 12 feet will not have this difficulty, as they can run in at the
east end and out at the w(»st.

Stocking Island, the largest of the islets on the northern shore of
Great Exuma is 3 miles in length. Under its western side small ves-
sels may careen alongside the rocks.

Beacon. — Near the center there is a remarkable round hill, 100 feet
Ixigh, and on the summit a well-built solid stone pillar, 28 feet high,
which is the tlrst object seen from the oflflng, and an excellent guide.

Eznma Harbor. — The eastern channel lies between the small, low
rocks, about 4 miles to the eastward of the beacon, and X. 11^ E. (X,

70 THE BAHAMAS.

10^ E. mag.) of the ruins of Rolle Towu, which are conspicuously sit-
uated oil the east end of the rising ground on Great Exurna. Man-of-
.War Cay extends oft* about a mile from this part of the shore, and on
its north side are the ruins of a small battery. No safe directions can
be given for this channel, the pilotage depending entirely upon the eye.

The western channel is 3 miles to tlie NW. of the beacon, and is much
easier of access than the other. The opening between Conch and Chan-
nel Cays is a mile wide, and serves to point it out, for the low, small
rocks lying between Stocking Island and the former cay are close to-
gether. The entrance, however, is barred right across, leaving a small
cut, 400 yards xside, close up to the reef, which runs oif about 400 yards
from Conch Cay; 21 feet may be carried through this cut into an anchor-
age, with 5 fathoihs water, within 200 yards of the SW. side of the
above reef. It is, however, scarcely safe in the winter season, as it is
quite exposed to northwesters.

Directions. — The mark to cross the bar is Industry tree (a remarka-
ble large tree, standing on the summit of the highest hill on this part
of the shore), in line with the east side of some small, low, black rocks,
named Smith Cays, lying under it, a short distance from the land, bear-
ing S. no W. (S. 10^ W. mag.), but the vessel should be hauled up the
moment she is within Conch Eeef, for the space is very confined. As
before stated, vessels of 11 and even 12 feet may i^roceed as far as they
like to the eastward, provided they take high water to cross the flats
westward of the beacon. All those outer cays lie within about \ mile
of the edge of soundings, and commence nearly abreast the middle of
Little Exuma, about 3 miles from the shore.

Little Eanima Island is verv narrow and low. It contains about
160 inhabitants, and the chief settlement is about 3 miles from the east
end in the vicinity of a valuable salt pond. There is anchorage oif this
part of the shore, but it is an extremely exposed position, and only
visited by a few small vessels, who take a favorable opportunity to ship
the salt. Tho^e employed for this purpose generally come from Nassau,
with a pilot on board, and no stranger should attempt to api)roach this
island without one.

Off the east end of the island are some small cays. White Cay, the
most distant, is 11 miles from the nearest part of Long Island.

Long Island is 57 miles long in a SE. by 8. and NW. by N. di-
rection, and at tlie south end, which is tlie broadest part, it is 3J miles
across, but in several places it is scarcely a mile. The vrest side of
the island is only navigable for boats and very small coasters.

From the north end of the island a reef riuis off J mile, and the bank
extends about a mile outside that. There are also some detached reefs
off the N W. point of the island, near the edge of the bank, about a mile
from the shore. Temporary ancliorage will be found about 3J miles
SW. of the point, just within the edge of soundings, by picking out a
clear spot, but be very cautious in rounding the north end of the island.

LONG ISLAND— CLARENCE HARBOR. 71

Prom thence the bank sweeps round to the SW. towards the Exiima
Islands, and for about 13 or 14 miles it api>ears to be quite clear of
danger for a space of 2 J miles within the edge.

From the north end the coast trends SSE. to Turtle Cove, and then
tarns sharply to the eastward to Clarence Harbor, forming a deep bight,
which should be avoided, as a heavy sea generally rolls in on this side
of the island and the shore is rocky and steep- to. A bank of moderate
depth extends out at least 4 miles to the NB. of Clarence Harbor, but
its exact limits have not vet been determined.

From Clarence Harbor the coast curves around to the southward to
South Point. At about 4 miles northward of the point Mayors Hill
rises to a remarkable sharp peak I.IO feet high, and between it and the
harbor the interior is cut up by numerous salt ponds. At IJ miles NB.
of South Point there are some conspicuous whit^j cliffs about 50 feet
high.

From South Point the western shore trends NNW. for about 14 miles,
and then bends round westward, forming an extensive bay. Sound-
ings extend from IJ to 4 miles off this part of the shore, and good
anchorage will be found anywhere with the prevailing easterly winds.
The most convenient position for communicating with Clarence Settle-
ment is with Stephenson Rock bearing N. 50o W. (N. 57^ W. mag.), in
7 or 8 fathoms water, 2J miles offshore, where there will be room to
weigh should the wind veer to the westward. Stephenson Rock is 25
feet high, and lies about 1 J miles from the shore and N. 45^ W. (N. 46^
W. mag.) from the south end of the island. Pineapples are extensively
grown on this island.

Water. — Abreast Stephenson Roc>k there is a well of excellent water
near the beach.

■

Clarence Harbor is formed between the shore and some small low
islets which extend ofli about li miles to the NW. It is capable of ad-
mitting a few vessels of 13 feet draft, but, being open to the northward,
it is much exposed and frequently very difficult to get out of. The as-
sistance of a pilot is necessary.

Snpplies. — Wood and water maybe obtained in Clarence Harbor; also
a small supply of beef and vegetables.

DirectionB. — Should a vessel be forced to run into (Jlarence Harbor
without a pilot, the following directions may be useful: The south shore
of the harbor is skirted at the back by a ridge of low hills, and on the
western fall of the highest part there is the ruin of a large building, and
about one mile to the NW. of it, at the end of the ridge, a house, and
near it a flagstaff. Run in with the staff in line, with Harbor Point
bearing 8. 1¥> W. (S. 13° W. mag.) until Lark Point bears S. 56^ W.
{B. 550 W. mag.) when haul up to S. 34o W. (S. 33© W. mag.) and anchor
in 18 feet water just within the west end of Strachan Cay. A beacon
40 feet high is erected on Lark Point, the S W. extreme of this cay, to
point out the position of the harbor.

THE BAHAMAS.

;../

J* ^

if-

The channel within is little more than 200 yards wide, and the outer
part generally shows itself on either side by the breakers, which extend
out nearly 400 yards firom the Booby Kocks ott' the north en|i of Stra<3han
Cay. Being open to the NNW., it is by no means a desirable place in
the winter months for large vessels that can not get under shelter of
the cay. The salt ponds are close to the shore, very productive, and
the salt is readily shipped.

Tides. — It is high water, full, and change in Clarence Harbor at 8h.
30m; springs rise 4 feet; neaps 2 J feet.

The Jumentos Cays. — From near the west side of Long Island a
range of low narrow islets and small barren rocks, lying nearly on the
edge of the bank, sweep around in a curve to the west and SW. to W^ater
Oay and Flamingo Cay, which is 129 feet high and the highest of the
group. From Flamingo Cay the range of islets trends about S. by E.
for 40 miles to Great Eagged Island. The islets are generally called
the Jumentos, but the pilots and wreckers give this name only to those
lying northeastward of Water Cay. These are much smaller and lower
than the others; indeed most of them are only a few feet above the sea.
There are several wide openings in the chain navigable for vessels of
light draft, and which might be used most advantageously in crossing
the bank; but the islets are so much alike that until they are distinctly
pointed out by beacons it would be extremely rash for a stranger to at-
tempt to pass through, without a thorough knowledge of the locality
and experience in the navigation of these banks.

Pear Cut, the nearest opening to Long Island, is about 53 miles west-
.ward of Stephenson Rock, between Pear and Nobush Cays, but it is only
flt for small coasters, which find a passage thence along the south side of
Exuma, and through the sand bore channels into the Tongue of the
Ocean.

Man-of-War Channel, 55 miles from the south end of Long Island^
and about !N^N W. 35 miles from an offing 7 miles east of Ragged island,
is by far the best of all the openings. Here a depth of 4 and 5 fathoms
may be carried on to the fairway of the bank, avoiding the rocky heads^
which may be seen from aloft, provided the sun is astern of the vessel
and the sky is not overclouded. The opening between Man-of-War and
Jamaica Cays is 3 miles wide. The former is 80 feet high, the latter 35
feet, and Flamingo Cay, 5 miles northward of the latter, being 1:^9 feet
above the sea, while the islets t<:> the southward are all very much lower,
the opening is somewhat easily recognized. Tliis is the northermost
channel navigable for any but very small coasters.

Directions, — As tne pilotage will mainly depend on the eye, and
judgment of the depth over coral patches — which, however, should not
be trusted without very great experience— a constant lookout should be
kept, and when running with the wind aft, and the small clouds moving
slowly, called by the pilots " flyers," the navigator will be very apt to
be deceived by their reflection on the water over the clear white sandy

NURSE CHANNEL RAGGED ISLAND HARBOR. 73

bottom, haying all tilie appearance of a rocky shoaL It will, however^
always be prudent to avoid a dark spot.

RoxBe Channel lies about S. 09^ W. (S. 68^ W. mag.)^ 58 miles,
firom the south end of Long Island^ and 3 fathoms water may be car-
ried through it, taking care to steer clear of the heads. The bottom,
however, at the entrance and for some distance in, is rocky, and being
dark is alarming, especially where the strong tide ripples over the ledges.
To the southward of this opening the cays lie close together, and are
firom 50 to 70 feet high. On the east side of Nurse Cay there are some
remarkable sand cliffs 50 feet high, and on Channel Cay, 21 feet high,
there is a beacon 39 feet in height, which serve as good guides. To
the northward of the channel the small barren rocky islets are much
lower- and more scattered. ^

Racoon Cat, lying 10 miles fuither south, is the last of the open-
ings, and is about 7 miles northward of Great Bagged Island. It is,
however, so narrow and winding as to bedifOicult of access to any but small
vessels, as the channel south of the sand spit, extending a mile west-
ward from the south end of Rac^)on Cay, carries only 12 feet. Racoon Cay
has about 25 inhabitants oh it, and possesses good water and a valuable
salt i>ond, and the salt is conveniently shipped from an anchorage close
under the west side. Vessels bound here for this purpose, drawing
over 12 feet, had better take the route around the t^uth end of Ragged
Island, and haul in round Darvill Spit.

G>reat Ragged Island is nearly 4 miles long in a NNW. and 88E.
direction, and the southern half is about 1^ miles broad, but the north-
ern i>ortion is merely a narrow neck of low land; near the south end a
woody hill rises to the height of 95 feet above the sea, on which there
is a beacon. About 700 yards N. 22^ W. (X. 2;P W. mag.) of Beacon Hill
is a flagstaff. The island contains about 100 inhabitants, and possesses
a valuable salt pond, but supplies are scanre.

Water. — The south end ot the island forms a sandy bay, and near
the center, not far from the shore, there is a well of good water. There
is also a more convenient well and with better water, in a small bay
about halfway along the west side of the island.

Ragged Island Harbor. — At the north end of (heat Ragged Island^

between it and Hog Cay, there is a small harbor capable of receiving

vessels of 13 feet draft. Tlie entrance lies close to the southward of^

Black Rock, off the SB. rocky headland of Hog Cay, between it and

the outer bar reef, lying in the center of the opening. In 1877, from 11 to

\S feet were found where 10 to 20 are marked on the plan, north of the

mter bar reef. The reel' is probably extending itself to the northward.

The usual anc^horage for vessels wishing to communicate with Great

Bagged Island is off Hog Point, as being quite as convenient and more

Basy of approach than Ragged Island Harbor. The channel is, how-

ver, oidy 100 yards wide, with a depth of 13 feet across the bar at low

yater. The ebb runs out with great force, but with the usual winds

74 THE BAHAMAS.

blowing strong there will be great risk in attempting to beat out, except
in a handy fore-and-aft rigged vessel that can insure staying.

In a case of sheer necessity a vessel may run in by the eye with the
assistance of the plan, by bringing Pig Point, the SB. exti'eme of Hog
Cay, to bear S. 60o W. (S. 59^ W. mag.), and steer for it, which wQl
lead between Black Rock and the out«r bar reef, until Pig Point and the
north end of Pigeon Cay are in one; then steer so as to pass 100 yards
from Pig Point, and anchorage may be taken up as convenient. But a
stranger should take a pilot, who will be at hand by making the usual
signal in time. Small coasters find their way out over the bank to the
westward.

Little Ragged Island is If miles long KW. and SE., and from i to
a mile broad. Its north end is low, and separated from Great Bagged
Island by a little opening nearly blocked up by small cays and rocks,
and under their lee there is an excellent boat harbor, which is entered
from the westward. Off the SE. end of the island are several small low
rocky islets, steep-to, having a dcj^th of 4 and 5 fathoms 400 yards out-
side them. Kearly 1^ miles S. 61^ E. (8. 62^ E. mag.) of the southern
islet named South Rock, and IJ miles N. 66^ E. (N. 650 e. mag.) of
Ilobson Breaker, there is a small rocky patch, with 16 feet water on it
and 5 fathoms round it.

Hobson Breaker is a small rock, lying S. 15^ W. (S. 14o W. mag.)
IJ miles from South Rock. It is just level with the sea at low water,
and always breaks even in fine weather. There is a clear passage on
either side of it.

The Brothers are a group of rocky lietuls, among which are two small
black rocks about 5 feet high. The easternmost, named Lloyd Rock,
lies S. 50 E. (8. 6° B. mag.) 5^ miles from Hobson Breaker; the other,
called Icely, is a mile farther westward. On the south side they may
be approached to about a mile, but a dangerous cluster of coral patohes
extends 4 miles to the northward of them, leaving a clear channel, IJ
miles wide, between it and Hobson Breaker. It will be better, how-
ever, to pass to the northward of the breaker, between it and the shal-
low sand spit which runs off about 2 miles WSW, of Little Ragged
Island.

Anchorage. — ^There is good anchorage under the west side of this
latter spit in 3 fathoms water, with the south end of Little Ragged
Island bearing S. 83^ B. (S. 84° E. mag.), and Wilson Point N. 7^ E.
{S. 6^ E. mag.). In standing in, however, take care to avoid several
small coral heads, which are easily seen from aloft;.

Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at Ragged Island Anchor-
age at 8h. 15m., and the rise 4 feet.

Cay Verde. — ^This narrow islet is about § mile long "NW. and SB.,
covered with low sea-grape trees and prickly-pear bushes, and fre-
quented by large flocks of boobies and man-of-war birds. The north
end is low, but the south point rises to a hill 72 feet high. On the west

CAY VERDE CAY ST. DOMINGO. 75

«ide there is a projecting sandy beach, skirted by a ledge of rocks dry
at low water, which makes landing difficult. There is anchorage under
this side in 7 fathoms water, but not to be recommended, as a heavy
«well rolls round both emU of the cay in strong breezes. A small
cluster of low rocks lies off the XW. point, and J mile NXW. of them
there are a few more just awash at high water with 4^ fathoms between
the clusters, over a dark rocky ledge. From the outer rocks a shallow
ledge runs off NN W. 2J miles.

Cay Verde hes about a mile from the SB. extreme of the Great
Bahama Bank, the east side of which from this position takes a north-
erly direction for 7 miles, and is clear of danger; it then bends round
to the NW, for 6 miles, and becomes extremely dangerous. Thence the
edge of the bank trends westerly about 12 miles, and in this space there
are a few small shallow heads, which may be seen in clear weather;
within them the ground is clear white coral sand fogr 8 miles to the
southward; the edge then curves a little to the southward, and trends
for about 15 miles westward towards the north end of Kagged Island,
and is quite clear.

Cay St. Domingo. — This little cay, only about 300 3^anls long and
15 feet high, is on the extreme south point of the bank, which forms
a narrow tougue. Two miles northward of the cay, on the western
edge of the baak, there is a dangerous coral ledge, 3.J miles long north
and south, with as little as 7*1 feet water on it. The space between is
quite clear, and a vessc*! may aiHjhor here in moderate weather, about
midway between the south end of the ledge and the cay.

A reef extends a mile N. ."57^ E. (N. 50^ E. mag.) from Cay St.
Domingo, and 3 miles in the same direction from the cay, and near the
edge of the bank there is a rocky patch with 8 feet of water, on which
the sea generally breaks. From thence the edge of the bank takes a
NE. by N. direction 18 miles, and for the first 12 miles it is quite
clear; the soundings near the edge are irregular, but a short distance
within the depths are 8 and 9 fatlioms on a clear sandy bottom. From
the above position the bank trends easterly for ''about 10 miles, and
then NE. by E. 8 miles to Cay Verde. All this part is very foul and
extremely dangerous. There is a ledge, nearly dry, called the St. Vin-
cent Rock, lying S. Gl)o W. (S. (W^ W. mag.), llj miles from Cay Verde,
and the bank within it for the space of 7 miles to the NW. is full of
dangerous small rocky heads with deep water between.

Magallanes Bank is a narrow coral ledge, about 5 miles long in a

S^E. and SSW. direction, lying N. 50o W. (N. mo w. mag.), 28 miles

rom Cay St. Domingo, and eastward 13 miles from South Head. On

the north end the depth is 5| fathoms, in the center 5;^, and towards

the south end 8 fathoms.

Qreat Bahama Bank, Sonth Side. — North of the coral ledge, north-
rard of Oay St. Domingo, the bank is free of danger for 11 miles until
rithin 3 miles SW. of the Brothers, where there are two small heads

76 THE BAHAMAS.

of coral lying close on the edge of the aoundings, and on which there
are only 2 fathoms of water. The westernmost head bears 9. 74:^. W.
(S. 730 W. mag.), 4 miles from Tcely Rock. At 7 miies K 52^ W. (S.
, 63^ W. mag.) of this there is another small head of 9 teet lying S. 52^
W. (S. 51^ W. mag.), 9 miles from the hill at Ragged Island. The bank
then trends NW. to a dangerons head, which is the SB. extreme of a
cnrious bight, about 10 miles deep, the edge of the bank trending about
north from the head tor 9 miles, and then curving around to the SW.
for 22 miles to South Head. The bank here forms a large rounded
head, and near its extremity, in latitude 22° 2'N., longitude 76° 23' W.,
there is a dangerous coral head nearly awash and not easily seen, as
the bottom is here covered with dark weed.

A very remarkable feature met with on this part of the bank is dark
discolored water, having all the appearance of rocky ground, but which
are small circuUw wall-sided holes or wells, from 13 to 24 fathonis deep,
called Blue Holes and Red Holes.

From South Head the bank trends NW. 23 miles, and thence westerly
for about 30 miles to Mucaras Reef.

All this part of the bank being studded with numerous small coral

heads and ledges, nearly dry in many i)laces, which extend from the

edge of soundings to the parallel of 22^ 40' N., is quite impassable to

strangers. There is generally, however, a depth of 4 and 5 fathoms

between the coral patches, and small vessels trading between Cuba

and Nassau manage to pilot themselves across by the eye into the

Tongue of the Ocean.
Diamond Point, the SW. extreme of. Mucaras Reef, lies S. 49° E. (S.

51^ E. mag.), 19 miles from Lobos Cay, eastward 19 miles from Cay

Confltes, and is extremely dangerous, being almost wall-sided. From

it the edge of the bank runs NW. 10 miles to a spot nearly dry, at the

east end of the Lavanderas Reef. This space is quite clear, and, in

case of need, a vessel may run on it, and anchor anywhere in 5J or 6

fathoms water, clear sandy bottom, as far as 4 miles within the edge of

the bank.

Lavanderas Reef trends W. ^ N. 5 miles, and is a narrow coral ledge
quite wall-sided to the southward. The west end lies S. 43° E. (S. 45^
E. mag.), 5 miles from Lobos Cay, and the ground between is foul.

Lobos Cay is a small rocky islet about 200 yards in diameter, and
only 6 feet above the sea. Anchorage will be found to leeward of it, in
5 fathoms water, with the cay bearing S. 66^ E. (S. fiS*^ E. mag.),. from
i to a mile distant; but care must be taken to avoid the shallow sand
bores, which will be seen from aloft, about 2 miles to the N W. of it. A
vessel may also run round the west end of these ridges by the eye, and
anchor anywhere within them. From Lobos Cay the edge of the bank
takes a NW. by W. dire<ition for 36 miles to Cruinchos Cay.

Light. — A fixed white light is exhibite<l on Lobos Cay, 146 feet above
the sea, and in clear weather should be seen 16 miles.

GUINCHOS CAY DIRECTIONS. 77

Oninchos Cay (called Ginger by the Bahama wreckers) is a small
islet formed of sand and dead bleached coral, ^nth a few stunted bushes
on it. It is nearly the same size as Lobos, and about 6 feet high.
About 8 miles NW. of Lobos Cay the edge of the bank becomes foul,
and there are several narrow sand and weed ridges, on which there are
from 2J to 4^ fathoms. Anchorage will be found in 4 fathoms water, to
the westward of Guinchos Cay, in a small clear space about J mile from
tlie cay; to the NW. and west of this, the bank is foul to the distance
of 5 miles, but thence 4 fathoms is the least water, near the edge as far
as the SW. extreme, 14 miles westward of the cay.

From the SW. ejctreme of the cay, the edge of the bank takes a north-
easterly direction and is generally clear of patches until the latitude of
23^ 30' N. is reached, when it becomes foul.

Tides. — It is high water, full and change, on the north side of the
Old Bahama Channel at 7h 40m., and the rise is 3 feet. The stream
runs on and ofif the bank from a half to a knot an hour.

Directioiis. — Vessels drawing not more than 18 feet may cross the
southern part of the bank. To do this the navigator should have local
experience of this peculiar navigation or the assistance of a pilot. In
coming from the north or NB. with this view the Crooked Island Pas-
sage should be taken, and, having verified the ship's position by sight-
ing Bird Bock lighthouse, a course should be shaped for the entrance
of the channel which' is to be ilsed. These channels are Bagged Island
Channel, Kurse Channel, and Man-of-War Channel.

If the Bagged Island Channel be used a course should be shaped
from Bird Bock for the hill near the south end of Bagged LsLand.
Great care, however, must be taken in approaching the dangerous part
of the bank to the northward of Cay Verde, which should be done, if
possible, in dayliglit, as strong currents are frequently experienced,
and vessels should enter on the bank about 6 or 7 miles to the eastward
of Bagged Island; the edge at this part is easily seen from aloft. The
current will probably be found here, setting either S W. or XW. Should
the vessel be set to the northward, Bagged Island will l)e readily dis-
tinguished by its being so much higher than the islets in the immediate
neighborhood.

Having entered upon tlie bank South Bock should V)e rounded at ^
mile distance. From this point the course is S. 70^ W. (8. (JO^ W. mag.)
8 miles, leaving the Hobson Breaker on the port hand. When the
beacon on Bagged Hill bears N. 50^ E. (N. 40'=^ E. mag.) haul up X. 33^
W. (K 340 W. mag.) 18 miles. If, afl^r running 9 or 10 miles on this
course, there should be less than 3^ fathoms, the vessel will be a little
to the east of her course on the tail of the Darvill sand spit, and should
be kept*more to the westward till these soundings are reached, and then
hauled up again.

Having run the above distance 18 miles, the course will be ]S". 45^ W.
(N. 46^ W. mag.) 25 miles, which will lead through the narrowest and

■ »

78 THE BAHAMAS.

worst part of the channel, between the Cochinos .uid the Nurse sand
banks, and a good lookout must be kept for small, black, rocky patches.
In running this course the depths ought to be from 4 to 4^ fathoms at
low water; if less is obtained the vessel will be too far to the eastward;
if more, to the westward; but remember tliat the east side is always
the safest, and take the precaution to measure the lead-line (when wet)
to feet between 3 or 4 fathoms, for the soun'lings on the chart may be
fully relied on.

It is high water full and change here at 8h. Om., and the rise and
V fall 3 feet; scarcely any tidal stream is felt. Shtmld darkness over-
take the vessel before having reached thus far, it will be better to
anchor, which may be done anywhere in safety. It would kot be pru-
^ ^ dent to attempt to beat through this part of the channel. At the end

r of the above course the vessel will be off the north extreme of the

;• Cochinos on the parallel of 22o 42' ^.^ and a west (8. 89o W. mag.)

course will lead off the western edge of the bank to the southward of
'J Guinchos Cay, clear of danger, and in from 4J to 5 fathoms water all

the way. Care, however, nmst be taken to keep on the above parallel
by checking the latitude as often as possible.
I Through Nurse Channel 3 fathoms may be carried, taking care to

steer clear of the rocky heads. After reaching a point 14 miles S. 84^
W. (S. 83° W. mag.) of Nurse Channel Cay beacon the course is N. 45<^
W. (N. 4GO W. mag.) to the parallel of 2&o 42' N.
If approaching the bank from the SE., Cfiy St. Domingo may be
^s sighted and the bank entered on to the NW. of it; but this requii^es

f: more than ordinary care. In this case, having rounded the SW. end

^ • of the cay within the distance of about J mile, steer N. 11^ W. (N.

f^ 120 \v. mag.) for 20 miles, which will bring the vessel to a clear space

'/ on the edge of soundings, where she can enter, and 6 miles further

y upon this course Ragged Island will be sighted bearing N. 45° E. (N.

\ 440 E. mag.), when the route can be taken described above. Great

t care must, however, be taken when passing the parallel of the Brothers

I • to avoid the two shoals, for these rocks will scarcely be seen from aloft,

and the run should not be made without clear daylight.
The bank may also be entered upon at Cay Yerde, and perhaps with
t . less risk. In. biking this route, having rounded the south end of the

i*; cay, steer N. 45^ W. (N. 46° W.) 10 miles and then west (S. 89^ W. mag.)

f 20 miles, when the vessel will be up to Little Eagged Island; but on

Jill occasions, when among the shoals, the mariner must endeavor not
to steer with the sun directly in his face, which will completely blind
^: him from seeng them even at a veryi short distance.

^ Remarks. — The Old Bahama Channel has been considered as dan-

gen)us and difficult to navigate?, but since the establishment o'f lights
on various points on the north coast of Cuba and that on Lobos Cay
it need not be so considered. As is the case everywhere in the viciinity
of these banks, the navigator need-* to exercise vigilance, caution, and

WINDS. f 79

judgment, but with ordinary cai^ thi^ channel presents no special diffi-
culties.

There is seldom any perceptible current in mid-channel; when there
is any it appears to depend upon the wind. .

Winds. — In the winter season, from November to March, Northers
prevail, and should the indications be such as to indicate this change
before a vessel has entered the channel, it will be better for a sailing
vessel to remain outside, and maintain a good offing to the northward
of the MaterniUos lighthouse, which will be a good guide, until the
wind veers to the eastward of north. Should the vessel have entered
the Narrows, it will be better at once to seek an anchorage on the Ba-
hama Bank, through either of the ox>enings between Diamond Point
and Ouinchos Cay, or run back and take up a position as pointed ^ut
above. .During the remaining portion of the year the wind prevails
from the east and SE., and a vessel will not be exposed to this inter-
ruption and risk, except in the case of a hurricane, which, however^
seldom occurs in this locality.

CHAPTER V.

BAHAMA ISLANDS FROM THE GREAT BANK TO NAVTDAD BAI^B:.

Little San Salvador Island is about 9 J^ miles eastward of the south-
ern end of Eleuthera Island, with which it is connected by a bank of
soundings from one to 1^ miles broad, on which the depths are from 6
to 14 ftithoms. The space between Little San Salvador and Cat Island,
whose NW. end is 10 miles NE. of Little San Salvador, is almost filled
with small rocks and dry ledges, leaving a single intricate opening .
about 2J miles from Cat Island through which small coasters carry a
depth of from 2i to 3 fathoms.

Little San Salvador is 5 miles long east and west and one mile broad.

Cat Island is somewhat in the shape of a leg and foot. The leg por-
tion, from Columbus Point to the NW. end of the island, runs nearly
straight NW., about 42 miles; the foot or south side trends west-
erly about 15 miles. The breadth is from 3 to 4 miles, and its height
varies from 200 to 400 feet; it is consequently the loftiest of the Baha-
mas; the latter height, however, is confined to a small ridge at the NW.
extreme of the island. The island is very fertile and generally well
cultivated; but, possessing no large salt ponds, the inhabitants are
scattered over it from one end to the other.

The eastern side of Cat Island, from Columbus Point to Bird Point,
30 miles distant, is generally rocky, bold, and steep-to; but from thence
it becomes foul, and is skirted by a reef which runs round the WW, end
of the island at the distance of § mile. There is shelter for boats
within the reef, and deep soundings will be found 2 miles outside.

The features of the southern shore are not quite so regular. At 11
miles S. 79^ W. (S. 78^ W. mag.) of Columbus Point, the south extremity
of the island terminates at some remarkable white cliffs. About 2f
miles west of the cliffs a dangerous reef leaves the shore and sweeps
eiistward to a remarkable bluff. This reef is reported to extend round
Winding Bay at from J to i mile from the shore, witli a break near its
west end with 15 feet water and having from 2 to 3 fathoms inside if.
About midway between the bluff and the cliff there is a small cut,
which admits vessels of 12 feet draft into good shelter at Port Howe.
This end of the island should be avoided in the night, and very care-
fully approached in the daytime.

West of Port Howe the land rises into a small peaked hill of some
height called the Hawks Nest. Hiiwks Xest Point underneath it is low

CONCEPTION ISLAND RUM CAY. 81

&nd sandy^ aud a shallow spit, stecp-to, extends westward from it nearly
1 J miles. Thence the edge of the bank takes a XW. by N. direction 30
miles, to within a short distance of Little San Salvador and about 8
mUes from the west side of Cat Lsland. It is clear as far in as the
depth of 6 fathoms, and about o miles to the northward of Hawks Xe^t
Point there is a clear grassy bottom, with 10 fathom^s, shoaling to the
eastward to 3 fathoms. On the north part of the bank deep soundings
will be found closer to the shore than at the south end. There are two
villages, called McQueen and Bight, between Hawks Nest Point and
Fernandez Cay; approaching them, the rocky heads, which can be seen
when within the 4-fath(»m line, must be carefully avoided.

Anchorage. — Vessels bound to IMght Settlement, and having passed
Hawks Xest sand spit, should not attempt to cross the bank until
about 4 miles northward of that sand spit. There is a conspicuous
bare patch about 2 miles soufli of the settlement.

Conception iBland is a dangerous uninhabitexl islet, very irregular
in shape, about 2| milen in length north and south, and If miles in
breadth near the center, which is its broadest part. Its general height
is about 90 feet, but close otf the east point there is a small islet ^ mile
in diameter, and 130 feet high, called Booby Cay. On the NW. side
there is a clear open bay, with good anchorage on a sandy bottom,
sheltered |rom NNE., round easterly to SSE. The depth is 6 fathoms
about J mile from the edge of the bank, but farther in the bottom
becomes foul.

A reef, which skirts the 8W. aide of the island at the distance of
about ^ mile, extends in a curve to the south-eastward, and terminates
IJ miles east of the south point, and at its extremity there is a cluster
of small dry rocks running to the northward. From a mile eastward of
the reef the edge of the bank takes a northerly direction, passing about
2 miles eastward of Booby Cay, and is full of shoals; the approach to
this side is extremely dangerousf even in daytime, as the dark rocky
heads are difficult to distinguish from the ocean water. The bank ex-
tends off 3^ miles from the north side of the island and is equally dan-
gerous; it is pretty clear in the center, with variable soundings; but
along it« western side there is a dry i*eef (Southampton Reef) on
which the sea always breaks, extending north 3J miles from some
small cays, near the N W. end of the island.

Water. —On the western side of the island, about J mile southward
of the south point of the NW. bay, is the entrance of a small creek
leading into a lake in the center of the island, and near the mouth
there is a well of good water.

Current. — The current in the neighborhood of Conception Island
generally sets strong to NW.

Rom Cay is about 9^ miles in length, east and west, 5 in breadth
at the east end, and 2 at the west. The SB. end rounds a little, and
forma two remarkable white cliffs about 90 feet high, which may be
18402 6

'. V!'

BAHAMA ISLANDS.

EV'

I ' f !

IS'

m
» •

seen by day 9 to 12 miles off; several o( the hillocks on the cay are
somewhat higher than this. A reef commences at the south point of
the cay, ami sweeping off nearly a mile from the shore, terminates off
some dry wells at the SE. point; it is nearly steepto, and should be
carefully avoided in the night. The Ciistern side of the cay to the
northward is bold and free of danger; and a bank of soundings extends
from it ^ miles, and runs out in a spit to the northeastward 5 miles from
the XE. end of the cay, on which the depths are from 12 to 20 fathoms.

North Side. — The north side of Rum Cay, from about 2 miles to
leeward of the NE. point, is foul all the way to the NW. point, for
about i mile from the shore, and the soundings extend off about a mile,
increasmg in distance to the westward. From the XW. point a nar-
row spit of a dangerous reef extends out in a northerly direction for
upwards of 2 miles.

West End Anchorage. — Temporary anchorage may be found in 7
fathoms water on the edge of the bank, off the west side of the cay,
about J mile off shore, with the X W. point bearing N. 1^ E. (north mag.)^
and the SW. point, which is low and sandy, S. 52^ E. (S. 53^ E. mag).
There is an excellent salt pond at this end of the island, and the salt
is easily shipped at this anchorage in moderate weather.

St, George Bay. — Prom Sandy Point, the SW. extreme, the shore
trends eastward to within a short distance of the south point of the
island, when it bends round to the SE. and south, forming St. George
Bay, at the head of which is the principal settlement, and near it a
valuable salt pond. The bank extends southward about 2 miles from
the shore, with a general depth on it of from 4 to 6 fathoms, but from
Sumner l*oint, the south extreme of the cay, the edge of the bank is
fringed by a narrow broken ledge of coral, which extends westward
about 5 miles, with from 9 to 15 feet water on it, and on which the sea
breaks in heavy w^eather.

Within the reef there is excellent anchorage in St. George Bay,
secure at all times except in the hurricane season. Vessels leaving the
anchorage at Rum Cay for the northward had better piiss round the west
end of the cay, but they should clear Conception Island before dark, as
the current frequently sets strong to NW,

Port Nelson. — The entrance to this anchorage westward of the settle-
ment is through a brciik in the reef about ^ mile in breadth, and the
least water is 4 fathoms. The channel, however, is intricate, and should
not be attempted by a stranger, although the bottom is easily seen, but
the least dark spot would probably mislead. Stand in with two small
houses on Cotton Field Point, about IJ miles westward of the settle-
ment bearing N. 13^ E (N. 12^ E. mag.) until the wharf of the settlement
bears S. 89^ E. (etist mag.); then steer for the wharf and anchor in 4
fathoms water, fair holding gromid, and well protect.ed from all winds.

The entrance through the reef is known by the white house, which
can hardly be mistaken; the depth of water is about 4^ fathoms, and a

SAN SALVADOR OR WATLIXG ISLAND. 83

vessel can anchor anywhere east or west of the entrance in 5 fathoms,
but not with it open, as a rather heavy swell sets in.

Or a vessel may steer in betweeii Sandy Point and the west end of the
reef fronting St. George Bay. This p<issage is clear of danger, but such
Sbs mav be avoided by the eye.

Supplies. — ^The water on Rum Cay is of good qusility, but the supply
is small. Fresh meat and poultry may be obtained.

The Currents are variable, and irregular in force. They may gen-
erally, but by no means as a rule, be expected to set strongest at full
and change of the moon, and tlien to NW. or SE.

San Salvador or Watling Island is about V2 miles in length north
and south, and from 5 to 7 in breadth ; its shores are slightly indented.
The interior is largely cut up by salt-water lagoons, separated from each
other by small woody hills from 100 to 140 feet high ; it is, however,
considered to be the most fertile of the group, and raises cattle and the
best breed of sheep in the Bahamas. The inhabitants, about 500 in
number, are sciittered about the island; there is no safe anchorage ex-
cept at the north end, where there is a reef harbor for coasters.

A bank, with from 6 to 15 fathoms water on it, over a dark bottom,
extends 2 J miles S. 44^ E. (S. 45o E. mag.) from the SE. point of the
island, and on the inner part of it, at about ^ mile from this point, are
some small but remarkably high black rocky islets, named Hinchinbroke
Eoeks.

The eastern shore of the island is fringed with a reef for about J mile,
which sweeps around the north end of the island 3 miles from that shore.
On the ei^stern shore soundings extend outside the reef a mile, and 1 J
miles from the north end of the spit.

There are several small cavs on and within the reef off the north side
of the island. White Cay, so called from its appearance, is the north-
ernmost, and lies about J mile from the NW. extreme of the reef. About
a mile northward of the NW. point of the island is Green Cay, and
round the south end of it is the channel, with 7 feet water, leading into
the anchorage for coasters.

The bank does not extend more than J mile from the west side of the
island, in many parts much less, and the edge is generally very foul.
There is anchorage witli the usual winds in about 8 fathoms, off the
principal settlement nanuMl Cockburn Town under Riding Rock Point.

Vessels should anchor as soon as soundings of from 5 to 8 fathoms are
obtained as the edge of the bank is v(^ry steep. The SW. end terminates
in a long and low sandy point which is st(*ep-to. About 2 miles east-
ward of the SW. point, in a small bay just under some houses on rising
ground, there is a contined anchorages for small craft under the lee of
the reef, which extends a short distance from the shore.

G-ardener Rocks. — A buoy formerly marked these rocks.

Light. — A lightliouse .10 feet high stands on the summit (named
Dixon Hill) near the NE. point of Watling Island. From it is exhib-

84 BAHAMA ISLANDS.

ited a double-flashing white light, every half minute, showing two flashes
of two and a quarter seconds' duration each, with an interval of four
and a half seconds between the fla^shes. The light is elevated 165 feet
above the sea, and should be visible in clear weather from a distance
of 19 mile^s.

The light is partially obscured by high land on the southern and
western parts of the island between the bearings of N. 1° W. (X. 2^
W. mag.) and N. 6© E. (N. 5^ E. mag.), N. 8^ E. (X. 7o E, mag.), and
K m^ E. (X. 650 B. mag.); and from N. 74^ E. (N. 73o E. mag.) to S.
870 B. (S. 880 E. mag.).

CautioD. — From the lighthouse the outer edge of the reef bears
N. 220 W. (X. 230 W. mag.), distant 5 miles. Mariners are cautioned
against approaching too closely the reef surrounding Watling Island.

Samana or Atwood Cay is 0 miles long in an east and west direc-
tion, and about 1 J broad. Its surface is liilly and uneven, and about
one-tliird the way from t-l^e west end it rises to the height of 100 feet;
it is uninhabited, and lies entirely out of the usual track of vessels.
The north side of the cav runs nearlv straight and is skilled bv a reef
for about J mile. On the north side, about IJ miles from the west
end, are three dry rocks close to the edge of the reef; the west
point is low and sandy, and from it a narrow reef nearly dry and steep-
to extends westward. This very dangerous reef is said to extend from
4 to 5 miles from the west end of the island, the extreme point lying 2
miles farther out than is represented on the charts. From the west end
of the cay, the southern shore trends ESE. 3 miles, when it falls back
to the northward and forms two small bays. A dry reef sweeps out to
the southward in front of the bays, and within it at the eastern end are
two small cays. There is h^re also a remarkable white cliif, and the
shore thence trends EXE. 4 miles to the east point of the island.
About i mile from the east point is a cay a mile in length ea.st and
west, and 75 feet high, and 2 miles east of it another, much smaller
and lower. The reef which skirts the southern cays continues in an
unbroken line for more than a mile eastward of the latter islet, termi-
nating in a detached breaker at the eastern exti'eme.

Anchorage. — ^There is anchorage in 8 fathoms of water, on the SW.
side of Samana Cay, about 2 miles ,from the west i)oint, and 600 yards
offshore, but the holding ground is not good.

Water. — Good water can be obtained by digging wells.

Crooked Island Passage is the best one for vessels bound to the
northward or northeastward from the passage between Cuba and Haiti.
It is also constantly used by vessels bound from the United States to
X)orts on the south side of Cuba, to Jamaica, and the Isthmus of
Panama.

Since the establishment of the excellent lights on Bird Eock, Castle
Island, and the Great Inagua, there is not the least difficulty.

Currents. — Before Bird Rock light was estjxblished several vessels

CROOKED ISLAND PASSAGE DIRECTIONS.

were lost on Watling Island, being swept there by the current, which
almost everywhere through these islands sets to the westward at the
rate of from ^ mile to a mile an hour.

This set is occasionally stronger or weaker, according to the varying
force of the trade wind. In the neighborhoo<l of .Conception Island it is
said generally to run strong to the NW. ;Some observations tend to
show that after Northers, or on the increase of the moon, the current
sets to the NE., and on the decrease of the moon, as it approaches to
change, there is a similar set to the SW.

In November, 1890, the U. S. S. Enterprise found the following cur-
rents:

Between San Salvador and Bird Bock, otf Crooked Island, a current
was found of about i knot setting WNW,

Between Castle Island and Cape Maysi the current encountered was
slight at first, setting U) the westward, but, on approaching Cape
Maysi, and after sighting the light, a current was found of about 1^ knots
per hour setting to the westward and gradually decTcasing in force
until after the light bore west (S. 81)o W. mag.), when the current
changed to the southward and westward with gradually diminished
force.

DirectionB. — ^From the Sonthward. — If intending to take this pas-
sage it will be advantageous t-o get well up under the N W. end of Haiti
before shaping the course for Castle Island. In the winter season, how-
ever, when the wind generally blows hard from the ENE., accompa-
nied by a strong lee current and heavy sea, this will be a tedious matter,
and it may be found more convenient to double Cape Maysi as soon as
it can be given a fair berth.

From a position 10 miles eastward of the (»ape the ccmrse to Castle
Island will be about N. 10^ W. (N. 11^ W. mag.) 115 miles, but the cur-
rent must be allowed for, and other circumstan(!e.s of wind and weather.
There will not be much difficulty in this, for if there is a current it will
be found runoing directly across the vessel's track either way, but sel-
dom to the eastward.

Having passed Custle Island, the course to the south end of Fortune
Island will be N. 10^ W. (N. 11^ W. mag.) 27 miles, and thence to the
NW. end of the Bird Rock Reef, north (N. 1^^ W. mag.) about 20 miles.
No current will be found under the lee of the islands. Should the ves-
sels be caught in the Crooked Island Passage by a northwester, instead
of beating about, which would be attendee! with considerable risk, it will
be better to seek shelter, when the wind has drawn round that far, mider
the south end of Fortune Island; or run out and keep under the lee of
Acklin Island, under easy sail, until the wind draws round to NE.,
which it will do within two or three days.

Should the wind veer to the southward before the vessel has entered
the passage she nmy haul round the NW, end of Great Inagua, and
pass out on either side of Mariguana, but this should be done in day-
light and a wide berth given to Hogsty Reef.

86 BAHAMA ISLANDS.

Diana Bank bears S. 10^ E. (S. 11^ E.mag.) 19 miles from the south
end of Long Island. This bank of sand an<l coral, 4 miles in extent
east and west, and 3 miles north and south, has from 9 to 15 fathoms
of water on it, and 20 fathoms on its edge, and may be made a useful
guide to vessels beating through Crooked Island Passage in the night.

The Crdoked Island Group of islets rises from a triangular- shaped
bank. Bird Rock, the NE. point of Acklin Island, and the SW. j)oint
of Castle Island form the angular points.

Bird Rock, about 10 feet high, lies K. 22^ W. (N. 23o W. mag.) about
a mile from the NW. point of Crooked Island. Close to the southward
of it there is a narrow intricate opening in the reef leading into a small
well-sheltered basin named Portland Harbor, in which there are 3 J and
4 fathoms water; but it requires the assistance of a pilot. Vessels
approaching the light must pay careful attention to its bearings, as the
point of the reef extends about IJ miles northwestward of the tower
and the current to the northward of Crooked Island is variable.

Light. — On Bird Island from a stone tower, a white light revolving
every 1^ minutes is shown at an elevation of 120 feet, and should be
visible 17 miles.

Crooked Island, the iN^W. on the bank, has an anchorage near its
SW. end on the edge of the bank full | mile off shore, but not to be rec-
ommended. Thence the western side of the island trends NN W. i W.
9 miles; the shore is low, woody, generally foul, and the edge ot the
bank is about 600 feet off shore. Three mile^ inland, the Blue Hills
rise to the height of about 200 feet.

A dangerous reef extends off NW., 2 miles from the l^W. point of the
island ; it then bends round gradually to the east and ESE. and skirts
the northern shore at the distance of about a mile. From the NW.
point of the island the northern shore takes an ESE. and SE. direction
11 miles, and then trends eastward for about 8 miles, to its east end.
At the bottom of the bight are the Major Rocks, and about 4 miles
to the eastward of them Mount Pisgah rises abruptly from the shore
to the height of about 200 feet.

Crooked Island Anchorage is 2^ miles southward of the l!^\Y. pointy
nearly abreast a remarkably large house standing close to the shore.

Landrail Point, a short distance to the northward of it, is low and
rocky and has a small flagstaff -near the extremity. The shore to the
northward of this forms a low, sandy beach.

The Anchorage must be approached with great care, under easy
sail, and be prepared to come-to the moment the soiuadings are obtained*
or to back off if necessary. The edge of the bank will be seen from
aloft; the bottom is sand and grfiss, good holding ground. In the
winter season it must be left the moment the wind veers to the south-
ward of east, but in the summer months a vessel may remain, as the
wind is generally light from this quarter; it will, however, be more pru-
dent to keep off under sail.

'ii^*?:

FORTUNE INLAND ^ACKLIN ISLAND. 87

■m

> a

During strong westerly winds the best landing place is close north- "<

ward of Landrail Point, inside a reef running a little to the northward,
and which affords shelter.

Supplies. — A supply of stock and vegetables may generally be ob-
tained here, but it will probably detain a vessel some hours.

Water. — There are some wells of good water on the south end of the
island, called the French wells; but as the anchorage here is full | mile
from the shore, it is inconvenient for watering. There is also a conve-
nient well of excellent water near Landrail Point, and a good landing
place on the beach northward of it.

Tides. — It is high water, full and ciiange, at Crooked Island, at 7h.,
and the rise about 2^ feet. ,'*|

Fortune Island or Long Cay is separated from Crooked Island %

by a small channel through wliich wreckers drawing under 7 feet water ^

find their way into shelter from NVV. winds. The island is 9 miles in
extent NE. by N. and SW. by vS., varying its breadth from IJ miles at
the south end to barely J mile at the north extreme. About 2 miles
from the south end a hill rises gradually to the height of 110 feet, and
is a good landmark approaching either from the northward or south-
ward. Near the center of the island, on the west si<le, is Alver Town,
the chief town and post-ottice, and -at the back of it a very productive
salt pond. The whole shore is steei)-to; nevertheless, with th»* usual
easterly winds, the few vessels that come here for salt find anchorage
off the pond, but so close in that there is no room to swing, and it is
dangerous; they must be prepared to quit the moment a change threat-
ens. Small vessels will find anchorage in 5 fathoms on a sand spit, off
the town, with the Lookout (a conspicuous wooden structure) bearing
S. 550 E. (S. 060 E. mag.).

With strong NB. winds there is a heavy sea along the west coast of
Fortune Island. Good anchorage may be then found in from 4 to 5
fathoms about COO yards southward of tlie south point of the island.

There is frequent communication by steamers to and from the United
States and the West Indies, as also with Nassau by schooners.

Fish Cays. — From the ijouthern end of Fortune Island the bank
curves into the SE. to the Fish Cays and then takes a southerly direc-
tion to Salina Point.

Anchorage. — Abreast Fish Cays the edge of the bank is clear for
about i mile inwards, but elsewhere it is foul and dangerous, until close
up uuiler Fortune Island, where there is a clear spa<*e on which a vessel
will find good shelter from Northers on excellent liolding ground, with
the south i>oint bearing N. 3:P W. (N. M"^ W. mag.), distant f mile,
and a small sand bore, which breaks, S. 8;io E. (S. 84^ E. mag.). Be
careful not to shoot in too far, as the ground becomes foul a very short
distance within the line of soundings.

Acklin Island, the largest of the gnmp and containing about 400
inhabitants, is separated from Crooked Island by an opening about 2.J

BAHAMA ISLANDS.

['*

if.'*

%i^

lil^

^.^.

miles wide, but so shallow that it may be waded across at low water.
The extreme length of the island from the NE. to the SW. point is 43
miles, and its breadth varies from about one to 7 miles. A bank of
soundings extends east and J^E. 4 miles from the NE. point, having a
general depth of from 5 to 12 fjvthoms on it; but 8. 72^ E. (8. 73° E-
mag.), 4 miles from the point, there is a dangerous rocky pateh nearly
awash, called Northeast Breaker, about J mile in extent, which gener-
ally breaks. It lies' within J mile of the edge of the bank, where the
depth is 20 fathoms, and bears I^. 67^ AV. (N. 68o W. mag.), 11 miles
from the NW. end of Plana Cay Reef.

From the NE. point the eastern shore trends about south 12 miles,
with a slight curve inwards, to Creek Point, where the island is a little
more than a mile in breadth; the shore is foul to the distance of about
i mile; about 2 miles from the former point there is a small reef harbor
for wreckers. From Creek Point the shore takes a SW. direction for
35 miles, and is skirted by a reef to the distance of from J to IJ miles.

About 9 miles to the SW. of Creek Point, the shore falls back to the
westward and forms Abraham Bay, in front of which there is an
opening in the reef leading into an exposed anchorage; but this side of
the island is very dangerous, and had better be avoided altogether.
At the distance of 6 miles N. 68^ E. (N. 67^ E. mag.) from the south
end of the island there is a remarkable prominent bluff headland,
named South Bluff, with a range of hills at the back about 150 feet high.
Salina Point is on the west side of Acklin, about 3 miles from the south
end of that island. The point is low and bushy, but the land rises
gradually to the eastward to the heigth of 150 feet. To the southward
of the point there is good anchorage in Jamaica Bay, w^ith the prevail-
ing winds, in 9 fathoms water, on the edge of the bank. From Salina
Point the coast trends northeastward and the western side of the island
is irregularly shaped, and from the shallow water on the bank only
accessible to boats or very small coasters.

Castle Island is 2 miles in length in an east and west direction, % mile
in breadth, and ab(nit 30 or 40 feet high. The 8E. end forms a remark-
able bold sand cliff; the SW. end runs off to a low sandy point. The
edge of soundings is not more than ^ mile from the south and west
sides of the island; but a bank with 0 to 12 fiithoms on it extends off
to the distance of 3 miles from the east side, and then trends towards
South Bluff of Acklin Island. A chain of small dry rocks runs to the
northward for about 1 J miles from the NE. etid of the island, half way
to the south end of Acklin Island. The NE. rock (Castle Rock) is
very remarkable, resembling an old castle. Between it and Acklin there
is a passage for boats.

Light. — On the SW. i>oint of Castle Island, and 270 yanls from the
extreme, stands a conical tower 114 feet high, from which is shown a
fixed white light which illuminates an arc of 330^; it is 123 feet above
the sea, and visible 17 miles.

The Mira Por Vos are a cluster of small low, barren, iY>cky islets

MIRA POR VOft Is?LETS PLANA CAYS. 89

at the north or thick end of a pear-shaped bank, 11 miles iu length SSE.
and NNW., and 6 miles in breadth about 3J miles from its NW. ex-
treme. The north isle, named North Rock, is about J mile in length NE.
and 8W*, very narrow, and from 15 to 20 feet high. It lies about J
mile within the edge of the bank, and the soundings around it for about
400 yards are from .") to 9 fathoms.

Northeast Rock lies S. .")2^ .E. (S. .13^ E. mag.), about 2 miles from
North Rock/ and is of about the same dimensions, This islet is foul to
ttie NE. to near the edge of the bank, a mile distant; to tlie NVV. a ledge
extends off J mile, and between it and North Rook the depths are 5, 6,
and? fathoms; to the SW. it is connected to South Cay by a reef nearly
dry, on which there are several dry rocks.

South Cay is the largest of the cluster, being f mile in length NE,
and S W., and nearly J mile in brea^lth. Close off its eastern side there
is a remarkable square bhick rock. In the center of the cay tliereis an
uncultivated salt pond; and on the south shore are two reuiarkable
sand hills about 30 feet high, which may be seen from the HE. point of
the bank. Iu moderate weather, Mith the usual easterly winds, a ves-
sel may anchor about J mile from the west end of this cay, in 8 or 9
fathoms, clear sandy bottom.

To the SE. of the above cays there are several detached coral ledges,
on which their are oidy 3 fathoms water, and a heavy swell generally
rolls over them, which renders them dangerous. Tbe (mtermost to the
SB. lies S. 440 e. (S. 45^ E. mag.) 4J miles from the saud hills on South
Cay, close also to the eastern edge of the bank, and S. 51^ W. (S. 50^
W. mag.) d miles from Castle Island. It is 2i miles within the SE.
extreme of the bauk and IJ miles from the SW. side. In these direc-
tions the soundings are from 7 to 10 fathouis, which depths will be car-
ried all along from IJ to 2 miles within the western edge of the bank
up to South Cay. Tlie lead will therefor/3 be of great use in approaching
from these quarters, and a bearing of the cay will indicate when south-
westward of the coral ledges.

Tide and Current. — It is high water, full and change, at the Mira
Por Vos Islets, at 9h. 30m., and the rise is about 3 feet. The current
generally sets SW. over the bank a mile an hour.

The Plana or Plat Cays are two islets eastward of Acklin Island,
and are separated from each other by a narrow channel. The eastern
cay, which is 5 miles loug east aiul west, and nearly a mile broad, is
skilled by a reef extending ^ mile from the north and south sides, and
J mile from the east end. The west end of the cay forms a narrow
point, is steep-to, and at about a mile from its extremity there is a hill
70 feet high, but the rest of the cay is low and flat. A bank, 3 miles
broad, extends ESE. nearly 4J miles from the east end, and the general
depth on it is from 5 to 8 fathoms; but on the southern edge there are
some dangerous shallow spots, and the whole bank being a dark rocky
bottom not easily distinguished, this end of the cay should be ap-
proached very cautiously.

90 BAHAMA ISLANDS.

The western cay is oval-shaped, 2| miles long XNE. and SSW., and
IJ miles wide. A reef extends 2i miles northward from the NW. end,
and at the north extremeit is nearly dry; it then turns to the SE. and
joins a cluster of dry rocks, about 5 mile northward of the NE. x)oint of
the cay. A bank extends oft* J mile outside the reef to the NE., and a
/ full mile to the eastward of the ^E. point, to within ^ mile of the east-
ern cay. All the eastern side of the cay is fringed with a reef for about
J mile terminating at the SW. sandy point.

Anchorage. — On the west side of the Western Plana Cay, near the
SW. point, there is a clear bank of soundings extending about i mile
from the shore, on the edge of which anchorage will be found in about
7 fathoms water, with room enough to weigh, should the wind come
unexpectedly fi'om the westward.

Water. — At the back of the SW. point of the Western Plana there
are some wells of excellent wSitcr, a little behind the sand ridge; the
casks can be rolled up and rafted oft* very conveniently; indeed, it is
the best place for watering among these islands, with the exception of
Nassau, '

Mariguana Island is generally low, and thickly wooded. Near the
center of the island there is a hill 110 feet high, and toward the east
end there are several small hummocks from 40 to 60 feet high. Abra^
ham Hill, at the back of Start Point, is about 80 feet, and a long flat
ridge behind the SE. point 00 feet high. There is no good water to be
found on the island, but wood in abundance. The island is 24 miles in
length and from 2 to 6 miles in breadth.

The north side is indented with a few small exposed bays, and skirted
by a reef along its whole length, w^hich terminates Jibout 1 J miles north-
ward of the NW. point; about IJ miles N. 57^ E. (X. 56^ E. mag.) of
this point, on the edge of the reef, there is a cluster of high rocks.
Under the lee of this spit there is good shelter for small cratt, passing
by the eye, close round the NW. point.

The west side runs nearly straight SSW. 6J miles, and is bold, the
bank not reaching more than 100 yards from tlie shore.

From the SW". point the southern coa^st takes an easterly direction
lor about 4 miles and then trends SK. to Start Point; to the NW. of
the point, the bank extends out for J mile, with a clear, sandy bottom.
Eastward of Start Point, the shore trends to the NE. and east, forming
a deep bight, called Abraham Bay. A dangerous reef sweeps round
between the points of the bight at the distance of about 2 miles from
its head, and is steepto. About a mile eastward of Start Point there
is a small opening through which, by the eye, coasters may carry 2
fathoms into good shelter within the reef. From the east point of the
bay the coast takes an E. by N. directicm for about 4 miles to the foot
of the center hill at tlie narrowest part of the island, which is here 2
miles across, and then trends round SE. for nearly 8 miles to the SE.
jjoint. Off the latter portion the bank extends about i mile.

•f'd

EAST REEF ^INAGUA ISLAND,

£ast Reef. — A diiugeroiLs reof 4*oiuiueiices at the SE. poiut, which
extends to the eastward about 9 miles, and is 2 miles in breadth. At
the SE. exti^eme of this reef are several drv rocks just above water, and
at the ^E. elbow there is a small low cay of rock and sand, a few feet
high. On the south side of the reef, about 4 miles eastward of the SE.
point, and nearly south of a small cay which lies close off the XE. point,
there is a littje opening through which small craft tind their way into
snug anchorage under the above cay. The extreme east end of the reef
is 4 miles from this cay, which api)ears as part of the island, excei)t on a
NNE. and SSW. bearing. The reef is steei> to on the south side, but
soundings on the bank will be obtained within ^ mile of the east and
north sitles.

Little Inagua Island is somewhat quadrangular in form, 8 miles in
length, east and west, and about 5 miles in breadth. At the center of
the XW. side there is a flat hill, abcmt (JO feet high, which is the only
rising giound on the northern part of the island, and on the soutJi side
there are several hills of about the same height. A dangerous reef,
8teei)-to, runs oft* J mile from the ea*»t end, and there are generally heavy ^

breakers on it.

The N E. and NW. sides of the island, each about o miles long, present vf]

a bold rocky shore, with soundings on a clear bottom to the distance of '.^

about J mile. Tlie SW. side ai>pears also to be free of danger. The |

SE. side is about 8 miles long. P]astward of the south point there is a -3

small bay, and in front of it snug anchorage for small cnift, protected ^^

by the reef, which terminates near the middle of this shore. The en- , |

trance to this anchorage is through a break in the reef about 2^ miles " ^

eastward of the point. There are no inhabitants, but there are said to
be wild hogs on the island, and, if so, water.

G-reat Inagua Island. — There are several small elevations on the 'J

south side, generally about 30 feet high, appearing from the southward jj

like separate islands. Salt Pond Hill, the highest of them, is, in the -J

evening, sometimes taken for the SW. jioint of the island when coming -V

from the southward. Several wrecks have, from this cause, taken ^

place. The Island can not generally be seen from a distance on acc^ount ';

of fogs and mist which frequently hide it. •'-

North Coast. — From Saline Point, near the NW. point of the island, ^

which is low and rocky, the northern shore of Great Inagua takes a ']

northeasterlv directicm 7 miles to Palmetto Point. The reef which
protects Alfred Sound comes gradually home to this point, and ENE^
about 5 miles from Northwest Point there is on the edge a small cay *

about i mile long. Three-quarters of a mile eastward of the cay, and
N. 50 W. (N. 6^ W. mag.) from a black isolated rock on the beach there
is a small cut through the reef, in which there are 8 or 9. feet water; ]

the reef runs quite straight and is steep-to. Carmichael Point is about
6 miles from Palmetto Point, and the coast between forms a bay about
IJ miles deep, with a bold rocky shore all round steei)-to. Midway there

92 ^ BAHAMA ISLANDS.

is a conical monad called James Hill, about 90 feet high, which is re-
markable as being the only elevated ground on the north side of the
island westward of Carmichael Point.

From Carmichael Point to the ^E. point of the island, 23 miles, the
shore falls back to the southward and forms an extensive bay, 8J miles
deep, named Ocean Bight. On the east side the bank runs off about
J mile from the beach, but the head and the Avestern shore are steei)-to,
and i)re8ent a bold rocky coast, against which the sea breaks with great
violence, particularly during northerly winds. At the head of the bight
there are a few hills from 70 to 90 feet high.

East Coast. — The whole eastern side of the island is skirted by a
reef, Irom 200 yards to i mile from the beach, with the bank outside it
for about ^ mile. Towards Northeast Point there are some sand hills
rather higher than the rest of the coast, off which the reef extends
nearly a mile, falling in to the point in a curve.

Statira Shoal. — From the SE. point of Great Inagua a spit or tongue
of the bank, from 4 to 2 miles in breadth, runs off SSE. for 6 miles, and
on it is a rocky patch. It is about ^ mile long, with as little as 6 feet
water on it, breaks in heavy weather, and lies southward 3 miles from the
SE. point; S. 44^ E.(S. 45oB. mag.)13 from Sail Rock (a small black, islet
20 or 30 feet higli, bearing S. 23° W. (S. 22^ W. mag.) 1^ miles from
the point) and S. 84oE.(S.85o E. mag.) 9^ miles from Lantern Head, a
remarkable prominent bluff 82 feet high.

The position of this shoal is only J mile from the eastern edge of the
bank, but the soundings are from 0 to 8 fathoms for 2J miles to the
southward, and the same depth for 1 J miles to the westward of it, so
that the lead will give sufficient warning from these quarters, but not
from the eastward. There are 6 fathoms between it and Sail Bock, and
about 5 fathoms between the latter and the main. The water on the
bank being of a dark color, it is difiictilt to distinguish the shoal, except
in heavy weather, when the sea always breaks.

South Coast. — From the SE. point the southern shore trends westerly
about 28 miles to Southwest Point. On either side of Lantern Head the
land bends inward, forming bays. The shore is skirted by a reef for
about 2 miles, which terminates abont 5 miles to the westward of the
head ; but the shore to Southwest Point is still foul to the distance of
about a mile. To the eastward of the head, S. 19° E. (S, 20© E. mag.) of
Lagoon Hill, there is an opening through the reef capable of admitting
small coasters to a snug anchorage witlun. The interior, however, is so
completely studded with small coral hejwis that the eye alone must be
depended on as a guide. The bay on west side of the head is only safe
with the prevailing trade wind, which is here more regular than at the
islands to the NW. About 4 miles eastward of Southwest Point the
lands trends round to the SSW., forming a bay, and is very low and
foul.

Molasses Road. — About 2 miles eastward of the Southwest Point

MOLASSES ROAD ^MATHEW TOWN ROAD. 93

there is arocky ledge about J milein extent, east aiul west, called Molasses
Reef. It is steep-to, aud the sea breaks on it with easterly winds*
Molasses Road is a clear «p;>t eastward of the reef, where vessels driven
from the anchorage on the west side of the island may ride out NW.
and north winds in safety. Tlie ground, howev'er, is flat and rocky, and
they must weigh the moment the wind draws round to the usual quarter.

The best berth will be in 8 or 0 fathoms, just within the edge of
soundings, and about a mile eastward of the reef, with Salt Pond Hill
N. 9^ E. (N. 8^ E. mag.) and Southwest Point ox)en to the southward of the
reef S. 85^ W. (S. 84^ W. mag.) Great care, however, must be taken in
approaching, for with the wind offshore' the re(*f does not show itself^
aud the discolored water is not easily seen at even a short distance;
care must also be taken not to shoot too far in, and be prepared to
anchor the moment soundings are struck.

"West Coast. — From Southwest Point the low sandy shore sweeps
round to the NW. for about 2 miles, and is foul to the distam^e of from
200 to 400 yards; it then takes a northerly directioA 0 mile« to Middle
Point. This point is t4)lerably (jlear of danger. Xorth of Middle Point
the coast recedes and forms Man-of-War Bay.

Mathew Town Road lies abreast of the small settlement from which
the anchorage tiikes its name. The village is scattered along the shore,
with large salt ponds behind it. On a small rocky point near the north-
ern end of the village is Henrietta Fort.

With the usual trade wind the only safe anchorage is oflF the village
in 4J and 5 fathoms water, about 600 yards offshore, and near tte edge
of the bank of s(mndings. /

For a man-of-war the best an(5horage is with Fort Henrietta bearing
N. 190 E. (N. 780 E. mag.)

Stand in slowly and be ready to anchor as soon as white water is
reached, which may be recognized from aloft. If the weather threatens
a change the vessel must leave at once and run around to Molasses
Road, as soon as the wind is to the northward of west. Before such change
of weather the barometer usually falls to about 29.80.

Water can always be procured from Mathew Town. Vessels can at
any time call in for provisons, water, or to* make temporary repairs
without payment of pilotage or port charges.

Pilot Fees. — Vessels of 30 aud not over 50 tons burden, $1.92; 50
and not over 75 tons, $2.40; 75 and not over 100 tons, $2.88; 100 and not
over 150 tons, $3.00; 150 tons and not over 200 tons, $4.80; 200 aud not
over 250 tons, $0.06; 250 and^not over 300 tons, $7.29; and for every 20
tons over 300 tons at the rate of 24 cents. Double the above rates for
piloting vessels into Alboys Hole, Alfred Sound, and Man-of-War Cay
Anchorages.

Tides. — It is high water, full and change, in Mathew Boad at 8h. Om.
The rise is 3J feet at springs and 2 feet at neaps. The flood sets to the
southward along the west side of the island at the rate of about half a

94 BAHAMA ISLANDS.

knot, and meets the flood coming from the eastward off Southwest
Point.

Lights. — ^On the shore, about a mile southwiud of Mathew Town,
and 2 miles XW. of Southwest Point stands a white conical tower, 114
feet high from which is shown a revolving white light, 120 feet above
the sea, attaining its gi^eatest brilliancy every minute, \isible 17 miles.

Making this light, pay attention to its bearings, as it is seen over the
land when not intercepted by objects, which is becoming more frequent
by the gi-owth of cocoanut tre^s.

A light is shown from staff in front of the customhouse when steam-
ers are expected.

Man-of-War Bay is a bight 6 miles wide between Middle and North-
west Point. The bank extends about J mile from the shore all around
the bay, affording anchorage on the edge, and shelter from all but
westerly winds. With north and NW. winds, the best berth will be in<the
northern part of the bay, with the outer point N. 67*^ W. (X. 66"^ W. mag.) ;
with south and SW. winds, oft* the sandy beach in SE. part. There is
no anchorage off the south shore. In anchoring the same precautions
must be observed a^ when coming-to in Mathew lioad, and care taken to
pick out a clear sandy spot.

TVater. — ^The well is 200 yards inland from the north end of the south-
eastern sandy beach. The water is generally brackish, except after
heavy rains, when there is always an abundant supply. The path to it
is rocky and uneven and not at all adapted for rolling casks.

Alfred Sound. — The NW. point of Great Inagua is low, the tops of the
palmetto trees on it being only about 20 feet above the sea. From thence
the shore bends round to the eastward for 2f miles to Saline Point,
forming a sandy bay. A reef nearly dry at low water, and steep-to,
skirts this bay about IJ miles from the shore, and within it is Alfred
Sound, a snug anchorage for small craft drawing 6 feet, over white coral
sand and patches distinctly seen. The entrance lies between !N"orth-
west Point and the west end of the reef. There is also a narrow, intricate
cut through the barrier NB. about 1 J miles from the point. With the
wind to the southward of east a vessel of 12 feet draft may anchor in the
opening to the westward, named Alfred Road, taking care not to bring
J^orthwest Point westward of S. 2'^o w. (8. 22^ W. mag.); but it is by
no means a desirable anchorage.

Water. — Near tlie middle of the bea^h there is a well, and firewood
may be obtained near the shore of the bay in Alfred Sound.

Tides. — It is high water, full and change, in Alfred Sound, at 8h. Om.
Springs rise 3J feet, neaps 2 feet. The flood stream sets eastward, the
ebl) westward, at the rate of al)out half a knot.

Doubtful Shoals. — Chirion Shoal, SE. of Great Inagua, and Cuidado,
south of Mariguana, have been repeatedly searched for and not found.
They are carried on the charts as doubtful. Breakers were reported
in the position of Clarion Shoal in September 1889.

HOGSTY REEF PHILIPS REEF. 95

Brown Bank is in latitude 210 20' 52" N., longitude 74^ 44' 6", W.
It extends 2 miles ea8t and west, and one mile north and south, is com-
X)o.sed of sand and coral, and eaa he seen under very favorahle circum-
stances. There are from 9J to 17 fathoms water on it.

Hogsty Reef is in 8hai)e like a horseshoe, convex to the east, 4J miles
in length east and west, and 2 J miles in breadth. Tlie reef forms a
good harbor, with a <lepth of from .'3.^ to 5 fathoms. There are few black
rocky patclies on the clear white sand, but they may be easily seen and
avoided.

At each ^d of the horseshoe there is a small low sandy cay, nearly
devoid of vegetation. There is a tank for rain water on Northwest Cay.
The reef exteiuls about a mile to the WXW. from S«mth Cay, and the
passage in lies between it and Northwest Cay. There is good anchor-
age J^st inside the edge of soun<lings, in (J fathoms, to the southward
of Northwest Cay; but there is plenty of room to work up the horseshoe
if necessary.

Vessels l>ound through Crooked Island Passage, and being so far to
windward may use the anchorage at Hog^^ty Reef for the night in pref-
erence to that under Great Inagua; it will, however, be prudent to avoid
80 dangerous a bank altogether. It is seldom that any weather current
will be found here, but it has been noticed. The run should be regu-
lated, if possible, to get through the passage with daylights

The Caicofi Group consists of a number of small islands and cays,
rising from a large, shallow sand bank, having a very irregular out-
line.

It is extremely dangerous on every side, particularly so on the south-
ern part. * Nowhere in this portion of it can a sheltered anchorage for a
large vessel be found. The northern, and a large part of the eastern,
edge is formed by a chain of narrow wooded islands, with few inhabit*-
ants. They produce a very small quantity of fruit and vegetables for
the markets of Nassau and Turks Island. Most of the inhabitants are
fishermen and wreckers.

The six princii)al islands of this group are West or Little Caicos,
Providenciales, North Ciiicos, Grfind Caicos, East Caicos, and South
Caicos.

Philips Reef. — From Cape Comcte, tlie NE. extreme point of the
group, a bank extends eiustward for 5 miles; it then trends to the SW,,
and reaches the sliore about 4 miles southward of the cape, off Goodg
Hill, at the SE. end of East Caicos. On the n(u*t hern edge of this bank
is Philips Reef, a dangerous coral patch about i mih* long, which always
breaks, and is steep-to on the northern side. Tlie bank does not extcaid
more than J mile northward of the reef; to the eastward it runs off 2
miles, and the depths are from 10 to 20 fathoms, and to the southward
from 7 to 10 fathoms, so that vessels approaching from these latter
quarters should pay great attention to the lead. In a case of necessity
vessels may pass between the reef and Cape 0(nnete, where the depths
are 6 and 7 fathoms.

96 BAHAMA ISLANDS.

Grand Caicos Island. — From Cape Coinete the northern shore of
East Ciiifos Ishmcl fcnms a deep bight and trends westward for about
8 miles to its west end, which is separated from Grand Caicos by a pas-
sage for boats. The shore of this hitter island runs to the NW., form-'
ing an indentation for about the same distance to Haulover Point, its
north extreme; near the point there is a square house, and a large set-
tlement on its east side; the land is of uniform height. All this part
of the shore is skirted by a reef for from one to 2 miles, leaving shelter
inside it for boats.

To the northward of Haulover Point the reef extends eastward at
least 2 miles, and under it there is anchorage for small vessels in case
of necessity. The anchorage is open to the eastward, and a heavy swell
gene^all}^ rolls in, but there is always a strong outset, which would en-
able a handv vessel to beat out in moderate weather. From Haulover
Point the shore trends slightly round to the westward for about 10
miles to Juniper Hole, the opening between Grand and North Caicos.
There is shelter here for boats between two conspicuous bluff points.

Cantion. — Strangers, however, should not approach this part of the
shore. There is a strong indraught into the bights, which is felt at the
distance of 5 or 6 miles, and would prove fatal in the event of a calm,
as it is steep-to outside the reefs.

North Caicos Island. — The north side of this island is skirted by a
reef i mile from the bea<5h, and at the XE. i)oint a dangerous ledge ex-
tends off for 2 miles. Outv^ide both the ledge and the reef there is a
bank of scmndings about a mile wide, with 10 and 12 fathoms on it»
This part is easily recognized, as the shore rises into a succession of
hillo(!ks about 100 feet high, and on the western of them is a large
square house. Near the west end, within the reef, are three small, dark,
conical islets, about 50 feet high, called the Mary Cays. The coast here
takes a SW. direction for 15k miles into a deep and dangerous bight
skirted by a reef about a mile from the shore.

Water. — ^Between the North Caicos and Providenciales there is a
continuous range of small cays; and on one of them, called Fort George,
a low sandy islet covered with brushwood, about 7 miles SW. of the
Mary Cays, there are some wells of indifferent water, and the remains
of a small fort and magazine. The reef under it forms a small, well-
sheltered harbor, carrying a depth of 2^ and 3 fathoms.

Providenciales. — The NW. end of this island is 18 miles from the
Mary Cays, and terminates near its extremity in a peaked hill of mod-
erate height, upon which there is a pile of stones erected as a beacon.
From the jx^ak the land falls to the NNW. into a low sharp point,
bordered by a dangerous reef which ext^jnds off for 2 miles, with shoal
soundings outside it. On the west side of the point a bank extends off
for ^ mile, upon which there is anchorage in what is called Malcolm Road.

The west side of Providenciales trends to the southward, formlng^
two bays, ea<;h about 4 miles wide. The south extreme terminates in a

PROVIDENCIALES CAICOS ISLANDS. 97

bold white rocky bluff, nearly 5 miles X. 56^ B. (X. 56=^ E. mag.) of the
north end of West Caicos. From the south end of the north bay, or
Malcolm Road, a dangerous reef extends oft' S, 50^ W. (S. 56^ W. mag.)
7 miles, and near the end there is a small dry sand bore l^ng about 3
miles northward of the West Caicos. A reef also stretches off a con-
siderable distance from the latter island towards the spit of the former,
leaving between them a vein of deep water 800 yards in breadth at the
entrance, carrying from 5 J to 2 fathoms, and running in to the eastward
for 3 miles, or until at a distance of 2 miles from the south bluff of
Provideneiales.

A vessel may anch«>r southward of the sand bore in about 5 fathoms
water, sheltered by West Reef as far round as NXW. This, however,
is not so good an anchorage as that under the south end of West Caicos.
With the prevailing easterly wind^, vessels under sail should wait for
tbe flood tide before attempting to beat farther up Caicos Creek; the
deep vein of water may be easily seen from aloft, and the reef to the
northward i)rotects the anchorage from northerly winds. The bluff or
SW. point of Provideneiales, bearing X. So- E. (X. 85° E. mag.) clears
the shoals on either side.

Caution. — Vessels from the northward are apt to mistake the Provi-
deneiales for the West Caicos, and by hauling round the west end to the
southward after dark get wrecked on West Reef. With the chart, how-
ever, and proper attention to the latitude, this ought not to happen,
for the West Caicos could not be made upon any bearing to the west-
ward of south without being close to the west side of Provideneiales
or near West Reef. There is also 10 miles difference of latitude between
the XW. end of the Provideneiales and West Caicos. The spit of West
Reef Ji>ears SW, distant 10 miles from the XW. point of Provideneiales,
and extreme care should be taken in rounding it in the night.

Vlest Caicos Island is about 7 mih»s long in a XXE. and SSW. di-
rection, and 1^ broad, and is nearly of a uniform height of about 50
feet. Xear the SW. point, Iiowever, there is a small hill 65 fedl high,
and another of 00 feet near the north end. The west side is steep-to,
' the bank extending cmly 200 yards from the shore, and in many places
even less. The island is uninhabited and there is no water.

Anchorage. — There is good anchorage under the soutli side of West
Caicos, in Clearsand Koad, with 5 and G fathoms water, sandy bottom,
sheltered as'f^ir round as west, and plenty of room to weigh with any
wind. The best berth is in 5 iathoms, with the SK. hill bearing X. 11^
W., (X. 1 1^ W. mag.), just within the edge of the bank. Vessels caught
in the Caicos Passagcj with a strong XW. or XE. gale, which may be
expected from Xovember to March, will find this a very convenient
anchorage, the southwc^st reefs breaking the sea during the latter.

South Caicos Island. Cockburn Harbor. — From Ca])e Comete the
eastern shore of the cays on the east side of tlie l)ank takes a southerly
direction 13 miles, when it makes a sudden bend to the westward for 2
18402 7

•i-' ■ * ;

t K

\i-

¥-^

I.!

98 BAHAMA isla:xds.

miles and forms the south end of South Oaicos. Long Cay, which is
about 3 miles in length ]N^B. and S W., but very narrow, lies to the west-
ward of the south end, and is separated from it by an opening 800 yards
5i ^ wide, called East or Oockburn Harbor.

I *^^ Cove Cay is a rocky islet in the entrance. The channel is to the

westward of it.

A pilot (procurable at Grand Turk Island) is necessary to enter the
harbor.

£■ ' Buoys. — Five buoys have been placed in Oockburn Harbor. Tes-

r; sels usually drop an anchor to leeward of one of these buoys, and make

^ fast to it with a hawser to assist the anchor, as the bottom is hard rocA:

and very smooth. The best berth is with the west i)oint of Cove Cay
bearing S. 73^ E. (S. 73^ E. mag.), about 300 yards distant. If desir-
able a ship may anchor outside the harbor, with the flagstaff on Gov-
ernment Hill bearing north (north mag.) and the east end of Long Gay
N. 730 w. (K 73^ W. mag.).

The best outside anchorage is in 0 fathoms with the east end of Cove
Cay in line with the flagstaff on Government Hill. Abreast of Cockburn
Harbor the bank of soundings should be cautiously approached. A
pier from the shore toward Cove Cay is proposed.

The United States is. represented by a consular agent.

Long Cay Anchorage. — From the south end of Long Cay a reef ex-
tends a short distance. Between the west side of the cay and a cay
about a mile to the westward of it, is a small but sheltered anchorage.
A good berth is with the south point of Long Cay bearing S. 68^ E.
(S. ^^ E. mag.)

Light. — A fixed wlute light is shown from Government Hill at an
elevation of 50 feet and should be visible 9 miles. It illuminates an arc
of 270^ between south (south mag.) and east (east mag.).

XoTE. — The light is established for the local traffic between Cock-
burn Harbor and Grand Turk. As the lightkeeper does not vist it
during the night, the light is not always to be depended on.

Caution. — ^The light is obscured over an arc of 90^ between the bear-
ings south (south mag.) and east (east mag.), and any vessel within 9
miles north or northeastward of Cockburn Harbor, not seeing this light,
should stand to the southeastward for safety.

Ambergris Cay, lying 8 miles from Long Cay, and 2.^ miles from the
edge of the bank, is 3 J miles long north and south, and. about a mile
broad. A hill in the middle of this cay rises to the height of 100 feet,
and there are some remarkable white cliffs on its SE. side. About 2^
miles northward of this islet are Fish Cays, f mile within the edge of
the bank.

Little Ambergris Cay lies a short distance westward of Ambergris
Cay. It is about 4 miles long in an east and west direction, but very
b narrow, and so low as not to be easily distinguished from the edge of

^\ soundings.

;*'
ft .

SWIMMER ROCK TURKS ISLAND PASSAGE. 99'

Swimmer Rock. — Tliis dangerous rocky patch la about J mile in
extent, with less than 2 fathoms water on it. The White Cliffs on Am.
bergris Cay bear from it X. 22^ W. (N. 22^ W. mag.) 13 miles. The
rock is steep-to on the east side, but the SE. point of Caicos Bank ter-
minates about 2 miles S. 11^ (S. ll^ E. mag.) of it, in which direction
there are from 8 to 10 fathoms water. The edge of the bank along the
east and south sides, being covered with dark weed, iK not easily dis-
tinguished. From the 8E. point the edge trends to the WNW. for
about 8 miles, and tlien bends rcmnd to the SVV. for about the same
distance, to the south extreme of the Caicos Bank.

Whale Breaker lies in the bight, 5 miles westward of the Swimmer,
on the edge of soundings, and is a dangerous, smaJl, rocky patch, even
with the surface of the se^i. In heavy weather it breaks, spouting up
the water to a considerable height — ^hence its name. There are several
other dangerous spots along the southern edge of the bank; the south-
ernmost, called South Rock, has only 10 feet water on it, and lies
south (south mag.) 8 miles from Shot Cay, one of the Seal Cays.

^XTest Sand Spit. — From the south extreme of the Caicos Bank the
edge takes a NW. directi<m in a wave line for about 29 miles to the
south end of west sand spit. This sand spit lies north and south along
the edge of the bank for 2 miles, nearly awash, and its north end dries
at low water. It is called Sand Cay in the old charts, and its north end
bears S. oiP B. (S. 56^ B. mag.) 24 miles from the south end of West
Caicos.

For the first 17 miles from the south end of the bank its edge is quite
clear, and comes within 8 miles of White Cays, the westernmost of the
Seal Cays; but thence to Uie West Caicos it is very dangerous. All
this side is of a light green color, forming a strong contrast with the
deep blue tinge of the ocean water. The cxAor is fretiuently reflected
very strongly on the edge of the clouds, on what is called the bank
blink which may be seen many miles.

French Cay. — To the northward of west sand si)it the edge of the
bank is clear for about 5 miles. It is here that the small coasters and
wreckers cross to the eastward, passing off' the bank southward of Long
Cay. The edge now trends WX W. about 4 miles to French Cay, which
is a small, low bushy islet, about J mile in diameter, covered with
prickly pear, and frequenUnl by great numbers of aquatic birds; from
April to July large cpuintities of eggs are collected by the fishermen.
A vessel may anchor under its lee in 6 fiitlioms, on the edge of s<mnd-
ings. From this cay to the West Caicos there is scarcely a dear space,
and the bank all along is very steep-to.

Tnrks Island Passage, Directions.— This passage is nuich fre-
quented by vessels bound to the southern ports of the West Indies, but
the Mona Passage is Tuuch safer.

If it is intended to use this passage, it will be well, especially if at
all doubtful of the ship's position, to reaeh the parallel of 21^ 40' N. (9

T^m^i

>■

'T:V

100 BAHAMA ISLANDS.

miles northward of the latitude of the light), 60 miles to the eastward

of it.

Is Having arrived at this position, and no land being in sight, the sliip

^ is sure to be to the e«astward of the island, and should then be kept

1^;^ west (west mag.) to i)a8s 8 or 9 miles to the northward of the light. Being

visible from deck at a distance of 15 miles, it will almost certainly be seen.

Every opportunity must be used by night or day to verify the 1 atitude

This is the more necessary as frequently to the northward of these

passages the current runs strongly to the north, and if the vessel should
r* , pass the hght without its having been seen a serious disaster might

occur. After making the Grand Turk light every precaution must be

taken in rounding the north point of the island.
Prom a position 3 miles westward of the lighthoiise, a S. 25^ W. (S.

250 W. mag.) course for 26 miles will carry the navigator 4 miles to the

westward of Endymion Eock, and 8 miles eastward of the Swimmer
fi Eock.

f The current in Turks Island Passage is said to be very feeble, and the

h, • tides not felt, but strong currents have been met running through the

I* . passage. The local pilots state that they run very strong, btit always

c- ' through the channel in a KE. or a SW. direction. The tides are very

i.; strong sometimes, having a strength of 3 knots.

In this region, during the winter months, if the wind hauls from SE.

to south it is an almost certain indication of a sudden change to the

pr ' !N*W. Under these circumstances, it would be better to remain under

[t.. short sail to the northward of the islets, keeping the light in sight till

-J. the change of wind has taken place.

r If, after having entered the passage, the wind dies away and hauls to

the southward, it would be advisable, instead of trying to beat to the
southward, to anchor in some one of the places to the westward of the
i. cays.

^,;^ Ballast Oroand. — The least depth found on this shoal, lying off the

;>f town on the western side of Grand Turk Island, was 8J feet, from

;, which the NW. extreme of Grand Turk Island bore N. 3^ E. (X. 3^ E.

[' mag.), and the Lookout bore N. 70^ E. (X. 70^ E. mag.).

^ Within a depth of 3 fatlioms the Ballast Ground extends 70 yards

northward of the shoalest head, 100 yards southward, and 30 yards
westward — ^in this latter direction the bank is steep-to, there being
no bottom with 25 fathoms line at 70 yards from the shoalest head.
^; Wreck on Northeast Reef— Caution. — The wreck stmids upright

f\ and lias the appearance of a vessel anchored off Grand Turk, and may

r»'; mislead vessels bound southward through the passage. It is doubly

^j dangerous when the reef does not break, and has already caused the

stranding of two vessels in light winds and smooth sea.

Anchorage. — When making Grand Turk Island from the XW. a
square house at the east extreme of East Caicos Island forms a good
mark. Philips Reef generally breaks and is steep-to on the northern

:.T

Is*

GRAND TURK ISLAND ANCHORAGES DIRECTIONS. 101

side. The anchorage off the center of the town on the west side of
Grand Turk Island is not rei*oinineiuletl, as tlie lK)tt<ftn has been ren-
dered foul by the iliscliarge of baUast.

An anchorage can be had off Uie town, both northward and south-
ward of the ballast ground; that to the nmthward is not recommended
to sailing vessels.

Man-of- War Anchorage, so csalled by the pilots, is on the edge of the
bank, which shows white, in from 6 to 9 fathoms water, with the presi-
dent's flagstaff* (1^ or 2 miles simthward of the town) bearing S. 42o E .
(8. 420 E. mag.), and the lighthouse N. IT^ E. (N. 17° E. mag.). But
should the vessel swing inshore she will tail on or near a rocky patch,
with not more than 17 feet water on it. Vessels must tlierefore be pre-
pared to weigh or slip the moment the wind threatens a change, but
between the months of April and August it never shifts from the east-
ward without ample warning. Those merely wishing to communicate
should remain under sail. It is better for strangers to take a pilot.
The difficulty in using these anchorages is in shooting in, which requires
great judgment; in a sailing vessel, the better way will be to keep the
topsails at the mast head ready to throw all aback. This, however*
must depend upon the strength of the wind, for care must be taken
not to bring up too short, or the vessel will drag off', or hook her anchor
under a rock and probably lose it. ,

Biding Place, a little southward of Crovernment house, also affords
better anchorage than that off the town, and there is less surf for land-
ing.

Ha^vks Nest is the anchorage under the south side of the island,
and in the event of a vessel being obliged to quit that off the town, she
"will find this a safe roadstead until the wind draws around again to the
eastward. The assistance of a pilot is absolutely necessary, and vessels
drawing over 17 feet should not attempt it at all.

A reef, which runs S W. 3 J miles from the south point of the island,
protects the anchorage from west to NW., and about J mile from the
point there is a small intricate opening in it, called the Small Cut, for
vessels of 10 feet draft; and a mile from the point there is a larger one,
called the Great Cut, in which the depth is 15 feet.

Directions. — For Hawks Xest, the best cliannel is round the SW.
end of Southwest Keef, as there will then be room to beat up. In
this case, should the wind be well to the northward, a vessel may haul
round, the reef, witli the east end of Cotton Cay touching Pear Cay
Hummock, bearing N. Sr^^ E. (N, 85^ E. mag.) ; this mark will lead south
of Southwest Bank, about J mile to the south westward, on which there
are only 12 feet water cU)8e to the edge.

In steering in on this line a cast of 4 J fathoms will be obtained on the
edge of soundings, and then 0 and 7 fathoms to within about J mile of
Cotton Cay. To the northward of the latter cay there is as little as 3J
fathoms right across, but to the eastward of this there are 4 and 5 fath-

BAHAMA ISLANDS.

' oms to the anchorage above the Dunbar Shoals. The whole BX)a^e is,
however, studded with numerous small rocky heads distinctly ^eeu, and
in beating up the eye must be the guide. The most convenient anchor-
age will be found between the Dunbar iShoals and a small sand cay 5
feet high, on Southwest Reef.

This passage is not recommended to vessels comingfrom the southward
and from the northward; except when vessels have a steady favorable
wind, and are quite sure of their reckoning, it will be far more prudent
to take the Crooked Island Passage. This will relieve them of risk and
anxiety, and in all probability cause little if any delay. If bound from
LV Cape Haiti they may take the Caicos Passage, provided the wind be not

to the northward of ENE., but it should be done in daylight.

Caution. — If, before recognizing the entrance to Turks Island Pas-
sage, the navigator has passed to leeward of it and the Caicos are in
sight, care must be taken to pass them well to the northward at a dis-
tance of at least 8 or '9 miles. It is dangerous, especially with light
winds, to pass nearer to them, for the tides which run in the channels
between the islands of the group are very strong and make themselves
felt at a distance of 5 or 6 miles.

Turks Islands are the easternmost of the Bahama Group, and rise
from a naiTow bank extending about 35 miles NNB. and SSW. Near
h the center of the bank, however, a tongue of soundings extends east-

p^ ward 7i miles from East Cay, with a regular depth on it of from 8 to 10

jg; fathoms. The nine islands of the group are comx)osed of sand and

^. sandstone partially clothed with stunted bushes and a peculiar species

g' of cactus somewhat in the form of a Turkish cap 5 hence, probably, their

^; • name. There are no wells, and the inhabitants who reside on Grand

U Turk Island and Salt Cay depend upon rainwater caught in tanks.

i# The Caicos Islands fitrnisli them with ground provisions, Haiti with

*; cattle; other supplies are generally obtained from the United States;

R so that strangers must not dei)end upon finding resources here.

These islands belong to Great Britain and are attached to the gov-
ernment of Jamaica.

Grand Turk Island is 5.^ miles long, in a north and south direction,
and about a mile broad. It is low, except on the east side, which is
formed by a narrow ridge of sand hills, about 70 feet high. A dangerous
reef extends NE., 2J miles from the north point, and a narrow ledge of
the bank, on which there are from 6 to 40 fathoms, runs off 6 miles
farther. The reef skirts the eastern shore at the distance of about li
miles, and connects itself to the small islets lying to the SE., as far
as East Cay. This little islet, which hes about 5 miles S. 22o E. (S. 22^
E. mag.) of Grand Turk, is 96 feet high, and the loftiest of the group.
The reef is broken here and there, but there is no safe passage through
for strangers. The XW. point of Grand Turk is also foul for i mile,
and a narrow ridge of soundings nins off a mile outside the reef. The

GRANU TURK ISLAND SAND CAY. 103

town, wbich is the seat of govermiient, stands on the western shore,
and in front of an extensive cultivated salt iwnd.

The United States is represented by a consul and ^^ce-con8ul.

Steamers. — The Clyde line from New York call every three weeks.
Pickford and Black's line from Halifax to Kingston, Jamaica, touching
at Bermuda and Turks Islands, call both ways, one steamer a month.

Pilots and Dues. — The pilots are efficient. Half rates charged when
pilot's services are offered and not taken.

For anchorage in Grand Turk, Salt Cay, and Biding Place Eoad-
steads, and Hawks Nest, Cockburn Harbor, and West Caieos, the fol-
lowing rates are charged: Prom 50 and under GO tons, $2.40; and 48
cents in addition for eveiy additional 10 tons up to 100 tons. Over 100
tons and under 200 tons, 3 cents in addition for each ton. For 200 tons,
$7.86 ; over 200 tons, 2 cents in addition for eaeh ton. Outward pilotage
half inward pilotage, except from Hawks Nest, where it is the same.
Bemovals fi*om one anchorage to another in the Turks Islands, half
inward pilotage. A pilot may be engaged by the day at the rate of
(2.16 for every 24 hours, for which sum he shall perform all duties that
may be required of him as pilot, including removals and anchorages.

Light dues, 8 cents per ton register. No tonnage dues.

Lights. — A circular lighthouse stands 400 yards from the north
extremit}^ of the island, from which, at an elevation of 108 feet, a white
light revolving every half minute is shown, and should be visible 15 miles.

A fixed red light is shown from a flagstaff on the wharf abreast the
anchorage. A harbor light is shown from a beacon 20 feet high, erected
near the Lookout on the NW. point of Salt Cay. The light is white
and red; the white light is visible 7 miles and the red 2 miles. The arc
of red light indicates shoal ground. The liglit can not be depended
upon.

Salt Cay is almost triangular in form, greatest length NE. and SW.
The NW. end forms a bold bluff' 60 feet high, and on the summit there
is a tower from which the light is shoAvn. The town stands on the
west side toward the NW. end of the cay, betAveen the beach and a
valuable salt jwnd. The anchorage before the town is considered the
best; it will admit vessels drawing 20 feet, and they can get under way
in any wind.

The United State^i is rei)rcsented by a consular agent.

The space between Salt and Cotton Cays is full of dangers, and*
should not be navigated without the assistance of a pilot.

Sand Cay is nearly divided at the center by a small neck of low,
bushy land, so that at a distance, in an east or west direction, it has the
appearance of being two islets.

It is clear on all sides but the north. Here a coral reef runs off in
that direction nearly 2 miles, and the sea breaks heavily over it, except
after very fine weather. There are several small black rocks from 10
to 16 feet high on the reef, the northernmost of which lies about J mile

104 BAHAMA ISLANDS.

from the north end. The ed^e of the bank runs ahiiost on a straight
line between tlie reef and the south end of Salt Cay, and this space is
quite clear, witli reguh^r soundings right across to the eastward, of
from 9 to 11 fathoms, white sand.

Three-quarters of a mile S. 22^ E. (S. 22^ E. mag.) of the cay there
are two snu\ll black rocks lying close together about 2 feet above the
sea; they are steep-to, and have 5 and G fatlioms water betwe<in them
and the point, and 8 fathoms at J mile SE. of them. On the edge of
the bank, with the center of the cay bearing N. 509 E. (X. 50° E.
mag.), there are two patches with 3 fathoms water on them.

From the eastward do not come upon the bank — whidi extends 4
miles eastward of both cays — until tlie south end of Salt Cay bears
]Sr. 67° W. (N. 67^ W, mag.), for the ground to the northward of this line
is very foul.

Moderate depths extend IJ mile westward from Sand Cay, and
anchorage will be found here in 6 fathoms water about a mile off, with
the gap beariog N. 68^ E. (K 68° E. mag.). Foul ground has, how^ever,
been rex^orted; caution should h6 exercised. A vessel can weigh with
any wind, and run off the bank on a south course clear of all danger.

Beacon. — An obelisk, 40 feet in height and painted red, has been
erected upon the northern summit (35 feet above the sea) of Sand Cay.

Endymion Rock. — The southern tongue of the bank extends SW.
by S. 8 miles from Sand Cay, and on thi$ spit is the Endymion Rock,
lying S. 40° W. (S. 40^ W. mag), 5 J miles from the south end of the cay,
and 400 yards within the western edge of the bank. The rock has only
4 feet water on it, breaks in heavy weather, and is surrounded by a
small cluster of rocky heads for J mile. Should the sea not break the
rock becomes exceedingly dangerous, as the water over it is so dark
that it can not be distinguished from any distance. The bank between
it and the cay is quite clear, with regular Boundings of from 7 to 9
fathoms; there are 15 fathoms about IJ miles to the eastward of the
rock, and from 7 to 16 fathoms between it and the SW. i>oint of the
spit, about 3 miles SSW. of it. The Swimmer Rock, on the SE. point
of the Caicos Bank, bears from the Endymion S. 79° W. (S. 79^ W. mag.).

To avoid and pass to the westward of this danger it is necessary to
steer clear of the white sandy bottom till the beacon on Sand Cay
bears N. 54° E. (S, 54P E. mag.). By keeping the beacon on this bear-
ing, the anchorage previously mentioned may be reached. Although
no other dangers seem to exist in this region, it waU be prudent to keep
outside of the sand bank lying south of Salt Cay.

Fawn Shoal, in latitude 20^ 51' N., and longitude 71° 29J' W.,
appears to be of small extent, with from 8 to 14 fathoms wat43r on it,
and steep-to. Eight days were spent in unsuccessfully searching for
this shoal by the IT. S. S. Nipsic, in 1873. The reported position of this
Bhoal was examined by H. M. S. Fantome in 1880. The exanunation
occapied five days, but no indications were observed of its existence.

MOUCHOIR BANK NAVIDAD BANK. 105

Mouchoir BaJtik or Mouehou* Carr6 (square handkerchief), is 31
miles ill length, east and west, but irregular in breadtll. The southern
edge takes nearly a W. by X. direction, and, with the exception of a
shallow patch 4 miles within it, appears to be free of danger, having a
depth on it of from 0 to 14 fathoms. The eastern side trends northerly
20 miles, and terminates in a long i)oiut, or narrow spit; about IJ miles
witliin the extreme end of the spit there is a small breaker. The out.
line of the Aorth side is irregular and extremely danger<ma to within
about 9 miles of the west end, where there is a patch of G fathoms. The
rocky heads at the NW. extreme of the bank lie about S. 37'^ E. (S.37^
B. mag.) 21 miles froiA East Cay of the Turk Island Group.

Silver Bank lies 28 miles to tlie eastward of the Mouchoir Bank, and
35 to the northward of Cape Frances Viejo. Its eastern side is 29 miles
long in a NB. by N. and S W. by S. direction, but bends westward near
the middle, and at the bottom of the bight, near the edge, there is a
dangerous shoal; its SB. and XE. points appear to have no dangers,
Jbut regular soundings from 12 to. 15 fathoms.

The north side of the bank nms nearly straight NW. by W. for
38 miles; but about 8 miles from the NB. point it becomes ex(u*edingly
dangerous and contiiiucs so all the way to the N\\^. point; and near the
middle of this side rocky heads, wiiicli are awash, extend 5 miles in-
wards from the edge. The west side also runs nearly straight north
and south 37 miles, on the meridian of 70^ W., and 8 miles from the
SW. point there is a foul patch ch)se to the edge of soundings; but to
the northward of this, to within about 7 miles of the NW. point, the
bank appears to be free of danger for some distance inwards.

Prom the SW. i)oint the south side trends B. by S., 24 miles, and for
about the first 8 miles of this distance the edge is very dangerous; but
to the eastward of this it appears to be clear; it will be better, how-
ever, not to venture on any part of the bank, for it lias not been closely
examined. As the water on the bank is not dis(!olored, except over the
shoals, where it has a white appearance, the lead must be well attended
when approaching it from any quarter.

Navidad Bank. — This is an oval-shaped flat bank of coral and sand,
22 miles long, in a north and south direction, and in the center, 11 miles
broad, with a depth of from 11 to 17 fathoms. The south end lies !N".
230 W. (N. 230 W, mag.), 32 miles from Cape Cabron, the nearest part of
Haiti. The water is not sufficiently discolored to render this bank
visible.

Between the Navidad and Silver Banks there are three small detached
knolls, steep-to, with 10, 12, and 17 fathoms water on them. The sup-
posed position of the Severn Shoal is still shown on the charts, but the
neighborhood has been so closely searched that its existence is extremly
doubtful.

CHAPTER VI.

QUBA, NORTH COAST.

Remarks. — The coast is very much indented, and the greater por-
tion of the shores very foul and bordered with numerous cays and
reefs. Tlie harbors are numerous and eicellent. A range of moun"
tains, highest at the eastern end, where an elevation of 7,000 feet is
attained, extends through the island from east to west. The land
along the shore is generally low and flat.

The coast from Cape Maysi to Cape Cruz on the south and to Point
Maternillos on the north, is bold and free of danger, as is the coast
line between Havana and Matanzas. The rest of the coast line is foul
and diflBcult to approach.

The climatB is hot and dry during the gi*eater part of the year. The
warmest months are July and August, with a mean temperature of 82°
to 840 P., and the coldest December and January, with a mean tem-
perature of 6S^ to 700. The seasons are spoken of as the rainy and the
dry, but the hue of demarkation can not be exactly drawn. Eain often
falls in torrents from July to September, and occasional showers fall
tor a month or two before and after these periods. Fevers, more or
less malignant, prevail from May to November, and to a greater or
less extent tbroughout the year. Of these the yellow fever, to which
all the seai)orts are subject, is the most fatal.

Hurricanes are less frequent than in the islands more to the east-
ward. In the neighborhood of Santiago de Cuba earthquakes of mod-
erate force are sometimes felt.

In 1883 the population amounted to 1,521,684, of whom 509,143 were
blacks.

No connected survey of the shores of Cuba has ever been made.

A large portion of the coast is very imperfectly known, a'nd the
navigator must bear in mind that the charts are only approximately
<5orrect.

Old Bahama Channel is seldom navigated from to leeward, except
by small coasters, which can find anchorage during the night on either
side, or by steamers. Vessels coming from to windward, after passing
through either of the NE. Bahama Channels, or along the north sides of
Puerto Bico and Haiti, generally keep the Cuba shore aboard, where
the remarkable highlands enable them to check their reckoning and
keep a proper ofi^g, according to the season. The current here usu-

OiJ) BAHAMA CHANNEL CAPE MAYSI. 107

ally runs to tke westward, but not strong. If requisite a pilot may
probably be obtained from Baraeoa. Great care should be taken to
avoid the Bahama side.

Some few navigators, however, who have a thorough knowledge of
the Bahama Cays and Banks, instead of taking this channel prefer
running through the Crooked Island Passage, thence round the south
•end of Ragged Island, or Cay St. Domingo, and then across the bank
inside all the shoals, on the parallel of 22^ 42' N., quitting it either to
the northward or southward of Guincvhos Cay. Vessels of 18 feet draft
may do this, for they can carry from 4 to 5 fathoms all the way, and
•anchor in safety whenever it is requisite; but it requires a thorough
Acquaintance with the locality and of the mode of naWgating by the
•eye.

The Old Bahama Channel may be said to extend from Cay Verde to
the Paredon Grande Cay on the south, and from Diamond Point to
Guinchos Cay on the north. This will mtlke it about 50 miles in length.
At the east end, between Diamond Point and ('ay Confttes, west of it,
it is 18 miles wide, fn the narrowest part, between the west end of
the Lavanderas Reef nnd Cay Confttes, S W. of it, the distance is only
10 mile^jj. It then opens out slightly and very gradually, and at the
west end it is about 14 miles across* In direction it turns gradually
round from NNW. to WNW., recpiiring the utmost possible i)nulence
and caution in the night time or thick weather.

Cape Maysi is the eastern extremity of the island of C'uba. When
seen from the southward the cai)e has the a[)pearance of a long low
point. This part of the coast is low and covered with brushwood.

One or 2 miles west of Cape Maysi the land begins to rise, and seen
from the northward forms three steps, the upper one l,8i)0 feet high,
gradually sloping upward to the eastern summit of the Cobre Moun-
tains. Strangers coming from the northward have nustaken the lower
termin^ion of the slope for Cape Maysi, and keeping away too soon
have fallen to leeward.

In approaching the eastern end of Cuba from the NE., some of the
peaks of the Cobre Mountains form good landmarks. The most remark-
able is called El Yunque de Barat^oa, or the Anvil, from its shai)e. It
is 27 miles from Cape Maysi and 4 miles from Port Baraeoa, for which
it is a good guide. In rounding Cape Maysi it should be remembered
that the current frequently sets to the westward with considerable
•Strength, especially during the winter months.

Ziight. — On Cape Maysi, from a circular lighthouse, a fixed white light
is shown at an elevation of 128 feet and should be visible 17 miles.

Pintado Point. — ^About i mile southward of Cape Maysi is Pintado
Point; thence the coast, composed of sobomco, covered more or less
irlth trees and brushwood, runs southward and SW. for 6J miles to
JNTegra Point, forming first a projecting cliff and then a bay. Rather

108

CUBA NORTH COAST.

t ~

■*«■

more than J mile from the point is the Oiieva de Pintado, a large cave,
within which the sea breaks. About one mile southward of the cave is
Quemado Point, a little salient.

The Coast of Cuba from Cape Maysi trends N. by W. J W. for
nearly 2 miles, to Ilembra Point, neiar which a portion of the coast of
about 200 yards in extent is formed of soboruco, and here the light
tower stands. About 700 yards northward of the tower is Mangle
Point and entrance to the River Maysi, and 600 yards farther on is
Estaiia Point.

Azules Point — From Estaca Point the shore, forming a slight bay,
trends in a XWI J N. direction for a mile to Azules Point; then
follows the opening of Azules, where the beach ends, and another por-
tion of soboruco extends for about ^ mile to a small beach 100 yards in
extent, and then continues for J mile as far as the beach, which termi^
nates in the northern extreme of the headland of Maysi.

Puertos andtRasita Points. — From Azules Point the coast, after
forming three small sandy bays, continues low and of soboruco to a
point rather saUent, named Puertos, on account of several openings
formed by the land in its vicinity, and thence to another point more
salient called Rasita.

Maysi Reef. — The headland of Maysi is comprised between Pintado
and Azules Points, a spjuic of about 5 miles. It is skirted by a reef at
the distance of 300 to 400 yards, which terminates at the latter point;
it is awash, the sea constantly breaks over it, and there are several
openings through it for boats and very small vessels. The openings
most used are those of Hembra, Mangle Bay, or Estaca, leading to the
River Maysi, and Azules j the others are not navigable with a fresh
breeze. The opening into Mangle Bay is almost always practicable,
being about 130 yards in breadth, and 7 fathoms deei), but a rocky head
with a little more than a fathom water on it lies on its south side.

This is the only regular anchorage within the reef used by small ves-
sels, where there*, are 7 and 8 feet water, sand and weed, but seek for
a clear place between the rocks.

Maysi Bank. — A rocky bank borders the ]Maysi Reef, all along, with
about 9 fathoms water on it at the distance of 500 to 700 yards, and a
mile from it there are from 73 to 90 fathoms, sand, gravel, and rock.
Cape Maysi is 200 yards ea^stward of tlie mendian of the lighthouse,
and where the reef is most dangerous during the night.

Caution. — Vessels from the northward, bound to the southern coast,
should be careful to steer sufficiently eastward to clear the reef; and in
rounding the cape from the southward the light should be brought well
westward before steering northward.

Currents. — Near the land otf Cape Maysi the flood runs westward
and the ebb eastward. During the summer months, with southerly
. winds easterly currents will be experienced, and with northerly winda
'southerly currents.

, »■ -•

BAGA POINT YUMURI ANCHORAGE. 109

. — From Azules Point the coast begins to rise, and rung
about WNW. for 5 miles to Fraile Point. Between Easita and Baga
Points the shore is of soboruco and forma a bay. Baga Point is a little
salient, and known by tbre>e large rocks above it. About 400 yards
within these rocks there is a well of good water, but it is diflQcult to
approach the coast on account of the hea\'y sea which breaks on it.

Fraile Point. — Rasa Point is next west of Baga Point, and the shore
b(*tween forms an indentation as far as two large rocks. Tbence the
coast of steep sobomco continues as far as a large rock called Fria Cave ;
from here it is of low soboruco, with an inner range of the same kind of
cliffs at a little distance from tlie shore, and continues to Fraile Point.
Fraile Point is salient, high, with a rock at its foot resembling a friar's
hood hanging down. About 200 yards westward of it there is a spring
issuing from the rock. The coast* as far us Fraile Point is cTear of
danger, and thence about 8 miles westward to Port Mata it can be
approached to the distance of a mile.

The Coast, from Fraile X^oint, forms a slight indentation as far as
Mangorita Point, which is somewhat salient; and on its eastern partis
a small bay, where there are five rocks. The coast then continues
straight to the Guanal Leap, which is high and abrupt; thence the shore
is of low soboruco to a point a little salient, named Guanal, with a wood
of i^alm trees on it. Then follows Frailecito, similar to Fraile Point
but smaller, and lastly that of Silencio. From this point the first part
of the coast is of soboruco, and then sand and gravel as far as the
mouth of the River Yumuri.

Ttunnri Ree£ — The River Yumuri runs through a great break in the
mountains and empties 800 yards westward of Silencio Point. From
this point a reef extends off 100 yards and skirts the shore as far as
the mouth of the river, where it joins a gravel bank, which in Xilaces is
270 yards from the shore, and terminates at the Rcdonda Rock, which
has a shore of gravel and sand between it and the river

In consequence .of the reef and bank, and the narrowness and little
depth of the mouth of the river, it is difficult to enter with small ves-
sels unless in the rainy season. The water is drinkable J mile fiom
the mouth. ^

Bariguita River. — Good water may be obtained at its mouth, which
is sheltered by a reef of rocks extending 100 yards from the isolated
hill. Near Larga Beach Point tliere is a lake of salt watf»r, but its
mouth is oidy open during the rainy season.

Tumuri Anchorage is in the bay between Silencio and Larga Beach
Points, where vessels may anchor in 11 fathoms water, sand and mud,
700 yards N. 43- W. (X. 45-=^ W. mag.) of Redonda Rock, distant 500
yards from the reef. There is no shelter from northerly winds. Besides
the reef and bank of Yumuri there are other dangers at this anchor-
age. The Gorda Rock pat(ih is about 28 yards in extent, and about
200 yards to the XW. of .Gorda Rock. The Bariguita Reef extends

^»5^-

■»

.»■

It .*

110 CUBA NORTH COAST.

off 300 yards from the middle of the shore, immediately westward of
Gorda Rock, with various rocks awash, one of which is named Buren^
Lastly, Bariguita shoals form a group J mile in extent east and west,

iF;^ and 200 yards north and south, in front of the beach of Barigoita*,

from which it is distant from 200 to 400 yards. The eastern extreme of
this group is 300 yards from Bariguita Reef; several of the heais com-
posing it are visible, and between them are 4 J and 5 fathoms water over
sand.

Larga Beach Ree£ — From Larga Beach Point a reef skirts the coast
as far as Mata Point, and in front of Manglito Beach it is about. 300
yards off. There is a small opening through it in front of the middle

h':' of the Beach of Barigua, Avith 3| fathoms water, black sand, and If

f fathoms somewhat more within ; and another opening in front of Mang-

lito Beach only a few yards wide land 4J fathoms deep, coarse sand.

'? From Silencio Point to Mata Point there is no bottom at 90 fathoms, a

mile from the land. From the break at the River Tumuri the high
mountain covered with trees ranges near the coast to the head of Port
Mata.

Port Mata is only lit, from its limited size and shallow water, for
small vessels.

t. The banks which border the shores leave only a space 300 yards in

I'-' diameter in the middle of the harbor, having a depth of 15 feet.

[ The entrance is open to the N"E., and in the winter months a heavy

it swell sets into the entrance.

[^" A bank borders each side of the entrance, and a vessel in entering

r has only to keep in mid-channel, carrying a depth of 4 to 6 fathoms.

t Supplies. — Several small streams of good water empty into the

* ' harbor and wood is plenty. Fresh provisions may be obtained from the

people in the neighborhood.

r Tide. — It is high water, full and change, at Port Mata, at 6h. 49m.;

^ and the rise is about 2 feet.

Port Boma. — This harbor is only the mouth of the river of the same
name, forming an inlet f mile long and hardly 200 yards wide.
The shore at the entrance is of rock, but farther in it becomes a man-
grove swamp. The harbor is only lit for coasters seeking temporary
anchorage or to load with the products of the neighboring farms. It
is open to the northward, and fresh breezes cause a heavy sea to roll in.
M^jana Point. — From Boma, the coast of soboruco forming some
slight indentations, trends to the NW. 2 J miles to Majana Point, which
has two large detached rocks on it. About 200 yards westward of

1^ Boma there is a white spot which is seen at some distance and useftil

in recognizing the port; about f mile farther on there is also a small
opening in the soboruco with very white sand in its interior, named
Caninguin; and about halfway between this and Majana Point lie some

K large detached rocks called Herrera.

Miel Bay and Anchorage.— From Majana Point the coast trends

MIEL BAY PORT BARACOA. Ill

westward for a mile to Bama Point, and then southward, forming a
rounded headland, and the points of Guanal, Hondito, and Playuela;
from the latter it runs straight to the south of the mouth of the River
Miel; here the rocky coast ceases, and the Miel Beach follows, extend-
ing west for a mile to the foot of Fort Matachin, of the town of Baracoa.

Between Bama and Barlovento Points is Miel Bay, about f mile
in breadth, and somewhat sheltere<l from easterly winds. When J mile
westward o^ Rama Point, steer to the southward until the mouth of
the Biver Miel bears about S. 60^ B. (S. 62^ B. mag.), and then anchor in
5 or 5J fathoms water, black sand, 400 yards from the weather shore,
which is of rock, and about the same distance from the beach; this is
the most convenient berth. This anchorage is open to northerly winds.
It is frequented for the x)urpose of communicating with Baracoa, if not
wishing to go there. The river runs for a long distance parallel to the
beach and very near it; water may be obtained a short distance from
its mouth at low tide.

Supplies — Water maybe had from the river, but it is very shallow
in the vicinity of its mouth and dry at l<w tide. Wood and small sup-
plies of provisions may be obtained.

Port Baracoa may be readily found by the Yunque de Baracoa, or
Anvil, 4 miles S. 79^ W. (S. 77o W. mag.) from the entrance. This is a
remarkable steep and flat- topped mountain, rising to 1,824 feet; may be
seen at a distance of 40 miles. It is partly covered with vegetation,
and there are some white and red spots in the break or opening in the
rock of which it is composed, visible at some distance. It is a most
useful landmark, and its shape, resembling an anvil, prevents its being
mistaken for any other mountain.

The shores of the port are bordered by a sand bank, which considerably
contracts the anchorage. It is exposed to the prevailing winds, which
throw in a heavy sea. At about 35 yards to the XW. of the inner point
on the SB. side of the entrance, is an isolated rock called the Buren,
which uncovers at low tide; the sea always breaks on it ; it is steep-to,
and the only danger. Vessels generally anchor close up to town in
3^ to 5 fathoms of water, sand. Bxcept in a small vessel, it can only
be left with the land wind ; consequently, in the season of the Northers,
a sailing vessel will be liable to some days' detention. The bottom in
general is loose, and during fresh northerly winds the port offers but
Uttle shelter.

The population is about 6,000. There is a hospital on the hill. Sa-
lutes can be returned by a battery of four gans on the point. The port
is the center of a large fruit trade.

The authorities to be visited are the mayor, commander and the
captain of the port.

The United States is represented by a consul and vice-consul.

Winds. — From March to June southerly winds prevail and squalls
from south to SW. may be looked for, in fact they should be looked

':j^r

112

CUBA NORTH COAST.

^i'

)k -

!«■■•

'»-

k! f

for at any time. These squalls are of short duration, but a vessel should
rid^ by a fair scoi)e of cable. Remittent fever is at times prevalent at
Baracoa, but the place is generally healthy, owing to its exposed posi-
tion. •

Supplies. — Near the pier at Baracoa the River Macaguauigua runs
into the sea, where water may be obtained. Fresh meat and lish to be
had at all times. Large quantities of fruit are exported to the United
States and Bahamas.

Steamers. — Herreras line (Spanish) carrying all mail from and to
all points; six mail days per month.

Telegraph. — There ijj telegraphic communication to Havana and San-
tiago do Cuba.

Light. — About 150 yards ESE. of Barlovento Point, a fixed white
light 50 feet above the sea, is shown from an iron column above the
keeper's dwelling, and may be seen'O miles.

Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at Baracoa, at 7h. 23m.,
and the rise is about 2J feet.

Pilots for the old Bahama ^hannel may generally be got at Baracoa.

TVinds and Currents — All this part of the coast, from Cape INIaysi
to Baracoa, is exjmscd during the winter months to the north and NE.
winds, which prevail at this season. During the summer squalls off
the land are experienced. The land winds are regular, and spring up
fresh generally at daylight, but do not extend far from the coast.

The direction of the current to a short distance from the land is west-
ward with the flood tide and eastward with the ebb.

The Coast from Baracoa trends about NW. J N. 9 miles to Bay or
Vaez Point, forming first a headland of soboruco, somewhat salient for
about a mile, and the points of Camello, Cerro, and Duaba, the latter
terminating in a long point, and 300 yards from it the river of the same
name runs into the sea. Then follows Duaba Beach, 1,200 yards in
length, forming a bay near the month of the river, which is generally
about 1() yards wide, increasing to 00 yards in the rainy season; it runs
parallel to the sliore to the end of the beach, and then turns suddenly
to the SSE.; the jmint here is named Jibiracon, where the river form
an opening during heavy rains. •

^ext to Duaba Point the Toar Beach runs in a straight line more
than a mile to the mouth of tlie river of tlie same name, which is about
10 yards wide, but increases during rains ; it fornm a lagoon with several
islets. Then Canes Beach, a mile long, ends at Canes Point, which is
the beginning of tlu* rocky (!oast of tlie same name. From this point,
round, somewhat salient, and known by a large palm tree and a house
over it, the coast of Canes and Sigua for more than a mile is of soboruco,
i^'hich terminates at Sigua, a small bay about 400 yards in extent, only
used by very small vessels in line weather. From Sigua the rocky coast
trends westward for h mile, forming Mara vi Point, as far as the entrance
to the port of that name.

^'A

PORT MARA VI PORT XAVA8. 113

Between Baracoa and Bay Point, the coast is backed by high land
covered with vegetation to very near the shore. Between Baracoa
and Doaba Point, the hill of Jaitecico rises about (KM) yarib), is about i
mile in extent, of little elevation, covereil with trees, ami is useful as a
mark. There are 92 fathoms water, about ^ mile from the coast, and 13
to 23 fathoms, sand and rock, 400 yards from it; except off Duaba and
Torae Baches, where tliere are 92 fathoms j mile off shore, and 14 to 46
fathoms at ^ mile.

Water may be e^isily obtained from the River Duaba; small vessels
can anchor near it, in the bight of the roi'ky coast formed by Duaba
Point.

Port Marayi. — Its shores are of soboinico, but on the west there are
three sandy beaches. At the head of the port the land is marshy,
with mangi'oves, and here the river of the same name empties. A bank
of sand, gravel, and rock borders the shore, contracting the entrance
to about 50 yards, and the anchorage to less than 150 yards in breadth.
Therefore, although the water is deep, there being from 9 to 15 fatlioms,
mud and rock, the port is only fit for small vessels, and in entering the
eye will be the best guide. A sailing vessel should leave with the laud
wind in the morning. This port is, however, exposed to the NE. and
not a safe anchorage except under favorable circumstances.

Supplies. — Water may be had from the river, but it is very shallow
near its mouth, and dry at low tide. Wood and small supplies of pro-
visions may be obtained.

Tidea. — It is high water, full and change, at Maravl, at 7h. 56m. ;
and the rise is about 2^ feet.

Port Cneva. — About a mile KW. of Port Maravi is that of Oueva,
and between is the little port of Aguticate, and the two bays of Oay
Gtiin, thus called from some conspicuous houses of that name seen on
the coast. This port is merely an inlet of little more than 400 yards,
forming an elbow at its extremity with a sandy shore, in the western
part of which the river of the Same name empties itself. About half-'
way in from the entrance to the elbow the breadth is only about 100
yards, the shore on either side is of soboruco, and in the middle of the
channel tlie depth is from 9 to If fathoms, with shallow water on either
side; it can only be used by small vessels.

Port Bay, — Close westward of Cueva is the inlet of Bay, and then
for nearly J mile the coast is low and ro<5ky, terminating in Bay Point,
which is rather low and almost separated from the coast, having on
its lee side an inlet fit for boats. This point is often named Vjiez, but
the pilots and seamen of the coasters call it Bay.

Port Navas. — From Bay Point the coiist trends about NW. by W.
8 miles to Jaragua Point. Nearly a mile from the former is Naguarage
Bay, fit only for boats, and the river of the same name runs into it;
thence tlie rocky coast of Navas, with slight indentations, continues
for a mile; and Jibout halfway is a salient point named Plata, on tlie
18402 8

114 CUBA — NORTH COAST.

weather side of which there is a small white beach and soborue-o above
it, by which the point is known. About j mile beyond this is Port
Navas, of circular form, 400 yards in diameter, with 5 to 10 fathoms
water, and which affords shelter from the prevailing winds; its mouth
is 200 yards wide, open to the north, and there is no difficulty in entering.

Port Cayagnaneque. — From Navas the rocky coast with three small
sandy bays, named Cay Santo, runs WNW. for about a mile to Port
Gayaguaneque, which is only lit for very small vessels. The channel
at its entrance is about 50 yards wide.

Mapuriai Point. — From Port Gayaguaneque the coast is of rock for
f mile to Mapurisi Point, which has two small sandy bays on its eastern
side; thence for the space of a mile, as far as Nibujon Point, are five
small sandy bays and a small opening called Seguro. To the westward
of Nibujon Point is the beach of the same name, 400 yards in length, and
above it several houses and cottages, and at its western end the river
runs into the sea, the water of wliich is good for drinking. Then follows
the rocky coast called Taco for about 1% mile, and then the beach of
the same name for 900 yards, which is of rock covered with white sand,
and which terminates at the entrance to Port Taco. At the west end
ot the beach, near the east i>oint of entrance, are some houses.

Port Taco is well sheltered. Its shores are bordered by a,bank,
which also extends along both sides of entrance to the coast bank out-
side. The channel at the entrance, which is a little more than 200 vards
long, is tortuous and narrowed to about (yS yards in breadth, and the
principal anchorage to a space of J mile in a NE. and SW. direction
and 350 yards in breadth. The port is therefore difficult and dangerous
to enter in a vessel of more than 11 feet draft, although there are OJ
fathoms water at the anchorage, as with a fresh breeze the sea breaks
against the rocky shore on the lee side of entrance with much force.

It will be prudent for a stranger to take a pilot for Port Taco, but if
unable to obtain one, and in case of necessity, bring the outer of the
western points of entrance to bejir S. 78° W. (S. 76^ W. mag.), distant
400 yards, and then steer tor the inner point, which is high, steep, and
conspicuous; when 150 yards from it, steer about S. 69° W. (S. 07^ W.
mag.) for 150 yards, and then about S. 24^ W. (S. 22° W. mag.), keeping
about one-third the distance across from the lee shore, till within the
harbor, when anchor as convenient. The edges of the bank are difficult
to be seen until close to them. A vessel must have the land wind to
leave.

Supplies. — Water, wood, and small supplies of provisions may be
obtained.

Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at Port Taco, at 8h. 49m.,
and the rise is about 2f feet.

Jaragua Point. — The coast for 400 yards westward of Taco is of
rock; then the beach of Jaragua for a long J mile follows, when the
coast is of soboruco and forms Jaragua Point, extending 400 yards

MAGCANA R££r — ^JARAOUA. 115

from tl|^ reach. From the west point of eDtrance to Taoo a reef skirts
the coast, which terminates at this point, and is about 150 yards wide.

Magoaiui Haef begins 300 yards westward of Bay Points and ends
about midway between Naguarage Bay and Plata Point. Its greatest
breadth is aboat J mile, which is in front of the eastern point of Na»
gnarage Bay. The reef has two openings; that eastward of Magiiaua
is only fit for boats or very small vessels, between the eastern extremity
of the reef and the coast, and it should not be attempted when tliere is
a high sea.

The other opening is in the widest part of the reef, and 50 yartls in
breadth. In the channel within the reef the bottom is sand, with
depths of 4^ to 10 fathoms, and which affonls good anchonige for small
vessels requiring shelter. In order to reach it, skirt the reef by the eye
until at the opening, when steer to the southward for about 21K) yards
in mid-channel, and haul to windward for the middle of that part of
the coast of Naguarage which separates the entrance of the bay from
the beach of Maguana, and anchor in If to «i} fathoms water, sand.
This opening divides the reef into two parts, and a vessel may anchor
within on either side in one or 2 fathoms, sand.

Saddle of Bay. — All this part of the coast is thickly wcM>diHl, as is
the highland a short distance in the interior. Among the various
heights the Saddle of Bay rises 1,378 feet above the seji, nearly 3 miles
S. oS^ W. (S. 5(>o W, mag.) of Bay Point; its summit forms a saddle or
two peaks, and can be seen 42 miles.

Jaragna is a small anchorage where small vessels uniy lie under
shelter of the reef. The break or oiHMiing is alnnit 200 feet wide and
its edges on both sides are marked by breakers. Just inside the reef,
abreast of the opening, are three small islets.

To enter the anchorage, coast along outside of the reef till the east^^rn
point of the southern and largest of these three islets bears 8. 67^ E,
(S. 690 E. mag.). Then steer for this iwint and anchor according to the
vessel's draft of water.

Abreast of the middle islet there are 5J fathoms of water, deiTeasing
farther in.

Tliis vicinity should be avoided, and when near it the latitudt* should
be frequently and carefully ascertained, especially at night, as a strong
indraught is said to have caused many disasters.

The Coast from Jaragua trends first about WNW. and then north,
forming a bay, as far as Mangle Point, which is 7 miles from the former.
The reef, which beging at Jaragua, skirts the whole of this bay, extend-
ing 2 miles offshore. South of Mangle Point are Yaminigu<»y and Oancite
Anchorages, which are entered through two breaks in the re(»f, for whic^h
the best guide will be the plan, but they are fit only for small craft.
At night or in hazy weather, it is necessary to be cautious in ])assing
this reef. From Mangle Point the coast runs WNW. for 7 miles to the
River Moa, and is skirted by a reef at the distance of IJ to 2 miles.

116 CUBA — NORTH COAST.

The River Moa, one of the largest in Cuba, has a fall of more thau
3<>0 feet a short distance from the mouth. The entrance is shallow and
only 30 yards wide, but the river deepens inside. About 12 miles in-
land are some mountains called the Sierras de Moa, which are good
landmarks.^ From the mouth of the river to Yaguasey Point, IJ miles
Uy the westward, the coast is low and formed by sandy beaches alter-
nating with mangrove swami)S, tlirough which the creeks or esteros of
Fabrica and Yaguasey empty. From Yaguasey Point, which is low,
the coast, also low and covered with mangroves, trends WSW. for IJ
miles to the mouth of the Estero de Moa, where there are three or four
fishermen's huts, the remains of a former settlement.

From the Estero de Moa, the coast trends NW. ^W. for 2 miles to
Cabanas or Oavagan Point; is low and sandy, with a few rocky bluflfe,
and J mile from Estero de Moa is a spot where good water may be
obtained.

The bay between Yaguasey and Cabanas Points is called the Cayo
Moa Bay.

Cayos de Moa are two islets lying just inside the reef, one mile
westward of the opening. The larger one of the two is IJ miles long,
from i to J mile wide, of rectangular shape, and has a projecting point
at its SE. angle. The smaller cay lies NW. of the larger, from which
it is separated by a narrow creek, is J mile in diameter, and both cays
are low and covered with mangroves.

Fort Cayo Moa is protected on its northern^ide by the Cayos de
Moa.

The anchorage is about one mile long and ^ mile wide, and is ap-
proached through an opening called the Quebrado de Moa, about 600
yards wide in its narrowest part.

Shoals. — Just within the opening in the reef and on a line between
it and the mouth of the Eiver Moa is a bank of sand and rock called the
Bajo Grande, about J mile in diameter. In some places on this shoal
there are less than 2 fathoms of water. One mile west of the B^jo
Grande and J mile south of Cayo Grande de Moa is another shoal, of
small extent, called the Yaguasey Shoal, the least water on which is 9
feet. Another small shoal spot, J mile farther to the northward, called
Palanca Shoal, is generally marked by a stake.

The eastern or weather reef at the entrance to this anchorage is dis-
tinctly marked, even in fine weather, by broken water, and the rocks
are rather above water than awash. But on the lee or western side of
entrance there is nothing to mark the danger for at least § of a mile
from the eastern reef. The general body of the shoal extending from
Cayo Moa, is coral covered with dark weed, which, even with 9 feet of
water over it, looks deep; but the SE. end of it is white sand and the
bottom can be seen. In standing for this anchorage bring the mouth
of the Eiver Moa to bear 8. 11° W. (S. 9° W. mag.), on which bearing the
opening in the reef will present a fair channel way and the eastern side

PORT YAGUANEQUE — PORT NIPE. 117

of the reef be easily distiiiguit^lied. Or, coast along the weather reef from
the eastward, keeping off about 100 yards, or less, if necessary, as 7 to
9 fathoms will be tbund 30 yards off.

Directions.— The course through the opening is S. 11^ W. (S. 9° W.
mag.), keeping near the weather side. As soon as the SE. point of Oayo
Moa, called Pajaros Point, bears N. 82^ W. (N. 84° W. mag.), steer 8-
70O W. (S. 68^ W. mag.), leaving the Bajo Grande on the port hand, till
the mouth of the River Moa bears S. 20^ E. (S. 22^ E. mag.), then haul
up a little more to the westward and anchor in from 11 to 12 fatlioms,
muddy bottom, with Pajaros Point bearing about N. 28^ W. {IS^. 30o W.
mag.), i mile distant.

Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at about 7h. Om., and the
rise is about 3 feet. The flood stream at the eastern end of Cayo Moa
Beef sets to the SW. a mile an, hour, and the ebb to the northward.

Port Yagaaneque. — From Port Moa the shore trends westward 10
miles to Yaguaneque, and the reef between extends off for 2 to 3 miles.
About 6 miles to leeward of Moa, a mile within the edge of the reef, is
Burro Cay, and 3 miles farther on, about J mile from the shore, is Arena
or Sand Cay. The entrance to the port is through a small opening in
the reef § mile to the SW. of the latter cay; but being so narrow and
intricate, and the interior merely a shallow lagoon, it is only flt for small
coasters.

Cananova, 1^ miles westward of Yaguaneque, is a small narrow inlet
of similar character, and is entered through an intiricate opening in the
reef north of it, which is here only J mile from the shore.

Port CeboUas, 4 miles farther westward, is equally difficult of access,
and only fit for coasters. The shore is low and sandy, and the reef
about ^ mile distant.

Port Tanamo. — From Cebollas the low sandy shore continues west-
ward 9 miles to Port Tanamo, and is again foul to the distance of a
mile. Midway between is the mouth of the Eiver Sagua. This port is of
considerable extent, and studded with small islets, between which are
deep channels. The cut through the reef and the channel into the port
are both very narrow, but the dangers are easily seen, and the eye will
be the best guide.

Ports Cabonico and Livisa. — From Tanamo a low sandy shore, still
bordered by a reef to the distance of about 2 miles, trends westerly for
9 miles to the entrance of the ports of Cabonico and Livisa. These
ports are entered through a narrow deep channel about 200 yards wide.
About i mile within the entrance a narrow neck of land divides the
interior into two cliannels; the easternmost leading into Cabonico, the
other into Livisa. Both are very tortuous and intricate, but have suf-
ficient water for vessels of large draft. Most of the dangers are seen,
and the eye will guide in mid channel.

Port Nipe. — ^From the entrance to Cabonico the coast trends WNW.
6 miles to Port Nipe. In this space the reef skirts the shore at about

•N

%'-:'U¥^

V, •

.' * '

« •

118 CUBA ^NORTH COAST.

a mile until close to tlie eutrance to Nipe, where it extends off only J
mile. Port Nipe is about 9 miles in extent east and west, and from 3 to
7 miles in breadth. It is quite secure against all winds, and will admit
vessels of the largest draft without difficulty. The entrance is from J
to 3 mile wide, and all that is necessary in entering is to steer in mid-
channel; the tides run very strong in the narrows. After passing the
inner points of the entrance, keep the northern shore aboard until
within Mangle Point, from which a shoal extends to the NNE. } mile,
when anchor as most convenient, in 6 to 9 fathoms water; the edges of
the shoals are marked by stakes.

A sailing vessel yriH have to wait for the land wind to take her out,
which, as before stated, in the winter season is frequently interrupted
by Northers for some days.

Monnt Saxna. — The land in this neighborhood is remarkable. About
10 miles inland the Cristal Range, a continuation of the Baracoa Chain,
rises to a great height. To the NW. of Port Nipe there is also a lofty
ridge of mountains rising ft^m the shore at Mulas Point to the Pan de
Sama, a hill of rounded form, 918 feet above the sea, with some long
table-land close to the westward, and a peaked hill to the east of it; it
can not well be mistaken, and may be seen 20 miles. The two ranges
are separated by an extensive valley, which also serves as a good guide.

Port Banes. — From the entrance to Nipe a bold and steep coast
trends to the NNW. and NW. for 9 miles to this harbor, which is also
well sheltered, and of sufficient depth for large vessels. Its entrance,
however, lies at the bottom of a bay or funnel 2 miles wide in the out-
ward part, and completely exposed to the usual trade wind. The
channel into the port narrows to 300 yards, and the turnings are so
sharp that it is a very difficult pilotage. In leaving, make sure of a
good offing before the heavy wind fails, as the vessel will be on a dan-
gerous lee shore and exposed to a heavy sea and lee current.

LncrecU Point. — ^From Canones Point the shore runs in a NNE.
direction 6 miles to Point Mulas, and is foul nearly a mile off. Thence
it trends NNW. 4 miles to Manglito Point, and then about NW. for 2
miles to the east point of Larga Beach, on which stands Lucrecia light-
house. The i)oint of this latter name is about ^ mile westward, and the
land here rises by degrees from the sea to a height of about 200 feet a
mile inland. From abreast Manglito Point a reef skirts the shore for
1 J miles westward at a distance of 200 yards. From the lighthouse the
shore trends nearly west for IJ miles to Gorda Point, forming various
points a little salient ; this part of the coast is called Larga Beach, and
it is bordered by a reef which extends northward i mile.. Between
Manglito and Gorda points the shore is low and mostly of sobonico,
with some parts covered with sand. A short distance from the sea
mangroves and trees are seen, and the coast appears somewhat higher
than it really is.

PORT SAMA ^PORT VITA. 119

Light. — ^The tower near Lucrecia Point exhibits at 132 feet above the
sea a flashing red light ^ duration of flashy 2 seconds. The light shoald
be visible 18 miles.

Port Sama. — From Gorda Point the coast trends about XW. by W-
6 miles to Sama Point, which is 3J miles eastward of the port of the
same name. All this part of the shore is clean and steep-to, and about
midway is the small River Seco at the head of a sandy bay. Port Sama
is a small inlet about 1^ miles long, north and south, from 200 to 400
yards wide, and only fit for vessels drawing not more than 1% feet water.
The entrance may be readily found by the Pan de Sama, which rises
south of it. To the westward of the port there is also the table Idnd or
flat-topped ridge of mountains running NW. and SE., and its west end
is bold, scarped, and of a whitish appearance.

Port Naranjo. — Between Sama and Karai\jo, 5 miles westward, the
shore is composed of sand and named Guarda-la-vaca. To the south-
ward of it there is a detached sugar-loaf hill, and to the SW. the table
of Naranjo, a small wooded mountain with a flat summit. Naranjo lies
between these two objects, and about 3 miles to windward of it there is
a remarkable red cliff, and on the east side of the entrance there is also
another of the same appearance, high and scarped. The shore between
it and Sam'^ is foul to the distance of about ^ mile. The entrance to
the port is only 200 yards wide, but it opens out into an irregular-shaped
basin containing several inlets deep enough for vessels of all classes,
sheltered from all winds, and they can sail in or out of it with the usual
sea breeze.

In entering this port a berth should be given to the reef sldrting the
weather coast until the eastern point of entrance bears 8. 3^ E. (S. 5^
E. mag.), then steer in, giving the point a berth of 200 yards to avoid
the shallow sandbank which surrounds it at a distance of 150 yards.
Care should also be taken to guard against the sandbank bordering the
lee side of entrance, and which extends northward 350 yards from the
outer scarped i)oint. Having passed through the middle of the channel
by the eye, anchor about 150 yards off a marshy and mangrove shore on
the eastern side, in 9 fathoms water; or proceed farther up into what
the fisherman call the Oai't^nage or western bight. The best berth here
will be in about 8 fathoms, with the center of tlie table of Naraiyo S,
69^ W. (S. 67^ W. mag. ), and the north point of the Car^nage in one
with the red cliff at the entrance about north. The table of Naranjo
from this quarter has a conical appearance.

Wood and Water. — There is good wooding and watering; the latter
a stream on the southern sliore at the head of the Cart^nage, abreast the
table of N^aranjo ; but there will be some difficulty in finding the opening
in the bushes leading to it.

Tide. — The rise of tide at Port Naranjo is 3J feet.

Port Vita. — From the entrance to Port Naranjo the shore trends
WNW. 2 miles to Pesquero Nuevo i>oint, which is scarped and clear

120 CUBA — NORTH COAST.

of danger, and then SW. 3 miles to Port Yita. This part of the coast
is low, sandy, clean and steep-to. Vita is a small, narrow, irregular-
shaped inlet, which may be used and easily piloted by vessels drawing
under 18 feet. »

Port Bariay. — ^Three miles westward of Vita is Bariay, and a mile
farther Jururu; tlie shore between is clear of danger^ Port Bariay is
open to the northward, and therefore not safe in the winter months^
but there is good temporary anchorage close under the weather shore
off the second sandy beach from the entrance. Farther in the channel
is obstructed by a shoal, on which there is as little as 6 fe^t of water.

Port Jururu is more extensive than that of Bariay, and the interior
completely sheltered, with a depth of 4 fathoms; but the entrance is
narrow, rather tortuous, and only fit for small fore-and-aft rigged
vessels of light draft.

Gibara is merely a small bay open to the northward, having a depth
of 3J fathoms just inside the i)oints of the entrance.

Three small hills to the southward of the port, and which from the
offing resemble islands, serve as landmarks for this vicinity. The
easternmost of these is called the Saddle of Gibara, the middle one is
shaped like a sugar-loaf, and the westernmost is called JVIount Can-
delaria. The town is on the west side of the bay, and can be seen at a
distance of 9 miles.

To enter the harbor it is only necessary to bring the entrance well
open and steer in half way between the points of entrance.

There is said to be a bank near the middle of the bay called the Casco
de San Vicente, but no definite information can be given as to its exact
location or depth of water. It may, however, be avoided by keeping
the eastern shore aboard. Although there is no shelter from northerly
winds and the harbor is only fit for small vessels, it is the port of Hol-
guin, a large town about 15 miles inland in a liighly productive part of
the countrv.

The River Oibara, navigable for a short distance by boats, empties
into the head of the bay. Coast pilots for the north coast of Cuba and
the Old Bahama Channel may be obtained here.

The United States is represented by a consular agent.

The Coast from the western point of Gibara Bay takes a northerly
direction for 2 miles to Brava Point and is bold and rocky. It then
bends round about NW. for 7 miles to Gorda Point, and 5J miles farther
is Mangle Point. The shore is rocky, sloping, and clean to Mangle
Point, but it then becomes sandy and steep-to as far as the eastern
X)oint of Ilerradura Bay, 7 miles to the WNW., where coasters draw-
ing 10 feet find anchorage, but it is open to the northward. Thence
it takes a more westerly direction for 7 miles to Port Padre. This latter
part is low and foul to some distance; on the shore are many remarka-
ble palm trees.

PORT PADRE PORT NUEVAS GRANDES. 121

Port Padre is a secure and capacions basin, with a depth of at least
4 fathoms in the greater part of it. The western side of this bay is
steep-to. To enter the port it is only necessary to keep well off the
reef which terminates oft* Point Jarro and, when this point bears about
south 450 east (S. 47^ E. mag.), stand into the bay, keeping near the
western shore. Steer in ipid-channel; with the aid of the cliai*t no
difficulty will be found, as there are no hidden dangers. There is a
village on the western side of the entrance.

The harbor is nearly divided in two parts. The easternmost anchor-
age will be found the most convenient for leaving with a sailing vessel.
The channel leading to it is between the two islands just inside the
entrance.

The shores of the harbor are low and swampy.

Five perches mark the channel int4> the western branch of Port Padre
after passing Point (Jracia, one on tlie NW. end of Cay Puercos, one off
the XW. end of Gay Juan Claro — these are to be left on the port hand —
and three on the shoal between Puerco Cove and Morena Point, to be
left) on the starboard hand. There is also a beacon surmounted by a
ball, and painted green and white, on a shoal named Esteron in the
harbor.

Mcdagueta. — The sliore from Port Padre continues its westerly
direction for 5 miles to Piedra Point, where theife is a small opening
leading into Malagueta Inlet, an extensive unnavigable lagoon. The
land around is low and swampy. Thence ttie coast takes a NNW.
direction 3J miles to Cobarrubias Point and then WNW. 7 miles to
Port Manati. All this coast is skirted by a reef to the disttince of about
2 miles.

Port Manati has a depth of 4J^ to 5^ fathoms. It is merely a long,
narrow, crooked channel, bordered by shoal banks on both sides and
leading into a shallow lagoon surrounded by low, marshy land. The
place is only fit for small coasters. On its western side is a conic^al hill
called El Maiiueco, and a little beyond it another, not quite so high^
called the Pardo or Mesa de Manati. These elevations mav be seen 15
or 20 miles and are good guides for the offing; when seen nearly in a
line they resemble the Saddle of Gibara, and if mistaken for it the
error might lead to accidents. All this part of the shore is foul, the
reef extending off about § mile from the entrance of the inlet, through
which a channel is formed leading to the port.

Port Nnevas Orandes. — From Manati the coast trends about N W,
2 miles to Braba Point, and then NW. by W, 4J miles to the entrance
of Nuevas Grandes, which is merely a small tortuous inlet, in some
parts only 200 yards wide and only navigable for vessels under 12 feet
draft. All this part of the shore is foul, and the reef extends off about
I mile from the entrance of the inlet, through which a channel is
formed leading to the port.

122 CUBA NORTH COAST.

Port NnoTitas del Principe. — From Nuevas Grandes the coast
takes a NW. direction for 13 miles to !N"uevitas del Principe, is skirted
by a reef all the way, and should not be approached within 2 J miles.

Nuevitas is the port of Puerto Principe, about 45 miles distant, the
two places being connected by a railway. The land is low on both
8ides of entrance; the town is surrounded by hiUs from east to SW.;
back of the town the land is low. The entrance of the harbor may be
recognized by the Maternillos lighthouse, by three small hills on the
south side of the harbor, and by three islets in the harbor called Los
Ballenatos, a little higher than the surrounding land. Also on the east
side of the entrance is a quadran|:ular building, paiuted yellow, sur-
mounted by a white mast, from which is shown a light.

The harbor is large, completely sheltered, and capable of admitting
vessels of the largest draft. The entrance is through a crooked, narrow
chaunel nearly 6 miles long. Middle Shoal is in the center of the chan-
nel, so that#the assistance of a pilot is desirable, although there are no
hidden dangers. The outer points of the entrance are low and about J
mile apart. In entering without a pilot the eye and chart are the best
guides. Care must be taken to avoid a dry sand spit near the end of
the eastern reef, and bearing N. 66° E. (N. 54P E. mag.) one mile from
the flagstaff on the point. The harbor in front of the town is shoaling
and vessels drawing J.4 feet should not come inside of Guanjay Point.

If it is only desired to communicate with the town, anchorage will be
found off the fort about IJ miles within the entrance. The town of San
Fernando de Nue vitas is 14 miles from tlie entrance, on the point of a
peninsula which separates the southern part of the harbor from Mari-
navo Bay; it does not come in sight until Guanjay Point is passed.

At the entrance of the port the tidal stream is said to have a
strength of 3 miles an hour. Tide rises about 2 J feet.

The population is about 2,200. The health of the city is good, the
sickly season being from April to September. Provisions are abun-
dant. Kain water can be had from cisterns. Eiver water not used.
The bay is celebrated for its fish; they are abundant and in great variety.

Trade is mostly with the United States. Large numbers of cattle
are shipped to Havana. The United States is represented by a con-
sular agent.

Authorities to visit: Cai>tain of the port.

Steamers. — Steamers cross either way to and from Havana every 5
days. Herreras West Indian Line, two steamers a month to Puerto
Bico and three to Santiago de Cuba and return. Gompailia Transat-
lantica, from Havana to Puerto Rico monthly, in combination with the
steamers at San Juan for Spain.

Mails from the United States, via Tampa, to Havana twice a week in
summer and three times in winter. They are quite regular. Six days
to New York when connections are made.

Telegraph. — Telegrams can be sent to all points via Principe and
Havana.

MATERNILLOS POINT GUAJABA ISLAND. 123

Pilots are spoken of as being intelligent and reliable. Two pilots
reside in the houses near light at east entrance point and two pilots
reside in town. Strangers should always take a pilot before going up
to the town.

Light. — On Barlovento or Pilot Point, the east side of the entrance,
is a quadrangular building painted yellow, and a white mast stands in
the middle of it, from which is exhibited, 48 feet above the sea, a white
light, visible 9 miles.

Matamillos Point is 4^ miles from the entrance to Port Nuevitas.
The coast between is low, but free of danger. The point is surrounded
by a coral reef called the Corona de Maternillos. From Maternillos
Point as far westward as Icacos Point, a space of nearly 250 miles, the
coavSt is bordered with low mangrove cays and reefs to the distance in
some pla<5es of 20 miles from the mainland. The greater part to the west-
ward of Paredon Point is but imperfectly represented on the charts,
and, being studded with dangers, steep-to, should be most cautiously
approached.

Light. — The lighthouse on Maternillos Point is 170 feet high, white,
with the word Colon painte<l on it, and exhibits, 174 feet above the sea,
a fixed and flashing w^hite light every 48" seconds, duration of flash 5
seconds. The light should be visible 17 miles.

Cay Sabinal. — The shore is very low and sandy, backed by numer-
ous lagoons and swamps, and skirted by a broken reef to the distance
of from one to 1^ miles, with s(mndings about ^ mile outside of it.

Between this reef and the coast there are anchorages for vessels
whose draft does not exceed 9 feet^ such as Tortugilla, Cruces, and
Oaravelas, where there is shelter from the ordinary winds, but not from
the northward. These anchorages are entered through the openings in
the reef which are shown by the sea breaking, and a vessel may steer
in by the lead and eye and anchor, when sheltered, as convenient.

The only remarkable object on this coast is a large clump of man-
grove trees about 10 miles to the westward of Maternillos Point called
the Alto de Juan Danue. Very near it is a small cay 30 feet high.

The Boca de Caravelaa is a narrow opening between Cay Sabinal
and Ouajaba Island. There is a depth of one fathom on its bar, and
about the same depth may be carried through a crooked channel between
the mangrove cays as far as the town and river of Guanaja, 22 miles to
the westward. This village is on the great bay of the same name,
bounded by the cx)ast of Cuba and the Cays of Guajaba and Eomano.

At the entrance of the Boca de Caravelas the tide runs at the rate
of 3 knots.

Guigaba Island. — From the Boca de Caravelas the NE. side of the
island of Guajaba trends nearly NW. 10 miles. For the first 4 miles it
is a low mangrove shore; the remainder is a sandy beach. It is skirted
by reefs at a distance of nearly 2 miles, which continue to Cay Confltes,
forming various breaks which afford anchorages for small vessels of not

124 CUBA — NORTH COAST.

more than 7 feet draft. On this island are two small hills; the SB.
hill is about a mile in extent, XW. and 8E., and 90 feet high; the other
is a smaller round lump, and a little less elevated. When first seen
from the eastward they have the api)earanee of four small hummocks,
and serve as guides to this part of the coast.

Boca Gucgaba, which separat'CS this island from Cay Romano, has
a depth of 5 feet at its entrance at low wat-er, the tide runs 2 knots an
hour, and there is a boat channel with 3 feet water up to Guanaja.

Cay Romano is inside the chain of cays and reefs, and separated
from the Cuban shore by a sort of shallow lagoon. It is mostly cov-
ered with a mangrove swamp and divided in two by a narrow inlet.

On the eastern end of Cay Romano is a remarkable hill. At the foot
of this hill, called the Silla de Romano, on the beach, will be seen two
tisliing stations.

There is a smaller hill 16 miles to the KW., and oidy 100 feet high,
called the Alto de Aji. Another similar hill, near the NW. extremity
of the cay, is called Juan Sa^z.

The bottom between Cay Romano and the Cuban shore is of olive-
colored mud covered with woeds.

Cay Verde is a small, low islet, of a circular form, and 200 yards in
diameter, covered with bushes to the height of 10 feet above high water,
and inside the reef, N. by E. of the Cay Guajaba, there is an opening
through w^hich 10 teet of water may be carried, and i mile SW. of Cay
Verde there is shelter for vessels of this draft against Northers. The
best channel to take is that round the north end of the reef, about IJ
miles fi'om the cay; but it requires good local knowledge of the place
to enable a vessel to thread her way safely through the shoals.

Cay Confites is a low cay, and lies close on the edge of soundings.
On its south end there is a pile of stones, and near the north end a sol-
itary tree, which is the first object seen when coming from the SB,
Oft' the north end a dry reef extends to the distance of one mile, leav-
ing a small channel 12 feet &eep between it and the cay. A dry reef
also extends from the south end.

Between this latter dry reef and the reef running off to the north-
ward of Cay Verde there is a clear channel carrying'a depth of 5 fathoms,
and leading into anchorage under Cay Confit^ss in from 2 to 4 fathoms
of white sand. The best sheltered berth is with the cay bearing N.
45^ E. (X. 4;^^ E. mag.) about a mile off, or nearer, according to the
vessel's draft. It should be observed, however, that with the wind to
the southward of east a heav\v roll of the sea set« in round the south
end of the cay. This is the only anchorage on this side of the Bahama
Channel, between Xuevitas and Paredon Grande Cay, where a vessel
drawing more than 12 feet can ride out a Norther in safety.

In passing through the channel between Cay Verde and Cay Confites
keep a little closer to the latter than the former. When the middle of
Cay Confites bears K 38o W. (N. 40o \V. mag.) and Cay Verde S. 11^

CAY CRUZ PAREDON GRANDE CAY. . 125

W. (S, 90 W. inag.) a vessel will be on the edge of the bauk of sound-
ings, or nearly so. Then steer X. C80 W. (N. 70^ W. mag.), till the
south end of Cay Confites bears north (N. 2^ W. mag.); thence the
course is about N. 30^ W. (X. 32^ W. mag.) till the southern end of
Cay Oonfttes bears N. 45° E. (N. 43^ E. mag.), where the anchor may
be let go in 3 to 4 fathoms of water; sandy bottom.

In quitting this anchorage, if the wind does not permit a vessel to
leave by the SE. channel, steer to the NW. until clear of the reef ex-
tending from the north end of the cay.

Cay Cruz is about llj miles long, in a NW. and SE. direction, very
low and flat, with a sandy shore, and at its NE. point there is a remark-
§,ble clump of trees, 30 feet high. A mile WN W. of the clump of trees
is a sand bank, which is only seen when near it. The cay is divided in
the center by a small cut, and abreast it on Cay Romano there is the
remarkable hummock called the Alto de Aji. Between these two cays
there is only a foot of water at low tides, and the bottom is like pipe
clay.

Tributarios da Minenra Reef. — About ^ mile within the edge of
soundings, 2 miles north of the north end of Cay Cruz, lie the Tribu-
tarios de Minerva, a reef on which the sea breaks with tresh breezes,
and which uncovers at low tide. In a WNW. direction from this reef
are numerous others, with but little water on them, and near the edge
of soundings. The edge of the bank, between Cay Confltes and the
Tributarios de Minerva runs NW. in a straight line for 14^ miles, and
may be seen from aloft, the white sandy bottom showing itself dis-
tinctly just within the edge of the bank, which is very steep-to. This
part is extremely dangerous, and should be approached very cau-
tiously, as there is no safe anchorage whatever.

Caiman and Anton Caya. — About 4 miles NW. of Cay Cruz lies
Caiman Cay^ higher than others in the vicinity; and about 3 miles
farther, at Sandy Cay, begins a chain which extends in a NW. by W.
direction for 9 miles to Anton Cay, and thence to Paredon Orande Cay,
all skirted by shallow banks without anything particular to recognize.

Paredon Grande Cay. — The space between Caiman and Paredon
Grande Cays is interrupted by low cays, sand banks, and reefs. From
the Tributarios de Minerva the edge of the bank takes about a NW.
by W. direction for 18 miles, when it comes within 2 miles of th6 north
end of Paredon Orande Cay, which is about 5 miles in length east and
west, rocky, woody, and about 40 feet high. Guinchos (or Ginger)
Cay, on the edge of the Bahama Bank, bears from the north point of
Paredon Grande N. 8^ E. (N. 6° E. mag.) 16 miles.

Light. — On the northern part of this cay is an iron structure, white
with a brown base, on a foundation of rock, from which is exhibited a
fixed and flashing light, flash every minute, 150 feet above the sea
and visible about 19 miles.

126 CUBA — NORTH COAST.

Paredon del ACedio. — To the NW. of Paredon Grande and close to
it is Paredon Chica, a round cay of regular height; and 2^ miles west
of the latter is another similar cay, 25 feet high, named Paredon del
Medio. These cays afford shelter with the wind from NE. to east for
vessels of 9 feet draft, but with the wind from NNB. it is necessary to
leave the anchorage in consequence of the heavy sea which sets in*
The Paredon del Medio is foul on the north and east, and a vessel can
not pass inside it. About half-way between the two Paredons lies a
bank on which the sea generally breaks.

Between Gay Coniites and Paredon Grande there is no anchorage^
as throughout the space is full of shoals not sufficiently ]arge to afford
shelter. The bank should not be approached closely without purpose.

Water. — The only good water to be obtained at any of these cays is
from a few springs or wells. In some places by digging in the sand it
may be found, but is generally brackish.

Tides — The stream of tide set»s right on and off the bank about half
a knot an hour, but in the openings between the cays it runs from 2 to
3 knots. It is high water, full and change, at 7h. 30m., and the rise at
springs is 3 feet. Between the cays and the main the rise is not more
than a foot, and the stream is scarcely perceptible.

Cay Coco. — Five miles SW. by W. of Paredon del Medio is the
northwestern part of Cay Eomano, separated from Cay Coco by a chan-
nel J mile wide and nearly 4 feet deep. Cay Coco is of moderate height,
with various sandy places on the northern part, and the southern part
extends westward covered with mangroves to southward of Guillermo
Cay. At the northern part of Cay Coco is the port of the same name,
sheltered with northeasterly winds, formed by Jaula Cay, and a small
reef which unites it to Cay Coco. This anchorage is exposed to north-
erly winds. Three-quarters ot a mile northward of the east end of Cay
Coco is Queche, a small fiat cay covered with mangroves. Westward
of Paredon del Medio, shoals extend almost continuously to the NE,
part of Cay Coco.

Jaula, Gaillermo, and San Felipe Cays. — Four miles westward of
Coco Point is Jaula Cay. WNW. of Jaula there are three other small
cays name San Felipe, the smallest distant 4, the next 6, and the most
western 7 miles. Guillermo Cay lies W. 6 miles from Jaula Cay, and
extends 5J miles ESE. and WXW.; its western part is of moderate
height.

Media Luna Cay is flat and bordered with reefs on its southern and
western sides. N. 79° W. (N. 81^ W. mag.) of the cay, and lying on
the edge of the bank of soundings, are two shoals. South of these
shoals and of San Felipe, Media Luna, and Santa Maria Cays, there is
a channel from Point Coco to the anchorage of Cay Frances for vessels
drawing not more than 9 feet.

South of Guillermo Cay, and extending from the west end of Cay
Coco, is a group of 13 cays laid down on the charts, the names of which

SANTA MARIA CAYS— CAY FRANCES. 127

are not given. From Cay Coco they curve around to the south and
west, the curve being open to the eastward.

The Hijos Uuillermo are three cays of small extent, surrounded by a
reef, and lying 1 J miles WNW. from Guillermo Cay.

Santa Maria Caya. — About WNW. of Media Luna Cay is the chain
of small cays of Santa Maria, the eastern of which is 8 and the western
14 miles from it. »

Close westward of this List group is Caiman Cay, S W. of which again
is Santa Maria Cay, which is of regular height, and extends 6 miles east
and west.

Prom Paredon Grande, the edge of the bank takes about a WNW.
direction for 50 miles, and is then about 4 miles northward of Santa Ma>
ria Cay. This part of the coast is very little known ; it is dangerous, and
aftbrds no anchorage whatever to any but small coasters, that are well
acquainted with it. The bank next trends WS W. 10 miles, its edge con-
tinuing nearly the same distance from the outer cays.

Cay Frances.— About 7J miles S. 82^ W. (S. 79^ W. mag.) of Santa
Maria Cay is the esist end of Cay Frances, which is of regular height
and 3 miles in extent. On its north side are seen, extending east and
west, three round hills, two joined together, and the third somewhat
separated, which are called the nipples of Viuda. The paps of Buena
Vista and Mount Gu^jabana will also be observed; the former bears
about S. 370 W. (S. 340 W. mag.) from the west end of the cay, and the
latter S. 49^ W. (S. 46^ W. mag.). On the west point of the cay, wliich
is low and rooky, are several pilot houses. The point is surrounded by
a sand bank which extends westward, and to the 8W. for nearly a
mile; a mile westward of the point the depth is 5 fathoms; a red buoy
(not to be depended upon) is placed in 6 feet water, iCbout 300 yards
within the southern edge of this bank.

Light. — On the western end of Cay Frances is a lighthouse, from a
mast at tiie NW. end of which, at an elevation of 60 feet, is exhibited a
fixed white light visible 15 miles.

Cay Frances Anchorage is, however, only a narrow vein of deeper
water about ^ mile wide and running east and west. In standing in
keep the paps of Buena Vista well open to the westward of Herradura
Oaya and Cobos Cay till the S W. end of Cay Frances bears S. 67° E.
(S. 700 E. mag.) Then haul round the sand bank and anchor with the
flagstaff bearing north and a small white cliff on the west side of the
cay bearing N. 79^ E. (N. 70o E. mag.).

In beating in for the anchorage do not stand to the northward into
less than 3J fathoms, as the bank is steep-to. To the southward, toward
Cobos Cay, a vessel may safely go into 3 fathoms. Around Cay Frances
there is an abundance of excellent oysters.

TVater. — ^There are some good wells at the south end of Cobos Cay
and water will be found at Coco Bay.

128 CUBA — NORTH COAST.

Caibarien, on the maiuland about 15 miles from Cay Frances, is the
port of San Juan de los Eemedios, about 5 miles in the interior, the
communication being by railroad. The channel to this port lies between
BocaOhica, a small flat cay 4 miles S. 5(P W. (S. 53^ W. mag.) of the
western part of Cay Fran^^es, and the west end of Cobos Cay. Vessels
drawing under 9 feet can anchor off the town Caibarien, but those of
heavier draft load at Cay Frances. The city contains about 4,000 in-
habitants and San Juan de los Bemedios about 13,000.

Pilotage is compulsory, except to vessels under 50 tons register and
coasters which have a regular pilot on board; the rates are as follows:
up to 100 tons, «10; 101 to 200 tons, $15; 201 to 300 tons «20; 301 to
400 tons, $23; 401 to 500 tons, $25; 501 to 600 tons, $27; 601 to 700 tons,
$29; 701 to 800 tons $31; 801 to 1,000 tons, $34; 1,001 to 2,000 tons, $37;
2,000 tons and upwards, $40.

For moving vessels at anchorage inside of Cay Frances up to 20 feet
draft, one-third pilotiige will be paid. For moving vessels from Cay
Frances up to the bay, half pilotage will be paid. For moving vessels
to any other anchorage inside of Cay Frances two-thirds pilotage will
be paid. Vessels calling at Cay Frances for orders that do not load here
will pay one-quarter pilotage. Vessels in distress and men-of-war pay
regular pilotage..

There are no light or tonnage dues.

Weather Signals. — The following signals are shown from the port
office flagstaff.

A red triangle indicates a probable storm; a blue and white flag hori-
zontally striped, that the storm is approaching; a black ball shown with
either of the above signals indicates that the weather is improving.

The Spanish eusign indicates the bad weather is past.

By night — A white light shown from a flagstaff indicates approach-
ing foul weather.

Fragoso Cay extends NW.22 miles from Boca Chica at its east end,
and presents nothing remarkable but a small hill in the middle, named
Anton, which rises before the other land of the cay, which is low. The
cay is divided by two narrow channels named Anton, but they are not
navigable. On its NE. side is the Almedinas Beef, and another 2 miles
NW. of the north i)oint of the cay.

Almedinas Reef, which always breaks, lies close to the edge of the
bank, 3 miles from Anton Hill. Between the re^f and Fragoso Cay
there is a channel with 2J fathoms water.

From abreast Cay Frances the edge of the bank trends about NW.
by W. for 40 miles, when it comes within a mile of the Jutias Cays; it
then curves more westerly to the Boca of Marillanes.

Medio and Pigonal Cays. — About 2 miles WNW. of the west end
of Fragoso Cay lies a low cay named Medio; and NW. of it are the
Pajonal Cays. Between this group and Medio is the Boca de Marcos,
navigable only for vessels under 5 feet draft. The Pajonal Cays extend

VELA AND CAKENERO CAYS — FRADERA ROCK. 129"

about NW. for 4 milea to Tocinera Point, the north extreme of the
group.

▼ela and Carenero Cays. — Three miles NW. of Tocinera Point lies
a small, flat cay called Vela; about 2 miles to the southward of it is
Carenero divided in two, and a mile westward of the latter is Lanzanillo,
with a channel between.

Tho Boca de Lanzanillo, between the cay of the same name and
Carenero Cay, is J mile wide and If fathoms deep, and leads to Lanzanillo
Anchorage, of which Lieut. Don Kafael de Aragon, commanding the
Spanish steamship Don Juan de Austria, gives the folldwing descrip-
tion :

This anchorage is a commodious and secure harbor for vessels drawinjE less than 11
feet. It lies between Lanzanillo and Carenero Cays, and is completely land-locked
by them and other cays adjacent, so as to be sheltered from all winds. It is clear of
hidden Angers, and has a depth of 11 feet of water, with excellent muddy holding
ground. Lying between Caibarien and Sagua la Grande, its shelter may be reached
when there is not time to reach either of these other ports. The channel leading to
it, between Lanzanillo and Carenero cays, is bordered with reefs on either side and
has also a hidden shoal in its center, dividing the channel in two, of which the lee-
ward or western one is preferable, being the deeper. Although this channel is short
it is somewhat difficult, as the reefs on the sides as Vrell as the shoal in the center
can seldom be seen. A beacon has therefore been planted in 9 feet of water at low
tide on the most salient part of the reef on the western side of the lee or western
channel. ^

In approacliing this anchorage from the ofling steer for a fisherman's
hut of white color, and easily seen, situated on the beach of Lanzanillo
Oay. Leave Yela Cay on the port hand, skirting the bank extending
off its western end. When the channel is well opeu the beacon will be
seen, and should be passed close-t(j, leaving it on the starboard hand,
' In this way the shoal in the center of the channel will be avoided.

After passing the beacon, Carenero Cay and Reef should be carefully
rounded, anchoring under their shelter as convenient in 11 feet of water;
muddy bottom.

Jntias Cays are a group of several islets of moderate height, about 3
miles W. by N. of Vela Cay, and extend 4 miles westward. From the
largest of them, three small rather flat cays lie in a NE. direction over
a space of 1| miles, and from the outer one a broken reef extends west-
ward 4 miles. '

Boca del Seron is one of the channels leading to the mouth of the
river Sagua la Grande, and which admits vessels of abt)ut 8 feet draft?
but a pilot is necessary. About a mile NNE. of the entrance is a bank
on which the sea always breaks.

Bocas Canete and Marillanes.— About § mile N W. of the Boca del
Seron is that of Canete, which admits vessels under 5 feet draft. Two
miles farther on is the Boca Marillanes. which carries nearly lo feet
water, and is mucii frequented.

Fradera Rock.— This rock, about 100 yards in extent, with a least
depth of 11 feet over it at low water, and having 22 feet close around,
18402 9

I. •-• ^ .' " - •■-*■.■ ;. ■

130

CUBA — ^NORTH COAST.

lies with Cristo Little Cay bearing N. 70o W. (N. 73^ W. mag.), east
point of La Cruz Cay S. 4^ W. (S. 1^ W. mag.), and Marillanes Bank
buoy S. 59^ E. (S. 62^ E. mag.) ; it is marked by a wooden beacon
painted red.

Harbor of Sagua la G-rande. — About 2 miles KW, of the entrance
to the Boca Marillanes lies Cristo Cay. with the Boca de la Cristo mid-
way between ; and 6 miles WXW. of the north point of this cay is the
entrance to the Boca Sagua la Grande. This port is considered to ex-
tend 13 miles WI^W. and ESE., and 6 miles north and south. Of the
several channels leading to the anchorage for loading, the only practi-
cable one for vessels of over & feet draft is the Boca Marillanes.

As the cays which surround the port are low, and the greater por-
tion of them composed of mangroves, the winds cause much sea not-
withstanding the little depth. It is necessary in bad weather, and par-
ticularly in the months of September and October, to take every pre-
caution for security. There are many beacons (piles) laid out on the
projecting points and shoals, but they cannot be relied on.

The mouth of the River Sagua la Grande lies about 4 miles SS W. of
the entrance to the Boca Marillanes, and is connected with the interior
by a railway. The bar ii passable for vessels of 6 feet draft. The
town stands about 12 miles in a direct line from the coast, but 21 miles
by the windings of the river.

TowxL — The population is 18,100. There is communication with the
harbor by river boats and a railroad. Vessels quarantined are sent
between Cay Palomo and Cay Baniba.

There are six tugboats in the harbor.

The United States is represented by a commercial and vice«commep-
cial agent.

Coal can be obtained.

Pilotage is compulsory except to vessels drawing less than, 11 feet
or measuring less than 250 tons (total tonnage). Between sunset and
one hour before sunrise double pilotage is exacted. Vessels calling
for orders, if they remain less than a week, will pay half pilotage.

Total capacity.

By Ma.
riUaUfB.

Ry Boca
de Sa jpia.

•0 to 150 tons ^8.00

160to200tona 10.00

200 to SOO tona 13.00

800to400 tons 17.00

400 to WO tona 21.00

500to600 tona , 23.00

000 to 700 tons 25.00

700to800 tona 29.W

800 to 1.000 tone »3.00

1,000 to 1 300 t^na i 36.00

l,800to l.OOOtona 1 39.00

1,000 to 2,000 tona 41. 00

a, 000 to 2. 500 tona 43 . 0« »

2,500 tonit and upwarda 45. 00

Moving to '

or from

wharf.

$10. 00
12.00
15. IH)
19.00
23.00
25.00
27.00 i

Leaving
wharf, or
changes
made in
bay.

Changed

made at

anmo

■wliarf.

$8.35

4.15
4.45
7.10
8.75
10.00
10.45

31.00

12.10

35.00

13.75 1

38.00

15.00

41.00

16.25

43.00

17.10

45.00

17.95

47.00

18.80

$2.00

2.50

3.25

4.25

5.25

5.75

6.25

7.25

8.25

9.00

9.75

10.05

10. 75

11.25

$1.35
1.70
2.20
2.85
3.50
3.85
4.15
4.85
6.50
6.00
6.^
6.85
7.15
7.50

BOCA DE MARILLANES DIRECTIONS MEDANO ISLET. 131

Daes. — No tonnage or light dues. Health visit, $4, Inspection risit^
$4. Extending protest, $5. Certificate to protest, 83.50. Translation
of manifest, 1 to 25 lines, 82.50; 26 to 50 lines, $5; 51 to 200 lines, $10.

Directions for the Boca de Marillanes. — Vessels bound to Sagua
la Grande through this channel should make Cristo Cay, on the east
end of which are some huts, with a flagstaff bearing a blue flag with
the letter, P, in white, marking it the pilot station. When about a mile
K 480 B. (N. 450 B. mag.) of the flagstaff, steer S. 20^ E. (S. 23oE. mag.)
passing eastward of Fradera Kock with beacon and westward of the
inm buoy on tlie west edge of the Marillanes Bank. The buoy is in 19
feet water, and there is as little as 6 feet wat^r on the bank, the sea
generally breaking on it. On nearing the bar, a buoy, in 17 feet water,
marking the western sand banks, will be seen, and which should be
left to the westward.

When abreast this latter buoy alter course to S. 3lo W. (8. 28^ W.
mag.), which, skirting the weather reef, leads in mid-channel between
the Mariposa and Cruz Cays, leaxing a beacon on the shoals between
Palomo Cays and Cay Cruz on the starboard hand; then haul up
and pass close westward of the buoy placed near the edge of the spit
extending from Mariposa Cay; when a S. 10° W. (S. 7° W. mag.) course
may be steered, passing the next, a bell buoy, on the port hand; anchor-
age may now be taken up in about 2^ fathoms water.

Leaving by this passage a vessel should take tlie advantage of the
land wind, which blows regularly from daylight until 10 a. m,, when the
sea breeze sets in; the channel is too narrow for working. In case of
calm or not sufficient wind, it will be necessary to anchor, the tide not
setting fairly through the channels.

Boca Sagua la Qrande afl<)rds a i>assage only for vessels of 8 feet
draft, although at the entrance there are between 4 and 5 fathoms
water, shoaling within. There is good anchorage in 3 fathoms about
i mile southward of Muertos Point,

Light. — On the NW. point of Hicacal Cay, a fixed white light is
shown from a mast above the keeper's dwelling, 55 feet above the sea,
and visible 12 miles. The keeper's dwelling may be known by its red
doors and windows; eastward of it there are a fe\^ fisliermeu's huts.

Cay Verde. — From Bushy Cay, the western point of entrance to the
Boca Sagua la Grande, a chain of rocks, on which the sea breaks, en-
circles the cays as far as Cay Verde, 8J miles to the W^NW. Xear the
edge of the bank, and ^ mile north of Cay Verde, is a reef having an
opening between it and another reef a mile farther westward, affording
a passage for small vessels.

M6dano Islet. — ^W. by W, 6 miles from Cay Verde is a small, flat,
sandy cay, from which the N"icolao Reef sweeps round from NE. to NW.,
distant from one to 3 miles, and on which the sea does not always break.
About a mile SW. of it is a shoal which uncovers at low tide, and the
sea always breaks over it. Tfiis part of the coast bank is extremely

132 CUBA NORTH COAST.

dangerous, and not well known. From Medano Islet, Cay Sal bears
F. 70 W. (N. 100 W. mag.) 28 miles.

The northern edge of Nicolao Reef bears about ^. 60© E. (N. oT© E.
mag.) from Bahia De Cadiz lighthouse, or farther north than shown on
the charts.

To the eastward of Baliia de Cadiz Cay, between it and Nicolao Keef,
there is a clear space on the bank with from 6 to 2J fathoms water. Also,
immediately eastward of the Medano; there is another clear space with
about the same depth of water. A vessel under 10 feet draft may nav-
igate over this part of the bank, with the lead and lookout for shallow
water from aloft.

Mountains. — ^The following landmarks will be found usefril in deter-
mining the ship's position: About 21 miles inland from the Xicolao Reet
and the Medina Islet are the Sierras Morenas, extending NW. and SE.
for a considerable distance and having several iwominent peaks.

A little to the westward of the Sierras Morenas is a chain of moun-
tains presenting three peaks called the La Bella Paps, the central one
being the highest and bearing S. 23° W. (S. 20o W. mag.) of the
Xicolao Reef. This peak bears directly south (S. 3^ E. mag.) of Bahia
de Cadiz Cay; C/onsequently, when it is on tluit bearing a vessel will be
to the westward of the Alcatraces and Nicolao reefs. S. 14^ W.
(S 110 W. mag.), 6J miles from Nicolao Reef, is the eastern extremity of
the Alcatraces Cays, and 9 miles S. 42° W. (S. 39^ W. mag.) of the
Medano the western extremity. Betwe-en these cays and a chain
named Falcones is the Boca de Alcatraces, where vessels of 9 feet draft
will lind shelter from all winds.

Bahia de Cadiz Cay is small and low, with some fishermen's huts
and a flagstaff on its NE. point. To the westward is an anchorage
sheltered from the usual KE. winds, but exposed to northerly winds.
I:i hauling anmnd the west end of the cay, vessels drawing not more than
15 feet may bring La BeUa Paps to bear south (S. 3° E, mag.) or
S. 6^ E. (S. 9^ E. mag.), and steer for them till the center of Bahta
de Cadiz Cay bears X. 77° E. (N. 74^ E. mag.), when the anchor may
be let go in 4 fathoms of water 5 sandy bottom. Vessels drawing more
than 15 feet should bring the same peaks to bear S. 17° E. (S. 20^ E.
mag.) till the center of the cay bears east (N. 87^ E. mag.), then anchor
in 5 fathoms. In standing in, the depths will be 4, 4J, and 5 fathoms,
with a dark-colored bottom, it being sand covered with weeds.

Supplies. — Wood and fish are easily procurable, but there is no
water to be had.

This part of the coast is little known, and inaccurately laid down on
the charts.

Light. — 13'ear the NE. end of Bahia de Cadiz Cay is an iron tower
from which is shown, IJo feet above the sea, a fixed and flashing white
light, showing a flash every minute, and should be visible 20 miles.

7^^ea. — It is high water, full and change, at Cadiz Cay, at 9h. 20m.,
and the rise 3 feet.

CABEZAS CAY ^BLANCO, MONO, AND MONITO CAYS. 1S3

Cabezas Cay, 7 miles westward of Bahia de Gadiz, has a dangerous
ledge running from it to the westward, and, as it lies on the edge of
bank, it should be approached with great caution. About midway
between this cay and Bahia de Cadiz is a shoal, on which the sea does
not always break. From the Gabezas Gay the edge of the bank takes
a W. ^ N. direction for 17 miles to the north end of Cruz del Padre
Cay, which is the northernmost of the whole range. Thence the bank
sweeps round to the SW., forming a convex to the westward, and
terminates off the west part of Icacos Point.

Cms del Padre and Oalindo Cays. — ^Fiye miles WSW. of Gabezas
Gay is the Pargo Channel, and 3 miles farther westward is that of
Barcos, formed between the reefs; hence several cays continue to the
WKW. as far as Galindo, on the north side of which are two small
cays, Oaliudito and Muela. Prom Galindo, other cays continue to
Omz del Padre. About a mile K ll^ E. (N. 8° B. mag.) of Muela is a
shoal near the edge of the bank; and a mile northward of Cruz del
Padre ©ay a chain of reefs commences and extends 6 miles westward.

Water. — On these cays, particularly at Cruz del Padre and Galindo,
there are wells of good water.

Light. — On the reef about 3 mile ]S"E. of Cruz del Padre ^Cay is a
conical white tower, from which is shown, 49 feet above the sea, a fixed
white light visible 10 miles. This light is not to be depended on.

Blanco, Mono, Piedras, and Monito Cays, the westernmost of
the cays and islets skirting the north coast of Cuba lie about a mile
from the edge of the bank. About 5 miles SW. of Cruz del Padre is a
group of low cays, extending NE. and SW.. named Blanco. To the
^uthward of them there is anchorage for vessels of 11 feet draft, with
good shelter.

Mono Cay lies about 5 miles WXW. of the Blanco Group, and from
it a shallow ledge runs off to the NE. a fuU J mile; and a mile from the
cay in the same direction there is a dangerous shoal (Palas Rock) of If
fathoms water. Piedras Cay, composed of rock and sand, partly
covered with low bushes and about 600 yards in extent, lies 2 miles
SW. of the latter. Close off its ]S'W. side are three rocks above water.
A shoal of 16 feet water extends o50 yards I^E. from the north point of
this cay, and a coral patch of 15 feet is situated one mile from the same
point and in the same direction; depths of 5 J fathoms were found
between these shoals.

There is no discoloration of the water on this patch, but the sea
breaks in heavy weather. Tliere are from 5 to 8 fathoms water on
either side of the shoal to within 600 yards of the cays. Monito Cay, 1 J
miles from Piedras Cay, is a small black rock scarcely above the sea; a
reef extends around it for about 400 yards. The channel between
Piedras and Monito is clear. The soundings decrease as it is ap-
proached, and in the middle the depth is 6 fathoms. To sail through
this channel a vessel should be able to lay up ESE. There is also a
channel southward of Monito, but it is not recommended.

^ r

1^*

if!

.»

134 CUBA NORTH COAST.

Light. — On Piedras Cay is an iron tower above a house, from which
is shown, 75 feet above the sea, a fixed white light, varied by a red Hash
every two minutes, and visible 14 miles.

Anchorage. — ^There is good anchorage within tlie cays, in (i fathoms
water, sandy bottom, with Piedras Cay bearing west (S. HT*^ W. mug)
and Mono Cay from north to NNW.; or in 4 fathoms, to the southward
of Piedras Cay.

Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at Piedras Cay at 8h. Om.>
and the rise is about 2J feet.

Cardenas Bay is bounded on the north side by a very narrow strip
of low, sandy, wooded land, which terminates to the eastward of Icacos
Point; the entrance to this bay is so blocked up by small cays and
shoals that it is only navigable for vessels of about 11 feet to the
anchorages of Cardenas and Siguapa.

The best channel for entering this bay is that between Buba or Man-
gle Cay and Diana Cay. The bottom in the channel between Chalupa
Cay and Diana Cay is very irregular, and in the center of the^)assage
are some rocks, over which there is a depth of 8 feet. This channel is
only frequented by small vessels. Even the most recent charts of this
locality ^re not to be strictly depended upon. It is reporte(^l by the
local authorities and captains of vessels visiting Cardenas that 15 feet
can be carried into the anchorage off the city at high water. The reefs
are said to be growing in ridges to the northward and eastward.

Two buoys are moored to mark the eastern and southern extremes
of a sand bank stretching off Molas Point; these should be left to star-
board on entering. The next three buoys mark dangers between Diana
and Buba Cays, and they should be lef£ to port on entering. Pass be-
tween the next two buoys to the southward, the eastern of which marks
the southwestern extreme of the bank extending southwestward from
Diana Cay, and leave the next three buoys on the i)ort hand, entering
from seaward, when, having passed the western one, a course may be
steered direct for the anchorage off Cardenas.

The Town of Cardenas sttmds on the swampy shore at the SW.
side of the bay, and is a place of considerable commerce, and communi-
cates by means of a railroad with Havana and Matanzas. The town
of Siguapa is westward of Cardena-s, and they contain together from
23,000 to 25,000 inhabitants.

Sanitary condition is good, streets are well laid out, broad and clean.
The city is lightM by gas and electric lights.

There are five machine shops where repairs to machinery and iron
vessels can be made.

The authorities to visit are tlie mayor, alcalde, and captain of the
port (naval oflQcer).

The United States is represented by a commercial agent.

Supplies. — There is about 1,500 tons of coal on hand; cost 811 to
$12 per ton. United States gold, and from 82.50 to 83 per day for Span-

CARDENAS MATANZAS. 135

ish laborers. The coaling is slow, about 40 tons per day. There is only
a moderate supply of provisions on hand, an<l the prices are high.
Water can be obtained from San Autin River.

Steamers — One line small steamers inside the cays weekly to Oai-
barien, also a line from Havana every 10 days to Oaibarien, stopping
at Cardenas each way. The Ward line from ]S'ew York call every three
weeks.

There is telegraphic communication with all parts of the world. The
government reserves the right to demand a translation of all messages.

Pilots are not necessary unless going up to the city, but pilotage is
compulsory to all vessels except those under 80 tons. Vessels of from
80 to 100 tons pay 813. English vessels pay $1 more. No light or
tonnage dues.

Light — A fixed white light is exhibited from an iron column on the
west side of Diana Cay, nearly a mile SE. of Mangle Cay. The light
is 46 feet above the sea and m^ be seen 9 miles.

Directions. — Vessels bound to the iK)rt8 on the north side of Cuba,
eastward of Cardenas Bay, should approach them from the eastward.
The Old Bahama Channel is seldom navigated from west to east, ex-
cept by steamers and coasters.

Icacos Point is the northern extremity of the long and narrow
peninsula which shelters Cardenas Bay to the northward. The point is
low and has a few huts upon it. The shore to Maya Point is steep-to
.and may be approached within one mile, but is low, sandy, and covered
with brushwood, the beaches being here and there interrupted by low
bluffs. The bank of soundings extends only ^ mile off'-shore.

Eight miles west of Icacos Point is a small cove called Varadero Bay.
Four miles farther to the WSW. is the point and landing of Camacho,
low and sandy. Five and one-half miles eastward of Maya Point is the
mouth of the Kiver Camaricoa, on the left bank of which is the town of

the same name.

Port Matanzas. — The entrance to this port is open to the northward,
and lies between Sabanilla and Maya [mints, bearing EXE. and WSW.
from each other, distant 2 miles. It is about 4 miles in length, with
deep water until nearly up to the shoals which shelter th§ anchorage.
From Maya Point, which is low, with some huts on it, a rocky ledge
extends about li miles to the northward; and on a narrow bank of
soundings, on the west side of the ledge, temi)orary anchorage will be
found.

The western coast at the entrance is bordered by a reef, which extends
off from 200 to 500 yards. Within the port there are the detached
shoals, New, Stony, and another.

Matanzas, the second in point of commercial importance in the
island of Cuba, is situated at the head of the bay. Population, 40,000.
The town is triangular in sha])e, the apex being at the water front. The
land rises from the water to quite high ground in the rear of the city.

136 CUBA NORTH COAST.

On the summit of the ridge to the northward stands the church of
Mont Serrat, overlooking the famous valley of the Yumuri. This, sur-
rounded by trees and facing the harbor, forms a conspicuous land-
mark. There are several suburbs to the city proper. The only other
prominent marks along the western shore of the bay are fort or castle
Severino, barracks, and hospital. The bridges and warehouses mark
the two rivers running through the town, San Juan being the one to
the southward. . The celebrated caves of Bellamar are under a low
ridge, the highest point of which is Peuas Alt^s. The railroad con-
necting Matanzas and Havana runs along the above-mentioned ridge.
The depot is in Pueblo Nuevo. It is built of red brick with French
roof. It is just to the southward of the large sugar wareliouse and
coal yard known as " Almacenes de Torriente," situated on the southern
bank of the San Juan River at its mouth.

Boats can either run into the San Juan Eiver or alongside the dock,
which runs to the northward from its mguth to the captain of the port's
oflBce. The market is J mile up the San Juan River, convenient to boat
landings.

Salutfes can be returned.

The United States is represented by a consul and vice-consul.

Supplies. — Water for ship's use can be obtained up the river. It is
also brought oft' in a water boat at one cent per gallon. It is strongly
impregnated with lime.

Coal may be procured in moderate quantities from 89 to 810 per ton.

Freight is towed off to vessels in lighters.

Port charges are about the same as Havana.

Hospitals. — The government hospital is the largest; it has an effi-
cient staff; sick mariners are admitted at a stipulated price. The
private hospital is supported by the best and wealthiest people in the
city, and is for their own sick; patrons pay $5 per day. Sick mariners
are charged 82 per day.

Steamers. — Ward's line of steamers from IN'ew York frequently stop
here, also tramps for sugar cargoes.

There is telegraphic communicaticm with Havana and two mails daily
from Havana by railroad.

Pilotage. — (Compulsory, 8 cents per ton in and out.

Anchorage.— The shoals are buoyed, but the buoys can not be depended
upon. The shoals, however, as laid down on the chart can easily be
avoided by a carefnl lookout and following the soundings as given on
the charts. The bottom is stiff clay. But little difficulty will be ex-
perienced in picking out an anchorage, excei)t in the sugar season, when
the harbor may be more or less crowded ; anchorage may be found in 10
fathoms outside of the reefs to the northward of Bajo Nuevo, the spot
generally occupied by merchant steamers. It will be smoother, however,
and more convenient to anchor inside Lajo Bank; and, as the latter is
plainly visible at all times for its entire length, no trouble will be ex-

MATANZAS DIRECTIONS YUMl'RI RIVER. 137

perienced in roundiug either eiul, even if the buoys should be out of
place.

Buoys. — Red conieal buoys have l)een moored on the following shoals,
^hich have been lately surveyed; on the reef north of Bajo Nuevo,
north of Bajo La Laja, south of Bajo La Laja, on the Arana del Sur,
and on the Arafia del Norte.

Winds. — The sea breeze is regular, but it is sometimes interrupted
for a day or two by a fresh southwesterly breeze that finally hauls to
the NW. and dies away, to be followed by the regular sea breeze. As
the bay is open to the ENE., a heavy swell sets in with fresh trade-winds.
The Northers, whi(;h frequently blow from September to February, in-
terrupt the land breezes, and the departure of a sailing vessel may be
hindered on this account.

Tides. — It is high water, fall and change, at Port Matauzas at about
S a. m. and 5 p. m., and the rise 2^ feet. The stream runs in with the
sea breeze and out with the land wind.

Directions. — When bound to Matanzas, the peak of Matanzas, which
overlooks it from the west, is an excellent guide; and about 12 miles
eastward of the port, and 6 miles inland, there is a small ridge of remark-
ably irregular hills, of considerable elevation, but not nearly so high as
the peak, with three distinct summits, called the Gamarioca Paps. From
the paps the land westward is level and not very low, without any re-
markable object as far as the port, where it begins to rise gently, and
can be seen 24 miles, continuing uniform to the peak of Matanzas.

Coming from the eastward, give Maya Point a berth of 2 miles until
the port is well open; then steer to the SW., liauling up gradually for
about a mid-channel cfmrse, taking care to avoid the bank of sand and
rock which borders the point at a distance of 1,200 yards. Apprpach-
ing from the westward, give the westward shore a berth of about ^ mile.
When San Severino Castle, a conspicuous object on the north shore of
the port, bears S. 82^ W. (S. 79^ W. mag.), steer toward it until the
fort of the Vigia, on the shore of the River San Juan, bears S. 54^ W.
(9. 51"^ W. mag.), then steer for it, ])avssing northward of the buoy on
the St(my Bank, and anchor in 5 or 0 fathoms water, mud, as the ship-
ping will allow. As no reliance can be placed on the buoys, it may be
advisable to take a pilot.

The River Canimar is in the SE. part of the bay. On the western

. x>oint of its entrance is the battery of San Felipe. The river is navigable

for 9 miles from its mcmth, having a depth of from 0 to 15 feet. On the

bar at the entrance there are only from 6 to 9 feet, and a heavy sea

breaks there during Northers.

A number of small vessels load with fruit in this river for Havana
and Matanzas.

The Rivers Tnmnri and San Jnan also empty into the bay, flow-
ing through the city of Matanzas, and by the deposits of the sand and
mud which their waters bring down form shoals and banks which nar-
row the limit and depth of the anchorage.

»;-

^r 138 CUBA — ^NORTH COAST.

N A shallow mud Hat runs off* iu front of the city, preventing vessels

V from coming nearer to the wharf than J mile.

JV Coast — From Sabanllla Point the low and sandy coast trends to the

WjST W. for 8 miles to Guanos Point, which is of little elevation. From

Guauos Point as far westward as Havana, a distance of 36 miles, the

\ coast is clear of danger, with the exception of the Jaruco Bank, and

■!\ may be approached to a distance of 3 miles. It is steep-tiO, and the

I soundings decrease suddenly from 90 to 20 fathoms, sandy bottom. By

attention to the lead there is no danger. The Jaruco Hills rise about

midway, and with other objects serve to distinguish the coast. The

current here may be about a mile an hour to the eastward.

The Pan de Matanzas can be seen from a distance of 36 to 40 miles.

When seen from the NW.its summit forms three hummocks, the center

one being much the highest, rising from behind a flat rocky ridge of

. * land of moderate elevation. From the l^E. it appears as a prominent

rounded mountain, standing out by itself, and becomes a valuable point

of departure. Should a vessel bound to Havana be found in a position

thus far to windward or less, it will be better to stand in and run

down within about 2 miles of the shore to avoid the current, taking

care, however, to steer dear of the Jaruco Bank, on which there are

^ onlyll feet of water and which lies about IJ miles from the shore,

/ midway between Havana and Guanos Point, oft' the Iron Hills. The

: discolored water on this bank, which is of some extent, may be seen

from aloft in clear weather, and soundings appear to extend for a short

I distance all along the shore.

' * Several small streams emi)ty into the sea between Havana and Guanos

r Point. Generally speaking, these rivers, excepting the Jaruco, can not

be entered even by boats. The mouth of the Jaruco River is open to
the north and only admits very snnill coasters.

The River Cojimar empties into the (;ove of the same name about

3 miles east of the Morro ( Castle. This cove is clear of danger and the

shores are steep-to. The water, except very close in-shore, is too deep

for vessels to anchor.

Telegraph Cable. — The end of one of the cables connecting Havana

-• and Key West is landed here.

Light. — A.t the entrance of Port Santa Cruz a fixed light is shown,
• visible 0 miles.

. Havana. — The entrance to the port of Havana may be easily recog-

J^; nized by the Morro Castle and lighthouse, with the extensive line of

b' fortifications on the eastern side of the entrance. The land to the east-

^ ward of the city, until near the Jaruco or Iron Mountains, 18 miles

distant, is about 200 feet high and the shore bold and steep-to.

Nine miles south of the Morro there is a remarkable isolated hill 732
i]- feet high, with two round hummocks, called the Managua Pai>s. This

hill is not only an excellent guide for Havana when coming from the
northward, but useful also as a point of departure.

HAVANA. 139

The chaanel for about i mile is not more than 200 yards wide; farther
in it widens, opening into a basin of irregular shape, 2| miles long and
from i to one mile wide.

Morro Poin t is steep-to and vessels of large draft may pass quite
close to it. Soundings extend off from the point i mile. A shoal spot,
with a depth over it of 26 ,a^,- feet, has been discovered between 120 and
150 yards from the shore line at Morro Point, the lighthouse bearing N.
20° E. (N. 170 E. mag.). The northern shore of the channel is bordered
by the Cabrestante Bank, which, at the outer part, extends off more
than 100 yards.

Both sides of the channel are marked by buoys, which are, however,
frequently out of place. Men-of-war can generally, by applying to the
captain of the port, obtain a mooring buoy to lie at.

Within the harbor the western shore is bold and vessels lie alongside
the wharves. The arsenal is in the SW. angle of the harbor.

The population is about 250,000. The city is strongly fortified, there
being several forts and castles. The streets are narrow and dirty, there
being no sewerage. Yellow fever is endemic. The sickly season is
from June to October. As there is little ebb and flow of the tide in tlie
harbor, the water is filthy and foul -smelling. As a sanitary precaution,
it is advisable to anchor as far from the southern liglit of the harbor as
possible . The water should not be used for washing decks or clothing.

Hospitals are: Military, leprous, charity, and several private hospi-
tals; also insane asylum.

Police are efficient and numerous.

Provisions of all kinds can be obtained in .abundance. Water can
be had from water boats wliich come alongside; it is good but hard, and
is furnished to shipping at 75 cents per 100 gallons. An aqueduct sup-
plies the city.

The usual supply of coal on hand is about 90,000 tons; cost, $8.50 to
$10 per ton. Vessels can coal alongvside the coal dock.

There is telegrtiphic communication witli all parts of the world.
There are many steamer lines to the United States and Europe.

A railroad runs to the principal places on the island.

The authorities are: captain-general, coniandantc do la marina, a
vice-admiral, captain of the port (naval officer).

Salutes will be returned.

The United States is represented by a consul-general, a vice-consul-
general, and a (le[)uty consul-general.

Docks. — At the naval arsenal are ways capable of taking up vessels
not over 500 tons.

There are several machine shops where steamers may repair.

Pilotage compulsory on all vessels except vessels of 50 tons and
those engaged in the coasting trade. Night pilotage double day rates.
For changing anchorage half pilotage is charged.

?*^.<"\

>. ^

140 CUBA ^NORTH COAST.

Rates.— Vessels of 50 tons, $5; 51 to 100 tons, $6; 101 to 150 tons,
*7; 151 to 200 tons, $8; 201 to 250 tons, 89; 251 to 300 tons, $11 : 300
to 350 tons, »13; 351 to 400 tons, $17, and $1 additional for every 100
tons additional up to 1,000 tons; 1,001 to 1,250 tons, $24; 1,251 to 1,500
tons, $25, and $1 additional for every 600 tons additional up-to 5,000
tons; 5,000 tons and upwards, $32.

Anchorsige Dues vary from $2 for vessels of from 51 to 75 tons to
$8.50 for vessels of 5,000 tons and upwards.

There are no tonnage or light dues.

Tugboat Charges.— Vessels of 200 tons pay $17; of 700 tons, $60,
irom one mile outside the Morro to the anchorage.

Mooring Charges.— For from 151 to 200 tons, $2.75; for 300 tons,
$3, and 50 cents additional for each 100 tons. For 5,000 tons and up-
wards, $8.50.

Tonnage Tax, 3 cents per ton.

Buoys and Beacons. — ^Tliree black buoys mark the northern en-
trance to Havana Harbor, and are named, respectively, Apostales (2) or
^uter buoy, Pescante (4) and Pastora. The southern side is marked by
three red buoys called Punta (1) or outer buoy, San Telmo (3) and Pes-
cadera (5).

When vessels are entering by night, a red light is placed on Apos-
tales (2) buoy and a green light on San Telmo (3) buoy.

Feliciano Shoal, north side of the harbor, is marked at the south
extreme by a triangular beacon, painted wliiti^

Regla Shoal, opposite the harbor entrance, is marked on the eastern
side by a triangular beacon, painted white; to the northwestward by a
buoy; on the western side by a triangular beacon, painted white.

Cayo Cruz- — The bank XW. of this cay is marked by triangular bea-
cons, painted white.

Warping Buoys are moored westward of Regla Shoal for vessels of
war, and eastward of that bank for merchant vessels.

Time Signal — A black ball is hoisted daily on the flag-staff of the
office of the Naval Commandant at 10 minutes before noon. The ball
is droppetl at exactly mean noon for the meridian of said building,
equivalent to 5h. 29m. 23.55s. Greenwich mean time.

If for any reason an error is made in dropping the ball, it will be indi-
cated by hoisting a blue flag on the same flagstaff, and the ball will be
run up again at Oh. 50m. p. m. and dropped exactly at Ih. p. m.

Semaphore. — A semaphore has been established on the highest part
of Morro Castle. The semaphore is connected by telegraph with the
interior of the island, and messages can be sent to or from vessels from
or to places in the interior, at fixed charges.

Storm Signals. — During the hurricane season the following storm

HAVANA — DIRECTIONS.

141

signals will be displayed^ successively, from the oMce of the captain of
the port and repeated by semaphore from the Morro:

Day 8ic:nalft.

A triangular red flag

A square flag with yellow and
bine horiisonlal stripes.

AblackbaU

A blaok ball over a triangular red

fla«.
A black ball over a square flag
with yellow and blue horison-
tal stnpes.

Night signals.

Ared light

A red light over a white light

(Xo night .signal)

A white light over a red light

A white light

Indications.

Signs of bad weather.
Decided indications of bad

weatlier.
The port iH closed.
Indications of clearing weather.

Clearing weather.

Vessels lying ^t the moles will send down light spars and strengthen
their moorings as soon as the signal, <' Signs of bad weather," is made.

Light. — ^A lighthouse, stone color, stands on the Morro Oastle at the
entrance of the harbor, and exhibits a white light, revolving every half
minute at 144 feet above the sea, and should be visible 18 miles.

Tides. — It is high water, full and change, in Havana Harbor, at 8h.
14m., alid the rise is about 3 feet. There is no regular flood and ebb,
but with the land wind a slight stream usually runs out.

Directions by Night — ^When about 2 miles 'NW, of the entrance a
blue light should be burned, which will be similarly answered from the
harbor office if the pilot is coming out. Should the signal remain un-
answered, it should be repeated three times at intervals of 10 minutes.
When no answer is made there is danger, or some obstacle to prevent
entering by night.

Do not approach nearer than one mile until the pilot boards; a flash-
ing light from his boat will indicate his approach.

When, there is too much sea to permit the pilot to come out of port, he
will be met in the channel. Steer in S. 50^ E. (S. 53^ E. mag.), with the
green light on San Telmo Buoy just open south of the red light on
Apostales Buoy. Between these buoys the pilot will either board or lead
the way in.

General Directions. — Vessels bound to Havana from the westward,
having rounded Cape San Antonio, with thi^ usual trade wind at east,
should not steer higher than nortli (N. 3^ W. mag.) for 15 miles, when
they may haul to the wind, and the chart must be their guide along the
Colorados. Here, however, the current generally sets to tlie SW. on
the edge of the bank. It will, therefore, be better to stand to the
northward as far, at least, as the parallel of 24^, before tacking.

Vessels bound to Havana from the north and east will navigate either
by way of the ]S"W. Providence Channel, across or along the western
edge of the Great Bahama Bank, round the Elbow of the Double-heade<l
Shot Cays, and thence across toward Guanos Point in Cuba, out of
the stream ; or through the Old Bahama Channel.

Entering under sail, time will be saved by waiting until the sea
breeze has set well in, which commences about 10 a. m. In the winter

m -

> /

142

< ■

1*^

CUBA NORTH COAST.

I-

months, from October to June, a vessel will generally fetcli up to the
anchorage; but in the summer, as the wind prevails to the southward
of east, she may have to warp in. In the former case, if coming from
the eastward, after passing the Jaruco tower and bank westward of it,
run down about J mile or more off shore, and having brought the light-
house to bear about S. 20o B. (S. 23© E. mag.) (not before, in order to
avoid any sweep), haul up under all plain sail, so as to shoot as far in
as possible, and with both anchors clear.

Having passed Morro Point at the distance of 150 yards, hug the
northeastern shore as near as the wind in general allows, but in a
vessel of heavy draft do not go inside the buoys on either side of the
channel. The helm must be quickly and well attended, to take advan-
tage of the strong gust« and flaws.

When off the east end of the heights the breeze will be more steady,
and the sail may then be reduced to enable her to take up a convenient
berth among the numerous shipping. Should it be necessary to anchor
in the narrows, give a good scope of cable, and shorten sail quickly to
avoid dragging, as the wind rushes off the shore with great violence.

If the sea breeze hangs to the southward of east the vessel will have
to be warped in, and most |>robably to be kedged up the outer part of the
channel. In this case, when coming from the eastward and having
passed the Morro close aboard, stretc^h over to the Punta shore, and
having tacked under it, shoot in as far as i)ossible and anchor under
the northern shore, waiting until the breeze slackens in the afternoon to
warp up.

A good berth for a ship of war is in the iN^W. part of the harbor just
past the floating dock; the water here is cleaner. Unless the shipping
is crowded, there is no necessity to moor; anchors bury themselves in the
mud.

There will be no difficulty whatever in quitting the harbor, as the
regular land wind is seldom interrupted except by Northers, which some-
times throw a heavy swell into the harbor's mouth. The best time to
enter is about midday, and for quitting it, daylight.

Currents. — Nothing is more uncertain tlmn the i>oint where the great
Florida Stream is first met with. Sometimes it will be found 50 miles
to the SW. of the Tortugas Islands. The vessel's position, by chro-
nometer, should therefore be ascertained as frequently as possible.
Under any circumstances, it will be better to avoid the Cuba shore until
the vessel is well to to the eastward, when it may be necessary to sight
the highlands in order to check the reckoning. In approaching the
Cuba shore the easterly stream will seldom be met with until nearly on
the meridian of Havana, or on the line between there and the Tortugas.
It generally runs at the rate of from 2 to 3 knots close off the mouth of
the harbor, and from thence in a NE. direction right jicross the Florida
Strait.

It frequently happens that ha\ing arrived at a position south of the

CAPE SAN ANTONIO ANTONIO KNOLL. 143

Tortugas without feeling the influence of the stream, it is perhaps en-
tered soon after the reckoning has been checked in the evening, and in
making the land on the following morning the vessel will be found far
to windward of the port. The features of the land to eastward, however,
differ so considerably from those to the westward that there will be no
difficulty in making out the position. The land eastward of the Morro
is about 200 feet high and rather flat, but about 18 miles to windward
it rises into a remarkable ridge of irregular hills of moderate height,
about 3 Holies in length east and west, and a short distance from the
shore, called the Jaruco or Iron Hills, while 18 miles westward of the
Morro is the Mariel Table-land, and farther on in the same direction the
Cabanas Hill.

Cape San Antonio, the west end of Cuba, is low, covered with trees
from 70 to 80 feet high, which are seen before the land, and often ap-
I)ear like vessels under sail; the shore is intersected alternately by
SDboruco cliffs and sandy beaches. The extreme end of the island
bends round so gradually for about 4 miles that it is difficult to make
out any projecting point, so that the cape can only be recognized by
the lighthouse on the sandy beach. Near Perpetua Point a bank com-
mences, which sweeps round the west end of the island about a mile off
shore, and joins the Colorados Reef to the northward of the cape. On
the edge of the bank there are from 18 to 23 fathoms water, rocky
bottom.

Light. — ^The lighthouse on Gape San Antonio exhibits, 128 feet above
the sea, a white light revolving every half minute which should be
visible 17 miles. A boat can easily land under the lighthouse at a
small breakwater extending from the sandy beach.

Temporary Anchorage will be found under the west end of Cuba,
with the north extreme of the land bearing N. 23^ E. (N. 19^ E. mag.)
and the south extreme bearing S. 45© E. (S. 49° E. mag.). This anchor-
age must be approached carefully, aa it shoals quickly and the bottom
is foul.

Lieut. PiUsbury, U. S. !N'avy, considers the following to be a bet-
ter temporary anchorage, and reports: *'I anchored in 10 or 11 fathoms,
sandy bottom, and no coral heads, the light bearing N. 569 E. (N. 52^
B. mag.). A coral reef extends about a mile off shore, its outer end
bearing north (X. 4^ W. mag.) from the anchorage, about J mile
distant.^

Antonio Knoll is a coral bank, al>out 2^ miles in length and 2 miles
broad, with a general deptli of 14 aiul 16 fathoms. One spot, on which
only 10 fathoms were found, lies K 24^ W. (N. 28^ W. mag.) about 10
miles from Cape San Antonio light and its center is 4 miles from the
edge of the Colorados Bank; discolored water may be seen over it in
clear weather. About 11 miles N. loo W. (N. 19^ W. mag.) of the light
is another patch of 10 fathoms. In 1887 soundings of 3| to 7 fathoms
were obtained on the knoll with the lighthouse bearing S. 18^ E. (8.
220 E. mag.), distant from 11 to 12 miles.

144 CUBA NORTH COAST.

Although several shoals have been reported in the vicinity, it is evi-
dent from the examinations made by the U. S. 8. Tallapoosa in 1885
and the U. 8. Fish Commission steamer Albatross in 1884 that there is
no danger to navigation outside of the Colorado* Eeefs, the discolored
water seen over the Antonio Knoll doubtless being the only ground for
supi)osing that any shoal existed.

The Coast forming the headland of Cape San Antonio runs in a
NNE. direction 4J miles to Cajon Point, its north extreme. All this part
is low with a sandy beach; in front of it the bottom is rock and sand,
and a vessel if necessary may anchor for shelter, but as the bank is so
narrow and shallow, especially southward of the lighthouse, caution
will be necessary in choosing a berth. Vessels of more than 15 feet
draft should not attempt to cross the reefs. Heavy squalls are some-
times experienced in this neighborhood. About a mile K. 6^ W. (N.
lOo W. mag.) of Cajon Point is a sandbank about i mile in extent^
with rather less than one fathom water on it.

As the coast and cays inside the Oolorados Eeefs will be described,
it will be sufficient now to say that the former trends from Cajon Point
in a general EXE. direction for 35 miles to the entrance of Guadiana
Bay, and from the north point of the bay X W. by N. 11 miles to A valos
Point, thus forming a deep bight; it then curves gradually round to the
NE. for 85 miles to Bahia Honda. On about the meridian of 84° the
land becomes lofty and forms a conspicuous mass of hills called the
Cockscomb Mountains or 8ierras de Acosta, in which there is a re-
markable notch that may be used as a good point of departure. About
12 miles SW. of Bahia Honda is 8addle Hill, or Guajaibon Peak, 2,532
feet high, which may be readily recognized by the form of its summit,
and is also a good guide when beating up.

Colorados Reefs. — This great extent of coast is skirted nearly the
whole way by dangerous broken reefs, called the Colorados, leaving
shallow water within, navigable bjetween the cays and numerous heads
of rocks for coasters drawing 10 or 11 feet water, which find an entrance
near Cape San Antonio and tlirough some intricate channels to the NE.
The outer limits of these great barrier reefs are but imperfectly defined,
and should therefore be approached with the utmost caution, for the
lead will give scarcely any wivrning, and the sea on the shoals seldom
breaks. The land at the 8W. part of this shore is so low as to be out
ot* sight from the edge of the reef, and the current in the immediate
vicinity is strong and extremely variable.

The edge of tlie bank, which passes a mile westward of Cape San An-
tonio, runs about N. by E. for 7 miles, with from 4 to 2f fathoms water
on it, sand and rock; then jS^E. by E. 3 J miles, where there is a detached
3-fiithom patch, nearly a mile outside the edge of the reef, on whi(»h
there is from 3 t<3 5 fathoms water; thence it trends more t-o the NE.
and eastward, skirting about a mile off the reefs with 4 to 8 fathoms
water on it as far as Bahia Honda.

LENA CAY8 — ^BARCOS CHANNEL, 145

Nearly 15 mUes N. 32° E. (N. 28© B. mag.) of Cajon Point lies the
S W. extreme of these extensive reefs ; thence running NE. by N. for 24
miles to Baena Vista Pass. The reefs are here 3 miles in breadth in the
middle part and 2 elsewhere.

The outer edge of the reef at Buena Vista Pass appears to be about
5 or 6 miles from the west end of the cay of the same name, the first
islet met with coming from the 8W., and which may be seen 12 miles.
From this pass the line of reefs continue to the NE. for about 45 miles^
and then trends more easterly until it almost joins the shore westward
of Bahia Honda. These remarks are intended merely as a general de-
scription of the limits, and by no means to direct a vessel along the
edge of these dangers.

The Lefta or Mangles Cays, a group of four small islets, are low
and covered with mangrove trees. They are separated from each other
by narrow channels, shallow at the entrance but deep inside. The
largest of these cays, called Punta de Afuera, is low and marshy. It
is separated from the coast by a bay, nearly landlocked, being protected
to the eastward by a salient point. This point forms, witii the eastern
end of Punta de Afuera Cay, the Barcos Channel, where vessels draw-
ing not more than 15 feet may find sheltered anchorage.

Barcos ChanneL — ^The points at the entrance lie east and west of
each other, a small reef extending from each, so as to leave a clear
channel 200 yards wide, with a depth of 2 fathoms, muddy bottom, at
the entrance. Inside, the channel deepens to 4^ fathoms, widening at
the same place to 500 yards, again narrowing and shoaling as a small
submerged cay is approached.

This small cay forms a channel about 6 feet deep, by which small ves-
sels may reach the bay above mentioned. To enter it a sailing vessel
needs a fair wind, but the entrance has no danger, and inside a vessel
may anchor as convenient, there being 5 fathoms of water close to the
mangroves.

There are several small cays, having only boat channels between them,
in the bay to which the Barcos Channel leads. The general depth is
from 6 to 9 feet.

Rebellines Cays. — ^To the westward of Afuera Cay are three other
small mangrove cays, the northern and smallest of which is called
Leila Cay, the other the Rebellines. The latter, lying about J mile off
the coast, has a small reef running off the southern side.

Anchorage can be found to the southward of the Bebellines, sheltered
from Northers, in about 2 to 2^ fathoms of water, muddy bottom.

Near the shore there are some rocky heads.

Caravela Chica and Grande Points. — ^From Caravela Chica Point
the coast trends about NE. 3 J miles to Caravela Grande Point; thence
forming several bays 6J miles to the western extremity of Plurhajes
Point. Half a mile northward of Caravela Chica Point there are several

18402 10

146 CUBA NORTH COAST.

rocky heads, witli 3 feet water ou them; but thence as far as Plumtyes
Pohit there are uo dangers and the bottom is mud.

Flunieges Point is a bUiflf. Although not higli as compared with
the hmd in its vicinity, it is easily distinguished. From the eastern
end a reef extends ^ mile to the X. 70^ E. (N. OG^ E. mag.), and rocky
ground extends 2 miles farther in the same direction.

Tolete Point.-:— Six miles eastward of Plumajes Point is Tolete Point,
and 4^ mQes farther is Guadiana Point, the land between forming a bay
a mile deep, with 2J fathoms water.

G-uadiana Bay. — Three quarters of a mile northward of Guadiana
Point is Algodonar Point, forming between them the entrance to Gua-
diana. Bay. From these points tlie coast runs eastward on either side
for f mile, forming a channel ^ mile in breiwlth, which is narrowed by
mud banks having about 1^ fathoms water on them, which extend off
on either side for 200 to 400 yards.

The navigable channel varies from 200 to 400 yards in breadth, and
carries about 3 J fathoms water, as far as the Entrance to an inner bay,
which runs t<i the XE. The outer bay is nearly circular and 4 miles
in extent, and when in the fairway channel there are 2J fathoms
water. Being in the center of the bay and anchored in the middle of
the passage, in 2^ fathoms, southward of a small beach, a vessel will
be sheltered from all winds. On the beach there is a lagoon with fresh
water.

The River Qlianes or Ouadiana empties into the NE. part near its
mouth. On the northern shore is (xeronimo Point, off which a reef ex-
tends i mile to the SE. The river has a depth of about 7 feet, but is
80 narrow and crooked that boats only can navigate it. The towns of
Ouane and Paso Real export from here.

Colorada Point. — From Algodonar Point the coast forming a bay
trends NW. by N., 3 J miles to Colorada Point, from which a sand bank
extends | mile westward. !N"W. 3^ miles from Colorada Point is Pin-
alillo Point, forming between the bay of Garanacha. In this space the
coast is a little elevated and covered with pine trees.

Oaranacha Bay, although exposed to westerly winds, affords good
anchorage, gales of wind from that quarter rarely blowing. The hold-
ing ground is good, the bottom being muddy. In the center of the bay,
IJ miles offshore, there is a depth of 1 J fathoms at high water. There
are only 6 feet of water at low tides 400 yards offshore, so that lighters
can not reach the landing place at that time. On the shore is a small
beach, with roads leading from it towards the towns of Mantua, Guane,
and Pinar del Rio.

During the rainy season wat^jr may be had from a lagoon near the
beach; in the dry season it is procured from the Santa Lucia River,
which empties into the bay,

San Francisco. — PinaliUo Point is foul, and 4J miles NW. of it is
Avalos Point, which is a narrow tongue of land projecting seaward

BUENA VISTA RIVER RAPADO CAY. 147

more thau a mile. There is anchorage under its lee sufficiently clear of
danger daring the season of northerly winds. Between the two points
is a bay 2 miles deep, where there is an iulet, and within which is the
loading place of San Francis(»o.

Bnena Vista River. — From Avalos Point tlie coast, of little eleva-
tion, forming several small bayvS, trends about NNE. 11 miles to the
mouth of the Buena Vista River.

Arroyos Anchorage. — Between the point of Buena Vista River,
the cay of the same name and Ingleses Point on the south, is Arroyos
Anchorage, sheltered from all winds from XW. round by north and
east to 8\V. It is clear of danger, with a depth of 2| fathoms, which
gradually diminishes to the shore. In the middle of the bay which
forms the anchorage there is a wooden pier, by whicli coasting vessels
load and unload.

This is the i)rincipal loading place of Mantua, 9 miles inland. To
reach this antjhorage from the northward, a vessel sh<mld enter Buena
Vista Pass, and steer between the Colorados and the reef extending
from Buena Vista Cay, the depths in the channel being from 3 to 3J
fathoms. The channel between the reefs at the east end of the cay and
Buena Vista Point on tlie mainland opposite carries about one fathom
water, which is used by small steamers, and sailing vessels with a fair
wind.

Buena Vista Cay, separated from the coast by a channel about a
mile wide, is the largest of all those on this part of the coast. \ This
cay is 5 miles in length east and west, and one mile in breadth; it is
low and marshy, and divided in the middle by an inlet navigable by
boats. From its NW. point a mud bank extends off 200 yards, and
near the western point there are 6 feet water. A small cay lies off the
former point with a passage between for boats and also another small
cay, named Abra, off its north side.

One mile N\V. of the cay is a bank about 7 miles in length KE. by N.
and SW. by S. and one mile in breadth, with about 5 feet water on it;
but there are passages between it and the reefs.

Buena Vista Pass has only 2 fathoms of water in some places, and
is only 200 yards wide. From this pass to that of Roncadora the reef
is not less than one mile wide.

Rapado Cay is three miles in length NE, by N. and SW. by S., and
partly marshy, with mangroves. A reef extends about 600 yards from
its northern part, with IJ fathoms water on it; and a similar reef pro-
jects 400 yards NVV. from the western point. The distance from this
cay to the coast is 3 miles, where the loading place named Cauas is
situated, and which is south of the cay. The passage between the cay
and the coast is only navigable for small coasting vessels of about 4
feet draft.

Two miles westward of the west point of this cay lies a rocky bank
with 5^ feet water on it, named Vinagera. To the SW. and near the
cay are two small cays, named Toro and Vaca.

148 CUBA NORTH COAST.

To the KE. by E. of Bapiido Cay, over a spa^e of 6 miles, lie Ibnr
banks of sand and mad with scarcely a fathom water on them. There
are passages between the extremities of the shoals and Bapado and
Diego Cays, but small vessels only can pass between the banks. The
passage between the banks and Eapado Cay is a mile wide and of mod-
erate depth; that between the banks and Diego Cay is th^ same in
breadth, and from If to 2 J fathoms deep, mnd bottom. These passagei^
are useful in proceeding to the bay and loading ])lace of Santa Bosa.

RapadaChico Cays.-r-Half a mile southward of Bax)ado Cay is the
northern of the Bapado Chico, a group of four extending north and
south 2 miles. The passage between the latter cays and Bapado is IJ
to If fathoms deep, and leads to the loading pla<jes of Santa Isabel and
Ganas. The channel between the southern Bapado Chico and Buena
Vista is IJ to If fathoms deep, clear of danger, and 2 miles in breadth.

Rapado Pass. — From Buena Vista Pass the reef trends XE. 10 miles
to Bapado Pass. This channel lies N W. by W. 2f miles from the north
end of Bapado Cay, and the least depth is 2f fathoms, rocky bottom.

Canas and Santa Isabel. — From the Biver Buena Vista the coast
runs about NE. by X. 4 miles to the north point of the h)afling place of
Santa Isabel, and thence with some sinuosities about N.by E. 3 miles to
the point north of the loading place of Canas, when it trends to the
eastward 2 miles to the head of Santa Bosa Bay.

Santa Rosa Bay and Diego Cay. — From the head of Santa Bosa
Bay the coast runs about NNE. 6J miles to Tabaco Point. Three miles
from Tabaco Point, and 1 J miles from the coast lies Diego Cay, which
is IJ miles in length east and west, and a mile in breadth. Firom its
north end a reef extends f mile to the ^W. and then trends as far and
round Tabaco Point to the western point of Baja Bay. This reef, is
of rofek, and has less than one fathom water on it. To the ENB. of
Diego and near the coast are two small marshy cays named Eslabones,
and eastward of these two others at a distance of 600 or 800 yards, the
larger of which forms Tabaco Point, and the smaller, at 200 yards ESE.
of it is separated by a narrow channel.

Diego and Roncadora Passes. — From Bapado Pass the reef runs
"KE. by E. 3i miles to the first of the Diego Passes, and after forming
the second 2 miles farther to windward, continues XE. 4 miles to Bon-
cadora Pass. The two passes of Diego are If fathoms deep ; the weather
one lies 3 miles from Diego Cay, and the lee one 2J miles. The Bonca-
dora Pass is a mile in breadth and 2f fathoms deep. To enter it coast
along the edge of the reef until the town of Baja, on rising ground 2
miles inland, is in sight, then bringing the tower of the church on with
the little hill of Acostas; this mark will lead through mid channel with
depths of from 16 to 26 feet after pa-ssing the reef.

B^ja Bay is a secure anchorage, being only open to NW. winds. In
this direction the reefs are at no great distance and prevent any heavy
seas from rolling in. At the head of the bay there is a landing place,

AliONSO R0J08 POINT — INES DE SOTO CAY 149

serving as a port for the town of Bi^a about 3 miles inland. Vessels of
light draft lie i mile off the landing in 8 feet of water.

AJlonso Rojos Point. — ^At 2^ miles from the loading place of Bsya is
Alonso Bojos Point, which is formed by several small cays close to the
shore; thence the coast, after forming a large bay, trends about NE.,
with various sinuosities as far as the point southward of Jutias Gay.

Jntias Oay is nearly 3 miles east and west, and 12 in circumference;
the northern part of it is firm land, but the southern is marshy; at its
western end there is a fisherman's hut. It is separated from the coast
by a channel about 200 yards in breadth, navigable only with difficulty
by boats and canoes.

Nombre de Dios Bay is between the western point of Jutias Cay and
Jaguey Point. The entrances are nearly closed by an extensive mud
bank. There are two channels of entrance to the bay, both marked out
by beacons; one of these is within 200 yards of the shore of Jutias Gay
and the other is 400 yards farther to the westward. Each of these
channels is 100 yards wide and carries a depth of from 11 to 16 feet of
water.

Oalera and Jutias PaaseB. — From Boncadora Pass the reef runs
about I^E. 6 miles to Galera Pass; its breadth in places is 1^ miles,
and its outer part is about 5 miles from the coast. Oalera Pass is
about 500 yards wide, and in its middle 2f fathoms deep; it lies 2 miles
west of the N W. point of Jutias Gay. Jutias- Pass is one fathom deep,
and fbrmed by a reef on the east, and a ridge of rocks almost awash ex-
tending from the NE. point of Jutias Gay; this pass is divided into two
narrow channels by a bank with little water over it.

Reef between Jutias and Levlza Passes.— From Jutias Pass
the reef runs about XE. 13 miles, and then trends *nearly east 13 miles
to Leviza Pass. Its greatest breadth is 1^ miles, and the outer line from
4 to 6 miles irom the land.

Santa Lucia Point. — From the north point of Jutias Gay its shore
and the main land run SE. 3 miles to the head of a shallow bay; thence
it trends NE. i N. for 6 miles to Santa Lucia Point. Two miles farther
on is the western point of Malas Aguas Bay.

• Malas Agues Bay is about 2 miles across at the entrance, and 1^
deep. From its eastern point the coast trends about E. by S. 2} miles
to the mouth of the river Azdcar, where i mile up is good fresh water
and the best found anywhere within the reefs.

About IJ miles NW. of the mouth of the river is the small Gay
Boquerones, separated from the weather point of the bay by a channel
If fathoms deep, but in navigating it a pilot is necessary, as the shore
is bordered bv reefs.

Inte de Soto Cay extends NE. and SW. 4^ miles; its northern part
is firm land, but the southern is marshy. Seen from the northward the
cay appears to be divided by a small channel, which is only an inlet
300 yards in extent; 400 yards off Gallegos, the NW. point, is a mud-

150 CUBA — NORTH COAST.

bank with about one fathom water on it, which extends 200 yards east
and west, and 100 yards in breadth. Between this shoal and the outer
reefs is the channel nearly a mile wide and If fathoms deep, and which
is used by coasters.

San Cayetano Bay is formed on the west by In^s de Soto and Legiia
Oays, and on the east by Lavandera Point. On the shore there are
several storehouses for copper ore, and a wooden pier. It is clear of
danger, and the bottom mud. In proceeding for this bay it will, how-
ever, be necessary to guard against a reef which extends 800 yards SB.
from the east point of In^s de Soto Cay. The best berth is in 2 fathoms
water, with the east point of tnes de Soto Cay bearing N. 41^ W. (N, 45^
W. mag.) and Lavandera Point X. 2(yO E. (N. 22^ E. mag).

Lavandera Point is l.J miles east of the eastern point of Ines de Soto
Cay, apparently on the, main land, but really the northern point of a cay
3 miles long, separat<id from the Cuban shore by a narrow channel
uniting San Cayetano and Berracos Bays. The northern part of this
cay is of dry land, but all the rest, except a small beach on the western
side, is swampy and covered with mangroves.

Berracos Bay. — About 1^ miles eastward of Lavandera Point is a
group of three small cays, marshy and covered with nnin^Toves, named
TJvas; f mile SE. of these cays is a point which, with the western of
the Berracos Cays, about a mile to the NE. form the bay of this name,
which is IJ miles deep. Within the bay lies a small cay southward of
the ejistern of the Uvas.

The Berracos are two small, low cays, joined to the coast by a reef
preventing the passage of boats and sheltering the anchorage of Ber-
racos Bay. The channel leading to this anchorage has a depth of from
9 to 16 feet, gradually diminishing toward the shore.

Arenas Cay, north of the Berracos, is separated from the reefs out-
side by a channel 500 yards in width, navigable for boats only; its
southern portion is swampy. There is a short reef extending from its
SW. i>oint.

Dios Cays tare two small swampy islets lying east 4 mile from Point
Purgatorio and very near the coast.

Furgatorio Point. — Abcm't 2i miles eastward of the Berracos is the
mouth of the Uiver Medio; thence the coast trends NE. by E. 4 miles to
Purgatorio Point, forming between two small bays.

Leviza Cay. — A mile northward of Dios Cays is the middle of Leviza
Cay, and in this si)acc, reduced by a reef which ext<^nds 400 yards from
the south side of the latter, the channel carries 1 J to 2 fathoms wat^r
over mud. Leviza Cay extends 2 miles east and west, and is divided
into two, by a narrow channel, fit for boats; its north ])art is firm laud,
but its s(mthern marshv.

jITearly 2J miles SE. of Leviza Cays is the entrance to the Biver Pu-
ercos, but the water is not good.

ALACRANES POINT HLANCO AND MANIMAR PASSES. 151

Alacranes Point and Cays.— At 2g miles N. S-'P E. (N. 790 E. mag.)
of Leviza Cay is Alaeranes Point, with several eays near it, named
Gasigiia and Alaeranes, which are separated from each other by small
channels used by canoes. Alaeranes Cav lies a little eastward of the
pass of the same name, and separated from the reefs by a channel a
mile in breadth and 0 or 7 feet deep, named the Ke<luan Pass. The
north part of this (vay is firm land, and the southern (jovered with man-
groves. It is separated from the coast l)y a channel J mile in breiulth
and about 2 feet deep.

Levisa Pass. — The outer edge of the reef passes 1^ miles northward
of Leviza Gay, an<l after forming on the west tlie pass of that name,
which has bnt little water, trends abcmt NE. by E. 4 miles to Alaeranes
Pass; thence, leaving a space of about a mile between it and Alaeranes
and Gavsigua Gays, XE, by E. 3 miles, and then E. J N. 4 miles farther
to Blanco Gay Pass.

Alaeranes Pass carries only about 0 f(»et water, and lies with the
eastern part of Leviza Cay bearing about S. 2<5o W. (S. 22^ W.). V^essels
of 6J feet draft enter and (piit this pass regularly, and sail between the
reef and co:ist as far as Jutias Gay. F<mr miles N. 8,'P E. (N. 79^ E.
mag.) of Alaeranes l*oint is the small. Gay Katones, and 2 miles N. 71^
E. (N. 670 E. mag.) from the latter is Blanco Gay, also very small, and
only seen from the reef.

Mnlata Bay. — About a mile S\V. fnmi Blanco Gay is the point and
Biver of Medio, and a mile farther to the southward the bay and loading
place of Mulata.

Oobemadora Point. — From abreast Blanco (3ay the coast trends
NE. 5 E. 7 J miles to the mouth of the River Manimani; thence with little
elevation E. J N. 3 miles to (xovernadora Point.

Blanco and Manimar Passes. — The Blanco Pass is 1| fathoms
deep and runs in about a SE. by S. direction. From this pass the reef
trends about NE. by E. 5 miles to Maninmr Pass, where small vessels
of 5i feet draft can enter; thence the reef runs a little more northerly,
about IJ miles from the (!oast, to Gobernadora Point, from which it ex-
tends off'alxmt a mile, and then trending nearer the coast, terminates
in the reef ott* Pescadores Point, at the west side of entrance to Hahia
Honda.

Directions. — Vessels of 7 feet draft can navigat(» within the reefs,
but with any sea the Alaeranes Pass is somewhat dangerous; it will
therefore be better to take Galera Pass. In passing near Diego and
Eapado Gays, care slumld'be taken to avoid the banks in their vicinity.
A vessel may ))ass east or west of the bank lying NW. of Buena Vista
Gay. Near the reef the bottom is rocky, and many isolated heads are
met with, but near the coast it is sand and mud. There are several
detached patches of 3 fathoms in the large opening between the Golo-
rados and Gajon Point, and nearly in mid-channel lies a bank 5 miles
in length, with only 2 fathoms water on its shoalest part. These can
generally be avoided by the eye, the chart giving their positions.

'^:

ti.

152 . CUBA — NORTH COAST.

Albatross Bank, reported in 1844 as approximately in latitude 22^
49' K and longitude 84° 17J' W., has 9 fathoms water over it, with hard
bottom. H. M. 8. Royalist, in 1866, found no bottom at 120 fathoms
close to its supposed position. The II. 8. 8. Albatross, in 1884, sounded
ii^ the position assigned to this bank, and found bottom in 950 fathoms,
coral and sand.

Bahia Honda is a small well-sheltered harbor, with a depth of from
3 to 6 fathoms. Its entrance, however, is so narrow and intricate that
ly a pilot is necessary in the absence of good local knowledge. The shore

;' - on either side of it is low and sandy. On the east side of the entrance

is the small hill of Morrillo. The channel is about 2 miles in length
north and south, and opens out into a land-locked basin, about a mile
in diameter, but the interior is only fit for small vessels. From the base
of the Morrillo a coral ledge runs off | mile to the N W. ; and from Pes-
cadores Point, on the opposite side, a similar ledge runs off 600 yards
to the NE., and the navigable channel here between the banks is not
more. than 300 yards wide.

From the Morrillo the shore treads SW. about J mile to Beal Point,
and the distance across to Caiman Point on' the western shore is about
600 yards. The former point may be approached to about 150 yards,
and the latter to 100 yards. From Real Point the eastern shore trends
south nearly | mile to Carenero Point, and ^ mile to the southward of
this is a low mangrove cay called Largo, the west end of which, Difun-
tos Point, is seen from the entrance. This point is foul to the N W. for
400 yards, and the channel is here again narrowed to about 400 yards
by this and the sand bank J mile off the western shore. Within this
is the basin.

The town is 6 miles from the bay, and contains about 1,000 inhabit-
ants, and is now a closed port, no foreign trade being permitted. It
has a fort, which is a good mark for entering. The health of the place
is good except in the sickly season, which commences in April and lasts
through the summer.

Directions. — ^To enter the harbor, bring the entrance to bear south
(8. 49 B. mag.) and steer for it. When within the distance of one mile
Difuntos Point will be seen between the sandy points on either side of
the entrance, and beyond it a remarkable hill, with a square top, back
of a sugar estate. By keeping the eastern end of this hill on with
Difuntos Point a depth of 16 to 5 fathoms will be carried in. The east-
. em side of the entrance should be kept close aboard, and when abreast
of Carenero Point a vessel may anchor in 6 ftithoms of water, or, if it
is desired to proceed farther in, she may stiind on the SW. and anchor
just within Difuntos and Mangles Points. Placer Point should be given
a good berth, as a sand shoal just awaah lies ^ mile off it Sailing ves-
.• sels must wait for the sea breeze to enter, and for the land breeze to

^ leave Bahia Honda. Although several streams enter into the harbor,

good water can not be obtained in great quantity.

CABANAS. 153

From Bahia Honda to Gabaiias tlie shore should not be approached
nearer than 2 miles.

Reef. — ^The American schooner Hattie Weston struck on a reef in
latitude 23° 06' N., longitude 83^ 04' W., at an estimated distance of 5
to 7 miles off shore. This shoal had been searched for without success,
but as the Hattie Weston had to discharge cargo in order to get off,
there can be no doubt of the existence of a shoal in this vicdnity, though
the position given may be wrong.

Caba&as is a good and well- sheltered anchorage and vessels of large
draft may safely enter it. South of the port, 5 miles inland, there
is a range of mountains 1,400 feet high at the western part, sloping
gradually toward the eastward to a large plain extending as far as the
table land of Mariel. At the eastern end of the heights there is a
remarkable peak bearing S. 45*^ B. (S. 49^ E. mag.) from the entrance
to the harbor, and about the middle of the range there is a remarkable
gap.

On the eastern side of the entrance there are two small hills, on the
western part of which are the buildings of a sugar estate. The entrance
is 1^ miles wide, and when tt bears south (S. 4^ E. mag.) a guar(^ouse
or tower with several adjacent buildings will be seen 2 miles inside.
This tower is on the extreme of an islet called Don Juan Tomas Cay,
which divides the harbor into two large arms.

A coral ledge extends off upwards of } mile from the weather shore
and 400 yards from the lee side, leaving a channel about 600 yards wide.

Direction. — When steering for port Cabailas, having opened out the
tower, bring it to bear about S. 8^ E. (S. 12<^ E. mag.), when it will be in
one with a remarkable gap on the heights above. This mark will lead
to the entrance of the channel in from 1(> to 9 fathoms water, over sand.
When the first point on the western coast, called Arbolitos, bears N.
86^ W. (west mag.) the depth will decrease to 7 fathoms ; then alter
course to S. 13^ E. (S. 17^ E. mag.) carrying 6 to 4 fathoms in mid-
channel, and the water will deepen to 13 fathoms on nearing Pescadores
Point. With the gap open a little to the eastward of the tower a
vessel will carry in 22 feet water; and with it open to the westward,
double the breadth of the tower, she will have 20 feet.

Having passed Pescadores Point, haul up and anchor close under the
weather shore in 7 to 9 fathoms, mud, near the entrance of the SE.
arm; or keep away and come to in the SW. arm, in about 9 fathoms
water, under the lee of the tower. In doing this, however, be careful
to avoid a patch of rocks and sand, about 250 yards in extent, and on
which there are 2 J fathoms water; it lies nearly J mile N.' 1° W. (N. 5^
W. mag.) of the tower, and may be seen from aloft.

Caution. — In leaving the harbor it will be desirable for a sailing
vessel to weigh with the early land wind, to insure its carrying the ves.
sel well out before it fails, as there is generally a very heavy swell in
the offing, and frequently a strong SW. eddy, which might set her on
the reef skirting the shore.

154 , CUBA — NORTH COAST.

The Town coutaini!^ about 700 inhabitants and is dosed to foreign
commerce. There is telegraphic and postal coipmunication with Ha-
vana by land. There are several streams of fresh water, but not very-
good. Salutes can be returned by the fort. The authorities to visit
are the commandant of the fort and the alcalde.

The district is ricli and fertile and oc^ujiied i)rincipally by sugar
estates.

Between Cabanas and Mariel, 12 miles to the eastward, the coast is,
in places, bordered by a reef J mile off shore. The edge of the reef is
steep-to, and, as there is frequently a strong eddy to the SW., vessels
must take care not to get becalmed in this vicinity.

Port MarieL — The shore in its vicinity becomes a little more ele-
vated, and a short distance inland, to the eastward of the port, there is
a remarkable long flat ridge of table land of moderate height, with a
notch or step at its east end, callefl the Table of Mariel, which can not
be mistaken, and a little westward of it will be seen a remarkable cliff,
facing westward in the harbor. The entrance lies NW. from the west
end of the table, and on its eastern side there is a martello tower and
some l^its, and when the tower bears S. 6^ B. (S. 10^ E. mag.) a church
and several buildings will open out in the interior.

The port is well sheltered, but its entrance is only 50 yards wide.
The least depth is 4 fathoms. The eye will be the best guide in enter-
ing, and when within the narrowest part keep the weather shore aboard
until abreast of (lorda Point, on the west shore, on which there is a
small fort, when the vessel may anchor in 5 or 6 fathoms in safety.

The port is closed to foreign commerce. ( -attle can be obtained at
the sugar estates, but no provisions. Water can be obtained from the
fresh-water streams. It is generally healthy, the sickly season being
from April to September. The battery at the fort can return vsalutes.
There is telegrai)hic communication, also a railroad, t^) Havana. There
is a small police force. Pilots are not necessary.

Buoys and Beacons. — On the weather or eastern side of the en-
trance are two buoys, on eon Los Cabazos abreast of Point Barlovento, the
other farther in on the most prqjei'ting point of the shoal water; on the
western side of entrance there is a beacon on Cayuelo, 14^ feet high,
surmounted by a ball, next a buoy on the edge of the shoal, whicli, with
the buoy opiK)site, marks the narrowest part ot the channel; there is
also a buoy on the NE. extremity of the reef off* Hegla Point.

Coast. — The shore eastward of the Table of Mariel, which is steep-
to, becomes rather low and flat until within a mile or two of Havana,
when it rises into a few small fortitied hills.

The shore is composed of dark-colored bluffs, clear of danger, and
steep-to. Between Mariel and Havana are the mouths of the small
Eivers Mosquito, Guajaibon, Banes, Baracoi, and Banta.

Reef. — Abreast the mouth of the River Jaimanita, 9 mile:^ westward
of Havana, a reef extends one mile off' Mangles Point.

* CHORRERA. 155

The Harbor of Chorrera is 4 miles westward of the entrance to Ha-
vana, at the month of the Almendaraz River. It is qnit« open to the
northward, and has no bar or other obstrnction at its entrance. The
anchorage in 3 to 5 fathoms would scarely a(*commodate half a dozen
vessels, and the holding ground is only coral sand.

Telegraph Cable. — At this place the end of one of the telegraph
cables between Cuba and Xey West is landed.

The rather low coast in the vicinity of the entrance to Chorrera is
■p' very ragged, the blackened coral rock being honeycombed by the sea.

I-

CHAPTER VII.

CUBA, SOUTH COAST.

Cape MaysL See page 107.

The Coast south of Gape Maysi is exposed to the eastward, the sea
breaks upon it, and it should not be approached. At i mile south of
the cape is Pintado Point, southward of which the shore is called the
Ooast of Pintado. At If miles from Pintado is Quemado Point, a little
salient. Kearly a mile from the latter is Bufeo Point, and about 5
miles farther on is BTegra Point, 300 yards north of which there is a
spring of fresh water.

Pintado Bank is between points Pintado and Quemado. Near the
shore there are from 4 to 8 fathoms of water, bottom of fine white sand.
The edge of the bank is steep-to, there being from 18 to 28 fathoms 200
yards from the edge, and ^ mile farther off no bottom at 00 fathoms.

Negra Point is a dark, barren, steep, projecting point, and easily
distinguished; 1,200 yards off it there are 28 fathoms water, and at
the distance of a mile the depth is more than 90 fathoms. From Negra
Point the coast of soboruco, covered more or less with trees, forming a
curve outwards, trends to the south and westward for 7 miles to Galeta
Point; it is backed by the high land, which is close to it. About 60
yards SW. of Negra Point there is a little bay and a cave, formed by
vertical cliffs, where the sea breaks heavily, and is called the Oliff of
Point Negra. About 2J miles SW. of Negra Point is Guanos Point,
known by a wood of palm trees on it. Between the two points there
are 28 fathoms water, rock and gravel, 1,000 to 1,200 yards from the
shore; and between the latter and Galeta Point there are 18 fathoms,
over gravel and rock, at 600 to 1,200 yards. Between Negra and Oaleta
Points the depth exceeds 90 fathoms 1^ miles from the land.

Caleta Point. From Oaleta Point the soboruco cliffs extend nearly
a mile to the beach, called the Playa de Galeta, about 90 yards wide.
A nver flowing through a cut in the highland empties about the middle
of the beaoh. Its mouth is generally choked up, except during the
rainy season, and the water near the beach is salt. A little higher up,
however, it will be found to be fresh and good.

From this beach the soboruco cliffs continue i mile to a white sandy
beach called Playa Blanca. In the middle of this beach is a rocky
point, just eastward of which and near the shore is a spring of excellent
water.

156

JAUCO RIVEE LLANA POINT. 157

Janco River is i mile from the Playa Blanca, emptying over a sandy
beach, and navigable for boats daring the rainy season. Near the
'mouth of the river is a rocky point, having a cavern in it called the
Gneva de Janco.

All along this part of the coast the mountain range is close to the
shore. The three cuts or ravines of Caleta, Caletilla, and Janco are.
very conspicuous. The land is thickly wooded, especially near the
Eiver Janco.

A rocky ledge commences near Caleta Beach and skirts the shore
at an average distiiuce of 300 yards as far west as Muertos Beach. A
little outside of it, or about 400 yards from the shore, the depths are 9"
or iO fathoms; but off the point and cave of Jauco this depth is found
at ^ mile off.

Anchorage. The am^horage of Caleta is on a bank of fine white
sand, with a few spots of rock and gravel in the indentation between
Caleta Point and the western extremity of tbe Playa Blanca. It is
sheltered by high land from ESE. round by north to west. Although
heavy squalls sometimes cause ships to drag here, this anchorage is
very useful, as it is the only one in the vicinity.

In approaching this anchorage a vessel should steer in for the beach
till within J of a mile of the shore, and let go the anchor in 10 fathoms
of water.

This lo(».ality may be known by two small hills on the slope of the
high mountain toward Caleta Point. With the wind from south or SE,
a vessel should not anchor here. A rocky head with less than 3 fathoms
on it and 5 fathoms around it lies on the line between the beach and the
point of Caleta at a distance of nearly 400 yards from the former.

Water can be obtained at low tide from a spring at Playa Blanca.
Wood also can be obtained.

Seco River is only open during the rainy season, and during the
remainder of the year is closed by two bars, one of stone', and the other,
farther in, of sand. The water is hardly fit to drink, and is difficult to
obtain by boats on account of the bars. In case of necessity the best
place to wate?" will be to the leeward of the mouth.

Liana Point. — The beach of Liana extends over a space of 2^ miles.
In the middle of this shore there is a bed of a river called Cana, which is
generally dry except in the rainy season ; and 600 yards from the west
extreme of the beach there is another glen, named Liana, which is also
generally dry. Liana Point, composed of soboruco,' projects a little at
the western termination of the beach. The coast for If miles westward
of the i)oint is of cliffs, with one or two bays. In the first third of this
space is the Leap of Jojo Point, which is high, salient, white, and seen
at a- great distance ; the other two- thirds is high'and steep. Jojo Point,
2 J miles from Liana Point, is of black rugged rock, of moderate height,
and at its inner part is an isolated elevation like a sugar loaf.

Jojo Bay lies between Jojo Point on the east and Tin torero Point

158 CUBA SOUTH COAST.

on the west. These two points are § mile apart, and between them is
an anchorage for small vessels.

Jojo River empties into this bay, and from it and the ponds near its
month good water may be procured.

Tiatorero Point is low and sandy; a mile to the westward of it is
the month of the river Tacre, and ^ mile farther on is Puerta Point, flat
and sandy.

All along this part of the coast the high land rises abruptly from the
shore, with breaks or ravines abreast of the Rio Seco, Rio Taere, and
Puerta Point. The mountains are covered with trees, with the excep-
tion of the Leap of Jojo, which is arid and barren.

The coast is bordered by a reef, broken in places, at an average dis-
tance of 200 yards from the shore. Everywhere along this part of the
coast at 5 mile from the land there are more than 90 fathoms of water.

Small vessels may anchor on the bank in Jojo Bay, sheltered from
E. by N., round by north to W. by S., but it is not a place tp be recom-
mended, as the sea rolls in heavily. In standing in for it keep closer to
Jojo Point than to the other side, to avoid a sunken rock, and anchor
just inside of the line joining the two points in 9 or 10 fathoms of water?
sandy bottom, about 300 yards oflt' shore. Vessels anchoring farther
out, in 13 or 14 fathoms, will be much more exposed to wind and sea.

Sombrero Rock, above water, lies about 60 yards off the eastern
side of the beach.

There are a few small houses and some cultivated ground in the neigh-
borhood, and a small amount of fresh provisions and water may be
obtained.

CantioiL — This anchorage should not be approached with southerly
or SE. winds.

The Coast for 200 yards westward of Puerta Point is of sobomco;
thence it curves somewhat outwards for a distance of 3J miles. The
shore for about f mile west of the point is called Guayacanes, and near
its west end and a little inland is the valley of the same name, with a
break in the mountain. At the distance of a mile farther on is Guaya-
canes Point, which is dark, of moderate height, and projects, with two
small bays between. To the westward of the point is a beach named
Managuaco, about 1 J miles in extent, with some scattered rocks near its
western extremity; then follow some cliffs of soboruco, and the small
bay of Caoba, which is of sand and scattered rocks, and histly for about
^ mile a rocky shore, when commences the beach of Imia.

The Beach of Imia is about § mile long, and near its eastern end
is the mouth of the river of the same name. To obtain water from th^
Imia River, the shore will be approached most easily WKW, of the small
bay of Caoba, where it is clear of reefs. The mountains rise abruptly
from the shore and are covered with trees. A broken reef skirts the
shore at the distance of 70 yards.

Anchorage off Imia Beach is only available with northerly winds.

PIEDRAS G0RDA8 POINT BEACH OF SAFJANA. 159

The only good position. is about 400 yards off the eastern part of the
beach, in 9 or 10 fathoiitH of water, with a bottom of sand and weeds.
Wood, water, and fresh ixrovisions may be obtained here.

Coast. — Prom Imia Beach the rocky coast of moderate height con-
tinues westward with an outward curve for 4 miles to Yacabo I^oint.
In the middle of it is Imia Point, steep and of moderate elevation.
Yacabo Point is a little salient, and from it the coast runs almost in a
straight line to Piedras Gordas Point.

Piedras G-ordas Point is so called t)u account of the large bowlders
upon it. To the westward of this point the shore forms a bay, at the
head of which is a beacli (>00 yards hmg. The shore is clear, except a
rock near the eastern en<l of the beach, near which is a spring of fresh
water, easier of access and more sheltered than the stream farther to
the westward.

Quarda-raya Point is the western limit of this bay, aiid the next
indentation in the coast to the westward is a small cove called the
Guarda-raya de Yacabo, which is skirted by a flat reef and is almost
unapproachable. The high land is here also very r.ear the coast, with '
a break, through which runs the l'^a<'abo Kiver, emptying into tlie bay
of the same name.

In this bay there is an anchorage entirely open to the southward.
Vessels anchoring here should do so at the eastern edge of the besich
to avoid the rocky heads off the western end.

Fresh provisions may be obtained from the neighboring houses.

To the westward of the Guarda-raya de Yacabo the coast is rocky
for about i mile, followed by. a beach J mile long, with the mouth of
the River Ocampo at its western end.

Sabana-la-mar Point is about 4 miles farther to the westward. It
is a remarkable proje(jtion, steep and moderately high, with a rock on
its summit, and is about 27 miles west of Caleta I*oint.

Tho Boach of Sabana is ^ mile in length; at its east end is a lake
and at its west end a river of good water runs into the sea, with its
mouth free of obstructions, where water can be had without difficulty.
The beach of Ciguatos, ^ mile in extent, follows that of Sabana, and is
separated from it by a small rocky cliff of about 120 yards in length.
At the west end of Ciguatos Beach the river of the same name empties
in the rainy season, and in order to approach it is necessary to close
the middle of the beach and pass within the rocky heads until arriving
at its mouth. Thence a rocky (»oast runs westward for 800 yards to
a point somewhat salient, called Jaba, then for more than 1^ miles
farther the coast is high and steep, and 800 yards from its west end is
the bay of Jaba, the entrance of which is not more than 110 ^-ards wide,
with a shelly, rocky beach fronting it. At the back, on the hill, about
110 yards from the sea, there is a spring of good water.

From Jaba Bay the rocky coast runs a mile farther to the entrance
of Port Baitiqueri, and i mile to the SW. of it is the point of the same

160 CUBA SOUTH COAST.

name. This part of the 8hore is called the coast of the Boqueron, from
a break in the mouatain, by which Santiago de Cuba may be known.
The high mountains range all along to very near the coast, forming
several breaks or openings.

Anchorage. — A vessel will find auchorage at about I mile off the
eastern part of the former beach in 8 or 9 fathoms water, sand, 400
yards from a rocky point* which projects from the eastern end of the
beach, and opposite a cave where the sea breaks; but it should not be
used with south or SB. winds. This is the best pla<^e for casting, and
farther westward the bottom is gravel and rock.

This locality may be easily known from a distance by the Pan de
Azucar, visible 30 miles. It lies about f mile N. 22© E. (N. 20^ E.
mag.) of the eastern end of Sabana-la-mar Beach, and, seen from the
westward, has the ax)pearance of a sugar loaf, but from the eastward
looks like the roof of a house. '

The edge of soundings here is steep-to and close to the shore, there
being generally no bottom at 90 fathoms J mile off the land.

The coast is skirted here and there with reefs at from 50 to 100 yards
from the shore.

Water is abundant, and fresh provisions are easily obtained from
the neighboring houses.

Port Bcdtiqaeri. — ^The entrance between the outer points is nearly
400 yards in breadth, but it narrows to about 90 yards at the inner pointy
when the harbor opena out to between 400 and 600 yards in breadth
and about 1,200 in length. It is sheltered by the mountains which sur-
round it.

The port can be readily recognized by the Pan de Azucar, which is
about 5 miles from the entrance. Vessels bound to Baitiqueri fh)m the
southward or from well offshore, should steer in with the Pan de Azucar
on a north (N. 2° W. mag.) bearing. When within a mile of the shore
the mouth of the harbor will be plainly seen bearing west (S. 88^ W.
mag.) opening between the high hills or coast mountains, sloping down
to rocky points on both the east and west sides, with an inner point of
green trees and bushes on the west side. The reefs on both sides of
the channel can be seen when close in to the land or when 400 yards
offshore.

Between the outer entrance points the channel is 100 feet wide, but
in the narrowest part it is only 50 feet in breadth, with a depth of 2 fath-
oms, increasing to 3 J fathoms; the reefs on both sides of the channel are
seen when J mile from the entrance.

There ia a depth of from 9 to 15 feet water within the entrance, over
muddy bottom of a slate color.

Supplies. — ^The only supplies to be obtained at Port Baitiqueri are
wood and fresh water.

Winda. — Between Pintado Point and Baitiqueri the coastis sufficiently
protected from north and NB. winds, which prevail during the winter

PORT ESCONl>IDO PORT GUANTANAMO. 161

months, except between Pintado and Galeta Points, where the K£.
winds, which blow hard, cause much sea. The land winds prevail all
the year round at night, and blow fresh during the north and NE. winds,
which much facilitates a vessel making easting, if the coast be kept
dose aboard so as to take advantage of them, us they do not reach far
to seaward. From Baitiqueri to Guanos Point the coast can be
approached to the distance of a mile, but from the latter point round
Cape Maysi the coast should not be approached at night within 6 miles.

Onnront. — At a short distance from the coast the stream of the flood
sets to the westward and that of the ebb to the eastward. The general
current runs constantly to the westward during the months of July,
August, and September, and its rate varies with the force of the wind.

Mai Ano Point. — ^From Baitiqueri the rocky coast runs SSW. for 3
miles to Tortuguilla Point; thence nearly west for 2 miles to the RiveT
Yatera, which empties itself into a sandy bay ; from here it again trends
8W. for 3 miles to Mai Ano Point, which is easily recognized from the
east or west. About 4 miles westward of the point is Port tiscondido,
to the eastward of which and near tne entrance are two isolated hills.
AU this part of the coast is free from danger and can be approac^hed
to a mile.

Port Bscondido, or Hidden Harbor, as its name implies, is very
difficult to discover until close to it ; but the two small hummocks a little
eastward of the entrance are a good guide from the scmthward. The
entrance lies between two rocky points, about 200 yards apart, and is
300 yards in a N W. and SE. direction ; but botli sides are fringed with
a coral ledge ; that on the windward side extends off about 70 yards,
leaving a narrow channel about 80 yards in breadth in the center, in
which there are from 4 to 6 fathoms water. The interior opens out into
an irregular form, the projecting mangrove points forming inlets of deep
water close home to the swampy shores. Many small shoals lie in the
way, but they are easily seen.

The port is sheltered from all winds, and fit for large vessels, but no
directions can be given. The safest way will be to pla<3e a boat on the
edge of the weather reef, and the eye, with the assistance of the plan,
will guide in without much diflftculty or risk, even with the wind as far
north as NE. There is no fresh water to be found, nor is there any set-
tlement near the shore, and consequently no pilots.

Port G-nantAnamo, or Cumberland Harbor, 12^ miles westward of
Bscondido, is capable of admitting vessels of large draft without diffi-
oulty, and in safety. The shore between it and Escondido forms small
sandy coves, steep to. This port, which is altogether about 11 miles in
length, north and south, may be said to form two harbors; the inner,
called the bay of Joa, has, however, a depth of only from 12 to 15 feet,
and the channel leading into it, although deep, is extremely narrow. In
the center of the i)ort the shores are deeply indented, forming small
secure creeks, very convenient for vessels of light draft.
18402 11

102 CUBA SOUTH COAST.

The entrance is nearly 1^ miles wide, and may be readily made out,
and its eastern side is a straight rocky shore IJ miles in length north
and south. Just within the north end there is a low spit of dry sand
called Fishernjan Point, on which there are palm trees and generally
one or two huts. The only danger on this side is a rocky ledge 600
yards in length, running oflf' to the westward from Fisherman Point;
on the outer part there is 15 feet. About J mile within the outer point
is the beginniug of a bank, which carries ^3^ to 4 fathoms over it; this
bank extends westward more than J mile, and the most projecting part
of it lies with the mouth of the River Guantdnamo, bearing about S,
SQo W. (S. 780 W. mag.).

On the west side of the entrance to this part there is a lookout house
erected on piles.

About i mile to the northward of the leeward point of entrance is
the mouth of the Ouant&namo or Augusta River, in which the depths
are from 9 to 15 feet for a considerable distance within. Thence a low
sandy shore bends round to the NW. and then NE., forming the north
Bide of the outer port, and near the center of it there is a remarkable
whitish brown cliff. A shallow bank or reef borders all this western
and northern shore for about 400 yards.

There is a narrow rocky ledge with 18 feet of water on it about J
mile within the outer points of the entrance. The various accounts of
its location do not agree, but its most projecting point is believed to be
i mile from the western shore and east of the mouth of the River Guan-
t6namo.

Water may be obtained from the Guantdnamo River, but the boats
will have to proceed up as high as the Barcadero, about 11 or 12 miles
from the mouth. It is also to be had from a small stream on the NW.
shore of the inner harbor, the mouth of which is 300 or 400 yards east-
ward of a remarkable red and white cliff. Near it are some stakes, and
over it a remarkable lofty tree. The stream, although not more than
16 or 18 feet wide, is deep enough for launches; but be careful to get
out before low water, as then there are only 2 feet on the bar. A place
for watering will be found a little way upon the starboard hand, where
there is a cleared space on the shore, or on the port hand where there
is a fall.

Pilots will go out to vessels advancing to the line between the point
to windward of the harbor and San Nicolas Point The pilot boats are
painted white with a black "P" on bows, and they fly a white flag with
blue ^^P" in center. Rates same as Santiago de Cuba, except at night
one-half the regular rate in addition is charged, and for movement in
harbor one-third of regular rates. Pilotage is compulsory except for
men-of-war.

Daeo. — ISo tonnage or light dues.

Cable. — ^The line of cable is indicated by three posts on Cayo Toro
and one on Cayo Caoba.

GUANTANAMO— DIRECTIONS C AIMANERA. 1 63

DirectioiUL^In approaching Goauldnamo from the southward, on
about the meridian of 75^ 10' W., a remarkable conical mountain will
be seen to the NNW., about 15 miles westward of the liarbor. As the
land is approached this mountain will assume a saddle shlape, and a
small isolated hill, with two small paps or hummocks near it, will be
seen to the westward. The east side of the entrance is a round hUly
bluff, barren but of green color ; the western point is low and woody.
The coast is bold and steep to, and no soundings will be obtained until
within the points. The eastern point can be rounded at 400 yards dis-
tance, and when abreast of it steer K 19^ W. (N. 21° W. mag.) for the
brown bluff above mentioned on the northern shore. When Fisherman
Point is well open haul up X. 24 ^e. (N. 22*^ E. mag.), and when it bears
S. 770 E. (S. 790 E. mag.) haul up N. 45o E. (N. 43° E. mag.) or K. 5Qo
E. (N. 540 E. mag.) and anchor as convenient, "with Fisherman Point
bearing from S. 10^ E. (S. 12^ E. mag.) to S. 20o E. (S. 22o E. mag.).

The eastern shore is quite clear and a vessel may stand farther in if
desired^ It will be well for a sailing vessel to wait for the sea breeze
to enter and for, the land breeze to go out. Should it be necessary to
beat in or out, do not stand inside the depth of 6 fathoms, and in stand-
ing to the eastward do not bring the brown cliff to the westward of N.
300 W. (N. 320 W. mag.) to avoid the Fisherman Ledge.

If proceeding into the Gaimanera, or inner harbor, pass between
Hicacal Point and Hospital Gay ; when abreast the north end of the lat-
ter, steer for the narrow channel between Toro and Gaoba Cays, passing
about 200 yards westward of Largo Gay; when well through this chan-
nel, with Media Gay bearing S. 65^ B. (8. 67° E. mag.), alter course for
Point Salinas, and anchor oft' the village with the railway depot on
about a west bearing, according to draft.

To'wn. — At Gaimanera there are only a few houses and the railway
terminus; the town of Guant&namo, 15 miles distant, is connected with
it by a railway.

Fresh provisions, fruits, and vegetables can generally be obtained
here.

There is a telegraph line to Santiago de Guba. Steamers from Hav-
ana call trimonthly, and a semiweekly steamer to Santiago de Guba.

The LTnit^ States is represented by a consular agent at Guant4namo.

Light. — A lantern light is exhibited on each of the two angles of the
mole head at Gaimanera Harbor. The lights are elevated 16 feet above
the sea. One lantern has two white and two red glasses; the other, two
white and two green glasses, the colored glasses being turned towards
the bay; the red light marks the northern, and the green light the
southern angle, thus indicating the sides as well as the head of the
inole.

The Coast from Guant4namo takes a westerly direction for about 20
miles to Berracos Point, which forms a remarkable round hill; it is clear
of danger and may be approached to the distance of a mile. Thence it

164 CUBA SOUTH COAST.

trends northwesterly 5 miles, forming the bight of Cape Baxa (Low)^
and then resnmes its westerly direction to the River Jnragua, the
entrance to which is about 8 miles from Berracos Point. To leeward of
the bight of Cape Baxa there are three shallow sandy bays, separated
by high scarped hills, called Los Altares, or The Altai s, ftom the eastern
one having a remarkable flattened summit, which are backed by the
lofty mountains of Maestra.

From the River Jnragua the coast continues westward for 9 miles to
the entrance of Santiago de Cuba; between are the mouths of the Rivers
Sardinero and Aguadores; in the vicinity of the latter several small
houses are to be seen. All this part is bold and steep to, and may be
freely approached to the distance of a mile. At 7 or 8 miles eastward
of Santiago de Cuba a vessel can anchor in 17 fathoms water, off a
valley or break in the land, 1^ miles from the shore. It has been re-
ported that with the Morro Castle bearing betweeu N. 450 w, (N. 47^
W. mag.) and N. oo B. (N, 3° E. mag.), distant one mile, there are 4
fathoms rocky bottom, and there is the same depth within 400 yards
of the shore.

Nneva Salamanca, formerly Baigniri, about 22 miles eastward of
Santiago de Cuba, is the shipping port of some rich iron mines about 3
miles inland. A breakwater is in course of construction for the protec-
tion of the harbor. The ore is principally shii)ped to the United States.

Santiago de Cuba will admit vessels of the largest draft, entirely
sheltered from all winds. Its locality is indicated from a distance by
a remarkable valley, separating the eastern from the western spur of
the Cobre Mountains.

The lofty mountain of Turquino is ri6 miles west of Santiago, and in
clear weather may be seen from the north coast of Jamaica. Gran
Piedra, 6,000 feet high, is 20 miles to the eastward.

The Morro Castle, on the eastern side of the entrance, is a rather
large terraced fortification, standing on the western extremity of a flat
ridge about 200 feet high.

The entrance to the harbor is about 200 yards wide. After passing
Smith Gay the channel widens, and, although the c<mrse is crooked,
the sea breeze is generally a fair wind up to the city.

Light. — A lighthouse, built of iron, stands 100 yards eavStward of the
Morro Castle, and exhibits a white light, which shows a fixed bright
light for 50 seconds and then flashing for 10 seconds, at 228 feet above
the sea, and should be seen in clear weather 22 miles, but it can not
always be depended upon.

Steam Tngs are in readiness to tow sailing vessels in or out of the
port if required. Charges vary from $15 to $30 and should be fixed
beforehand.

Diamante de Afuera Shoal, just to the west of the entrance, is
probably laid down a little too far offshore. The pilots state that the
sea in heavy weather breaks upon it. After passing the shoals a ves-
sel may haul up for the (jity and anchor as convenient. The depth
gradually decreases toward the northern part of the harbor.

SANTIAGO DE CUBA DIRECTIONS. 165

Baoy and Beacons. — A red cyliadrical buoy surmounted by a lattioe-
work pyramid, on which is a small vane, is moored on the extreme oi
Diamante Shoal in 30 feet of water, low spring tides.

A white post surmounted by a triangular-shaped vane marks the SW.
extremity of Gorda Bank.

Colorado Shoal buoy is a cylindrical iron buoy, carrying a triangular
pyramid, painted red and surmounted by a r^d vane marked with the
figure 7 in whit-e, indicating in feet the depth in which the buoy is
moored.

Compadres Shoal buoy is a cylindrical iron buoy, carrying a tripod,
surmounted by a spherical cage with a vane, on which is painted the
number 14 in black on a white ground, indicating in feet the depth in
' which the buoy is moored. This buoy is painted white.

Direotions. — When bound for Santiiigo de Cuba from the eastward,
give the shore a berth of about 1^ or 2 miles to avoid the foul ground
off the Morro, until Estrella Point comes open. When the latter bears
N. 36^ B. (N. 340 E. mag.), haul in upon this course, being careful not
to bring it to the eastward of that bearing, and pass the Morro Point
close aboard or at a distance of 50 yards, lo avoid the ledge running
off firom the western point of entrance. Keep the eastern shore aboard
until the Estrella is passed, then steer in mid channel between tne
shore and Smith Cay, on the soutli end of which there is a small village
where pilots reside.

Having rounded the beacon off Gorda Point the beacon buoy will be
seen on Colorado Shoal, in the middle of the channel, which must be
kept to port: Gorda Point cliff south of it being clear of danger. Then
steer along the eastern shore, which is steep-to, and pass to the south-
ward and eastwanl of Itatones Cay, on whi(*h there is a magazine.

Having passed Ratones Cay steer about X. 13^ E. (N. 11 o E. mag.),
passing westward of the beacon buoy on the Compadres, the outer of
two small roiiks (the inner one is 2 feet above water). Then haul up
for the city, and anclior according to the vessel's draft, the depth de-
creasing gnidually towards the upper part of tlie harbor. A vessel
will have a good berth in 4 fathoms water, about i mile from the city,
with Ratones Cay S. 31)o W. (S. 37^ W. mag.) and Blanca Battery, which
is painted red, S. 54^ E. (S. 5(P E. mag). In leaving, it will be advis.
able to drop down to the entrance with the sea breeze on tlie previous
evening, to be in readiness for the land wind on the following morning.
Strangers should take a pilot.

A sailing vessel may enter the port as far as the outer anchorage
with the wind from ESB., but to proceed to the city slie must have the
wind as far to the southward as SE. by E., in order to weather the
Colorado Shoal. To leave the ])ort, as she will have to haul up as far
as SE. by B., between Smith Cay and Gaspar Point, tlie wind should
be as far to tlie northward as ^E, With very light winds vessels
should not attempt to enter or leave the port under sail. In winter,

166 CUBA SOUTH COAST.

when KE. winds prevail, some days may elapse when vessels can not
enter under sail, but there is generally during the daytime a breeze
^ from SE.

Daring the rainy season the current in the channel at the entrance
is very strong.

Pilots are efficient, not necessary for a man-of-war^ but compulsory
for merchant vessels. The following are the day (between sunrise and
sunset) rates: Night rates double; for change of anchorage half rates
are charged: Vessels of 100 tons and under, $9, and $1.50 addi-
tional for each additional 100 tons up to vessels of 500 tons; vessels
from 501 to 700 tons, 816; 701 to 900 tons, $18; 901 to 1,000 tons, $20,
and $2 additional for each additional 1,000 tons.

Note. — When a vessel is coming out a red and yellow flag is shown *
from the flagstaff to the eastward of the lighthouse. An incoming
vessel must wait until the outgoing one is clear of the Morro, as the
channel is too narrow for passing.

The City is quite large and is the oldest in the island, and is built
on the XE. side of the harbor. Population, 45,000.

An iron pier 580 feet long has been built on wooden piles on the
northern side of La Cruz Point. Deepest draft of water, 30 feet. A
railway connects the iron-ore mines, 17 miles distant, with the pier,
and vessels can load 3,000 tons a day. This pier is only adapted for
loading dre. There are several other piers suitable for vessels of from
10 to 16 feet.

The place is healthy, but in summer yellow fever occurs. During the
winter the temperature varies from 65° to 85°. The morning and after-
noons are pleasant. Liberty should not be given here.

The authorities to be visited are governor of the province and the
captain of the port.

There is a battery of nine guns, and salutes are returned.

The United States is represented by a consul and vice-consul.

Supplies. — Provisions of all kinds can be obtained. Fresh meat, from
10 to 20 cents per pound.' Pipes are laid into the city from a reservoir
of excellent water, supplied from streams on the hills. Costs 50 cents
per barrel if taken from hydrant; 89 cents to $1, according to quan-
tity, if delivered.

Coal, in large (luantities, can be had from JJ^S to 80 per ton, brought
off in lighters. Vessels of 12 feet can liaul alongside the wharf north-
ward of Cariviza to coal.

Dock. — There is reported to be docking fivcilities at Santiago for
small craft. There is also a place for careening.

There are two good shops where ordinary repairs to steamers may be
made.

Telegraph. — A telegraph cable connects Santiago de Cuba with
Jamaica and the Windward Islands, and another laid along the south
coast affords communication via Havana with the United States and
Europe. A line also connects with all the principal ports on the island.

y SANTIAGO DB CUBA. 167

Commnnxoation. — The New York and Cuba steamship companies'
steamers leave New York every two weeks for Oienfuegos, stopping going
and returning. Time from New York, 5 days. There is frequent com-
munication with Havana and other Cuban ports; also with the different
islands.

Dues. — ^There are no tonnage or light dues. Signal duefe, $4 ; health
dues, $4.25; interpreting fees, $4.25; wharfage, $5 per day; custom-
house fees, $10; bill of health, $2.50; labor, $2 per day; ballast, dis-
charging, $1 per ton; lighterage, 8 cents per load of 200 pounds.

Tides — It is high water, full and change, at Santiago de Cuba at
8h, 30m. ; the rise is 2 feet.

Winds. — Within the port squalls are frequent between May and
October, bringing much rain and wind, especially if they come from
the NE. ; they appear to rise in a great measure from local circum-
stances, inasmuch as oflf the coast, and even in the channel, they are
less frequent. The land winds are constant during the night, weak
from May until October, but fresh in the dry mouths, and northerly
winds; sometimes they begin to blow at 9 p. m., at other times they
do not commence until early morning, yet they almost always last until
a little before the sea breeze sets in between 9 and 10 a. m. Between
the two winds there is an interval of calm.

Sailing vessels should avoid running into the calm near the Morro,
especially if there be much sea outside. Prom May till October stonns
from the SB. take place all along the coast, when the weather is so
thick and dirty as to completely obscure it; during which it is danger-
ous to endeavor to make the port, as it is then difficult to recognize, and
the sea is so heavy at the entrance as occasionally to close it.

The Coast from Santiago de Cuba takes a westerly direction for
about 108 miles to Cape Cruz. The shore is bold, lofty, thickly wooded,
and forms several bays and anchorages fit for small coasting vessels.
The peak of Turquino, 8,400 feet high, rises a short distance inland
about 50 miles westward of Santiago; and 37 miles farther on, and 15
miles eastward -of Cape Cruz, there is another remarkable mountain^
called the Ojo del Toro, 5,190 feet high, which, when seen from the
WSW., forms two or three hummocks. Thence the range decreases in
height, and falls by steps to the cape, which is low and woody, and
near the extremity of the sandy point there are some huts and a flag-
staff.

At 4 miles eastward of the cape the shore is composed of remarkable
clififs about 84 feet high, having horizontal strata resembling fortifica-
tions; but near the cape they are copper colored, and the strata become
perpendicular.

Light — A light, showing a red flash every 75 to 85 seconds, 113 feet
above the sea, is exhibited fnim a lighthouse on Cape Cruz, and should
be seen 17 miles. The tower is stone and the keeper's dwelling yellow.

Anchorage. — Soundings appear to extend to a short distance all
along this part of the coast, and in moderate weather a vessel may

168 CUBA SOUTH COAST.

anclior in 6 or 7 fathoms of, water off the sandy beach at the foot of
Turquino. To the westward of Portillo the depths are 12 to 6 fathoms
at from 2 to 4 miles off shore. The soundings are irregular, varying
suddenly from 6 to 3 J fathoms; but the bottom is easily seen, and there
is no difficulty in picking out a sandy spot.

Ill Portillo, 24 miles east of Gape Cruz, is a harbor said to be acces-
sible to vessels of large size. Good temporary anchorage will be found
here for vessels of the heaviest draft. The locality may be known by
three perpendicular white cliffs on the western side of the harbor, while
the land on the eastern side is low and marshy. Both points of entrance
are foul to a short distance, but the reefs which skirt them are steep-to
and the sea breaks upon them. The interior of the harbor is obstructed
by sand banks, which are generally marked out by stakes.

DirectionB. — At a distance of one mile from the land, after bringing
the entrance to bear N. 20^ W. (N. 23^ W. mag.) vessels can stand in
confidently, as there is no danger that does not show.

Shoal water extends a short distance from each point, but it can be
^ readily seen from a ship's deck.

Vessels drawing 12 . feet of water should anchor with the eastern
point bearing 8. Oo^ E. (S. ^S^ E. mag.) in about 6 fathoms of water-
Vessels of less draft than 12 feet can proceed inside and find shelter
from all winds, but the anchorage is confined. The outside anchorage
would be uneasy and unsafe with winds from ESE. to south.

About 12 miles westward from Portillo there is said to be an excel-
lent reef harbor, called Euseiiada de Mora, for vessels of any size, with
no dangers tliat are not apparent and easily avoided. It is at the foot
of the Ojo. del Toro Mountain, and, although no precise directions can
be given for it, the knowledge of its existence might, in emergency, be
useful.

Cape Craz Reef, on which the sea breaks heavily, commences 1§
miles east of tbe cape, and extending to the westward terminates one
mile SW. of it. There are often a number of fishing stakes on the reef,
and its western extremity is frequently marked by a staff with a bunch
of palm leaves upon it, placed there by the pilots. To the westward
of the reef a bank with patches of 2J and 3 fathoms of watei' on it ex-
tends 3 miles farther west and N\V.

Good Anchorage will be fimnd U^ the northward of the reef in 4
fathoms of water, with sandy bottom, with Cape Cruz bearing S. 50° E.
(S. 53^^ E. mag.)i Mount Ojo del Toro N. 79^ E. (X. 70^ E. mag.), and
the extremity of the reef S. 11^ E. (S. 14^ E. mag.)

In (joming from the eastward do not bring Ingles Point, 8 miles east
of Cape Cruz, to the eastward of X. 71P E. (N. 70^ E.) till Coloradas
Point, the second point north of the cape, and of dark green color,
comes oj)en of Cacimba Point, to avoid the reef.

Pilots. — There are from (> to 7 Government pilots, and care is taken
that several of them remain at Cape Cruz so as to cause no delay.
Pilotage is compulsory.

LLMONEH RIVER PERLA CAY. 169

CantioiL — Navigators must bear in miud that even the best charts
give but an incorrect idea of the chain of cays, reefs, and slioals which
extend 150 miles to the NW. from Cape Cruz. No good survey of this
part of the coast has ever been made, and no materials exist for de-
scribing it correctly. A vast number of the cays are i)recisely alike;
and the channels, when marked at all, are only marked by small bushes
placed by the pilots, and which the first rough weather will wash away.
There are doubtless deep navigable channels between the shoals, but
they are only known to tlit pilots, who are very reticent and unwilling
to communicate any infornmtion regarding them.

lamones River. — The entrance of the river, about 8 miles to the NB.
of Cape Cruz, is bordered by two lines of reefs and has 5 feet least
water. The river is navigable for boats to a distance of 3 miles, as far
as the landing stage known as Marca de Limones.

Anchorage. — There is anchorage in 4 fathoms to the southward of
Limones Cay, which lies N*31o W. (N. 34° W. mag.) abcmt 3^ miles
from the entrance of the river, and is the largest and most westerly of
the cays in the immediate neighborhood. The other eays are formed
of mangrove trunks washed by the sea. There are two farms on Li-
mones Cay.

G^Qanito Bay and Port Nignero, are two shallow ports north of
Limones River; they are suitable only for vessels of light draft.

Manzanillo. — From Cape Cruz the coast takes a NE. direction for
about 55 miles to the anchorage of Manzanillo. The population is
10,000. The United States is represented by a consular agent.

Manzanillo Bay lies between the mouth of the Hiver Yara on the
north and Caimanera Point on the south, 3 miles apart. The shores
are low and covere^l with mangrove trees, and the water is shallow.

Oua Caysv— N. 22^ W. (N. 25° W. mag.) of (iua Point, are three cays
of the same name, and between them an<l Gua Point there is a channel
over a mud flat with a depth of 11 feet.

The Manzanillo Cays are a group of low islets, most of them cov-
ered with mangrove trees, affording a sheltered anchorage for large
vessels, with deep water. In the middle of them there is a passage
about 85 yards wide, with a depth of 7 to 11 fathoms.

There are three good careening places for large vesst^ls with deep
water, and well sheltered, in the middle of these islets.

Perla Cay is a short distance 8. 45^ W. (S. 42- W. mag.) of these
cays, and is a small islet whi<h forms with the Gua ('ays a channel
about 2iK) yards wide, with 7 fathonis of water, muddy bottom.

The^great chain of shoals, cays, and reefs which skirt this part of
the coast commeuci\s about 15 miles XE. of Cape Cruz, with the great
baukof Buena Ksperanza, andexten<ls to the westward as far as Maria
Aguilar Point, near Trinidad.

The usual approach to Manzanillo is by the Balandras Channel, a
narrow passage carrying 18 feet of water between the small cays off

170 CUBA — 80UTH COAST.

the SE. part of the Buena Esperanza Bank and the cays close to the
Cuba Shore.

Proceeding to the NE. from the Balandras Channel, in 7 to 8 fathoms
of water, the Manzanillo and Gua Cays will be seen, and the passagre
between them should be steered for.

Vessels of 27 feet can go up to Manzanillo, but the channels are nar-
row, intricate, and badly marked, and none of them should ever be
attempted without the aid of a pilot. No tonnag^ or light dues are
collected.

Pilotage. — Vessels up to 45 tons, $22 (Spanish gold); 45 to 60 tons,
$26; 81 to 120 tons, $28; 121 to 150 tons, $32; 151 to 175 tons, $38;
176 to 200 tons, $42; 201 to 300 tons, $48; 301 to 400 tons, $52, and $5
additional for each additional 100 tons. For vessels of 600 tons and
upwards, $67. Going to or leaving dock, day $3, night $6. Changing
berth, day $2.50, night $5.

All vessels, no matter what their tonnage, which take pilots off Cape
Cruz up to the passage of Cuatro Beales for the port of Santa Cruz del
Sur, pay the maximum of pilotage, $67 Spanish gold.

Beacons — Nine wooden beacons, each showing 10 feet above high
water, mark some of the dangers between Cape Cruz and Balandras Reef.
White beacons each with a square top mark, are on the eastern side of
the channels; and red iJeacons, each with a triangular top mark, point
upwards, are on the western side.,

BarcoB Channel is a passage farther to the westward, leading to the
anchorage of Manzanillo, but it is not well known except to the pilots,

Cauto River is 12 miles to the northward of Manzanillo. It is one
of the deepest rivers in Cuba, and navigable for a distance of 60 miles.
The bar carries about 6 feet water.

Tides. — It is high wat«r, full and change, at Manzanillo, at lOh. 40m.;
the rise is 2 or 3 feet. The water is highest during the months of Sep-
tember and October, with the wind from south and SW.

Bank. — The bank of soundings lying between Cape Cruz and the east-
em end of the Doce Leguas Cays, 55 miles to the N W., is clear of danger,
and vessels may stand in to 7 fathoihs anywhere, except from about 8
miles N. 20° W. (N. 23^ W. mag.) of the cape to the cay on the southern
extremity of the bank of Buena Esperanza; within tliese limits it is not
safe for vessels to go within the depth of 10 fatlioms, as the ground is
intersected with numerous rocky ridges, some of th^m nearly awash.

Buena Esperanza Bank. — From Balandras (channel, the whit€ sand
bank of Buena Esperanza takes a westerly direction for 10 miles to a
small cay lying N. 8^ W. (N. 11^ W. mag.) 17 miles from Cape Cniz.
Thence it trends in a northerly direction for 18 miles, and then bends
to the WXW. 13 miles to Cuatro Reales Channel, which is the eastern
passage to Santa Cruz, having formed in this last distance the two pas-
sages called Barcos and Pitajaya. The entrance of Cuatro Reales Chan-
nel bears N. 23^ W. (X. 2iP VV. mag.) 42 miles from Cape Cruz, and
about 14 miles from the mainland to the northward.

SANTA CRUZ THE EASTERN CHAJiNEL. 171

Santa Cms. — The aueliorage of Santa Cruz is accessible only to ves-
sels of light draft. Vessels lumnd here should, from the western edge
of the reef off Cape Cruz, steer a ]N^. 15° W. (N. 18° W. mag.) course,
which will lead up to a group of eleven small cays extending east and
west, the two most westerly of which are the largest. Tlie eastern cay
is called Coiba, and is distinguished by some round-topped trees in its
center. Immediately to windward of Coiba Cay is a remarkable sandy
cay, and near it is another where the pilots reside.

The United States is represented by a consular agent.

The least depth of^water in the Cuarto Reales Channel is 16 feet.
The channel leading to Santa Cruz is narrow and^cTooked, but the water
is so clear and the shoals so steep-to that the vessel may be easily
guided by the eye.

Ciiatro Reales Channel — After passing Coiba Cay the course is N.
8^ W. (S. no W. mag.), leaving on the starboard hand the Media
Luna Cay and on tlie port hand the cluster called the Mordazo Cays,
and on arriving abreast of the north point of these latter cays, steer to
the westward, passing between the Mordazo Cays Jind the Carenero
Cays near the coast, and carrying a depth of 3J to 5 J fathoms of water
over variable bottom.

The Carenero Cays, two in number, lie eiist of the entran(;e to the
anchorage, and to the westward are two others, called Pinipiniche.
From the anchorage the houses of the town bear from NE. to NVV.

The Eastern Channel lies between the easternmost of the Doce
Leguas Cays and an extensive bank, on the western pjirt of which are
the Uvero Cays.

To enter this channel from outside steer north, giving a berth of one
mile to the reef which forms the eastern side of the channel. When
abreast of the white sand bank, haul up N. 25^ E. (N. 22^ E. mag.)
and pass through a group of three cays, leaving two of them to the east-
ward, and carrying a depth of 11 to 12 fathoms of water. After passing
these three cays steer toward the easternmost of the Pilon, a group of
four islets extending WNVV. and ESE. When within one mile of this*
latter cay the Mate Channel will b^ seen, to enter which, bring the north
point of the easternmost Pilon Cay to bear N. o^o w. (N. 58° W. mag.)
and steer S. 55^ E. (S. 58^ Jfl. mag.).

A better, becaase easier, <*ourse is to pass between the eastern Pilon
Cay and the Mate Cays, and, rounding the latter to the northward, pass
between them and the coast of Cuba, hi both of these channels the
depth is 16 feet.

To the eastward of the Mate Cays keep the (H)ast aboard, carrying
about 5J fathoms of water till about J mile to tlie southward of the Pin-
ipiniche Cays, when the town will be seen and anchorage will be found,
as before stated.*

Outside the cays the soundings are regular and vary from 8 to 20
fathoms. On the edge of the bank the bottom is generally rocky, but

172 CUBA SOUTH COAST.

iuside of a depth of 10 fathoms vessels may anchor temporarily on
sandy bottom.

Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at Santa Cruz at noon, and
the rise is 4 feetj but the tides are gi*eatly influenced by the strength
of the wind.

Laberinto de Doce Leguas, or Twelve-League Labyrinth, is a
range of low, bushy cays, with sandy beaches, extending in a WJS'W.
and BSE. direction, 70 miles. They are steep-to j the lead is therefore
no guide and in the night they should be ^iven a wide berth. The
easternmost islet, which lies ^. 12^ W. (X. 45^ W: mag.) o6 miles from
Cape Cruz, and Cay Breton, the westernmost, are 15 and 25 miles from
the mainland, but in the center they are nearly 30 miles from the near-
est shore. The space within, called the White Ground, from its clear,
white sandy bottom, is studded with small islets, with deep water
between them.

There ai'e several channels leading through the outer cays for vessels
of about 14-foot draft, but a pilot is necessary, and one may be obtained
at Cape Cruz or from the Caiman turtling vessels, which are generally
to be met with in the neighborhood. The principal openings are East-
ern channel, at the extreme east end of the range; Caballones Channel,
38 miles to leeward of this, and Boca Grande, 22 miles farther; and
being wide they can be easily recognised.

Bank inside the Laberinto de Doce Legnas. — This extensive
tract has generally depths of from 5 to 12 fathoms, over a very soft
white marly bottom, the mud from which almost always discolors the
water and greatly adds to the dangers of the pilotage. The whole
space is covered \vith grouj)s of low cays, very inaccurately laid down
on all charts, and their names are in much confusion.

There are several excellent harbors or lagoons formed by these cays,
in which a hurricane might be weathered, but they can not be found
without a pilot.

In many portions of this bank there are shoals of branch coral rising
*to the surface of the water from a depth of from 5 to 12 fathoms. By
sending a boat ahead to sound a steamer may be navigated among them,
but not without risk. From a point 5 miles north of the Boca Grande
to within 10 miles of the Cuban Coast these dangers are very thick.
The channel east of Burgado Cay is so full of these coral shoals as not
to be fit for use.

Caballones Channel, or Boca de Caballones, is the easternmost
of the channels through the Doce Leguas Cays for vessels larger than
boats. It is easily recognized, being 2 miles wide, while none of the
openings to the eastward have a great-er width than J mile. At a dis-
tance of one mile to the westward of this channel is a cocoanut tree.
Most of the trees on these (*ays are a sort of dwarf palto; tlie cocoanut
is seldom seen. There are only 2 J fiitlioms of water in this channel,
and the same depth is found to the S W. of the entrance, from each side

BOCA DE CABALLONES BOCA GRANDE. 17S

of which reefs extend, narrowing the channel td 400 yards in width*
No good marks can be. given and the eye will be the best guide.

After passing this narrow place the depth of water increases to 9
and 10 fathoms.

The inside western point of the channel is called Black Mangrove
Point and bears north (N. .'P W. mag.) of Pilot Point, the outer eastern
one. This channel is one of the best fishing grounds on the south side
of Cuba. An abundance of fish can be caught either by trolling or
bottom fishing or by hauliug a seine. The beach on the western side
is also frequented by turtles.

Directions. — After entering, a north (N. 3° W. ma^.) course will lead
between Bergantin and Manuel (romez Cays. The first of these lies 6
mUes north of the east end of Caballones or Liana Cay, which forms
the western side of the channel. From these cays a N. 8^ W. (N. 11^
W. mag.) course for 18 miles will carry the vessel up to the NE. end of
the Yagua Reef, and from here a IN". 43<^ W. (N. 46° W. mag.) course
for 18 miles farther leads to the mouth of the River Jatibonico. The
aid of a pilot will be necessary for a stranger.

Anchorage. — The best anchorage for small craft is one mile north
of Pilot Point, with a depth of 2^ fathoms, sheltered from all winds
except those from south to WNW., which are very rare. Should the
wind come out from these unusual directions, a vessel can easily find
shelter under one of the cays.

Pilots. — Some fishermen, who are always ready to act as pilots, live
about i mile eastward of Pilot Point.

Palomas or Brigand Cay Anchorage is one of the best of the an-
chorages in this vicinity. It is 15 miles N. 8° W. (N. lio W. mag.) of the
Boca de Caballones. The outside anchorage is in a large bay formed
by a semicircular chain of reefs and cays, and which may be entered
fipom the north or west without danger. It is well sheltered from S W.^
round by south to NNB.

A good berth will be found | mile K ll© W. (N. 14© W. mag.) from
a small sandy cay on the reef which joins the most western of the cays
with the rest of the group. There are 7 fathoms of water, with good
holding ground. If, however, a more sheltered anchorage is desired,
it will be found in the lagoon inside, having an entrance open to the
eastward, through which a depth of 3 fathoms may be carried. This
inner anchorage is completely surrounded by reefs and cays, and lies
in latitude 21o 06' N., longitude 78o 56' W. As the charts of this
region are not at all trustworthy the cays surrounding this anchorage
may or may not be the Palomas Group.

The Boca Q-rande is the most cx)nvenient channel of approach to the
River Jatibonico. It is 3 miles wide and its de])th is 2 J fathoms, except
within i mile of either shore. Cay Grande should be given a berth of
2 miles on account of a reef extending for 1^ miles to the southward off
its western shore. This reef can be easily seen.

174 CUBA — SOUTH C0A8T.

Having entered between the cays, the course is N. 31^ B. (N. 28^ B.
mag.), which leads to windward of Eabihorcado and Burgado Cays.
The depth in the channel ranges from 9 to 12 fathoms. The course lies
to the westward of numerous coral heads, steep-to and easily seen from
aloft. After passing Burgado Cay the course is N. 3^ W. (N. 6^. W.
mag.) to the mouth of the Jatibonico Kiver, where mahogany and cedar
timber is shipped in large quantities. When the water is smooth the
Boca Grande is a safe passage for vessels of 15 feet draft. The best
track is west of the middle of the channel.

Anchorage. — There are two anchorages at the entrance to the Boca
Grande, neither of them very good. The first one, with a depth of 4 to
7 fathoms of water, is in a bight formed by the reef in the eastern part
of the channel, and lies one mile S. 17^ W. (S. 14° W. mag.) of the
western end of Cav Grande.

Here a vessel is better sheltered from the usual easterly winds than
in any other part of the entrance, and the tide is not felt so strongly,
but with the wind from the southward or westward it would not be a
safe berth, and, moreover, a sailing vessel with these winds and a flood
tide could not leave.

The other anchorage, with a depth of 2J fathoms, is sheltered from
west and NW. winds. It lies in the western part of the channel, about
N. 70O B. (N. 67^ E. mag.) of the south end of the Cinco Bolas Cays, and
8. 8^ W. (S. 50 W. mag.) of their NE. point. This anchorage is exposed
to the entire force of the NE. wind and the sea, and a vessel lying here
with these winds will have a dangerous reef right astern.

Tides and Winds. — ^The tides are very strong and variable, and a
vessel should anchor during the night, which she can do in safety.
The stream runs in and out of the Boca Grande at the rate of from one
to 2^ knots, ^ear the mainland, in the early part of the morning, the
wind is more northerly than at any other part of the day, and it draws
round gradually with the sun ; the land wind comes off soon after sun-
set.

Cay Breton should be rounded careftiUy on account of a reef extend-
ing from it 3J miles to the SW. This reef is steep-to, and the sea gen-
erally breaks on it. Off the western end of the cay there is anchorage
in 4J fathoms, with the NW. end of the cay bearing N. 42o E. (N. 39^
E. mag.) and the SE. end, 8. 8I0 E. (S. 84° E. mag.).

Sailing vessels generally have to beat up to this anchorage, and in this
case, after rounding the western end of the reef, the NW. end of the
cay should not be brought to the southward of S. 70o E. (S. 73° B.
mag.), nor on the other tack should the same point be brought to the
northward of N. 59^ E. (N. 56^ E. mag.). This anchorage is sheltered
trom N. by E. to SW.

This is the most dangerous part of the coast, and is seldom without
a wreck upon it 5 for although the reef is awash, there is often but little
break to show it, and the apparent termination of the cays induces

CAY BRETON ZARZA DE FUEBA CAY. 175

strangers to haul close round, which at night is certain destruction. A
vessel may haul round the extremity of the reef, and find good anchor-
age and shelter from all easterly and norttierly winds; but iu standing
into a less depth than 4 fathoms keep a shar^) lookout fol* rocky heads.

There is a passage through the reef to the NW. of Cay Breton with
2J fathoms in it, but it is crooked, narrow, rocky, and known only to a
few of the Caiman fishermen, who navigate it by the eye. There is a
powerful indraught toward this passage on the fiood, which frequently
takes command of vessels passing the reef end too closely, where they
are liable to be becalmed, and obliged to anchor in an exposed position.

Zarza de Faera Cay. — From Cay Breton the reef takes a NN JV. di-
rection for 23 miles, and terminates ^ mile northward of Zarza de Fuera
Cay, which is low, sandy, thickly wooded, and lies about 3 miles east-
ward of the NW. point of the reef, and about 8 miles from Zarza Point,
the nearest part of the Cuba shore. The reef, without any cays upon
it except an occasional dry patch of sand, is very steep-to in all parts^
having 10 fathoms water alongside it, and 200 fathoms about a mile off;
it trends from ^ mil^ off the north side of tlie cay to about 4 miles east-
ward of it.

A vessel should pass 4 miles westward of Zarza de Fuera Cay, and
when it bears S. 87^ E. (east mag.) if wishing to enter upon the bank,
the vessel may be hauled up NE., the edge of the bank being quite clear
for 9 miles, or within two miles of Machos de Fuera Cay. After strik-
ing soundings, the water will shoal almost immediately to 5 fathoms,
and then deepen to 6 and 0 fathoms, with occasional patches of 4 fath-
oms as the vessel advances along the channel, which is quite clear be-
tween the mainland and Zara de Fuera Cay and that of M^danos de
Manati, which latter marks the north extreme of the shoals extending
from near the Boca Grande. The M^danos are very inaccurately laid
down on all charts; their jwsition should be in about 21 o 27' !N^., long.
79^ 16' W., and the coast of the mainland is laid down about 7 miles
too far south, at least as far east as Pasabanao Point.

This part of the coast affords good shelter and holding ground and is
without danger as long a^s the beach is in sight. Abreast of the Doce
Legnas Cays the coast is low and marshy, producing quantities of to-
bacco, honey, wax, and mahogany, exported in vessels of not more than
15 feet draft from Santa Cruz and the Kiver Jatibonico, the mouth of
which lies 30 miles to the northward of tlie Boca Grande.

There is an inside channel between the ports of Santa Cruz and Trini-
dad, which is smooth and well sheltered, with numerous excellent an-
chorages. The assistiince of a pilot is, however, indispensable.

The Coast between the River Jatibonico and Pasabanao Point, 6 miles
westward, forms a bay in which there are 2 J and 3 fathoms water. From
this point the coast trends WNW. G miles to Manati Point, and nearly
midway between there is a small creek called Caobas, in which there
are 6 feet of water. Prom thence to Tolete Point,'6 miles to the westward,

176 CUBA SOUTH COAST. \

the shore tbnns a bight, near the center of which is the Estero Nuevo
(New Creek).

At 8 miles south of ^Vfanati Point is the north end of the extensive
bank, Medanos de Manati, and in tlie channel between the soundings
are from (5 to 8 fathoms, the depths generally decreasing as the shore is
approached. Between Tolete and Zarza Points, -ij miles to the west-
ward, the bight is a little deeper, and in the middle of it is the small
shallow creek San Marcos.

VlBter. — Good water may be obtained about 3 miles up the River
Jatibonico; and at IVfanati Point there are some wells, but the water is
not so^ good.

River Zarza, which empties close on the east side of Zarza Point, is
navigable for canoes for some distance, and communicates with the
town of Sancti Espiritu, 2G miles inland. The water, however, is not dt
for use until 24 miles from the mouth.

Two small cays lie about J mile to tiie southward of Zarza Point, and
a reef extends off them about a mile. Within the cays there is good
shelter for small vessels in 3 fathoms, over a clay bottom. To tlie west-
ward of Zarza Point is the creek of the same name, with a depth of 6
feet water, where small coasters find shelter from SE. winds.

Port Tanas, between Zarza Point and (Janey Point, is a small bay
with a depth of from 2f to 4^ fathoms, with a bottom of clay and weeds.
Port Tunas is the seaport of the town of Sancti Spiritu, with which it
is connected by a railroad.

Vessels bound to Tunas will find the Trinidad Range of mountains,
wliich can be seen for a distance of 30 miles, a good Laudmiirk; also,
the range of mountains to the eastward, separated from the Trinidad
Bange by low land.

When the eastern mountain, known as Loma de Banao, bears !N^. 8^ B,
(S. 5° E. mag.) it may be steered for, and the bank entered upon in 6
fathoms of water, 5 miles from Zarza de Fuera Cay and 8 miles from
Marchas de Fuera Gay.

These cays are on the bank, are both low and covered with small
trees and mangroves, and can be seen 8 or 10 miles.

The bank is clear of danger to within 4 miles of the southern or Zarza
de Fuera Cay, and to within 2 miles of Marchas de Fuera Cay.

The soundings on the bank will be at first 6 and 7 fathoms, and then
6, 4, 6, 8, and 10 fathoms will be obtained, followed by a decrease to 5
and 4 fathoms until the port is reached. As the land is neared the har-
bor will be recognized by Blanco Zarza Cay, which lies to the westward
of it, and the tall chimneys of the sugar mill on the coast eastward of
the port.

Blanco Zarza Cay, lying IJ miles to tha southward of Cauey Point,
is a small islet, with a lagoon in the center, covered with ti^ees, and hav-
ing a white sandy beach. A few huts are on the eastern end, where it is
said pilots may be procured. It is foul SW. for a mile, SE. f mile, and

, BLANCO ZARZA CAY TIEKRA CAYS 177

NB. nearly a mile, leaving a passage between it and the shore J mile
wide, with a depth of 3 fathoms. The cay lies about 8 miles NNW. of
Zarza de Fuera Cay, and between them the depth is from 6 to 10
&thoms; but near the edge of the bank there is an isolated 8i)ot with
4 fathoms, within which a vessel will find good anchorage.

The cay makes two channels^ both of which appear to be easy to navi-
gate. The one to the northward of the island is the better, the deepest
water being midway between the island and the mainland. Boats
sounding in this cliannel got no less than 3 fathoms, and information
was obtaided from the captain of the port and from the captains of
trading vessels that this depth is carried by all who know the channel.

If pilots can not be obtained, strangers will find it advisable to send
boats ahead t(i sound the channel.

Three miles N. 64^ W. (N. 67^ W. mag.) of Zarza Point is Oaney
Point, to the westward of which is a small creek with 6 feet water, and
(> miles farther to leeward is Ciego Point. In the bay between them
these are from 3 to 5 fathoms water; and near the center is the Eiver
Tallabacoa, which has very little water in the dry season. Half a mile
westward of Ciego Point is that of Iguanojo, with a ledge running off it
for i mile.

Water. — There is a brook of good water a little westward of the River
Tallabaeoa. It will also be found fresh and fit for drinking about 3
miles above the mouth of the Iguanojo.

Tierra Cays. — From the River Iguanojo the. shore takes a TVIs^W.
direction 4 miles, and then turns abruptly to the southward for 2 miles
to Agabama Point. From the latter a narrow ledge extends off 6 miles
to the SE., leaving between it and the Iguanojo, on the opposite shore,
a deej^ bight called St. Pedro, in which there are from 3J to 6 fathoms
water, clay bottom.

From Agabama Point the Tierra Cays extend out to the distance of J
mile; and 2^ miles SSE. of these, and 2 J miles from the edge of the
ledge, is Machos de Fuera Cay, having a reef extending from one to two
miles eastward of it. At Agabama Point the river of the same name
runs into tlie sea, but the water is not good until 18 miles from its
mouth. The coast from Agabama Point as far as Casilda Point is cov-
ered with mangroves, very low and swamp}"; and from the latter to
Guaurabo Point (or River) is of sand and steep rock.

Sierras de Sancti Spiritu are some high mountains 10 miles inland.
Two of tlie peaks higher than the rest serve as useful landmarks. The
northeasterly of these is called the Pan de Azucar, and maybe recog-
nized easily by its flattened summit. Loma de Banao, the other peak,
lies 4 miles 8. 45^ W. (S. 42^ W. mag.) of the Pan de Azucar. Four
miles N. 20^ W. (X. 23^ W. mag.) of the City of Trinidad is another
remarkable peak, called Pico del Potrerillo, which is visible 60 miles,
also an excellent landmark.
18402 12

178 CUBA — SOUTH COAST,

The City of Trinidad is one of the most important on the south side
of Cuba, having a population of 13,000. It is situated on high land, 3
miles from the sea, and^ about i mile from the left bank of the Elver
Guaurabo, which is navigable only for boats. Imports and exports are
landed and shipp^ at the harbors of Gasilda and Masio, the former
lying 2^ miles and the latter 4^ miles from the town.

The town lies on the slope of a remarkable saddle-shaped mountain,
and in approaching from seaward a church, 700 feet above the sea, is a
conspicuous object. When the mountain behind the town is seen from
the west or SW. it has the shape of a gun quoin, and can be seen at a
distance of 30 miles.

There are no tugboats; the cargo is landed by lighters.

The United States is represented by a consular agent.

Port Charges. — ^The pilotage depends on size and rig. Bark or three-
masted schooner, $32; brig or schooner, $26;* customhouse fees, in and
out, about $8; interpreter's fees, about $4; bill of health, $2.50; light-
erage on coal, $1 per ton; discharging ballast, 75 cents per ton; labor,
$1.50 per day; tonnage dues and general regulations are the same for
all ports of Cuba. Goal can be had for $8.50 to $9 per fbn; there is
generally about 900 tons on hand.

Ports of Trinidad. — From Agamaba Point to Maria Aguilar Point,
9 miles N. 76o W. (N. 79° W. mag.) of it, and 3 J miles SSB. of the mouth
of the Guaurabo, the shore is deeply indented, forming four small inlets.
Jobabo Bay, the easternmost, is only lit for coasters; Gaballones, the
next, has a depth of from 3 to 4 fathoms; Port Masio has a greater
depth than the others; and Port Gasilda, the westernmost, has from 2f
to 4 fathoms, muddy bottom. The shore is skirted by numerous cays,
reefs, and banks, to the distance of from 2 to 3 miles, and the channels,
although deep, are so intricate that a pilot is absolutely necessary.
The weathermost channel lies between Machos de Fuera Gay and a
small narrow ledge about i mile to the westward of it, and has a depth
of 3 fathoms, but it is by no means to be recommended, and the sand
banks are not stationary.

At 2J miles to the westward of Machos Gay is Puga Gay, almost level
with the sea, which sometimes breaks over it. Tall mangrove trees
have grown on this cay, rendering it somewhat conspicuous.

Blanco Cay. — The shores of this cay, as its name imports, are formed
of white rock and sand. It is a small low islet, 22 feet high, covered
with trees aud with a lagoon in its center. When seen from the south-
westward this cay seems wedge-shaped, the higher part being to the
southeastward. In case of having to wait for a pilot, as is probable,
anchorage in 9J fathoms may be had with the city of Trinidad bearing
K 340 W. (K 370 W. mag.) and Blanco Gay bearing K 48o E. (N. 45©
E. mag.) distant one mile. Before anchoring a clear spot should be
selected.

If bound for Trinidad, after passing Zarza de Fuera Cay, instead of

PORT MASIO PORT CASILDA. 179

entering on the bank of soundings, steer about N. 23° W. (N. 26^ W.
mag.) and after sighting Machos de Fuera Gay, keep away IST. 65^ W.
(S. 68^ W, mag.) for Blanco Cay. When the Pan de Azucar is on with
the-Loma de Banao, Machos de Fuera Gay will bear north (N. 3^ W.
mag.) The knowledge of this fact may assist a stranger to recognize
the land.

To seaward these reefs are steep-to, and 5 fathoms will be foond close
up to Blanco Gay, but' a reef extends 600 yards from' its western ex-
tremity, which may be safely rounded by tlie eye, and anchorage and
good shelter found in 3 fathoms to the KW. of the cay. There is no
safe opening westward, except for coasters drawing under 12 feet.

Port Masio, of the ports of Trinidad, will be found the most con-
venient for a sailing vessel, as it can be entered and left with the pre-
vailing winds. Neither this harbor, nor Port Oasilda, is suitable for
vessels drawing more than 15 or 16 feet. For larger vessels the best
anchorage will be found in from 3 to 4 fathoms of water, with Blanco
Gay bearing S. 82o W. (S. 79© W. mag.) and Puga Gay S. 8^ E. (8. 11^
E. mag.).

In entering either port the shoals, in clear weather, can generally be
seen from aloft. To enter Port Masio take the channel between Blanco
Gay and the reef off Puga Gay. The eastern end of the former cay
should be passed at 4 niile distance. After passing these cays, if obliged
to wait for a pilot, good anchorage will be found, with Blanco Gay bear-
ing N. 87^ W. (west mag.) in 3 or 4 fathoms of water.

If intending to proceed without a pilot bring the southern end of
Blanco Gay to bear west (S. 87<^ W. mag.) and the middle of Puga Cay
to bear S. 34^ B. (S. 37^ E. mag.) and from this point steer N. 40° W.
(S. 430 W. mag.). This will lead between the ledge off the NE. end of
Blanco Gay, on the port hand, and Gascsgal Beef nearly awash on the
starboard hand.

Jobabo Point may be known by a sandy beach on it, and as soon as
it bears north (N. 3^ W. mag.) haul up N. 20© W. (K 23° W. mag.)
steering for the western point of entrance of Port Masio, avoiding by
the eye the shoals on either side. In standing in toward the middle of
the harbor it is only necessary to keep elear of a shoal extending from
the landing place on the west side. In standing in for Port Masio, the
small bays of Jobabo and Caballones will be left on the starboard hand.
To enter these bays it is only necessary to keep half way between the
points of entrance, anchoring in 2 J or 3 fathoms of water, mud bottom.

Port Casilda — There are three channels: The first east of Blanco
Gay; second, west of the same cay; and the third, the Mulatas Ghan-
nel, close to the eastward reef of that name.

Merchant vessels are obliged to take a pilot at Blanco Gay. If not
able to obtain a pilot, a boat should be sent ahead to sound before
attempting any of the passages. '

The Anchorage is in from 16. to 25 feet of water, mud bottom,

180 CUBA SOUTH COAST.

Caution. — The stakes marking the channel are frequently changea
by the pilots, to keep strangers from learning the pilotage.

Mulatas Channel is shorter than the one just described, and it is
said to have a depth of 15 feet, but the aid of a pilot is necessary. •

Casilda Harbor is only 800 yards Tvide, and although it is 2 miles
nearer Trinidad than Port Masio a vessel will have to send to the
Gnaurabo River for water. There are other channels leading to Oasilda,
but they are somewhat foul, and there are no good leading marks for
them. The assistance of a pilot is therefore necessary.

A vessel proceeding to this port slL^uld obtain a pilot at Blanco Oay,*
as the approaches from seaward are narrow and tortuous. If it should
be necessary to heave-to outside for a pilot, the port should not be
brought to the eastward of !N". 70^ E. (N. 67° E. mag.) in order to avoid
the Mulatas Reefs, extending to the westward of the port.

Tugboats can generally be obtained to assist vessels in calms and
light head winds.

CoaL — A small supply may be obtained at times.

Tides. — The tides in the channels run to the 8W. and NE., with a
strength of J mile an hour, rising and falling IJ feet, but after a SB.
wind the rise and fall is 3 feet.

Guaurabo Anchorage. — If it is only desired to communicate with
the town of Trinidad, a conveniently accessible anchorage will be found
at the mouth of the River Guaurabo, 3 miles to the westward of the town.
This anchorage is, however, entirely open to the SW. To enter it, keep
on to the !XW., past the entrance to the Mulatas Channel, and, after
hauling around Point Maria Aguilar, keej) close along the shore till the
town bears about east, when the bay will open out. Cirioles Point, the
southern limit of the bay, should be x)assed at a distance of 300 yards,
and a good berth will be found in 8 fathoms with this point bearing
S. 30 W. (south mag.).

Although the bay appears roomy, there is only room for one vessel,
the bottom being strewed with rocks, on some of which there is only 6
feet of water. This place will be found a convenient anchorage for
oomniunicating with Trinidad, as it will be only necessary to pull 3
miles up the river as far as a bridge which lies only f inile from town.

Paz Bank is pear shaped, 10 miles long in a WN W. and ESE. diiee-
tion, and 34 miles wide at its broad end, which is to the eastward; this
part is sandy, and iii moderate weather a vessel may anchor on it.
The general depth on the bank is from 12 to 20 fathoms, and towards
the NW. end it is rocrky.

The Coast from tlie River Guaurabo runs about W. by X. for 8 miles
to Muiio Point, west of the River Hondo; thence a little more northerly
for 9 miles farther to San Juan Point, one mile beyond which is the
mouth of the River Guayximico. It is of steep rocky cliffs, and the
land mountainous as far as a little westward of San Juan Point, where
the chain named Trinidad terminates.* It is all along clear of danger

PORT XAGUA OR CIEXFUEGO.S. 181

with the exception of a reef extending off less than J mile, between the
mouths of the Eivers Yagnanabo and San Jnan, and may be approached
to a dista.nce of 3 miles. Between are the Rivers Guanayara, Cabagan,
Hondo, Yaguanabo, and San Juan, which coasters of 6 feet draft can
enter. Water may be obtained from these rivers about 3 miles up.

From the Uuayximico the coast trends northwestward for 14 miles to
Oolorados Point, which may be approached to the distance of 100 yards.
The land is flat, and, between, the Rivers Gavilan, Gavilancito, and Ari-
mao run into the sea, but they are of no importance. From Port
Xagua the coast runs nearly west for 21 miles to Galeta Buena (Good
Cove), l*oint thence it trends a little northward for 7 miles farther to
Oriental, the east point of Cochinos Bay.

Port Xagua or Cienfaegos is quite secure in all winds, with a depth
sufficient for vessels of the heaviest draft; but its channel is so narrow
and tortuous and the tides are so strong that it is very diffcult to nav-
igate. The entrance, between Oolorados Point on the east and Saban-
illa or Vigia Point on the west, is 1 J mile wWe (tha bank fringing the
coast on tlie western side of entrance to this port extends from the shore
about 2(K) yards, at midway between Sabanilla Point and Angeles
Castle); but 2 miles within, between Pasacaballos and Angeles Points,
it is narrowed to little more than 200 yards ac*Toss, and here takes a
sharp turn from N W. to NNE., carrying the same breailth for f mile to
Milpa Point on the east, at the inner end of the channel, when it opens
out into a large harbor.

Town. — ^The town of Ferdinanda de Xagua, or Cienfuegos, is built on
a peninsula on the eastern side of the bay. Population, 23,000. This
peninsula separates two large bays, each affording excellent anchorage.

Vessels discharge into lighters till their draft is redu(?ed to 14 feet,
when they can haul alongside of the wharf.

The sanitary condition is good, the city being clean. There is a
health officer, who boards all vessels. Quarantine is not very strict and
rarely lasts more than a day or two. The public hospital is under
government control and ac(!omuio(lates 250 patients. Foreigners are
charged $2 per day. A doctor is in charge, assisted by a corps of
trained nurses. There is also a small private hospital.

The United States is represented by a consul and vice-consul. Au-
thorities to visit are the military governor and captain of the port.

Light. — On Colorados Point, from a tower 45 feet high, a fixed and
flashing light, every 2 minutes, is shown, visible 14 miles.

Supplies. — The market for fresh provisions is good and the price
fair, large quantities of salt provisions being kept on hand.

River water can be obtained from wtiter boats, 1^ cents a gallon.
Then^ aii* pipes at the wharves, where water can be obtained by boats.

Coal. — There is an extensive coal yard, where a large supply of coal
is kept at a cost of 88 to 88.75 per ton. Small vessels can coal at the
wharf; large vessels lie almost i mile off.

182 CUBA SOUTH COAST.

DookB. — ^Tliere are two slips, where vessels 200 feet long, drawing 8
feet forward, 12 feet aft, may be liauled up. Also two uiacliine shops,
where steaniers may repair.

Steamers. — Ward's line from United States call twice a month dur-
ing the busy season, and once a month during the rest of the year.
Atkins line from Boston call once a month, only during the busy sea-
son; also coast line, Spanish.

Telegraph. — A land line to Havana; also a cable— the West India
Telegraph Company.

Mail is received twice a month bj' steamer and twice a week by rail
from Havana. A railroad runs between this place and Havana.

Pilots are under the control of the cai)tain of the port and are re-
liable. Pilotage is compulsory, except to vessels under 80 tons. Ves-
sels coming into port or going out at night between sunset and one
hour before sunrise pay double pilotage. Pilotage fees on foreign ves-
sels in and out: For vessels of from 81 to 100 tons, 811 (Spanish gold);
101 to 150, $13; 151'to 20C, $14; 201 to 250, 815; 251 to 300, 817; 301
to 350, 819; ;S51 to 400, $21; 401 to 450, 823; and for each additional 50
tons up to 4,501 tons, 81. For vessels of from 4,501 to 5,000 tons, $38;
over 5,000 tons, 840. For removals in the harbor from anchorages tp
moles or between moles, the pilotage varies /rom J to § of the actual
pilotage for coming in and going out.

Mooring and unmooring on all foreign vessels exceeding 80 tons is
comimlsory and varies from 87J cents on 100 tons to 83.15 (Spanish
gold) on 5,001 tons and over.

Towage. — For vessels of from 100 to 200 tons, 830 (Spanish gold),
and 810 for each additional 100 tons or fraction thereof.

The charges on a vessel of 300 tons is: Pilotage, 842; towage, 8100;
watchman, 83; interpreter, 82. Vessels of more than 500 tons pay 84
for watc'hman.

Directions. — In entering the harbor of Cienfuegos give the shore
east of Colorados point a berth of one mile, but the point itself may be
passed within 500 yards. Then keep in mid-channel all the way to
where the shores separate to form the bay. The eastern interior point
is called Point Milpa, and off it a spit extends for J mile, with 8 feet of
water on it. Xorth of Point Milpa is the bank of the same name, to
avoid which steer for the SK. end of Carenas Cay as soon as Milpa Point
is abeam. When the north point of Alcatraz Gay bears east (N. 86^
E mag.), Milpa Bank is passed, and the vessel may anchor, if desira-
ble, in 7 or 10 fathoms of water.

If intending to proceed farther, Carenas Cay should be paSvSed on the
starboard hand, as a long spit connects it with the northern shore.
The assistance of a iiilot will be necessary, as, although the edges of the
banks or shoal are generally marked by stakes or buoys, tliey are liable
to be changed and cannot be depended upon.

Tides. — It is high water, fall and change, at Port Xagua, at 4h. 57m.,
and the rise is 2 feet.

XAGUA BANK — PIEDRAS REEF. 183

Cantion. — As the current runs about three knots, vessels going with
the tide must be particularly careful, in rounding Pasacaballos Pointy
as they are apt to be swept on tlie opposite shore. The banks are re-
ported as extending.

Xagna Bank is of coral formation, 3 miles in length, east and west^
and about 2 in breadth; at its NE. end there is a shoal patch with only
2 fiftthoms water on it. The northern edge of the bank is steep-to,
shoaling suddenly from no bottom with 30 fathoms line to 12 fathoms^
and then to 4 fathoms, which depth is near the shoal patch, making it
at all times dangerous when approaching from the northward; whereas
when nearing it from the southward the discolored water will not only
be seen, but the soundings will decnease gradually from 17 to 9 fathoms,
which is the least depth a vessel should stand into. The bottom is
hard, and not good holding ground. From the shoal patch, the peak
of St. Juan bears N. 49© E. (N. 45^ E. mag.)

Cochinoa Bay. — The eastern shoi'e is formed by soboruco rocks and
steep-to. Half a mile from the northern extremity of tlie bay there are
14^ fathoms of water, with a bottom of rock and sand, the depth rapidly
diminishing toward the beach. On the western shore there axe sand-
beaches, with a narrow bank of soundings and rocky bottom. In the
northern part of the bay there is a landing place, but no good anchor-
age, as the bottom is rocky.

The Golf of Batabano, between Padre Point and Mangle Point, a
distance of 160 ndles, is bordered on the south side by the Bank of the
Jardmes and Jardinillos, the Isle of Pines, and the islands known as the
Ma]igles, Indian and San Felipe Groups. To the northward of these
groups are almost innumerable cays and sand banks, as yet very imper-
fectly known and forming numerous and intricate channels. To navi-
gate these channels and to identify the cays used as landmarks local
knowledge is positively necessary. The principal channels leading
to the road of Batabano are: From the eastward, the Gordas Channel,
between the mainland and the Juan Luis Cays; from the southward, the
Bosario Channel, along the western edge of the Jardinillos Bank ; and
from the 8W. the channel between the Isle of Pines and the Indian
Gays, between the Indian and San Felipe Cays, and between the latter
group and the mainland.

Pilots and masters of steamships running constantly to Batabano
have asserted that vessels drawing 11 feet can go there with safety.

Pilots may be obtained at Cienfuegos or at the Isle of Pines.

Piedraa Reef and Cay. — From Padre Point, which is low, a coral
reef extends SE. for nearly seven miles, where it terminates at Piedras
Cay, which is small and low. The reef is steep-to and has several
narrow cuts leading onto the bank, through which 15 to 22 feet may
be carried. The best channel is just to the northw^ard of the cay, but
as nothing would be gained it will be better always to pass outside
the cay. The edge of the bank takes a W. ^ X. direction, and 13 miles

184 CUBA SOUTH COAST.

from the cay is Las Lavauderas shoal, which is 2 miles iu length, and
lies IJ miles southward of tlie east end of Blanco Cay.

The shore from Padre Poiut westward, as far as Cristobal Point, a
distance of 35 miles, is very low, swampy, and skirted by numerous man-
grove cays. Blanco Cay, the largest; of these, is 10 miles long ESE. and
WXW., and its west end is 15 miles from Padre Point. The south
shore of this cay is of sand, and at the east end water may be obtained
by digging wells.

Light. — On the northern part of Piedras Cay, a fixed white light is
exhibited from above the keeper's dwelling, which is brown; it is 28
feet above the sea, and may be seen in clear weather 9 miles.

Cazones Bay. — The shore from abreast the west end of Blanco Cay
recedes, forming a large bight in a ^W. by W. direction, 7 miles deep^
named Cazones Bay, which is shallow. The western side is formed by
low mangrove cays terminating in Diego Perez Cay, 6 mUes west of
Blanco Cay. On the northerm end of Diego Perez Cay there are some
natuial wells of good water. Fish and game are abundant.

G-olf of Cazones, between the NE. edge of the Jardinillos Bank on
the south, and Piedras and other cays and reefs on the north, is danger-
ous for sailing vessels to cross, as they will be liable to calms and cross
currents.

Diego Perez Channel. — Between the south end of Diego Perez Cay
and the north end of the Jardinillos Bank is a channel carrying 10 feet
water, which leads to the bank westward and to Batobano. About 2
miles WSW. of the south point of Diego Perez Cay is the south end of
Flamenco Cay, and thence a chain of low cays ranges in a WNW. di-
rection for 12^ miles, becoming nearly connei^ted to the shore at Cristo-
bal Point. The water between the cays is shallow.

Light. — A light is exhibited from a lightvessel placed southeastward
of Diego Perez Cay. The light is fixeil white, 43 feet above the sea,
and should be seen 12 miles; the vessel is painted bla<;k, with a white
streak, and Diego Perez painted on her sides. Vessels entering Cazones
Bay should leave the lightvessel on the port hand. Those proceeding
to the westward should leave her on the starboard hand.

Bonito, Cacao, and Falanca Cays, the most southern of this chain^
are the guides for vessels through the channel, which has not more than
10 feet water, fine white sand, but there are scattered patches of rock
easily seen, with less than 6 feet on them. The south side of the chan-
nel is here bounded by the north extreme of the Jardinillos Bank and
the Rabihon^ado Cay.

Fibrica and Cristobal Q-roups. — Palanea Cay, wliich is rather more
than 12J miles WXVV. of Flamenco Cay, is followed by the Fabrica
6roui3, which connect themselves with the shore to the XE. and form a
channel with the chain of the Cristobal Group westward of them.

Cristobal Point lies !N^!yW. 6 miles from Palanea Cay. From this
point t\\e low swampy coast trends nearly WXW. for about 20 miles to
the small (!ay at the entrance to the little bay of Malahanibre.

JUAN LUIS CAYS BATABANO. 185

Juan Lnis Cays.^— This part of the coast is knowu as the sabauas, or
plains, of Juan Luis; and off it^ at a distance of from 5 to 7 miles, is a
chain of man/^ove cays and sand banks of the same name. Vessels
under 9 feet draft can pass between them and the coast^ and also be-
tween them and the western cays of Cristobal. About 4 miles NW. of
Malahambre Cay is Gorda Point; the intervening land is marshy^ cov-
ered with a herb called masio, and there are some palms a short distance
inland. There are numerous channels for small vessels among the
numerous cays along this coast and between them and the shore^ but
there are no leading marks which a stranger could recognize, nor does
any intelligible and accurate information regarding them exist. Tlie
numerous large steamers running along the south coast of Cuba from
Batabano to Cienfuegos and Santiago de Cuba are all Airnished with
skillful pilots, but no general information can be procured from them
resx)ecting the navigation.

Broa Bay. — From Gorda Point the shore takes a NNE. and ]^E.
direction for a short distance, and then trends to the eastward for about
14 miles, when it bends round to the north and XW., forming the bay
of Broa, which, between Gorda and Mayabeque Points, northward of
it, is 16 miles wide, and carries a depth of from 3 to 4 fathoms. The
shores of this bay are submerged and covered with mangroves; at its
head the Biver Jatibonico empties itself, and on the north shore several
others- run into the sea.

At 11 miles to the NW. of the Biver Jatibonico is the loading place of
Oaunito, which is much frequented. There are 13 feet water, mud, a
long i mile south of the pier. At 8 miles westward of the pier is the
loading place of Rosario, which has a tower and also a pier, and ^ mile
south of the latter there are 11 feet water, mud. Both these anchorages
afford shelter at all times except in*the season of the 8E. winds.

T^ater. — At 4 miles WSW. of Rosario is Mayabeque Point; and IJ
miles NW. of it is the mouth of the River Mayabeque, where there is
always good water.

Batabano is 9 miles to the westward of the River Mayabeque and is
a place of constantly growing importance, as the port through which
nearlv all the cominuuication of Havana with the southern coast of the
Island takes place. A railway runs to Havana, time two hours, and the
submarine telegraph cable is here cimnected with Havana by land lines.

The channels leading to tins port only admit the passage of vessels
drawing 12 or 13 feet of wati^r, and the anchorage is entirely exposed to
8E. winds. There are but few scattered buildings on the shore, the
town of Batabano lying 3 miles inland.

Lights. — A fixed white light is shown from a mast and is visible 4
miles. At the end of the railroad company's dock is another light^
fixed white, visible 6 miles.

Cayamas Point. — From Batabano the coast runs westward for 15
miles to Cayamas Point; between are Cagio Point and River, where the

186 CUBA SOUTH COAST.

vessels at Batabano often obtain water. This river empties 'itself
through the marshes, and the anchorage off it, with 2J and 2J fathoms
water, is sheltered from all winds by the chain of cays in front of it.
The marshy ground from the mouth of the river to the firm land is more
extensive than that between Batabano and Mayabeque, yet its environs
are more cultivated.

Batabano Channels. — Gayamas Point forms with the chain of cays
southwjird of it the channel of the same name, in which there are only
6J feet water. These cays run in a SSE. direction for 11 miles, where
they form, with another chain extending 13 miles eastward, the channel
of Hacha, with 7J feet water in it, which is much frequented by smaU
vessels leaving Batabano or proceeding to it westward of the Isle of
Pines and San Felipe Cays.

Cruz Cay, the east/cm of the latter chain, lies nearly S. 10^ B. (S. 14^
E. mag.), 16 miles from Batabano, and at a little distance westward of
it is Eedondo Cay, under tlie le^ of which small vessels find shelter from
the strong 8E. winds, from July until October, to which the whole coast
is exposed.

At 6 miles southward of Cruz Cay is Monterey Cay, forming a chan-
nel between with 2^ fathoms water, mud bottom. This channel is the
widest of these which afford a passage to vessels to or from Caimito,
Eosario, and Batabano. From Monterey a ridge of rocks extends to the -
SW. for 8 miles. When westward of this reef, the several heads of rocks
southward of the cays on the north side of the channel should be
avoided.

Directions to Batabano. — If bound to Batabano through the Gulf
of Cazones, steer up the gulf so as to make Diego Perez Cay on the
port bow. Skirt the reef until the south part of this cay bears about
N. 750 W. (N. 790 W. mag.), when a vessel may haul round the dry
point of the reef and steer for the south part of the cay, and with a
good lookout she will not have less than 10 feet wat^r. Give the end
of Diego Perez Cay a berth of about f mile, leaving the lightvessel
on the starboard hand, and the water will deepen to 2 and 3 fathoms,
but with an irregular bottom and rocks in all' directions. When
abreast of Diego Perez steer to pass 600 yards from Flamenco Cay; a
greater distance off is unsafe.

After passing Flamenco Cay, steer to pass midway between Eabi-
horcado Cay on the port bow, and Bonito Cay and the rest of the range
of cays on the starboard. A depth of 3 and 4 fathoms will be carried
on this course, but when abreast of Rabihorcado the water will rapidly
shoal to 9 feet, over a white, sandy bottom and occasional patches of
rock which are easily distinguished. The latter depth will be carried
for about 12 miles, on a ]!T. 86^ W. ( west mag.) course, when it will
gradually deepen to 2 J and 3 fathoms, with the same white bottom and
pat<*hes of rocks.

Qordas Channel. — In a vessel of not more than 8 feet draft, this

GORDAS CHANNEL — MAJANA BAY. 187

ehannel may be advantageously taken, in preference to going round the
rocky spit which projects 7 or 8 miles to the southward from Monterey
Cay. To enter this channel, when the south end of Ambar Cay on the
irw. side of the channel bears K. 41^ W. (K 46° W. mag.)? distant f
mile, steer about i^. 26^ E. (N. 22° B. mag.), keeping Ambar Cay about
J mile on the port hand, and taking the precaution of having a boat
sounding ahead, so as not to come into a less depth than 9 fe^t, soft
mud.

The water will soon deepen to 2 and 2^ fathoms, and a course can be
shaped for Batabano. Give Cruz Cay a wide berth in passing, as the
depths near it are not known. There are no dangers between Gorda
Point and Batabano, but regular soundings of 2^ and 3 fathoms;- the
distance, however, 19 miles, appears to be over represented on the
charts, and at night not more than 12 miles slionld be allowed as the
run between.

Towards Batabano the soundings will decrease slowly and regularly.
The anchorage is open to the southward, and may be recognized bj' a
pier projecting about 400 yards from the mangrove shore. At 200 yards
from the pier head the depth is 10 feet.

Hacha ChaxineL — Bound to Batabano from the westward of the Isle
of Pines, from a position 2 miles westward of Dies Cay, in 2J fathoms
water, steer F. 38^ E. (N. 34^ E. mag.) carrying about 3 fathoms, until
the Guanima Cays are sighted, which, with all the cays in their locality,
are so exceeedingly low as to often cause great perplexity. When
these cays are made out, the water will shoal to 2^ fathoms, when steer
N. 710 E. (N. 670 E. mag.) until 2 or 3 miles northward of the Peta-
tillos Bank, which runs east and west. Run ahmg this shoal at that
distance, carrying 2J and 3 fathoms, until Culebra Cay bears S. 38^ W,
(8. 34P W, mag.) when the Hacha Channel will open out, bearing N.
380 E. (X. 340 E. mag.).

Steer directly for the passage, and in running through take care to
avoid the mud bank on its eastern side; navigate it with a boat ahead,
keeping nearer the western shore than the eastern, and 9 feet will be
carrie<l over soft mud. When clear of the channel, a course can be
shaped ior Batabano.

M^jana Bay and Sabana-la-mar.— From .Cayamas Point the
shore takes a W. ^ N. direction for 9 miles, when it trends to tlie SW.
for 8 miles to Point Salinas, forming Majana Bay. The Kiver Guanima
empties itself westward of Cayamas Point, and about here the marshes
terminate. From Salinas I*oint the coast trends SW. 6 miles to Cap-
itana Point, and then about SSW. 4 miles to the small creek ot Saba-
na-la-ntar, which affords shelter to droghers, near the mouth of the
Cristobal River.

The Coast from the entrance to Sabana-la-mar runs nearly SW. by
W. for 6 miles, to the entrance of the River Rancho, and then S. by W.
11 miles to Carraguco Point; in this spjice are the creeks or inlets of

188 CUBA SOUTH COAST.

Guasimal, Bacunagua, and others of little importance 5 off this part of
the coast shoal water extends for nearly 7 miles. About 6 miles west
of Carragiico Point is the entrance to the River San Diego, and 4 miles
SSW. of the latter is Gato Point, near which the Rivers Convento and
Hondo join the sea, forming inlets. About 5 miles SW. of Gato Pohit
is Gaspas Point, and 8 miles farther is Fisga Point, off which a shoal
of 3i fathoms extends southward about 3 miles.

Calonna Point and River. — From Fisga Point the marshy shore
trends WNW. 4 miles to Calonna Point, and then about NW. 4 miles,
forming a bay, at the head of which the liiver Calonna emi)ties itself.

From the former i)oint a reef skirts the shore, the southern edge of
which is IJ miles off Calonna Point; 2 miles westward it forms a chan-
nel H fathoms deep, by which the mouth of the Calonna is reached,
one of the loading places of Pindr del Rio. From the Calonna River
the coast runs about SSW. 4 miles and then W. by S. 4 more to St.
Domingo Point, and thence west 9 miles t<) the mouth of the River
Galafre.

Cortes Bay. — From the mouth of the Galafre the coast trends
SSW. 7 miles to the entrance of the River Cuyaguategc. About 4 miles
southward of the latter are tour small cays, which extend 2^ miles in a
southerly direc^tion, covering tlie mouth of a deei) bay, called the Laguna
de Cortes. In this lagoon there are 2^ fathoms water, but at the nar-
row entrances formed by the cays there are only 6 feet. Turtle are
found on the cays. Piedraa Point, which is on the parallel of San
Felipe Cays and dist«.nt from them about 19 miles, is the termination
of Cortes Bay, where there are from 3 to 3f fathoms water over weeds.

Mangle Point — A rocky ledge extends off Piedras Point for some
distance, having 15 feet water on it, and near the point are some rocks
on which the sea breaks; at 2 J miles S. 24^ E. (S. 28^ E. mag.) of the
point the depths increase to 5 fathoms, rocky bottom. From Piedras
Point, the coast, bordered by a bank, trends SSW. for 8 miles to Cape
Frances, and thence SW. by W. 5 miles to Mangle Point. This x>oint
is low, and there is nothing to mark it except the bend of the coast
and a tishernian's hut west of it on a small sfindy beach. It is skirted
by a reef which extends off 400 yards, and is steep-to.

Before i)roceeding farther with the description of the coast we will
give a general description of the shoals, cays, et<i., lying south of Bata-
bano.

It is but very seldom that a man-of-war or a merchant vessel needs
any description of this neighborhood, and it must be remembered that
no correct and complete survey has ever been made here.

Bank of the Jardines and Jardinillos. — The XE. part of the reet
which encircles the great bank and cays of the Jardines commences south-
eastward of Diego Perez Cay, and running to the SE. forms an inward
curve at the Medano Vizcaino Cay, and thence continues to the eastern
cay of the bank: this side of the bank is 8teei)-to, studded with rocka

EAST GUANO CAY — ^JACK TAYLOR REEF. 189

aul small patches of sand jiwt awash, with no opening. The mariner
U again warned that the current in the Q-ulf of Oazonesis uncertain^
botli in strength and direction, and he can not be too cautious.

East Onano Cay is of sobomco, about 40 feet high, the east end
covered with grass, dwarf cactus, and shrubs; elsewhere the ground is
rough, with deep pits from the excavations for guano. A small rock
lies about 200 yards from the east end of the cay, and shallow uneven
ground extends J mile K 71° E. (K 67o E. mag.) from it. The bank,
about 5 miles in breadth, extends in an ESE. direction from the cay,
and tenninates about 11 miles from it, where there are 14 fathoms
water. From this depth the soundings gradually decrease towards the
cay, with a bottom of coral, sand, and weed.

From East Guano Cay the edge of the Jardines Bank runs to the
westward for 12 miles to Trabuco Oay. Thence the cays continue to
Largo Cay, 13 miles to the westward, and are generally of rock, high
and steep, and lie near the edge of the bank, which is skirted by a
chain of reefs.

Largo Cay, 12 miles in length, is the most eastern of the Jardines,
which name comprises all the cays between it and Isle of Pines. It is
uniform, about 50 feet high, thickly wooded, and on its south side is a
sandy shore, bordered by a reef which at its east end extends more than
a mile oflF. About 5 miles S. 15^ W. (8. 11° W. mag.) of the NE. point
lies a dangerous reef about 3 miles from the shore, and just within the
edge of the bank, on which the sea breaks. The reef which skirts the
south side of this cay runs about W. by S. for 12 miles, and then trends
to the southward for about 6 miles, forming a spit nearly 2 miles wide,
at the outer extreme of which is supposed to lie Jack Taylor Shoal.
From the northern end of the spit the main reef continues to the west-
ward for 5 miles, as far as Eosario Channel, with deep water close to
'tiie southward of it.

On the above reef are the two small rocky Ballenatos Cays, barren,
white, and about the same height. They are about 3 miles apart, and
the eastern one lies about a mile from the west end of Largo Cay.
There is said to be anchorage in 7 to 10 fatlioms water northward of
them.

Between East Guano Cay and Kosarlo Channel the bank does not
extend more than between one and 2 miles southward of the cays (except
at the Jack Taylor Reef) with 16 to 13 fathoms water, rocky bottom,
and the soundings diminish rapidly to the reef.

Jack Taylor Reef. — Several positions have been assigned to tliis
dangerous shoal. Commander 11. 1). Grant, of H. M. S. Steady, in
April, 1863, fixed the position of the reef in latitude 21^ 2S' N". and
longitude 81^ 47' 30" W. From 12^ fathoms water, corjil and sand,
the soundings decrease regularly to the reef, which is of coral. From
the masthead the white water may be seen running in like a spit until
it joins the main bank. The Caiman fishermen say there are 5 and 6
fathoms water all over this spit.

W--

' t

190 CUBA SOUTH COAST.

RoBario Cay, when first seen from the southward, has the appear-
ance of three small islands, the largest being in the center. As it is
approached some sand cliffs will be observed, by which it will be known
from those in the immediate neighborhood. The shore of Largo Cay
on the east, and that of Oantiles Oays to the west, are wooded.

RoBario Channel — ^Between the west end of Eosario Gay aud Can-
tiles Gay there is a channel through the reefs; but at its inner end, to
the westward of the Passage Oays, there are only 9 f<^et water. The
ox>ening in the reef leading into this channel lies southward of the west
end of Bosario, and is ^ mile wide. It is steep at the sides, and in the
middle, the depth is three fathoms; i mile from the north point there
is a rock which shows above water.

Tides. — ^The rise of tide in Bosario Ghannel is about 2 or 3 feet, but
the periods are uncertain, and chiefly dependent on the strength of the
wind.

Dry Shingle. — From the Bosario Ghannel the edge of the bank runs
about 8W. for 16 or 18 miles, and just within it a formidable barrier
coral reef extends to within 3 or 4 miles of the Dry Shingle, the most
southern danger. From the Dry Shingle the bank trends in a 'NW.
and west direction until near the east end of Isle of Pines; but this part
of the bank should be approached with v^ry great caution, for although
the Gaiman fishermen say that it is clear of danger, its limits are un-
certaiQ. On the bank there are numerous small islets, cays, and reefs.

Calapatch Mehagen Reef is one mass of coral just awash, and many
vessels have been wrecked on it. The reef is in latitude 21^ 26' 50" 2^.,
longitude 82° 10' 36" W. There are soundings about a mile outside
the shingle, in from 5 to 14 fathoms.

Cantion. — In leaving the Bosario Ghannel, do not steer to the west-
ward of S. 26^ W. (S. 220 W. mag.) until a good offing is gained, espe-
cially if the weather be cloudy, and observe that the cays to the west-
ward of Bosario are lower than Largo Gay.

Water. — It is said that good water may be found by digging wells
on any of these cays. The fishermen resort to Bosario Gay for this pur-
pose and for the cabbage palm, which grows in great abundance on
these islets.

Cocoa Plum Cay lies eastward of the east end of Isle of Pines, and
the line of white shallow water between is very distinct. The anchor-
age under the cay is sheltered by a reef to the eastward, and by the
adjacent cays westward. The eye is the guide through the white water,
as there are no marks.

The Isle of Pines is of irregular shape with a deep bay on the
western side, sheltered on the SW. by a projecting tongue of land.

The southern half of the island is low and swampy, but the northern
part is more elevated and in some places mountainous. Very many
water courses and lagoons along the shore arc navigable for vessels
drawing 7 or 8 feet of water. The island is (covered with trees, afford-
ing, as its name indicates, pine spars and masts for vessels.

ISLE OF PINES — POST FRANCES. * 191

Most of the inhabitants, about 800 in number, live in the northern
part of the island, where the capital, Nueva Gerona, is situated. Cattle
are raised here to a considerable extent.

In making the land from the southward three mountains first come
in sight. On these, the westernmost and highest, called Dolphin Head,
or Mount Jose, appears from the south as one peak, but from the west-
ward three peaks are seen. It can be seen 45 miles off.

South and West Coasts. — ^From Piedras Point, the southern shore,
which is of sand, runs about SW. by W., 25 miles to the w^estern end
of the Larga Beach; sand banks extend off the western portion of this
coast. The Larga Beach is all along skirted by a reef for from ^ to f
mile, and the bank extends about ^ mile beyond it. Off the east end
of this beach there is a small opening in the reef with sufficient depth
for coasters, which find good shelter within.

Froih the western end of the Larga Beach the coast, which is com.
posed of soboruco rock or low white cliffs of bleached honeycombed
coral and indurated sand, runs a little northward of west for 9 miles to
Gape Pepe, the SW. extreme of the island; thence it trends NNW.
about 2 miles to Gocodrilo Bay, where fishing vessels generally take
shelter. Perdenales Point lies about NW. by N. 7^ miles from Goco-
drilo Bay, and is foul to the distance of i mile. All this part of the
coast is steep- to, and deep water will be obtained within ^ mile of the
reef, which closely skirts it.

Port Frances. — From Perdenales Point the coast trends about
iNNW. 3 miles to Frances Point, the most western of the island, form-
ing a bay called Port Frances. This bay is convenient for vessels
stationed on the south coast of Guba, affording good shelter during the
strong trade wind. The anchorage is good all over the bay by select-
ing the white spots, as the water is very clear. The most convenient
for getting under way is with the following bearings : Perdenales
Point 8. 190 E. (S. 230 E. mag.) and the KW. extreme of Bush Gay
N. 330 W. (N. 370 W. mag.). A sand bank skirted by a coral reef, and
very shallow, borders the north shore, and extends some distance
round Bush Gay. There is good fishing with the seine on the north
shore; spiny lobsters abound, and rays and alligators frequent the
boat channels.

Water. — About 200 yards from the east end of the longest beach
there are some wells of good water; but the ground being rocky the
casks will have to be filled in the boat, or, if on the beach, rafted.
There is good fishing in the bay, and wild cattle frequent the wells at
noon and in the evening.

Siguanea Bay. — From Bush Cay a ridge of rocks extends off | mile
to the edge of the bank, and at the same distance NNE. of the cay lies
a dangerous patch with only 6 feet water on it. The cay is separated
from the point by a small boat channel, carrying 8 feet water, leading
into Siguanea Bay. The shore from Frances Point turns abruptly to

192 CUBA — SOUTH COAST.

the SE. for 15 miles, and is skirted by low mangrove cays; it then
bends ronnd to the XNE. for 7 miles to a point, forming the inlet, in
which there is excellent anchorage for vessels of light draft. A bar,
however, abont a mile in breadth, runs right across from Frances
Point to the south end of the Indian Cays, and has only 16 feet water
on it. The depth increases within the bar to 3J and 6 fathoms, and
then gradually decreases towards tiie shore.

The edge of the bank lies about li miles outside this bar, and is so
steei) that the first cast near the cays may be 3 fathoms; the depth
gradually decreases, and a vessel may work in by the lead and come
to in any part of the bight. The deepest part of the bar is about 4
miles SW. of the Indian Cays.

A vessel of light draft, may haul into Siguanea Bay, when about 2
miles to the northwaM of Frances Point. The depths are 5 and 6
fathoms in the middle of the bight, gradually shoaling towards the
shore. There are no dangers, and the holding ground is excellent.

Water. — There is a watering place in Siguanea Bay, a little to the
southward of the Water Uills, the first eleX^lfced land from the head of
the bight; but the casks must be rolled about 150 yards. There are
also two good springs at the foot of the Siguanea Hills, where water
may be obtained at a little distance from the shore.

Tides. — The rise of tide in the bay is about 6 inches, but after a
strong Norther it is only 3 inches, or less.

Indian River.— The entrance to this river Ues N. 7^ W. (N. 11^ W.
mag.), 5 J miles from the eastern point of Siguanea Bay. Good anchor-
age, exposed only to the westward, will be found in 2J fathoms water,
about a mile off shore.

A mud bar is formed aoross, making it diflBcult for even light boats
to get in, except at high water; but, having crossed the bar, from one
to 3 fathoms will be carried for 4 miles up. About 2^ miles within the
entrance, the mangrove swamps merge into the pine country and a
little higher uj), strong and serviceable spars may be cut of any size
under a frigat(»'s toi)mast, so as to fall into the river. When green
they generally sink, but they quickly dry and become much lighter.
Pigeons, raccoons, and crocodiles are found in abundance, and great
numbers of hogs run wild through the woods.

The Coast from the Indian Eiver runs abont !NNW. 8 miles to
Indian Point, wliich lies X. 41^ E. (X. 37^ E. mag.) 14 miles from Bush
Cay. From Indian Point the shore takes a XNE. direction 9 miles to
Barcos Point, the XW. extreme of the island, which is low, and forms
the north side of a shallow bay called Barcos Bight. Thence it trends
about east, lU miles to the mouth of the Kiv'er Casas, which is the
loading place of Nueva Gerona, and nas the greatest trade with Cuba.

The River Casas is navigable for boats to some distance. It is fed
by numerous rivulets, and about 4 miles up the water becomes fit for
use. On its left bank the Casas Kange rises to a considerable elevation,

MOUNT DIABLO MANGLES ISLETS. 193

and on the high lands are some small settlements where cattle and pigs
may be procured, but vegetables are scarce.

Mount Diablo. — From the mouth of the Casas, the coast runs E. by
N. about 4 miles to a small peninsula named Mount Diablo. Between^
there is a ridge of hills of moderate height called Mount Caballos, and
the coast is here more firm and free of swamps. From Mount Diablo,
eastward of which there is a small islet, the shore trends southeastward
7 miles to the Kiver Santa F^. From Salinas Point a J miles southeast-
ward of Mount Diablo the shore to the southward is skirted by a reef.

River Santa T6> — This stream is navigable for small vessels of light
draft for some miles, and for boats to the village on the right bank.
The water is good for drinking. About three miles up, a branch turns
oft* to the S\V. called the Mai Pais, which is also deep enough for small
craft and for boats to a considerable distance. The arm terminates in
an extensive lagoon.

East Coast. — From the mouth of the Santa F('' the eastern shore
bends around to the SE. and south, forming the east side of the island,
which is low and swampy. To the eastward of the river the shore is
fronted by a chain of low mangrove cays which curve round to the N W.
on the north side of the island and terminate at Pipa Cay, about N.
38^ E. (N. 340 B. mag.), 18 miles from Barcos Point. Between them
and the north shore of the island there is a depth of 2^ and 3^ fathoms,
over mud and weed, which may be carried up to Mount Diablo; but
thence to the eastward it gradually becomes shoaler, and off the month
of the Santa F^ there are only 9 feet. The holding ground is excellent;
but on account of the bar between the Indian Cays and Frances Point,
which is the way in, it is inaccessible to vessels drawing over 16 feet.

Tid0& — ^It is high water, full and change, on the north side of the
Isle of Pines, at 6h. Om., and the rise is 3 feet.

Mangles Islets. — ^This chain of islets and cays, composed of several
groups, under the names of Ingleses, Kabihorcado, Alcatraces, Pipa,
etc., is known as the Mangles Group. They ai*e surrounded by shallow
water, which extends some distance from them. From Pipa Cay the
islets trend in a SE. by E. direction for about 20 miles and terminate
at the Ingleses Cays, which form the NW. side of the channel of the
same name. On the south side of tliis passage another chain of islets
extends to the southward, joining the island near Corral Point, the
eastern extreme.

A sand bank surrounds the latter cays at the distance of a mile, con-
nects itself with the great bank eastward of the Isle of Pines, and,
trending in that direction 18 miles as far as Tablones Cay, thence runs
ESE. 11 miles to Cantiles Cay, on the west side of Rosario Channel. To
the north of Cantiles Cay, but on the eastern side of the channel, are the
Passage Cays;' thence the edge of the Jardines runs northward and NE.
to Traviesa and Rabihorcado Cays, forming two indentations separated
18402 13

V' , .

194 CUBA SOUTH COAST.

by the former, and then trending with a southerly curve to the reefs at
the NE. extremity of the Jardines, eastward of Diego Perez Cay.

Flamenco and Calebra Channels. — About 5 miles southward of
Calavera Cay, the western of the two formiug Hacha Channel, lies
Flamenco Cay, and a mile westward of the latter is Culebra Cay.
Between the reef's extending in all directions from these two last cays
is a passage with IJ fathoms water. Between Flamenco Cay and those
NE. of it there is a channel carrying 1| fathoms; but care should be
taken to guard against the reefs which run 3 miles to the southward
and westward nearly to the meridian of Flamenco Cay. Between Cule-
bra Cay and the Petatillos banks there is another channel with If
fathoms.

The Petatillos are two (fifteen by chart) banks, equal in form and
extent, which rise above water and are separated by a passage carrying
2J fathoms water. Over the greater part the bottom is white, but the
lead should be carefully attended. These banks begin about 4 miles
south westward of Culebra Cay and extend 14 miles W. by 8., with a
breadth of about 2 miles. ,

Laguna and Hambre Cays. — About 12 miles SW. of Culebra Cay
lies the most northern of the Laguna Cays, which, together with those
of the Hambre Group, extend about 9. by W. 6 miles. This chain
of islets is encircled by a reef which also surrounds the Petatillos and
Culebra Cay. Between the Laguna Cays and Petatillos Banks there
is said to be a passage with 2^ and 2f fathoms water, which facilitates
the communication with Hacha Channel, and the passage between Cruz
and Monterey Cays.

About 4i miles S. 38o W. (S. 34o W. mag.) of the most southern of
the Hambre Cays is Pipa Cay, and the channel between carries about 2
fathoms water.

Dios Cay.— :N"early 18 miles 8. 71^ W. (8. 67^ W. mag.) of Pipa Cay
is Dios Cay, small, low, and surrounded by reefs which extend to the
NE. for 10 miles, where there is a channel a mile wide and nearly a
fathom deep; thence the reef continues eastward for 8 miles to Pipa
Cay and borders the south side of the Mangles Group at 2^ and 3 ndles
off, as far as English Channel; on the northern side of the group the
reefs are about a mile off. Between Dios Cay and Carraguco Point is
the passage for vessels which trade with Batabano. There are also
said to be channels with 2f and 3| fathoms water between the Dios
and Indian Cays and between the Dios and San Felipe Cays.

Indian Cays form a group 7 miles in extent; they are low, covered
with trees, and separated by small channels. The most northern of the
group lies about 8. 15^ W. (8. 11° W. mag.), 13 miles from Dios Cay
and the southern N. 21° E. (N. 17^ E. mag.), 94 miles from Bush Cay
off Frances Point). In the channel between them and the latter point
there are nearly 3 fathoms water, over mud and weed, which it is said
may be carried up to Dios Cay. These cays are surrounded by reefe,

SAN FELIPE CAYS — CORRIENTE8 BAY. 195

which from the south part extend 2 miles to the soathward, and from
the northern 2 miles northwestward.

San Falipe Cays form a chain 13 miles in extent east and west and
are low, marshy, and oovered with mangroves. They lie 11 miles south-
ward of Fisga Point. San Felipe Cays, like the former, are bordered
by reefs which run northwestward 6 miles to Cucaiia Bank, which has
8 feet water on it and lies SW. 13 miles from Fisga Point. Between
the reef extending 5 miles westward of Cucaiia Bank and the coast of
Cuba the channel is about 8 miles in breadth and If to 2^ fathoms deep;
there is also a one-fathom patch northward of this west extreme of the
reef and midway between it and the shore.

The bank between San Felipe Cays and Cape Frances is steep-to, but
close within its edge it shoals very quickly and there are patches of
only IJ fathoms water about 8 niiJes northeastward of the cape. The
bottom is of sand ai^<| weeds, but in pLices not visible. There is a well
of good water near the beach, on the south side of the most eastern of
San Felipe Cays, and in the vicinity of all of them turtle and fish
abound. The west end of San Felipe is reported as being 5 miles west-
ward of the position charted.

Tide. — The rise of tide at San Felipe Cays is about 2^ feet; but it is
irregular. The high tide appears to take place in the morning, and the
low tide at night. The flood stream runs to the N£. with much strength.

The Coast of Cuba from Mangle Point takes a WSW. direction to
Cape Corrientes; the land is low, thickly wooded, and the shore is
chiefly formed of soboruco or white indurated sand cliflfs from 10 to 20
feet high, steep-to. About 4^ miles eastward of the cape, moderate
depths may be obtained about ^ mile from the shore.

Cape Corrientes is a low sandy point, with the ruins of a stone
wall a short distance within it, at the edge of the low trees which cover
the land in the interior. There are a few small dry rocks about 50
yards from the point, and a shallow rocky spit runs off ^ mile SW. of
them. Two-thirds of a mile ofl^ shore the depth is 5 fathoms. This
point has been mistaken by strangers for Cape San Antonio, from the
land of Cuba appearing to terminate here, on account of the deep bight
of Corrientes westward of it; but the lighthouse on Cape San Antonio
clearly marks the distinction; besides, as Corrientes is approached,
should the weather be clear, the distant mountain ranges of Organos
and Eosario may be seen to the northward.

Anchorage. — There is good temporary anchorage in 9 fathoms water,
with Cape Corrientes bearing N. 83^ E. (N. 79° E.mag.) and distant about
1^ miles.

Corrientes Bay. — About 3 miles northward of Cape Corrientes there
is a remarkable rocky cliff, called Caiman Bluff. Thence the shore
trends northerly, curving eastward, for 7 miles, and then turns abruptly
to the westward. The bluff is of soboruco, steep, and higher than any
other part of the coast of the bay; to the northward of the cliff a small

196 CUBA — SOUTH COAST.

vessel may anchor in 5 fathoms water, close to the sandy beach, by
carrying a hawser to the shore. This is the only anchoring place in the
bay which affords shelter from the strong SE. winds. Elsewhere there
is no bank, the shore is low, steep, and covered with trees.

At the head of the bay, about 6 yards from the shore, there is a spring
of fresh water, which rises in bubbles to the surfa(!e of the sea. Ten
miles WSW. of the head of the bight is a remarkable piece of scarped
land forming a cliff of soboraco at a short distance from tiie beach, called
Balcones; thence the shore trends 8W. 8 miles to Holand^s Point.

Holand^s Point, 15 miles from Cape Corrient^s, is the western ex-
tremity of the bay of the latter name. The water is discolored for about
a mile oif the point. For 3 miles on either side of the point the shore
is bounded by a rocky cliff about 35 feet high, and at the extremity
of the point there is a remarkable red spot. From the ea«t end of the
cliff a reef extends off shore about 3()0 yards as far as this red spot,
and the depths are from 14 to 20 fathoms J mile outside it. From Ho-
land68 Point the coast trends about W. by N. 7 miles to Perpetua Point.
Between is Piedras Point, off which a reef extends about 600 yards.
Perpetua Point lies about 3 miles SE. by S. of Cape San Antonio, and
on it is a fisherman's hut.

Cape San Antonio. — See page 143.

Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at the west end of Cuba
at 9h. 30m., and the rise is generally about 1^ feet. The flood sets to
the northward, the ebb to the southward, at the rate of about half a
knot; but there is frequently no stream at all, or a strong current to
the SE.

Current — The current on the south side of Cuba is variable, and
generally very strong. Its usual course is to the westward, and between
the Grand Cayman and Cape San Antonio it sets to the NW. It is,
however, frequently found setting in an opposite direction, and appears
to be greatly influenced by the force of the prevailing trade wind. An
easterly stream is generally felt after a prevalence of light winds, and
more particularly during, and for a short time aftor, a north wind in the
winter season. Sometimes, however, on such occasions, it will only
extend to about 20 miles off shore. Some observations tend to show
that an easterly set is more frequently found during the increase of the
moon, and this is the opinion of the Cayman fisherman, who are con-
* stantly passing to and fro from their island to the Jardines, Jamaica,
and tlie Mosquito shore.

Hence, with so much uncertainty, the greatest attention is necessary
in navigating on this side of the island, especially in the neighborhood
of the Isle of Pines and the Jardines, which are so imperfectly known^
and whore the stream is also frequently found to set strong towards the
cays and reefs, and the lead is of but little use. In running between
Jamaica and the Grand Cayman and from thence between Cape Cato-
che and Cape San Antonio, the reckoning cannot be too frequently

WINDS. 197

checked. In beating up from Cape San Antonio, a vessel may obtain
some assistance from Xhe land wind, but in the winter season it does
not extend far from the shore and is very uncertain.

In the space between the Jardines and the cays of Doce Leguas, there
is generally no current whatever 5 but between Cay Breton and Cabal-
lones Ghannel it runs 1^ miles an hour to the westward.

Winds. — Prom October to May the NE. trade- winds blow freshly
along the south coast of Cuba, but are temporarily interrupted at times
by winds from NW. and north.

From May to October, however, the prevailing winds are light, and
show an inclination to haul round with the sun every day, commencing
in the evening with a northerly wind off the land, by daybreak veer-
ing to EN£., then by noon through east to ESE., and by 4 p. m. arriv-
ing at SW., where it continues till it falls calm, and is succeeded in the
evening by the land wind. With this knowledge, a vessel may get con-
siderably to the eastward firom May to August, when calms and light
winds prevail, and on otlier occasions during changeable winds, espe-
cially at night.

The greatest difficulties in« getting to windward exist between Gay
Breton and the Caballones Channel, where the current runs strong to
the westward; but after passing East Channel, there will be no diffi-
culty in reaching Cape Cruz. To the eastward of the cape it is useless
to work to windward near the coast, but from it a vessel will probably
reach Falmouth or St. Ann Bay on the north coast of Jamaica.

Cautioii. — The strong currents and untrustworthy character of the
charts make it incumbent on the navigator to exercise even more than
ordinary caution and vigilance while near the^ land on the coast of
Cuba.

CHAPTER VIII.

THE WINDWARD CHANNEL AND JAMAICA, WITH THE NEiaHBOBING

BANKS AND CAYS.

The Windward Channel is between Haiti and Cuba. The north-
em part is perfectly clear, with no dangers; but the southern part is
somewhat obstructed by several banks and cays, among which are
Kavassa Island, the Formigas Bank, and Morant Cays.

The Currents in the channel generally set to the SW., attaining a
strength of from one to 2 knots between Cuba and Haiti. South of
Cuba and Jamaica the set is more to the Westward.

Directions. — Vessels from Jamaica usually run to leeward round
Cape Antonio, and through the Florida Strait; but from October to
March, when northerly winds prevail in the Florida Strait, the Wind-
ward Passage should be preferred, although ships are frequently opposed
here by contrary winds and currents. In taking this passage the coast
of Haiti must be gained as soon as possible, as there a windward cur-
rent is frequently found. In steamers or sailing vessels with a fair
wind, after passing the east end of Cuba, a course may be shaped for
any of the passages between the Bahama Islands, but the Turks Island
Passage is not much used from the southward. The Caicos Passage
is well to windward and perfectly safe in the daytime, but the Crooked
Island Passage is the best lighted, and with the light on San Salvador
Island, or Watling, should be quite safe to navigat^e by day or nighty
from the north or south.

Navassa Island is 32 miles from Cape Tiburon. Its surface is
nearly level, with steep, sloping sides, terminating all round in bold
perpendicular white cliflfs about 20 feet high. It is inaccessible, except
at the landing platform on the western side, which is used for the ship-
ment of guano.

The island is of volcanic origin, composed of limestone, interspersed
with veins of sharp, honeycombed rocks of iron pyrites.

The spaces between the rocks are filled up with guano, which in
some places is 14 feet deep.

With the exception of the ^W. extreme a prominent bluflf, a narrow
ridge about 15 feet high above the cliffs and 200 yards broad, extends
all around the island. The summit is clothed with stunted palm trees

198

NAVASSA ISLAND K0RMIGA8 BANK — ^MORANT CAYS. 199

and cactus, and is inhabited by iguanas and numerous flocks of sea
birds. •

The present position of the settlement of Navassa is on the SW. side
of the island.

The landing is situated about 500 yards N. 20° W. (N. 22© W? mag.)
of the SW. extremity of Southeast Point, and there is a signal station
on the bluff about 700 yards N. 25o B. (X. 23° E. mag.) of the same
point.

There are two mooring buoys in line with and bearing S. 80^ W. (S.
78° W. mag.) of the signal station and distant from it, respectively,
about 900 and 1,300 yards.

Anchorage.— On the west side the bottom is fine sand, with small
shells, and anchorage will be found with the usual trade wind in 16
fathoms water, good holding ground, with the NW. bluff bearing about
F. 20O W. (N. 220 W. mag.), and the SB. point S. 60^ E. (S. 08° B.
mag.), about ^ mile off shore; but a heavy swell sets round the SK. end
of the island. A current of from one to 2 knots sets along the shore
in a NW. direction, changing to west at the last of the ebb. ' The wind
seldom blows from the westward. From the NW. end of the island a
coral ledgQ with 4^ fathoms water on it extends 200 yards off.

Formigas Bank— The SW. end of this bank lies N. 33© B. (S. 31o
B. mag.), about 39 miles from Morant Point, and from the center of the
bank, the fall in the high land of Jamaica will be seen to the north-
ward of Plantain Garden River. The bank is 8 miles in length, and
about 2} miles in breadth. It is steep-to, and near it« edge there is a
narrow vein of sand with from 9 to 18 fathoms water on it; but the
body of the bank is rocky, with a general depth of from 5 to 7 fathoms.
About 2 miles from the NE. end, and one mile from the eastern edge,
there is a small patch with only 2^ fathoms on it, and westward of it
another of 3 fathoms, with 3 J and 4 fathoms round them. With strong
breezes the position of the bank may be recognized by the heavy swell
which rolls over it.

Albatross Bank, about 30 miles southeastward of Morant Point,
extends 10 miles in a NE. by N. and SW. by S. direction. The bank
has from 17 to 23 fathoms over it, but has not been completely examined,
and it is quite possible there may be less than 17 fvithoms on it.

Morant Cays, 33 miles from Morant Point, are a group consisting
of three small islets from 7 to 10 feet high, which, with the adjacent
reefs, f(n*m a (crescent, convex to the southeastward, and occupying a
space abcmt 3 miles long and IJ miles broad.

The bank on which these islets stand extends (within the 100 -fathom

line) 6 miles northeastward from the group and -4 miles southwestward

of them, with an average breadth of about 3 miles, and with depths

over it ranging from 10 to 18 tat horns. They are known as Northeast,

Southeast, and Southwest Cays.

A reef, on which the sea constantly breaks, surrounds them. There

200 MORANT CAYS.

is only one opening through this reef, situated between Southeast Oay
and Southwest Cay, with from 18 to 20 feet in it. This opening should
not be used except in cases of emergency.

Sea birds arrive at these cays in greiit numbers during March, and
in Apill the islets are covered with their eggs, which are collected and
conveyed in schooners to Jamaica. Later in the summer turtle are
caught, but the supply is becoming scarcer every year.

The supply of guano is abundant but of poor quality. Several, wrecks
which are occasionally broken up by the sea and drift into the anchor-
age, lie on the reefs round these cays. In clear weather the high land
of Jamaica is visible. Blue Mountain Peak, bearing N. 43^ W. (N. 46^
W. mag.) of Southwest Cay, is distant 52 miles.

Northeast Cay is at times divided into three portions, the sea wash-
ing over the connecting sand spits. A conspicuous cocoanut tree stands
in the center of the cay, with some smaller trees and bushes southward
of it, and at the north extremity of tlie islet are two isolated trees. On
the southern portion of the cay are one or two houses and a small pier,
also a pond of brackish water. A sand bank, 4 feet high, lies 200 yards
southward of this cay.

Southeast Cay is covered with bushes and trees, among which one
cocoanut tree rises considerably higher than the others. There are two
houses on the cay and a pier on the west side. The sand si)its extend-
ing from the' extremities of this islet alter in shape at different seasons
of the year. In summer the S W. spit is washed away and the sand de-
posited on the western shore of the cay.

Southwest Cay. — There is one house on this cay which can be seen
from a distance of about 8 miles. A rocky ledge is used as a pier for
shipping guano. Lauding is sehlom practicable at Southwest Cay, but
at the other islets, especially at their SW. extremes, an opportunity of
doing so can generally be found. It is not advisable to land at the piers
on the islets on account of the submerged reefs in the vicinity.

Anchorage. — Un the west side of Morant Cays the bank ^^lopea
gradually off to the depth of 10 fathoms, and anchorage may be taken
up by the lead, careftiUy avoiding the irregular ground extending NW.
of Northeast Cay. The bottom is composed of dead coral with patches
of small brown weed growing over it.

When approaching from the northwestward the water shoals sud-
denly after passing the 100-fathom line, but a vessel may safely stand
in. Southeast Cay bearing S. 42^ E. (S. 45^ E. mag.) until in the re-
quired deptli for anchoring.

Small vessels dra\^ing not more than 12 feet will find snu)oth water
at J mile westward of the south extreme of Northeast Cay, but with
strong northerly winds this is not a safe anchorage, as the sea then
breaks in 3 fathoms.

Water may be procured by digging wells near the center of either
Northeast or Snitheast Cay, taking <*are, however, not to tlig as deep
as the lev^el.

MORANT CAYS. 201

Current — The drift current sets towards west and NNW., with a
velocity of | knotan hour after the trade wind has been blowing freshly
for a day or two. A northerly current of 1^ knots an hour has been
inet approaching from the eastward. When the trade is lighter a cur-
rent setting to NE. or east is frequently experienced.

DirectionB. —Vessels having occasion to pass near Morant Cays at
night should keep northward of them.

In standing in for the east end of Jamaica from the SE., Yallahs
Hill, which bears from the Southeast Cays about N W. distant 43 miles,
will be a useful guide in clear weather, and in working up to the north-
ward of the cays, the NE. end of Jamaica, kept open of Morant Point,
will lead to the windward of them.

Tides. — ^The rise and fall of tide at Morant Cays seldom exceeds one
foot.

Jamaica is the largest and most valuable of the British West India
Islands. On the north it rises into hills of gentle ascent, covered with
pimento groves and intersected by valleys, while on the south it pre-
sents abrupt preci])ices and inaccessible cliffs.

The coast line is 500 miles long. The northern shore is free of dan-
gers and generally steep-to, but the south Side, particularly near the
middle, is deeply indented and fringed with reefs and cays, which must
be cautiously approached. The principal ports are Kingston, Port
Royal, Port Morant, Black River, and Savnunah-la-Mar on the south
coast, and St. Lucea andMontego Bay, Falmouth, St. Ann, Ports Maria,
Antonio, and Annotto Bay on the north.

The Blue Mountains, a lofty range, run through the whole length of
the island from east to west^ attaining a height of 7,300 feet, but the
highest peaks are generally hidden by clouds. Other shorter ranges
branch off in every direction. The valleys are all very narrow, not
more than the twentieth part of the island being level ground. The
principal rivers are the Minho, Black River, and Cobre, all emptying
on the south coast, but none of them are navigable except for boats.

Seasons. — Tiie land and sea breezes are regular, except for a short
time before the rainy season. The temperature of the year near Kings-
ton ranges between 70^ and 80^, but a difference of elevation affects
the temperature very sensibly. At 4,200 feet above the sea it usually
ranges between 55'^ and 65o. The year is divided into a short wet
season, beginning in April or May and lasting about six weeks; a
short dry season, from June to August; a long wet season, comi)rising
September, October, and November, and a long dry season, occupying
the remaining four months, during which the weather is serene, pleas-
ant, and comparatively cool.

Population in 1881 was 580,804 — 14,4"^;3 white, and the remainder
colored and blacks.

Earthquakes are frequent, and sometimes violent.

Hurricanes are not so frequent as in the Windward Islands, com«
ing generally between July and October.

202 JAMAICA.

Morant Point, the east end of Jamaica, is fonned by a. strip of low,
swampy, wooded land, extending out about 2J miles from a low range
of hills about 800 feet high, running parallel to the south coast at the
foot of the Blue Mountains. It is. about 2^ miles broad at the inner
part, and thence gradually diminishes to the point, which is sharp and
well defined when seen from the north and south. Approaching from
the eastward, its position is first recognized by the iron lighthouse, 96
feet high, standing a few hundred feet within the high-water mark.

Light. — The lighthouse on Morant Point exhibits a fixed white light
at 115 feet above the sea, and is visible 15 miles between the bearings
N. 330 E. (X. 30O E. mag.) and S. 29o E. (S. 32© E. mag.) over an arc
of 2420.

Reef. — ^The point is skirted by a reef, which extends off to the dis-
tance of nearly J mile. There are 22 fathoms water at If miles oflf,
close to the edge of the bank, and as the land is not more than 20 feet
high, should the weather be thick or the light obscured the greatest
caution must be observed when nearing it. Overfalls are generally
seen eastward of the point, near the edge of soundings, and the stream
runs at from one to 3 knots.

Caution. — In approaching Jamaica from the eastward, as in many
other localities in the West Indies, great advantage will be gained from
observing meridian altitudes of stars north and south at morning and
evening twilight, after losing sight of Alta Vela, until Morant Point
light or Yallalis Hill is sighted.

* Yallahs Hill is about 19 miles westward of the point and can not be
easily mistaken, being a remarkable mountain, rising rather abruptly
on its north side from the valley between it and the Blue Mountain
Bange, and falling with a long, gradual slope to the sea on the south
side, and its rounded summit is seldom clouded.

Approaching from the NB. through the Windward Channel, the Blue
Mountain mass will generally come first in sight, and strangers are apt
to keep away too soon, which should not be done until the vessel's po-
sition is correctly ascertained, lest they may not be able to weather Mo-
rant Point. It is advisable to keep well to windward until the light-
house bears northward of west, as the current generally sets strong to
the westward. ^

Coast. — From Morant Point light the coast trends S. by W. ^ W. 1 J
miles to Southeast Point; between is a sandy bay studded with rocks;
it then turns WSW. ^ W. for 5 miles to Eocky Point, and continues in
the same direction for 3 miles farther to Port Morant. Between South-
east and Rocky Points the reef extends from the shore to an average
distance of one mile, and between Rocky Point and Port Morant to J
mile, and in ordinary weather the sea breaks heavily upon it. Within
the reef at Rocky Point is a secure anchorage for coasters, and a good
landing wharf. To seaward the bank of soundings extends about one
mile.

POUT MORANT MORANT BAY. 203

Morant is a small, secure bight. 'Ebe approach to the harbor
is easily distinguished. The hills on the western side, between 400 and
500 feet high, slope gradually to the shore, and are higher than those
on the eastern side, which rise abruptly from the sea. At the head of
the harbor is a remarkable red clifif, and 2 miles inland, at an elevation
of about 500 feet and between two palm trees will be seen Kelly House,
the easternmost of two houses near together. Palm Point, on the west-
em side of the entrance, may be known by the conspicuous cluster of
trees on it.

Good water may be obtained from the pier off the village.

The United States is represented by a consular agent.

Dangers. — Harbor Shoal, a sandy knoll with 2 fathoms on it, lies
nearly in the center of the port, N, 65^ W. (N. 68° W. mag.) of Point
Pero, and with Kelly House open westward of the red cliff. Cotton-tree
Spit is a little northward of Harbor Shoal, and extends from the east-
ern shore ^ mile.

Buoys. — On the eastern side of the channel, leading into the port,
are two buoys, the outer in 26 feet is colored black and white in hori-
zontal stripes, theinuer in 20 feet is checkered black and white; on the
western side is one red buoy in 20 feet. The southern edge of Harbor
Shoal is marked by a red buoy in 22 feet water. The northern edge of
Harbor Shoal is marked by a wliite buoy in 10 feet water.

Cotton-tree Spit buoy, checkered red and white', lies in 16 feet water.

Leith Hall Spit buoy, painted red and white in vertical stripes, lies
in 12 feet water close to the southern edge of Leith Hall Spit.

A red buoy is moored on the edge of the bank running oft' the shore
from Battery Point. The position of the buoys can not always be de-
pended upon.

Directions. — In entering Port Morant great attention must be paid
to the leading mark, for in strong trades and misty weather some diffi-
culty may be experienced in distinguishing Kelly House. Kelly House,
in line with the eastern extreme of Red Cliff, bearing N. 4^ E. (N. lo E.
mag.), leads on the eastern side of the channel, and clear of Harbor
Shoal and Cotton-tree Spit; when Pero PointT shuts in the low point
south of it, haul a little to the eastward of the leading mark and
anchor in 5 or 6 fathoms, with Bowden Pier about N. 42° E. (N. 39^
B. mag.). As a rule vessels can enter or leave with the usual trade
winds, and they seldom wait for the land wind in the morning. The
rise of tide is about one foot.

Morant Bay. — Froin Port Morant the shore bends in to the town of
Morant, and then the Belvidere Point, forming the bay. The reef still
skirts the shore to the distance of about i mile, but becomes more
broken, with a better channel within, and terminates altogether south
of the wharf at Morant.

The sea breaks on this extreme end, and under the lee of it there is
anchorage for large vessels in 5 or 6 fathoms water, with the court house

204 , JAMAICA.

bearing aboat N. 13^ E. (N. 10^ £. mag.). A snort distance westward
of Port Morant there is a narrow opening throagh the reef leading into
Fisherman Bay, in which the »onndings are from 3 to 2 fathoms, bnt it
is only fit for coasters. Within the reef to the westward are other
anchorages of the same character.

The English Chorch and the courthouse, both a little northward of
the principal wharf, are the most conspicuous buildings in the town.

Oalataa Rock is a small dangerous patch with 2| fathoms water on
it, lying about GOO yards SW. of the western reef oflf Morant, with 7
fathoms between, and steep-to. From it, Belvidere Point bears N. 84°
W. (N. 870 W. mag.) distant l^t miles, and courthouse, N. 6° E. (K
3^ E. mag.) distant! mile. Large ships standing into the bay should
not bring the courthouse to bear northward of N. 25° E. (N. 22o E. mag.).

Upper Wliite Horses. — From Belvidere Point the coast takes a
W. f S. direction for 7 miles to Yallahs Point, at the base of the lofty
mountain already described. About 4 miles eastward of the latter
point there is a small range of remarkable white cliffs of moderate height,
called the Upi)er White Horses Two miles southward of the White
Horses is an extensive flat with a depth of 11 and 12 fathoms, dark
sand; northward and southward of this flat the water is shoaler.

Lamottes Bank, a small rocky patch of 4 fathoms, may be con-
sidered the commencement of a narroAv" bank of 7 to 9 fathoms, which
curves in an easterly direction for 3 miles, until nearly south of BelviSere
Point. From the 4 fathoms, Yallahs Point bears N. 6oO W. (N. 68o W.
mag.) 2^ miles.

The water is usually so clear that the bottom may be seen in 10
fathoms.

The Coast from Yallahs Point turns in a northerly direction for
about i mile, forming Salt Pond Bay, thence it sweeps to the west^vwHl
round Yallahs Bay, which is If miles irom the point. Cow Bay Point,
W. f N., 4 miles from Yallahs Point, is low, rounded, and wooded, and
its extreme is nearly 2 miles irom the foot of the hills. One mile
ftom the coast stands the chimney of the estate of Albion, which, with
the cultivated land aroutid, are conspicuous from seaward. Small craft
find shelter under Yallahs Point from thestrongtradewind, which some-
times continues for three or four days. Large vessels might also
anchor here, but care must be taken to avoid an 18-foot patch from
which the point bears S. 65^ E. (S. 68^ B.) distant nearly ^ mile.

In Yallahs Bay vessels of considerable size load logwood; the best
anchorage is south of the center of the bay in 10 fathoms, about 4 mile
from the beach, but it would be prudent to weigh on the first signs of
a southerly wind, as a very hea>'y sea sets into the bay, and ships have
been Avrec*.ked.

Off this portion of tlie coast, at a distance of about ^ mile, the depth
is 1(K) fathoms.

Westward of Yallahs Bav the river of that name flows into the sea.

LAND AND SEA BREEZES— CURRENTS. 205

From Cow Bay Point the coast trends with a slight curve inwards^ N W. J
N.y for 4 miles to the Lower White Horses, a similar small ridge of cllfifo
to those eastward of Yallahs Point. They lie at the base of a largre round
hill, 1,420 feet high, connected by sharp ridges with St. Catherine Peak^
of 5,100 feet, which is about 8 miles NB. of Kingston, and the same
distance westward of the Blue Mountains; this range forms the eastern
boundary of the great plain of Liguanea, on the shore of which is the
City of Kingston. From the Lower VVliite Horses the coast runs to the
WNW. for about 5 miles to the commencement of the Palisados, the
foot of the Long Mountain, and the head of Kingston Harbor, over which
is a conspicuous martello tower; one mile N. (io^ W. (N. 08° W, mag.)
of the tower is a remarkable red cliff, which has been blasted to a con-
siderable height and forms an excellent landmark. Along this portion
of the coast the bank of soundings extends about ^ mile from the shore.

Land and Sea Breezes are generally regular between Port Morant
and Port Royal. As far as Yallahs Point the land wind. is felt but a
short way from the shore; westward it extends to a greater distance.
Working off Point Morant in the early morning, the sea breeze is almost
invariably met with, the land wind being only of sufficient strength to
carry a vessel clear of the harbor. Off Port Royal ships frequently
caiTy it some distance to sea. In the early months of the year, when
the trade wind is not very strong, the land wind may come down with
considerable, but never with dangerous, strength. Its approach will be
known by a strong earthy or dusty smell. The strongest sea breezes
appear to be in June and July, and, freshening as they advance west-
ward, attain their greatest force off Port Royal. The time of com-
mencement of the sea breeze varies from 9 a. m. to noon, and generally
lasts until 5 or 6 p. m., but in some (*.ases it may blow continually for
three or four days. The beginning of the land wind is equally uncer-
tain. In the summer or hurricane months the breezes are sometimes
interrupted by calms and light southerly winds, with heavy rains and
an exceedingly oppressive atmosphere. The sea breeze will rush in with
violent squalls from the SB. ajid last but a short time.

Cnrrents. — Between Point Morant and Port Royal, at an average
distance of 3 miles from the shore, the current setting to the westward
is seldom found to exi^eed one mile per hour, depending upon the strength
of the wind. East of Point Morant it sets in a south and SE. direction
at the rate of between 2 and 3 knots, causing a heavy sea. Two or three
days of southwesterly or westerly winds will cause a slight current in
an opposite direction. After heavy rains, the discharge fi'om the rivers
will for a short time cause a slight local set.

Port Royal. — From about one mile south of the martello tower a low
narrow, sandy flat projects to the westward for about 7 J miles, terminat-
ing in Port Royal Point, on which is Fort Victoria, but it is not a very
conspicuous object. This peculiar tongue of land is more or less over-
run with low mangrove bushes, particularly on its inner side, and is in

206 JAMAICA.

part planted with cocoanut trees; it forms the harbors of Port Boyal
and Kingston and is called the Palisados. Near its western extremity
is Fort Charles^ and within it, the town of Port Royal, naval hospital,
yard, and dock. (Warping buoys are placed near the coaling wharves
at the east end of the dockyard, and a buoy with staff marked 25 feet
lies on the edge of the bank south of these wharves.) From its eastern
extreme the sandy beach takes a westerly direction for 2 miles and' then
trends 8W. for IJ miles to Plum^ Point.

Plnm Point. — Eastward of Plum Point the beach is firinged with a
rocky ledge for about 200 yards and about i mile N. 75^ W. (N. 78° W*
mag.) of it is Little Plum Point, both points being foul for about ^ mile;
westward the beach is clearer, but rocks skirt, some of the points.

Light. — ^At 200 feet northward of the extremity of Plum Point is a
white lighthouse, which exhibits at US feet above the sea a white light
with red sector, visible 14 miles. The light shows red between the bear-
ings of N. 00? W. (K 630 W. mag.) and X. 10^ B. (N. 7o E. mag.,) and
white from N. 10^ E. (N. 7° B. mag.) round by east to 8. 40° E. (S.
430 E. mag.^ over the shoals fronting the harbor. A faint diffused white
light is visible northward of the bearing, N. 60° W. (N. 63° W. mag.).

The East Channel to the harbor is termed on the north by the
Palisados, and on the south by numerous low cays and banks which
extend off shore to the distance of 3 miles, and soundings will be found
from 2 to 4 miles outside them. The outer danger at the entrance of
the channel is called the East Middle Ground, which lies S. 26^ W. (S.
230 W. mag.) about IJ miles from Plum Point. The channel is from 7
to 20 fathoms deep, and with the exception of the shoals on either side
it is clear of danger up to Gun Cay.

East BCiddle Ghronnd. — The rocky bank is composed of two knolls
occupying a space of ground about i mile and separated by a narrow
cut of deep water in a north and south direction. On the eastern knoll
there are 12 feet of water, and on the western 8 feet, steep-to, and the
sea generally breaks when strong sea breezes prevail. A large black
and white vertically striped buoy with a staff and cross-batten marks
the NE. edge of the eastern knoll in 7 fathoms.

Maiden Cay and Rock. — Maiden Bock lies about 1^ miles westward
of the East Middle Ground and NE. J mile from Maiden Cay, which is
sandy. It is a low barren rock, 100 yards long east and west, and 50
yards broad, having on it« north end a black and white striped beacon,
vertical 30 feet above the sea. It is connected with Maiden Cay by a
rocky ledge, dry in places, which extends also 200 yards to the northward
of the beacon, and to the westward for about 800 yards.

Lime Cay is 400 yards long in a NNW. and SSE. direction, 100 yards
broad, and partially covered with bushes. Its NW. end is rocky for
300 yards 5 the west and SE. parts are sandy. In case of necessity a
vessel will find anchorage close under its lee in 10 fathoms, muddy bot-
tom, taking care, however, to avoid the Lime Cay Shoal.

LIME CAY SHOAL PORT ROYAL SPIT. 207

Lime Cay Shoal is a rocky patch, with 1^ fathoms water ou it, and
about i mile in length NW. and SB. The eastern ledge lies J mile
westward of the NW. end of Lime Cay. Dockyard clock tower in line
with the east end of Gun Cay clears it to the westward.

Racum and Onn Cays are the two innermost in this channel. The
former lies N. 76° W. (N. 79^ W. mag.), nearly IJ miles fi*om Lime Cay,
and S. 420 E. (S. 45^ E. mag.), a little more than J mile from Port Royal
Point. It is very small, low, and barren, and from its north end a ledge
of small dry rocks extends out 200 yards in that direction, at the ex-
tremity of which is a black and white vertically striped buoy in 3J
fathoms water, with 5 fathoms close outside it. The cay is also foul on
the south and west to the distance of nearly J mile, but steep-to on the
east side. The cay is barely 2 feet high.

Gun Cay, about 800 yards N. 26^ E. (N. 23oE. mag.) of Kackum Cay,
is somewhat larger, sandy, and bushy, ft is skirted all round by a
reef which extends only a short distance from its south end, leaving a
good channel about 200 yards wide between it and the Rackum Oay
buoy. The reef extends 200 yards from the north side of Gun Cay,
marked at its extreme by a buoy striped black and white vertically.

Approaching Port Royal by the East Channel, Gun Cay, being wooded,
is visible from a considerable distance, but Rackum Cay can only be
seen on nearing the harbor.

Ne'w Shoal is a very small knoll with 24 feet water on it at about
140 yards southward of Port Royal Beach. A buoy striped black and
white horizontally lies in 4^ fathoms water, with Kingston church spire
over the southeastern extreme of Fort Charles Beach and the dockyard
clock tower, and Fort Charles flagstaff in line. Between the shoal
and beach the passage is clear, and there are 7 fathoms water within 40
yards of the buoy.

When buoys are temporarily removed, white nun buoys will be placed
in their positions.

Beacon Shoal, a similar small rocky head with 14 feet water on it,
Ues at about 200 yards S. 48o W. (S. 45° W. mag.) of New Shoal, and
and about J mile southward of Port Royal Point. A beatron 12 feet
high is placed in 16 feet water on the middle of the shoal; it (tarries a
cone-shaped cage painted black and white horizontal stripes.

Harbor Shoal is about 40 yards in extent, with 2J fathoms water
on it, and lies N. 53° W. (N. 56° W. mag.) 400 yards from Port Royal
Point. It is marked by a red buoy with a staff, and close to its south
side the depth is four fathoms.

De Horsoy Patch, with 4| fathoms water on it, lies 200 yards north
of Harbor Shoal.

Port Royal Spit is a shoal formed by tlie submergence of part of
the town in the earthquake of 1692. It extends oft to the westward
a little more than 200 yards from the center of the town.

Church Shoal; of coral formation, on which there is a depth of 11

208 JAMAICA.

feet, is situateil 50 yards northwestward of the 3-fathom edge of Port
Boyal Spit, with a channel inside 110 feet wide and 3 to 4 fathoms deep.

This shoal, within the depth of 3 fathoms, extends NE. and SW^for
a distance of about 40 yards, and is about 25 yards in breadth.

A conical red buoy is moored about 20 feet west of the shoal.

South Pelican Spit is the northern boundary of the harbor, and is
formed by a very shallow sand bank which runs oft' f mile westward of
Gallows Point. Its southern edge is marked by a pile. These are all
the dangers in entering the harbor from the eastward.

DirectionB for East Channel — The bottom of this channel is gen-
erally mud and sand, except for a short distance eastward of Gun Cay,
where it is mud only. In the harbor it is mud, witli a little sand, except
near the shoals, where it is formed of broken coral and sand.

A pilot will be generally found oif the east end of Jamaica. Run
along the land about 3 miles off, passing southward of Lamottes Bank^
and when abreast Cow Bay Point, Plum Point may be steered tor, on
nearing which to about IJ miles a vessel will be in soundings, ancl the
East Middle buoy should be seen 1^^ miles to the southward of it.
Then bring the flagstaff' of the xVpostles Battery in line with the flag-
staff of Port Charles, bearing N. 76^ W. (N. 70^ W. mag.), and run on for
Gun Cay; or the fall of Salt Pond Hills on with the west extreme of
dockyard wall N. 73° W. (N. 76° W. mag.) leads in. The leading mark
should be brought on before Plum Point lighthouse bears N. 3^ E.
(north mag.), in case the buoy should be adrift or out of its position.

From this distance a stranger will have some difficulty in making the
first of these marks out, and will require the use of a glass. The
Apostles Battery is small, and built on the brow of a slightly projecting
ridge, about two-thirds the way down from the summit of the Salt Pond
Hill. Fort Charles will appear as a long, low, red wall, just rising above
the sea, and behind it will be seen the masts of the guard ship and
vessels in the harbor, and to the northward of it the church, dockyard,
dock tower, and extensive range of Government buildings. This mark
will lead up to the buoy on the north end of Gun Cay Ledge, when steer
for Port Royal Point, passing between it and the buoy on the New
Shoal, and on either side of the Harbor Shoal. Having passed the
latter, and westward of Port Royal Spit, haul up and choose a berth
as most convenient.

As the turning at Gun Cay Point is rather sharp for long vessels in
a strong sea breeze, they may pass through between Gun and Rackum
Cays. In this (;ase, when abreast of Lime Cay, steer for that narrow
opening, and bring the flagstjift' of Port Henderson, at the northern foot
of Salt Pond Hill, in one with Port Royal Point, which mark will lead
through, but the eye should be the guide for mid-channel ; and after
passing close to the northward of the Rackum Cay buoy, steer to pass
outside the Beacon Shoal, and then haul up. Vessels should not pass,
between the New and Beacon Shoals.

DIRECTIONS — KINGSTON. 209

The most convenient berth for merchant vesselH will be found Mtside
Port Boyal Spit ; they should theretbre shorten sail in time after passing
the point. Ships of war secure to mooring buoys off the dockyard, to
which they are directed by signal, the buoys being numbered.

In entering, all the black and white striped beacons and buoys should
be left to port, except the beaeon on Beacon Shoal, which leav^ to star-
board.

At Night. — When about 3 miles, off Cow Bay Point, the red Ught on
Plum Point will generally be seen, and it may be steered for. Running
for the channel, its western limit should not be passed or the white light
brought in sight until at about one mile from it, in order to clear the Bast
Middle Ground, then steer for Gun Cay as before. .Having rounded
the buoy at the north end of Gun Cay, steer about S. 59^ W. (S. 66^ W.
mag.) until the light is oi>en of the south end of Gun Cay, bearing east
(S. 870 B. mag.); then alter course to N. 76© W. (N. 79© W. mag.),
which will carry a vessel between the Beacon Shoal and West Middle
Boek.

When Fort Augusta light bears N. 6^ £. (N. 3^ E. mag.) a vessel may
haul up westward of Harbor Shoal; if a steamer and going on to Kings-
ton, Fort Augusta light kept on a ^. 15^ E. (N. 12^ E. mag.) bearing
will lead westward of the Pelican Spits, and when ^at the distance of
i mile from the light the vessel will be near the edge of the shoal
ground on the north side of th^ channel, when the course should be
altered to the eastward, and the mariner should feel his way Blowly,
guided by the piles. When the red light at Fort Augusta bears south-
ward of west (S. 87° W. mag.) steer more to the eastward.

If the land breeze is likely to overtake the vessel before getting
through the east channel, it will be better for a sailing vessel not to
proceed farther to leeward than the Upper White Horses, but to stand
off and on until the sea breeze comes down in the morning. It will be
advisable not to be too hasty in bearing up until the sea breeze is
observed to have firmly established it«elf in the harbor, for the crew
will only be worried in bracing about the yards to the conflicting winds.

Kingston Harbor is a large s])acious inlet ninning east and west,
formed by the Palisados, and capable of containing many vessels of the
largest size. Shoals extend westward and northwestward for one mile
from Gallows Point, and eastward bordering the northern shore of the
Palisados at the distance of from f mile to a mile as far as flibreast the
city, which, with the shallow ground on the northwestern shore of the
harbor, contract the ship channel to a very narrow breadth.

Bhip Channel. — ^Thls channel lies along by Fort Augusta, an exten-
sive fortification on the extremity of a low sandy spit of swampy land
on the northwestern side of Port Royal Harbor, and is pointed out by
pile beacons on either side striped red and white vertically on the north-
em side, and red on the southern.

18402 14

210 JAMAICA,

A beacon, in form of a cross, Fort AugoBta painted on it, is erected
277 yards S. 39° E. (S. 42° E. mag.) of Fort Augusta light.

A red buoy lies on the south side of the channel, from Fort Augusta
8. 840 E. (S. 870 E. mag.) IJ miles. The narrowest part of the channel
commences at about 650 yards S. 20^ E. (S. 23° E. mag.) of the flag-
staff of the fort, and is here 300 yards wide. Farther on, at 700 yards
eastward of the staft*, the breadth of the channel between the piles is
reduced to 100 yards. Thence it opens out gradually as the vessel ad-
vances to the eastward, with depths of 6 and 7 fathoms. Vessels of
large draft lie alongside the wharves of the town, above which the
water deepens to 9 and 10 fathoms. A beacon surmounted by a St.
Andrew's cross, painted red and white checked, has been placed on the
southern edge of the shoal extending westward from Kingston custom-
house.

Light. — ^The beacon at Fort Augusta is now a white iron tripod
beacon, with a square lantern and pyramidal roof, surmounted by a
large A painted black, facing south, down South Ohannel.

From the beacon, at 37 feet above high water, a fixed white light
shows down South Channel, and a fixed red light eastward, or up the
harbor, visible in clear weather about 10 miles.

Kingston, the eapital of the island, stands on a gentle slope, the
I pDpulation being 49,000. The streets are regular and straight, and the

public buildings large. The residences of the upper classes are fine,
with large grounds around many of them. The city is healthy, the
range of the thermometer being from 71^ to 86^. The island is divided
into medical districts, under the head of the superintending medical
officer.

The authorities to be visited are the governor of the island and com-
modore of the naval station.

Salutes will be returned.

The United States is represented by a consul and vice-consul.

The Royal Mail Steam Packet Company have had a point at the
inner end of their wharf established for the use of their captains in
rating chronometers. This spot will be readily pointed out by any of
the employes of the company.

Position: Latitude, 17^ 5V 52" K; longitude, 76© 48' 06" W,

Quarantine is strict, all vessels being boarded by a health officer.
There is (me public hospital.

Supplies. — Provisions are plentiful and moderate in price. Water
is brought to the end of wharves in pipes, and is charged for as follows
Steamers of from 70 to 150 tons, $2.92; 151 to 250 tons, $5.84; 251 *
350 tons, $8.76; 351 to 500 tons, 811.67; 501 to 600 tons, $14.60; 601
1,200 tons, $17.52; 1,201 tons and upwards, $20.43.

Sailing vessels same rates up to 500 tons; above 500 tons, $14.60.

Coal can be had in any quantity; price for best Welsh, from $7.30
$7.80.

KINQSTOX DIRECTIONS. 211

Steamers. — ^There is regular commanication with ISew York, Hali-
fax, London, and Liverpool.

Telegraph to Havana and from thence to all parts of the world.

Pilotage inwards, not exceeding 7 feet, $10.94. For each additional
foot or part thereof, $1.46. Outwards, not exceeding 7 feet, $6.81. For
ea<jh additional foot or part thereof, 97 cents.

Dues. — No manifest or health officers' dues. No hospital tax.
Kingston Harbor duties: Vessels under 70 tons, $1.82 for vessels trad-
ing in the tropics; all other vessels, $3.65. From 70 to 160 tons, $4.87;
from 160 to 350 tons, $7.30; from 350 to 850 tons, $8.50; 850 tons and
upwards, $9.73. Light dues: Steamers, 1^ cents per ton, net register,
once a quarter; sailing vessels, 10 cents per ton, net registry, for each
entry.

A Boat Channel marked by stakes, having 3^ feet at low water, has
been dredged close to GaUows Point for the convenience of steam
launches plying between Port Koyal and Kingston.

DirectionB for Leaving. — Having passed the pile off .Greek Pond,
a bushy cay (just north of Fort Augusta) in line with a large cotton
tree on the lowland westward of it leads to the narrows. Sailing ves-
sels will find it advantageous to shift to the fairway at Port Eoyal the
day previous to departure, so as to quit with the land wind at early
dawn, and to get out well clear of the shoals before the sea breeze sets
in.

East Channel. — If bound to windward, the East Channel will, of
course, be the best; but it should only be taken by steamers or vessels
of handy size that will insure staying. The channel can be readily fol-
lowed in thick weather, avoiding the shoal off of Plum Point. The
range marks in South Channel are often obscured.

Turning Marka. — Should the sea breeze overtake a vessel after get-
ting to the eastward of Gun Cay, she may stand toward the Palisades
till the flagstaff of the Ax>ostles Battery is in one with the belfry of
Port Boyal Church, until near Rocky Point, when the staff must be
kept open to the southward of the belfry to avoid the reef off the point.

Eastward of that point use the same turning mark until near mid-
way between Middle and Little Plum Points, when the staff of the
Apostles Battery must not be brought to the northward of the north
part of Fort Charles to clear the shoals off the latter point. When
Kingston Church bears N. 2^ W. (N. 5^ W. mag.), do not stand farther
to the northward than the flagstaff of the Apostles Battery, in line
with that of Fort Charles, to avoid the foul ground off Plum Point.

Standing to the southward toward Lime Cay Shoal, do not approach
it nearer than to bring the flagstaff at Port Henderson just touching
Port Royal Point; and when standing toward Lime Cay, do not come
within 400 yards of the north end. When eastward of it, the high bluff
point at the south part of Green Bay, kept open of the north part of
Lime Cay, will clear the foul ground to the northward of Maiden Rock,

JAMAICA.

iocbing the Eaat Middle Shoals, keep the high cliffe at the
t of Green Bay open t« the northvard of Lime Cay nntti
lem. It is seldom large ships work through this chamie] ; the
es of the vessel and the force of wind and swell shoald be con-
Channel is a narrow vein of deep water throngh the close
hoals which lie sonth and west of Port Boyal. It is nearly
led by sailing vessels leaving at daylight with the laud wind ;

on the east aide are red, and those on the west red and white.
hfiflillft Rook is a very small head, with 22 feet water on it,
ctly at the entrance of the channel. On it there ia a floating
brming with the beacon on Fort Angasta the leading mark
lannel.

)th of wat«r in the vicinity of West Middle Bock beacon has
, and vessels drawing over 20 feet shoald not approach within

of the beacoD.

hiiddle Knoll, with 27 feet water on it, lies N. 82° W. (K. 85°
, I inile from the West Middle baoy. When on the knoll the
Tower near Bock Fort is in one with the sonth knob on Gnn
the beacon on West Middle Bock in line with the easternmost
tree on Port Royal Point.

Uiddle Shoal is a coral bank partially covered with a thin
iiid, and near the center has as little as 2 feet of water on it,
[larticnlarly on the west side. At itsNW. end is a red buoy.
I patch with 5 fathoms water on it S. m° W. (S. 57° W. nia«.),

from the center of the shoal.

HoadB are numerous detiiched rocky shoals, some nearly
iich extend to the eastward from Small Point. A red and
tical striped buoy is moored in 4f fathoms water, on their
e.

rt of the channel is about 800 yards wide; the leading mark
Kt eastward of a shoal with 4^ fathoms water on it. Should
be adrift, the dockyard clock tower on with the eaatem angle
liarles will lead halfway between the shoals and the 27-foot

mrnana Oay. — The eastern side of the South Channel is

it by this small low cay of stones and sand, the trees on which

higher and darker than those on the neighboring islet. A

ance to the northward of it there is a dry sand bore, and fW>m

is nearly connected to the south end of the West Middle Shoal

ledges in some i>arts dry and with deep narrow channele

:he ledges.

)n, 12 feet high, pyramidal in shape and painted red, has been

ar the center of the convl patch (awasli) lying X, 26° W. (JI.

ng.), distant 400 yards from Drunkenmaus Cay.

Knolls. — Searly midway between DrnokiMiinans Cay and the

PORTUGUESE SHOALS CALIFORNIA BANK. 213

Turtle Heads, ou the line of the leading mark, are several small de-
tached heads of hard sand, on which there are 27 and 30 feet water.

Portuguese Shoals are two small banks at the SE. side of the
entrance of the South Channel, and about a mile westward of South
Cays. There are only 6 feet water on the easternmost, 17 to 23 feet on
the other, and a red buoy with a staff and vane is moored in 5
fihthoms water on the western edge, with Healthshire beacon in line
with Healthshire Hummock X. 81^ W. (N. 84° W. mag.); the beacon is
white, and close to the beach in Halfmoon Bay. The channel is here
i mile wide, and the west side is formed by Bush Reef, on which the
sea generally breaks.

Three-Fathom Banks are two det.iched banks lying off the SE.
end of Bush Beef, at the SW. side of the entrance to the South Chan-
nel; the outer is S. 31^ W. (S. 28^ W. mag.) f mile from the Portuguese
buoy. The least water on the inner bank is 19 feet, on the other 18
feet. Vessels after passing the Portuguese Shoal should steer well to
the eastward and take care not to get to leeward on these banks, or
Wreck Reef. There are other patches southward of these; the shoalest
has 5 fathoms water on it.

A buoy with cage, painted red and white in vertical strii)es, is now
moored in 3^ fathoms on the east side of Three-fathom Banks.

Wreck Reef lies about one mile off the point of the same name, and
S. 420 W. (S. 390 W. mag.) ^ miles from the Portuguese Shoals.
Should the vessel be drifted to leeward and unable to weather this reef,
she may run round Its north end and anchor close to leeward of it, to
await the laiul wiud to carry her out again. The south entiance should
not be used. A shoal with a depth of 4J fathoms lies N. 54^ B. (N. 51^
E. mag.) IJ miles from Wreck Beef.

California Bank. — This bank is 2^ miles long in a NW. and S£.
direction, one mile broad, and composed of coral, sand, and shells;
depths of 21 to 27 fathoms were obtained near the center (in lat. 17^
46' N., long. 76^ 47' W.), 25 fathoms at the NW. and SB. ends, and no
bottom at 100 fatlioms close to its SW. edge.

• The NW. end of California Bank lies southwards 9 miles from Plum
Point lighthouse, and 3 miles outside the 100-fathom line of soundings.

Directions. — ^A vessel leaving by the South C'hannel should be under
sail with the land wind at dawn. If^ however, she has good sailing
qualities she may leave with the sea breeze, i)rovided she can lie up S.
8^ E, (S. 11^ E. mag.). Having passed close to tlie westward of West
Middle Bock beacon, keep it in line with the beacon at the SK. angle
of Port Augusta, and a notch in the Liguanea Mountain, N. 0^ E. (X.
30 E. mag.); the latter, however, is difficult for a stranger to recognize,
and is frequently obscured.

If of heavy draft, on approaching the South Knolls, when a gap in
the distant hills comes on with the south extreme of Small Point (which
is conspicuous) X. 6T^ W. (X. 70^ W. mng.), keep n little to the west-

f) >

214 JAMAICA.

ward until the dockyard clock tower comes just open of the east angle
of Fort Charles, and keep it so till the high or southern end of Drank-
enmans Cay bears east (X. 87^ E. mag.) when haul up again on the
leading mark. When Healthshire beacon, which is white and close to
the beach in Ilalfmoon Bay, is just open to the northward of Healthshire
Hummock the vessel will be clear of Portuguese Shoals, and may be
hauled to the wind, or, if bound westward, continue on the same course
clear of the outer shoals of Wreck Eeef, taking care to keep the Apos-
tles Battery well open eastward of Small Point until Avell to the south-
ward.
A vessel will generally have the assistance of a strong outset as far

as Drunkenmans Cay, when she will meet the usual westerly stream
and lieavy swell j therefore, should the land wind faU at this point she
had better anchor under the south end of the cay during the calm which
intervenes, sometimes for several hours, between the breezes, in order
to avoid being set on the shoals to leeward. By no means run the risk
of having to bring up outside the Portuguese Shoals. Should the sea
breeze set in before she has cleared the channel, and she should be
obliged to work out, which is a very hazardous undertaking, except
under most favorable circumstances, do not stand farther to the west-
ward than to bring the notch in the mountain on with the center of a
low house in Port Augusta, nor to the eastward than to bring the not<5h
on with the east end of that fort.

Entering by South Channel. — When approaching Port Boyal from
the southward, Salt Pond Hills bearing north (N. 3^ W. mag.) will clear
Wreck Beefs. Steer up with the dockyard clock tower a little open west
of Drunkenmans Cay, until South Cay comes on with Plum Point light-
house, when the leading mark for South Channel may be brought on,
and proceed as before directed.

Soundings extend for 4= miles to the southward of the cays, and the
edge is very steep, there being in places only 14 fatiioms water at 200
yards within the 100-fathom line. In the fairway of the channel the
bottom is generally composed of mud and sand, and occasionally clay,
but near the reefs it is sand, with portions of broken coral.

Supplies. — ^^'ater, coal, and provisions may be obtained at both
Kingston and Port Royal at reasonable prices.

Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at Port Iloyal Dockyard, at
about llh. Om., and the rise and fall is from 10 to 11 inches. There is
no regular tidal stream, but in general there is an outset from the har-
bor and through the South Channel at the rate of a quarter to one knot
an hour, until as ftir as Drunkenmans Cay, where it takes a more west-
erly direction, and generally increases in strength. Sometimes it will
be found running in tins direction at the rate of 2^ knots ; a good offing
should therefore always be obtained before shaping a course to the
westward.

When the land breezes have been strong, and light southerly ^nnd8
have i)revailed during the day for a short period, it often occurs that

PORTLAND BIGHT— WHITE SHOAL. 215

the current is mnning to the eastward in the morning, even as far as
the East Middle Shoals, when it takes a more southerly direction, and
to the southward of the shoals it will be found setting to the SW. or
WSW., the strength quite depending on the force of the wind that has
been blowing.

Portland Bight. — The highland of Healthshire terminates at Polink
Point. Thence the coast trends to the NW. and sweeps around to the
southward, forming between it and Portland Point an extensive bight.
The shore is skirted by small islets and detached reefs, within which
are several excellent anchorages for vessels of moderate draft. The
outer part of the bight is also protected by numerous reefs and small,
low \M)oden cays, with channels between them capable of admitting ves-
sels of the largest draft. The best channel to enter by isrbetween Pelican
and Bare Bush Cays, through which a vessel will carry from 6 to 8
fathoms of water.

Pelican Cays. — About 3 miles from the northern shore of the bight
are two small, low, bushy cays, nearly J mile apart NNW. and S8E.,
which lie near the center of a rocky ledge, 3 miles in length east and
west, and one mile in breadth. The ledge generally shows itself, and
the we.^t end is dry and steep-to. In the channel to the northward of it
the depth is only 3 fathoms.

Bare Bnsh Cay lies S. 20© W. (S. 17o W. mag.) 23 miles from the Big
Pelican, and rises 800 yards within the NE. end of an oval-shaped coral
bank of the same name.

Morris Shoal, which Ues N. 76o W. (N. 79© W. mag.) 1 J miles from
Bare Bush Oay, is a coral knoll with 4 feet water on it, about 200
yards in extent, steep-to, with a clear channel about J mile wide be-
tween it and Bare Bush Bank, and also between it and the NE. end of
Portland Reef, one mile SW. of it. On the eastern side of the slioal is
a red buoy with a staif and cage in i\ tutlioins.

Portland Reefs and Cay are 4J niile^ in length XNE. and SSW.,
and about 3J miles in breadth from lN)rtland Hluff. Haifa mile within
the SW. end of the reef is Portland Cay, a small, bushy islet; and
about 2 miles N.25o K. (N. 22^ E. mag.) of it are two more similar cays,
called theHalfmoon Cays, J mile apart, NE. and SW., and lying J mile
within the NE. point of the bank, which generally breaks in most parts.
On the Portland Reefs are many shoals and dangers. The chart will be
the best guide, but there is no safe passage through any part of these
reefs for any but the smallest vessels.

Pigeon Island, the largest of the outer group, lies l.J miles west-
ward of the west end of the Pelican Reef. It is low, and steep-to on
its (*ast and south sides. The NW. side forms a small bay, off which
there is «nuhorage in 7 or 8 fathoms water.

White Shoal is a small detached knoll with 2.^ fathoms water on it;
steep-to, lying north J mile from Pigeon Island. A black buoy in 4.J
fathoms lies on the eastern side of the slioal.

216 JAMAICA.

Directions. — Vessels bound into Portland Bight sbould have the
assistance of a x>ilot. In (doming from Port Royal, having passed well to
the southward of Wreck Reef, edge to the westward until the north peak
of Brazalotta Hill bears l!^. 70^ W. (X. 73^ W. mag.). This hill can not
well be mistaken, bei'ig the northernmost of two remarkable elevations
on the western range of mountains, about 800 feet high, with a deep
gap or valley between. Steer in upon this course, and, as the vessel
advances. Pigeon Island will be seen from aloft on tlie same line of
bearing.

If bound to Old Harbor, which is tlie northernmost anchorage in the
bight for vessels of moderate draft, being between Pelican aivd Bare
Bush Cays, a remarkable hummock will be seen on the northern ridge
of mountains, something in the form of a jockey's cap, called Cudjoe
Hill. When this hummock comes in line with the base of the western
slope of the hiU at the east end of Goat Island, N. 6o W. (N. 9^ W.
mag.), haul up with this mark, and it will lead to leeward of thadry
reef at the west end of the Pelican Bank, and between it and White
Shoal, in 5J to CJ fathoms water. When the ^Northern Pelican Cay
bears S. 84° E. (S. 87c^E. mag.) steer N. 31^ W. (N. 34© W. mag.) so a« to
pass about J mile to the SW. of Careening Island. When abreast the
latter island the wharves of Old Harbor will come in sight and will direct
a vessel to an anchorage off them in 4J or 4 fathoms, between Careen-
ing Island and the NE. end of the reef, which front* the western shore
and generally shows itself.

If bound to Long Wharf, liaving entered the channel as before, round
White S^ioal gradually to the northward, and bring the upper house at
Long Wharf in one with the north end of the gap or flat open space
in the mountains, N. 37^ W. (X. 40^ W. mag.). This mark will lead
through the best oi)ening in the reef in 4 fathoms, which is here a mile
from the shore, and when within it anchor, as most convenient, in 3^ or
3 fathoms water.

Beacon. — A beacon, 10 feet high, and surmounted by a triangle 8 feet
acrossatthe bavse, and painted white, has been placed on Careening Island.

Salt River. — The entrance to the anchorage lies between Long and
Salt Islands. Having entered the Pelican Channel and being abreast
the cays, it will be better to shape a course so as to pass around the
south end of Pigeon Island, which is t^teep-to. Thence a N. 42^ W. (N.
450 W. mag.) course 3i miles will leiul to abreast of Salt Island. Kound
its north end at the distance of about 400 yards, steer for the entrance
of the river, and anchor off it in 3 fathoms water, with the south side
of Pigeon Island just in sight to the southward of Salt Island. Pigeon
Island, however, is so low that in a small vessel this mark must be
watched from aloft. Large vessels will find a well sheltered anchorage
in 5 fathoms, (tlose up under the NW. side of Salt Island.

Peake Bay being open to the eastward, with strong sea breezes, a
heavy swell rolls in. The best holding ground will be found in 3J or 4

WEST HAKBOB — ROCKY POINT. 217

&thoms water, under the northern sandy shore, about a mile within
the outer part of the reefs. The entrance bears N, 82^ W. (N. 85° W,
mag.) 3^ miles from Pigeon Island.

West Harbor is an extensive shallow bight on the north side of
Portland Bidge, in wliich there is a depth of only 8 or 9 feet. The
channel is i mile in breadth, and lies between the reefs (which are dry
in places) that form the south side of the entrance into Peake Bay and
those which extend off i mile ^m the NE. point of Portland. The
only anchorage for vessels of large draft is just to the westward of the
northern reef^ in from 5^ to 4 fathoms water, where the holding ground
is good.

Directioiia. — Vcvssels should leave either of these anchorages with
the land wind at early dawn, in order to get clear of the outer reefs
before the sea breeze arrives; should it, however, overtake them before
they get to the eastward of Pigeon Island they may work out in moder-
ate weather either to the northward or southward of it 5 the former will
be the best route, as the water will he smoother. In this case do not
stand too far to the southward, and avoid White Shoal.

Gt>at Island and Cabrietta Point maybe approached by the lead, not
coming within the depth of ^ or 5 fathoms. Should it blow hard it
will be better to anchor under the lee of Pelican Reef until the breeze
lulls or the land wind comes off.

If unable to lay through and the sea is smooth enough to allow of
working out of the Pelican Channel, in standing toward Morris Shoal
do not bring Bare Bush Cay to the southward of 8. 65^ E. (S. 6S0 E.
mag.) ; and in approaching the Pelican Reef do not open the fall of
Brazaletta Hill to the northward of Pigeon Island. A vessel may
stand toward the white water oft* Bare Bush Cay to the depth of 5
fathoms, remembering the 4J-fathonis i)atch between Bare Bush and
Pelican Cays.

Pprtland Ridge is Hat wooded land, of nioderate heiglit, and when
seen from the eastward has the appearance of an island. The 100-
fathom line is 11 miles from this i)art of the shore, and it may be ap-
proached in the day time to the depth of OJ fathoms, at 1 J miles oft".

Cantion — A vessel bound to leeward, however, must be careful to
keep the laud of Portland to the northward of west (S. 87° W. mag.)
to avoid the cays and reefs just described, which are somewhat hidden
by the eastern point.

The curreiit *renerally sets stronfc to the westward, and although the
soundings are regular a vessel at nio:ht should not come within the
depth of 12 fathoms.

Rocky Pointp about 6 miles westward of the south point of Port-
land, and the west end of the table land of the same name, is Ihul for
a distance of 3 mile to the SW. A bank called Robertson Shoal ex-
tends westward and northwestward of the point for a little more than
one mile, 6 feet being the least water on it.

218 JAMAICA. -

Carlisle Bay lies immediately to tlienortliwardofBocky Point, atitl
for .s^nall vessels i» sheltered with the usual breezes as far round as SE.
Aiicliorage will be found off the wharf, on about a N^. i8° B. (N. 45° E.
mag.) be,!iriug, and Rocky Point about 9. 62° E. (8. <i5° E. mag.), in
from 'S\ &) +J fathoms water. A shoal witli 2 fathoms water ekirt* the
shore about | mile off. Westward of Robertson Shoal, iu 5^ fathoms,
is a red buoy with staff and ball.

Directions — Entering Carlisle Bay, Robertson Shoal should not be
roundfd until Kemp Uill is oiteu west of the wliarfiuger's house bearing
N. 3° W., (y. G° W. mag.) when the vessel nmy haul up K. 31° W. (J.'.
34° W. unig.) and anchor iiecording to draft.

The Coast from Carlisle Bay 8wee)Mi inwards with a deep bend to the
N\V. as far as Alligator Point, wliidi is 17 miles fi-oni Itofiky Pointj
Milk and otlier rivers empty themselves in this bight.

Milk River. — Vessels loading here call first at I'tirt lloyai, where
they pay light dues.

The United States is represented by a consular agent.

Bnoy aod Beacon. — A black buoy with stuff and cross, marking the
eastern limit of the ballast ground off Milk River, lies in 4 tittliouis about
a mile oil' shore. '

A white besicon iu the shape of a diamond, on a staff 44 feet high, has
been erected on the eastbank of this river near the mouth. Tliebea4Mm
is visible ft-om a distance of 8 miles between the bearings of N. 3^ E.
(north mag.) and N. 42° W. (N.^4.5o W. mug.)

The Coast. — Between Milk River and Alligator Hole, at 2| miles to
the westward of it, the shore is composed of red and white cliffs 50 feet
high, thence to Alligator Point, sandy beach.

At 3J miles westward of Alligator Hole there is a small stream named
Gut River, which may be recognized by a remarkable bare space on the
steep rising ground over it.

Alligator Point is 30 feet high, whence the land rises to a height of
2,000 feet nt a distance of 2j miles iu a northerly direction.

Bnine Bank, about one mile in extent and rocky, with 4j fathoms
on its shoalest part, lies S. 42^ W. (S. 311° \V. mag.) 9J miles from Milk
River,

Soundings. — Tlie edge of the bank of soundings lies 17 miles south-
ward of Milk River, and 14 miles southward of Alligator Point; there
are depths of 20 fathoms near the edge, and no bottom at 100 fathoms
close to.

Alligator Reef. — Thi-t rocky bank is about 1^ miles long ENE. to
WSW., and diy in places, the small rocky heads just showing aboi
water; it is 2J miles to the southward of Alligator Point and should U
given'u wide berth at night, as » and 10 faClioms, near its outer ed{
(which is steep to), are the uniform depths at that distance from thecoas
Between the east end of the reef and Alligator Point (which may b
passed within J mile) there are 5 to 7 fathoms.

ALLIGATOR POND BAY ^PEDRO BAY. 219

Beacon. — A beacon, about 20 feet above high water, consistiug of an
iron tripod surmounted by a cap colored red and whitein horizontal bands
is placed on the !NE. part of Alligator Beef.

Alligator Pond Bay. — Between Alligator Point and Little Pedro
Point, 3 J miles westward of it, lies Alligator Pond Bay; the shore of
this bay for a distance of 2 J miles westward of Alligator Point is rocky
with low cliffs, thence to Little Pedro Point a sandy beach, the land
behind rising precipitously to 800 feet.

Anchorage. — ^The anchorage in Alligator Pond Bay is in 4^ fathoms
(mud bottom), about i mile from the wharf near the center of the bay;
it is sheltered from the eastward by Alligator Beef, but with westerly
and southwesterly winds a heavy swell rolls in, when the shore should
be cautiously approached on landing, so as to pass close to leeward of
some rocks that lie in the same line of direction as the wharf, at a dis-
tance of 100 yards.

Little Pedro Point, 20 feet high, is a rocky ledge projecting 200
yards from the shore, and land behind rising suddenly 900 feet, thence
gradually to 1,070 feet at a distance of 2 miles northward.

The Coast from Little I*edro Point forms a small bay to the west-
ward, in which there is an indifferent landing, thence it trends westward
7f miles to Pedro Bluff. About 3 miles west of Little Pedro I^oint lies
Cutlass Point, and midway between them there is a large whitish
triangular spot (named the White Horses) at a height of 600 feet, on
the cliffs which rise 1,000 feet nearly pei*pendicular from the sea; J mile
westward of the White Horses there is a remarkable white spot 500
feet above the sea.

The land over Cutlass Point rises abruptly 1,710 feet, thence gradually
2,400 feet to Mt)unt Bellevue at 2 J miles northward of Cutlass Point;
between this point and Pedro Bluff' the coast curves slightly to the north-
ward, forming Jacks Hole.

A rocky ledge, awash, fringes the coast between Little Pedro Point
and Pedro Bluff*, except under the White Horses.

Pedro Blnflf is a prominent headland, rising abrui)tly 220 feet from
the sea, and sloping to 70 feet at § mile inshore, whence the land again
rises gradually to 1,7S0 feet northward of the bluff.

Pedro Bay. — There is occuisionally a heavy swell in this bay, espe-
odally after a continuation of easterly or southeasterly winds, when the
depth of watt^T in the bay decreajses 2 or 3 feet. Landing is not at all
times good. The biiy affords temporary anchorage in 4 J fathoms.

The coast from Pedro Bay to Black Spring Point has several inden-
tations, the largest of which is Frenchman Bay. This part of the coast
is reef-bound, witli the exception of one or two passes known to fisher-
men and to the pilots residing along the coast, who look out for vessels
making the pilot signal.

From Bla<ik Spring Point, whicli has on it a low sand heiip, the land
rises 520 feet to Sand Hill Range, at a distance off ™ic to the north-
eastward.

^20 JAMAICA.

Starve Out Bay. — A ledge of reefe awash extends around the shore
of this bay, except iu the NE. part, where there is a small sandy bea<;h,
from wliich a morass commences and extends between the sand hills
that fringe the coastline and Sand Hill Eauge to beyond Black Biver.

The bay affords a temporary anchorage in 4 fathoms J mile from
the shore, and is used occasionally by small vessels bound to the east?
ward, when unable to work against the cmreut, which, after a contin-
uation of easterly winds, sets from one to 1^ knots an hour to the west-
ward.

Parattee, or Sand Hill Point, is low, having on it a few palm trees.
The coast reef projects f mile westward from this point, and extends in a
northerly direction as far as the line of reefs that protects the anchorage
off Black Eiver.

Banks — Blossom Bank, situated 10 miles southward of Luana Point,
extends over a space of about 16 square miles, and has on it depths
varying from 18 to 26 fathoms; it is separated from the bank extending
from the south coast of Jamaica by a deep channel about IJ miles in
breadth.

]S"ew B^nk, on which there is a depth of from 15 to 23 fathoms, is
situated 8 miles westward of Luana Point, and covers about 13 square
miles. Both these banks are of coral formation.

Black River Anchorage. — Between Parattee Point and the mouth
of Black Eiver, 4^ miles distant, the coast extends north for 2 miles,
and theh, trending to the NE. and westward, forms a bight, nearly in
the center of which is the entrance of Black Eiver.

Moco Point, IJ miles westward of the river entrance, is formed of
large mangrove trees 25 to 30 feet in height. Between this and Mal-
colm Point, distant a mHe, is Hunt Bay, fringed with mangrove trees.

Commencing at the beach under the courthouse — a large two-story
building with portico in front and wings connected by archways — and
gradually extending its distance to J mile off Moco Point, extends a
reef, which thence follows the coast line into Hunt Bay. Malcolm
Point has also a small fringing reef.

Malcolm Bay, between Malcolm Point and Long Acre Point, has
good temporary anchorage for vessels waiting for a pilot.

From Long Acre to Burnt Ship Point, one mile westward, is a sandy
beach, off which Doctor Eeef and other foul ground extends seaward J
mile. Thence to Luana Point, WNW. a mile, are sandy beaches and
rocky ledges alternately.

Shoals and Reefs. — Off Parattee l*oint the foul ground gradually
increases its distance from the shore from J mile to 1^ miles, where
the bay commences to trend to the NE. Thence the foul ground,
including Barrack and Kavient Eeefs, which have several patches and
sharp heads of rock, extends to the W2s^W. 2 miles; according to local
Information these are rapidly growing. Inshore of Barrack Reef extend
the Inner Barrack Reefs, having 2 and 2J fathoms to within 1,600 yards
of the hospital, which was formerly used as barracks.

BLACK RIVER BAY DIRECTIONS — BLACK RIVER. 221

A coral patch about 100 yards in diameter, and having over it a depth
of 6 feet, is situated at the eastern part of Black Biver Anchorage.

From this shoal, Black River Church bears K. 3^ £. (north mag.) dis-
tant lA miles, and Pynado or Crane Wharf 8. 81o E. (S. 84° E. mag.)
distant l^V niiles.

Diractioiui. — In entering Black Biver Bay, Pedro Bluft' bearing S.
560 E, (S, 590 £, mag.) and open of Blackspring Point, leads clear of
the reefs oft' Parattee Point. Blackspring Point open of Parattee Point
S. 500 £. ^g. 530 E. mag.) clears Barrack and Bavient Beefs. The east
side of the trees at Malcolm Point, N. 40© E. (N. 37o E. mag.), in line
with the west end of the sand in Hunt Bay, and the highest point of
the hills behind, leads westward of the reefs in 4^ fathoms water.

The church, N. 79o E. (N. 76o E. mag.), in line with the north shoul-
der of Santa Cruz Mountains, and a little south of where they cut the
hiUs behind them, leads to an anchorage in 4} fathoms sand and mud^
with Hodges Wharf bearing N. 3° E. (north mag.). To a vessel
approaching from the westward this mark leads clear of all shoals.

Vessels may anchor off the town in 3 fathoms, mud, with the church
bearing F. 26? E. (X. 23° E. mag.) distant 1,400 yards. The clearing
mark for the east side of Inner Barrack Beef is the south end of the
trees at Malcolm Point, N. 50^ W. (N. 53° W. mag.), in line with two large
cotton trees to the southward of Font Hill House. During strong
westerly and sQuth westerly winds a heavy sea roUs into the anchorage^
making landing difficult and at times impossible.

Pilots take schooners of light draft and occasionally larger vessels in
ballast to the anchorage by passing close to the eastward of the Barrack
and Inner Barrack Beefs.

Ballast Oronnd lies to the west of a north and south line drawn
through a large white house midway between the church and court-
house, and in less than 10 feet of water.

Black River flows from the north and east, through a large morass,
and is navigable for 30 miles of its course; beyond are rapids and falls.
There is a bar close to the river mouth, having IJ to 4 feet on it, the
depth varying with the strength of the outpour. The water is fresh 3
to 5 miles up the river, according to the season of the year. The river
abounds with flsh and alligators.

The town of Black Biver stands on the west side of the river facing .
the bay, its church, courthouse, and hospital being conspicuous from
seaward. It has a population of about 1,200, and, as a shipping port,
it ranks third after Kingston. Poultry and yams are plentiful; fresh
meat on Saturdays only. Good water is obtainable. Vessels always
leave here, as also all other ports in Jamaica, before August 1, as after
that date the insurance is doubled in consequence of the hurricane
season beginning.

The sea water at Black Eiver has a milky appearance, due to the
nature of the bottom (fine sand and clay), while at Savannah-la-Mar,

222 JAMAICA.

20 miles to the NW., it ia perfectly clear, enabliiig the bottom to be
seen In 8 fatbonm.

Coaat. — From Luaii& I'oint the coast trends about NW. by N. for 2}
miles to White House Point; it is steep-to and clear of offlying dangers,
the depth of 100 fathoms being found at about a mile offshore.

Seals Cove, a small bat well-sheltered loading place for cargo boats,
lies about midway between Luana and White House Points; the
entrance is not easily recognized by strangers.

There is a limited anchorage off the entrance to Seals Cove in 7 fatbr
oms, sand and rock, with the large trees on Mount Edgecumbe open of
White House Point; this anchorage is not recommended, and should
not be taken without a pilot.

Anchorage. — Vessels may anchor off Whit« Hoase Point in 7 fath-
oms, mud, with that point bearing S. 87° E. (east mag.) distant 100
yards; the soundings decrease rapidly ftom the edge of tlie bank, but
the holding ground is better than that off Seals Cove.

A pilot should be employed, as the anchoring ground is of small
extent. Vessels occasionally load at this anchorage, but their cargoes
are more usually conveyed in cargo boats to Black Eiver.or Savannah-
la- Mar for shipment.

Pimento Point, distant nearly 3 miles ftom White Honse Point, baa
a reef extending a short distance firom it. Between "V^hite House and
Pimento Points the coast is fringed by offlying ree&, on the sooth side
of which the depth rapidly increases.

Parker Bay, situated one mile eastward of Pimento Point, affords
good anchorage for small vessels within the outer reefb, the channel
through which, though not long, is narrow, and carries a depth of 2^
fathoms The basin inside deepens to 3| fathoms over sandy bottom.

Leading Marks. — To proceed through the channel between the outer
reefs, bring the east extreme of wharf honae in line with the western of
two towers (which stand on a grassy slope } mile inland) bearihg N,
Iflo E. ( N. 70 E. mag).

Coast — From Pimento Point the costst trends NW, by W, for IJ
miles to Crab Pond Point, which has a reef extending from it, and then
N NW. for ^ miles to Belmont Point

Moor Reef— This danger lies f mile N. 47° W. (N. 50= W. mag.) of
Crab Pond Point and ^ mile offshore.

• Black Spring Point, open west of Luana Point, bearing S. 47° E. (S-
60° E. mag.), leads neariy a mile SW. of Moor Eeef.

Blewflelds, about 2^ miles northward of Crab Pond Point, may be
known by the chuich, schoolhouse, and the buildings on a large estate
The anchorajte is within the rocky ledge wliich lies iibout IJ miles firom
the shore, and has a depth across it of 3h to 4j fathoms; Luana Poin
just open leads westward of it.

Water may he obtained at a small stream in Blewflelds Bay, but i

BLEWFIELDS ^DIRECTIONS SAVANNAH-LA-MAE^ 223

more convenient place will be found around the bluff, at the north end
of the bay.

Directions. — Standing in for the anchorage keep the overseer's house
in line with the southern and lowest part of a deep hollow in the moun- '
tain bearing N. 71^ E. (N. 68^ B. mag.), which leads across the ledge
in 3^ fathoms. As the water is very cleaBy any dark spots may be seen
and avoided. When the ledge is crossed, keep to the northward with
the Wesleyan Ohapel about N. 26<^ E. (K. 23^ mag.) for the anchorage
in about 5^ fathoms. Vessels of large draft may anchor close to the
west side of the ledge in 9 or 10 fathoms, but it must be approached
cautiously under easy sail, as the ledge is steepto. The land in this
neighborhood is lofty, and 2^ miles inland rises to the height of 2,000
feet.

The soundings in this bay are irregular, over sand, rock, and weed.

The best anchorage is in 5 fathoms, with the Wesleyan Ohapel on
Friars Cap bearing N. 12° B. (S. 9^ B. mag.) and the overseer's house
bearing N. 82o E. (N. 79^ E. mag.).

The overseer's house (which has a veranda) is situated on a hill about
150 feet high and i mile inland.

Bluff or Patadise Point, situated NW, of Belmont Point, distant 4^
miles, projects ^ mile from the line of coast, and has a reef extending
from its southern extremity.

From Bluff Point the reefs which form the south side of Savannah-la-
Mar anchorage extend in a W. by 8. direction.

SaTannah-la-Mar may be readily distinguished by the town (an
iron market being a prominent object), which stands on the shore of a
low and flat plain of considerable extent. The ridge of hills bounding
this plain on the north is very remarkable, and one of the peaks, called
the Dolphin Head, also serves as a guide to the locality. The anchor-
age is formed by a line of reefs running alongshore and abreast the
town, about 1^ miles off, with channels between them. The most con-
spicuous object in this town is a ruined fort at its southern extremity,
surmounted by a tree and a small building.

A beacon is on the shore at the edge of the mangroves, 700 yards
eastward of the fort.

The United States is represented by a consular agent.

Supplies. — Provisions can be obtained, also good water.

Southeast Chanuel is a narrow opening in the outer reef about 70
yards wide, between a steep rock on the eastern side with less than 6 feet
water on it, and two shoals of 10 feet and 6 feet water on the western
side.

The beacon in line with the east side of Dolphin Head, bearing X.
no W. (X. 14° W. mag.), leads through Southeast Channel in a depth
of 19 feet smooth water.

Within this channel the depth increases to 3J and 4 fathoms, over a
bottom of sand and mud, shoaling gradually to the shore.

224 JAMAICA.

Lad Passage, If miles westward of Southeast Ohanael, is 800 yards
wide, and has in it a depth of 4 fathoms.

The western side of Lee Passage is formed by a shoal (known as
"Broad Stag'' Shoal, close south of which a red buoy is moored in 4J
fathoms of water) of 9 feet situated 400 yards eastward of Great
Breaker, and the eastern side by a coral reef with from 2 to 3 fathoms
over it.

West Point, open south of St. Johns Point, bearing N. 67o W. (N, 70o
W. mag.), leads § mile south of Great Breaker.

A detached house on the beach, f mile westward of the fort, in line
with a round hill (the highest which is seen eastward of Dolphin Head)
bearing ]^. 12^ B. (N, 9^ B. mag.), leads through Lee Passage in mid-
channel.

Vessels of light draft approaching from the westward can proceed to
an anchorage immediately south of the town by bringing the beacon in
line with a notch in the distant hills bearing N". 34^ B. (N. 31^^ E. mag.) ;
this mark leads in 2f fathoms between two shoals situated about 1,200
yards south of the fort.

When passing through Lee Passage, the notch should be kept open
west of the beacon, and when proceeding between the two shoals it
should be kept open just east of it.

The marks here given, except the beacon and Dolphin Head, are not
readily made out. The Great Breaker always breaks. Strangers
should take a pilot for either passage. Competent pilots may be
obtained.

Vessels, when approaching -this part of the coast, should on no
account get into soundings unless intending to anchor at the ballast
grounds outside the reef, as it is steep-to. With a strong trade this
anchorage is by no means desirable, and risk will be run of losing an
anchor. The west side of the plain of Savannah-la-Mar terminates a
short distance NW. of St. Johns Point, and from thence to South
Negril Point the land is of moderate elevation.

Coast. — Between Savannah-la-Mar and St. Johns Point the coast is
fronted by an extensive bank of soundings, on which are numerous
coral heads of from 2 to 3 fathoms.

Vessels, when approaching this part of the coast, should on no
account get into soundings, unless intending to anchor off Hope Wharf,
situated If miles eastward of St. Johns Point, which should not be
done without the aid of a local i>ilot.

Between St. Johns Point and West Point the only places where land-
ing can be effected are at Little Bay and Homers Cove, situated 2J and
3 miles respectively NW. of St. Johns Point.

Long Bay. — South Negril Point, the extreme west end of Jamaica,
is bold, round, rocky, and steep-to, and between it and North Negril
Point, which bears N. 12^ E. (N. 9^ E. mag.) 6 miles, the shore recedes
and forms Long Bay, about 1.J miles deep. Tlie edge of soundings run?

BOOBY CAY GREEN ISLAND HARBOR. 225

nearly north from the former point, and extends oat about 2 miles from
the head of the bay .

Sandy Beef, a circalar reef i mile in diameter, lies N. 23° E. (S, 28^
E. mag.) of South Negril Point, distant 2f miles; rocks and foul ground
occupy the spaiie between Sandy Reef and Booby Cay.

Anchorage. — ^Yessels can anchor in Long Bay in 4 to 5 fathoms,
sand and rock, with South Negril Point bearing S. 20© W. (S. 17o W.
mag.), distant 1^ miles, and the westernmost houses on the beach, situ-
ated nearly one mile within that point, bearing S. 8^ E. (S. 11^ E. mag.).

Booby Oay lies ^ mile off shore, about 1^ miles to the southward of
North Negril Point, and the coast between forms a small bay, called
Negril Harbor, which, however, is seldom visited even by droghers, and
can not be recommended as a safe anchorage. The ground both north-
ward and westward of the cay for i mile is foul with rocky heads.

Coast — ^From North Negril Point the coast, which is clif^ and about'
50 feet high, trends NNE!. for a distance of 1^ miles to Orange Point;
this extent of coast is clear of off-ljring dangers. It then continues iu
a northeasterly direction for 8 J miles to Pedro Point, a bold, promin'ent
cliff which forms the NW. extreme of the island, and is somewhat sim-
ilar to Pedro BluflF.

Orange Islet is a small islet lying close to the coast at } mile east-
ward of Orange Point; foul ground extends from it to the eastward.

Orange Bay, one mile eastward of Orange Point, recedes about ^
mile, but is too shallow to afford anchorage; the entrance to this bay
is foul.

Coast. — Between Samuel Point, the eastern entrance point of Orange
Bay, and Southwest Point, which bears from it K 37^ E. (N. 34© E.
mag.), distant 1^ miles, the coast is composed of sand and rock.

Rhodes Bay is the local name of an indentation lying midway between
these i>oints; temporary anchorage may be obtained off this bay iu 8
fiathoms, sand and rock, with Southwest Polht bearing N. 48^ £. (N.
450 B. mag.), and Samuel Point S. 9° W. (S. 6° W. mag.) ; the edge of the
bank on this part of the coast is steep-to.

Ghreen liBdand Barbor is a small cove about 2^ miles NE. of Orange
Bay. It is about f mile deei), and little more than 200 yards wide
between the reefs which skirt the shore on either side of the entrance,
and is only fit for vessels pf light draft. Being open to the northward,
a heavy sea rolls in with these winds, rendering loading or unloading
impossible, and bringing in sand which is said to be gradually filling
it up.

Directions. — ^To enter this harbor bring the western side of a yellow
house, situated on the beach at western side of the head of the harbor, in
line with a house on a hill about 350 yards south of it, bearing S. 8° E.
(S. 11^ E. mag.) easterly ; this mark leads close to the western edge of the
reef which forms the east side of the harbor. On this line a vessel will
carry a depth of 5i fathoms between the reefs, and being within them
18402 15"'

"WHS

^ =

^f-"-

226 JAMAICA.

she may anchor according to draft. The soundings gradaally decrease
|,' towards the shore, and with the inner wharf on the eastern side bear-

J:( ing S. 870 E. (east mag.) the depth will be only 16 feet; within this it

|i' shoals rapidly to 9 feet, with the fort on the west point bearing M", 87°

^ W, (west mag.).

f-- Coast. — Between the eastern entrance point of Green Island Harbor

'I' and Lances Point, a distance of 3 miles in a northeasterly direction, the

^- coast is indented by three small bights, known as Negro Bay, Davis

and Cousin Coves.
From Lances Point the coast, with two small indentations, trends
^ NE. f B. tbr IJ miles to Pedro Point, and then in a more direct line a

low rocky coast with hills rising behind it trends east for 2J miles to
•> the west entrance point of St. Lucea Harbor. Pedro Point is steep-to,

but eastward of it the bank shoals more gradually to the shore.
Davis Cove is a temporary anchorage for droghers, lying about 2^
.;' miles NB. of Green Island.- All this part of the shore, with the excep-

tion of the immediate vicinity of Green Island, which is low and sur-
rounded by reefs, being bold and steep-to a vessel may stand to within
a mile of it.

St. Lucea Harbor, although of small dimensions, is one of the best

Imrbors on the noi'th side of Jamaica. Its entrance is about GOO yards

K wide, but, witliin, it sweeps round into a most picturesque basin capa-

V ble of receiving vessels of the largest size. Its position may be readily

recognized by the fort, church, and barracks, which stand near each

other on the western side of the entrance. From an oflBng it will be

found by bringing the Dolphin Head to bear about S. 8° B. (S. 11^ E.

mag.).

; Lucea Point is a low rocky headland skirted by a ledge for 100 yards,

and the eastern shore within it as far as Cane Point is also foul to the

distance of 200 yards. A reef, which breaks, runs oflf S. 53^ B. (S. 56°

E. mag.) 200 yards from the fort on the western side 5 the western shore

is also foul to about the same distance.

Supplies are good and water may be procured from the town, or at
a well to the northward of Georgia River, on the east side of the harbor,
at from 50 cents to $1 a ton.

Hospital Reef extends about 400 yards to the northward of Point
Antonio; the great house at Point Estate, touching the southern cliffs
of Lucea Point east (X. 87'^ E. mag.), leads northward of it.

Buoy. — A conical- shaped buoy, painted white, is moored in 2 J fath-
oms on the edge of Pit Bank, with the SB. extreme of the fort bearing
N. 280 E. (X. 2oo E. mag.), and Morley Hill House west (S. 87o W
mag.).
Directions. — Approsiching St. Lucea from the westward there is nc
;. danger except the Hospital Reef, but in running down from the east

ward keep a good offing until past Buckners Reef, which lies about J
* mile from the shore and 2J miles eastward of the harbor. Morely Hill

ST. LUCEA DIRECTIONS GREAT RIVER. 227

-If*

»»•

■ "V

:*'

.'^l

*\. a

House shut in by the fort, clears Honeycomb Beef, but there is no %
object in rounding Lucea Point closely. Haying opened the harbor,
steer in mid-channel and when the courthouse comes open of Morley
Hill, edge away to the 8W. and anchor as convenient. A good berth
for a heavy ship is with the fort bearing N. 19^ W. (K 22^ W. mag.)
and the courthouse (painted yellow, with a clock) in line with the Bap-
tist Chapel S. 82o W. (8. 79o W. mag.), in 6J fathoms water. Farther
eastward a vessel will be exposed to Xorthers, which at times send in a
heavy sea. Vessels loading may go as far in as to bring the fort !N^. 9^
E. (X. 6^ E. mag.) in 3^ or 4 fathoms water. The bottom is mud. Should
a vessel have to work out, in standing towards the eastern shore do not
go farther than to bring the house on Barbara Hill in line with a house
above it on Thorn Hill; but tack short of this line, especially near Oane
Point, as it leads close to tlie coral bank.

To pass eastward of tlie reef extending eastward of Antonio Point, . ;^

tlie west point of entrance, bring a detached house about 100 feet
above the level of the sea, and situated \ mile west of Thorn Hill, in
line with Dolphin Head, bearing S. 5'^ E. (S. 8^ E. mag.), but it is a very
close mark. The edge of the reef off the fort is, however, plainly visi-
ble, so that vessels can steer round it and anchor as convenient.

Coast. — Between Lucea Point and Mosquito Cove the coast is low,
and composed alternately of sand and rock, with a bank of soundings
extending to seaward for a distance of about J mile. South of Lucea
Point, at a distance of one mile inland, the hills attain an elevation of
800 feet.

Mosquito Cove, about 3 miles to the eastward of St. Lucea, is a
narrow well-sheltered inlet capable of receiving vessels of large draft.
It is about a mile in length north and south, butat its entrance between
the reefs which skirt it at a short distan(;e on either side, it is little
more than 100 yards wide; it, however, gradually widens within, and at
its inner end forms a basin about 600 yards in diameter, in which the
depth is from 3 to 2J fathoms. A vessel will sail in with the sea
breeze, but as no marks can be given, and the cove being so narrow,
the assistance of a pilot will be recjuired. In approaching, avoid the
Buckners lieef, which lies about % mile N\V. of it at a long J mile from
the shore, with a channel of 6 fathoms within it. A vessel may pass
round either end of this reef, and soundings will be found J mile out-
side it.

Round Hill BlufL — The bank of soundings to the depth of 100
fathoms extends about i mile north of Round Hill Bluff. Reefs extend

about i mile from the shore between Mosquito Cove and Round Hill
Bluff', and when working along this part of the coast, a vessel should
tack before striking soundings.

Great River discharges itself into a small bay at about a mile to
the eastward of Round Hill Bluff, a remarkable bold wooded headland^
about 5J miles to windward of Mosquito Cove, and the same distance

228 JAMAICA.

to leeward of Montego Bay. It is protected on the north by a reef,
within which there is anchorage for two or three vessels of moderate
draft. The anchorage off this river is used as a quarantine station for
Montego Bay; the river may be recognized from the offing by a red
bridge which spans it. In the event of being caught by a Norther in
the bight of Montego Bay^ and not able to fetch that anchorage or
weather Round Hill Bluff, which is foul for nearly J mile off, a vessel
may run for this place as a last resource by observing the following
directions.

Dirdctions. — Being off the anchorage, steer in for it on about a 8.
260 W. (S. 23^ W. mag.) bearing, and having made out the point of the
reef, which shows itself, pass close round it, leaving it on the port hand;
then luff up, shorten sail, and anchor immediately the vessel is head to
wind, as near the reef as possible, as there wiU be only room to veer
out 100 yards, and be in 3 fathoms. It will perhaps be safer to drop
both anchors at once, to prevent dragging. The river is navigable for
flat-bottome<l boats to a considerable distance.

Winds and Weather. — When seeking an anchorage off the north
coast of Jamaica the possibility of a gale from the northward should
always be borne in mind. These* storms are most prevalent during the
autumn and winter mouths, and are invariably accompanied by thick
rain, squalls, and heaVy seas.

Montego Bay. — From Bound Hill the shore continues its easterly
direction for about 5 miles, then bends suddenly to the northward for
3 miles, terminating in a low gradually rounding point (Montego Point),
which may be said to form the north end of Montego Bay. The head
of this bight is filled with low mangrove cays, known as the Bogue Cays,
skirted by reefs to the distance of J mile, almost wall sided, with 20
fathoms water at about 100 yards off. To the northward of the cays
the low shore sweeps round with a slight inward curve, forming the bay,
which between the reefs is nearly f mile wide north and south, and
from the town, on the eastern side of this bight, to the edge of sound-
ings about f mile deep.

The north and east sj^es of the bay are also foul to the distance of
400 yards. Between the town of Montego and Sandy Point the coast
is fonned by a rocky cliff about 20 feet high.

On the eastern side of the harbor, northward of the town, are' the
remains of a former breakwater, part of which is above water.

The ballast ground is situated in the S W. part of the bay. A railway
is being built^which will connect the town with Kingston. Population
about 6,000. The Marine Hospitiii, on Old Fort Point, is a conspicuous
object.

The United States is represented by a consular agent.

Anchorage. The anchorage in the bay is ([uite safe during the period
of the ordinary land and sea breezes, which range from NNE. to SE.j
but between November and March, when Xortliers sometimes blow in

MONTEGO BAV DIRECTIONS. 229

accompanied by a lieaA'y 8ea, a Hccoud auc^or may liave to be dropped^
and accidents have occurred.

Si]|>plio& — Water and provii^ioiis of all kinds can be readily obtained
at Montego.

Commimication — ^BCaiL There is a communication directly witii
Kew York by steamer, and the Government Postal Telegraph connects
all the principal towns on the island.

Harbor Light There is now a harbor light on Parish Wharf, show-
ing a red light as a goide to the anchorap^e.

Direction. — ^Montego Bay being an 0}>en I'oadsti^atl there is no diffl-
colly in getting to the anchorage, ext^ept irom itd generally crowded
state, especially from December to June. Approaching it from the east-
ward run down along the shore at the distance of about 2 miles, haul-
ing gradually round the ree&, in 9 or 10 fathoms, which may almost be
skirted by the eye, the water is so clear. Having passed to the west-
ward of the point, haul to the southward along the reef, and when the
church comes open bearing S. 65^ E. (S. 68^ E. mag.) the vessel will be
southward of the SW. part of the northern reef. Anchor as most con-
Tenient, with Sandy Point, which is a little northward of Old Fort
Point, shut in. Sandy Point just open of Old Fort Point leads along
the edge of the bank, which is steep-to. A good berth will be with the
church jfrom S. 87o E. (east mag.) to N. 82^ E. (N. 79^ E. mag.) and Old
Fort Point X. 2^ W. (N. 5© W. mag.) in lOJ fathoms of water. In winter
the farther to the nortliward the berth is taken the better, as the vessel
will get the protection of the reef, but the holding ground is not so good.
In anchoring be prepared to veer out a good scope of cable at once, or
the vessel may drag off the bank.

' The courthouse has a white tower and a clock; it is more conspicuous
than the church and is likely to be mistaken for it. The church is nearly
hidden by ccwoanut trees; it has a dingy looking steeple and a clock.
A new market place with a belfry is erected near the courtlmuse. The
town is the largest on the north side of Jamaca; about 50 vessels visit
it in each year.

The Coast from Montego Bay takes an E. by N. direction for 6 miles
to Duns Point, the north extreme of Jamaica. It then trends a little
southward of east for 10 miles to i'almouth. This part of the island,
as liar eastward as St. Ann, is generally low, highly cultivate<l, and
backed by hills of moderate elevation. In beating up from Montego
Bay, the set of the current should in the first place be found, and taken
advantage of accoiniingly. Should there be none, keep the shore aboard
during the evening, which may be dcme without fear, to catch the land
wind. If it is found more advantageous to seek an offing, the mariner
will find a goo<! jo^ide a.s to his ])rogres8 to windward in the peak of
Turquino, the highest and most remarkable mountain on the south side
of Cuba, and generally visible.

Between Sandy Point (Montego Bay) and Falmouth Harbor the bank

230 JAMAICA.

of soundings to the depth of 100 fathoms extends about J mUe from the
shore. Numerous wharves have been built on this part of the coast^
from which i)roduce is conveyed by cargo boats to either Montego Bay
or Falmouth Harbor.

Eastward of Montego Bay the hills, at the distance of 1^ miles inland,
attain an elevation of 1,000 feet, maintaining generally that height until
within 3 miles of Falmouth Harbor, toward which they gradually slope.

The shore reef extends generally about 400 yards from the coast, but
off Long Bay (10 miles east of Montego Point) a depth of 3 fathoms is
found at a distance of ^ mile off shore.

Falmouth, a reef harbor of considerable extent, is capable of receiv-
ing a small number of vessels not drawing over 16 feet, moored head
and stem, and may be readily known by the public l^uildings of the
town, which fringe the beach. Vessels drawing 18 feet have entered
the port, and have departed drawing 19 feet.

The channel through the reef being extremely narrow and intricate,
a pilot is necessary for a stranger. Though it is buoyed, yet the buoya
occasionally break adrifU A beacon painted white, in the form of a
pyramid surmounted by circular disks (to reflect the sun's rays), stands
on the shore close eastward of the town, and greatly facilitates naviga-
tion. The land wind (with which only this anchorage can be left) is
frequently interrupted for some days, but more especially so during
the winter months. When once in the harbor the anchorage is a safe
one.

The TInited States is represented by a consular agent.

Buoys and Beacons. — ^A can buoy, painted in red and white vertical
stripes, is moored in 13 feet on Hopewell Rock, with the courthouse bear-
ing 8. 690 W. (S. 660 W. mag.); Shore Beacon S. 14© W. (S. 11^ W/
mag.).

A red warping buoy is moored in 11 feet, northward of Spider Beefs.

The SW. extremity of Middle Shoal is marked by a beacon consist-
ing of a staff and triangle painted white.

The SW. extremity of Inner Shoal is marked by a white buoy.

The eastern side of the entrance is marked by a red and white striped
buoy, placed on the western side of the outer reef.

Entrance. — The channel lies between the red and white striped buoy
and West Triangle Eock, over which there is a dei)th of 13 feet water;
midway between West Triangle Rock and the buoy is East Triangle
Bock, with 19 feet water over it and .I J fathoms close-to on either side.

Within the entrance the channel deepens to 7 fathoms, with reefs
almost awash on either side, and turns SW. towards the courthouse.
It runs thus for 400 yards and then turns south and east through either
of three channels to the anchorage.

These channels pass on either side of and are formed by Middle or
Whit and Inner or Harbor Shoals.

FALMOUTH DIRECTIONS. . 231

Bopewell Rock projects a slight distance into the channel from the
center of the eastern side.

Middle Shoal is 80 feet long :SE. and SW., 40 feet wide, and has 4
feet least water npon it.

Inner Shoal, slightly larger than Middle Shoal and lying SVY. of it,
lias also » de]>tli of 4 feet. •

Harbor Rock. — At 100 yards sonth of Middle Shoal is Harbor
Kock, a pinnacle having 18 feet of water over it, which rapidly deex>en8
again all round to 4 fathoms.

Spider Reef. — This reef, extending from the point near the custom-
house, fonns the southern limit to the harbor.

Direstioiui- — In entering the harbor carry small sail and con from
the masthead. Bring the beacon on the coast line eastward of the
town, bearing 8. 20o W. (S. 17° W. mag.), in line with the KE. side of
a house one mile inland, and proceed until the BE. corner of the court-
house, bearing S. 59^ W. (S. 56^ W. mag.), opens north of the memorial
stone of the Baptist Chapel behind it, when immediately keep away on
that mark and enter the anchdlrage by the mo^t convenient of the three
passages, selecting a good berth in one of the tiers in which vessels
are x>h^ed. The passage to leeward of Inner Shoal should be avoided
unless the wind is well to the northward, or a vessel will not shoot far
enough to windward to be well clear of Spider Keef on taking her
cable. If arriving late in the afternoon (when the land wind may be
expected at any moment), be prepared with stern moorings or a kedge.

Carrent — ^When the sea breezes blow continuously for some days
without the intermission of the land wind, there is at times, owing to
the constant beat on the reefs and the amount of water forced into the
harbor, a current induced which sets to windward through the anchor-
age and is strongest with the strongest winds. It is often the' case
that vessels are riding entirely by their stern moorings with their bower
cables hanging up and down, the current being stronger tiian the wind.

Supplies. — Provisions are ]>l(»utifal. A water pipe is laid at the
edge of the harbor in a convenient place for watering. A water rate,
according to tonnage, is levied on all vessels entering the harbor.

Ballast and Quarantine G-ronnd. — ^The ballast ground lies off Fort
Point, to which it must be sent in boats for discharge. The quarantine
ground being at Great River (the same as for Montego Bay) renders it
necessary to obtain pratique before entering the reefs, departure in a
sailing vessel being impossible during the sea breeze.

Coast. — From Falmouth the coast is sandy and rocky alternately,
trending easterly for 10 miles and then receding and forming the bay
into whicli Rio Bneno empties itself; the small town of the same name
being situated in the SW. corner of the bay. The lOO-fathom line of
soundings along this part of the coast lies barely J mile off shore, whilst
immediately inland a gradual slope commences, attaining its highest
point, .HOO feet, about half-way between Falmouth and Rio Bueno,

!■*■

i 232 . JAMAICA.

towards which latter bay it again gradually falls; at 2 miles inland a
f - range of hills from 800 to 1,000 feet high extends eastward from Martha

Brae Elver as £ar as the gorge of Rio Bueno.

Rio Bueno, once an important shipping roadstead, may be recog*
nized by some remarkable slate-colored bare patches on the face of bluff
taye- topped cliffs of from 100 to 150 feet elevation, lying one mile east-
ward of it; or by the church and houses in the SW. corner of the bay.

Anchorage. — It is not advisable to attempt this anchorage without a
pilot or having previously sent in a boat to mark spots for each anchor.
Mooring is recommended as the only protection against Northers or
severe weather, and is necessary at all times with more than two ves-
sels on the bank, in iuklition to ,a kedge astern. The best anchorage
is with the east extreme of the sandy beach bearing S. 76° E. (S. 79° B.
mag.) and the mouth of Eio Bueno bearing S. 48o W. (S. 45^ W. mag.).

Water. — A plentiful supply of good water can be obtained at a short
distance up the river. The port of entry for Rio Bueno is Falmouth.

Coast. — From Rio Bueno the coast curves gradually round for 2^
miles to another similar bight named Dry ilarbor. Oft* this coast, which
is rooky, soundings to the 100-fathom line extend for \ mile, whilst
immediately inland bluff cliffs rise perpendicularly 100 feet, shelve
quickly for another 50 feet, and thence gradually slope to the highest
point, 300 feet, midway between the heads of the two bights. The
inland hills, having slightly decreased in height, again rise flrom Dry
Harbor and from the gorge of the Rio Bueno, quickly attaining l,i>00
feet elevation, at about which height and 2 to 3 miles inland the range
continues to the eastward parallel to the coast.

Dry Harbor. — The conspicuous cliff's eastward of Rio Bueno serve
to indicate the position of this harbor, it being situated 2 miles eastward
of them. Across the moutli of the harbor stretches a coral reef, for
the most part nearly awash; but at two-thirds of the distance across
from tlie west side of the harbor is a narrow channel carrying 2J fath-
oms on the leading njurk, with coral heads and shoal water close-to
on either side of it. Tlie only leading marks are, unfortunately, not
at a sufficient distance Irom each other to be good. The channel is
marked by two spar buoys, but little reliance can be placed upon them,
and a stranger visiting the port for the first time should take a pilot.
After crossing the bar the water rapidly deepens to 25 and 30 fath-
oms, but there is a shoal spit 700 yards south of the bar and close east-
ward of the course to the best anchorage.

Directions. — The best time for entering or leaving Dry Harbor is soo
after daylight, before tlie sea brc^eze sets iiv, which causes a heav
swell to set across tlie bar, especially with the wind from the NE., an
would altogether prevent a vessel of moiHJ than 13 feet draft crossin,
at those times.

To enter, bring the east side of the western of two storehouses o
Knox Wharf, bearing S. 25^ E. (S. 28o E. mag.), in line with the we*

DRY HARBOR ANCHORAGE ST. ANN BAY. 233

side of the green veraiula porch of tlie house close above and behind
(Beverlaiid House). This will lead between the two spar buoys if in
place. Should one be adrift, great care must be exercised in determin-
ing which, for the channel lies only on the line of the leading mark
and there is a depth of If fathoms close-to on either hand.

Anchorage. — A dat extends from th^ eastern shore of the harbor
a distance of 300 yards, with depths decreasing from 18 feet, but the
ground is rocky and foul, rendering it an undesirable anchorage
even for small craft. In the south and 8W. parts of the harbor,
Qlose totheshpre, are three reefs awash with several rocky heads; this
portion of the harbor has foul ground and the depth is too great to
admit of convenient anchorage, riie best anchorage is in the SE.
comer of the bay, opposite Knox Wharf.

Supplies. — Provisions are plentiful and the harbor abounds with
fish, but water can only be obtained at2| miles eastward of the harbor,
from Pear Tree Bottom, which boats can not approai'h during severe
weather.

Runaway Bay, ^ miles further east, is i\ small open rondstead with a
wharf. An unprotected anchorage may be obtained in 10 fathoms
with the whaif bearing tS. ao^ K. (S. :i;P E. mag.) distant iM) yards,
and Flag Point, the eastern extreme of the bay, bearing N. 77^ E. (N.
740 E. mag.).

Coast. — From Vlag Point the shore takes an easterly direction for
6^ miles to the entrance of St. Ann Bay. Along this extent of coast
many small streams and rivulets em[)ty themselves into the sea. The
western part is sandy, with a barrier reef extending about J mile from
the shore, the descent to a depth of more than IW fathoms outside the
reef being very rapid; the eastern portion of tlie coast is rocky and
steep-to, the soundings hardlv extending \ mile off sliore. Behind this
coast the land for abimt a mile rises very gradually and is for the nu>8t
part occupied by sugar ])lantations; thence it rises abruptly to an ele-
vation of 1,500 and 2,000 feet, the height of Camerons Cap or the
Camels Hump. St. Ann Peak, conspicuous when seen from a positicm
10 miles to the northeastward, is 2,130 feet high.

St. Ann Bay may be recognized by the buildings of the town, situated
on a gradually rising hill ; by a large waterfall 3 miles to the eastward
of the town and (mly visible when seen from the eastward, or by its
position with regard to St. Ann Peak or the Camels Hump, The
harbor is a basin formeil in the coral reef 400 yards in diameter, with a
narrow but deep ejitrantie cairying LL t) l-k fathoais, which gradually
decreases in depth to the southward. Vessels require to moor head
and stem, and should select a berth towards the western side of the
harbor to obtain during Northers the full protection of the reef. On
the western side of the anchorage, and detached from the juain reef, is
a heap of ballast, over which there is only 6 feet water. To tlie south-
westward of this anchorage there is a small arm suitable for small

W-

^-z*-'

fc ;; ■

234

i •• .

!vC *

r\r\.r\ cs

JAMAICA.

^f; coasting vessels. During heavy weather a similar current and attribu-

table to tbesamecause asat Falmouth is here experienced. This current
running through the anchorage from the west causes ships that are not
well moored head and stern to lay broadside to the sea, and to roll most
un(?omfortrtblv.

The United States is represented by a consular agent.

Supplies. — Provisions are plentiftd and water may be obtained from
Drax Hall River.

Land TVind, — A strong north wind or the continuous blowing of the
sea breeze at times prevents sailing vessels leaving the port for some
days, a wind off* the land being necessary, but fore and aft vessels can
beat out in a moderate sea breeze.

Directions. — ^To enter, bring the east road of the town, leading from
the beach up the hill, open, when the east side of the customhouse
(which is the jnost easterly building on the water line) will bear S. 6^ W.
(8. 30 W. mag.) and be just clear of the west side of the Wesleyan Chapel
on the hill. When past the western reef, which is plainly visible,
anchor as convenient. The above marks for entering are not easily
made out in consequence of the trees grown about the Wesleyan Ohapel,
and the east road being overgrown with grass. The best leading mark
to enter by is, ho^ise on hill with a black patch in the middle of it (Mr.
Black's house, the bla(*,k patch is a window, with a black veranda,
when coasting st-eamers come in a white light is exhibited there) in line
with crane on second eastern pier. There are two small spar buoys
laid down outside the reefs to mark the channel, but they can not be
seen till close to them.

Coast. — From St. Ann Bay the coast curves gradually round to
BSE. for IJ miles into Mammae Bay, and thence ESE. again for 3J
miles to Ocho Rios. Mammee Bay has a fringing reef extending from
the shore, and some prominent red cliff's at its eastern extreme, near
which a river flows into the sea. The falls of this river at a short
distance inland are ^)lainly visible from seaward, and are of some
extent. From Mammee Bay to Ocho Rios the coast is rocky with
occasional sandy bea<ihes, and has many small waterfalls along it of
from 10 to 30 feet in height.

Ocho Rios Bay. — To enter the bay. Bull Rock Point (on which
there is a conspicuous wall close to the water) should be steered for,
bearing S. 14^ W. (S. 11^ W. mag.) until Dollars Pier bears 8. 53o B.
(S. 56° B. mag.), when the pier should be steered for on that bearing;.
Anchor in 7 fathoms, with the west extreme of the reef bearing K. 26<^
B. (N. 230 E. mag.). Small vessels might anchor 200 yards nearer the
church, in 4J fathoms, with the west extreme of the reef bearing about
F. 80 W. (i^. \Y> W. mag.).

The bay is protected from all winds except those between north and
WNW., and it is considered one of the hefilthiest places on this coast,
possibly from the absence of lowland.

5t^

OCHO BIOS — ^PORT MARIA. 235

Osho Rios is situated at the bottom of a bay, from the eastern en-
trance point of which a plainly visible reef extends to tlie westward,
affording partial shelter. The inner part of the bay is to some extent
narrowed by a reef that rnns ont tvom the sonth side of the anchorage.
It is easy of approach, the best berth being in 3 J fathoms, with the only
wharf (which extends from a zinc circular-roofed warehouse) bearing
8. 53^ E, (S. 66^ E. mag.), and the western extremity of the reef awash,
bearing 55r. 20© E. (N. 17o E. mag.).

Ocho Bios is in telegraphic communication with Kingston, mails are
received and dispatched three times a week, and the usual provisions
can be obtained.

Supplies. — Provisions are plentiful, and water is obtainable from
any of the springs that discharge themselves into the harbor.

CoastL — From Ocho Rios the coast, which is roc^iy alternating with
sandy bays, trends E. by N. for 3J miles, past White River mouth to
Frankfurt Point, with soundings extending off to the 100-fathom line
for f mile. At Frankfurt Point it alters in direction to E. by 8., and
rises in bluffs of 60 to 100 feet in height for 2 miles to Rio Novo, where
there is a small unprotected anchorage close to the shore and steep-to.

Ora Cabexa, situated S. 79° E. (S. 82^ E. mag.), distant 3 miles from
Rio Novo, is a better anchorage than Rio Novo, having a dept.h of 10
fathoms, mud, with the NW. extreme of a small islet at its east^^m part
bearing*N. 71^ B. (N. 68° E. mag.), distant 400 yards; it is, however,
open and exposed to the north and west.

Coast — ^The coast from Rio Novo consists of cliffs 30 to 40 feet high,
off which soundings run for a short distance. At the eastern extremity
it curves round slightly with a sandy beach in the bight, on which the
small village of Ora Cabeza stands. From St. Ann Bay the land
continues to rise immediately beyond the coast line, but decreases its
comparative altitude^ attaining 1,060 feet at 1^ miles inland from Ocho
Rios, while at the same distance south of Frankfurt Point it is barely
800 feet high, and de(*reases iu elevation again toward Ora Cabeza.
From the bight in which the latter village is situated to that in the
bottom of which lies Port Maria, tlie coast line is low and rocky, with
hills rising gradually behind to a height of from 400 to 500 feet. It is
steep-to, and may be approatihetl by vessels beating to windward with
perfect safety. From Oni Cabeza the shore curves NE. f E. for one mile,
then runs easterly for 3 miles to Gallina Point, from whenc*e it trends
to the southward for a distance of 2 miles to the town of Port Maria.

Port Maria is divided into two portions by Cabrita Island. The
town is situated on* the shores of the western part, in which is the
best ancliorage, the other portion being at present seldom used on
account of the decrease in sugar cultivation. The shore between Gal-
lina Point and the town forms a shoal bay, and is cpvered with a forest
of cocoanut trees, which serve to indicate its position from a distance.

236 JAMAICA.

Directions. — ^To enter, a vessel should carry easy sail and steer mid-
way between Fort Point and Gabrita Island, with the westernmost wharf
bearing S. 2(3^ W. (S. 23^ W. mag.), and be prepared to anchor shortly
after Pagee Point (the eastern entrance point) is shut in by Gabrita
Island. Cabritcb Island U fringed for a distance of 150 to 200 yards
from the shore with reefs and foul ground, which must be borne in
mind when shooting up after rounding to.

Supplies. — Provisions af'e easily obtainable. Good water is supplied
by pipes.

Qaaraatine. — ^The quarantine git)und of Port Maria is at Ora Galieza.

Pilots are generally to be found some miles outside.

Coast — From Pagee Point the land behind is bold, quickly rising to
a height of 800 and 1,000 feet; the coast runs, with some small bays
and coveg, in a SE. by E. direction for 4J miles to Blowing Point,
whence it trends SSE. for 4 miles, and then ENE. for IJ miles to Free
Point, the bight between Free and Blowing points being known as
Annatto Bay.

Sheemess Bay is small, with a coral-fringed harbor for droghers and
lighters, open to the NE., and lying one mile south of Blowing Point

Jacks Bay, with a shipping wharf, lies 1| miles south of Sheerness
Bay.

Wag Water River. — ^The mouth of this river lies i mile NW. of
Grays Inn Wharf in Annatto Bay. ,

Annatto Bay. — ^The town iii this bay is situated close to the bearch,
and is easily recognizable by its stores and the church in the NE. cor-
ner within a mile of Free Point. At the S W. end of the town is situ-
ated Grays Inn Wharf, with an estate at the back; close to Annatto
Bay Church is situated Gibraltar Whaif.

Schoolmaster Shoal runs to the northwestward from Gibraltat
Wharf and tunis to the eastward toward Free Point, alibrding to some
extent protection to the auchorage during the usual sea breeze, but
none from Northers.

Anchorage — The best anchorage is as close to the northeastward
and to Schoolmaster Shoal as possible, with Gibraltar Wharf bearing
S. 05^ E. (S. 680 E. mag.), distant 5.>0 yards. This iwsition is a good
one J'rom which to leave for sea on the approach of a Norther; there is
good holding ground along the east side of the bay, but its extent rap-
idly narrows to the southwestward.

Directions. — ^K entering from a x>osition to windward, do not run
down within one mile of the shore nor haul to the southward unr'
Grays Inn House is' open westward of Grays Inn Wharf, bearing S. 4i
W. (S. 42^ W. mag.). A vessel is then clear of the extreme of Schoo
master Shoal and may run 8. 48° W. (S. 45<^ W. mag.) until abreast tl
proposed anchorage. The bank shoals very rapidly, and, as vesse
should invariably moor, the port anchor must be dropped in about 7
fathoms with plenty of cable ready, and the other anchor let go in abo

HUFF BAY ^PORT ANTONIO. 237

5 tathoms, whilst the kedge should be ready for mnning oat astern to
hold daring land winds.

Buff Bay. — From Free Point the shore trends E. by S. for 3 J and 3f
miles to Dover and Palmetto Points, resx)ectively, past the bights form-
ing Fort Stewart and Fig Tree Bays, which are very foul for J mile off
shore. Between Palmetto and Savannah Points, Buff Bay is formed
by the shore trending SE. for Si miles, and then E. by N, for 2J miles.
The western part and bottom of this bay are very foul, and break in 5
and 6 fathoms at 4 niile offshore, the bottom being composed of rocky
pinnacles.

Roadstead. — Off Spring Garden wharf, 2^ miles west of Savannah
Point, a vessel would find anchorage in 12 fathoms, mud, at 300 yards
N. 26° B. (N. 230 B. mag.) of the wharf; this anchorage can not, how-
ever, be recommended, being on a lee shore during Northers, and unpro-
tected from the sea raised by the ordinary sea breeze. The bank is
very steep-to, and rapidly shoals from the anchorage, the quality of
bottom changing from mud to stones and gravel. It is, in fact, only
suitable for droghers, as is also a small spot off Orange Bay close to
Savannah Point.

To the eastward of Wag Water River, at Annatto Bay, the land rises
very rapidly from the coast into well-defined hills that inland form the
spurs of the Blue Mountain Range. The intervening ravines are deep^
with small fertile plains at their coast termination; they contain rivu-
lets and streams which, during heavy rains, deepen into rivers and tor-
rents, preventing communication and sweeping away the shingle bar-
riers on the beach that are thrown up by the surf.

Coast. — Between Savannah Point and Ship Rock (a distance of 6«^
miles in an E. by S. direction) there are two bights forming Hope and
Saint Margarets Bays, in the bottoms of both of which there are
anchorages for droghers and boats only. Along this coast the 100-
fbthom line lies from ^ to | mile off the shore, which is very steep-to.
The coast range rises in places to a height of about 800. feet; between
these hills and the Blue Mountain Range is a fine valley, formerly cul-
tivated with sugar, but now rapidly growing into bash again. The Rio
Grande rises to the eastward of the Blue Mountains, and, flowing KW.
throagh a deep valley, empties itself into St. Margarets Bay.

Ship Bead, a prominent bluft point, lies eastward of Ship Rock.

Port Antonio is divided into two harbors by a narrow peninsula
which takes a northerly direction nearly J mile from the main, with a
curve to the NB. The town of Titchfield stands upon it, and at the
north end there is a fort and barracks, which are conspicuous objects
from the offing.

The United States is represented by a consular agent.

VITestem Harbor. — It is approached from the eastward through a
narrow but deep channel about 100 yards wide, which is marked by
two iron can buoys, between Navy Island and the main, and there is

238 . . JAMAICA.

also a narroNY outlet to the northward through a tortuous channel with
2 fathoms water in it, but useless for any but small cargo boats; this
harbor can only be left with a land wind. There are wharves along-
side of which vessels drawing* 20 feet can come.

The sunken wreck of a steamer in Western Harbor, near the align-
ment of the leading beacons, is marked by a green buoy, surmounted
by a cage. The buoy lies in 7 fathoms of water southeastward of the
wreck.

Vessels must anchor westward of a line joining two cocoanut trees
with whitewashed trunks, situated on the southern end of Navy Island,
and must use a buoy rope sufficiently heavy to lift the anchor. No
ashes, ballast, or rubbish of any kind is permitted to be thrown over-
board.

Beacons and Buoys. — ^Two truncated pyramidal beacons, painted
white, are on the western side of West Harbor. The west beacon* is
about 100 I'eet above the level of the sea; the east beacon is situated
close to the beach. These beacons in line lead through the channel
between Navy Island and Titchfteld Peninsula. Lights are placed ou
these b ^acons when a mail steamer is expected.

The entrance is marked by two buoys, one red and one black. The
red buoy lies on the northern side of entrance with Folly Point light-
house N. G90 E. (N. 660 E. mag.), and the church S. 8© W. (8. 6° W.
mag.). This buoy is particularly liable to drift, and neither buoy can
be depended upon. The black buoy on the soutliern side of entrance
lies with Folly Point lighthouse N. 59© E. (N. 66° E. mag.), and the
church 8. o^ W. (8. 3© W. mag.).

Eastern Harbor. — The eastern harbor, divided from the western
harbor by Titchfleld Peninsula, can b^ left with either a land or sea
breeze. It has good holding ground in from 10 to 6 fathoms for large
vessels, but, being open to Northers which send in a heavy sea, it is not
80 much frequented as the inner harbor.

The entrance between the east extreme of Navy Island and Folly
Point is 600 yards wide, but being foul for 100 yards on either side, the
working ground is narrowed to 400 yards.

There is no landing place in Eastern Harbor.

Rock. — A small rock lies 50 yards off liover Point, which is situated
134 yards south of Folly Point. With this rock in line with Folly Point
and Titchlield Point bearing N. 41° W. (N. 44^ W. mag.), anchorage
will be obtained in 9 fathoms of water.

Supplies. — Provisions are plentiful, and good water is obtainable
from pipes, tlie town having a regular water supply.

Telegraph. — Tiiere is telegraph communication with all parts of the
world.

Repairs. — The Boston Fruit Company has a machine shop at which
ordinary repairs can be made.

. — On Polly Point, from a lighthouse 50 feet liigh, a fixed red

EASTERN HARBOR ^DIRECTIONS. 239

light is shown at an elevation of 54 feet, and is visible 13 miles between
N. 810 W. (K. 840 W. mag.) and S. 54o E. (S. 57^ E. mag.).

Light Dues. — ^The following rate of fees are to be paid as light dues
by vessels entering or calling at Port Antonio :

Steamers^ 2 cents per registered ton, not payable oftener than once
in any three months.

Sailing vessels of any tonnage, not being droghers, $4 on each
clearance.

Droghers, 50 cents, not payable oftener than once in any three
months.

The above fees shall be paid by all vessels except Government vessels
and pleasure yachts.

DirectionB. — Eastern Harbor. There is no danger in entering, and
the eastern oi weather point is bold-to. Keep in mid-channel between
Folly Point and Xavy Island and then haul over toward the fort on the
north end of Titehfield Peninsula, to avoid the shoal ground on the east
side of the harbor, and approach the anchorage under easy sail, as tliere
is no room to shoot far in. As a heav}- swell sets into this port, sailing
vessels ought not to weigh for the purpose of proceeding to sea without
being well satisfied that the land breeze extends to a sufficient distance
tor the depth of water at the entrance is so great as to render anchor!
age quite unsafe should the breeze fail.

To enter the Western Harbor, run in under easy sail, and when within
or abreast FoUy Point edge away gradually until the beacons are in line,
and stand in on that line until the harbor is opened, when haul up and
anchor in 6 or 7 fathoms. There is a slight set from the Eastern Harbor
towards the reef off ^avy Island, on which is a depth of 7 and 8 feet;
this must be borne in mind when proceeding either way through this
channel in light winds.

Coast — ^Prom Folly Point (close to the eastward of which is situated
Woods Island, about 150 yards in extent and 15 feet high) the general
direction of the coast is E. by S. for 4^ miles to King Point, passing
the droghing stations of Turtle Crawle, Cold Harbor, and Blue Hole.
Soundings extend for a very short distance off shore, the bottom being
coral and rock. Eastward of King Point is situated Boston Bay, open
to the trade and north winds, and with a foul bottom except in its SW,
comer, where is a patch of sandy bottom that affords an anchorage for
small coasting vessels.

From NE. End (the NE. extreme of Jamaica) to Morant Point the
general direction of the coast is SE. by S., the distance being 17 miles*
with Manchioneal Harbor lying about midway and Plantain Garden Bay
lying K 50^ W. (X. r>3o W. mag.) 3 miles from Morant Point.

Priestman River Bay lies one mile southward of NB. End, and Long
Bay 2J miles. They are both steep-to, soundings to the depth of 100
fathoms, over rock and sand extending off shore for about i mile. Be-
ing on a dead ^ee shore, neither of these bays is available as an anchor-

240 JAMAICA.

age. The oliffa that fringe tbem rise perpendioalarly from the wa
20, 30, and 40 feet iB height.

Manahionsal Harbor. — This harbor, atthesoath extreme of a <
nut plantation 2 miles long on the coaat, is very small A reef, «]
ing from S'ettle Point on its north aide, narrows the entrance to a
of 100 yards, wliich leads to aa anchorage close off Shiptun Point, 1
exceeding 200 yards in dlamet«r. From this anchorage to the i
ward is a narrow, well-protected haven for small craft. It is 100
wide at the entrance, with 5 ^thorns, and gradually shoals m\
Vessels should moor in the southern anchorage in about 7 fathom
as from its small size the placing of the anchors is of great impor
a pilot should be taken.

BnppUes. — Provisions are plentiful, and water is obtainable a
distance up the Drift Hiver, which, during heavy rains, swell
causes a strong off-set through the harbor and entrance.

R«d Cliffs. — Between Manchioneal Harbor and Plantain Garde
are some remarkable red cliSs at Sooth Booby Point, which will
to indicate the position of either place.

Plantain Gtarden Bay. — To the southward of the Bed Oliffs the
bends in to the 6W. and forms a deep bay, skirted by a reef, e
head of which is Plantain Garden River, 3J miles S. 70=" W, (S. T.
mag.) of Morant Point.

Anchorite. — Between the reefe off the mouth of the river an
shore there is a roadstead], where the telegraph cables from Santii
Cuba and from St. Thomas arelande<1. This bay can not ber
mended as an anchonige, on account of its exposed position and th<
coltyofgettingawayou the setting in of a Norther or NB. wind, c
by the rapidity with which the bottom shoals from deep water 1
broken and foul ground fringing the coast-
Coast. — riie general nature of the co^st from Port Antonio to !
Booby Point is cliffy, with little sandy coves interspersed, off which
and foal ground generally extends. But from South Booby Poin
land commences to fall and trends into Plantain G-arden Bay
sweeping round SE. again towards Morant Point.

From Port Antonio a range of hills commences to rise grB<
towards the direction of Morant Point, attaining on the beari
S. 71° W. (S. 68° W. mag.) of Manchioneal Harbor and at 4 miles i
a height of about 3,000 feet and running almost parallel to the
towitrds which by degrees they fall. From the snramit they fall
rapidly to the southward and terminate at Plantain Garden 1
theoce to Morant Point being an almost level plain.

Current — Along the north coast of Jamaica the prevtuling ct
is to the westward with the ti-ade wind, varying from J knot to IJ
an hour, with tlie strength of the wind ; this prevailing current is
sionally replaced by a alight easterly set, most observable, but n
ways so, dnriug the moon's second quarter.

PEDRO BANK BLOWER ROCK. 241

Pedro Bank. — This bank, withia a depth of 100 fathoms^ is about
100 miles long in an east and west direction, and 55 miles broad at the
western part; the breadth in a north and south direction at 25 miles
from the eastern limit is only 9 miles, and the eastern extremity termi-
nates in a point in lat. IT^ 7' N., long. 77o 19' W.

The bank rises abruptly from depths of 250 and 350 fathoms, and the
edge (which is very steep to) is of white limestone, on which are found
sponges, brauchiug coral, and corallines.

The surface of the bank is tolerably level, having over it depths of
from 0 to 20 fathoms, except near the southern edge, which is dangerous
of approach, and where there are numerous rocks, cays, and shoals;
the northern aad western parts of the bank are clear of dangers.

The bottom is generally of white sand and dead coral, but occasion-
ally it is composed of weed and live coral.

At the ^W. part of the bank the bottom is of a somewhat reddish
color.

Over the eastern extreme of Pedro Bank, even in moderate weather,
the sea is generally rough with overfalls; over other portions of the
bank the sea is not higher than in deep water.

Shoals having less than 3^ fathoms can be seen from aloft as dis-
colored water, unless the sun is in line with them or the sea rough.
From Portland Bock for 50 miles along the SE. edge the bank is stud-
ded with dangers. The cays on the bank are dependencies of Jamaica.

In rounding the east end of the Pedro Bank a good berth must be
given to it, as the current generally sets strongly to the westward.

Portland Rook has a double summit; it is 290 yards long and ap-
pears double when bearing either east or west. A ridge, over which
there are irregular soundings, extends i mile F. 26° W. (N. 29^ W.
mag.) from the rock.

Position. — From numerous observations made on and near Portland
Bock the position has been determined as follows: Lat. 17^ 6' 20" N.,
long. 770 27^ 10" E.

Anchorage. — A vessel seeking temporary anchorage may slo^y ap-
proach the western side of Portland Bock and anchor in 8 fathoms, clear
sand, within a distance of -400 yards from it; westward of this position
the depths increase to 10 and 12 fathoms.

Landing on Portland Book is very difficult.

Blower Rock.— Blower Bock, lying S. 48^ W. (S. 45^ W. mag.) of
""ortland Bock, distant 6^ miles, is about 20 yards long and 2 to 3 feet

This rock is steep to on the eastern side, where a depth of 6 fathoms
ibund close-to ; a spit having from 3 to 5 fathoms on it extends nearly
nile NW. from the rock.

n ordinary weather the sea breaks heavily on Blower Kock, and the
imn of water sent up can be seen from a considerable distance.
"antion. — Vessels should not cross the Pedro Bank between Port-
18402 10

24"2 I'KlJlfO liAXK.

land Uot-k iiml fSlmiuiou Mlmal ivifliout haviDg local knowli
under any ci re u ins tames should tliey do so at uijflit.

If crossing IVdro Bank tlirongli tlie chainiel eastward of Blov
vessels should pass within 3 miles west of Portland Rock.

If crossiufc westward of Blower Kock, iisles's the breakers
rock are clearly seen, it is advisable to sight Shannon Shoal.

A small shoal, with a depth of 2 fathoms over it, lies S. 35'^ \
W. mag.) of Blower Kock, distant 1,200 yards.

Shannon Shoal.— TJiis dangerous shoal, which within a d
fathoms extends one mile in an E. by N. and W. by S. directin
the southevu edge of Pedro Bank, at about 14 miles 8. 08= V
W. mag.) of Portland Rock. In calin westther it uncovers a\m
for a length of !H} yards near the western extremity, bnt duri
weather or even iii a moderate sea, the shoal is covered with

Shannon Shoal shelves evenly to a dejith of 6 fathoms, bu
that depth irregular soundings are found for a distance of 2 i
northerly aud >'\V, direction. If approaching from the south"
soundings would not give sufficient warning of approaching thi

The steamer Shannon was wrecked near the eastern extremi
shoal, and in October, 18.S(l, a portion of tlie machinery was s
seen rising over 20 feet above the sea, and forming an excellen
which on a clear day was visible from a distance of 7 miles.

Shoal — An extensive shoal, over which there is a depth ol
oms, coral and wcwl, lies y. 19'' \V, (S, 2L'^ W. mag.) of tha
Shannon Shoal which uncovers, distAUt one mile.

Caution. — The edge of the hank between Sliannon Shoal ar
east Cay forms a remarkable cur^■c inwards. Xo attempt s
made to cross this part of Pedro Bank.

Pedro Cays. — Thest- IVmr cay.-*, knon'n respectively as N
Jliddle, Southwest, and South Cays, are situated near the
edge of Pedro Bank, at about J mile within the depth of 100
The.-ie small islets (of which Southwest Cay is the largest) an
enciesof Jamaica, )ind are rented by merchants in Kingston foi
pose of collecting gaauo. Temporary huts have been erected
cays, close to which the best landing places will be found.

Cocoauut trees have been planted on Northeast an<l Southw
but tliey do not yet rise above the bushes.

Northeast Cay.— This cay Ues 8. W^ W. (S. 7;t=> W. mag.)
land Hdi^k, distant IS miles; it is abtmt j^ mile long in a y
S?3K. direction, and 160 yards broad, being covei-ed with bu
tops of which are 12 feet above the water.

The lar^ecocoaiint tree formerly stundiiig on this <'ay has be
down.

From the HK. extreme of Northeast Cay a reef which break:
to the .soul Invest ward for a distance of 4 mile.

PEDRO CAYS. 243

Anchorage. — Vessels cau anchor in 5 fathoms over sandy bottom,
with the X\V. extreme of Northeast Oay bearing N. 71o E. (X. (>8o E.
mag.)> ^ut there is generally an nneasy swell at this anchorage.

Shoals.— A shoal with 6 feet water over it lies X. 73o E. *(N. 70^ E.
mag.) of the sonth extreme of Xortheast Cay, distant 2 miles; and Ji
shoal with 3i fathoms over it lies N. 54^ E. (N. 51^ E. mag.) of the same f
point, distant § mile.

Two small shoals, each about 50 yards in extent, lie X. 42^ W. (X,
45^ W. mag.) of Xortheast Cay; the outer of these, with 2.J fathoms
over it, is always visible from aloft, and lies nearly 1^ miles from the
cay; the inner, with 2| fathoms over it, is 1,800 yards distant. A third
shoal, of about the same extent, with 3.^ fathoms over it, lies X. 25^ W.
(X, 28^ W. mag.) of the cay, distant J mile.

Clearing Mark. — ^The east extreme of Southwest Cay (seen from
aloft), open the apparent length of that cay west of Middle Cay, bear-
ing S. 20O \v. (3. 170 VV. mag.), leads XW, of these dangers.

Vessels approaching from the northward and having cleared the
shoals, may pass between Xortheast Cay and Middle Cay into deep
water.

Middle Cay.— This cay, about 12 feet high, lies S. 48^ W. (S. 4:)^
W. mag.) of Xortheast Cay, distant 2.J miles, and is covered with brush-
wood. From the SE. extreme a reef, which generally breaks, extends
to the southward, and is continued as a rocky ridge in the direction of
Southwest Cay, forming a protection to the anchorage.

Anchorage. — Anchorage will be found in 5 fathoms, bad holding
ground, with the west extreme of Middle Cay bearing S. 87^ E. (east
mag.), distant ^ mile.

ShoaL — A shoal of 2i fathoms water, with a depth of o fathoms close-
to, lies X. 31-^ W. (X. 340 W. mag.) of Middle Cay, distant J mile.

Great numbers of fish has been observed in the vicinity of this danger.

Southwest Cay. — This cay is about 1^ mile long in a XXW. and
SSE. direction, and is partially covered with bushes, which attain a
height of 12 feet above the sea.

A reef awash fringes the eastern side of this cay, and foul ground ex-
tends from it for a distance of § mile towards Middle Cay.

Position. — The SE. extreme of Southwest Cay has been determined
to be in lat. 16^ 50' 2.-)" X., long. 77° 49' 10" W.

Anchorage. — Good anchorage may be obtained westward of South-
west Cay in any recpiired depth, but small vessels desirous of anchoring

se in should carefully avoid t]ie spit extending from the north side
this cay.

i vessel leaving the anchorage off Southwest Cay, and intending to

►ceed to the southward, should pass east of South Cay.

Water. — ^The center of Southwest Cay is slightly depressed, and

•ter may be procured by sinking a cask, but it is brtwjkish.

244 PEDRO BANK.

South Cay.— This cay, lying 8. 23° W. (S. 20° W. mag.) of the south
extreme of Southwest Gay, distaut 2§ miles, and about a mile within the
southern edge of Pedro Bank, is 220 yards long in an east and west
direction, and 8 feet high, being composed of dead coral of white
appearance.

There is clear ground both eastward and southward of South Cay,
but shoal water extends about a mile northward and westward from it.

There is no anchorage off South Cay, and landing can seldom be
effected on it.

The channel between South Cay and Southwest Cay is available for
vessels, provided that South Cay is not approached within a distance of
1 J miles.

Shoals. — ^A shoal bank, which, within a depth of 5 fathoms, is about
3 miles long, lies about i mile within the southern edge of Pedro Bank,
at 4 miles westward of South Cay.

Two shoal heads are situated upon this bank at a distance of 1^ miles
firom each other; the eastern of these (at ^ mile within the eastern edge
of the bank), with 6 feet of water upon it, breaks in moderate weather,
but the western shoal head, with 12 feet over it (lying nearly one mile
within the western edge of the bank), seldom breaks; between these
shoal heads there is a general depth of 4 and 4^ fathoms.

A dangerous reef, over the center of which there is a depth of 6 feet,
lies about 10 miles S. 68o W. (S. 65^ W. mag.) of South Cay, and 6
miles N. 710 E. (N. 68o E. mag.) of Banner Reef, north extreme. Thia
reef, within a depth of 5 fathoms, is 1^ miles long, and probably breaks
in heavy weather, but not in a moderate sea.

In the center of the channel between this reef and Banner Beef there
is a depth of 8 fathoms.

A depth of 100 fathoms is found IJ miles SE. of this reef.

Banner Reef.— This danger, lying S. 68o W. (S. 65° W, mag.) of South
Cay, is just awash, and in a smooth sea might show no indication of its
existence; during a fresh breeze the sea breaks over a space extending
about IJ miles in a NIS^E. and SSW. direction.

Kumerous shoal heads, with sandy bottom between them, lie within
a distance of one mile northward and westward from Banner Eeef^ and
this part of Pedro Bank should not be approached under any circum-
stances.

At J mile southward of Banner Reef there is a depth of 65 fathoms.

Southwest Rock.— This rock, lying S. 650 w. (S. 62° W. mag.) of
Banner Reef, south extreme distant 5.J miles, is about 50 j^ards h
and '^ feet high, with a depth of 10 fathoms close-to on the south
side, iiTul 5 fathoms on the northern side; it lies within IJ miles of
southern ed^e of Pedro Bank.

A spit, having from 5 to 6 fathoms over it, extends N. lO^ W. (^\ :
W. mag.) from S juthwost Rock for a distance of J mile.

PEDRO BANK CURRENT ^BAJO NUEVO. 245 ' ' S^l

Southwest Rock is very dangerous, as in fine weather the vicinity is
only indicated by ripplings.

Northwest Ridge. — ^Two shoals, over which there are depths of 8
fathoms, lie i mile within the southern edge of Pedro Bank, in long. 78^
33' W. and 78o 38' W., respectively.

Tides. — It is high water, full and change, on Pedro Bank atf about
8h. 45m.; springs rise about IJ feet.

Current. — The general set of current over the eastern part of Pe<lro
Bank is to NW., attaining its greatest velocity when the trade wind is
atrongest, but seldom exceeding the rate of one knot an hour.

In calm weather the flood tidal stream sets to SSE., but is easily
overcome by a slight breeze.

The ebb stream apparently sets to NW. as soon as the moon has
passed the meridian.

In moderate weather a slight southerly set may therefore be expected
for 5 hours preceding the moon's upper or lower transit, and a strong
set to NW. for the next seven hours.

Over the western part of the bank the currents set to NNW. and to
SW., having a tendency to the northward on the north edge of the bank
and to the southward on the south edge; the velocity, which varied from
i knot to IJ knots an hour, was affected by the wind.

No easterly set was observed during the survey in 1880 on this part
of the bank.

Bsgo Nuevo, or New Bore, about 9r> miles S. 37 o W. (S. 33^ W.
mjig.) of Portland Rock, is oval-shaped, about 14 miles in extent, and 5
miles in breadth. Two extensive reefs rise from the bank; the eastern
diie, close to its edge, is a solid semicircular reef, convex to the east-
ward, dry in places, with its horns curving along on the north and
south sides of the bank fen' about 2J miles, and at the southern termi-
nation is a dry sand bore. It is steep-to, the edge of soundings being
about ^ mile off, except at the northeastern end, where it is about one
mile off.

The Southwestern Reef, somewhat similarly formed, is separated from
the Eastern Reef by an opening aboutonemile wide, and it trends along
the southeastern edge of the bank for 7 J miles from the southwestern
extremity of the eastern reef, and near its termination is a sand bore.
A shallow ledge, with 10 fathoms water close to it, runs off to the west-
ward of the bore for about 1.J miles to within 2 miles of the SW. end of
bank, which makes this termination of the reef, if possible, more
jgerous than the other. Small ridges of sand occasionally form on
ler parts.of the reef, but they disappear in strong breezes.
[lOW Cay. — On the northern point of this leeward reef, which is
\rly in the middle of tlie bank, there is a barren cay, composed of
'd, broken coral, and drift wood, thi'own up by the sea to the height
5 feet. It is 3()0 yards long, about 50 yards wide, and lies in lat.
5 53' 00'' N., long. 78^ 39' 04" W. On it there is a small pond

'. <"i

■ »**•:

f .'J

'.T

»•('.'

THK CAVMAXS.

'esoi'teil Ci) by ati-AH, aud in tlie moiitlis of Maruh and
is viwiteil by fishing vessels fiom St. Andrew and Old

the purpose of taking them,

westwiird of the east«ru reef the north aide of the I
about a mile within its edge as far as about 2 miles wt
'. There is also a clear space of about 3 miles on the ^
ebank. The depths vary from 8 to 17 fathoms of wat
[ sand. Care should be taken when stiinding tow:
•onnd oil the north side of the leeward bank, as a cor
° W. (9. 70= W. mag.) 2 miles from tlie cay. The n
he bank is also so steep that the first cast of the lead :
athonis. The bottom is visible. The current in the '
jf sets strongly to the westward, at times as much as

rage may be taken up in moderate weather in 8 1
:h the cay beariug S. 7.'i° E. (S. 70° E. mag.) distant a'
t it is exi>oaed to the winter breezes,
aymana. — These three islands, lying to tlie northwest
and in the track of vessels sailing from that island '
lio, in the isLiml of Cuba, are between the meridians
11° 26' W., and the parallels of HP 14' and 19° 46' I
lost island is named the Grand Cayman, fi-om its be:
:;he second the Little Cayman, and the easternmost tt
e.
Cayman Island is low and irregular, and can only
deek of a moderate sized vessel about 12 miles. Its !
oauded bins' cliff, toppe<l with trees to the height of a
e the sea. The SW, end is low and sandy, and at 40"
d of it is a small sandy cay, about 2 or .'1 feet ont of
i:h a reef which generally breaks on the greater part i
I therefore requires great ((aution when rounding this
1, especially at night, a« the lead will give but shor
! NVV. extreme is similar to the SK.; the SB. endisso;

land is almost everywhere thickly wooded; and on f
rest is skirted by a reef, which is steep-to, to the dist
ile to one mile. At the east end it forms a solid barrie
of one juile, and tlie sea breaks on it heavily at all
i several small cuts through the reef on the south side
i small ve-s-sels of the island int<» slielter within. The
is on the north shore near tlie XW, end, and it lea
und, which is shallow and of considerable ext«nt. Tl
ind a small village is scattered aloug the shore of the
end of the island, but the princijial settlement is at
ii<'h stands abtmt midway on the southern shore. In 1
iitinned about ;!,»"" Prisons.

GRANJJ CAYMAN ANCHORAGE LITTLE CAYMAN. 247

Two coDipanies are established on the island for the export of i)hos-
phate of lime. The English company has a pier at the N W. point and
the American company one about § mile to the northward. Moorings
have been laid down in abont 15 fathoms, for a vessel of about 800 tons,
northward of the American (company's wharf.

Anchorage. — ^The only ant^horage for large vessels at the Grand
Cayman is under the west end, about IJ miles northward of the SW.
point. Care, however^ should be taken to pick out a clear sandy spot,
wbich can be easily done by the e^^e, and shoot Jn under easy sail, for
the soundings do not extend more than abont 400 yards from the shore,
and the edge is very steep. A clear berth will be found with thechurch
S. 830 E. (S. 87^ E. mag.), and the SW. point S. 6^ W. (S.L>o W. mag.)
in 7 or 8 fathoms, but if it is merely to communicate, a vessel had better
remain under sail.

Caution. — As before stated, great care must be taken in rounding
the SW. point to give it a berth of at least a mile, until it is brought
to the eastward of north. In leaving the anchorage with the usual
trade wind, it will be better to heave the anchor up before making sail,
to prevent dragging at a short stay, for the holding ground is not good,
an<l the anchor in tripping might catch under a shelf of rock and be
lost or broken.

SapplieB. — This anchorage is a convenient place for obtaining wood
and stock, except cattle, which are not always to be had at the moment;
turtle is generally in abundance, and is the chief commerce of the island.
Strangers approaching are met off the south side at a considerable dis-
tance by canoes having them for sale. Water is obtained from w^ells.
at about 100 yards from the beach, but it is scarce.

Cayman Bank, which lies about 10 miles westward of the Grand
Cayman, is a remarkable ridge of coral and sand, taking an ENK. and
W8W. direction, with a slight curve to the SB. It is 5 miles long, but
scarcely J mile broad, with a depth of from 15 to 20 fathoms; on the
edge the lead drops oif suddenly into more than 100 fathoms water.
By keeping a good lookout the discolored water may be seen, and
sometimes it may be detected by a strong current ripi)le.

Little Cayman. — This island is 9 miles long in an ENE. and WSW.
direction, and about one mile broatl; it is covered with bush, and has
two small hills on it about 50 feet high.

When seen from eastward, the most conspicuous ])art of the island
is Weary Hill, 45 feet high, situate<l a mile from the east extreme.

Sparrowhawk Hill, 48 feet high, near the north shore, about midway

between the east and west extremes of the island, appears as a double

*eak when seen from northward or scmth westward ; Cleft Tree Clump

n the south shore is also a conspicuous object. Sand Clitt" Point, near

le east extreiu'* of the isl md, anpe.irs as a white j>at<*h when seen

om CaviMiMi I>nic.

248 THE CAYMANS.

South Coast. — The south coast of the island is saiidy, an
most part skirted by a reef on which the sea coaataatly brea
steeper than the northern side of the island, and the bottoi
The bank of soundings to the depth of 100 fathoms extends ge
oule off shore on the south side of the island, and there are no
shoals. OQ' S&ad Cliff Point the bottom within a depth of 7
ia irregular.

South Hole Sound. — There ia a passage through the trioi
the entrance to which can be seen &om aloft, leading to a rei
(South Hole Sound) opposite the village, situated 2 mUesfrom
extreme of the island; this passage is available for large I
schooners.

Anchorags. — During the winter months, vhen the prevaili
are from northward, anchorage may be obtained on the soul
the inland in 7 fathoms, on a white patch off a rocky ledge
eastwaid of Southwest Point, and wheie the coral reef join.s t
line. A \essel sliould approach this anchorage carefully, am
with the south extreme of floutliwest I'oiut bearing N. SG^
mag.) and a eon.spicuou.s cocoanut tree bearing S", 4° K. (nortl

The coast at tliLt part is not fringed with leefs,

Should the wind veer to the eastward it would be prudent
this anchorage for that at Anchorage Bay on the >'W. sid
island.

North Coast. — The north coast of Little Cayman Ishinil
ftiiiged by a reef, but theie are several fair anchorages.

Anchorage Bay. about j mile north of Southwest Point
good holding ground in from 8 to 10 fathoms water, oil' a roc
which is steep-to.

A vessel should anchor where the bottom appears white, wit
west Point bearing S. liT'^ W. (S. 23^ W. mag.), and Jackson
line witii the eastern extreme of the bay.

Jackson Point, 3 miles eastward of Southwest Point, has
only large clump of cocoanut trees on this side of the island,
may find shelter with Jackson Point bearing N.(2= E. (N. 68°
in B fathoms, but within that depth the water shoals rapidly.

Reef Harbor. — At the NK. extreme of the island there l
harbor within the reefs, capable of nc(!ommodating schooners
from 8 to 9 feet, but it is much encumbered with nx'ks.

A quiet anchorn(re, during southerly and easterly breezes,
found (uitside North Kecf, with Kast Point bearing S. r»8^ E. (J
mag.).

Cayman Brae- — This island, situated i miles eastward of Li
man, is lOJ miles long in an EXE. and W.SW. direction, about
in breadth, and covered with thick bush.

It rises abruptly from the .sea at the Xortheast Point, to a 1

CAYMAN BKAC ANCHORAGE WINDS AND WEATHER. 249

130 feet^ decreasiog gradually towards the western end, the cliff termi-
nating one mile from Southwest Point. The top of the island is flat, and
intersected by a few rugged paths.

Northeast Point is steep- to^ having 7 fathoms close to the shore.
The sea breaks on the point, giving it the appearance of shoal water.

The south coast of the island is skirted by a broken ree£

The bank of soundings within 100 fathoms extends off shore about }
mile, except at the NE and SW. points^ where the distance is increased
to nearly one mile. There aire no offlying shoals, but within the depth
of 5 fathoms there are occasional coral bowlders rising about 6 feet from
the bottom^ this is especially the case in Stakes Bay.

Anohorage. — ^The best anchorage is in Scott Bay, in 9 fathoms, about
i mile K 490 E. (N. 450 e. mag.) of Southwest Point; with Scotts Set-
tlement bearing S. 7^ E. (8. 11^ E. mag.); and the high land at Stakes
Point nearly shut in with Frenchman Point. Stakes and Bight Bays^
also on the north side, are quiet and safe anchorages outside the depth
of 5 fathoms. Should the wind shift to the northward, anchorage may
be found on south side near Southwest Point, care being taken to find a
clear spot for the anchor as the bottom is full.

Caution. — Vessels anchoring on the north side are recommended to
ride with a short scope of cable, as the weatherly set of the current is
liable (if riding with a long scope) to cause the chain to foul the coral
heads, which, *iu the event of a squall, would bring up the vessels very
short.

Care must be taken to avoid the turtle nets when about to anchor.

Population. — ^The population of the Lesser Caymans is about 300,
principally Scotch. The men work in companies, fishing and turning
turtle at Little Cayman, but residing at Cayman Brae, where their plan-
tations are. The produce is dried and sent to Jamaica by schooners.

Supplies. — Boats will (*ome off to vessels hove-to oft' the north shores
of the islands, and will probably bring off turtle, yams, and fruit.
Water, which is generally brackish, may with difficulty be obtained
from the wells attached to the houses on the islands, by application to
the owners.

V7ind8 and Weather. — Summer winds range from EXE. to SSE.
Rainy weather sets in about the middle of May and continues till
August. Heavy squalls are prevalent from east and EXE. in June, com-
ing on suddenly at or before midnight. From Xovember to Aj^ril the di-

'tion of the wind is from XE. to north, seldom varying for more than 48

irs. There is at that time very littfe smooth water, and landing is

icult. When the land winds are strong on the coast of Cuba, the

5II rolls across and breaks heavily on the northern shores of these

\nds. •

lides. — It is high water, full and change, at Lesser Caymans at 8h.
; springs rise 18 inches.

-PA/

250 PICKLE BAJJK.

Pickle Bank, in latitude 20° 23' 20" N. and lon^Ktnde
W., is of an irregular shap«. The ont«r edge of tlie sho
marked wlien iuimediately over it, and in plainly visible froi
ning along it, Ou the edge tbere are from 13 to 20 fatlioi
aDd one boat's length outside of tbe bank there is bo botto

When directly over the bank tbe white coral with tbe d
grass can be plainly seen, but 20 yards away the water haa
ance of the rest of tbe sea. t

CHAPTER IX.

HAITI.

The Island of Baiti, comprisiug two Republics, viz, Haiti on the
east and Santo Doiniu^ooiithe west, is rich and befiutifnl, the second in
size of the West India Islands; it is very irregular in form, being deeply
indented with bays and inlets and corresponding projections, the most
remarkable of which forms the southwestern extremity.

Three connected chains of mountains intersect the island from west
to east, and between these ranges are extensive plains and savannas.
The principal range of mountains, called the Cibao, runs in an east
and west direction from Cape Nicholas to Cape Engaiio.

Mount Yaque is its highest peak, near the center of the island*
Almost parallel w ith this chain another, commencing near Monte Christi,
runs in an easterly direction, skirting the north coast, and terminating
abruptly on approaching the peninsula of Samand. To the eastward
of this range are low, marshy grounds, interlaced by estuaries and chan-
nels which formerly separated Samand ft'om the mainland and afforded
communication from the gulf of that name to the sea on the north shore
of the island; the heiglits, however, reappear on the opposite side of
the low ground and terminate in Cape Saman^.

La Yega Real lies between these two mountain ranges, affording rich
and extensive pasture lands.

The third and most southerly mountain range commences at Cape
Tiburon, and extends to the eastward, terminating at the River Neiva,
about 80 miles west of the city of Santo Domingo.

All the streams of Haiti of any imxiortance originate in the great
central mountain chain. The principal rivers are the Artibonite, flow-
ing west; the Monte Christi, or North Yacki, northwest; the Yuma,
flowing southeast ; and the Nei va, or South Yacki, the Xisao, and the
Ozama, flowing south. The mouths of all these rivers are obstructed
by sand bars, and hence few of them are navigable. The Ozama, bow-
er, admits vessels drawing 10 feet.

Mineral springs of various kinds exist in different parts of the island.

The mineral products are various and very rich, including gold, plati-
om, silver, quicksilver, coi)per, iron, tin, sulphur, manganese, anti-

ny, and rock salt.

All tropical fruits and vegetables grow in abundance*, and coffee,

^ar, cotton, indigo, and toba(*eo can be plentifully raised.

251

252 SANTO DOMINGO.

Timber of all kinds is abundant, including pine, mabogany, oak,
satinwood, lignum- vitie, and many other species.

The seaports are all or nearly all very unhealthy, yellow fever being
a constant attendant during the hot season.

The island was discovered by Columbus on the 5th of December,
1492. The boundary line between the two Republics is very irregular
and is in dijipute, butns generally considered to run from the mouth of
the River Massacre, in Manzanillo Bay, on the north, to the Creek Anse-
a-Pitres, or Pedernales, on the south coast, in about longitude 71^ 50' W.

The people are almost entirely of the negro race, and speak a Span-
ish dialect in Santo Domingo and a French patois in Haiti.

Winds and Seasons. — The winds in the island vary according to
the trend of the different parts of the coast.

The rainy season continues from the end of May until November. In
this season gusts and storms are frequent; at the same i)eriod strong
SE. winds are experienced in the bay of Gonaives and in the channel
of St. Marc. In November, December, January, and February the
winds are from the NE., variable to NVV., blow with force, principally
on the northern coast of the island.

On the southern coast frequent storms occur in June, July, and August,
in which the winds come from the south and are violent principally
from that direction.

On the entire coast of this island the sea breezes blow, their direction
varying according to the trending of the land. The sea breeze com-
mences from 8 to 9 a. m., increases until midday or 4 p. m., when it
diminishes and gives place to the land breeze, which lasts until 4 or 6
o'clock in the morning.

The general track of hurricanes lies to the northward of this islamU
oc(!asi()nally, however, during the luirricaue season, from July to Octo-
ber, they blow with terrific force.

Ports of Entry. Charges — Santo Domingo. — The coast is im-
perfectly surveyed. Many of the ports at which vessels call for cargo
are not charted, and masters of vessels are compelled to rely on the
pilots, who for the most part are ignorant and know little of the Eng-
lish language. The ports of entry for imports and exports are Santo
Domingo, Puerto Plata, Azua, and Samana. ]\ronte Christ! is a port for
export only. Vessels taking cargo on the south and east coasts, enter and
clear at Santo Domingo and take a pilot; also a number of laborers, to
assist in handling (;argo. The i)ilot acts as stevedore and is paid from
$1.50 to ^i.lo per day, Sundays and fast days included. The labor
receive from 75 to 87. J cents per day, all being subsisti^d by the vr'
while they are on board. The pilot directs the laborers, who work
lighters. Europeans not accustomed to work in the water are
quently taken sick, and vessels will meet witli quicker dispatch b^
ploying laborers and not exposing their crews, little accuston
work in the tropics. The i>ort charges are moderate. Ves'^"*'" "'

samanA peninsula — CAPE. samanA. 253

enter under the following eircamstances are free from port charges,
unless they take water or a pilot, for which they pay as is stipulated,
viz:

(1) Vessels of war, foreign or domestic f vessels that arrive with emi-
grants, and those that enter to repair damages, or to sell part of their
cargo to supply their wants, without doing any other business.

(2) Those that enter and clear in baUast, or to procure provisions, to
try the market, or on account of bad weather, to make repairs, or other
causes, on condition that they do not discharge or take cargo on board.

(3) Vessels that, on account of damages, discharge a part or whole of
their cargo, which, if it was sold according to law, would have to pay the
same port charges as other vessels, but if the cargo is reexported in
the same vessel, without any part being sold, they would pay only 2
per cent storage on the value of the cargo as determined by the ap-
praisers. They would also pay the '< derecho de muelle," also pilotage
and wat^ if they are taken.

Samani Panixisiila — Cape Samand. — The east end of this penin-
sula terminates at Gape Saman^, which forms a bold double cliff of
moderate elevation, the upper rising a short distance within the sum-
mit of the lower. These cliffs, which are red and steep-to, extend about
2 miles to the south, where the land i^ 833 feet high abreast of Vaca
Point. At about i mile southward of Vaca Point and close to the
shore there is a remarkable spout, resembling continuous jets of steam,
occasioned by the rush of water into a subterranean cavern. This
spout has been seen when 7 miles southward of it. At about 3 miles
to the westward of the cape, between Balandra Head on the south and
Gape Gabron on the north, the peninsula is 10 miles across, and this is
about its general breadth. A small reef on which the sea breaks
extends off Cape Samand.

Capa Cabron. — The shore between Capes Sainan^ and Cabron, 4}
miles apart, forms a deep bight, in which are several small cays, skirted
by a reef. The latter cape also terminates in a remarkable white per-
pendicular cliff, and 5 miles to the SW.of it is a cone shaped peak 1,926
feet above the sea, to the SW. of which peak are two others close
together, 1,058 and 1,830 feet, respectively, and 2 miles south of these
two latter is Mount el Pilon de Azucar, a conspicuous peak, reaches
1,612 feet above the sea. This part of coast should not be approached
within 3 miles.

""he Coast from Cape Cabron trends W. by S. about 23 miles to
kson Point, 6 miles beyond which it turns altnost suddenly to the
tliward for 25 miles to Cape Viejo Frances. Between the two for-
' points there are several small bays and beaches, whence, in favor-
B weather, mahogany is shi])ped in droghers, but there is no safe
horage for large vessels. The western shore of this i^acat bight is
illy barren antl uninhabited, and affords no shelter whatever.

254 >ANTO DOMIN(;0.

Fort Jackson affords toleriible anchorage for vessels of moderate
size, being somewhat sheltered by the cay and reef of the same uame.
The entrance is open to the NE., and is said to be clear of danger,
except a shoal in mid-channel, easily seen, and having deep water on
both sides. There are some large caj's or rocks 4 miles eastward of the
entrance, and still farther to the eastward are some others. The
^ entrance to the harbor is said to be abreast of a remarkable white rock.

Near the port and westward of it is the mouth of the Grand Estero
Kiver, which formerly joined the Yuna River at the head of Samauil
Bay. The entrance to the river affords anchorage moderately well
sheltered, with depths of from oi to 11 fathoms.

Port Matanza, in the southwestern portion of Escocesa Bay, is
easily entered, but is only tit for small vessels. On the southern shore
of the bay there are some smcall anchorages, where in line weather
coasters may load mahogany.

The other ports in the bight are Moretes, Galeras, Rincon, Escondi<lo,
San Juan, PHermitano, Limon, Pechems Point, and the mouth of the
Lateriana River,

Cape Viejo Frances is bold, lofty, and visible 30 miles oft'. About
20 miles S.34o W. (S. 3¥> W. mag.) of it there is a remarkable large
mountain named Quita Espuela, which may be seen at the distance of 45
miles, and from off' Cape Gabron it has the appearance of a det^tehed
island. As it is approached, the land will be seen to slope gradually
down to the cape. A very similar ridge branches off to the eastward,
and when at a few miles from the shore its termination may be mis-
taken for the true capej the extreme piti^h of the true cape, however, is
rather low, and there are some rocks and foul ground near it. A little
to the westward of it, in a small bay, there is anchorage for small
vessels.

Cape la Roca is about 10 miles westward of Cape Viejo Frances,
and between them the coast is low, steep, and thickly wooded, and
being foul, should not be approached within 3 miles. From Cape Roca
the shore extends about WNW. for 20 miles to Macoris Point, which is
high and steep-to. To the westward of the point is Port Santiago.

Between Cape La Roca and Macoris Point are the small ports of
Macoris, Grosse Poiute, Ananas, Soufri^re, and Cabaret.

Soufri^re affords anchorage for vessels of considerable size. The
western channel is the better one of the two cuts through the reef
which shelters the anchorage. Most of the other ports are only boat
harbors.

The River Yasica empties into the sea 3.J miles SE. from Port Ca^^c
There is absolutely no shelter here, and no vessel can anchor ^
safety. The mahogany cut in this vicinity is taken by land to P^^*^^ '
aret and shipped from there.

Port Cabaret is about one mile wide at the entrance, formed b^
aret Point on the east and Goleta Point on the west side. ^

PUERTO PLATA. 255

latter x>oiiit a dan'j»eroiis reef stretches ott* in a SE. direction toward
Cabaret Point. Outside this reef, to the northward, is a sand bank
with 2^ fathoms of water on it, and also a rocky bank with IJ fathoms.

The passage in between the reefs is about 60 yards wide, with
depths of 3i to .IJ fathoms. ]N\Blsons Reef and an offlying rock lie in
the middle of the harbor.

Vessels of 400 tons visit this port, anchoring in 4 to 5 fathoms of
water within 300 yards of the shore. The holding ground is not good.
Before entering it will be well to buoy the points of the reefs. The
tide rises 2 feet.

The coast between ports Cabaret and Plata is bordered by reefs, and
should not be approached nearer than 2 or 3 miles.

Puerto Plata is the only port of entry in this part of the island.
Its locality is easily recognized by a high isolated mountain called Isa-
bella de Torres, and having a consi)icuous white spot on it. Westward
of the mountain, at a distance of 4 or 5 miles, are some small conical
hills. The harbor is semicircular in form, with a low, sandy beach, and
affords anchorage. On the eastern point there is a hill with a fort on
it, near which, to the southward, is the tovni.

Th^l)ort is not much of a harbor for large vessels and it is not safe
to let vessels swing. Steamers after anchoring moor head out with
stem lines to one of the three mooring buoys. The chart is incorrect,
and is only a general guide to the harbor. The number of wrecks show
that it is an exceedingly dangerous port, and a stranger entering with-
out a pilot risks the losing of his ship. The wreck of the Alsatia is a
good landmark; two vertical cylinders stand well out of water and can
be readily distinguished when approaching the harbor. The most dan-
gerous obstruction for lightdraft vessels is the wreck of the Tiber,
which has from one to 4 feet of water over it, and lies in about 2^ fathoms
water. It was this wreck that caused a Si)anish gunboat to be lately
wrecked. The wreck of the Tiber lies 815 yards S. 32° E. (S. 33^ E. mag.)
of Owen Rock (center) and the gunboat 320 yards S. 47^ W. (S. 46^ W.
mag.) of the Tiber.

The large wharf has 7 feet water at the end of it and is very much
out of repair. At present it is of no commercial value. It was formerly
longer, but owing to the heavy seas heaving around East Point, could
not be kept in repair. About 150 feet off the end of the wharf there is
a rock with but 5 feet of water on it. The small wharf is only used as

')oat landing.
'Jhe population is about 4,000.

j?he Uniied States is represented by a consul and vice-consul.

Owen Rock. — At the entrance is a rocky islet and readily distin-
ished at 3 or 4 miles off.

Iialla Rock. — Is a most dangerous obstruction at the entrance; it is
lated and surrounded by deep water. The least depth over it is 18J
*t. The soundings in its vicinity range from 10 to 11 fathoms and on

r
L

}

256 SANTO DOMINGO.

the rock cliaage abruptly from 10 to 6^ from 6 to 4, afid from 4 fathoms
to 18^ feet. The rosk is ^ot more than 40 feet in diameter; the shoalest
spot is only a few feet in diameter. There is usually a considerable
swell over the rock which makes it dangerous for comparatively light-
draft vessels. The rock lies 900 yards K 9^ E. (K. 8^ E. mag.) of the
lighthouse.

Steamers. — Steamers to New York, Europe, Cuba, and Puerto Eico
make regular trips.

Port Charges. — Tonnage dues $1 per ton, gold; entry, 6 cents per
ton; anchorage, 6 cents per ton; doctor's visit, $2; interpreter, $2 to
$4; signals, $2 to $4. Steamers pay the same tonnage, but other dues
are one cent instead of 6, Light dues one cent for steamers and 6 cents
for sailing vessels per ton register.

Pilots. — Pilotage not compulsory. When taken, steamers pay one
cent and sailing vessels 6 cents per ton register.

Light. — On the hill near the signal station a flashing light is shown at
an elevation of 137 feet above the sea, and should be visible 16 miles.
The light shows a flash of 10 seconds duration every 50 seconds.

Water and Supplies. — Two small streams empty themselves at the
head of Puerto Plata, and in the rainy season cause a strong outset; at
this period the River St. Mark, in the western port of the harbor, is
open for boats, and is the best watering place. In the dry season the
eastern rivulet would be the most convenient; but the water casks most
then be rolled up about i mile and rafted ofl'; at times the swell makes
watering very diflftcult. Wood will be found on the western shore.
Provisions are cheap and plentiful.

Winds. — In the winter at Puerto Plata the sea breeze sets in strong
from the ENE. about 9 a. m. and continues until near sunset, when a
moderate land wind comes off from the southward. It is remarked
that Northers seldom blow home into the port.

Directions. — When at a distance of 2 miles from the coast, and run-
ning in for Puerto Plata, bring the Fort Point in line with the west end
of the peak of Isabella de Torres bearing S. 20^ W. (S. 19° W. mag.),
and continue on this course until Owen Rock, just outside the western
reef, bears K 67© W. (N. 68o W. mag.); then steer S. 31o W. (8. 30°
W. mag.), which leads in through the channel, a little more than 200
yards wide, and for which the eye is the best guide. The soundings in
the channel are regular, but just within the points it vshoals very sud-
denly, and there are only 2 fathoms at J mile from the head of the ho**-
bor; vessels of moderate draft must therefore be prepared to anr
immediately between the entrance points in about 5 fathomS wate

The reef skirts the coast for some miles to the westward of the pt
but within a short distance of Patilla Point the laud may be approach
to the distance of a mile, but there is no anchorage.

Tides. — It is high water, full and chiin^e, in Puerto Plata at 7h. i
and the rise is about 3 feot. The coast tidal t-urrent sets across f'"*
ance to the linrbor.

PATILLA POINT — ^JICAQUITO BAY. 257

Patillm Pointy 12 miles westward of Paerto Plata, is a lofty bold head-
landy and rea^lily distinguished; a reef runs off it for about 800 yards,
and at j mile from the shore are 10 and 11 fathoms water. Thence the
coast line trends about W. by N. 11 miles to Gape Isabella, the north
extreme of Haiti, on the east.

Cape Isabella. — From off Patilla Point, Gape Isabella has the ap-
pearance of a low, thickly wooded island, with some remarkable palm
trees on its north end; a small reef runs off about 200 yards from it.
A short distance eastward of the cape is Puerto Gaballos, a reef harbor,
reported to be more commodious than Puerto Plata, with, however, but
10 feet of water in the entrance. About 5 miles farther east is the an-
chorage of Azufre.

Isabella Bay. — To the westward of the cape is Isabella Bay, open
to the north and N W., but affording good anchorage and easy of access.
A good berth will be found with a bottom of mud and sand in 4^ fath-
oms of water, with the north point bearing N. 46° B. (N. 45^ E. mag.),
about 1^ miles distant. SmaU vessels may anchor closer in shore, but
the depths are irregular, with a reef and several sunken rocks in the way.

Supplies. — Fresh provisions, wood, and water may be procured here.

Bstero Balsa Arriba or Port Jnanita. — This harbor is about mid-
way between Gape Isabella and Monte Ghristi. A. reef extending east
and west along the entire coast line, at about 2 to 2^ miles £bom the
shore, has two natural openings at this place, one at the eastern end
of the port, the other at the western end, each affording a passage
through the reef.

Within the above mentioned reef is a tranquil harbor, with deep and
safe anchorage everywhere. Vessels of from 10 to 12 feet draft may
safely approach to within a very short distance from the shore.

The eastern channel is wide, with depths of from 8 to 14 fathoms,
excepting a small sand bank in mid-channel, with 2 fathoms over it and
having deep water on either side.

Fresh water cannot be obtained, but when proceeding to this port a
supply can be obtained at Monte Ghristi.

There is said to be anchorage under Arenas Gay in 5 or 6 fathoms and
1^ miles off shore; also under Bucia Point, 3 miles farther east, in 12
fathoms water, sheltered by the reef off it, as far around as NNW.

Jicaqoito Bay. — To theeiistwardof PoiiitGranja the shore recedes to

the SE., forming between it and Frag&ta Point a deep bight, called Jica-

— 'to Bay, nearly 2 miles broad and 1 J miles deep, which is reported to

►rd good anchorage, protected by a reef extending off from the latter

nt; the sea breaks at all times on the reef, the end of which is N.

^ E (N. 220 E. mag.), about one mile from the eastern end of Granja
1. The eastern p9.rt of the anchorage is very shoal, and on entering

8 necessary to keep over towards Granja Hill. The head of Jicaquito

y is low and swampy, and there is said to be a water communication
^een it and Monte Ghristi. Tides rise 3 feet.
18402 17

258 SANTO DOMINGO.

Orai^ja Point is a bold headland about a mile in lengthy and forms
the extremity of the small peninsula of Monte Christi. It lies about
8. 850 W. (S. H40 W. mag.), 38 milevS from Cape Isabella, and is readily
distinguished by a remarkable hill near the shore, about 800 feet high.
Its flattened summit has the appearance of a large barn, and, being
seen long before the land in its neighborhood, wiU be found a useful
object to vessels beating up from the westward.

Monte Christi Bank extends from Cape Isabella to the westward as
far as 12 miles NW. of Granja Point, then sweeps to theSW. and joins
the shore again at Manzanillo Point. It has never been thoroughly sur-
veyed, and urgently needs examination. Within its limits are several
islets, rocks, and shoals; until a more complete examination has been
made, great caution must be used in passing over or near it. On this
bank the water is discolored, the depth uneven, and the nature of the
bottom very variable, being generally coral or coarse sand near the
edge and mud nearer the shore.

Ghraiqa or Haut Fond Banks are two small patches near the edge of
Monte Christi Bank. The innermost, wliich bears N. 29° B. (N. 28° E.
mag.) about 6^ miles from,Grai\ja Point, is about ^ mile in extent^and
has as little as 23 feet water on it, with from 12 to 25 fathoms around.
The other lies about a mile If. 22o W. (N. 23° W. mag.) of this, close to
the edge of the bank, and N. 18° B. (N. 17o B. mag.), 7^ miles ftom
Granja Point. It is very similar in extent to the former and has a
depth of 6 fathoms.

Monte Christi Shoal lies about west, 9 miles from the Grai\ja
BankS) with Granja Point bearing S. 5(|o B. (S. 51^ B. mag.) 9 miles;
and the western edge of the bank distant 3 miles; It is about | mile
in length, and composed of detached small pointed rocks upon a white
sand bank, with as little as 2f fathoms on them, and from 4 to 7 fathoms
between the heads.

Phaeton and Liverpool Shoals. — Phaeton Shoal, a little over 2
miles distant from Fraile Islet, is 300 yards long east and west, and
200 yards broad, with a depth of 3^ fathoms over it. Liverpool Shoal,
S mile N. 39© W. (N. 40^ W. mag.) of Phaeton Shoal, is 700 yards long,
200 yards broad, and upon it there are from 2^ to 4 fathoms. About
lOO yards north of the eastern end of Liverpool Shoal is a smaller patch
of 5 fathoms with 10 fathoms close- to.

Graiya Point, bearing 8. 72^ E. (S. 73^ E. mag.), leads one mile
southward of these dangers, but very close to the 17-foot shoal recently
reported.

Dangerous Shoal.— The existence of a shoal with 17 to 18
water over it has been reported in the fairway of approach to M'
Christi Bay, on the following bearings:

Granja Point S. 72o E. (8. 73© E. mag.).

Oenter of Monte Grande Islet S. 24© W. (S. 23° W. mag.).

FBA.ILE ISLET MONTE CHRI8TI ANCHORAGE. 259

The shoal is not indicated by the color of the water and abont | mile
westward of the danger the depth is over 10 fathoms.

Fraito Islet, ^boat 30 yards from the extreme of Oraiya Point, is
an exoeUent landmark; there is no passage even for a boat between it
and the point.

Oatara Zal«t, lying abont 600 yards SW. of Oranja Point, is 33 feet
high and partly covered with trees; there are low bln£fs at its north
and south ends, the middle is low, and it is scarcely distinguishable
from the mainland when approached from the westward, until dose-to.
A reef extends 400 yards to the northward of this islet, on which the sea
does not always break. In the passage between Gabra Islet and the
shore there are 1^ to 2 fathoms of water.

C«y.— Nearly one mile S. 12° W. (S. lio W. mag.) of Cabra Islet is
a small rocky cay, northward of which is a bank divided into two parts
by a narrow channel of 2| fathoms, which is buoyed, but the positions
of the buoys in this anchorage are not to be depended upon.

Monte ChriBti Anchorage. — From Granja Point the coast takes
first a southerly and then a southwesterly direction about 5^ miles, as
&r as Yuna Point. In the bight is the anchorage and town of Monte
Ohristi, which is overlc^ked by a remarkable hill crowned by Fort
San Francisco, more than a mile from the shore. When seen from the
NNW., at about 5 miles distance, the summit Of the hiU has the ap-
pearance of a saddle with several white spots on its declivities. There
is also a small fort on the shore to the westward of this, and two oth^s
between it and Granja Point. The Biver Yaqne formerly discharged
itself a short distance to the S W. of the village, and supplied it with
water, but it has changed its course within the present century, and
now flows into ManzanQlo Bay, about 10 miles farther southward.

Anchorage. — There is an excellent anchorage between Gabra Islet
and the rocky cay. There are no hidden dangers in this vicinity except
a small shoal, with from 2^ to 4 fathoms over it, $ mile to the westward
of the anchorage.

This anchorage is completely protected from the trade winds, which
blow constantly during the day in summer time, and the water is very
smooth.

Five fathoms will be found on a line between the islet and the cay,
eastward of which the water gradually shoals towards the shore and
the bottom becomes soft; i mile westward of this line there is a depth
'^^ 6 or 7 fathoms.

Tirections. — If bound to Monte Ghristi from the eastward, steer
m Cape Isabella for Granja Point, making allowance for the inset of
cunent, and round it less than one mile distant to avoid the inner
aeton Shoals.

n approaching the anchorage from the westward, Granja Point
aid be brought to bear S. 73^ E. (8. 74^ E. mag.) and approached

260 SANTO DOMINGO.

on that bearing, thus keeping to the southward of the Liv<
ton, Monte Christi Shoals, and the new 17-ft>ot ^hoal.

In navigating off this piirt of the coast, when steerikg
ward, if it is desired to pass to the northward of all the i
gers just described, fri>in a position 12 miles north of Ca]
couise northward of west sbonld be steered to allow foi
set of the carreat, and to give the Mont« Christ! Bank a j

When Granja Point bears soath (9. l'^' E. mag.) a vesi
the westward of Oranja Bank, and when Tercero Cay, the m
of the Seven Islands, and the third eouuting from the eat
south (S. 1° E. mag.) she will be westward of Monte Chrii

The SoTOD lelands form a group ot small low cays lyh
low part of the bank to the westwarti of Granja Point, oceni
of about 8 miles east and west, and .*> miles north and
northern edge of the bank is about i miles to the sonthwi
Christi Shoal, and a navigable channel a mile wide appeal
tween the cays and the shore. Tercero Cay bears K. 89^ W
9 miles ttom Oraiija Point, and Arenas lies -I miles farthei
The most of them are covered with mangroves, but Monte
largest aad the second from the eastward, is distinguis
larger than those on the others-
Anchorage will be found under the eastern islet, called
and also under the southern one, called Tororu. The lat
the edge of the bank.

CnxrentB and Tides.— Near the Seven Islands and i
them, the current sets to the SE.; therefore during light
necessary to be (cautions in approaching them from the ^
The tides are perceptible in the vicnnity of the isleta a
the flood runs to the SW,, half a knot an hour, and the eb
same rate.

ManxaniUo Bay is a secure and iiccessible anchorage,
of the bay are low and <»vered with mangroves, the easter
ing the delta of Yaque River. On the south shore is the i
Biver Masaacre, forming the boundary between the terrib
and Santo E>omingo.

There is no danger in Manzanillo Bay; an excellent v
anchorage will be found east of >[anzaiiilIo Point, aboi
shore in 7 fathoms, muddy bottom. The edge of the bank
is very steep, and on the eastern side of the bay is only J n

In appoachiug the Man^tauillo Bay from the eastward,
Monte Christi may be crosseil with Siifety.

Foul ground extends for about J mile off Yuna I'ohit; ;
should be given it, and to the coast as far soutit as Mauza

Water. — The Kiver Tapiou empties itself into the east
zanillo Bay, the Terrabassa into the SE, comer, iind the J
the south side. Good water will be fimnd in either, but it

MANZANILLO BAY CARACOL BAY. 261

sary to proceed 6 miles np the latter, in the dry season, before it is fit
for drinking.

Directions. — ^Manzanillo Bay may be approached by the route out-
side Monte Christi Shoal, and westward of the Seven Islands, or by
the channel through Monte Christi Bay. In the former case a vessel
from the eastward would go much to leeward and have to work to the
anchorage. To take the inner channel after having passed Gra^ja
Point, steer to the westward, and when Yuna Point bears S. 12° W.
(S. 11^ W. mag.) steer towards it until Monte Chico bears N. 89^ W.
(west mag.), when alter course to 8. 46^ W. (S. 45° W. mag.). Pass
eastward of Tororu, and when it bears N. 23© E. (N. 22° E. mag.) haul
to the southward, and work into the anchorage.

In this channel a vessel may anchor for the night; the depths are 6
and 7 fathoms, sandy, mud bottom, and the liolding ground good. The
edge of the bank is very steep; from the depth of 11 to 18 fathoms it
suddenly increases, the seamen should therefore be certain of being on
the bank before letting go the anchor. In this bight the trade winds
during the day and land winds at night are always suflBciently fresh to
facilitate greatly the communication between Fort Dauphin and Monte
Christi.

Fort Danphin Bay. — The harbor is an excellent one, being perfectly
sheltered, commodiou^s, and affording excellent holding ground, with a
depth of water sufficient for vessels of the largest size. The entrance
is so narrow and crooked as to render it difficult for a sailing vessel,
except with a commanding breeze. Shoals make off for a short distance
from the points in the channel, making the turnings difficult with a
long vessel, and great care must be exercised. No directions can be
given for the entrance except to keep in mid-channel, for which the eye
will be the best guide. This narrow channel widens into a land-looked
basin 3nd free from shoals except to the eastward of Fort Dauphin.

Near the middle of the bay is Boyau Islet, which is foul to the distance
of 200 yards on its NE. side; the most convenient anchorage will be
found in 12 fathoms water, between Fort Dauphin, which is built at the
north end of the town, and the islet. There is a good careening spot on
hhe northern shore, a little eastward of the inner end of the channel.

About a mile westward of the entrance to the port commences the
great reef, which sweeps outward towards Cape Haiti, and protects
the east side of that harbor.

""de». — It is high water, fiill and change, in port Fort Dauphin at
Om. ; springs rise 5^ feet, neaps 3 J feet.

7aracol Bay lies between Yaquezi Point, which is 9 miles westward
>ort Fort Dauphin, and Caracol Point, and is nearly 4 miles wide, but
8 so shallow as to be only fit for coasters, which find their way into it

her by channel within the reef, or through a narrow intricate cut to
I NE. of Carac>ol Point.

262 HAITI.

tiimonade Bfty. — Westward of Oaracol is a small ba;,
is auchorage for coasters, with a deep cut in a NW. and
through the reef, Theace the shore still trends westwar
and then turns smldeiily to the northward along the east
great promontory of Cape Haiti-
Cape Haiti, formerly called Cape Fran^ais and afb
Henri, is sheltered on the south and west sides by the
the east and NE, by sand banks and reefs. Although it
northward, the anchorage is well sheltered in that direct
and Hhoals within the harbor, which is eaay of access in
The approaches to the anchorages are not lighted, nor arf
the shoals to be depended upon. The southern shore is lov
and bounded by a sandy beach. At the east end of the
the small village on Petite Anse, and about midway betwi
and the west«m shore there is a small woody hillock, on
min of a fort. The River Haut dn Cap empties itself into t
of the harbor, but the water is not sufficiently good for t
a or >t miles within the entrance. An iron bridge crosses

About 300 yards NW, of Picolet Point, and close to th
is a remarkable small barren reddish colored rock, streake
and much washed away at the base, which may be reco,
distance of about 3 miles, and a fort with white walla i
extremity of the point about 50 or 60 feet above the sea.
to the southward of the point is Fort Joseph, which is o^
hill 963 feet high, detached fh)m the main ridge, and cr
lookout house with it'* roof painted red and white; i mi
Joseph there is another small battery, and ^ mile farther I
end of the town are two fortu at the waters edge, which
anchorage.

Town. — ^The town of Cape Haiti stands on a small plal
side of the harbor, at the foot of a high range of mountair
du Cap, which rises abruptly a short distance north of tl
Masonic tt^mple is tlie highest building in the town; its
has a portico and is painted gray. The cathedral, in the
town, is a large conspicuous, square building, of a yellow
dark sloping roof. The square tower and some other pi
old cathedral are still standing. The customhouse is r»
house painted red standing next south of it.

The iieople are neat and cleanly; the streets are dirty.

A wooden pier about J ™'1« loug extends southeast
customhouse. Thei-e is now about 10 feet of water at er
The harbor is filling up from the river.

Population about 15,0(Mt,

Tbe Unit«d Stnt^-s is repre.iented by a consul and vice-c
orities to visit: The general commanding the district
mandant of the ptaoe.

CAPE HAITI. 263

Boat Ziandiiig is near the captain of the port's house, which is yellow
and in the northern part of the town. The Haitien flag flies from this
honse. Discharging and loading by lighters; tliey are expeditious and
well constructed.

Supplies. — Fresh provisions can be had of fair quality and are mod-
erate ii! price; fruit is very cheap in season. Water is abundant and
fair in quality. It is brought to the town by pipes, and vessels water by
boats from the wharf.

Coal can be had in small quantities; cost $13 to $14 i)er ton, trans-
ferred to vessels in barges.

Steamers — ^Mails. — Several lines of steamers run from Boston and
New York. Mails are carried by the steamers, also once a week by
horseback to Port au Prince.

Note*. — Vessels are prohibited from entering or leaving this port, as
well as the rest of the ports of the Republic, between the hours of 6
p. m. and 6 a. m.

Tides. — It is high water, full and change, in Cape Haiti Harbor at
6h. Ora.; the rise is about 3 feet.

Port Charges, Pilotage Daes.— Tonnage dues 81 per ton; pilotage
on vessels from 50 to 100 tons^ $4; 101 to 200 tons, $8; 201 to 300 tons,
$10; 301 to 400 tons, $12; above 400 tons $16. Doctor's visit, vessels
of 200 tons or less, $8; 201 to 300 tons, $12; 301 tons and over, $1(1; for
each steamer $25. Fountain for vessels from 15 to 50 tons, $2; 51 to
100 tons, $3; 101 to 160 tons, $4.50; 151 tons to 250 tons, $6; 251 tons
to 300 tons $7.50; above 300 tons $10. The charges on a vessel of 150
tons are $327.15« calculated as follows: In addition to the regular
dues 88^ per cent of the sum of the tonnage and <loetor's visit, and 30
per cent of the sum of the pilotage, signaling, and fountain dues are
charged.

Signals. — At the ^^Ijookouf there is a small house for a lookout,
and there are three masts planted there in about a N. 2io E. (N. 20^ B.
mag.) S. 21^ W. (S. 20° W. mag.) range from each other and well apart.
A good lookout is kept at this station constantly, and the following sig-
nals are use^ to communicate the approach of vessels :

A signal on the northern mast indicates a vessel approaching from
the eastward.

A signal on the center mast indicates a vessel api)roacliing from the
northward.

A sigual on the southern mast indicates a vessel approacliin^ from

e westward.

A white flag denotes a sailing vessel.

A blue flag denotes a steamer.

A red flag denotes a Haitien steamer.

A blue flag and pennant denote a foreign man-of-war.

A. red flag and pennant denote a Haitien man-of-war.

Reefis. — The reefs in the harbor can always be seen when it is smooth

264 HAITI.

and the sun moderately high ; if it is rough the sea breaks i
on the weather side of all except La Trompeuse.

Le Grand Monton, the shoal which shelters the anel
Iiarbor from the north and obstmcts the passage in, is 80
in a north and south direction and 400 yards broad. Its n
which the sea generally breaks, is about J mile from For
with a clear deep channel between, but being so far to leewa
the most direct passage, is seldom used by sailing vesseli
200 yards eastward of the south end of Le Grand Mouton th«
detached shallow bead, steep-to.

Le Petit Monton, which generally shows itself, lies S. H
mag.) i mile from Le Grand Mouton buoy, and near the
eastern reefs.

La Trompense is a small shoal with 3 feet water on it
awkward position near the middle of "the bay.

Shoal. — There is no bnoy to mark the shoal which is li
800 yards S. 21° W. {S. 20° W. mag.) of the Mardi Gras 81
the intention to have placed a buoy there, when the othci
recently put down, but it has not been dooe.

On this unmarked shoal lies tlie wreck of the old Englisl
Bnlldog, wrecked there in 1866, and on which wreck the CI
Saginaw recently struck and received considerable injury,
is entirely beneath the surface of the water.

A Wreck, with several small spars and a stump of a n
above water, lies in 10 fathoms of water about 1,135 yards
Dames Point.

Bnoyage. — At eastern side of entrance, marking tlie we
the detached 3^-fathom patch, a black bnoy in about 6 fathi
on the following bearings:

Fort Vitton (Woody Hillock) S. 12° W, (S. 11° V

Picolet Point S. 58o W. (8. 57° \

At the northern extremity of Le Grand Mouton a hlac
perpendicolarly striped buoy, siu-mounted by a red spindl
about IJ fathoms water on the following bearings :

Fort Vitton 8. 11° W. (S. lO^ \

North aide of battery on St. Josephs
Point S. 770 W. (S. 7f)0 \

At the eastern extremity of Mardi Gras Eeef a red buo;
top, on the followiog bearings:

Fort Vittou 8. no "W. (S. 10° \

Masonic Hall 8. 5.10 W. (8. 52o T

The re<l buoy marking tlie detached shoal SE. of Le Gr;
was moved about 100 yards to the northward and eastwari
about on the line of the 5-fathoin curve, on the following b

Picolet Point K. 320 w. (S". 33° \

Masonic Hall 8. 59° W. (S. 58'= V

CAPK HAITI DIRECTIONS. 265

La Trompeuse buoy is now a black buoy, and lies about 100 yards
NE. of its former position, on the following bearings:

St. Josephs Point N. 30^ W. (N. 31o W. mag.)

Customhouse S. 78^ W, (S. 77o W. mag,)

Le Belier buoy is moored on the 5-fathom curve, with the following
bearings :

St. Josephs Point N. 2;5o W. (N. 29^ W. mag.)

Customhouse ! N. 76o W. (N. 77o W. mag.)

Directions. — In approaching the harbor at Cape Haiti from the east-
ward, a vessel should steer about S. 08^ W. (S. 67^ W. mag.) aft^r pars-
ing the Monte Christi Shoal, till the highest part of the mountains of
Haut du Cap bear about S. 46^ W. (S. 45'^ W. mag.). Then steer for
them till the fort on Point Picolet is sighted. This fort should be
brought to bear S. 24^ W. (S. 23^ W. mag.) and approached on this
bearing. A pilot can generally be obtained off this point, and a stranger
should take one. They should, however, be carefully watched and not
implicitly trusted. In standing in, S. 24o W, (S. 23^ W. mag.) for Point
Picolet, by keeping the masts of the lookout station a little open to
the right of Fort Picolet the detached bank of 11) feet on the east side
of the entrance is avoided; then as soon as Cape Haiti, the northern
point of the promontory, bears Is, 89^ W. (west mag.) a vessel will be
abreast of the NW. point of the reef called the Coq Vieille, and may
then haul to the southward.

In approaching Cape Haiti Harbor fiom the westward, a vessel should
keep at least 1^ or 2 miles off shore to avoid the coral reefs skirting the
shore.

Approaching Grand Mouton be careful not to shut in the barren
rock which lies NW. of Picolet Point, with that point, until the vessel
is abreast of the north end of the bank, or the Lookout comes in one
with Fort Joseph bearing N. 89^ W. (west mag.), when keep away with
the buoy off the SE. end of the Mouton on the starboard bow.

Having passed eastward of this buoy, steer towards the customhouse,
with that building in line with the Masonic Hall, and when Point Pi-
colet bears N. 10^ W. (N. 11^ W. mag.), haul up for the anchorage, pass-
ing inshore of La Trompeuse Shoal. As a vessel may have to haul up
as high as SE., she must wait until the sea breeze has set well in, and
strangers had better not attempt to enter without a pilot, who is gen-
lly at hand. A sailing vessel will have to wait for the land wind to
•ry her out; and as the sea breeze in the winter months sometimes
ivails during the night, she may be liable to some detention,
^he clearing marks formerly used are not now readily recognized by
tranger. The following will be useful:

Then entering this harbor Barren Rock should be kept just open
Picolet Point until the cathedral bears S. 6(yO W. (S. ^o^ W. mag.),
en it must be steered for on that bearing. When Picolet Point bears

266 HAITI.

N. lOoW. (N. now. mag.Jt La Trompeuse Shoal will hav
and ancliorage may be taken up as convenieDt.

The pillars of the ruiiied gateway between Forte St, J
colet, open off Fort St. Joseph, lead^ to the eastward
Btretching off shore in the western channel.

Winds, — Steamers may enter and leave this port at i
the leading marks can be seen, but HaiUug vessels must
aea breeze and leave with the land breeze, which bio
evening aud night from ESE, to SE. arid dies away about
After an intervalof calm the Seabreeze springs up about 1
blowing from NE. to ENB,

Throughout the 24 hours the winds off shore blow frou
except when interrupted during the- winter for a short
and NW. winds. The former causes much sea in the h
side, and lessens or overpowers the land breeze, so tha
goes down and a steady land wind blows at night a f
departure had better be delayed.

Cnrrents. — After nortli or NW. winds have been bio
days the current sets strongly to the eastward along tl
coast.

Port Fran^aiB, 5 miles westward of Picolet Point, i
open to the northward ; there is, however, exceUent ancfai
prevailing winds, in the SE. part of the bay.

Port St. Honors, the eastern point of the bay, is sk
to the northward. To enter the bay, haul round this n
the starboard hand two other small reefs nearly awash,
which skirt Baro Point: then standing about ^ mile to t
anchor in from 8 to 10 fatlioms, with the fort bearmg S.
E. mag.).

The point on which the fort ia situated projects so a
bay into two smaller ones, of which the nortliern afford
cborage. In the mi<ld]e of tlie southern one there is a f
its shores also are foul.

From St. Houorfi Poiut the shore recedes to the souths
ward, fonnitig a deep bight, as far as Maiigot Point, 9 ni
The front is skirted by an inipaKsable mas» of reel's am
White tlronnd, which corauicnccs at the south end of '.
and takes a westerly direction for 5 miles to PhilipiM>t,
the cnys, when it becomes broken, and leaves small opi
into Acul Kay.

Acul Bay is a well sheltered inlet, 4 miles in length no
and abont i mile in breadth. It has sufficient depth for
largest draft, aud its shores are in some parts so bol
safe places for careening. The entrance channels, ho^
the reef are so narrow tliat they are not easily accessible i
vessels, aud if the islets and shoals are not clearly visib

ACUL BAY ^DIRECTIONS. 267

•

not be attempted. It is difficult to make out the entrance from the
offing, there being no buildings or conspicuous objects to mark it.

There are three channels by which a vessel can enter. The eastern,
between Arena Cay on the east, at the extremity of the reefs bordering
the coast trom Port Frangais, and Rat Islet on the west, is only 200
yards wide. The former cay, small, low, and sandy, lies about 1^ miles
to the NE. of the entrance of the bay, and the same distance to tiie
eastward of Philippot Cay. Bat Island is small, low, woo<led, and lies
ftbout a mile to tho WSW. of Arena Cay, and little more than J mile
from the SE. end of Philippot Cay.

Water is difficult to obtain in Acul Bay; the best place is at a small
stream SE. of Marias Point.

DirectionB. — Approaching the eastern channel, be careful to keep
an offing of at least 3 miles, until Rat Islet bears S. 18o W. (S. 17o W.
mag.), and at this distance Marias Point, the east side of the entrance,
will be easily recognized, and on nearing it a low point within on tlie
west side, in the interior of the bay, named Belie Point, on which there
is a remarkable clump of trees. These two points in one, with slight
deviation so as to preserve the depth of 9 or 10 fathoms, will lead nearly
in raid-channel; on either side there are white sand banks, with 4 fath-
cms on their edge. It is necessary that the leading marks should be
clearly made out when well outride. After passing Rat Islet the chan-
nel opens out, all the dangers are visible, and there is good temporary
anchorage in 13 to 16 fathoms water, outside the entrance to the harbor.
If Intending to enter the inlet, give Marias Point a .bertli of at least
flOO yards, to avoid a bank, on which there is very little water, and
having near its west end a small islet named Bayou. Thence shape the
course in mid-channel, taking care to avoid the patch with 2^ fathoms
water on it, S. lOQ E. (8. 11° E. mag.), i mile from Marias Point. Hav-
ing passed this, the vessel will be within the outer basin, and may
anchor under the eastern shore in 9 fathoms. To enter tlie inner basin^
she must haul up, and pass Moro Roxo (Rett Hill) Point at the distance
of 100 yards to clear a shoal which extends off from B^lie Point, and
having rounded that bluff, haul into the small cove called Tiombardo or
Car^nage, and anchor in 0^ fathoms water 2(X) yards from the shore.
The inner end of the inlet is so studded with shoals that it would not
be prudent to advance farther in without the assistance of a pilot.

Bffiddia ChanneL — To take this passage it is necessary that the wind
"hould be well to the northward, as the vessel will have to lie up SE.,
id there is no room to work. K<jep without the White Ground until
*t Islet bears S. 13^ E. (S. 14° E. mag.). Haul in on this course,
hich will lead to the eastward of the reef which runs off from Philip-
pot Oay, and about 200 yards to the SW. of some reefs easily seen, which
) about IJ miles to tlie northward of Rat Islet, then haul up to the
3. in order to weather the reef which extends off' to the eastward of
is islet, and having passed it shape the course for the outer anchor-

268 HAITI.

age or entrance to the harbor. The only advantage in this channel is
that all the reefs are seen, bnt be prepared to anchor m a moment should
the wind die away within the reefs. The ground is hard mud, good for
holding and sheltered from the sea breeze.

Limbtf or Western Channel takes its name fl[*om a small round islet
close to the east side of Limb6 Point, which forms the west side of the
entrance, the east side being bounded by Veille Cay. This is the largest
and best channel, as there is room to work in it. When approach-
ing this channel it is also necessary to keep well outside the bank until
Yeague Point bears S. 1^ W. (south mag.). This point is between that o f
Limbe and Gran Boucaud, which is the western side of the entrance.
That of Limb^ is the northern and western, and the islet is near it. Then
haul up S. 270 E. (S.280 E. mag.), or towards Yeague Point, which being
a steep, bold, rocky bluff, and the only elevated spot to the SE. of the
Mount Marigot, may be readily distinguished.

As Yeague Point is approached, the sea will be seen breaking on a
large reef to the eastward, on which is Veille Cay, with 4J fathoms
water near it. Then steer midway between it and the point in from 9
to 14 fathoms water, so as to pass 600 yards from Gran Boucaud Point,
and anchor westward of Marias Point. If necessary to work in, the
reefs on which the sea breaks may be approached to a prudent dis-
tance, and the coast to 400 yards. There are other reefs to the SW. of
Bat Islet having narrow channels between them.

Umb^ Islet. — The small islet of Limb^ lies eastward of the point of
the same name. To the southward of it there is anchorage sheltered
on the north by the islet and by the reef caDed the Peiia Pobre, which
extends eastward from Limb^ Point. But this anchorage in front of
the town of Limb6 is open to the eastward, and only fit for coasters
which moor between the coast reef and that surrounding the island in
about one fathom water.

Cantion. — As the various charts of this locality differ, these instruc-
tions must be used with caution.

The coast line to westward of Cape Haiti from Limb^ Point to Cape
Rouge appears to be from 2 J to 3 miles farther to the northward than
is indicated on the charts.

Marigot Point is next westward of Mount Marigot, and off it is a
small round islet which becomes a useful object in this neighborhood.

Chouchon Bay is about 3 miles westward of Marigot Point. In this
bay there is a good anchorage in 5^ or 6 J fathoms water. Entering the
bay, round the eastern point close- to, in 5 fathoms, and shoot the ve?
into a berth, for she will lose the wind within it even should it b
hard outside. A short distance westward, and separated from it
Baril du Boeuf Point, is the small bay of Salt River, in which ther
shelter for coasters.

Fond la Orange is the name of a bay, about ^ mile wide and the s~
deep, lying 4 miles westward of Chouchon. Palmiste, its western p<

n^l^

FOND LA GRANGE PORT PAIX. 269

is known by a chain of dangerous reefs which extend westward 1^ miles
firom the shore, ahnost as far as Gape Boage. Ther^is good anchorage
here, and shelter for vessels of the largest draft. The shore is steep,
and nearly 400 yards off it the depth is 5^ fathoms. The east point is
bold and steepto, and having rounded it, anchor as most convenient in
the middle of the bay in 6^ fathoms water, muddy sand.

Immediately westward of Fond la Grange is a bay and the mouth of
the Borgne, which affords anchorage for small vessels in 2 to 4^ fathoms
water under shelter of Palmiste Point, but open to the nof th.

The Coast from Ghouchou takes a N W. bv W. direction for about 18
miles, where it terminates at Garenero Point, the north extreme of this
part of the island, and the east point of Port Paix, and is very apt to
be taken for Gai)e Eouge which is 8 miles from it. From the small bay
of Borgne to Gape Bouge, about 3 miles westward, thd coast is formed
of cliffs, and bordered by reefs which are covered and extend off IJ
miles. Between is the little bay of Lavaud, fit for small vessels, and a
river runs into it.

Anchorage. — Between Grand Point and league Point are the follow-
ing anchorages, only fit for small coasters: The bay and river of Gape
Bouge, with 1 J to 2f fathoms of water, well sheltered by thia reefs ; the
bays of Great and Little Marigot, with 2 j^ to 3^ fathoms, and the bay
of Petit Bivi^re. These last anchorages are somewhat sheltered to the
northward by Tortuga Island, but hardly at all to the eastward.

From Gape Bouge to within J mile of league Point are a chain of
reefs, with a narrow channel between the reefs and the shore having a
depth of IJ to 2i fathoms of water. Through this reef are several cuts,
but there appears to be none between the eastern end of the reef and
Point league. league Bay and the Biver Bas de Saint Anne may be
reached through the first cut to the westward (of league Point), where
• there is anchorage for small vessels in 2^ fathoms of water; bottom,
sand and weeds.

Port Paix is merely a small bay, not more than ^ mile wide and
scarcely J mile deep; it affords, however, well sheltered anchorage, be-
ing protected on the north by Tortuga Island, and is only open from
NW. to west. The town stands on the eastern shore, and is commanded
by two small forts. The land behind is lofty, with a small, but remark-
able, sugar-loaf hummock, sloping to the westward. From P^rez Point,,
on which stands the battery to the north of the village, the shore is
skirted by a reef, said by French and Spanish authorities to the dis-

nce of 600 yards, with 12 fathoms on its edge. But this would nearly
ck the bay up ; by the plan it runs off only about 200 yards. Enter-

; Port Paix (which should be done under easy sail), bring the village
bear S. 44° E. (S. 45^ E. mag.), and keep in mid-channel between

> forts, anchoring directly the depth is less than 20 fathoms; this will

just within the line of the forts, at about 400 yards from the village.

e holding ground is excellent, and the vessel will shoot into about 12^

270 HAITI.

&thoms, mud and sand. Small vessels^ anchoring farther in, must be
careful to avoid a small rock which lies about 100 yards firom the shore,
in front of the town.

The German line of steamers call here, also the Diamond line froia
Boston.

The United States is represented by a consular agent.

Tortoga Island. — This island is 22 miles long and 6 miles broad;
the center is moderately elevated, but its extremes are low. The north
side is formed of perpendicular inaccessible cliffs, steep- to; the greater
part of the southern shore is skirted by shallow white grounds and
reefs, which within them in some places afford shelter to coasters.

Tierra B^a Road, the only good anchorage the island affords, is sit-
uated on the south coast, 4^ miles from Point Portugal, the SE. point
of the island. H is surrounded and sheltered by reefs stretching out
from the coast, and is only fit for vessels drawing 14 or 16 feet oi water,
as the bottom is irregular, and the soundings vary from 3 to 6 fathoms.

To enter the anchorage, the village should be brought to bear N. 38<^
W. (N. 390 W. mag.), and should be approached on this course, which
will lead between the reefs, which break and are easily distinguished
by the eye. A good berth will be found in 6 fathoms of water, with
sandy bottom, and with the village on the above bearing. At the en-
trance of this channel, called the eastern passage, there is a bank with
only 34 fathoms in mid-channel. The western passage has only 9 feet
of water. Large vessels may anchor outside of the reefs, on the white
ground, about one mile to leeward of the town.

Between Tierra Baja Anchorage and Portugal Point there are several
small coves, affording temporary anchorage to small coasters.

There is also said to be anchorage under the west end of the island.

The tide rises about 3 feet.

Tortnga Channel. — The channel between the island of Tortuga and
Haiti is 4 miles wide in its narrowest part, and, as there is an easterly
current generally setting through, it may be advantageously used by
vessels bound to the eastward. In the daytime it is perfectly safe to
beat through, as the reef can be seen, but it should not be attempted
at night.

CorrentB. — ^There is an easterly set through this channel dunng a
greater part of the year. On both sides of the channel however, a
contrary eddy may generally be found one mile off shore. They should
not, therefore, be approached within that distance. A westerly current
is only found here when southerly winds have been blowing for Si.
days, which is rarely the case. If, however, a westerly current is
perienced, vessels bound to the eastward should, instead of entei
the channel, stand 15 or 20 miles to the northward. Winds are ."*'
variable in the channel than outside.

Moustique Bay lies WSW. 10 miles froni Port Paix, and the l-
between is bold, scarped, and steepto. It is about 800 yards acrr>«*

PORT A l'eCU ST. NICOLAS MOLE. 271

its entrance, and about the same deep^ the bottom irregolar and rocky,
and between the points at the entrance there are 28 fathoms water.
On the west side of the bay there is a small islet, and about 150 yards
to the S£. of the islet there is a rock under water. The best anchor-
ite will be found nearly abreast this rock, in the middle of the bay, in
about 20 fathoms, but be certain of soundings before anchoring.

Port k VUcvl is 4^ miles westward of Moustique Bay, and tlie shore
between is lofty and very steep. This is abetter anchorage than Mous-
tique, but the entrance is much narrower ou account of a reef which
skirts the east side and extends 300 yards from the point, with 7 fath-
oms on its edge and 2 fathoms within. This port is sheltered from
north round by east to NW., and it is difficult to enter with the usual
winds unless they are well to the northward. Entering Port ^ I'Ecu,
it will be necessary to give the above point a wide berth and tlien haul
into the bay, and anchor with a remarkable house on the southern shore
bearing S. 24^ W. (8. 23^ W. mag.) in 7^ fathoms water, sandy bot-
tom. On the west side the bottom is mud, good holding- ground.

Tides. — It is high water, full and change, in Port ^I'Ecu at 6h. Om.;
springs rise 3 feet.

Joan Rabal Bay, about 8 miles westward of Port h I'Ecu, affords
anchorage, and is easy of access. Juan Babel Point is low and bushy
and stands prominently out to the northward; the shore in the neigh-
borhood is diversified by bold rocky cliffs and sandy beaches, and the
interior becomes mountainous, and broken into distinct ridges. A
remarkable peak, resembling the ruins of a castle, bears S. 52^ W. (8.
51^ W. mag.) from the bay, about 2 miles inland. About a mile south-
ward of Juan Babel Point there is. a small village, and near it a river;
and to the left of the village, a high white cliff and long sandy beach.
The east side is skirted by a reef, steep-to, and may l>e approached with-
out fear ; the depth is 8 fathoms close to the edge. Vessels of large draft
had better anchor NNW. of the village, distant i mile, and about 400
yards from the reef, in from 10 to 13 fathoms water. It will be better
not to shut in the two points on the east side, as within that line the
soundings decrease suddenly and the bottom becomes foul.

The Coast from Juan Babel Point trends to the WSW. for 12 miles
to (vape St. Nicholas Mole, and is (composed of low rocky cliffs, steep-to
It affords no shelter, and has received the name of the Iron Coast.

The Current in the othng, about 6 miles from the shore, at times takes
^ 'N'B. direction, but the set is in general westerly, and within that dis-

ncve it inclines toward the land, increasing in strength. In proportion
the channel between Cuba and Haiti is approached it also increases
strength, inclining to the SW.

dt. Nicolas Mole. — Its northern side is formed by a low, flat penin-

la, joined to the mainland by a narrow isthmus. From the flat surface
this peninsula the bay has received the name of St. Nicolas Mole,
the outer part of the bay the water is so deei> and the shore so bold

272 HAITI.

that there is no aafe anchorage. When seen from the ofl
tains back of the town of Le Mole present a burnt, brown:
A conspicuous church stands a little to the southwa
George.

' 'a close and confined, however, and in the raiu
I an unhealthy place,
lation is about 600.

is tolerably healthy and cool. There ia no i
fficer.

m be returned from Fort St. George,
no ptloto, and there is no necessity for takii
)rity to visit is the general in command,
ay be obtained at night from a brook U3e<l bj
Jme, and emptying into the bay ea.st of Fc
lence can be placed u|ion procuring fresh p
h. — There is a telegraph cable to Port a« Pri
i shoal witb 4 fathoms on the outer edge an(
:tends about 300 yards to the westward froi
George.

w. — A vessel will liave to work into St. Ni
le shores are steep-to, it will be advisable n
ide too closely, as the sea breeze genecallj
variable gusts, and she might miss stays,
borage will be found in from 7 to 10 lathoms '
om the northern shore with Fort St. George
,he town, bearing S. 21° B. (S. 22° E. mag.),
iTE. of the town S. 83° E. {S. 84^ E. mag.),
ly irregular and foul, and a vessel will '^ot 1
t. George bears S. 55° B. (S. 56° E. mag.);
ds a little southward of Fort St. George.
x> proceed farther in, do so without fear, bat

d, and a good berth will be found with P<
55° W. (S. 54° W. mag.), and a gnardhoui
the town S. 10» W. (S. 9° W. mag.). If inb

e, it will be better to wait until the sea br
rtow in; in the winter this will not takeplac
B land wind generally comes off from SB., a
I about 6 a. in., when there is a ealrn for al
rade wind sets in. If bound out to the north
1 be better to weigh with the last of the sea
a bears S. 4«<=' W. (S. 4o=> W. mag.) 4i miles
I near its extremity lies ii small rock resen
tance to the southward there is also a ren
the Upiter White Horses, Between Cape
atures of the shore are bold, i>erpendieular

rises abruptly into a ridge of mountains '.

PEARL POINT ANCHORAGE — ^PIERRE HEAB. 27S

only 3 miles &om the shore, under which vessels are frequently delayed
by calms. The current sets strong round the point to the northward,
but 6 miles in the oiAng it will generaUy be found running to the west
wd W8W.

Prom Pearl Point the shore sweeps round to the SB. for 10 miles,
and terminates at a remarkable white rocky bluff with a flat mound on
its summit, called the Platform; about 3 miles NW. of it there is another
similar cliff called the Lower White Horses.

Vessels finding the northerly winds too strong on opening Pearl
Point, should seek shelter under the Platform, either anchoring or
remaining under way.

Anchorage will be found in 8^ fathoms water close to the shore
westward of Pearl Point, in a sandy bay, where there is a small village,
with the entrance to a small rivulet bearing N. 24^ E. (N. 23^ E. mag.),
and^the southernmost point S. 78^ E. (S. 79^ E. mag.). The bank does
not extend more than 400 yards Arom the shore, and is so steep that the
first cast will be 10 fathoms ; but a vessel had better shoot into the
depth above, as the edge is foul. In the rainy season it is a good
watering place. To the westward of the Platform is the little bay and
village of the same name, where there is anchorage in 2^ to 3f fathoms
water; a rivulet runs into the middle of the bay.

Henne Bay. — From the Platform the shore takes an easterly direc-
tion for 7 miles to a remarkable white cliff at the base of the high land;
thence it trends NE. by E. for 2 miles to Henne Bay, on the west side
of which a lofty mountain rises from the shore to the height of 1,700
feet. It is not a good anchorage, but if obliged to anchor here, the best
place will be found on the eastern side of the bay where the sound-
. ings are least irregular, in about 15 fathoms of water.

From Henne Bay the coast runs SE. by E. nearly 2 miles, and then
B. i 8. for 3^ miles to Paradise Point, on the east of which there is a
small bay open to the SE.

Port Piment — ^The shore from Paradise Point takes a slight curve
inwards until near a remarkable mound on the low savanna land, at
the back of the small bay called Port Piment. There is also anchorage
here in a case of necessity, and the shore is bold and steep- to all the
way from the Platform.

Corridon Point — Prom Port Piment the shore trends SB. by B. for
7 miles, to a prominent bluff rocky point called Corridon, whence to
T>{Ai.^e Head its direction is SB. J E. and the distance 10 miles.

Achorage. — There is an extensive bank of soundings off the bend

Tihe coast between these two points, on which a vessel may anchor

17 fathoms water, clean ground, with Corridon Point bearing N.

^ W. (N. 420 W. mag.) and Pierre Head S. 88o B. (east mag.).

ierre Head is a lofty rocky headland, overlooked by a mountain of

same name. At J mile S. 33^ W. (S. 31^ W. mag.) of it, there is a

'k with a depth of 2 fathoms; and nearly a mile S. 10^ W. (S. 8° W.

18402 18

274 HAITI.

mag.) of the point tliere is another with 3J fathoms on it. They are of
small extent, aiid between them the soundings are 14 and 15 fathoms.
A grove of trees, (*alJed Ba\ ahondes, standing eastward of the town of
Gonaives, in (me witli Point Blanea de Gonaives, bearing S. SS^ E. (east
mag.) will lead between them; and when Pierre Head bears Is. 2^E,
(north mag.) steer S. G6^ E. (S. 68^ B. mag.) to round the reefs which
extend 301) yards from Point Verde de Gonaives, the north point of
the bay.

Winds. — On the west coast of Haiti the sea breeze, in settled weather,
generally sets in from the westward at about 11 a. m. and continues
until 7 p. m. The land wind comes oif from SE., and in the rainy sea-
son it frequently rushes down from the high lands with the violence of
a tornado, with little or no warning, and everything must be in read-
iness to shorten all sail in an instant. These gusts generally extend to
the distance of 6 or 9 miles from the shore; sometimes, however, in the
hurricane months they will reach the middle of the channel between
Haiti, Cuba, and Jamaica.

Gonaives Bay, although open to the westward, is a safe and good
anchorage, especially for vessels of light draft, which can proceed into
Hospital Bay, where they will lie landlocked in 3J fathoms water. The
entrance between Verreur Point on the south and the nearest part of
the northern shore is nearly a mile aeross, and the only danger of
importance is a shallow ledge, which extends northward about 400 yards
from Verreur Point, and which can be avoided by the eye in clear
weather.

Verreur Point is low and covered with bushes which extend to the
water's edge; it is the north end of a small low peninsula (or rather
island, for it is separated from the main by a channel for canoes at
high water) which forms the west side of the inner harbor. The
entrance is difficult to be made out from the o£9ng, especially at the
first time of approaching it. The bank w^hich lines the north and east
shores of the bay of Gonaives obstructs the entrance of Hospital Bay
with several coral heads nearly awash, narrowing it from an apparent
width of one mile to 700 yards.

Gonaives is near the shore on the east side of the bay. The laud-
ing is abreast the middle of the town and just north of a small battery.
South of the town are large salt-works, extending as far as Mangles
(Ligro) Point, bounding, to the eastward, Hospital Bay, the w^estem
limit of whi(^h is Verreur Point. Population, about 8,000.

The United States is represented by a consular agent.

Port Charges. — Pilotage, $5 in and out; health visit, |6; tc—
dues, $1 per ton for vessels whose nations have a reciprocity tre
interpreter's fees, $4.

Directions. — Entering Gonaives Bay with the sea breeze, a tv
may pass either to the northward or southward of the shoals off ^^
Head.

GONAiVES DIRECTIONS ARTIBONDE RIVER. 275

The soandings are very regular, decreasing gradually as the shore is
approached, and the anchorage may be chosen according to the vessel's
draft. The best berth for vessels of large draft will be found in 7
fathoms water, mud, sand, coral, and weeds, with Fort Castries bearing
K 2^ E. (north mag.) and the center of the town N. 80^ E. (N. 78^ E.
mag.). Small vessels may go so far in as to bring the fort N. 21^ W.
(K 230 W. mag.).

After passing Point Verde de (xonai ves, which is low and should not
be approached too close, as a shoal extends 300 yards oif it, Castries Fort
will be seen and the land begins to rise and form into cliffs with several
white marks, which will assist in knoyring Point Blanca.

A vessel working into Gouaives Bay sliould not stand farther to the
southward than to keep the rocky shoulder of Mount Bi^nac on with
the northern slope of Mount Chatenay N. 50^ E. (N. 48^ E. mag.). In
leaving the bay keep the above mark on until St. Mark Point opens out
2 or 3 degrees westward of Devil Point, in order to avoid the reef which
skirts the shore nearly as far as the latter point; Devil Table from this
position will appear as an island. The bay is generally entered with
the sea breeze, but in leaving it is better to wait for the land wind.

The sea breeze sets in from the NW. towards noon, and (X)ntinue8
until 10 p. m., when it is succeeded by the land wind, which blows off
about E. by S. until 6 a. m. At Artibonde the land wind lasts until 8
a. m.

Tide8.-^It is high water, full and change, in Gonaives Bay at 8h. Om.,
and the rise is about a foot.

The Coast from Yerreur Point takes a southerly difectiou, and con-
tinues very low to within a mile of Devil Point, when it becomes a little
elevated and forms a flat wooded table-land called the Devil Table.
The extremity is a steep rocky cliff, about 50 feet high. The sand bank
with from j^ to 2 fathoms water on it, which i)rojects 400 yards north-
ward from Verreur Point, skirts the western shore of the peninsula or
island, at the distance of J mile, and thence southward as far as Halle
Point, the south extreme of Tortue Bay, where it extends off more than
a mile.

At 1 J miles N. lOo W. (N. 12^ W. mag.) of Halle Point there are two
or three dangerous heads of coral, with If to 23 fathoms water on them ;
these heads are off Tortue Bay on the edge of the bank, and near them
are 10 and 12 fathoms water 5 we^st of the point also shoal water extends
for 1^ miles; the shore therefore as far south as Devil Point sliould be
)roached with caution. In case of necessity, temporary anchorage

1 be had in 3 or 3f fathoms water, near the shore in Grand Pierre

Vrtibonde River. — At the bottom of the little bav north of the cliff

)evil Point is the River Artibonde, the entrance to which is nearly

^ at low water ; at high tide boats may proceed 5 or 6 miles up and

ain a good supply of water, but there is no wood at hand. Off Devil

276 HAITI.

Point, the water is discolored for a distance of about 2 miles seaward of
the entrance to Artiboude River. During the rainy season a small
steamer, draw^ing 4 feet water, plies on Artibonde River for logwood.

Anchorage. — To anchor off Artibonde River bring Devil Point to
bear S. 2° W. (south mag.), distant about 3 miles, when a few houses will
be seen close to the shore. These houses should be brought to bear S.
66^ E. (S. 68^ E.mag.) and should be approiu».hed on that bearing within
2 miles, when a detached bank will be struck, with a depth of water
jfrom 6 to 20 fathoms. The lead must be kept carefully going, as within
the bank there is no bottom till within ^ mile of the shore, when sud-
denly a depth of 5 fathoms will be found. A vessel anchoiing here must
be ready to come to at a moment's notice.

Mark. — On the south side of the entrance to the river there is a
remarkable small cavern.

St. BAark Bay.— From Devil Point the shore t^ikes a SE. direction
for about 7 miles, and then turns somewhat suddenly to the S W. for the
same distance to St. Mark Point, forming the bay of that name, at the
head of which is the town (containing 5,000 inhabitants) and anchorage.
St. Mark Point is a broad round headland, about 3 miles wide; a shoal
extends about 200 yards from it. At 4 miles to the XW. of the town
there is a remarkable chalky cliff. The south shore is generally steep-to,
with a depth of 13 to 19 fathoms J mile off, but in pla '.es is foul; the
north shore is, however, skirted by a reef at nearly that distance from
Devil Point, as far as the River Guespes. From the shore the land
rises to a considerable elevation, and the locality of the bay is pointed
out from the of&ng by the remarkable mountain called Mount Diable,
which, about 25 miles eastward of the town, rises to the height of 5,100
feet. Temporary anchorage will be found off either the north or south
end of the town, in about 18 fathoms water, at about 400 yards from the
shore.

Mome i, Vigie, situated eastward of the town, is a conspicuous flat-
topped hiU, when bearing east (N. 88^ E. mag.) leads to the anchorage.

Anchorage. — The usual anchorage is in 15 fathoms, 300 or 400 yards
from the shore and north of the cemetery, which is whitewashed. Ves-
sels loading logwood and coffee moor with hawsers secured to anchors
buried on the beach and remain in security at this anchorage at all
seasons. An old fort stands on the Morue des Guesi)es, a hill on the
north side of the bay.

This port is considered one of the healthiest on the island. Tliere is
generally a land breeze from 9 p. m. to 10 a. m., when the sea brc
sets in.

The same steamers call here as at Port au Prince.

The United States is represented by a commercial agent and \
commercial agent.

Port Charges. — Pilotage, $15; bill of health, 82.50; landing balh
$1 x>er ton; tonnage dues, $1.4<> per ton, with rectiprocity treaty;
out treaty, $1.50 per ton; clearance, $2.

%«•!

THE ARCADIN8 GONAVE BANK. 277

Coast — From St. Mark Point, the low and bashy coast, forming a
carve about a mile deep, trends in a SE. direction 8 miles to Montrou
Point; thence for 18 miles farther to the village of Arcahais. It is
6teep-to as far as the bank NE. of the Arcadins, and there is deep
water 200 yards from the beach. The land at the back is mountainous
and luxuriant with vegetation.

The Arcadins are three small bushy islets about 30 feet high,
extending over the spac^e of about a mile, the nearest and smallest being
about 3^ miles from the shore. On the east they are bold and steep-to,
but the soundings are variable; near them the bottom is hard, but as
the shore is approached it becomes soft and muddy. A coral bank
extends NN W. about 200 j^ards from the smallest islet, and a shoal of
3 fathoms lies 1,200 yards N. 66^ W. (N. (>8o W. mag.) from the south-
em one. At the distance of 2 J miles S. HS'^ E. (east mag.) of the southern
ialet, and about 2 miles from the coast, there is a shallow bank of 1^
fathoms, with shoal water extending 2 miles southeastward of it.

The best anchorage will l)e found in 11 or 12 fathoms wat^r, with the
smallest islet bearing about 8. 47^ W. (S. 45^ W. mag.) distant about a
mile. Vessels bound to Port an Prince would find this a good pla<;e to
anchor for the night, if near it at sunset, with a land wind. Coasters
And shelter in 5 fathoms of water from north and northwesterly winds.

Ziight. — On the NW. extreme of the center Arcadins is a circular
white lighthouse, from which, at an elevation of 30 feet above the sea,
a fixed white light is exhibited, visible 9 miles, obscured by trees between
north (N. 2^ W. mag.) and N. 11^ E. (N. 9^ E. mag.).

Arcahais. — Off the village there is anchorage in 1«5 fathoms at ^ mile
from shore, with the village bearing N. 54^ W. (N. 50^ W. mag.). At
5 miles to the SE. of Arcahais is the village of Bouoassin ; south of it,
at i mile from the beach, there are 8 fathoms water. There is a small
islet called Carnero or Sheep Cay, l}ang ESE. of Boucassin, but so close
to the shore as not to be easily recognized ; it is bold and wooded, but
there is no passage between it and the land^

Foso Road. — Four miles southward of Carnero Islet is the road of
Foso, in which there is good anchorage near the shore, in 18 to 0^ fath-
oms water, mud. From the shore commem^es an extensive low plain,
inclosed by lofty mountains called the Cul de Sac, which extends from
the Grande Riveras far to the southward as the city of Port an Prince.

GhonaTa Island lies immediately abreast of the deep bight called the
^ alf of Port an Prince, and forms two channels leiuiing toward the

ty of that name. At a distance, from a N W, direction, two round hills

e seen. The highest, (tailed Tlie Table, is in the SB. part of the island.

The west coast is low and steep to, there being 15 to 18 fathoms of

ater 200 yards offshore.

Oonave Bank. — (xcmave is nearly connected to Haiti by a bank of

regular soundings, varying from 2 to 10 fathoms, coral, sand, and

id. This bank is steep-to on its western and southern sides, and it

tends about 5 miles to the NE. of Little Gonave Island, deepening

278 HAITI.

quickly to the northward of the line of soandings joining it to the
Arcadins. The northern side of the island forms with the opposite
shore the channel of St. Mark, which, at its narrowest part, between
Galet and Montrou Points, is 8 miles Avide; and it is about the same
distance across to the Arcadins.

North and NE. Coasts. — The north coast of Gonave, from Mangles
Point, the iiortli extreme of the island, to Gros Islet| is foul to the dis-
tance of 200 yards, where the depth is from 3 to o fathoms; from the
latter to Mare Islet, the reef extends out from ^ to f mile, leaving
between it and the shore an anchorage for droghers. From Mare Islet
to Galet Point, the NB. extreme of the island, the shore is clear; bat
from this point, which is low, to witldn 2 miles of Bluff Point, it is
skirted to the distance of more than a mile by a broken reef.

Anchorage. — Within the reef there is a depth of 4 and 5 fathoms^
white sandy bottom, and several openings fit for vessels of 9 or 10 f«et
drafb. The best of these openings will be found in front of the fisher-
men's huts, and the best anchorages off the bays Galet, Trou (or Gove)^
Constantin, and Piron, just within the edge of the reef, and about 80
fathoms from the shore.

SE. Coast — At the east end of Gonave Island, Grand Bay is between
Bluff and Pantasque points ; the latter, which is the SE. extreme of
Gonave, is a very conspicuous white bluff cliff, and the land forms a
small peninsula 2 miles in extent north and south and about one mile
east and west.

About a mile to the eastward of the bluff is Little Gonave, which is
foul on its north side to the distance of J mile. To the eastward of the
islet there are several large rocky patches, extending about 2 miles,
with from one to 3 fg^thoms water on them; on the southwestern shoal
are two small cays, called Sable and Frigate le Croissant. There is a
channel carrying about 3 fathoms water between the cays and Little
Gonave, and also between the latter and Fantasque Point; but the
current is so strong and variable that it would be dangerous to attempt
either without a leading wind.

Anchorage. — Small vessels will find an anchorage under the west
end of Little Gonave, and it had better be entered from the southward.
The only spot where vessels of large draft can anchor safely is in I*ark
Bay, westward of Fantasque Point; its entrance, however, is so l)6set
with dangerous rocky slioals, not easily seen, that it requires the
assistJince of a pilot.

SW. Coast. — Frcmi Park Bay to the westward the coast is gene^..
skirted by detached reefs and is dangerous. Small vessels, howe'
with the hell) of the pilot, will find their way through to anchorage
the bay of Mahotiere or that of Baleines. Here there are from 15 t-
fathoms on the eilge of the reets, which extend from f to If miles 1
the shore. A remarkable white 8iK)t may be ob8erve<l at ab""*^
miles from the west end of the island.

PORT AU PRINCE. 279

Water. — Good water mav be obtiiined at about 5 miles eastward of
the NW. point of the island.

Port au Prince, situated at the heatl of the bay of the same name,
is the capital of Haiti. It lies on the northern slope of a spur of the
great mountiiin chain that runs through tlie island from east to west.
It8 population is about 35,000 and it is a place of considerable com-
mercial importance. It is regularly laid out, but most of the houses
are of wood and the streets are unpaved. The town is nearly surrounded
by marshes and is very unclean and unhealthy, especially during the
summer months. Behind the city is Fort Alexander, on elevated
ground ; 2 miles to the westward is Fort Bizothon, a low square build-
ing close to the shoi^e. In the northern part of the harbor there is a
small but well-sheltered basin, called the inner harbor, large enough to
hold a few vessels moored head and stern and having a depth of 4
fathoms. On the northern side of this basin is a small cay called Fort
Islet, on which is a water battery.

There are other fortifications along shore, all more or less in ruins.

The market is fair, fresh provisions being moderate in quality and
price. Ship's stores are scarce and high-priced.

Yellow fever generally be(*.omes epidemic during the summer months
from April to August. There is a medical jury or board of health.

There is no regular quarantine regulations, though the doctor of the
port exercises a general supervision over vessels arriving at the port*
The thermometer ranges from 75^ to 9ic>. There are two French charity
hospitals, which are conducted by the Sisters of Mercy.

The customs duties are very high.

Police duty is performed by the soldiers of the army.

Fort St. Blair is used as a saluting battery.

The authorities to visit are the President of the Kepublic and the
United States minister resident, who is also consul-general.

Water. — Supply is abundant, being carried to the town by pipes
from springs in the mountains. Ships can send boats to the wharf at
the customhouse.

Coal. — A supply of about 2,400 tons of coal is kept in store. Vessels
are coaled by jneans of lighters, containing 15 tons each, at the rate of
about 100 tons per day; the prie^ is about $1.5 per ton. The lighters
are only filled to order, on account of the oc(tasionally rough seas.

Steamers. — Marquis de Campo line, Royal Mail line. Atlas line,
"^'•ench line, and Imperial German Mail line. There are four wharves

re where vessels drawing 12 to 15 feet can load and discharge. No

oys can be relied upon.

Mail. — In the time of i>eace there are regular mails to the principal

aces on the island.

Pilots can be had, but there is no necessity for them. There are no

v^ernment regulations for them.

280 HAITI.

Port Charges. — Pilotage dues, 6 cents per ton; anchorage dues, 6
cents per ton; stage hire, $2 per day; wharf dues, $1 per ton; inter-
preter's fees, $4; water, $1 per cask; tonnage dues, vessels belonging
to a nation having no treaty, $1.50 per ton.

Ii^;hts. — A. skeleton white lighthouse is erected between Tor Point
and Point Lemantin^ but nearer the latter; from which, at an elevation
of 95 feet above the sea, is exhibited a revolving red light every J
minute; it should be seen 15 miles in clear weather.

On Fort Islet, from an iron tower 46 feet high, a fixed green light is
shown, visible 11 miles.

Mooring Buoys. — Two large red mooring buoys which can be seen
a long distance have been moored, respectively, J and | mile westward
of Fort Islet light and close to the range line indicated on the chart.

Vessels are not allowed to enter Port au Prince or any other port of
the Republic between the hours of 0 p. m. and 6 a. m.

Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at Port au Prince at aboat
8h., and the rise is a little more than one foot, but after fresh easterly
winds it is about half a foot less.

Pelican Cays and Reefe. — The bay of Port au Prince is almost
blocked up to the northward by numerous shoals and small islets which
protect the anchorage. The outermost are the Pelican Gays, which lie
K. 430 W. (N. 450 W. mag.), distance 5 miles from Fort Alexander, and 2
miles from the nearest part of the eastern shore; they consist of five
small low sandy and mangrove cays occupying a space of about f mile
and on their north side may be approached to ^ mile. Beefs extend 8. 66^
E. (S. 680 E. mag.) from the cays for IJ miles, or to within J mile of the
eastern shore, and to the S W. to within 2^ miles of Lamentin Point. At
about 14 miles to the southward of the cays there is a detached roeky
shoal, i mile in length, named Sand Gay Shoal; it lies 3f miles from
Fort Alexander, and on a clear day both it and the Inginac Shoals can
be easily seen.

The Inginac Shoals, about a mile to the SE. of Sand Gay Shoal|
are two rocky banks nearly dry, f mile in extent and nearly oonnected
to the low cays on the north side of the harbor.

Directions. — The channel for large vessels to the roads and harbor
of Port au Prince lies between the S W. end of the shoals just described
and the main, and in the narrowest part, between Sand Gay Shoal and
Tor Point, it is IJ miles wide. The soundings throughout are very
irregular, varying from 4 to 20 fathoms, the ground in many parts foul,
and the southern shore is skirted by a rocky ledge to the dietanci^ '•^
nearly 400 yards.

Vessels approaching by St. Mark Channel, and being abreast Mou«
Point, may choose either the inside or outside channel of the Aread
The former leads farther to wiodward, with the land wind, ani'
Arcadins should be passed at the distance of about a mile auu
cdurse continued until southward of the 1^ fathoms shoal lying 2 ir'

PORT AU PRINCE ANCHORAGE — ROCHELOIS BANK. 281

from the maiDy bat it will be pradeut at night for strangers to take the
outside cl^annel or that between the Areadins and Gonave Island.

In passing to the westward of the Areadins, Princes Peak, to the
south ward of the city, is a good mark; kept on a S. 49^^ E. (S. 51^ E.
mag.) bearing it will lead clear of them and up to Lamentin I^oint.

When Fort Alexander opens to*the southward of Fort Islet S. 72° E.
(S. 740 B. mag.}, a vessel will be to the southward of the Pelican Keefs,
and may then haul to the eastward for the roads.

Anchorage. — Good anchorage in the roads will be found with Fort
Alexander S. 82^ E. (S. 84^ K. mag.) and Fort Bizothon S. a'3^ W. (6. 31o W.
mag.) in 12 fathoms water, mud and sand. A more convenient berth for
watering would be with Fort Alexander N. SQ'^ E. (N. 84^ E. mag.)
and Fort Bizothon S. 13^ W. (8. 11'^ VV. mag.), in about 13 fathoms,
clear ground; but be careful not to anchor on rocky bottom. In the
center of the roads there is a small coral patch with 4 fathoms water
on it, lying with Fort Bizothon S. 19^ W. (S. 17o \V. mag.) and Fort
Islet about N. 78^ E. (N. 7<P E. mag.). There are other shallow patches,
but they may be seen in clear weather.

Leaving this anchorage, if l)Ound to tlie northward, it will be better
to weigh about midnight with the land wind, which will most probably
take a vessel to the Areadins by daylight and through St. Mark Channel
before the sea breeze sets in.

l^inds. — The sea breeze in the outside channel generally blows from
WNW., commencing in settled weather about 11 a. m. and continuing
till 7 p. m. The land wind frequently comes olf with a furious squall.
These gusts come down off the high land with great violence, and in
hurricane months reach half way across the channel between Haiti,
Cuba, and Jamaica. They frequently give but little warning, and the
navigator should therefore be constantly on his guard.

In the harbor of Port au Prince the easterly breeze generally com-
mences at daybreak and after 12 o'clock changes to the westward.
This change takes place at 1 or 2 p. m. and is frequently accompanied
by a heavy squall. In the spring and summer months it generally
rains between 6 and 9 o'clock p. m. The direction of the land wind
rari%s with the trend of the coast.

Roehelois Bank. — If bound to the westward from Port au Prince
or in beating up from that quarter through the Gonave Channel, great
caution is required in approaching a rocky bank named the Bochelois,
'"^hich is about 5 miles in length east and west and 3 miles in breadth.

ear the center of the bank are three or four small, low rocks, 3 feet
bove water, called the Pirogues, whilst others barely unoov^er at low

ie, and when seen from a distance of 3 miles to the northward appear
^ some fifteen or twenty small rocky pinnacles. A few mangrove
mshes grow on them. At i mile N. 21^ W. (N. 23^ W. mag.) of the

rmer there is a patch with about 2 fathoms water on it. The sound-

282 HAITI.

ings on other parts of the bank are very irregalar, varying from 4 to
10 fatlioins, with sand between the rocky heivds, and the bank is steep-to.

Vandalia Bank, a shoal with 0 feet least water over it, lies 2 miles
south of the Pirogues. The bank is steep-to and the soundings on it
are irregular, varying from 4 to 7 fathoms. To avoid this dangerous
bank in the night, vessels should k&ip the shore on either side close
aboard, observing that the coast of Gonave Island must not be ap-
proached nearer than one luile, while the coast of Haiti is perfectly
clear and steep-to.

L6ogane. — From Lamentin Point the ex)a8t takes a westerly direc-
tion for 8J miles, when it bends round to the SW. for 5 miles to the
port and river of L^ogane. The first part of the coast has a depth of
10 fathoms about ^ mile off shore, and off the latter part it is foul for
about the same distance. Off the entrance to this river there is au-
chorage in from 9 to 10 fathoms, taking care to avoid a patch of 1^
fathoms about ^ mile from the shore; here the edg^ of the bank is
about a mile to the westward. From L^ogane the coast trends to tho
SSW. for 6 miles and then resumes a westerly direction.

Orand Ghoave Bay. — Between L^ogane Point and Grand Goave
Bay the coast is low and wooded, and off it there is anchorage in 7 or 8
fathoms water. Grand Goave Bay is -about 8J miles from L^ogane
Point, but it affords no good shelter. A short distance eastward of it
there is a little wooded islet, and the town will be seen on the left bank
of a small river.

Petit Ghoave Bay is separated from the above by a large bluff
headland, 1,500 feet high. It is formed between Rocky Point on the
east and that of Antonio on the west. On the west side of the bay is
the Car^nage, a small well-sheltered and safe inlet with 3 to 7 &thoms
water, with 3 small islets at its entrance. The town is on the eastern
side of the bay, and just abreast of it there is a small sandy islet, 300
yards off shore, called Anglais, or Poules. Half a mile N. 68^ W.
(N. 70° W. mag.) of it is arocky bank with 2 fathoms of water on it. The
passage between the islet and eastern shore carries from 3 to 13 fath-
oms irregular soundings. Between the Anglais Islet and Gar^nage
Point the entrance of the bay is about one mile wide. It is sheltered
from all but northerly winds; these are seldom strong, and Gtonave
Island partially shelters the bay in this direction. Three small rivers
empty into the bay, from any of which good water may be obtained.

The Atlas line of steamers call here twice a month.

The United States is represented by a consular agent.

Miragoane Bay lies about 12 miles westward of Petit Goave, i
nearly midway between there is a remarkably clear spot on the side
a mountain presenting the appearance of a narrow scorched grass fie
the mountain rises from the shore to about 1,000 feet high, and at
base are some conspicuous white cliffs. The apjiarent width of the
trance is diminished by a reef which runs directly across from th<" ^

ROCHELOIS ^Ar BAS VILLAGE. 283

em side, leaving a deep channel one mile wide between its end and the
eastern point. The reef is dry in places, and on its western extremity
is Black Cay. The anchorage is in 10 to 12 fathoms, with the fort bear-
ingabont S.32oE. (8.;U^E.mag.). Thereisalsoasnu^berthinthe SW.
part of the bay between two islets and the mainland, bnt it is very
narrow. A spring of g<x)d w^er will be found in a cove 1 J miles east-
ward of Miragoane. In the cove there are 3J and 4 J fathoms of water^
but a bar of 12 feet runs across its entrance.

The United States is represented by a consular agent.

Rochelois. — The village of Roclielois stands inland, near the base
of the peak of Miragoane; the point of the same name is about 3 miles
westward of Black Cay with the river about 2 miles further on.

The Coast. — Five miles westward of Rochelois Point is the fort
and town of Petit Riviere; 2| miles beyond this is a remarkable sandy
cliff; then follows the Petit Riviere, and 3^ miles westward of the sandy
cliff is the village of Anse il Veau. Thence the shore is composed of
black perpendicular cliffs, about 20 feet high, for 0^ miles farther west-
ward to another village called Petit Trou, which is about 3i miles east-
ward of the entrance to Baradaires Bay. All this part of the shore is
bold and steep-to, and affords no shelter. But there is anchorage for
small vessels off the village in 2J ftithoms water.

Baradairaa Bay, which is sheltered on its northern sideby the penin-
sula of Bee k Marsoiu, appears wide, but is obstructed by a reef ex-
tending from the southern shore. This reef extends from some small
cays near Picolet Point, in a northwesterly direction to within ^ mile
of Bee k Marsoin. It is steep to and (;lear, with a channel for ships of
the largest draft between it and the reef. A pilot is reriuired, as the
anchorage has many shoals.

Bee A Marsoin Peninsula will be readily recognized by the deep
bay back of it. From its eastern point the coast consists of perpendicu-
lar rocky cliffs, about 20 feet high, much worn and fissured by the action
of the sea. A low table-land covered with dense foliage rises from the
rocky cliffs, decreasing in height toward Fantasque Point. Back from
the coast the mainland is mountainous.

Three miles and a half to the westward of Bee k Marsoin Point there
is a shallow bay, at the bottom of whicli is a short sand beach, the only
landing place to the eastward of Fantasque Point. It affords no pro-
tection to vessels. There is a small fishing village near this saud beach.

From this bay the coast is rocky, with ow^asional sand patches until

MUf Fantasque Point.

Cayemites Bay. — The entrance to this extensive basin is about a

ile in breadth, and lies between Fantasque Point and the Great Caye-

lites Island. The channel close under the island is deep and about a
aile in width.

An Bas Village. — ^The village of Au Bas is ^ mile to the westward
Fantasque Point.

284 HAITI.

Rde£ — From the shore of the village of Au Bais a reef extends to the
west and WNW., a distance of 3J miles, narrowing the channel between
the reef and Great Oayemites Island to f mile. The eastern part of the
reef dries at low tide and shows only a few black heads at high water,
the western part of the reef has several heads with only 2 fathoms water,
bnt there are places which may be crossed in 3 fathoms.

A quarter of a mile to the 9outh westward of Au Bas is the first of a
<^hain of small islands, covered with low mangrove bushes, and extend-
ing along the shore to the S W. for a mile. Between the islands and the
main there is a boat passage.

Pestel. — Nearly 6 miles WS W. of Au Bas is Pestel, a town of some
importance situated in a small inlet between the high hills. Very little
of the town is visible from the sea, only two or three houses on the beach
and a few more on the top of the hill.

G-reat Cayemites Island is 5 mUes long, 2^ miles broad, 500 feet
high, and thickly wooded; about ^ mile to the westward of it is Little
Oayemites, a small i^let 1^ miles long and $ mile broad, with a channel
of 2 fathoms water between. From the latter islet Grand Beef sweeps
outwards to the WS W., and^connects itself to the shore about 15 miles
to the westward of Fantasque Point, completely sheltering the bay
from the northward.

There is also a passage, with 1^ to 2 fathoms water, running north
and south, for small vessels, westward of the Little Oayemites, over the
white sand bank between it and Grand Beef. The latter is covered
with about a foot of water, and on it are several rocks or small cays
To the south westward of Grand Reef there are two groups of cays cov-
ered with trees, which shelter the bay on the west. iNear the coast there
are various other cays and reefs. *^

Anchorage. — The first sec^ure anchorage westward of Bee & Marsoin
Point is in 7 fathoms, with Fantasque Point bearing N. 81o B. (N. 79^
E. mag.), and the western end of the chain of islands extending frooi
Au Bas, bearing S. 9^ £. (S. lio E. mag.). In this berth the reef, with
only 2 or 3 fathoms water, is about 200 yards distant. Do not shoal less
thai) 5 fathoms, as the soundings are irregular.

Large vessels may anchor in the bay close under the 8W, side of
Great Oayemites, or on the eastern side in Flamencos Bay, off a sandy
shore and in any convenient depth. Small vessels may anchor close in
shore.

Directions. — In entering Oayemites Bay from the eastward, keep
about «500 yards distant from the shore of the peninsula. No bottor
20 fathoms will be found at that distance. As already mentioned,
chattnel between Great Oayemites and the reef extending off Au B-*
f mile wide, and has from 3 to 5 fathoms. There is deep water wi.
600 yards of Fantasque Point, and 10 fathoms at a mile west of it,
not haul in round the banks to the westward of Fantasque Point bel
the west end of Great Oayemites bears N. 2^ E. (north mag.^ **"

'5'«

PATTE LARGE BAY ^J^BEMIE. 285

okaanel irestward of it is well open. There is a patch with a depth
of 3 fathoms southward of Jiittle Cayemites.

Patto ZiargeBajT. — ^Between Cayemites Bay and the village of rl^r^mie
the coast is clear of danger. In general it is rather low and covered
with trees. Between them are some remarkable white cliffs extending-
aboat 4 miles east and west. To the eastward of the cliffs is Patte
Large Bay, open to the north. Its month is 1,400 yards wide and ob-
stracted by reefs, which small vessels only can cross, when they gain
shelter under cover of the reefs. Patte Large, the western point, is
font, and here the cliffs above mentioned commence. Temporary
anchorage may be had in 3 fathoms water, north of Patte Large, at 60<>
yards firom the reefs whi(*h shelter it.

Four miles westward of Patte Large Point is the River Roseaux, at
the eastern part of Grand Ause; this bay terminates westward in
J^r^mie Point, which is narrow, extends eastward about ^ mile, and
shelters on the north the anchorage of the same name.

J6t6mie Bay is a small open semicircular bay, and known by the
village of the same name. The edge of ^ sotindings lies about f mile
from the shore, and on the bank before the town the depth is from 3 to*
6 fhthoms; but being exposed to the full force of the NE. winds, in
strong breezes the sea breaks, and the anchorage consequently is not
safe. The village is protec;ted by a fort on the north point of the bay^
and a small river empties itself into the sea at ^ mile to the SE. of the
village.

The point is surrounded by reefs, which extends 400 yards eastward..
To the south of the point and near the reef which borders it is another
small reef, named Mouton, south of which is the anchorage, fit for
small coasting vessels only, in 3 or 4 fathoms water.

The town contains about 6,000 inhabitants. Trade is carried on by
four regular lines of steamers, principally by the Atlas line from New
York.

The United States is represented by a consular agent.

TrovL k Cochon. — The coast westward of J^r^roie Point to Trou da
Cochon, a distance of 1^ miles, is clear of danger and formed of st/cep
cliffs. Trou ^ Cochon is a small bay, and a reef extends a short dis-
tance from its eastern point; it is somewhat sheltered from the north
and has about 1^ fathoms water. At | mile outside it there are 3 and
4 fathoms.

ft*d Point is about 4 miles westward of Trou A Cochon, the coast ])e-
ucn being formed of steep cliffs; 3 miles farther on is the small bay
Clerc, open to the north, but in case of necessity can be used by
all vessels; a rivulet empties itself into the bay. About 2 miles
stward of Clerc Bay is that of Bon, fit for coasting vessels, separated
m it by a large round promontory; a rivulet runs into it. Then fol-
^8 another small bay and village, and 2^ miles beyond the latter is
aloupe Bay, fit also for small vessels, and 4 miles farther on is Ser-
ae Point.

286 HAITI.

Ssringue Point and Bank of Sonadings. — Si

bold i)roiiiiueut headland, and eastward of it. is a li
be used by small vessels. Fn>iii this point coiumf
saud bank with irregular soundings, which sweeps c
for 8 or 10 miles, and borders the coast southwa
Tiburon ; the eilfre is abrupt, and the depth generallj
decreasing to the coast; the water is so clear thai
may be easily seen.

The bay betwe.'u Syringue Point ;ind Cape Dam
anchorage, as the coast as far as the caiie is skirted
teud oft' about ^ mile. The bays between Capes
Tiburon are exposed to westerly winda, and afford u
tember to March, when NW. wiuils prevail, during
are seldom visited.

Caps Dame Marie, the 'SW. extreme of the lonj
or ueek of hind forming the west end of Haiti, is ral
extremity there is a small hill. At IJ miles westwai
are from 14 to 17 fathoms, and 7 to 8 fathoms within

False Cape, a short distance south of Cape Dai
times mistaken for it. A rock with 14 feet over it
as lying 800 yards S. 20"^ E. (9. 220 E. mag.) of FaU

Dame Marie Bay is between this point and Foil
entirely open t« the westward. The bay is clear, am
ouly danger to be avoided is the reef which skirts
Cape Dame Maiie and False Cape, at a distance of ',
above repoited rock.

Fetdts Riviere Tillage is on the NP]. shore of tl
lage of Dame Marie on the SE. shore. Halfway
white bluft' called the Twelve Ai>o8tle8. A conven
this bluft' bearing S. Ofio E. (S. GH'^ E. mag.), in froi
mUe to one mile off shore. The prevailing wind and
erally ESE. to SE.

The Coast from Cape Dame Marie runs about 8.
to Iroia Point, with several small bays between, K-
south extreme of Dame Marie Bay, is formed of cliB
round hill ou it. Between t^is i)oiut and that of B
are the three bays of Bayardellea, the two southern
rate<l by a bluff point, also with a small round hill on
Head. In Bayardelles Bays there aie no dangers, a
one there is anchorage in ti to 8 fathoms water, sai
along this ])art of the coast, a vessel will lind anchi
neither slioats or any hidden danger, the water sba
is approached, and the lead is a sufficient guide.

The Whale Rocks form a small rocky cluster ris
surface, from a white bank of 4 fathoms, about 200
they bear S. 10= W, (S. 17^ W. mag.), 7i miles from

NAULT BAYS ESPAGNOL BAY. ' 287

and lie ^ mile from the shore, with a clear a^-fathoms channel between;
about 200 yards outside them the souudings are 11, 10, and 7 fathoms,
hard bottom, probably coral. The sea always breaks on them.

Boury Point is a remarkable bluft' browu dift) with a small rock
awash, about 400 yards off. The bay of the same name is formed
between it and Baleine I*oint north of it, where there is anchorage in
6 or 7 fathoms water at J mile southward of the Whale Rocks.

Nanlt Bays are formed between Houry Point on the north and
Hospital Point at 2 miles south of it ; the northernmost and largest of
these bays affords very good anchorage. At a short distance within
Boury Point is the town, overlooked by lofty mountains, one of which
terminates in a remarkable ])eak. Not far from the south end of the
town may be seen a little rounded height rising abruptly from u cliff
on the shore and crowned by a fort. The shore is quite clear, the
soundings regular, and the most convenient anchorage for vessels of
light draft is in about 5 fathoms, with the peak in line with the tower
of the village church, bearing about X. 75^ B. (N. 73=^ E. mag.). Water
may be obtained from a river which empties « itself into the northern
bay south of the village. Hospital Bay lies between the point of the
same name on the north and that of Laborie on the south.' It is dear
of danger, and in its middle there are 4 and 5 fathoms water.

Pierre Joseph Point. — The Bay of Laborie, southward of the
former, terminates on the s<mth in Pierre Joseph Point. At J mile from
the point is an islet on the extremity of a reef, which is connected to it,
and skirts all the southern part of Laborie Bay. Coasting vessels only
can anchor in this bay in 2 or 3 fathoms water, south of Laborie Point,
where it is clear of danger. There is anchorage in 8 or 9 fathoms water
1 J miles from the shore.

Pierre Joseph Bay is to the northward of Ibard Point. It is shel-
tered to the northward by the point and island oT the same name. The
point is low and sharp, and the islet is connected with a reef which
skirts the entire shore of the bay as far as Ibard Point. The reef is
Bteep-to. In the northern part of the bay there are several hidden
dangers. The bay is surrounded by high land. At the foot of these
hills and along the shore, where there is a sandy beach, are the scat-
tered houses of the village of Pierre Joseph. To the southward of* the
village a river affording good water empties into the bay.

A small vessel anchoring in Pierre Joseph Hay should bring the
«'^".thern houses in the village to bear S. 88*^ E. (east mag.) to avoid

e above mentioned dangers and anchor in 18 feet of water, with the

let bearing ]^. lOo E. (N. 8^ E. mag.).

Large vessels should anchor in 7 fatlioms, with the islet bearing N.

' E. (N. 50^ E. mag.). When the sky is clear the bottom can be dis-

.ctly seen and the dangers avoided.

Bspagnol Bay. — Its northern limit is Ibard Point. Its shore is
'dered by a white sand bank or reef extending 200 yards oft' shore.

288 ' HAITI.

This bay is quite small and does not afford a desirable anchorage*
Large vessels may anchor abreast it in 6 or 7 fathoms.

Bigie and la Croiz Bays. — Between Fanchon and Irois Points are
the two bays of Bigie and la Croix, separated by a remarkable bold
conical point which nnes abruptly f i om the sea. The shore of Bigie
Bay is of sand, and a house stands in the middle of the bay on one of
the projections or spurs of the high land of the point. The shore of la
Oroix Bay is also of sand, and a rivulet runs through it; to the N£. of
its mouth a house stands on a hill. These two bays afford no shelter
whatever with westerly winds, but anchorage will be found in 7 or 8
fathoms water, at f mile from the shore, or farther out in 10 or 12 £akth-
oms, sandy bottom, at 1^ miles off.

Irois Point is the western extreme of Haiti, and, although not high^
may be distinguished by a small hill on its extremity, which from a
distance has the appearance of an island. The point is steepto, and
both it and the bay are clear of danger.

Irois Bay, about 2 mileR in breadth and i mile deep, is formed
between the point of the same name on the north and Gape 4 Foux on
the soutK In the NB. part of the bay is the village of Irois, standing*
above a small plain, irrigated by a river of good water. A little south-
ward of the mouth of this river is a small group of black rocks detached
from the shore, and off a white sand bank. At i mile southward of
the rocks is another rivulet. The bay is clear of danger, and in the
southern part of it there are from 5 to 8^ fathoms water. On the line
of the two entrance points there are 8| to 10 fathoms, sandy bottonii
and the depth gradually diminishes to the shore. Several small black
rocks are visible near the shore in the southern part of the bay. A
vessel may round Irois Point at a short distance, and anchor in 7 or 8
fathoms water, sand and shells, with the largest black rock bearing-
about S. 710 E. (S. 73^ E. mag.), distant 800 yards; or in 5J or 6J
fathoms, sand and mud, with the large black rock S. 7^ W, (S. 6° W,
mag.), distant i mile. Although the bay has good anchorage, NW.
and SE. winds cause a heavy swell to roll ip, which renders it uneasy,
and landing often difficult.

Carcasses Bay, between Gape h Foux on the north and Oarcasses
Point on the south, about f mile apart, has 6 and 7 fathoms water at
its entrance, which diminishes as the shore is approached. At the
head of the bay three rivulets empty themselves, and to the north is a
house on a hill. The land which encircles this bay is very high, as at
all the others of this part of the coast of Haiti. Small vessels anc"
in the middle of the bay in 5 or 5i fiithoms water, sand and mud. Lak
vessels may anchor at IJ miles from the ]>oints of entrance in 11 oi
fathoms.

Cape Tiboron. — Carcasses Point, and that of Locx)s, a little so
of it, appear at a distance to be one large bold point which termin
in Cape Tiburon. These three when seen at a distance appear as c

-"^t

LOCOS POINT — ^MILIEU BAY. 289

and are known under the general name of Gape Tibnron. The real Cape
Tibdron is easily known by its appearance, as it forms a massive, lofty
promontory, rising abruptly from the shore to the height of about 700
feet, and then gradually ascending to the rounded summit of a mountain
2,850 feet high, about a mile from the coast. This mountain, called
Tibnron, is at the extremity of the great range of la Hotte, which
extends from west to east far into the interior, increasing rapidly in
height, a lofty peak about 8 miles eastward being 4,178 feet above
the sea.

Locos Point is skirted by a reef at the distance of 200 yards, and
several heads of rocks are uncovered. The reef continues along the
coast as far as the entrance to Tiburon Bay, and is steep- to; southward
of Cape Tibnron foul ground extends for nearly } mile. Near it there
are 11 and 12 fathoms.

Tibnron Bay. — From Cape Tiburon the shore takes an ESS. direc-
tion for 1^ miles to a blu£f rocky point, when it trends E. ^ S. 3 miles,
then turning sharply to the SSW. for f mile to Burgos Point, and
forming the bay of Tiburon. The latter x>oint is of moderate elevation,
and skirted by a reef at the distance of 200 yards, which continues
along the coast eastward for a mile.

The north shore is bold, backed by high hills; at the head of the bay
there is a small, three cornered plain, with high land on two sides.
The village of Tiburon is in the SE. angle of the bay, protected by a
small battery, and the river of the same name empties into the sea
north of the village. The anchorage is not sheltered toward the west
or south. Small vessels can find shelter only from southerly winds
north of Burgos Point and abreast of the village.

No difficulties present themselves in entering this bay, except those
occasioned by the flaws and heavy squalls which come down off the
high land. There is no danger to be avoided but the reef along the
shore near Cape Tiburon and that off Point Burgos.
• Supplies. — ^Water is easily obtained from the river, the mouth of
which is marked by the five gun battery which defends the shore.
Wood and fresh provisions can also be procured.

Milieu Bay, sheltered from NW. round north to SE., is formed be-
tween Burgos and Aigrettes Points, and midway there is a remarkable
white cliffy point called Tapion. Aigrettes Point, with a small round
hill on it, is composed of white cliffs of moderate height; there are some
houses on the hill, and at a distance it appears as an island. Six miles
eastward of Point Aigrettes is that of Grande; the coast between is low
and here and there formed of a dark shingle beach. The land at the
back rises rapidly and leaves between it and the sea a narrow strip of
land generally intersected with lakes. The shore all along is skirted
by a reef, a portion of which is uncovered. A white sand bank also
borders the shore at a distance of from i to ^ mile.

At 1^ miles eastward of Aigrettes Point is Bucan Yiejo, an opening
18402 19

5^1

■ ti

290 HAITI.

in tlie reef of about ^ mile in breadth, leading into aD anch
about i mile in extent, where amall coasters find shelter from
vailing wiadB. At the entrance there are 3^ to 4 j fathoms watt
diminishes inwards to '2^ and 1^ fathoms. In the middle of th
' there is a small sunken rock. It is easy to distinguish the
white sand bank on this part of the oxKtst, bat it should no
proaehed unless compelled to do so.

The bank of soundings extends 2 miles off with (i^ to 11 fathoi
on it, and in case of necessity anchorage may lie had off Mil
and also off the coast as far as Grande Point, in ti, 7, or 8 fatb
there is no shelter and generally a heavy sea.

Ang'^*'* Bay is unsheltered and inconvenient. Temporary
age may be had in C or 7 fothonis of water 8E, of some housei
shore. Half a mile from these houses the Biver Anglais emi
the sea, but the surf is too heavy to obtain fresh water.

Aenl eI Jean is a small bay. At the head of it, surrounded
land, is a village. Like all these anchorages it is entir'ely opi
southwaid, but vessels may anchor one mile off shore in 7 or 8
of water.

Salie Bay is immediately to the westward of the Three Biv
It is quite small, surrounded by high land, and remarkable
white bluffs, which form the points of entrance. A river of
name empties into the bay, and on the shore is a small village

The Bay of Thraa Rivera, so called from the three small
which empty into it, is 2 mUes in a northeasterly direction b
Piment. It is eutu>ely open to the southward, but with winds
north or east it affords temporary anchorage. There are iio
in it. At the head of the bay and back of the beach there is
oii a remarkable hill 150 feet high, the base of which is formi
bluffs.

Point Piment, sheltered from NW. round by north to SE,, i
SE, of the bay of Three Bivers. IntheSE part of the bay a sn
nins into the sea, and a village stands on a prominent point w
minates in the south extreme of the port. At a mile from
there are 7 fathoms water, which diminishes gradually to 1^ fa
400 yards from the shore. A vessel may anchor in 6 or 7 fathc
the village bearing about 3. 00° E. {8. iW E. mag.) one mile
shore.

Coteaox Bay, — One mile SE. of Port Piment is the sma
Bamiiasin, which terminates to the south in Cot*faux Point. A su
runs into the NE. part of it. One and a half miles tarther on is t
Goteaus, formed between the point of the same name on the m
that of Roches on the south. Reefs extend 300 yards from the*
and also from a third point in the bay, south of the village. Th
of Coteaux stands partly ou the shore and partly on the hills at 1
A. rivulet empties itself north of the village. The anchorage

JUIF BAY SAMANI BAY. 291

north part of the bay in 5 or 5J fathoms water, westward of that peact of
the village standing on the shore. One hundred yards from the shore
there are 1^ fathoms water. Small vessels entering should avoid the
reefs extending from the points.

jQif Bay. — ^The bay of Boche k Bateau follows that of Coteaux, and
affords similar anchorage. Here are a few houses, and in the KE. part
a river runs into the sea. The bay of Juif, 1 J miles SE. of the former,
is If miles wide at the entrance, and the point of the same name on the
north is formed of steep cliffs. At the head of the bay a village stands
on a bold, round, prominent point, and to the north of it a river empties
itself after dividing into two arms just before entering the sea. The
land which surrounds the bay is very high and forms two ravines, which
extend into the interior. A vessel may anchor in the middle of the bay
with the village bearing about east, in 5 or 5^ fathoms water.

Port Saint. — ^The bay of Drick is separated from the preceding by
a large broad point composed of high cliffs, is similar to that of Juif,
and a rivulet runs into it. The anchorage is in the middle of the bay in
4 or 4^ fathoms water. Port Saint is formed between a low point on
the north and a bluff one with a small emineace along its eastern side
on the south. Here is a village, and three rivers ran into the sea, one
on the north, another at the head, and one in the south part of the bay*
To the N W. of the villd»ge is a remarkable white cliff, and off it anchor-
age for small vessels. Two miles NW* of the white cliff there is a
dry sand bank at i mile from the shore; and a coral bank with 2§
£athoms water on it lies in front of the village at nearly one mile from
the shore.

Ghravois Point. — From Port Salut the shore trends southward to
Oravois Point, which is thickly wooded and about 60 feet above the sea.
It is steep to, having a depth of 48 fathoms at the distance of j^ mile.
From Burgos to this point the direct line is about SE. by E. i E.,
and the distance 33 miles ; the coast between forms a bight, and although
possessing considerable features, is imperfectly known. It is much ex-
posed to southerly winds, which almost always send in a heavy sea.

East Coast.— Cape 8aman6. — See page 253.

Samanii Bay has been thoroughly surveyed. Navigators, by con-
sulting the chart and keeping a good lookout from aloft for the coral
heads, will have no difficulty in entering it. The best entrance is along
the northern coast where the least depth is 5 fathoms, except on Jean
Bart Beef with 3| fathoms and a rocky patch to the southward of Care-
nerb Gay with 4^ fathoms, but these places can easily be avoided and a
depth of 6 fathoms carried to the head of the bay.

Coast. — About 2 miles southward of Gape Saman^, the bold rocky
shore takes a S W. direction for 6^ miles to Balandra Head. The latter
is a remarkable red cliff lying at the foot of Mount Diablo, which rises
bo a peak 1,300 feet high, 1^ miles inshore.

Nearly one mile to the NB. of the head, at thpi south end of a small

f -1

■ i

**4

292 SANTO DOMINGO.

sandy bay, there is a remarkable cliff, with 3 large Sse
tween it and the head, close to the shore, lies a small rocb
Piedra Qrapin. A nmall reef breaks at a short disti
SamanA, but the shore ju»t described is clear and 8t«ep-to
of Balandra Head, ofi* vhich there are two small cays. 1
decreases saddeoly to 6^ fathoms a mile off, on the Oanai
which extends from Balandra Point 5^ miles to the SE.
narrow, with 5^ fathoms least water over it.

To the southward of Oanandaigua Bank a shoal with
it has been discovered; its extent has not been ascerCaiiK
posed to conaect with the bank extending &om the e
Saman^ Bay.

From Balandra Head the coast turns sharply to the ^
at l^V miles beyond it is Oacao Point, a low bluff; fou! gi
abont 200 yards from the point. At IJ miles farther westw
Point, on which there are some huts, and a little east^
small cays, the larger of which is called by the same nam

XievantadoB Cays. — ^K'early a mile from the south she
Peninsula, and about 2^ miles westward of Balandra Hot
vantodos days. The largest (Levantado) is nearly ^ mile
west, 108 feet high, and thickly wooded. About 100 yan
it is ChiDchiliDe, a small low cay; and at alK>ut200 yards
it Pascual, a small round islet, steep-to on its north side.
is 3W. of the others. These cays are joined by a reef, o
are from 3 to 7 feet of water. ' The best anchorage is ea
AbODt ^ mile to the KW. of the latter is Jean Bart Reef, 0
are 3^ fathoms water; between it and the north shore
about i mile wide, with irregular soundings, varying am
to 12 fathoms.

From Flechas Point the shore trends to the NW. for a
Ghlco Bay; in its center is Chico Shoal, which extends
mile from the shore, is ateep-to, and easily seen. There
under Flechas Point between it and the reef, and also in
of the bay, which is protected by the reef. The channel i
lies to leeward of the reef, between it and a ledge which
Ohico Cay, but it is so narrow that large vessels must tc

Clara Bay is clear, and affords good auehorage. The
wide between Lirio and Gorda Points, both of which may 1
within 200 yards. A good berth will be fonnd, with abo
of water in the middle of the bay and just within a line d
the two points.

Port Santa Barbara may be dest^^ribed as an inlet m:
mile east and west, and ^ mile in breadth. The north sh<
ia formed of irregular hills, which rise a short distance tn
siderable elevation. The head of the bay is low and swu

fcrJ

PALOMA CAY CASTILLO POINT. 293

aoatb side ia sheltered by a reef, several cays, and dry rocks, which ex-
tend a little more than a mile to the eastward from Escondido Point.

The entrance to the harbor lies between Gorda Point and Paloma
Oay. A village of the same name stands at the head of the bay, aft the
base and on the sidesof some small hills, which are almost hidden from
the eastward by a headland.

Paloma Cay is the most easterly of the chain extending from Point
Escondido, and is 43 feet high, with steep sides, the summit being cov-
ered with bushes. From the east end a shallow ledge mns off \ mile
in a sontheasterly direction. Its extreme end, with a depth of 25 feet,
lies S. 340 W. (S. 340 W. mag.), i mile from Gorda Point, leaving the
entrance to the channel between it and the point less than ^ mile wide»

North of the western extremity of Paloma Oay and nearly in mid-
ohannel there is a bank with 4 fathoms of water on it, with a narrow
channel on either side.

Carenero C^y, well wooded, has a hill at each end, the eastern being
126 feet high. A wooden pier about 40 feet long, with a depth of 18
feet at low water at the extremity, extends from the north side of the
eastern part of this cay. The American mail packets use it as a coaling
pier. Between this cay and Tamiso Gay the ground is foul, with only
a boat passage.

From the north side of Carenero Cay a reef extends nearly 300 yards
and is steep-to. To the northward and in mid-channel are two patches
having only 3 fathoms on them.

Aguada Bay is a small cove in which anchorage may be found for
small vessels.

Oomdre Bank. — The western limit of Aguada Bay is called Punta
de la Cruz. Immediately south of it, at about 150 yards distance, is a
rocky Hhoal, nearly awiish, called the Gom^re Bank, witli deep water On
either side, and between it and the head of the bay is the inner anchor-
age, sheltered from all winds and having a depth of from 3J to 5 fath-
oms.

Castillo Point, on which Fort Barbara stood, is a steep bare cliff of
reddish color, about 40 feet hi^h, with an old wooden house on the
summit.

Directions. — Being at a distance of 3 or 4 miles eastward of Balandra
Head, there will be no difficulty in recognizing it by its red color and
the detached rock lying at its liase. This headland should be rounded
at a distance of from i to J mile, and a course steered alongshore to the
westward, taking care not to shut Balandra Head in with Cacoa Point
until past the Chico Shoals. As soon as the Chico Cay bears N. 33<^
E. (N. 330 ¥j, mag.) the reef of that name will have been passed when?
if bound to Santa Barbara, the vessel may be hauled up toward Gorda
Point, taking care in passing to the westward of it to keep the eastern
hill of Carenero Cay open to the northward of Paloma Cay, in order to
avoid the ledge to the eastward of the latter.

'*»

■T,

■|:

294 SANTO DOMINGO.

Having passed Gorda Poiot, the deepeat water will be foi
soath side of the chaniiel, along by the edge of the reef antil
the west end of Paloma, when haot toward Agaada Bay to
shoal off Oarenero Cay. When the weet end of that cay be
W. (9. 53° W. mag.} bear away to the westward for the intt
age. Keep the southern side again aboard to clear the Gom
A)athward of the west point of Agnada Bay, and anchor in
water, maddy bottom, with Castillo Point bearing N. 30° E.
mag.), end of Great Oarenero Cay 8. 42° B. (9. 42o E. mag.),
edd of Tamlso Gay 9. 31° W. (9. 31° W. mag.). In the abi
pilot the eye mnst be the guide, and if the son is high am
the vessel, the shoals may be seen from aloft.

Caution. — As the land and sea breezes are qaite regular £<
for short periods iu the winter when strong NE. trades prei
ing vessel shonld only attempt to leave Port Santa Barbar
land wind.

Should the sea breeze spring up before the vessel reaches
Head, great care must be taken, if to the eastward af the L
Cays, not to bring them to the northward of -west (west n
abreast of Balandra Head, in order to avoid the reeft which
the 3E. across the month of the G-alf of 9aman&, and on w1
vessels have been wrecked.

Tldoa at Santa Barbara de Samanfi frequehtly run at the
miles an honr, and during the rainy season a velocity of
sometimes attained. In leaving the harbor with a sailing ve
tion must therefore be paid to the time of the tide.

The Town of Santa Barbara contains about 1,000 Inhal

The United States is represented by a commercial, agent
consular agent.

Supplies. — Fresh meat, vegetables, fruit, and bread can
procured at moderate prices. Water can be obtained at A]
and is said to be wholesome. There is a small quantity of cc
hand for the use of the Clyde steamers. Coaling is rapid, I
with no interruption on account of the weather.

Steamers. — An English steamer connecting with the I
steamers at St. Thomas «'-all8 twice a month ; an American sti
a mouth.

Port Charges for ports in Samau4 Bay :

Vessels whicli do not receive or discharge cargo are not r
pay ship's dues, but pay harbor master's fees at the rate of ;
ton. Regular steamers pay ship's dues only at the rate of *
ton on cargo delivered and received.

Vessels bringing <roal only and leaviTig iu ballast are onl
to pay half these dues.

samanX bay— charges.

295

Ywaels of more than 100 Ajnerican tons, other than regalar steamerB, are re-
quired to pay on their entire burden, if diacharging or receiving :

One-halT or more of their burden

One-quarter uid up to 'half

Leas than a quarter

Less than one ton

YeaseUi of only 100 tons, whiah reoelve or discharge one ton or more of cargo,
without regard to amount of cargo, are required to pay their entire burden :

Abore 75 and up to 100 toiu

Above 80 and up to 75 tons

Above 45 and up to 00 tons
Above 30 and up to 45 tons
Above 15 and up to 30 tons
Above 15 tons or less

Per American ton.

Ship's
dues.

Harbor

master*!

dues.

f0.30

10.05

.20

.04

.10

.08

.23

.05

.20

.05

.16

.06

.13

.06

.10

.05

.06

.05

Fees of health officer and fort fees.

•

Fort

$2.50

1.25

.00

.30

.12

Health
officer.

$5.00

5.00

8.00

3.00

■ ' ' ' »

A ship

A brig

A top-sail schooner

Any other sohooner

A boat

Pilotage. — When a pilot is used the charges are $1.25 per foot in-
ward and 75 cents per foot outward.

Sanohes (Las Canitas) is situated in the bight at the NW. corner of
Saman& Bay. The village may be recognized by the houses and rail-
way company's buildings, from a distance of 10 miles.

In 1888 the railway was complete to La Yega de Conception, about
62 miles inland, and is in progress of construction to Santiago, 25 miles
further.

There is a mooring buoy in the roads, but it lies close west of a 10-
foot patch, situated 1,200 yards 8. 25° B. (S. 25^ E.mag.) of Hernandez
Point, and must not be used as moorings.

Good anchorage with excellent holding ground will be found with
Oorda Point bearing N. 80^ B. (N. 80^ B. mag.) and the railway depot
N, 28 W. (N. 28^ W. mag.), in 7^ fathoms; vessels of lighter draft may
be anchored further in and westward of the buoy.

Landing is difficult at low water, especially with large ship's boats.

Supplies. — Fresh beef, vegetables, and fruits can be obtained at
moderate prices ; abundance of fish may be caught; good water may
be had from the numerous rivulets, but it is difficult to ship in large
quantities.

The current money is Mexican dollars.

The Climate is damp but not unhealthy; fevers occur but are not of
a dangerous nature.

Between 6 and 7 a. ni. a liglit westerly breeze arises and lasts until
about 8 a. m., when it dies away. The sea breeze sets in from SB. to

296 SANTO DOMINGO.

east about 10 a. m. and lasts nntil 4 p. m., bringing a swell with it;
followed by a calm until 5 to 6 p. m., when a light 'KE, to east wind
continues during the night.

Directioiis. — Follow the directions given for Port Santa Barbara
until past Ghico Shoals; thence continue the course S. 87^ W. (S. 87<^
W. mag.), keeping Balandra Point open of Cacao Point on the opposite
bearing. This will lead between the shoals southward of Great Oare-
neroGay; from which steer S. 73° W. (S. 73^ W. mag.), keeping a good
lookout for the uneven ground southward of Corozos Gay. After pass-
ing these a course may be shaped to pass one mile south of Gorda
Point.

The Ynna RiTer, which empties into the western part of Saman&
Gulf, is obstructed at its mouth by a sand bar, with only 2 feet of water
on it. Boats may ascend it to within a few miles of Gotoy, 40 miles in
the interior.

Barracota River empties into the southwestern part of the bay.
The mouth is obstructed by a bar with from 2 to $ feet on it. This
river is navigable for boats 5 or 6 miles from its mouth.

The Bay of San Lorenzo is well sheltered and sometimes visited
by coasters.

Bavana-la-Mar, on the south side of the gulf, is a scanty collection
of huts. Landing, even from a small boat, is difficult on account of the
mud flats which reach off from the shore.

Port Colorado. — ^No directions can be 'given for this port. The
Eiver Gapitan empties into it and the coast between it and Port Jicaco
is obstructed everywhere with reefs on which are several cays and
islets. Two rivers, called the Ciilebras and the Magna, empty into the
gulf between Jicaco and Colorado.

Fort Jicaco, or English Port, lies on the south shore 11 miles west
of Cape Rafael.

The harbor lies between Jicaco Point on the east and Manati Point
on the west. The Itivers Yeguada, Guanabo, Eeal, and Jayan empty
into the harbor, which is principally resorted to by coasters to load
logwood and mahogany.

There is a small rocky islet, called Jicaco, near the entrance, for
which it is an excellent landmark, as well as for the leeward and wind-
ward channels into the j>otL To enter the harbor bring this islet
between the peaks of a high mountain inland, and steer in on this bear-
ing S. 11° W. (S, 110 W. maf»:.). Good anchorage will be found in 5i
or 6 fathoms of water inside the reef, about J mile from shore.

Caution. — A stranger should not attempt to enter Port Jicaco wit
out a pilot, nor, indeed, should he run inshore to leeward of Gape Bafa
without one.

Medina Luna, Bardo Ferdido, and other shoals, bar the entram
to Saman^i Bay between Cape Rafael and the LevantiidosCays; there a
several deep-water tortuous passages througii tliese reefs, but a glan

I-

CAPE RAFAEL CABEZ DE TORO. 297

at the chart will deter any attempt at using any one of them; the only
safe coarse is to the northward of the Levantados Gays.

Cape Rafael, the southern poiut of the great gulf of Samani, is quite
low; but 2 miles inland firom it there is a remarkable conical hill, called
Mount Bedondo, which at a distance from KW. and SE. has the appear-
ance of an island. The coast in the vicinity of Gape Rafael is low and
foul, and should not be approached nearer than 3 miles.

Coast. — From Cape Bafael to Gape EngaHo the coast runs in nearly
a straight line SE. This part of the island abounds in mahogany and
logwood, and there are several small ports and bays where, small ves-
sels load with these woods, but as the shore is skirted by a broken reef
and exposed to the wind and sea, these small anchorages are not only
difficult to approach, but are dangerous even in the fine season.

There are several small cuts in the reef through which vessels of 6
feet draft may pass, but larger vessels must lie one mile or more off-
shore.

Frequent accidents occur, and communication with the shore is some-
times int^rupted for weeks at a tiui^.

There is no safe anchorage between Gape Eafael and Port Macao.

Port Macao.— To the northward it is protected by a reef which joins
two remarkable rocky islets. The eastern or windward one, called
Gabe^^te Barlovento, lies close off' Macao Point, with a boat channel
between them ; the other, Cabezote Sotavento, or el Infiernito, lies about
i mUe from the shore and to the eastward of the entrance of the River
Anamuyti, where there is said to be an excellent oyster bed. The
anchorage for coasters is about i mile to the northward of the reef, and
their cargoes are brought off* by boats from the Anamuya River.

Mahogany and logwood are also loaded here from the Rivers Majinon
and Msibou, the first 5 miles and the second 14 miles NW. of Port
Macao.

Arena Oorda, — This anchorage is the first one to the SE. of Port
Macao. There are three small cuts in tlie reef here through which a
small vessel not drawing more than 5 feet may pass to the inner anchor-
age. Larger vessels lie from one to 1 J miles off*shore in 10 to 12 fathoms
of water.

Ranchitos Bay, 2 miles SE. of Afeua Gorda, has two small cuts in
the reef, with 4 or 5 feet of water in them. The anchorage is 2 miles
off shore in a depth of from 11 to 12 fathoms.

Babaro, SE. of Los Ranchitos, is one of the best of these anchor-
ages, as the reef lies near the sliore and the sea is smoother. The
anchorage for large vessels is 1^ miles offsliore in 10 or 12 fathoms of
water.

Cabeza de Toro is the first anchorage to the westward of Gape En-
gano.

Through the reef in front of this port there are two passages, and in
the lee one, called la Nayba, a depth of 10 or 12 feet may be carried.

298 SANTO DOMINOO.

Large vessels anchor in 10 or 12 fathoms of water, oatstde, irith a bo1
torn of saQd and rock. This place is mnch fireqaented by wood drogtaen
and large qaantities of tnahogaoy are Rhipped.

Cape Ec^afio, the eastern extreme of the island of Haiti, is a lonf
low point from which a ridge of rocka nms 3 miles in a northeaster!
direction.

A eihort distance inland there are two small hills which, seen from
S. 790 w. (S. 790 W. mag.) direction, at a distance of 17 or 18 mUei
present the shape of a wedge.

Between Gape Engano and Point Espada the coast is low, and eaam
]Dge extend some distance off shore, with a whit« sandy hottom.

There are several small cnts throngh the reef which skirts this pai
of the shore and some small sandy bays, where mahogany is shippe<
but, like similar places between Capes Rafael and Engaiio, large vease
are obliged to anchor 2 miles offehore, exposed to wind and sea.

Pnnta Cana is the first anchorage soath of Cape Eogaiio. The shoi
is inclosed by a reef, which obliges vesaels to anchor, according to thej
draft, from a mile to 1^ miles from the shore. There are two opei
ings in the reef, throngh which the boats pass to carry cargo to tb
Aandy beach. These openings have 6 feet of water in them, are nw
row and obstmcted by coral rocks, requiring great care in navigatin
them. The surf is heavy on this coast, and with a northwina pn
vents commnnication with the shore.

CaatloiL — Breakers are shown on H. O. charts with a qnery, aboi
4 miles off Punta Cana.

Pantanaland Giiayacaneg are ports similar to Punta Cana. Upo
the shore of these ports are some houses ; they are inhabited by labo:
era employed in cutting mahogany from the adjacent forests. Pant
nal is 3 miles south of Punta Cana.

Point Espada, the SE. extreme of the island, is a remarkably bol
cliff of moderate height. Its extreme point is low and prolonged by
bank or reef which gives the water a whitish color. Banks of th
nature are frequently met with in different places off the coast of Hai
and are called Pla<-«res Blancos, or wliite grounds. They are very ofte
strewn with sharp-pointed rocks.

Tides. — At the anchorages outside of the reefs on the southeaster
■coast of Haiti the flood tides generally run to the SSW. for nine hour
with a strength of 3^ miles au hour, and the ebb tide for 2J or 3 houi
runs NK. byX. The tides in this vicinityare,however, very variable!
their strength, duration, and direction; sometimes ebb and flood t~~
last six hours. Sometimes again the ebb lasts longer than the fl'
and in this case the NE. current is stronger than that muiiing t
SE. •

Ttuua Bay Anchorage is good, but of limited extent, exposed to
SE. winds, and is in iVont of a little sandy beach called "Playeta,"!
the windward point of the mouth of tlie river, in 12 fathoms of "™

FALSE CAPE ALERT BANK.

299

•

The mouth of the river is obstructed by a bar with 8 or 9 feet of water
on it, but inside there is a depth of 12 feet.

Fresh 177ater is obtained by ascending the river as far as Dermm-
badero, but this can only be done in small boats.

Anchorages. — Vessels will find good anchorages between Port Yuma
and False Gape in 9 to 12 fathoms of water, but they will be exposed
to NE. winds.

The Tide runs with great velocity, especially about Point Cuevita,
where it has a velocity of 4 or 5 miles.

False Cape. — ^The land about this cai>e is formed by precipices of
coral rocks, in the form of wallH with a height of 160 to 200 feet. False
Gape is the southern point of this high land, and seen from the north-
ward presents the profile of a grotesque figure.

Oarrent. — Off this Coast a strong westerly set is often experienced.

Oranehora Anchorage. — ^Vessels are compelled to anchor several
miles off, either to the leeward of Gatalinita or to the leeward of the reef
which extends from Granchora to that island. The surf is generally
so great on the beach at this place that weeks may elapse before cargo
can be taken on board.

BCartel is a port similar to Granchora.

Vessels about to visit any of the numerous small plac^es on the east
coast or between Point Espada and the city of Santo Domingo gener-
ally take a pilot at the latter place, which is the port of entry for all
these places.

Saona IsUmd may be justly said to form the southeastern extreme
of the island of Haiti, for the space between them is so filled with reefs
and shoals as to leave only a boat passage. It is covered with trees.
Its N£. point is formed of steep bluffs; its SE. point is quite low, and
a dangerous ledge extends a distance of 3 miles in the same direction.
The sea breaks on this ledge 1«^ miles off shore; farther out the depths
are 4 and 6 fathoms.

At a distance of 5 miles off the southern shore of Saona there are
from 7 to 10 fathoms of water, and a ship should keep at least this dis*
tance when to the southward and eastward of the island.

Cabello Bay, three miles to the westward of the SE. point of
Saona, is a good anchorage off a sandy beach.

Supplies. — Wood and water can be obtained here.

Alert Bank. — In approaching this anchorage great care must be
taken to avoid a dangerous rocky head called the Alert Bank. This
rock has only 4 feet of water on it, and the sea breaks in heavy weather.
N. 4:5^ W. (N. 450 W. mag.) of Alert Rock there is another rocky head,
with from 9 to 18 feet of water on it, with a deep chaunel between the
two dangers.

The western coast of Saona Island is lined with reefs and dangers,
especially toward the noitliwosteru point and near Palmilla Point on
he mainland.

300 SANTO DOMINGO.

Catoano J*as8. — There ia only 7 feet of water in its shoaleat pari
is narrowed by a bank of mud and coral rocks.

Catalinita Island — Between this Island and Saona a dangeroof
extends, called the Horseshoe. Near Saona there is a cat in this
throu^ which a depth of 6 fothoms may be carried into a shell
anchorage with muddy bottom, haviog Oatalinita Island bearing N
E. (N. 11° E. mag.)

CaDtion. — The north shore of Saona is steep-to till this reef if
proached, but the sea is so heavy and the currents ao strong and i
nlar that this part of the island had better be avoided; indeed, S
Island should not be approached from any direction nearer than 6 a
except in cases of necessity.

Korea Reef is from 1,000 to 2,000 yards long, 200 yuds wide,
nearly awash at low water. This may be a continuation of the ^
Book mentioned above. Until more accurately defined, navigi
should give the island a good berth.

Bank. — The captain of the Spanish brig Arina, whose draft w
feet, reports having struck several times when 9 or 10 miles sonUk
of Saona Island.

Currents. — Iti the Caribbean Sea the currents are, as a rule, gr
influenced by the direction and strength of the trade winds. The
vailing set is between NW. and west, but at the full and change o
moon, and about the autumnal equinos,an easterly {weather) curr«
occasionally found on the south coast of Ouba, north and south c
of Jamaica, south coasts of Haiti and Puerto Bico, and on the i
shore of South America as far east as Trinidad.

Q-naragnao is an anchonige S miles to the southeastward o
Quiabon River, and is seldom visited.

Bayahiba is a few mile^s to the nortiiwestward of Falmilla F
A ven.sel can anchor iu 6 or 7 fathoms of water about one ml
shore, well sheltered from the SE. by Saona Island and Pal
Point.

Qniabon River is obstructed by a bar, sometimes dry and r
having more than 3 ttjet of water on it, Tlie anchorage off the m
of this ri^'er is only an open roadstead, but with gixKi holding gr(
The best berth will be found with the two ])oints of Minos and A
in one, the latter being the east^ern point of entrance to the Boi
Kiver, and mth two cocoa nut ti-ees on shore in front of tlie la
house in the village bearing north (north mag.).

The ground to tlie eastward of this bearing i.s rocky, and there is
also to be iu that diroetion a roi'.ky sho:il with only 13 feet of wati
it. In tlie rainy season good water can be obtained by going 2 i
np the river. The tide rises about li ttet.

Between the mouth of the Quiabon and the Boinana River, a ;
distance to the westward, there nre tlireo small loading places, c
Minos, Burgado, and Cak-ton, The first two are only fit tor small

ROMANA RIVER — CUMAYAZO RIVER. 301

sels, and the latter is entirely nnsbeltered. The anchorage for large
Teasels off Minos has 19 fathoms of water.

Romana River. — ^The entrance may be )cnown by the village on the
hills on the right bank, 180 feet above the sea. It empties into the sea
between bold limestone bluffs, and its entrance is only about 200 yards
wide. Large vessels, however, can enter it, and it is one of the best
and most sheltered anchorages on the southern coast of Santo Domingo.

The only danger to be avoided is a small rock, with 6 feet of water
on it, lying about 75 yards S. 45^ E. (S. 45^ E. mag.) of the western point.
A short distance eastward of Aguila Point, the eastern point of the
entrance, is a reef which breaks and is easily seen.

Directions. — ^The entrance to the Biver Bomana is too narrow to beat
in. On standing in toward the entrance two prominent points will be
seen, one on each side of the river. When in line they lead directly on
the rock just spoken of. They should therefore be kept just open of
each other, bearing about N. 16^ W. (N. 16o W. mag.). Steer in on
this line, and when uiside the mouth of the river keep the western shore
aboard. Upon entering the river two small rocks, 6 or 7 feet out of the
water, will be seen on the eastern shore a short distance south of the
inner salient points just mentioned.

Anchorage. — With the northern of these rocks in one with Aguila
Point a vessel may anchor in 5 fathoms of water. The ship should be
steadied by a hawser to the rocks. Small vessels of 10 or 11 feet
draft may, with the assistance of a pilot, go 2 miles farther up the river,
or they may anchor just within the inner western point. Off the east-
em inner point there is a bank with ouly 6 feet of water on it.

Water. — Boats frequently get as far up as the rapids for water.
There are no difficulties until coming to a little island where a shelf of
rocks runs across, over which there are only 2^ feet, and but one foot
near the rapid during its mean leveL The river falls over the shelf«
so that the boat may almost lie under it, and water very conveniently
without landing the casks.

Catalina Island is small and low. The channel between it and Santo
Domingo is navigable for large vessels. The Santo Domingo Shore
should, however, be kept aboard to avoid a reef which generally breaks
off the NW. point of Catalina.

There is a good anchorage in 3 J fathoms of water in the JTW. jiart of a
bay, where vessels are well protected by the two prominent points of
the island.

Cmnayaxo Ri^er is nearly abreast of the western end of Catalina
Island and is said to be broad and deep enough to afford shelter to
large vessels. Those drawing 18 feet or more should anchor about 300
yards inside the entrance, in 4 fathoms of water, and a little to the
southward of the smaller of two coves on the eastern bank. This berth
is near a small dry dock.

Small vessels of 6 or 8 feet draft may take the channel close to the

302 SANTO DOMINGO.

western bank and ascend the river as high as San Pedro Bock, If mileB
from the mouth. Beyond this rock there are three islands. Higher
up the river becomes so narrow that it is only navigable for boats to the
embarcadero of San Juan, 2 miles above San Pedro.

Water. — ^A short distaoce above San Juan good water may be ob-
tained &om a basin called Agua Dulce. Boats can not approach it
nearer than 200 yards.

Soco River is nearly 10 miles westward of the Gumayazo. Although
one of the largest of the rivers flowing south from the Gibao Mountains,
it is not navigable except for boats, as a shallow bar obstructs its
mouth, inside of which the channel is blocked up by sand-banks cov-
ered with drift wood.

Anchorage. — ^Vessels sometimes anchor about 3 miles off shore in 5
fathoms of water, with the entrance bearing N. 11^ B, (N. 11° E. mag.)*
or N. 23° E. (N. 23° E. mag.), but this anchorage is entirely unprotected.
Small vessels lie closer in, in 3 or 4 fathoms, exposed to southerly winds
and hardly sheltered to the eastward by Mortero Point.

The landing place is 200 yards inside the mouth of the river, on the
western bank.

Santa Cruz del Ceibo lies on the bank of the river o( the same
name, which is one of the branches of the Soco, about 15 miles firom
the sea.

Port Macoris is formed by the river of the same name. It will ad-
mit vessels drawing 12 feet of water. The entrance is about ^ mile
wide between the south point and Point Tibiz, north and west of it.
iN'early abreast of the entrance there is a small cay, called Isleta, having
a reef extending off its KE. point. On the western side of this cay
there is a mud flat, and the channel, with from 15 to 17 feet of water,
runs close along the eastern shore. Gare must be taken to avoid a
small rocky head called Edward Shoal, with 6 feet of water on it, which
lies about 100 yards north of the south point.

The mark to clear Edward Shoal is the second cocoanut tree, near
the house of the captain of the port, in the village on the eastern bank
in one with the north point. After passing Isleta Gay the cocoanut
trees should be kept just open till the vessel is within the Edward
Shoal, when haul in and anchor just inside the north point.

The United States is represented by a consular agent.

Caution. — A sailing vessel can only leave the river with a fresh land
breeze, and as the current sets toward the Edward Shoal, care must
be taken to avoid it.

Gnayacanes Anchorage is 9 miles west of the Macoris Biver. It
an open roadstead. The anchorage is 1^ miles offshore, in 8 or 9 fet
oms, with good holding ground. There is a small opening in the n
skirting the shore through which boats may reach the landing place.

Juan d'Olio, between Gnayacanes and Andres Bay, is also an op€
roadstead, and the anchorage is some distance from the land. There
a few houses on the shore.

ANDRES BAY SANTO DOMINGO CITY. 305

Andres Bay is formed between Caucedo and Magdalena points..
The other part of this bay is not safe, but oft' Agua del Bey, in the
inner or eastern part, about 4 miles from Magdalena Point, there is a
fair anchorage off the beach in 5 fathoms water, but a heavy swell rolls
in. A vessel will lie sheltered as fia>r round as SE., but it is open to the
southward. There is another spot in the bay called Play a de Andres^
where wood is shipped; but the anchorage is -i miles from the shore,
outside an extensive reef, which forms witli the coast a channel with 9
feet water. This place is famed for the prodigious number of pigeons
which visit it in May and October, when they maybe killed with sticks*

Banto Domingo Bay. — From Gaucedo Point the coast trends west-
ward for about 18 miles, and then to the SSVV. for about the same dis-
tance to Nisao Point, forming tlie bay of Santo Domingo, which is
25 miles wide and 10 miles deep.

La Caleta is a small bay close to the westward of Gaucedo Pointy
where temporary anchorage will be found in from 3 to 7 fathoms water,
sheltered round to SE. Near the point there is an embarking place for
mahogany, but large vessels are obliged to load under sail.

Pilots. — ^Vessels bound to any of the anchorages just described, or
those on the eastern coast, generally obtain a pilot at the city of Santo
Domingo, which is the port of entry for all these places.

Santo Domingo City and Harbor lies 15 miles from Gaucedo Point,
at the entrance of the Biver Ozama, which is barred and shoaling, hav-
ing about 12 feet over it at low water, with 15 to 22 feet within, almost
alongside the banks of the stream, for a distance of more than 3 miles
firom its mouth. It is readily found bj^the city, which is built at the
entrance, on the right bank of the river; an extensive savannah lies to
the westward of it, inclosed by an amphitheater of hills. The city is
surrounded by a wall, and defended by a fort at the entrance of the
river, with several other outworks and bastions, all in a ruinous state.
The city is now the capital of the Dominican Republic.

A large three- storied brewery is in process of erection about 250
yards southwestward from the SW. angle of the cemetery, outside the
west wall of the town, and now forms a prominent landmark, being the
most conspicuous object in approaching from seaward.

The roadstead can only be considered as a temporary and unsafe an-
chorage.

The United States is represented by a consul and vice-consul.

Estudios Bank extends about one mile from the shore and is com-
posed of rock with a thin covering of sand and mud, not at all trust-
worthy holding ground. A vessel lying here in the season of rollers or
tidal waves (November to March) or in the hurricane season (July to
October) would be very likely to drag her anchors, and in such a case
on this rocky shore, where the sea beats with such fury, there would
be little chance of saving either ship or crew. With any appearance of
bad weather ships lying in this roadstead should immediately seek an
offing.

304 SANTO DOMINGO.

Osama River. — The oaier p»rt of the entraace to the rivei
Homeo^e Point od the west and ToireciUa Point S. 33^ E.
mag.) of it, IB J mile in breadth. The latter point ia low, roc
bank of fcom 1^ to 2^ fathoms extends 200 yards to the S W. anc
breezes the sea breaks heavily on it. Thence the edge of
bank, with 1^ fathoms water on it, runs almost in a straight J
northward as far as the sand spit, above the 8E. angle of thf
which is low, projects, and contracts the river to aboat 100
breadth. A little northward of Homent^e Point, in £ront of
angle of the citadel, and near the shore, are several rocks on
sea breaks.

To Enter the River Osama a pilot shoold be taken, and
be borne in mind that the bar being composed of rocks, a sm
and high water should be chosen, as a vessel drawing 10 feet
ceive serious damage by even touching on the bar. Exteus
are in progress with a view to deepening the water at the
A jetty has been partially constructed on each side of the rii
is narrowed at the moath to 400 or 500 feet.

As the current in the middle of the river is sometimes very
vessel had better moor head and stem close inshore.

The stream out of the River Ozama runs with great velocity

Tides. — The rise and fall of the tide is about 2 feet, and tl
high water is uncertain, Dnring the rainy season the deptl
on the bar somewhat increases.

Snpplies. — Fresh provisions may be obtained. The water
drinking is kept in reservoirs, as that of the Ozama is salt f<
miles up. On the eastern shore of the river there is abnadam
maoing water, but inconvenient to procure on account of the

Steamers. — There are four regular liues of steamers; Frei;
atlantic line; German line &om St. Thomas, Jacmel, Puet
Spanish line ft'om Paerto Bico, terminating at Havana, and Ei
from St. Thomas to La Guayra. The Clyde line from New Y
most important, running st«amers twice a mouth.

Coal. — The Clyde Steamship Company has a small qoanti
here.

Port Does. — For each ton brought into or taken out of
Light dues, where there is a lighthouse, one cent per ton regisi
if taken, onecentper ton register; for enteriug port and anchoi
one cent per ton register; laydays, 10 cents per day; forint«rp
nal house dues, and physician, each, $i per steamer; for each
of water, $1.

Boat T.^ini^<«g — The landing is at the jetty and abreast of
of the captain of the port. Xo charge is made for its use.

Pilots may be obtained on application to the captain of
They come out to meet all incoming vessels. Their service
necessary for the outer harbor, neither is pilotage compulsory '

SA.NTO DOMINGO CITY — WIXD^*. 305

Lights. — On Fort San Jo^, from a white iron tower, is exhibited a
light visible 15 miles. No dejyendence can be pla<;ed on this light after
midnight. The light is a revolving red and white alternately, showing
a flash every minute; interval between flashes one minute. Reported
irregular after midnight, 1891.

A fixed white light visible about 3 miles is also shown from the south
extreme of the eastern mole in the Ozama River. Reported inefficient,
and to be sometimes extinguished, 1887. (Destroyed, 1802.)

Directions. — Approaching this port it will be useful to remember
that a few miles to the eastward of the Cibao Range of mountains two
small hillocks rise to a height of 200 or 300 feet above the plain; these
make as two islets long before the low shore appears, and if kept on a
N. 10° W. (N. 11^ W. mag.) bearing will lead a vessel up the anchor-
age, on nearing which it will be requisite to keep to windward of the
port, especially with a fresh breeze, and the lead should be quickly
hove as the bank is steep-to. The discolored water from the river may
be seen some distance from the land. The vessel should be under easy
sail, so as to anchor when the bearings are on. The best holding ground
ft)r large vessels will be found in 8 fathoms, sand and mud, with a few
houses on the east side of the River Ozama open of the city, and Torre-
cilia Point, N. 57^ B. (N. 56° E. mag.), with the houses shut in, the bot-
tom becomes rocky. Being open to the southward, the sea breeze sends
in a heavy, uneasy swell, and the stream from the river causes a vessel
to ride broadside to it. It is by no means a safe anchorage.

From the bastion of Don Diego upwards, a vessel can moor at about
75 yards from either bank.

In a sailing vessel it is necessary to have the sea breeze to enter the
river, and the land wind to leave it.

Aspect. — To the eastward of the Ozama the plains extend 15 to 20
miles inland; but to the westward, at 4 or 5 miles from the shore, are
the first steeps of the southern rise of the Cibao Chain, which runs
nearly through the middle of the eastern part ot* the island, lowers
gradually, and terminates near Cape Egauo. The i)eak of Yaque, the
highest part of the chain, rises NW. 59° (N. 60^ W. mag.) of the city
of Santo Domingo, distant about 60 miles. The difference in the aspect
eastward and westward of the river is useful when bound to this
anchorage.

The shore eastward of Torrecilla Point is almost entirely composed
'^^ rock; there is scarcely a sandy beach to be seen, and the sea gener-

ly breaks against it with great violence.

Winds. — During the winter months, and especially in the spring,

le land and sea breezes succeed each other with tolerable regularity;

it during the remainder of the .year they undergo some interruption,

Tticularly in the summer season. Frequently the fresh north winds
the south coast of Santo Domingo completely overcome the sea
^eze. Within the Ozama the land wind blows from NNE. to NB.,
18402 20

306 SANTO DOMINGO^

aoid the sea breeze from south to SSW. The first begins soon after
sunset, and continues until 8 or 9 in the morning.

Tides and Currents. — Between Beata Point and Saona Island, when
the moon's age increases, the ebb tide sets twelve hours eastward and
the Hood twelve houi^s westward. The ebb begins at 9 or 10 in the
morniug and runs at the rate of If miles an hour. The rise of tide is a
little more than 3 feet in Agujero Chico, and IJ feet at Nisao Point.
When the moon's age decreases the waters run invariably to the west-
ward during the 24 hours at from one to 2 J miles an hour. The weather
is then changeable, and at times strong squalls are experienced. Off
this part of the coast of Santo Domingo, after Iresh northerly or south-
erly winds, the current often sets eastward, and occasionally at other
times. The westerly current strikes the coast between Beata Point and
the mouth of the Neiva, then turns to the NE. as far as that river, and
thence eastward, trending with the coast.

Jaina River is about 5 miles west of Santo Domingo City.

Mahogany is shipi)ed &om here, but, as there is no shelter, and bad
holding ground, vessels are obliged to lie a long way off shore, and can
only receive cargo during calms or northerly winds.

Nigua River. — On its south bank, a short distance from the mouthi
is the village of the same name. Although numerous vessels load here,
the loading presents many difficulties. The bank of soundings is so
narrow that vessels lie close inshore in 12 to 14 fathoms of water. The
anchorage is entirely unsheltered, and strong breezes cause the sea to
rise 13 to 15 feet above the ordinary level.

Caution. — ^Vessels can only load during northerly winds, and, indeed,
a vessel's safety would be seriously endangered by remaining at anchor
off the Nigua River with the wind from any other quarter. The place
has the reputation of being very unhealthy.

N^allo River empties into the sea a short distance south of the
Nigua River, and the anchorage is equally inconvenient and unsafe.

Port Palenque affords sheltered anchorage, but very confined, with
a depth of 23 feet of water over a gravelly bottom. The shore is very
Bteep-to, with 3 fathoms close in sliore.

In entering or leaving this anchorage, be careful to avoid a reef which
extends SE. and NW. from the weather point.

Nisao Point is low, and descends to the sea by a gentle slope. Off
the point is a reef, inside which fishing boats find shelter. From here
the coast takes a westerly direction to Salinas Point, which is low and
sandy, and may be recognized by the sea breaking over it.

Nisao Roadstead. — To the westward of Point Nisivo there is an .
xoadsteiwl where vessels load with mahogany. Here the River N.
empties into the sea, and vessels may anchor 1 J or 2 miles off its mc
in from 7 to 9 fathoms. The bar is almost impassable, even for be
on account of the rapidity of the stream, and the sea breaks at a
tauce from shore, making landing difficult.

PORT VIEJO — GULF OF OCOA. 307

Water of the river is good at J mile from the mouth.

Port Viejo i» an open roadstead. The anchorage is 1^ miles oft* shore
in about 7 fathoms of water. This anchorage and that of Nisao Eoad
lie in a deep bight, between Point Palenque on the east and Point Cata-
lina on the west. The shore is generally bold, and the soundings which
are found off' some parts to the distance of 2 or 3 miles ajford temporary
anchorage for vessels visiting this coast for wood. About one mile
southward of Oatalina Point there is a shoal with only 12 feet water on
it, and it is stated that reefs extend off* this part of the coast, and which
are dangerous, the lead being of no use.

Catalina Bay, westward of Gatalina Point, is but little frequented.
There is no anchorage in its eastern part. In its western part small
vessels only can anchor in 3 fathoms of water.

Sabana Bay affords good anchorage in 5 or 6 fathoms, sheltered by
the latter point as far round as ESE.

The roadsteads of Paya, Agua de la Estancla (the port of the village
of Bani, 5 miles inland), and Estancia Colorado lie between Sabana and
Salinas Bays, and are all open and unprotected. Vessels lie from 2 to
3 miles off shore.

Salinas Bay, between the point of the same name on the west and
Palmas Point on the east, has from 15 to 12 fathoms water at 200 yards
from the shore. The best anchorage is with a group of palm trees near
the eastern point of the bay bearing about N. 85^ E. (N. 84^ B. mag.)
and in line with two hills, also covered with palm trees. Small vessels
anchor in «3 fathoms, with a stream cable fast to the shore in case the
anchor should drag.

The coast between Salinas and Nisao is fringed with low bush.

The Oalf of Ocoa is open to the southward, and the heavy sea
which is caused by the prevailing winds when they blow strong renders
the western shore dangerous to a})proach. The coast of the gulf is
bordered by a sand bank, generally narrow, but in places it extends off
1^ miles; the western shore is also skirted by a reef and the eastern
shore partly so. At the head of the gulf there are two large bays; the
Neiva or Juliana, in the western part, and the Ocoa, which occuiries
all the northern and eastern shore.

In these bays are various ports and anchorages, some of which are
formed by reefs; those in Neiva afford but moderate shelter; those in
Ocoa Bay are very good. The hill of Baburuco on the west and the
: — 'intain of Busu to the NVV. of the gulf, are conspicuous objects. To
1 eastward of the gulf are the plains or fiats of Bani, backed at the
< ^nce of 4 or i> miles inland by the chain of the Cerro Gordo.

le Coast from Salinas Point to Oaldera Point is sandy, and free
] a danger. Half way between the two points the coast projects a
] le and forms Ranchos Point, which is bordered at 100 yards' distance
I " bank of coral and sand with 10 to 12 feet of water on it.

308 SANTO DOMINGO.

Caldera Bay. — Galdera, the south point of entrance to the bay, is a
low tongue of sand and the termination of a flat peninsula of the same
name, which is nearly all occupied by a salt lake and partly covered
by brushwood and palm trees. The point lies about J mile southward
of Matasola Point, but the shoals bordering the northern shore contract
the breadth of the channel to 300 yards, with depths varying from 4 to
9 fathoms. Banks extend nearly across the bay, from north to south,
dividing it into two parts, called the eastern and western anchorages.
The eastern anchorage is about f mile in diameter, with from 5 to 7
fathoms of water, diminishing toward the shore, Anth muddy bottom.
This anchorage is perfectly clear after passing the banks which divide
it from the western anchorage. These in smooth weather can be easily
seen, but with a breeze from SB. or ESE. the sea breaks everywhere,
and the channels are not easily distinguished. A stranger should take
a pilot.

The western anchorage is only about 500 yards in diameter, with
depths of 3^ to 7 fathoms of water over gravelly and sandy bottom.

These two anchorages are sheltered from all winds, but a sailing ves-
sel would be obliged to tow or warp in.

Both of these banks can be easily distinguislied from aloft by the
discolored water above them. From the western anchorage a depth of
3 fathom^ may be carried into the eastern anchorage. For this the eye
from aloft will be the best guide.

Water may be obtained from a small spring in the eastern part of
the bay.

The Tides in the bay are much affected by the wind. The establish-
ment of the port is uncertain.

Anchorage outside of Caldera Point. The best berth is with Cal-
dera Point bearing S. 78^ E. (S. 79° E. mag.) 400 yards distant, in from
11 to 14 fathoms. This is a safe anchorage except during the hurricane
months.

Caution. — In approaching Caldera, or any of the ports in the gulf of
Ocoa, from the westward, a vessel, after weathering that part of the
coast between Beata Island and Avarena Point, should make northing,
as the current which runs to the westward near Alta Vela sets to the
eastward in approaching the gulf of Ocoa. It is, however, advisable
to keep clear, of the western shore of the gulf. If bound to Port Cal-
dera work well to windward, but do not stand to the southward of lati-
tude 18^ y.

Winds. — The prevailing winds during the day are from east to S
and during the night from the westward ; but sometimes in 24 hours tr
blow from all points of the compass. Between the easterly and h
winds an interval of calm takes place. The lakes in the vicinity of v
port, some of which have been converted into salt ponds, are unhealf
in the rainy season.

OCOA ROAD PORT ESCONDIBO. 309

Ocoa Road is in the NE. part of Ocoa Bay. The anchorages are well
sheltered from the usual trade wind, but the holding ground, of sand
and loose stones, is not good, and anchors easily drag.

The usual anchorage off the entrance of Ocoa Eiver is confined to a
narrow ledge of sand, with rocky patches, very steep-to, and so close to
the shore that a cable must be carried to the nearest palm trees, keep-
ing an anchor to the westward to check the vessel against the land
wind at night, which blows from the west and WNW. The north side
of the river is the best. A large number of ships may, however, anchor
here in safety. The anchorage should not be approached before the
sea breeze is established, at about 10 a. m., and preparation must be
made to meet the sudden and violent gusts which rush off the land
after passing Ocoa Point, the south extreme of the bay.

Anchorage of Caracoles lies immediately to the northward of Ocoa
Eoad and abreast of the mouth of the River Caracoles. As good a berth
as any may be found 1 J miles off shore, with a depth of 5 or 6 fathoms
of water. Landing on the beach is not difficult, but with southerly
winds a heavy fewell sets into the bay.

Azua Bay, into which the River Via emi)ties, is open to the sea,
which sets in heavily. While the sea breeze blows, vessels ride very
uneasily. Vessels can seldom tow wood to the ships after 11 a. m.
There is not room to beat, and vessels are obliged to leave with the
land breeze.

There is a reef off the western point of the bay, and near the eastern
point the bottom is very uneven.

Tortuguero, the port of Azua, is a fair anchorage;

The United States is represented by a consular agent.

The mountains in the neighborhood are covered with trees furnishing
a wood of yellow color, fit for cabinet work.

Port Escondido* is about 15 miles to the northwestward of Salinas
Point. The entrance to this harbor is i mile wide, and its westeiin point
Is clear and steep-to. The eastern point, lying more to the northward
than the western one, is foul to the distance of 200 yards. Half a mile
inside the entrance there is a rocky shoal 400 yards long, north and
south, and 200 yards wide. *

Directioiis. — In entering the harbor the southwestern shore must be
kept aboard, at a distance of 400 yards, to avoid the rocky bank just
mentioned, and large vessels should not go farther than ^ mile inside

e entrance; at J mile inside of this there is a depth of only 2 J fathoms.

Anchorage can be found in 4 or 5 fathoms to the northward of the

cky bank, 600 yards from the entrance, but it is more exposed than
le other. Small vessels drawing 13 or 14 feet may proceed farther in 5

•This port Keems formerly to Imve been Puerto Viejo Azua. H. O. chart 948 sliows
ily one port. The United States consul at Azua rei)ort8 niucli more water, 49 feet,
the entrance.

310 SANTO DOMINGO.

for them Port Escondido is an excellent harbor. Large vessels are ex-
posed to winds from the south or SB., which cause a heavy swell.

Puerto Viejo de Asua is the first anchorage in Ocoa Bay, coming
from the westward. It is a short distance north of Martin Gai'cia Point,
and affords excellent and secure shelter to small vessels. Having a
depth of only 12 to 15 feet at the entrance, it is inaccessible to large
vessels, which may lie outside in good weather in from 3 to 9 fathoms,
but this outside anchorage is entirely exposed to the Seabreeze.

The entrance to the harbor is quite narrow, and a reef lies off the
north point.

In entering, avoid the SE. point, which is distinguished by high and
towering rocks. Anchor in 5 fathoms midway between tliis point and
the point of the reef; or having passed the entrance, steer K. 22^ W.
(N. 23° W. mag.) and anchor in 3 fathoms,' the end of the reef bearing
S. 220B. (S. 230 E.. mag.).

Tavora or Tabara River lies eastward of Puerto Yiejo de Azua, one
mile distant.

Rancho del Cuba Anchorage is J mile NW. f^om the white bluffs
of Martin Garcia. A good berth will be found, with a depth of 5 fath-
oms of water, 400 yards off shore and sheltered from the prevailing
winds by Point Martin Garcia.

Alejandro Bay. — This anchorage is separated by a point remarka-
ble for its red bluffs from a small cove called Alejandro Bay. This bay
is bounded on the west by the mouth of the River Neiva. It affords no
good anchorage, and there are several rocks and shoals in it.

Neiva Bay is formed between Points Martin Garcia and Avarena;
it is about 8 miles wide and the same distance deep, and open to the
SE. The River Neiva empties itself at the head of the bay, about 10
miles westward of Martin Garcia Point; but the bar is only passable to
boats.

Barahona Harbor lies on the west side of Neiva Bay. It is a reef
harbor, and vessels require a pilot. It is not a suitable place for large
vessels. The reef is very steep- to, and at a distance of 800 yards there
is no bottom with 118 fathoms, then suddenly the depth decreases to 5
fathoms, slioaling soon after to 10 feet.

The village of Barahona can be seen at a distance of 2 miles, and
above it two ranges of hills, one above the other, each range having a
saddle bearing S. 68^ W. (S. G7o W. mag.) from the village.

Directions. — ^When approaching from the southward, steer along
the reef, which here trends parallel with the coast, until the wh'^^^
houses and church of Barahona bear S. t)8o W. (S. 67^ W. mag.)
Martin Garcia Point X. 08^ E. (N. 67^ E. mag.). The course is
direct for the town.

The opening in the reef is about 800 yards wide in a SW. and .
direction, the northern reef terminating in a cay of coral and sto"^*'
feet high, and easily discernible from a distance of 5 miles.

BABURUCO ANCHORAGE AGUJERO. 311

The reef on the SE. side of the entrance mnst not be approached
closely, and the anchorage is jiist within it.

In order to ship cargo it is necessary to proceed to the inner anchor-
age, for which a pilot is required, and it may here be mentioned that
they merely direct the coarse, and do not work the vessel.

The inner anchorage is about 200 yards from the beach in 15 feet,
mud bottom, good holding ground, and only EISTB. winds send in any
swell; vessels are moored head and stern, as there is no room to swing.

The land and sea breezes are regular, NW. by night, and SE. to
E8B. by day, commencing about 9 or 10 a. m.

Supplies. — Fresh meat can be obtained, but no other supplies can
be depended on, except that good water may be brought from the rivu-
lets. No cargo boats can be obtained.

Babtiraco Anchorage is a short distance south of Avarena Point;
it lies between two reefs, and is dangerous and contracted. SmaU
vessels only can anchor there, with a depth of 12 to 15 fathoms of water
IJ miles from shore.

Mala Pasa Anchorage is easily distinguished by some white cliffs
on shore. This anchorage is off the mouth of the River Nisaito, and
like the anchorages of Nisaito and Naranjal, a little farther north, is a
dangerous place for vessels.

Riocito Anchorage. — ^The shore is so steep-to here that vessels are
obliged to lie in dangerous proximity to it. It is exposed to wind and
sea, and, although vessels load here in fine weather, it can by no means
be considered a safe anchorage.

Agt^ero (Petit Tron), 12 miles NE. of Cape Mongon, is extremely
difficult to enter, and should not be attempted by any vessel drawing
more than lOJ feet, or without the assistance of a pilot. The holding
ground is rocky, and not to be trusted. The anchorage is sheltered
toward the eastward by a reef 3 miles long, having two cuts in it. The
eastern one is 400 yards wide, with several sunken rocks in it, on one
of which there are only lOJ feet of water. The western passage has
from 18 to 20 feet, but the part of the anchorage to which it leads is
strewn with dangerous sunken rocks.

To enter either of these passages, as before said, a vessel should not
draw more than lOJ feet, and should be guided by the eye from the
bowsprit end. The best time for entering is between 11 a. m. and 1
p. m., when the various dangers may be more easily seen.

Tides. — During the increase of the moon the tides set 12 hours each

ay, the ebb to the east and the flood to the west, at the rate of about
jne mile an hour. On the decrease there is no ebb at all, and the cur-
ent increases to 1.^ knots. The rise and fall is about 3 feet.

Winds. — The sea breeze> at Agujero sets in at 2 a. m. and blows till

or 8 p. m., when it veers to east and E. by S. till near midnight,
"liere is consequently little or no land wind. Tlie River Agujero
japties into the harbor.

312 SANTO DOMINGO.

All this i)art of the coast abounds in game.

Caution. — This place is stated to be entirely exposed to the sea, and
such a heavy surf is thrown on the beach that for days, and occasion-
ally for weeks, it is impossible for a boat to effect a landing, much less
bring off a cargo.

Cape Mongon is a high promontory, which from a distance of 15 or
18 miles appears like an island. In the interior will be seen the lofty
mountains of Baburuco, which rise to the height of 2,400 feet.

Beata Point is the southern extreme of Haiti, and terminates to
the south in two salient points forming a small bay. This part of the
coast prese^its a white rocky abrupt plateau,* about 40 feet high, in
which are large gaps and crevices. On one of the points there is a small
hillock. The south point of Haiti ha«, 2 miles l!^E. of its extremity, a
rocky coin-shaped hillock, which, seen from a distance of 10 miles on a
northeasterly bearing, has the appearance of an island, and then mach
resembles Alta Vela. The' SW. part of the point is long, low, and
clifly; off its extremity is a small rock. The small bay between the
points does not afford shelter from the prevailing winds; its shore ap-
pears steep-to, with very little beach. The rooks and cliffs in the bay
are much whiter than those to the NE. of Beata Point. For 4 or 5
miles to the northward of the point, the coast, viewed either from the
east or west appears as a low promontory extending from the foot of
the Baburuco Mountains, and rising in the center to a height of 80 or
90 feet; the surface is covered with a low, thick scrub. The coast line
to the NE. IS of dark, low cliffs.

Bank of Soundings. — Between Points Beata and Espada the coast
is little known; it is bordered by a narrow bank, and the anchorages
are generally dangerous, especially during the winter months, when the
wind inclines to the southward; generally, too, the winds are strong
with almost always a heavy sea.

Between Beata Point and Cape Tiburon the coast is bordered by a
narrow bank of soundings. From Cape False to Sale Trou, the bank
varies in distance from one to 3 miles from the land; between Sale Trou
and Aquin it extends off from J to one mile. For a space of 20 miles
westward of Cape Ja<*mel, the bank is interrupted, and in this space
there is no bottom, with upwards of 90 fathoms at from 200 to 400 yards
from shore.

Currents. — Along the south coast, between Cape False and bay of
Cayes, the current near the land runs to the eastward, and often suJQ&-
ciently strong to avssist a vessel to windward; but southward of Beata
Point it runs strong to the westward. Near the land between B'^'
Point and the island of Saona the current also sets eastward.

Beata Island is about 5 miles long north and south, 2 miles bro
mostly covered with brushwood, and from 50 to 80 feet high. \
southern i)art is the most elevated. The south coast is about 40 or
feet high, steep and rocky. The SW. point is of a similar bold nj^^

BE ATA ISLAND AND CHANNELS. 313

but is lower. The north end terminates in a long, low i^oint, and not
far from it there is a solitary hut. The west side is bold and steep-to,
and off some parts of this side there is no bottom with 130 fathoms of
line, at | mile from the shore; and off others a depth of 20 fathoms,
nearly a mile distant. From the SW. i)oint a ledge stretches off some
distance in that direction ; discolored water extends WS W. of this point
a distance of 2 miles. The east side is very steep; it extends NE. and
SW., rising towards the south. The SB. point is a steep bluff having •
some small rocks off' it, but the north and NE. sides are connected to
Beata Point by a shallow white bank, on which the greatest depth is
reported to be 3 fathoms. N. lio E. (X. 10^ E. mag.) of the island
there is a breaker. To the northward and westward of Beata are live
small rocky islets.

Anchorage. — Good anchorage will be found in from 7 to 9 fathoms
water, at about i mile from tbe shore, with the north point of the island
K 710 E. (N. TOO E. mag.), and Alta Vela, S. 35^ W. (S. 34^ W. mag.).

Alta Vela (the high sail) lies SW. of the S W. part Beata Island. It
is f mile long and ^ mile wide, and is almost entirely composed of a
remarkable bell-shaped hill, the summit of which is 500 feet above the
sea. At'f mile north from the north side there is a small low Hat black
rock about 100 yards in length and 20 feet high ; and a coral bank of
soundings varying from 15 to 18 fathoms stretches off li miles from
the SE. anjd about one mile from the SW. side. The shores are rocky,
but may be approached with safety. There is anchorage in from 7 to
11 fathoms, coral, off the wharf at the N W. side of the island, with the
flagstaff bearing ijbout N.80^ E. (N. 70^ E. mag.) distant nearly J mile.
The veins of phosphate of lime and alumina on the island are being
worked by a company. Vessels bound either east or west will lind Alta
Vela a most valuable point of departure.

Note. — ^The relative positions of these islands with regard -to each
other and Beata Point are reported to be erroneously shown on the charts.
Alta Vela is said to be S. 49^ W. (S. 48^ W. mag.) 5 miles from the center
of Beata Island, while the eastern side of Beata bears S. 1^ E. (S. 2^ E.
mag.) of Beata Point.

Beata Channels. — There is a heavy swell ami variable current in
the channel between Beata Island and the mainland, and the depth is
somewhat less than 3 fathoms.

The channel between Alta Vela and Beata Island is quite clear, but
the currents are strong and irregular, and it will, therefore, be more
prudent to pass to the southward, on which side it may be approached
within li miles.

FraUe Rock lies N. 10^ W. (N. 20^ W. mag.) of Alta Vela and west-
peard 8 miles from the north end of Beata Island. It is about 100 yards
in extent and 50 feet high, and at a distance has the appearance of a
cluster of sharp peaked, rugged rocks, with white to])s. It is steei)-to,
having 17 fathoms at 200 yards off.

314 SANTO DOMINGO.

Coast. — From Beata Poiut, and a^ far as Oai>e Rojo, t
formed by vertical blafts, wliieh give a peculiar cliara(ner to
bays along the shore. These bays lie between the points o
aod are bordered by a narrow sand beach, from which it i:
to climb the bluflfs or seek a ravine in tbein if it ia desired tt
inland. The coves or small bays of Roasselle, Agnilas, Th
gadOH, Trityes, and Vases, altbrd e?uimples of tbls singnlai
tion, particularly remarkable immediately to tbe westwan
Point. The old descriptions of the coast of Santo Doming
name of aeculu to the bays of tbis ilescriptioii. From tbe si
bays the summit of the cilitt's is frequeutly veYy difficult of i

Between Beata Point and Cape False there are three i
only affording suitable auuhorage for small vessels in 8 to
wat«r. East of Burgados or Agu.iero Aznl Bay, tbe wesi
three, a white sand bank commences, which, bordering tl
Beata Point, connects it with Beiita Island by a narrow ridg
there are from lij to 2^ fathoms of water.

Cape False, 1-io feet high, in tbe extremity of a long hee
ning east and west, and lies 8 miles south of Gape Bojo.

Thomas Bay. — Anchorage, sheltered from south and sou
winds, may be found in the middle of this bay, in fcom 5J t<
of water, wbicb diminishes gradually to the shore at the
high cliffs, which entirely surround it.

AgnilflB Bay is skirted by a beacb of coarse sand and g
^teep bluffs behind it. The depth varies from 12 to 8 fathom:
ing to 2 J fathoms as the beach is approached. G«od anchors
here, unsheltered, however, from westerly winds. A good h
way between the two points and a little within a line drav
them, in 7^ or $ fathoms. Tins bay is separated fh>m Bouss
a cliff two miles in length, called Agujas.

Roasselle Bay is like the hay just described, a beach o
gravel at the base of high cliffs. Vessels may anchor 1^ milt
in 8 to 11 fathoms of water, sheltered from north round by ea
A river by the same name runs into the bay.

Cape Rojo- — To the northwai'd of Roiissetle Bay is a
high and two miles long, called Trou J.ii'ol) Cliff, tlie north*
ity of which is Cape Uojo.

Troa Jacob Bay is between Cape Rojo on the south an
Point oil the north, into which empties the river of the s;
Anchorage sheltere^l fn)m the usual winds may be f<nind in
from 3 to 7 fatJioms, with a bottom of coral or sand, with
bearing S. 3-1^ E. (S. m° E. mag.) E. or S. 22° E. (S. 2.to I
miles distant.

Platform Point is a moderately high bluff with a Hat Ui
northward and between it and Pedernales Point, or Piti
bays also called Pedernales or Pitre. The river of the s
which empties into the northern bay, is a considerable e

PERUERNALES POINT— ORANGE BAY. 315

forms in part the bouudary between the republics of Haiti and Santo
Domingo.

Anchorage may be foand abreast the lowland of the northern bay
or to the southward of the western point of the month of the river. The
anchorage is easy of acc^ess and without danger. The coast in this
neighborhood is formed of chalky cliffs with a few gravelly beaches.

Coast — From Pedernales Point the coast takes a NW. direction
to the village of Sale Trou; between are the small bays of Pi^ges^
BaccroCy Cochon, Qrand-Oosiers, and Boeuf.

A remarkable range of red rocks 3 miles long lies immediately NW»
of Pedernales Point, terminating at Pieges Point, the southern limit
of the little bay of the same name. This point may be known by a
remarkable white triangular cliff, 220 feet high. Off the point at ^'
mile southward of the white triangular cliff, and about ^ mil^ from' the
shore, lies a ledge of rocks above water.

All the coast here is formed by white cliflts above a stony beach,*
soundings extend off for two miles.

The Anchorage of Sale Trou is limited to the westward by Boca
Chica Point, formed of hi^h white cliffs which extend for 3 miles to the
westward. Behind these cliffs the land rises rapidly to the mountains
of La Hotte. On the east the anchorage is bounded by Predicador
Point, a low iwint to the eastward of which, ^ mile distant, is a small
islet near the coast, not easily distinguished.

In the N W. angle of the bay is the village of the same name. There
is a beach of coarse gravel, terminated by a red bluff called Tapion,
easily distinguished from a distance. Half a mile to the eastward of
this cliff the River Sale Trou empties into the bay. Small vessels may
anchor abreast of the village with from 17 to 20 feet of water, sand, and
mud. Large vessels must anchor one mile off shore in 7 or 8 fathoms,

but the holding ground is not so good. The anchorage is entirely open
to the southward and is dangerous during the summer months.

River Sal^e Bay. — Farther westward is River Salee Bay, the western
point of which is broad, round, cliffy, and commanded by a conical hilL
At the head of the bay a river empties itself on a shore of sand and
pebbles.

Mome Rouge is 17 mih^s eastward of Cape Marecliaux, the .eastern
point of Jacmel Harbor; it may be re(*ognized by sev eral high whitecliffs
4 miles in extent, having at their west end a remarkable square red
cliff; it is also known by two hummocks on it. The shore is all along
o steep, and in some plac(»s foul, that with light baffling winds, which
we generally accompanied by a heavy swell, sailing vessels had better
j^ve it a wide berth.

Orange and Coutelas Bays. — Immediately eastward of Moriie R(mge
is Orange Bay, which terminates to the east at the point of the same
name, formed by high white cliff's. There is no beach in this bay, but
. small islet lies in the middle of it, named Patira.

316 HAITI.

Between Orange Point and Colombier Point, near which is a large
rock of the same name, is the bay of Goutelas. It is 3 miles in breadth
dnd surrounded by high cliffs.

Cayes Jacmel. — The anchorage of Cayes Jacmel, at 2 miles east-
ward of the village of the same name, affords but little shelter and is
fit only for coasting vessels. The village of Cayes Jacmel stands near
the shore at a mile eastward of Belle Bocbe Point, and on the right
bank of a small river of the same name. The anchorage extends 2 miles
east and west and nearly | mile in breadth. The leefs and sand banks
are easily seen when the sun will admit. The entrance is open to the
southward, and i mile in breadth between the reefs and white sand
banks which border the interior. Having entered, steer westward and
anchor eastward of the village. To the eastward or westward there is
some shelter from the sea from the southward, which is generally very
heavy. There are several sandy beaches on the shore.

Banique Bay. — From Marigot Point a reef skirts the shoi*e at H
miles off as far westward as Fournier Point, a distance of 10 miles. There
are several openings in the reef through which small vessels can pass.
The principal one leads into Sauzay Bay, formed between Belle Boche
and Fournier Points, and in front of which is a small islet. To the west-
ward of Fournier Point is Banique Bay, at the head of which Kormands
Rivulet empties. Soye Point to the westward terminates in cliffs, and
between it and Gape Marechaux, 4 miles westward of it, the coast is
composed of high cliffs; between them are the small bays of Fontaine
and Arnaud.

Jacmel Bay, between Gapes Marechaux and Jacmel, about 2 miles
apart, is 2 miles deep and open to the SE. The former cape is a long
flat strip of table-land about Ij^ miles in extent, terminating in a bold
bluff about one hundred feet high, and steep-to. At the distance of one
mile from it there is no bottom with 150 fathoms. Just inside of Gape
Jacmel is the Bay Baquette, but the water in it is very deep except
quite close to the shore.

The town of Jacmel stands in the NE. corner of the bay on the east
side of the Grande River, which forces itself through several openings
in the sandy beach at the head of the bay; a dry spit of sand and
shingle, about 400 yards long, has formed across the mouths of the river,
the water of which finds an outlet round the west end of the spit; on
the western side of the bay are two remarkable white cliffs. In the
center of the bay no bottom will be found with 80 fathoms, and the nar-
row strip of soundings which skirt the shore at the distance of from ^
to h mile is steep-to. At J mile southward of the town a shallow rod-
half flat runs oft* nearly J mile.

The United States is represented by a consular agent.

Directions. — From the offing to the eastward of Jacmel an excellci
landmark for its locality is a deep cut in the mountain range back
Cape Marechaux. Should this notch be hidden by clouds, a« it f«

JACMEL CAPE BAIENET. 317

quently is, Belle Roche Point, off which there is a white rock of the
same name, which, being overgrown with bashes in the center, appears
like two rocks, will be a good guide toward the bay.

As the bank of soandings where anchorage is practicable is very
steep-to, the ship should be under easy sale or steam, ready to anchor
at once on striking soundings. Steamers calling here for £he mails
only, frequently remain underweigh an<l do not anchor.

The anchorage space is limited and it is always necessary to lay out
a kedge to avoid fouling when the land wind 4*omes off. A small pi^r
or boat jetty has been built close to, westward of the wharf.

To approach the anchorage bring the cathedral to bear X, 19^ B. (N»
170 B.mag.), when northward of Baquette Bay, and steer for it on
that bearing. The flagstaff is on the western side of the cathedral.
The breakwater is in ruins.

Steamers. — ^The steamers of the West India (Atlas) Mail Company
call here twice a month. The French Transatlantic line and a German
line also call, as well as the Royal Mail Steam Packet Company and
the Dutch line.

Supplies. — Coal can not be depended upon, but other supplies are
plentiful. Good water can be obtained at the wharf.

Land and Sea Breezes are generally very regular in Jacmel Bay.
A heavy swell rolls into the bay, and care must be taken to avoid being
becalmed near the shore. With a land breeze this may be avoided by
keeping the valley open. Tide rises about 3 feet.

Pilots are very slow to board vessels, and their services are not nec-
essary. The plan of the bay may be somewhat incorrect, as the banks
are said to have undergone considerable change.

Pilotage. — Inwards, if taken at Baquette Bay for vessels of from 50
to 100 tons, $4; 101 to 200 tons, $8; 201 to 300 tons, 810; 301 to 400
tons, $12; over 400 tons, $16. If taken in Baquette Bay half of these
rates. Outwards, half the stated rates are charged.

Dues. — The tonnage dues are abnmt $2 per ton. The weight in use
is the old French pound livre.

There are no interpreter's fees, although a gratuity of from $5 to $10
is generally given.

Anchorage Daes. — Vessels entering and leaving port again within
twenty-four hours pay $23 (Spanish dollars) ; for the right of proceeding
to a second port in Haiti; vessels under 150 tons pay $200; above 150
^-^ns and below 200, $2."i0; above 200 tons, 8300 (Haitian currency).

Cape Baienet may be readily distinguished by the white hillocks
vhich overlook the cliffs that form the shore, and is the south i)oint of
I small bay of that name, at the head of which there is a little village.
Che bay is quite exposed to the east; there is no regular landing, and a
leavy sea sets in on the beach.

From Cape Jacmel to this cape the shore trends westward 10 miles f
^•here are several small bays between, but no shelter whatever.

318 HAITI.

A Gouspicuons white rock lies abouc 2 miles west of Gape Jaemel,
and is an excellent distingaishing mark when approaching Jacmel Bay
from the southward.

Mome Rouge Point, about 40 miles westward of Gape Baienet, is of
considerable elevation, and at some distance off appears a bold head-
land, but as it is approached it becomes known by five remarkable white
hummocks near its extremity. The mountains near it rise to the height
of about 1,000 feet. In a small bay on the east side of the point there
is i\ small rock called the False Diamond. At a short distance from
the point there are 10 and 11 fathoms water.

East Fiamand Bay. — To the eastward of Mome Eougiii Point is
Bast Fiamand Bay, formed between it and Fiamand Point on the east;
it is open to the southward and affords no shelter. From Fiamand
Point a reef extends a mile to the southward, and on its west side there
is a shelter from easterly winds for small vessels. In this bay there are
7 to 11 fathoms water, shoaling gradually to the sh6re.

Coast. — ^AU the projecting points and headlands on this part of the
island are bold and steep-to. The white cliits and hills resembling
chalk are very remarkable; the easternmost, and most elevated, called
the hummocks of Aquin, form the Mome Rouge Point, and can not be
mistaken. From the latter point to Gape Baienetthe shore is straight,
bold and steep-to, so as to receive the name of the Iron Goast. It
affords no shelter whatever against the sea breeze, and the edge of
soundings is about 1^ miles off the coast. About 6 miles westward of
Gape Baienet there are some high cliffs, and near them a small rocky islet.
In the above space are several small bays, but they are of no impor-
tance.

Aquin and English Bays are partially protected to the southward
by a chain of reefs and cays lying from one to 3 miles offshore, with
clear channels leading into the bay between most of them.

In Aquin Bay there is secure anchorage for vessels of light draft in
3^ and 4 fathoms of water. In English Bay the water is deeper and
the holding ground is good, but the anchorage is not so well sheltered.

GhroBse or Aquin Cay can be recognized by two remarkable white
hills, from 300 to 500 feet high, and four white cliffs on its southern side.
It is bold and steep-to on all sides.

Z>iamond Cay is a small, white, rocky islet nearly in the middle of
the eastern channel into Aquin Bay. The rock is bold on all sides
except the north, whence a long, narrow ledge runs off.

Ramier or Pigeon Cay is narrow and about J mile long east ar'^
west. There are on its south side three sand cliffs 25 feet high. _
small cay lies 4 mile from its west end, connected to it by a beach
sand and coral, from the west side of which a reef extends for near.
i mile with o fathoms water at its outer edge.

Kansas Reefs, a coral patch with from 4 feet to 5 fathoms water
it, lies S. 55^ W. (S. 53^ W. mag.), 1 1% miles from the east end of Ram

REGALLE CAY ST. LOUIS BAY. 319

Cay; it is aboat J mile in extent, and generally breaks with 9 and 10
fathoms close to its edge. About f mile^ N. 43^ W. (N. 45° W. mag.), of
this shoal is a small coral head, with only 2 fathoms on it and deep
water all round.

Breakers and shoal patches with from 4 to 5 fathoms on them are
shown as lying east 1 J miles, S. 43° E. (S. 4»^o E. mag.), IJ miles, and N.
80O E. (N. 78^ E. mag.) J mile from Kansas Reefs.

Regalle Cay is a small bushy islet surrounded by a sand bank to the
distance of about 2()0 yards; one mile K 9o W. (N. 11^ W. mag.) of
Regalle Cay is a small islet just above the level of the sea, called
Auguille or Eel Cay.

Note. — The relative i)ositions of Ramier Cay, Anguille Cay, and
north side of Grosse Cay are not accurately known.

Ckannels. — ^The channels leading between the cays into English and
Aquiu Bays are deep and clear. That between Moriie Rouge Point and
Diamond Cay is not to be recommended for a sailing vessel, as the wind
is apt to be baffling under Mome Rouge, and the ledge north of the
Diamond is to leeward. The channel between Diamond and Grosse
Cays is to be preferred. The channel between Grosse Cay on the east
and Regalle and Anguille Gays on the west is clear and good. The pas-
sage between Ramier and Anguille Cays is to be avoided, as it leads too
near the Kansas Reef. Between Ramier and Regalle Cays vessels draw-
ing more than 10 feet should not pass, on account of a ridge of rocks
extending to the westward of the latter islet. Between Cape St.
George and Ramier Cay the channel is free of danger, but care must
be taken to keep clear of the ledge west of Ramier Cay. Entering the
bay by any of these channels the best anchorage will be found on the
north side of Grosse Cay, in 5 or 5J fathoms of water, keeping closer
to the cay than to the Haitian Shore, on account of a bank with 9 feet
of water on it, which makes out J mile to the southward from the main
land, taking care not to get south of a line joining the two points of
the northern side of Grosse Cay to avoid Dryad Shoal.

St. Louis Bay is open to the south, but to the SE. it is protected by
some small cays; the two outermost and largest of these, called Mos-
quito and Orange, lie about a mile from the shore and are f mile apart.
On the west end of Orange Cay are two remarkable hillocks, 40 and 80
feet high, which are seen from the town of Cayes just clear of the inter-
mediate i>oints. Within them are the small Cays of Rat and Taigneuse,
^^^'^d close to the shore, at J mile eastward of Bonita Point, is llenri

.et.

The town of St. Louis stands in the NE. corner of the bay, and about

nile SW. of it there is a large rock, on which stands Fort St. Louis;

d about i mile to the NW. of St. Louis, on a low point, is another

•t.

Directionfiu — In entering, keep Pascal Point, on the western shore,

)se aboard to avoid a sand bank lying off it, nearly in mid-channel.

320 HAITI.

Having cleared this, stand up the bay, and a good berth will be found
in 7 fathoms of water, 600 yards west of the old fort of St. Louis. Small
vessels may pass to the northward of the fort tor an inshore berth.

In case of necessity a vessel may enter St. Louis Bay by passing in
NE. of Mosquito Cay and close to the northward of Rat Cay, between
the latter and Taigneuse Cay. The channel is narrow, however, and
there are said to be several shoals between Eat Island and Bonita Point.

The winds from March to September are from SE. ; from September
to March from ENE. Near the coast, to the w^est of St. Louis, the wind
is NE. or east, while at the same time north of Cape Tiburon it blows
from SE.

Little Meste Bay, westward of St. Louis Bay, is merely a small inlet^
about J mile wide and a mile deep; it is open to the southward, has
good holding ground in from 4 to 6 fathoms water, and the shores are
bold.

Great Meste Bay, 2 miles w^estward of Little Meste Bay, is f mile
wide in the narrowest part and 2 miles deep; it is capable of receiving
vessels of the heaviest draft, there being 5 and 6 fathoms wat«r at its
inner part; the holding ground is good, but it is open to the southward.
Nearly in front of the entrance, however, and about IJ miles from the
shore, is the Mella Bank. It is necessary to pass round the east or west
end of the bank to enter the bay.

The eastern entrance to the bay is about f mile wide and lies between
the Almacenes Cays, near the west side of entrance to Little Meste
Bay, and the east end of the bank south of them. The west-ern entrance
is J mile wide, and formed between Toulan Point and the west end of
the bank south of it. To enter by the western passage, the coast be-
tween Paulino Point (J mile eastward of Toulan Point) and St. Rom
Point, at the west side of entrance to the bay, should be kept aboard f
then keep mid-channel into the bay. The soundings diminish gradually
from 13 to 1 J fathoms wat^r near the mouth of the river at the head of
the bay.

Mella Bank, to the northward of the cays and sand banks which
border the north coast of Vjiche Island, consists of four shoals lying
between the meridian of Toulan Point (the eastern point of the' entrance
to Flamand Bay) and that of Boyet Point (the eastern point of the
entrance to Great Meste Bay). They are all of small extent, steep-to^
and when the sun is shining brightly may be seen from aloft. It is
probable that tlie bank is still changing. The outer shoal is about IJ
miles from the shore.

The western shoal has a depth of 12 feet and lies S. 32° B. (S. 34©
mag.) about a mile from Toulan Point.

The other three shoals lie within J mile of each other. The mid(
and largest is nearly circular, about J mile in diameter, has 6 feet <
its shoalest part, and bears from Boyet Point S. 19^ W. (S. 17^ W. mai
IJ miles distant. The remaining two, with 12 feet water, bear N. 6!

FLAMAND BAY BAY OF CAYES. 321

E. (N. 670 E. mag.) and K 37o W, (N. 39© W. mag.) 600 yards from the
largest shoal.

By keeping 1^ miles off shore a vessel will pass in 7 fathoms clear of
all dangers, no shoals or rocks having been found south of this limit.
Passing i mile outside the line of the headlands wiU lead through the
channel between Mella Bank and the main, but in using this channel
the lead should be kept constantly going, as tlie soundings are very
irregular.

Flamand Bay is a narrow inlet 2^ miles in length and nearly ^ mile
in breadth. The south side of Carenero Islet is foul to the distance of
600 yards, and the east side of the entrance from Toulan Point to the
inner point, a mile northward of it, should not be approached within
200 yards. The inner point is also foul on its north side, and between
it and the opposite shore the channel is not more than ^ mile wide.
Within this the depth gradually decreases from 4J to 2 fathoms, towards
the head of the inlet, the bottom is everywhere mud, ^nd the inner part
is so well sheltered that small vessels moor in it during the hurricane
season.

As this inlet runs so far in, the temperature is very high and the
musquitoes are unbearable until the end of September. The tide
rises about 3 feet.

Tron de Forban is on the western shore close to the little village of
Benon. It is a completely sheltered cove, with from IJ to 2 fathoms of
water, called the Trou de Forban.

On going to sea from Flamand Bay vessels pass to the westward of
Vache Island and generally take a pilot, upon whom, however, but little
dependence can be placed, ai\d a vigilant lookout will be necessary.

Caballon Bay lies between Carenero Islet and Gaballon Oliffs.
Nearly in the center of the entrance of the bay there is a shoal with 2J
fEkthoms on it, and which extends 600 yards ISE. and SW., and about
200 yards in breadth ; it may be passed on either side. The west side
of the bay is steep and rocky; the best anchorage is on the ea^t side,
dose up under the mangrove trees, where the depth of 5 fathoms will
be found almost touching the shore, Oarenero Islet sheltering it from
the 8E. Water may be obtained some little distance up the River Ca-
ballon, that flows into the bay. ' .

Bay of Cayes terminates to the N£. in the Manchon de Caballon,
and to the southward by the island of Yaclie; the Manchon de Cabal-
lon is the west part of the bay of the same name and lies 7 miles to the
north of the N W. point of Vache Island, and about 3 mil es NE. of the
»wn. It is composed of three remarkable white cliffs at the extremity
)f a hill, which separates two deep ravines on the west side of Caballon
Bay. About midway between Cayes and the cliffs is the small wooded
iSlet of Compafiia, now connected with the main part of the island by a
Try reef.

The towns of Aux Cayes and Jacmel are next to that of Cape Haiti in
18402 21

322 HAITI.

oommercial and political importance. The sailing vessels come chiefly
from the United States. All European trade is performed by steamers.

Aiix Cayes has a population of 10,000 inhabitants.

The United States is repi^esented by a consular agent.

Steamers. — The Atlas line of steamers from !N"ew York, Diamond
line from Boston once a month. French and Uerman lines call here.

Port Charges.— Pilotage, $5 inwards and outwards; health visits,
$5; tonnage dues, $1 per ton register; stevedores, 20 cents per ton
stowing cargo; bill of health, $1.

Coast. — From the town the coast takes a SW. direction for about 7
miles and then bends around to the SE. and southward for 7 or 8 miles
to Abacou Point, forming the bay of Cayes. All this part of the coast
is very low, but backed at a short distance by lofty mountains. To the
northward of Abacou Point the shore is bordered by a reef which ex-
tends off . some (^istance, and several small cays and rocks lie off it;
they are named Carenage, Boeuf Islet, etc. Nearly midway between
Aux Cayes and the River Acul is the village of Torbec, 1 J miles NE. of
which is the village of Vieux Bourg, off which is the road of Cha-
teaudin.

G-reat Reef is an extensive white sand bank southward of Aux Cayes^
upon which at the NW. and SE. parts are two heads of coral partly un-
covered. These banks, extending from abreast Aux Cayes to nearly half-
way towards the island of Yache, and along the shore for one mile SW.
of Torbec, shelter the anchorages of Chateaudin. A ledge extends from
Great Reef to the NW. point of Vache Island, the depths on which are
2^ to 5 fathoms.

Chateaudin Anchorage. — ^The inner anchorage of Aux Cayes is very
limited, has only about 13 feet water, and difficult to enter or leave.
That of Chateaudin is separated from it by a narrow tongue of white
sand, which leaves the shore and joins the northern part of the Great
Reef; small vessels pass over it from one anchorage to the other. The
Chateaudin Anchorage is well sheltered and extends from Principe
Point, west of the village of Torbec, as far as Chateaudin Point. The
soundings diminish regularly from 4J^ fathoms at its southern part to
2f fathoms near the tongue of sand separating the two anchorages,
and as the slj^ore or reef is approached.

The entrance to Chateaudin Road, between the west end of Great
Reef and Maho Point, is about J mile in breadth and carries 15 feet
water. Vessels anchor in about 17 feet, sand and mud, at J mile from
the shore off the village of Torbec or that of Vieux Bourg. Those of
large tonnage anchor in 7 or 8 fathoms southward of Gompafiia Isl
In all these anchorages wood, water, bread, fresh meat, and vegetab^
are easily obtained at reasonable prices.

Caution. — The various ch arts of the bay of Cayes differ very mi]
and the hydrography of this vicinity, like that of the greater part
the coast of Haiti, is exceedingly defective.

ETRON DU PORtJ — ISLAND OF VACHE. 323

Zitron da Pore. — In the middle of Oayes Bay, and nearly midway
between the IS'W. point of Yache Island and the western shore of the
bay, is a dangerous small rocky shoal, awash, called Etron du Porc^
This shoal has 4 fathoms water (jlose to. Vessels should pass eastward
of it.

Pilots. — As Cayes Bay is not w*ell known, a stranger should have
the assistance of a pilot, but as the pilots are not well acquainted with
the locality, too much confidence should not be i)laced in them. The
signal should be made as soon as possible, and if necessary a vessel
can anchor northward of Diamond Point at the west end of Vache
Island.

The Winds in Cayes Bay are pretty regular. The land wind comes
off from the NW. and veers round gradually to the NB. until about
noon, when the sea breeze sets in from the SE. and veers to the south
towards evening.

Directions. — The anchorages in Cayes Bay may be approached by
the channel eastward of Vache Island, or by that between the island
and Abacou Point. In taking the latter channel, run down the south
and west side^ of Vache Island. The soundings between Lataniers
and Diamond Points are irregular, and in proceeding to the anchorages
off the NW. part of Vache Island, it will be prudent to keep at least
IJ miles off shore, giving Point Lataniers a good berth, and not coming
into less than 5 fathoms until abreast the NW. point 5 then haul up
eastward of Great Reef, which should be seen on the port bow and a
wide berth given to it, avoiding also the shoal patches in the channel.
The Island of Vache is separated from Abacou Point by a chan-
nel 3 miles wide, with irregular soundings. The island is about 8 miles
in length and about 2 miles in breadth. Its eastern part is low and
thickly wooded ; the western portion is composed of small detached
hills about 100 feet high, partially cleared of wood, and at the distance
of 10 or 12 miles they have the appearance of several small islets.
From the east point the south shore runs nearly straight, and is skirted
by a reef at the distance of from J to nearly ^ mile. Along the eastern
portion of the island the soundings are from 4 to 8 fathoms within J
mile of the reef; but from the middle of the island to the westward the
water is shallow, and 3 and 3 J fathoms will be Carried along at about i
mile from the shore. There are 6 and 7 fathoms water at a mile south
of the Diamond Eock, whence it decreases to the shore; the shallow
ground will generally be seen.

Lataniers Point, the SW. extreme of Vache Island, is low and
thickly wooded. Shoal water extends a considerable distance to the
SW. of the point.

Diamond Islet is not easily distinguished, being of the same color
*s Diamond Point, from which it is only distant 20 feet, and is not
easily recognized more than one mile distant.

824 HAITI.

Diamond Point is the central one of three detached white diffis in
the northwestern part of Vache Island.

Agaa Bay. — ^Between Diamond Point and the KW. point of Vache
Island there are two coves, the northern of which is called Agua Bay.

Temporary anchorage may be found about one mile oflf this part of
the island in 6 or 5^ fathoms of water, sandy bottom.

Feret Bay is about | mile eastward of the NW. point of Vache
Island, and at its eastern point of entrance is the high white islet of
Eaquette, connected to it by a reef. The bay is small. Small vesaeiA
in entering the bay should keep midway between the i>ointS; and
anchor in the middle of the bay, avoiding the white sand bank with IJ
fathoms on it, easily seen, and which borders the salient points of the
bay.

Islets and Reefs. — From Baquette Islet eastwards, the north coast
of the island is bordered by a white sand bank with several cays and
reefs. The bank extends off about ^ mile as far as Eochers Point;
thence the edge curves to the northward, westward of West Oay
which is covered with trees and IJ miles NB. of Eaquette Islet; then
round a group of islets, the most northern of which is named Great
Cay k FEau, covered with thick and bushy trees, and more than 3 miles
firom Vache. The cays of this group lie close together, and when bear-
ing N. 660.W. (N. 68° W. mag.) appear as one; it then trends in the
direction of East Cay, situated just within the edge of the reef, S". 18°
W. (K. 20° W. mag.) 4 miles (approximately) from the east point of
Vache Island. The cay is small and low, but well marked by a grove
of cocoanut trees and some fishermen's huts.

About a mile S. 21^ E. (S. 23^ E. mag.) of East Cay is a small sand
bank 5 or 6 feet above water, situated also just inside the edge of tiia
reef.

Within the cays, and between the reefs and coral heads, there are
navigable veins of deep water, which afford anchorage for smaU ves*
sels. In coming from the eastward for these anchorages keep to the
northward of the cays, and on no account should they be taken with*
out a pilot.

In passing to the eastward of Vache Island it is neoessary to keeg
at a distance of 2 miles from the island and the same distance ftt>m
tt^ reef, which is steep-to, no anchorage near, and the current set to-
wards it. The mariner should avoid being becalmed in its vicinity.

East Reef. — The edge of this reef, extending from the east point of
Vache Island round the adjacent cays, East and Great Cay a FEan to
the NW., is tolerably well defined by an almost constant break
ripple, as also by several small rocks above water. By day the n
may be approached with safety, provided a good lookout be kept, t
at night the utmost caution is requisite.

Tides. — ^The ebb stream sets strongly to the southeastward over "
shoals northward of Vache Island.

GENERAL DIRECTIONS. 325

JKTeBtexn Cliannal to Cayett. — ^The western channel to Aux Cayes
through the bay of Gayes and between the NW. part of Vache Island
and Great Beef is not used by large vessels. Shoals other than these
ahown on the plan are reported to have grown up, and the water gen-
erally to have shoaled. Several steamers having grounded, this route
is only used now by small vessels. The eastern channel is generally
preferred.

Route from the Eastward. — Approaching Gayes Bay from the east-
ward, close the coast near Mome Bouge Point (which may be known
by five white cliffs) and steer along the land, southward of the small
outlying cays, and northward of those extending off Vache Island.
Prom a i)osition about one mile northward of Grande Cay 4 PEau, steer
IT. 650 W. (N. 670 W. mag.) for Compania Island, until Tourt^relle Battery
bears west (S. 88^ W. mag.), when alter course to pass midway be-
tween this battery and a battery at the entrance of Biviere Pllet.
When the SB. extreme of Compafiia is nearly in line with white cliff's
to the northward, bring the SE. extreme of Gompafiia in line with the
center of eastern white cliff, about K. 50° E. (N. 48° E. mag.), which
mark kept on astern leads direct to the anchorage for large vessels^
which will be reached when Tourterelle bears north (N. 2o W. mag.).
Small vessels may anchor farther in. The above route carries a least
depth of 6 fathoms.

Vessels from the westward, after passing Lataniers Point, should keep
one mile from the south side of Vache Island, in which route no bottom
at 10 fathoms will be found. Bound the east point of Vache Island at
IJ miles distant, and when it bears K 88° W. (west mag.), steer N.
2o E. (north mag.) for Orange Cay. When the north point of Great
Gay a I'Eau comes in line with East Gay, bearing N. 66° W. (N. 68°
W. mag.), alter course to N. 21° W. (N. 23° W. mag.), keeping some
white cliffs in little Meste Bay on starboard bow ; continue this course
until East Gay comes in line with the NW. extreme of Vache Island
S. 810 W. (S. 790 W. mag.), then alter course K 660 W. (N. 680 W. mag.)
and proceed in as above directed.

If from the southward, steer 2 or 3 miles eastward of Vache Island,
and bear in mind that the current sets strong towards it and the
eastern reefs.

In proceeding to the eastward from Gayes Anchorage, steer S. 76^ E.
(8. 78^ E. mag.), and when East Cay bears S. 2° W. (south mag.), a
course to the southward and eastward may be shaped.

Caution. — Several shoal heads have been reported in Cayes Anchor-
age. H. M. S. Druid passed close to and over some dark patches, and,
nth the exception of one, found the discoloration to be caused by dark

eeds growing on the bottom; 5 fathoms was the least water obtained,
.i will be prudent, however, to avoid the dark patches as much as pos*
lible.

In beating out of the bay the western shore southward of Acul
Uver is free from danger, and there are from 7 to 10 fathoms water at

326 HAITI.

I mile from it. Do not stand nearer Btron du Pore than 7 fathoms.
The shoal patches do not always show, but a good lookout should be
kept for them and the lead going.

Abacoa Point is low and skirted by a reef, said by some authorities
to extend off nearly one mile, but Capt. Owen, R. N., says only 200
yards. Commander Haxton, U. S. N., reports a small reef stretching
off shore between Gravies and Abacou points, and extending 1 J miles
off shore, but with deep water inshore of it. Until a more thorough
examination is made, the shore between these two points should not be
approached.

Diablo Bay. — Between Point Abacou and Gravies Point there are
two small bays, called Port Konnettes and Diablo Bay. The latter is
immediately west of Abacou Point, and has a small sandy beach at the
head of the bay, over which a brook empties. The western point is
bluff", and skirted by a reef to the distance of 400 yards.

Port Nonnettes is a little inlet open to the southward, and, like
Diablo Bay, has a sandy beach and the mouth of a small stream at its
head. Both points of the entrance are bordered by reefs to the dis-
tance of 400 yards. Coasters And temporary shelter from the prevail-
ing winds in these two bays. Port Nonnettes is 3.J miles eastward of
Point Gravois.

Gravois Point. — See page 291.

CHAPTER X.

MONA PASSAGE AND THE ISLAND OF PUERTO BICO,

The Mona Passage. — The channel between the islands of Haiti and
Puerto Bico is clear of obstructions or dangers and is called the Mona
Passage, from the small island of that name lying midway between
Gax>e Bojo and Saona Island.

Mona Island. — Its summit is nearly fiat, with a few bushes and
trees, and it may be seen from a distance of 18 miles. It is of volcanio
formation; its north, east, and NW. sides consisting of high perpendic-
ular bluffs, afford no landing place. On the west and SE. sides are a
number of caves forming entrances to extensive subterraneous galleries
which run in every direction. The surface of the island is composed
of calcareous slate-oolored rock, full of holes containing soil in which
the trees and brush- wood grow.

There are numbers of wild goats and hogs on the island, and turtles
during the season.

A ridge of rocks run off the 8W. point, and a vessel should not
come inside the depth of 8 fathoms of water, which will be found at the
distance of ^ mile.

The eastern and northern parts of the island are said to be clear of
danger and steep-to. The NW. end terminates in a promontory, and
its extremity rises to a lofty perpendicular rock, which when on a bear-
ing N. 6o E. (N. 6o E. mag.), or 9. 6o W. (S. 6^ W. mag.), has the appear-
ance of a sail, with Mojito open westward of it. From this end, named
Gape Barrionuevo, round by south to the east end, the island is bor-
dered by a bank of white sand and rocks with 18 to 3^ fathoms water
on it. It extends off 1^ miles between capes Barrionuevo and Julia,
also called Gaigo 6 no Gaigo Point (I fall, or I don't fall). It takes the
latter name from an enormous rock on its summit which is very curi-
ously balanced and threatens every moment to fall. Between Gape
Fulia and the east end of the island the bank extends off ^ mile.

Santa Isabella Bay is called by the fishermen Uvero Bay. The
bottom is of sand, but there are so many rocks that vessels are apt to
'ose their anchors. Vessels can stand in without risk t(» a depth of 6
o 8 fathoms and then anchor. The holding ground, however, is bad,
md a sea always sets in, so that a vessel must be ready to put to sea as
oon as there is any sign of a hurricane from the west or when the
'3uth or SE. winds set in.

327

328 MONA PASSAGE.

El Sardinero is the safer anchorage. It is only worthy of the name
daring the season of southerly ipvinds. The sea in it is then smooth, as
it is sheltered by Arenas Point and the spit which makes out to the
westward from the latter. The bottom throughout the anchorage is
white sand, without specks, and the depth from 8 to 12 fathoms. Still
it must be remembered that outside of the shoal and on the parallel of
Gape Barrionuevo the bottom is rocky and the water very deep; hence
it is necessary to stand well into the bight, where the bittom is white,
without being alarmed at the rocky barrier at its head.

Landing. — In both Santa Isabella and Sardinero ^nchora^es the
beaches are so foul that a landing can only be effected with great risk.
In Santa Isabella Bay, however, there are several boat channels
through the reef or rocky heads, and in the* center of the bay, SE. of
the western point, there is a clear beach about 150 yards in lengthy
where a landing may be effected under favorable circumstances by
veering the boat in from a grapnel. The x)oiiits forming this bay are
shallow. These landings are well known to the fishermen, and with
their assistance a boat may laud, unless the sea is very heavy. During*
the season of the Northers both of the above anchorages are untenable,
as the wind from the gulf and the current from the passage cause a
tremendous sea.

Water. — A little to the right of the landing in Santa Isabella Bay-
there is a pathway leading to water under the southern cliffs, and here
firewood will be found. Indifferent drinking water will also be found
in the lower parts of the grottoes.

Light. — A light is proposed on the east end, east point, of Mona
Island. The light will be a flashing white light, showing flashes every
2 minutes. It will be elevated 164 feet above the sea, and should be
visible, in clear weather, from a distance of 22 miles.

Tides. — The flood sets N. by E. and the ebb S. by W. at the rate of J
mile an hour. It is high water full and change at the island at 6h. 15m.
and the rise is about 2 feet.

Monito lies about 24 miles N. 22o W. (N. 22o W. mag.) of Mona, with,
a clear channel between them. This little islet is somewhat cii*culary
about 400 yards in diameter, and its sides are composed of steep, in-
accessible cliffs, but much lower than those of Mona. It is quite bar-
ren, but frequented by numerous flocks of sea birds. At a distance its
summit has the appearance of a shoemaker's last. There are 20 and 25
fathoms water at 100 yards from the west side of the islet. The only
place where landing can be effected under favorable circumstances, but
with much risk to the boat, is at a rock on the west side of the isl<
Here, in a small angle or indentation of the shore, vessels have anchorc
for guano in a depth of from 30 to 36 fathoms.

Desecheo or Zacheo, the other island in this passage, lies N. 51
E. (N. 620 E. mag.) about 27 miles from the KE. point of Mona. T
island is about a mile in circumference, and almost entirely compos

MONA PASSAGE DIRECTIONS PUERTO RICO. 82&

of a remarkably lofty wooded hill^ whioh may be seen at a distance of
36 miles. The few dangers which lie close to the shore always show
themselves, and are steep-to. When seen from the SW. the south side
appears very precipitous; but from the northward it appears more
lengthened out, and it will be found a very useful object in navigating
the western side of Puerto Bico. There is no anchorage under it.

Cnrreiits. — Near the sides of the Mona Passage there is generally a
very perceptible current, frequently running to the north, and XW. with
a velocity of one or 1^ miles an hour. In the middle of the passage
the general direction ot the current is with the wind to the SW. The
tides, also, in some parts of the passage, run with great force, especially
to the southward of Cape Egano, where, during the month of May, a
velocity of 3^ miles an hour has been experienced. The flood runs 9
hours to the SW., and the ebb to the NB. during 3 hours. Sometimes
precisely the contrary duration occurs, and the tides have been known
to run 6 hours in eacli direction. These irregularities necessitate great
caution in navigating, and have doubtless been the cause of very many
disasters.

DiractionB. — The Mona Passage is much frequented by vessels bound
from ports in the United States to the Spanish Main and neighboring
islands, and by those from Europe bound to Jamaica and ports on the
southern coasts of Haiti and Ouba. Especially is this the case in the
winter, when the wind is apt to blow from the northward of east.

It has already been stated that there is no danger to fear this pas-
sage; but great caution must be used in the vicinity of Saona Island,
which is low and foul, and a berth of at least (> miles should be given
it. Squalls are of frequent occurrence, especially in summer. They
blow sometimes with hurricane force for a short time, and although
they often rise rapidly, always give warning of their approach.

Puerto Rico. — The island in I5()9 was invaded by Spaniards from
Haiti, and has since that time been a Spanish colony.

A range of lofty mountains called Luquillo, covered with wood and
intersected by numerous deep ravines, runs through the center of the
island, beginning near the NE. point and terminatiug south of Arecibo
in a hill called the Silla de C<aballo. The highest peak of this chain
(3,714 feet high) is visible in clear weather from a distance of 68 miles;
it forms an excellent landmark. It is called El Yuuque, or Anvil Peak.
In the interior are extensive Savannas, on which large herds of cattle
^ve pastured, and along the coasts are tracts of* level fertile land.

The principal ports of export are San Juan and Arecibo on the north
Dast, Aguadilla and Mayaguez on the west, Guanica, Guayanill%
'once and Arrayo on the south, and Humacao and Naguabo on the east
^oast.

The coasts of the island are by no means well known, and urgently

eed to be resurveyed.

330 PUERTO RICO.

On the eastern coast of Puerto Eico tbere are nine small rivers emp-
tying into the sea, and several ports frequented by small vessels to load
with sugar and molasses. The instructions which can be given for this
•coast are so deficient that it would be by no means safe for a stranger
to cruise here without a pilot, who may be obtained at San Juan, St.
Thomas, or sometimes at Port Mula, on Orab Island.

The population in 1880 was 666,000.

Hurricanes. — Although the island is south of the usual track of
hurricanes it has been severely visited by them. The cyclones of 1782
and 1825 were especially destructive.

Custom Regulations. — A decree was issued in 1877 making it
compulsory that all goods be consigned to an established merchant; so
that merchants only can clear a package through the customhouse,
and not then unless it is consigned to them. The rules concerning
manifests are very stringent, and are in accord with those of Cuba.
Fines from $25 to $1,000 may be inflicteti for breach of custom regu-
lations, and entire confiscation of ship and cargo.

Coal when carried as sale cargo is exempt from tonnage or discharge
duties; other articles on board, however small, will subject the whole
<3argo to duties.

A bill of health certified by Spanish consul will be required. Ves-
sels failing to present a manifest in the required form will be fined
«500.

Fort Charges. — Interpreter, $4. Stamped paper, $8.75. Tonna^
dues, $1 per ton of cargo, gross. Clearance, $1 to $8, according to
value of cargo outwards. Sanitary visit: Vessels of 200 tons, $10;
250 tons, $11; 300 tons, $12; 350 tons, $13; 400 tons, $14; above 450
tons, $16. Labor costs $1 per day. Ballast, 50 cents per ton dis-
charging. $1 per day for gdard while marking.

Light. — On Cai)e San Juan a fixed white light, with red flash every
three minutes, is shown at an elevation of 266 feet, and should be visible
18 miles. Thelighthouse is cylindrical and dark gray in color.

Cordilleras. — A chain of islets and reefs, called the Cordilleras, ex-
tends from Cape San Juan for 11 miles. The eastern group of these
islets is called the Barriles. They are steep-to, and between them and
the Washer and Cactus Cays there is a channel 2 miles wide and 10
fathoms deep.

Barriles Passage. — With a SE. wind, a vessel bound northward
may easily pass to the eastward of Puerto Rico and through this chan-
nel. It is also available for vessels bound from the north to any of i'
ports on the east or south coasts with !N'E. winds.

Hermanos Passage, is formed between the Barriles and the H*
manos Bocks, and carries about 10 fathoms water.

San Juan Channel, between the head of the same name and t
western extremity of the Cordilleras, is about f mile in breadth, an<
or 10 fathoms deep. This is, in general, the best channel for V09«

PORT FAJARDO.

from the east coast of Puerto Rico with the wind from the NE. The
western extremity of the Cordilleras, which forms the north boundary
of the channel, is composed of two groups of rocks a little elevated^
the Ciisternmost of the two is named Icacos, and the western group
Cucaracha; the latter is nearly on the meridian of San Juan Cape.

Port Figardo lies south of Cape San Juan. It is between Cueva
Point on the north and Barrancas Point on the south, and has a depth
of from IG to 23 feet.

On a point abreast of Obispo Islet is a battery, and a few houses are
scattered along the beach. The town* of Fajardo is IJ miles inland.
Population, about 3,000.

The United States is represented by a consular agent.

This port is only a narrow canal, sheltered from easterly winds by
three islets, called Obispo, Zancudo, and Bamos, and also by a reef be-
tween the two latter having 6 to 12 feet of water on it, where the sea
breaks in some places. The northern and southern endi^ of this reef
form, with the islets of Zancudo and Ramos, two narrow cuts, having
23 feet of water. The southern passage is the widest, but neither should
be attempted except in case of emergency. *

There are two entrances into Fajardo. Through the southern one a
depth of 18 feet may be carried, and it is entirely clear. It lies between
Point Barrancas and Ramos Islet.

The northern entrance is between Point Oueva and Obispo Islet, and
has from 4 to 6 fathoms of water. Nearly in the middle of the passage
is a coral patch, with only 6 feet of water on it, which requires great
care to avoid. Although narrow, this channel is the best to enter by.

In approaching Fajardo from the eastward through the channel be-
tween Culebra and Crab Islands, the navigator may choose from three
channels: Ist, between tlie Cordilleras Reef and Palominos Island; 24,
between this island and the Largo Bank; and, 3d, between the Largo
Bank and the chain of islets and reefs extending to the eastward, called
Piraguas and the Lavanderas.

Although the first named channel is the narrowest, it seems best,
from the fact that all its dangers are apparent to the eye. With the
wind from the NE. it leads to windward of the port. The depth in this
channel is from 8 to 12 fathoms; in the second from 7 to 11 fathoms,
and in the third from 6 to S fathoms.

Pilots cruise off the NE. point. To signal for them, hoist national
colors at foremast head. Pilotage (compulsory), $5 for vessel, without
*egard to size. For shifting berth, $2.

Quarantine Dues. — If vessel is quarantined, $2 for each visit. Port
irarden's fees, $4.

Supplies. — Water, |1 per puncheon alongside. Yessel's stores,
«»rce and dear. Coal, $5 to $6 per ton alongside. Commissions on
>Uecting freight, 2 J per cent; on disbursements, 2 J per cent; on pro-
iring freight, 5 per cent.

v'J

lAl

»♦ -^i

:'i^

332 PUERTO RICO.

Middle Channel — To pass through this channel between Palominos
and Largo Bank, the track lies about one mile south of PalominoB
Island.

The Sonthem Channel is bounded on the north by the Largo Bank,
and on the south by the Piraguas and Lavanderas Bocks and the Pinero
Islands, with a width of 2 miles. In using it, keep Soldiers Point on
Culebra Island, bearing S. 87° E. (S. 86<^ E. mag.) until the center of
Palominos Island bears N. 17^ B. (N. 18^ E. mag.) ; the Largo Bank
will have then been passed, and a course maybe shaped towards Ramos
Island to enter Port Fajardo by the southern passage.

Palominos is of moderate height, and covered with trees. Its shores
are foul to the distance of J mile. Anchorage may be found about one
mile ott' its western shore in 6 or 7 fathoms of wat#r.

Largo Bank is narrow and steep-to. The sea generally breaks on
it. As before stated, this bank forms the south side of the middle
channel of approach to Port Fajardo.

Between Largo Bank and Bamos Islet there is a clear channel with
7 fathoms of water in it. The least water on the bank is said to be 13
feet.

Great and Little Pinero Islands are to the northward of Puerca
Point, the eastern extreme of Puerto Bico. Farther to the eastward,
a^d forming a chain of dangers, are the Lavanderas Bocks and the Pir-
aguas. There are deep channels among these rocks and shoals, but
without a pilot it would be prudent to pass to the eastward of them.

The Pineros are two small islets, covered with wood and lying be-
tween Medio Mundo Point and Puerca Point, which is also low and
wooded. On the western side of Great Pinero is a reef which extends
northerly to Medio Mundo Point, forming a bar on which there is only
13 feet of water. The channel between this islet and the main land is
only fit for boats.

Between the reef which extends from the shore between these two
points on one side and the reef skirting Great Pinero Island on the
other there is a narrow bight where small vessels may anchor, but it is
unsheltered to the SE. and south.

Little Pifiero is nearly joined to the south end of Great Pifiero by a
reef, on which there are 13 feet of water. Near the eastern side of this
islet there is a small detached rock, above water.

The Descubridor is a small head between Little Pinero and the
Ohinchorros lying about 1^ miles southward of the western Lavandera.
This danger is marked on the charts as of doubtful existence.

The Lavanderas are two small rocks on which the sea genera
breaks. They are steep- to, with 5 fathoms of water close to them, a
about 1^ miles apart.

ThePiragnas are two smaU rocky islets, 1^ miles apart; they ma
be seen at a considerable distance, are steep-to, and have a clear pr
sage between them, with not less than 5 fathoms of water.

THE CHINCH0RR08 — ^PIEDRAS BANK. 333

The Chinchorros are two dangerous shoals. The northern shoal is
small and has 13 feet of water on it, with 5 fathoms all around. The
douthem shoal is | mile long and i mile across, with only 5 feet of water
on it; it is also steep-to. On both these shoals the sea generally breaks.

A vessel may pass between these dangers or between the northern
shoal and the Piraguas. A more prudent course would be, however,
south of all of them. Soldiers Point, kept on a bearing of N. 69^ E.
(N. 70° E. mag.) will lead clear of these dangers.

Caution. — Other shoals have been reported in this locality.

Bahia Honda. — ^This bay, a little westward of the south point of
Puerca Island, is about a mile in extent, and open to the soi^thward;
it is protected by reefe which contract the channel from a mile to about
i mile in breadth. The eastern side of the bay terminates to the south-
ward in a low sharp point; the west side in a bold headland, crowned
by a little hill; near the latter a dry rock will be seen on the reef, and
off the former the Gabras, two small flat islets, covered with brush-
wood. The reef, which bars the entrance, skirts also the interior of the
bay, and some of the patches within have only 13 feet water ctn them,
but these and the reef are easily seen. The River Aguas Claras flows
into the NB. comer of the bay.

DirectionB. — To enter Bahia Honda, the south point of Puerca
Island should be brought to bear about TS. 12^ W. (N. 11° W. mag.)
when this course will lead up toward the entrance of the harbor. In
entering, the eye from aloft will be the best guide for avoiding the reefs
and shoal patches, and for picking out a clear spot for anchoring.

The anchorage has from 5 to 8 fathoms of water, but as it is open to
the southward and is quite limited in extent, a large vessel had better
lie outside in from 6 to 8 fathoms.

Algodon Bay. — ^From the western point of Bahia Honda to Lima
Point? the coast forms a large bay, in the middle of which is the islet of
Algodon, moderately high, and near the coast. In this bay, which is
sheltered from SW. round to NE., by way of north, the depth of water
varies from 16 to 13 feet near the shore. Three small streams empty
into it.

Just outside of a line drawn from Lima Point to Algodon Point are
three shoals.

Algodon Bank nearly i mile in extent, with 2 fathoms water on it,
lies with its eastern part on the meridian of the west part of Algodon
Point, which is a large round headland, and from the southwai^d pre-
sents a face nearly ^ mile in extent. The south part of the bank is
about i mile from the point; the channel between is 400 yards in
breadth, with 3 J to 4 J fathoms water. In steering through, haul round
Algodon Point, and anchor in 16 feet water.

Piedras Bank is separated from the Algodon Bank by a narrow
channel. The position of this bank is doubtfril, but it is supposed to
Ue with Algodou Islet, bearing between N. 52^ W. (N. 51^ W. mag.),
and N. 710 W. (X. 70o W. mag.).

334 PUERTO RICO.

Lima Bank, a rocky ledge nearly awash, the sea generally break*
ing upon it, lies about f mile S. 80^ E. (S. 79^ E. mag.) of Lima Point
It is about 000 yards in diameter. About 1 J miles S. >3o E. (S. 42° B.
mag.) of Algodon Islet there is said to be a sunken rock.

There is a good channel between the Lima and Piedras Banks, in
which the least depth of water is 10 feet, but as the position of the fore-
going dangers can not be accurately given, the neighborhood must be
approached with great caution.

The Port of Nagaabo lies between Lima Point and Santiago Gay.
One and a half miles west of Lima Point the River Naguabo empties.
On its western bank is the little village of Ucaris, off which, in the
mouth of the river, there is anchorage for a few coasters, with the wind
from SW. round by north to east. Large quantities of cattle are ex-
X)orted from here to the other islands. The town of ]^aguabo lies 2 nules
inland.

The United States is represented by a consular agent.

Dues. — Tonnage dues, §1 per ton; anchorage, $4; interpreter and
doctor, $12; pilot and port captain, $16. These dues are for a vessel
of 280 tons.

Santiago Cay is small and of moderate height. From its SE. side
a reef extends in a SE. direction to the distance of one mile and in some
parts is nearly dry. Its northern shore is perfectly clear. Oandeleros
Point may be known by the little hill upon it, and between the point
and the islet is Puerto Humacao.

Candaleros Point is bordered by a reef extending off a short dis-
tance. About one mile north of the mouth of the Biver Humacao,
which empties into the bay, are two small islets called the Morrillos.

'So trustworthy directions can be given for the anchorage.

Humacao. — The town of Humacao is 2} miles inland, on the river of
the same name.

Dues. — ^Pilot, in and out and entry, $36; interpreter and stamps^
f 12; anchorage and port captain, $26.50. These dues are for a vessd
of 280 tons.

In approaching either Naguabo or Humacao, the best route is south
of Crab Island.

loatcoB Bay, south of Humacao, lies between Oandeleros Point and
Icacos Point.

Port 7abucoa. — Icacos Point is nearly 2 miles southward of that of
Oandeleros, and may be known by a small rocky islet near it. Port
Yabucoa is between Guallane Point, which is a little southward of th"^
of Icacos, and Yeguas Point further on. The River Ouallane here rr
into the sea. The village of Yabucoa stands about 2 miles in the in,
rior, nearly abreast the west end of Crab Island.

Port Maunabo is formed by Oape Mala Pascua, the SB. end
Puerto Rico, on the south, and Tuna Point on the north. The town
situated some miles in the interior, on the borders of the river whi
empties itself into the port.

GENERAL DIRECTIONS. 335

«•

■li

Oeneral Directions. — The sea on the east coast of Puerto Bico is ?,

generally smooth, so that vessels may lie comfortably in the anchor*
ages. On leaving them, time will be saved by passing out through the '^
Barriles or Hermanos Passage instead of running round the west end of
Puerto Rico and out through the Mona Passage. Being off the SB.
Coast of Puerto Rico and near the entrance to the channel formed by it
and Arenas Banks, when standing toward the Lima Bank, the west
X>oint of Baliia Honda should not be brought eastward of iT. 27^ E. (N..
28° E. mag.). When approiiching the north end of the Arenas Reef, in
standing to the southward do not open out Cape Mala Pascua off Na- fi

ranjo Point. When El Yunque or Anvil Peak is shut in with the hill
on the west point of Bahia Honda a vessel will be to the eastward of
the Arenas Reef, and the southern boards may be prolonged.

Do not, however, bring Cape Mala Pascua to the westward of S. 64<>
W. (8. %o^ W. mag.), which will avoid the Musquito, Corona, and Ca-
ballo Blanco Banks, which lie off the north shore of Crab Island, in the
neighborhood of Port Mula, and on which the sea does not always
break. In standing to the northward, go no farther than to bring West
Mountain, St. Thomas, in one with Soldiers Point, Culebra, N. 75^ E..
(N. 76^ E. mag.), until to windward of the South Chinchorro Bank,
which lies with the south point of Palominos in one with the western-
most Piraguas. When the latter is in one with Zancudo Islet, N". 61°
W. (N. 50O W. mag.), a vessel will be to the eastward of the Chinchor-
ros and eastward of the narrowest and most dangerous part of this
channel, and may then work to windward without fear.

When sufficiently far to the eastward, a vessel may pass out through
the channel between the Barriles and Hermanos Islets or between
Icacos, Cucarachas (the westernmost of the Cordillera),, and San Juan
Head, according as the wind may be to the northward or southward of
east. The last being the westernmost, she may proceed through it as
soon as she has rounded the eastern Piraguas, which, however, must
be given a wide berth.

With the wind from the NE. a vessel may beat through in a day and
a half, and from the SE. may run through in half a day.

With a pilot it may be accomplished in much less time, as follows;

Having cleared the north extreme of Arenas Bank, steer to the north-
ward, so as to pass between the western Lavanderas and the Little
PiBero, or between the Lavanderas, on which the sea always breaks.
Steer east or west of the Largo Bank, and thence west of Palominos,
and through the channel by San Juan Head; but to do this the wind
should be to the southward of east. In passing between the Little
Piiiero and the western Lavanderas, bring the outer extremity of San
Juan Head on a N. 18^ W. (X, 17^ W. mag.) bearing, which course wiUlead
to the westward of Largo Bank and close up to the head. In taking
this route the position assigned to the doubtful Descubridor Bank, said
to be about south IJ miles from the western Lavandera and about the
same distance from Little Pifiero, should be carefully avoided.

336 PUERTO RICO.

These directions, however imperfect, will serve to point oat the mo4t
prominent dangers and at the same time warn strangers not to get
entangled among them without the assistance of a pilot.

The Tides on the eastern coast of Paerto Bico ran with great strengtili
to the NE. 7 hoars and to the SE. 5 hours.

The North Coast of Paerto Rioo is ragged and uneven; itrons
in a nearly straight line east and west, and between San Juan Head
and Port San Juan presents no shelter whatever. San Juan Head slox>68
gradually from the summit of the hills to the sea and terminates in a
low, but clearly defined point; for about 14 miles westward from the
liead, the coast is composed of dark, rugged looking cliffs, breaking
•down fh)m the mountain side, but as the hills turn inward the land
becomes low and undulating and appears to be well cultivated, many
chimneys of steam sugar-mills being seen above the trees. From off
the west end of this high and cliffy portion of the coast, the fortifica-
tions and part of the city of San Juan will be seen. The shore appears
to be skirted by a reef, inclosing numerous small cays and islets, rove
which the sea breaks violently, and it should not be approached within
the distance of 4 miles.

A small rock, with 14 feet ovej* it and 5 and 6 fathoms around, is
said to exist about 20 miles eastward of Port San Juan and 3 miles oif
shore.

Los Embarcaderos Point will not be noticeable until well to the
westward of it, when it will be seen projecting, low and covered with
trees.

From Luquillo to the Loisa Eiver the coast is low, with a range of
hillocks 2 or 3 miles inland; back of Loisa is a hill, which, seen from
the eastward, looks like an island. Between the Herrero and Loisa
Eivers and between Vacia Telegas and Maldonado Points are white
sandy beaches.

Vacia Telegas Point is formed by two low bluffs, covered witii
trees. Maldonado Point has the appearance from the eastward of an
island.

Monro of San Jnan will be easily recognized by the lighthouse.
When within 5 miles of the entrance Cabras Island will open out; upon
it are several buildings, and off the eastern end of it is the wreck of a
steamer.

Port San Jnan. — About 30 miles west of San Juan Head is the
harbor and city of San Juan. The city is well laid out and is one of
the healthiest cities in the West Indies. It is situated on Morro Island.
which forms the north side of the harbor, and is separated firom f
mainland by a narrow creek, called the channel of San Antonio.

The city is almost hidden from seaward by the high land on t
northern shore.

The population is about 20,000. The sanitary condition of the ci
is good. The streets are clean and the people orderly.

PORT SAN JUAN SAN JUAN HARBOR. 337

The autborities to visit are the captain-general and the commodore
of the station.

The United States is represented by a consul and vice-consul.

Coal can be had in any quantity. The amount usually on hand is
about 3,000 tons and costs $9 per ton. It is transferred to the ship by
lighters, which hold about 10 tons each.

ProviBions can be had; beef is quite poor; vegetables: are good and
quite cheap. '

Water. — Either spring or rain water can be had at a cost of one
cent per gallon. There are two water-boats.

Quarantine is strict and well maintained. There is a quarantine
station on an island. A health officer boards all vessels.

There are three hospitals: one military, which is for the use of the
soldiers, and two private, which are small and cost $2 per day. For
subscribers, only $1 per day.

Steamers of the Lopez line &om Havana to Liverpool, thre^times a
a month; to Bremen, three times a month; Barcelona, four times a
month; and the Atlas line.

Telegraph. — ^Thereis cable communication with St. Thomas; also
a telegraph line connecting the principal places on the island.

Customs duties are high; nearly everything is t^^xed.

Pilots are efficient, but are not necessary for a steamer. Pilotage is
$17 iu and out and $4 for moving a ship in the harbor.

Lifeboat. — A lifeboat and life-saving apparatus have be«n estab<
lished at San Juan.

Light. — ^The lighthouse on Morro Point exhibits a fixed light having
a flash of five seconds duration every minute. The light is elevated 171
feet above the sea and should be visible 18 miles.

A Semaphore is erected in the Morro Fort, with which vessels may
communicate by using the International code of signals: A black ball
is hoisted on the gaff of the signal mast to indicate the probable ap-
proach of a storm.

San Juan Harbor. — ^Towards the east and south the harbor is shel-
tered by the low swampy land of Puerto Eico, and on the west* by the
Gabras Islands and the shallow banks which connect them to the
shore. The Cabras consist of four small islets and two small detached
rocks close off their east end, the nearest of which lies 800 yards west-
ward of the Morro Point; foul ground extends for nearly 400 yards off
them. On Cabras Island (the largest) are two large hospital dwellings,
and on the southernmost islet, called Canuelo, there is a fort which
commands the entrance. Between the Moito and the Gabras the chan-
nel into the port is barred, and with strong northerly winds it breaks
and becomes dangerous, although it carries a depth of from 4^ to 5^
fathoms.

Off Morro Island, at the eastern point of entrance, the ground is foul
for about 200 yards, the eastern side of the channel being marked by a
18402 ^22

338 PUERTO RICO.

red buoy moored in 17 feet of water on the edge of the bank called St
Helena Shoal. The channel is here little more than 300 yards wide, its
western edge being unmarked except by a wreck (of a steamer).
Within this edge the western bank sweeps round, forming a deep bight,
terminating in a sharp point at the Tablazo Shoal, on which is a red
buoy, and farther in on the same side of the channel there is another
red buoy.

St. Augustine Shoal also makes out from Morro Island to about 200
yards from the shore, nearly abreast of San Juan Gate. Its edge \a
marked by a red buoy.

Vessels of large draft, or those intending to make but a short stay,
wiU find the most convenient anchorage between the St. Augustine
and Tablazo Shoals, abreast of St. Juan Gat«.

The Puntilla Shoal extends about 300 yards southward of the sandy
point of that name; the channel here is about 250 yards across, withf3J^
to 6 fathoms water, its weather side being the deepest.

To the eastward of these sand spits is the inner port, with a depth of
from 3^ to 4J fathoms, and quite sec/ure against all winds, but the
water is very foul, owing to the number of sewers emptying into it.
The Punta Larga Shoal is marked by three red buoys; there is also one
on the northern edge of the Anegado Shoal. There are two mooring
buoys for the English and French mail steamers, and in the inner hax-
bor, eastward of the arsenal, is another mooring buoy for Spanish
ships of war. Yufri Shoal has been dredged to a least depth of 25
feet.

The inner channel has, it is stated by various authorities, filled up con-
siderably of late years, and there is probably less water there than is
marked on the charts.

DirectionB. — ^Vessels entering this port are recommended to take a
pUot, as dependence can not always be placed on the buoys marking
the shoals being in position; and as vessels are seldom boarded by a
pilot till within the harbor entrance, caution should be specially observed
regarding the buoy intended to mark the SW. extreme of St. Helena
Shoal, dast side of entrance to the port. This buoy has at times drifted,
and vessels run into danger.

Approaching from the eastward, run down the north side of the island
at the distance of not less than 3 miles, until Salinas Point comes a
little open to the northward of Great Gabras Island; keep on this line
until the mouth of the harbor comes open, when steer for it, giving the
Morro Point a berth of a good 200 yards, and having rounded the buoy
on St. Helena Shoal, haul up for the anchorage abreast San Juan Gat
with the wind well to the northward this may be gained, but should
be southerly, having passed the Morro, shoot as far in as possible ai
anchor, towing or warping up when the wind falls. With the wii
strong from the northward the sea on the bar frequently breaks ar
becomes dangerous. On account of the difficulty of steerage great ca

INNER HABfiOR ARECIBO RIVER. 339

taon must be used. In a sailing vessel, a pilot will be necessary for the
inner port, where the holding gronnd is excellent, and the land east-
ward of the town being low, the benefit of the cool trade wind is felt,
bnt, as before stated, the water is foul. ISo good leading mark can be
givien for the narrow channel between the out^r anchorage and the
Pnntilla Shoal, ^nd as the water is muddy, it cannot be distinguished
by eye.

Inner Harbor. — The chaunel to the iuner harbor is marked by three
red buoys on the port hand and two small light-red buoys on the star-
board hand. From the outer harbor the passage to the inner harbor
will look puzzling to a stranger, as more than this number of buoys will
be visible.

To enter the iuner harbor, steer to pass the red buoy off San Juan
Gate at 100 yards distance, and then between the red barrel buoy off
the Barrio de la Pnntilla and the two conical4ight-red buoys on Tablazo
Shoal, keeping well over to the port hand. When abreast the inner
conical buoy, the barrel buoy oft' the end of Pnntilla Shoal will not fail
to be recognized, and it must be passed close- to on the yyovt hand, and
two small red buoys on Punta Largo Shoal, off the city, brought imme-
diately on the starboard bow, to avoid going on that shoal. Moor
with open hawse to the NW. in tl^e outer, and to the NB. in the inner
harbor.

' Tides. — It is high water, fiill and change, in port St. Juan at 8h. 2m. ;
springs rise about IJ feet.

Coast. — The north coast of Puerto Bico from San Juan to Arecibo,
a distance of 33 miles, affords only indifferent anchorages, of which
Manati is the best. ^

Manati River. — Ooasters and other vessels which ship the produce
of this coast anchor either at the mouth of the river, where there is no
shelter and where landing is impracticable in bad weather, or at Pal-
mas Altas, which is^nore secure with ordinary winds. In fair weather
the coast may be approached within a mile, in depths varying from 16
to 26 fathoms,

Tortngnero is Ismail town on the shore, about 20 miles westward
of Port San Juan. This part of the coast as far as Arecibo should not
be approached within 3 miles.

Arecibo River, having its outlet east of the town of that name, has
3 feet of water on its bar. When much flooded the river forms another
channel to the westward ; but this entrance is always dangerous on
account of the reefs which skirt tliat part of the coast. The river rises
in the mountain chain which traverses the island in an east and west
direction; and between Utuado, a town near its source, and Arecibo,
a considerable trade in provisions is carried on by means of rafts.

Between Arecibo and Aguadilla the coast affords no shelter even for
coasting vessels.

340 PUERTO RICO.

•

Arecibo is a small reef harbor of considerable commercial importance,
about 12 miles westward of Tortuguero, but in the winter season it is
only safe for small vessels that can get inside the reef. At that x>eriod
vessels of large draft will find anchorage on the bank, about 2 miles off
shore, but they will ride heavily and must be prepared to slip the
moment the wind threatens to veer to the northward or westward. In
the months of April, May, June, and July vessels of moderate draft
may venture farther in, and anchor under the reef in from about 3J to
4 fathoms water.

The town stands on the western side of the bay, and is protected by
a circular fort to the eastward of it. About a mile to windward of the
town a tower and signal post will be seen on a steep hill. Near the
center of the reef is the cut or channel for small vessels, and at the east
end, between it and the cliff, there is a passage for boats.

There is a rivulet of excellent water, deep enough to admit launches^
at the liiTB. end of the bay, near the town of Arecibo.

Population is 8,000.

.The United States is represented by a consular agent.

Port Charges. — For a vessel of 226 tons, with ballast in and cargo
out, the expenses were $408.

Coast. — From Arecibo to Point Agujerada, 24 miles to the west-
ward of it, the northern coast of the island is flat, low, and sandy. It
there takes a SW. direction for a mile, and is formed of bold, rocky
cliffs. Bruquen Point may be rounded within a mile, where the depth
will be from 20 to 25 fathoms; but the coast here is fringed with reef,
and must be cautiously approached.

Light. — From a red masonry lighthouse on Bruquen Point is exhib-
ited, at an elevation of 65 feet, a light visible 14 ■ miles. The light is
flashing red and white alternately every J minute, and is reported
irregular.

West Coast — From Bruquen Point the coast curves outward to the
SW. for about a mile, and again becomes low and sandy as far as
Penas Blancas Point, which is covered with trees.

Agaadilla Bay. — On the northern shore of this bay is the town of

San Carlos de Aguadilla, on the banks of the river from which it takes

its name.
Toward the southern part of the bay is tlie village of San Francisco.

The town of San Carlos is an excellent place to obtain water and all
kinds of provisions.

Vessels of any size may anchor here with ordinary wind, but durin,
the winter months a heavy swell rolls into the bay. The only danger
are the reef off Peiias Blancas, and the sand bars at the mouths of th(
small streams, which extend ott* about 400 yards.

A narrow bank of soundings, about i mile wide and very steep-to.
skirts the shore. In anchoring, be careful not to do so too near the
edge of the bank, as a vessel is liable to drag off. In the wiivter time ii

RINCON BAY — MAYAGUEZ BAY. 341

would be prudent to be prep^^red to go to sea at once upon any indica-
tion of a shift of wind to the north or NW.

A goodl)erth will be found with the church in the town of San Car-
los bearing S, 84^ E. (S. 84^ E. mag.), and the north point of the bay
BT. no W. (S, no W. mag.), in 18 fathoms, about i mile from the shoi^e.
In approaching Aguadilla Bay from the southward, care must be taken
to keep Jiguero Point to the eastward of N". ll^ B. (N. 11^ E. mag.), to
avoid the foul ground which extends as far to the southward as the
SW. x>oint of the island*

The population of the district is about 12,500. The Herrera line of
steamers call here, also the Atlas line.

Rincon Bay is between Jiguero Point on the north and Cadena
Point on the south. The bottom is foul and affords no good anchorage.

Pelegrino Reef has 10 feet of water over it, and on it four vessels
have been lost. It lies about one mile off the coast, midway between
Oadena and Jiguero Point. The reef is not discernible in ordinary
weather, and caution is necessary when navigating in this vicinit}'.

Cadena Point, 4: miles southward of Aguadilla Bay, should not be
apprpached within the distance of a mile.

AfiAsco Bay lies between Gadena and Algarrobo Points. There are
many factories in the neighborhood. The liiver Anasco empties itself
into the bay, and has thrown up a shallow bar before it, which extends
more than ^ mile from the shore. Outside this there is well-sheltered
anchorage, with the^ prevailing winds for vessels of the l^^rgest draft.
The outer Las Manchas, the northern of the outlying shoals off this
bay, with only 2 fathoms water on it, must be carefully avoided.

Mayagaes Bay lies between Algarrobo and Guanajibo Points, and
is about 3 miles wide and 1^ miles deep. In the northern part of the
bay the depth gradually decreases from 10 to 4 fathoms towards the
shore; but shoals extend across the entrance, requiring great atten-
tion in working in. The anchorage affords excellent shelter from north-
erly winds, and admits vessels of any size, and is undoubtedly the
best anchorage in the island.

From Algarrobo Point (which may be known by a house with a red
roof, built ui)on high piles, on the hill just above the point) the coast
of the bay trends to the SB. for IJ miles to Little Algarrobo, a low,
sandy point, on whicrh there is a sugar factory, with a chimney and
some blue buildings around it. There are two sugar factories with high
chimneys situated at the northern i)}irt of this bay, about ^ mile north
of Algarrobo Point. The shore between is foul for G(K) yards off; and
SW. J mile from Algarrobo Point lies the reef of that name, which at
the outer part is nearly dry and steep-to.

At about i mile southward of Little Algarrobo Point, at the head of
the bay, is the entrance to tlie River Mayaguez, in whieli small droghers
lay up for the hurricane season. The^ river is a ditch of the smallest

342 PUERTO RICO.

proportions, almost dry at the entrance. There is an iron bridge acroes
it, and before it is the best anchorage, sheltered from the northward
round hy east to SW., with good liolding ground. Thence the low
shore bends round to the SW., with shallow water some distance off^
and north 1^ miles from G-uanajibo Point a spit runs off nearly a mile
from the shore.

Mayaguez is a thriving town of 8,000 inhabitants, healthy, lighted
with gas, and has excellent water. Tram cars run from the custom-
house to the town.

The town is clean, orderly, and well kept. Generally bat one family
lives in a house. Yellow fever is sometimes epidemic. The temi)era-
ture in summer ranges from 75^ to 90^.

There is telegraphic communication with the principal ports of the
island.

The authority to visit is the military commandant.

The United States is represented by a commercial agent.

Supplies. — Provisions are nearly all imported from the United Stat^
and are expensive.

X "WTater can be had, both spring and rain water. Cost, $2.50 per
ship, no matter what quantity is taken. Ship's boats must be used.

Steamers. — The Atlas line makes monthly trips, and the Bamon de
Herrera line (Spanish) three times a month.

Quarantine is not very strict; there is a health officer. There are
two hospitals — one privat-e, which has six beds for foreign seamen at a
cost of 50 cents per day; also a military hospital, for the use of the
soldiers.

Fort Charges. — Pilot and harbormaster's fees, $10. Interpreter, $4.
Tonnage dues, $1 per ton of cargo. Health visit: Vessels of 150 tons,
$9; and on each 50 tons in excess of 150, $1 additional. Customhouse
fees, in and out, and stamped paper, $17.50. Discharging ballast:
Sand, 50 cents per ton; stone, free; ballast guard, $2 per day. Dis-
charging general cargo, $10 per load of 40 tons.

Lights. — Two small red harbor lighte shown from the wharf serve as
a guide to boats at night for the landing place.

The Tide rises and falls in Mayaguez Bay from 2 to 3 feet, but no
exact determination of the time of high and low water has been made.
The periods are said to be irregular.

Guadeloupe Reef — In 187G the French mail steamer Guadeloupe
ran aground while entering Mayaguez Bay. The following bearings
were taken while the vessel was aground : Jiguero Point, N. 20^ T~
(N. 2(P W. mag.); Desecheo Island, X. GO© W. (N. GOo W. mag.). :
information has been received as to the vessel's draft, or as to the dej
of water on the bank.

Tourmaline Reef. — Westward of Mayaguez, an extensive reef ha^
ing as little as 4 fathoms of water over it, and possibly less, was n
oently passed over by H. M. S. Tourmaline. From the reef the peak '

ft*

LAS MAN( HAS BUOYS. 343

f'-,i

Oerro Montaoso (8 miles eastward of Mayagaez) bore east (east mag.);
Desecheo Island, :N^. 30^ W. (N. 30° W. mag.). The bottom is apparently
of coral, with remarkable white stripes extending north and south
across it. The bottom \^as visible in 12 fathoms. -J^

The Oater Las Manchas is the northern and outermost of the
shoals at the entrance of Mayaguez Bav, and lies N. 68^ W. (N. 68^ W.
mag.) about 2^ miles from Algarrobo Point. It is about i mile in ex-
tent, with from about 2 to 4 Cathoms water on it, and sometimes breaks.
The 'dark discolored water may be seen at a little distance.

The Inner Las Manchas lies | mile S. 45^ E. (S. 45^ E. mag.) of
the Outer Las Manchas. It is ^ mile in extent with 2 to 3 fathoms
water on it. Between it and the Algarrobo Beef there is an inner
channel a mile wide, with 5^ fathoms in it.

AUart Bank. — ^This bank, on which a Danish frigate of the same
name struck in 1833, is about f mile in length and i mile in breadth,
with from 1 J to 2J fathoms water on it, the shallowest part lies N. 11^
W. (N. 170 W. mag.) of Guan^ibo Point and 8. 56© W. (8. 56° W.
mag.) 2 miles from Algarrobo Point. The passage between it and the
Inner Las Mauchas is i mile in breadth, with from 3^ to ^ fathoms
water, and is the principal chaunel leading to the anchorage of Maya-
guez.

Rodrignez Bank. — ^The northern edge of this shoal is about 1^ miles
to the southward of the Allart and just without the line of the bay.
It is about i mile in extent and dry in several places. Between the
Bodriguez and the Allart there is a bar with 13 to 16 feet water over it.

The channel between Rodriguez Bank and Guanajibo Point has 13
feet least water and is used only by coasters.

Pierre Blanche (white rock) is a small patch of one fathom, lying
just within the line of the Allart and Bodriguez Shoals, at about an
equal distance from each. It obstructs the passage between these
banks.

There is said to be good anchorage to the westward of the Mayaguez
Banks, but in the absence of trustworthy information of the neighbor-
hood it shoald be approached with caution.

Bnoys. — Las Manchas (inner) buoy is a red barrel buoy and lies in
29 feet water with Algarrobo Point bearing N. 80© E. (N. 80o E. mag.)
and Guanajlbo Point 8. 13o E. (8. 13© E. mag.).

Algarrobo Reef buoy (black and white) lies on the following bearings :
Algarrobo Point N. 45° E. (N. 45^ E. mag.); Guanajibo Point 8. 5o W.
(8. 50 W. mag.).

Las Manchas de Afuera buoy (red) lies on the following bearings:
Algarrobo Point N. 5r)0 E. (X. 55o E. mag.); Guanajibo Point 8. lOo E-
(8. 100 E. mag.).

Coronas de Guanajibo buoy (red) lies on the following bearings:
Guanajibo Point south (south mag.); Algarrobo Point N. 15^ E. (N. 15^
E. mag.).

344 PUERTO RICO.

Boble buoy (black and white) lies on tlie following bearioga:
robo Point N. 8° E. (N. 8° E. mag.); castomhouse N, 52° E.
B, mag.).

Directions. — A good mark for entering Mayaguez Bay thro
channel between Allart Bank and Inner Las Manchae ia Cerro
-080 Peak in line with the itorthM-n and higher hummock of a '
saddle-shaped hill bearing 9. 79= K. (S. 79° E. mag.).

For a steamer, or for a sailing vessel with a fair wind, the bes
will be found by bringing Montuosp Peak over the customhous
ing S. 73° B. (S. 73° E. mag.).

The customhouse is near the water's edge, and is the most ac
of four large houses with flat roofs, lying close together. The
on with Montuoso Peak alao leads over the bar of the Mayagne:
in 12 feet of watar. If the bnoya are in place a vessel has only
in midway between them.

In beating in, a vessel may stand toward Las Manchas (inni
the cusitomliouHe and church are one; but to the southward, '
the Allart Shoal, she must tack before the peak of Montuoso c
line with the church, until within the two shoals. When the Ian
southward of Guanagjibo Point is shut in with that point bearii
a vessel will be eastward of the outer banks. In coming from tb
ward, the channel may be taken between Las Manchas and th<
robo Beef. In this case take care not to haul in round Algarrol
until the peak of Montuoso opens south of the chimney of Vigo
house, which is white and a conspicuous object near the shore
the Puntilla Buttery.

With a large vessel it is advisable to tsikea pilot.

Coast. — The coast between Mayaguez Bay and Cape Bojo is f
bordered by rocky shoals which extend fully 1 J miles seawar
approaches to this part of the coast are rendered dangerous f
want of definite knowledge as to the positions of the various
rocks and shoals.

Fort Real de Cabo Rojo, about 9 miles south of Mayaguez
almost a circular basin J mile in diameter, with a depth of 16 fe
center. The channel, which is very narrow and tortuous, carrii
water, and lies near the south part of the entrance. From tl
point au extensive reef runs off, which, after skirting Cay F
terminates at Varas Point. The inhabitants in this locality
chiefly on fish; boats leave here dnring the season for the tui
eries of Mona Island.

Boqueron Bay. — About 2 miles from Port Beal is Gnauiqnill
and between it and that of Meloues, 2i miles farther on, is Bi
Bay. It is obstructed by numerous shoals both within and '
It may be entered by two channels, haVing not less than 4
water, which lead into a spaeious and sheltered anchorage.

Boqueron Bay apiiears to be the line of separation as rega

'■■• i

\. •■•«'

NEGRO SHOAL CAPE ROJO.

345

climate and productious of Puerto Rico. Oa the north side, where
there is an abandaat rainfall, the country is fertile, covered with trees
and rich pasture lands, whore cattle feed. To the south, toward Point
Melones, an(^ having its rise there, is a chain of arid mountains without
trees or pasture; an uninterrupted drought does not permit the growth
of vegetation on this side, but it will be seen from the following de-
scription that the shoals oft" this end of Puerto Rico, between Mayaguez
and Cape Rojo, are so numerous and so imperfectly known as to render it
not only difficult but dangerous to approach either of the above places.

Negro Shoal is of small extent, and almost always breaks. It lies
3J miles from the nearest part of the shore, with Guanajibo Point bear-
ing N. Sii'^ B. (N. Sr,o B. mug.), and Jigiiero Point X. 8^ W. (X. 8o W.
mag.).

Media Lnoa Shoal is said to be a reef f| mile long and about 400
yards wide. The sea sometimes breaks upon it. From its north end,
Guanajibo Point is said to bear N. 62^ B. (X. 62^ E. mag.) and Jiguero
Point N. 6o E. (N. 0^ E. mag.); ^ mile east of it are said to be three
rocks on which the sea breaks constantly, but the existence of both
shoal and rocks is very doubtful.

Las Coronas are sand banks about ^ mile in extent, which Just
cover, and sometimes break. They lie to the southward of Xegro shoal,
with Guanajibo Point bearing N. 37^ B. (X. 37° E. mag.), and Jiguero
Point N. 30 W. (N. 30 W. mag.) 3J miles from the coast.

Oaaniqoilla Shoal is not marked on the Spanish chart, but is
said to lie 2 miles westward of Guaniquilla Point. It is a rocky ledge,
400 yards in extent, with 16 feet of water on it.

Oallardo Bank is also a rocky ledge, which lies nearly 6} miles west
of Melones Point. It is 000 yards in extent, and has 16 feet of water
on it. Halfway between this bank and tlie shore another 16-foot shoal
is shown on the charts.

Mount Atalaya is the higliest and northernmost of two peaks at the
western extreme of the chain of mountains which runs from east to
west in the NW. part of the island. It has a noticeable appearance
and forms an excellent landmark.

Cape Rojo, the S W. point of Puerto Rico, is a bold bluff sloping
down from a hill with two peaks. Seen from the east or west it has the
appearance of two small islands close to highland. Wlien seen from
the southward two remarkable bluffs are seen to the eastward of it.

A good fishing bank of clear white sand and coral, called the White
Grounds, extends 8 or 1^ miles from the cape, on which the depths are
from 6 to 15 fathoms; the edge is very stccp-to, and the bottom is
visible in 12 or 13 fathoms.

Light. — A lighthouse is erected on Cape Rojo, from which, at an
elevation of 128 feet above the sea, a white light revolving every minute
is exhibited, visible 18 miles; the building is hexagonal in shape. The
light has been reported irregular.

346 PUERTO HICO.

The South Coast of Pnerto Rico is generally foul, and should 1
very guardedly approached, for we possess very little correct informati*
respecting it. It appears, however, that in some parts Boundings e
tend to a considerable distance from the shore, and the lead shouli
therefore, be well attended. In running down, it is advisable not
come witliin 4 or 5 miles of the land. From the offing, this side of tJ
island appears lofty, but the shore is generally low and bounded 1
mangroves. Sixteen small rjvers empty themselves into the sea fro
this shore, but few are capable of admitting even boats. There a
many small harbors aud anchorages under the reefs, known to the fls
ermeu and droghers, and cue or two capable of receiving vessels of
large draft. The south coast of Puerto Rico, Lieut. Zuloaga remarl
is incorrectly shown on the existing charts, and ahonld not be approach
within a distance of 6 or 7 miles without great caution.

From Corcho Point, one mile SW. of Cape Mala Pascno, the co«
curves to the northward and westward, then to the southward, formi
a bay into which the Guardawaya River empties. Point Viento fton
the western limits of this bay and the eastern Umit of the bay of Patilb
the western limit of the latter bay being Point Figoera. No accara
information can be given with regard to these bays, bat they are I
Ueved to be more or less obstructwl by reefs.

Port Patillas in Patillas Bay is situated about 3 miles inland on t
left, bank of the Chiquito Eiver.

Guayama Reef — Its outaide edge is at an average distance of

miles from the shore. It is divided into three parts, the eastern bei

named Media Luna, the middle Algarrobo, and the western Ola Gran(

Vessels sailing along this part of the coast are cautioned to keep w

ontside of this reef.

Arroyo is a small bay immediately westward of Point Figuera.
can be easily recognized by the village of Arroyo, lying 3 or 4 mil
inland and visible 12 or 15 miles. There is a white church on a lit
hill above the village, having on its western end a square tower am
cupola on the eastern end.
The United Stjites is represented by a consular agent.
Anchorage. — The anchorage may also be recognized by the cnstc
house, a large yellow building. To enter the port, bring the cnat(
house to bear N, 11° \V. (N. 10^ W. mag.) and steer iton this cours*
avoid a bank, with 3J fathoms of water on it, lying 3 miles southwarc
the bay. This bank is a spit running off from the eastern reef, and i
be cleared by keeping the middle of the village of Arroyo bearing
220 E. (S. 230 E. mag.).

A g(K)d berth is J mile off shore, with the custoiii1ions(.> bearing noi
(N. lo E. mag.). This anchorage is not all well sheltered, and a c
stant SB. swell is felt, and ve<4sels anchor with port anchor witl
spring in the ciible, or run a hedge to keep he^id to the swell.

Port Charges.— Vessels calling in ballast pay captain of the p
pilotage, dlO; health visit, according to tonnage, $10 to *15; inl

GUAYAMA — ^PORT SALINAS DE COAMO. 347

pTeter$4; stamped paper, if the vessel takes cargo, 910; customhouse
fees, $4; tonnage dues, $1 per ton.

Oaayama, although merely an open roadstead, is secure with the
ordinary winds and much frequented. The anchorage possesses ex-
cellent holding ground and is protected to the eastward against the
trade winds by a reef, 3 miles in length, which extends between 3 and
4 miles from the shore. It lies about 12 miles westward of Gape Mala
Pascua, and may be recognized from an offing outside the reef by a
guardhouse on the shore, which bears about N. 10^ E. (N. 11^ E. mag.)
of the west end of the reef, and a windiniU on a hill a mile to the west-
ward of it. To the eastward of the reef, between it and the cape, the
depth is from 10 to 7 fathoms at 2 or 3 miles from the shore, and 13
fathoms at a mile outside to the southward of it. As the anchorage is
approached the soundings become very irregular, varying from 5 to 8
fathoms until within the reef, when they gradually decrease as the
shore is neared ; the lead must therefore be well attended.

Directions. — When approaching Gnayama roadstead from the east-
ward— or indeed if bound to either of the ports on this side of the island
from that quarter — Cape Mala Pascua should be given a berth of 4 miles,
and when it bears to the eastward of N. 1° W. (north mag.) the Guayama
Beef will generally come in sight from aloft. Shape the course to pass
well outside, paying attention to the lead, and when the guardhouse bears
N. lOo E. (N. 110 E. mag.) haul in towards it, under the west end of
the reef, and steer boldly in. The church kept open a little eastward
of a prominent hill in the interior is a good course in. The best anchor-
age will be found in 4 fathoms water, about a mile from the shore, with
the guardhouse on the same bearing, and the west end of the reef S»
120 E. (8. lio E, mag.). In leaving the bay, if bound westerly, steer
out S. 220 W. (8. 230 W. mag.), but a good offing must be obtained be-
fore bearing up, in order to avoid the cays and teefs to the westward.
The whole coast line of the bay is wrongly charted and the shoals are
farther from shore than shown.

Vessels when passing along the south coast of Puerto Rico and in
the vicinity of Arroyo Bay should exercise great caution, in order to
avoid the dangers fringing the shore. •

Port JoboB or Boca del Inflemo. — About one mile to the westward
of Port Guayama a narrow peninsula runs to the westward for 3 miles,
which, with a couple of islands lying oflf its western end, forms Port
Jobos or Boca del Inflerno. No trustworthy information is attainable
with regard to this port. Several small streams from the hills inland
lose themselves in the swamp at the head of the bay, none of them
emptying directly into the sea. The port is formed between Poziu^lo
Point on the east and Colchones Point on the west.

Port Aguirre is at the head of the bay between Colchones and
Arenas Points.

Port Salinas de Coamo is well sheltered by reefs. The entrauce
may be easily distinguished by several cays lying near Arenas Point

348 PUERTO RICO.

and a gaardhouse about 4 miles to the northward of the western cay.
The channel lies between this western cay and a reef 1 J miles west of
it, on which the sea always breaks.

Coming from the eastward, after bringing Gape Mala Pascna to bear
north, distant 4 miles, the course will be 9. 84^ W. (S. 84^ W. mag.),
which will carry a vessel outside all the cays lying along shore.

Steer boldly in between the outer or westernmost of the cays lying
off Arenas Point and the reef IJ mil^ to the westward, passing the cay
at a distance of 200 yards. Stand in toward the guardhouse and
anchor with it bearing K Go E. (N. 6^ E. mag.) about one mile distant,
in 4 or 5 fathoms of water.

Discolored water extends for some distance to the southward of the
cays. Three miles off shore the depth is 10 fathoms, decreasing to 7
fathoms as the coast is approached.

In leaving this harbor a vessel should, if bound to the westward,
stand to the southward until Muertos Island bears to the northward
of west (west mag.) before keeping away.

Nina Shoal — Within the harbor is a rocky shoal, with IdJ feet on
it, with 22 feet all around.

Water. — There is a good watering place in Port Salinas de Coamo
on the shore near a lagoon, about J mile to the westward of the guard-
house.

Coamo Bay. — Its shore is skirted by reefs throughout its length.
The River Coamo empties into the bay. Near Coamo Point are several
small cays, and 2 miles to the southward are the Berberia Cays, with
dangerous banks near them. Petrona Point is the eastern extremity
of the bay.

Boca Chica. — ^The reef continues to the westward around Point
Coamo as far as Port Pastillo. Boca Chica is a small trading place, and
the approach to it is said to be clear of dangers. Soundings should be
carefully attended to.

Port Jacagua is situated at the mouth of the small river of the
same name, 1 J miles west of Boca Chica. To the westward of the
mouth of the river are two small cays, called the Frios. This port is
said to be easy of access, but we can give no exact directions. As the
soundings diminish regularly from 6^ to 3^ fathoms in approaching the
shore here, the lead will be a good guide.

Muertos or Dead Cheat Island lies 4 miles off the south coast of
Puerto Rico and nearly midway between the SW. and SE. points o*"
the island. The southern part of the island is high and rocky, slopin
toward the north, and from a distance looks like a separate island.
The island is nearly connected to the coast of Puerto Rico by a ree^
extending from its NE. point, on which the sea generally breaks heav
ilv. This reef seems to skirt the east and south sides of the island.
In the latter direction it extends J mile offshore. At about 200 yard*"
distance from the SW. end of the island there is a small flat rock, c-alle^

BERBERIA CAYS— CARDONES ISLAND. 341>

the Hammock, with a dry reef between them. The Hammock should
not be rounded nearer than IJ miles. Four hundred yards southwest-
ward of the Hammock there is said to be a rock with 8 feet on it.

Water can be obtained on Bead Chest Island by digging wells a lit-
tle above high-water mark. Turtles are plenty m the proper season^
and the neighboring banks abound with fish.

Anchorage — The western side of Muertos Island is free of danger^
and affords fair anchorage in from 7 to 12 fathoms water. A good
berth may be taken with the NVV. point of Mueiiios in one with the
northern hill bearing east (east mag.), in 8 fathoms, sand, at about ^
mile from the shore; or with the western extreme of Hammock Cay S.
20^ E. (S. 20^ E. mag.), distant 1^ miles, and the north point of Muertos
N. 60O E. (N. 50O E. mag.).

Light. — From a tower vstanding in the middle of a T-shaped building
on the SW. point of Muertos Islaud a light is shown at an elevation of
297 feet and should be visible 18 miles. A flash of three seconds dura-
tion is shown every three minutes.

Berberia Cays.— Three miles N. 67° E. (N. 67^ E. mag.) from Muertos
Island are two cays named Berberia, and in their neighborhood are
many dangerous banks, very imperfectly known. With the island bear-
ing west^ distant 3 or 4 miles, the depth is 6 fathoms. From the hills
white water is seen a considerable distance to the eastward; the lead
must, therefore, be well attended. The cays are joined by a reef. From
the larger and northern cay a shoal of considerable size extends NW.
and SW., on which there is only 6 feet water. These two cays are
often submerged, and are dangerous to approach on the w«st and south
sides; but to the northward of the larger there is good anchorage in 4 J
to 7 fathoms, mud.

There is said to be a clear channel north of Berberia Cays with 5 J
fathoms least water.

Great caution must be observed by the navigator in this vicinity.

The Bay of Ponce is nearly 3 miles across between Carenero, the
eastern, and Cucharros, the western point; the port is in the NE. cor-
ner of the bay, and on its shore is the village of Port Ponce, containing
1,600 inhabitants. The customhouse, a long, white, two-storied build-
ing, with flat roof and flagstaff, is the most prominent object in the vil-
lage, and is very conspicuous from seaward. The shores are low and
bounded by hmngrove and cocoanut trees, but 2 or 3 miles westward of
Cucharros Point the land rises and becomes hilly. Katones Island is
low and covered with brushwood; its surrounding reef, which nearly
dries at low water, stretches off southeastward for 600 yards. Arenas
Cay is small and bushy.

Cardones Island is low, covered with brushwood, and in its centt^r
is a wooden house. A reef surrounds the island to the distance of
about 400 yards.

350 PUKRTO RICO.

Ziight. — There is a fixed red light on Cardoues Island, elevat
feet above the sea, and it aliould be visible in clear weather from
tance of 10 miles.

The ligbthoutie, 39 feet high, consists of a cylindrical tower with
cnpola rising' above a rectangular building, which is white in colo
blue pauels.

Cayito Reef is a dangerous coral bank whii^h seldom breaks,
are 9 tfeet oti ita eastern edge, and probably shoaler water will be f
a white chimney open eastward of the nogro huts, near the ooc
grove on the north aide of the bay, bearing north (north mag.), <
the east side of the bank. There is a 7-tHtliom channel betweei
dones Island and Cayito fteef, but it should not be taken without a
The Gatas, four small low cays off Carenero, appear sis a coutini
of thatpoiut; its projecting reef, upon which tlie sea breaks, is ste
At the extremity of the reef oflf PeQoneillo Point northward of Cart
are two small rocks which uncover 4 feet at low water. Cabrillon
lies aboat J mile eastward of Carenero Point; two small islets or
lie off it.

Vessels approaching Port Ponce should not come within 5 mi
the land until the lighthouse bears N. es*^ E. (X. 68° E. mag.), '
shonid then be steered for, passing westward of Tasmanian i
When abreast of Oardones Island, alter course to N. 11° E. (N. 1
mag.) for anchorage. The fore and main masts of a ateamer wr
on TasmaoiaD shoal show two-thinls above the water.

The Town of Ponce, the second in size, third in commercial i:
tance in the island, and numbering 17,000 inhabitants, lies 3 miles I
eastward of the port.

The city has a public hospital and is lighted with gas. It ii
nected with Jamaica by a telegraph cable, and also has telegr
communication with the principal places on the island.

The law holds the masters of vessels responsible and liable to
for any f^Ise declaration in contents, quantity, weight, or meason

The United States is represented by a consular agent.

Sopplies. — ^The supply of coal and wood is nncertiun. Wa
scarce and bad. Vei^sel's stores, being mostly imported, are higl

Fort Charges. — Tonnage dues, *1 on each ton of cargo; health
on vessels of 100 tons, $8, and $1 for each 50 tons in excess i
460; $16 for all over 400 tons; pilotage in and out, $10; tng
charged by agreement; wharfage, for ea«h lighter load of cargt
sand, per lighter, $5; interpreter and duplicate manifest, $1^; e
paper, entrance and clearance, SIO; fort pass, $2; hospital fee
taking in stone ballast, per ton, $1.50; sand ballast, per ton $1; b:
guard, $1; hose hire for filling molasses casks, per puncheon, 6} c
water delivered alongside, per puncheon, $1; labor, per day, $3; t
dore, per hogshead, 20 cents; coal, from $7 to $12 per ton. Caj
handled by lighters. Vessels with clean bills of health are quaran

^ /

PONCE HARBOR RULES DIRECTIONS. 351

for twenty four hours; vessels from infected ports, from eight to forty
days.

Harbor Roles. — No vessel is allowed to change her anchorage with-
out permit from harbor master; fine for doing so equals double pilotage.
All vessels from foreign ports are obliged to wait the sanitary and reve-
nue visit. Vessels in quarantine will tly a quarantine flag. All boats
must come alongside the wharf in front of the customhouse. No vessel
can ballast or unballast without permission from the htirbor master.
Mineral coal is considered as ballast. No vessel can leave after sunset
or before sunrise. Colored men as passengers or crew can not land.

Tasmanian Shoal (or Brillante), on which Tasmanian grounded, ha«
3 J to 5 fathoms of water over it; this shoal ground is nearly circular
with a diameter of about 600 yards; as little as 13f feet have been re-
ported on the east side of the shoal.

From the shoalest part, the center of Ratones Island is in line with a
remarkable fall in the hills bearing N. 77^ W. (N. 77^ W. mag.), and a
conspicuous clump of trees on the middle (the second) range of hills be-
hind the town is in line with the east extreme of Ponce Village N. lio
E. (N. lio B. mag.).

The conspicuous clump of trees in line with the house of the captain
of the port (the house next west of the customhouse) bearing N. 14° B.
(N. 140 E. mag) leads westward of the shoal. The saddle hill, nearly
on the same line of bearing, and given as a leading mark on the chart,
is not easily distinguishable.

Eastward of Tasmanian Shoal, ^ mile distant, is another patch of
shoal ground; this is about 400 yards in diameter, with 3| to 4^ fathoms
water on it. There is a depth of 6 J fathoms between the two shoals.

Directions. — Shoal and uneven soundings exist ebouthward of the bay
for some distance from the shore, probably on irregular banks extend-
ing from Batones Islai]|£l on the westward and from Muertos Island on
the eastward, leaving a deep channel between them into the port, east-
ward of Cardones Island. Approacliing from the westward, the custom-
house open of the east end of Cardones Island bearing N. 28° B. (N.
28^ E. mag.) crosses the bank in 5^ fathoms, and on nearing Cardones,
open the customhouse to N. 17^ E. (N. 17° E. mag.). From eastward,
round Hammock Cay, at the distance of IJ miles, and steer N. 59^ W.
(N. 59^ W. mag.) ; on nearing the port the shipping and upper part of
the customhouse will be seen over the low mangrove trees, and small
vessels may cross in 4 fathoms water, with the customhouse in line with
the west end of Gatas Islets. Large ships should bring the custom-
house to bear N. 17^ E. (N. 17^ E. mag.), on which bearing the least
water will be 13 fathoms, and when abreast of Gatas steer north (north
mag.) to the anchorage. The edge of the bank is IJ miles southward of
Cardones Island. Pilots can always be obtained, but they only board
vessels when off Cardones. The land breeze often sets out between
sunset and sunrise.

352 PUERTO RICO.

Tides. — It is high water, full and change, in Ponce Harbor at 2h.
Om. (approx.) and the rise 2 feet, but they are very irregular.

Fort Matansa is a small bay open to the southward. The Biver
Pem^elas empties into it. Ratones Island serves as a mark to the en-
trance to this port. From Port Matansa the coast trends SW. to
Guayanilla Point, between which and Majagua Point is the Bay of
Guayanilla. Near GuayaniUa Poin t are several small islands. Maja-
gua Point is skirted by a reef.

Port Guayanilla is a large bay almost circular, open to the south-
ward. Several small rivers empty themselves in the bay. There is
anchorage in this port in 5 J fathoms water; the entrance is open on a
N. no W. (N, no W. mag.)" bearing.

To the westward of the port the coast is foul.

The town of Guayanilla is situated on the banks of the river of the
same name, about 1^ miles from the entrance.

Fort Guanica. — This i)ort is an inlet about IJ miles in length in a
NW. and SB. direction, and J mile in breadth, with a depth of 3^
fathoms water at its inner end and 4^ fathoms at its eastern, over a
sandy bottom. It is the best harbor on this side of the island, and lies
about 15 miles eastward of Cape Eojo. The depths in this port are
shoaling on account of the alluvium carried down by the rains. A
mudbank with a few scattered rocks extending from the north shore
almost to the center of the port, has only 2 feet water.

Its entrance, formed between two bold headlands, Meseta Point on
the east and Pescadores Point on the west, is little more than 200 yards
wide, and is in the middle of a large bay formed between Brea Point, a
bold and rocky cliff, and Picuda Point 3 miles eastward of it.

Close off Picuda Point are two small islets, called Cana and Cana
Gorda. Between them and Meseta Point an unbroken semicircular reef
sweeps round outwards to the distance of *J mile from the shore, and
without this 800 yards off, there is a detached, narrow, rocky ledge 600
yards long in a north and south direction, with a depth of only 12 feet
water on it. The south end of this ledge hes S. 23° B. (S. 23© B. mag.),
a mile from Meseta Point, and on the line between Brea and Picuda
Points. The western shore, between Pescadores and Brea Points,
recedes into a deep bight, which is blocked up by a reef extending
across from the former to within J mile of the latter, and is steep-to.

Directions. — Approaching Port Guanica from the eastward, run
down outside the reefs until Meseta Point is in line with the western
pap of Cerro Gorda, which may be easily recognized. This mark wJ"
lead in close alongside to the westward of the outer ledge in 10 fathon
water. The point on with the eastern pap will lead more in mid-cha
nel, and when Cana Gorda bears N. 84o E. (N. 84° E. mag.) a vess
may steer for the center of the channel into the harbor. Run boldl,
through between the entrance points, and take up the most oonvenier
berth within, where there is nothing in the way. The SW. shore
the boldest; but the farther a berth is chosen to the eastward, t

- « •»

TERREMOTO PASSAGE — INDIO PASSAGE. 353

easier it will be to sail out. In beating up from the westward, Brea
Point may be passed at the distance of 200 yards, then steer for Point
Meseta until the middle of the entrance bears nortli (north mag.) when
stand in and anchor.

Coast. — From Brea Point a broad chain of reefs, known as the Mar-
garita, extends as far as Cape Rojo; the south extreme of the reef ex-
tends fully 4 miles off shore, and forms a point to leeward of the village
of Parguera. This chain of reefs affords three passages, wiuch are
only accessible to vessels of light draft and whicli no vessel should
attempt without the aid of a pilot.

Terremoto Passage. — In the neighborhood of Salinas Bay, between
Carcovado Point and Terremoto Cay (the largest of the outer cays), is
Terremoto Passage, where the soundings are 4^ to 7 fathoms, and by ,5

which coasting vessels enter Salinas Bay.

Falach or Middle Passage is near Cabras or Mateo Island, and has
9f fathoms of water. The eastern edge is marked by a small mangrove
cay, from which a reef extends to the NW. Paluch Passage, the best
of the three, leads to the port of Guijano, which is formed by the coast ^%

and an inner line of reefs, and has a depth of 7 to 9 fathoms. The port
is spacious, deep, and sheltered from all seas.

Indio Passage, the western one, is about 4 miles westward of the It]

Middle Passage. It is abreast of Pitajaya. It is about 400 yards broad
and has 7 fathoms of water inside. Anchorage, sheltered from the sea,
is found under the lee of the reefs.

Cape Rojo and light. Page 345.

TVinds. — ^The winds around Puerto Rico appears to be of the same
character as those met with at the Virgin Islands. There is no regular
land breeze to take advantage of, although the usual trade wind gen-
erally slackens during the night in the immediate vicinity of the shore.
Under the west end, the wind in the day time will incline inward. In
the winter months north and NW. winds sometimes occur, and blow
hard; and in the summer, long calms and light SE. airs prevail, with
terrific squalls and heavy rains, especially on the south side. From the
absence of any remarks on the rollers we may conclude that they are at
least not so heavy or so dangerous as at the Virgin Islands.

Currents. — On the north side of Puerto Eico, the current is said to
incline generally to the SW. or towards the shore, and to nm with
greater velocity in the winter than in the summer months. On the
fi "uth side its course is generally west, but its movements are here un-
c ptain. Some navigators state that at the full and change of the moon
a strong weatherly set will occasionally be found, especially if light
"^ inds or Northers have prevailed near these periods, and consequently
g ves great assistance to vessels beating to windward. In February it

I 48 been found running a knot an hour to the northward; in the sum-

II 3r months it will incline to the NW. towards the shore, and round the
g ^fV. end into the Mona Passage with great force.

18402 23

•^

V«'

CHAPTER XI.

THE VIRGIN ISLANDS.

Virgin Islands. — The line of demarcation between the English and
Danish Islaudn runs from the north between Little Tobago and Hans
Lollik; from thence to the ESE. midway in the cliannel between Thatch
Island, Tortola, and St. John, round the east end of the latter, and fipom
thence to the south through the Flanagan Passage.

The majority of the islets which lie off the larger islands are barren
and of no value.

The only islands of any commercial imjwrtani^e are Virgin Gorda,
Tortola, St. John, St. Thomas, and St. Croix.

The island of Anegada only merits description on account of the leefe
which surround it, where many vessels have been wrecked.

On making the Virgin Islands from the northward, Virgin Gorda
will be seen on the extreme left, rising in a clear, wtll-detined peak.
Anegada being only 30 feet above the sea, will not be seen more than
5 or 6 miles from an elevation of 10 feet. Next to Virgin Gorda, Tor-
tula will appear the most convspicuous ; Sage Mountain, the highest in
the island, does not rise in a peak from this direction, but appears flat-
tened and elongat'Cd. Immediately to the right or to the westward of
it will be seen the rugged pointed peaks of Jost Van Dyke, and behind
them the irregular small peaks rising from the table-land of St. John
and varying in elevation from 800 to 1,225 feet.

If on or near the meridian of 64^ 50' W., and about 20 miles to the
northward of the islands, a separation will be observed between St
John and St. Thomas, as the small cays which lie oflf and between them
will not be above the liorizoii, while Virgin Gorda, Tortola, Jost Van
Dyke, and St. John will seem to form one large island, the prominent
peaks on each being alone distinguishable.

The island of St. Thomas may be recognized by having a large sa<ldl€
on its center, formed by Signal Hill and West Mountain, and theisi I
is less rugged in outline tlian the others. The saddle is equally
spicuous from the southward. Culebra, from the above meridian, I
be only just in sight. Its hills are more rounded than the others i
much less elevated. From hence also, in clear weather, El Yiinqi. r
Anvil Peak, on the Sierra Luquillo, at the east end of Puerto Bico, r
be seen,

354

TIDES. • > 355

Tides. — The phenomena of the tides among the Virgin Islands, al-
though of the highest importance to navigators, are extremely difficult
of explanation. The following rule is given by the fishermen, and, in
general^ it may be safely adopted : From the moon's rising until her merid-
ian passage, the flood runs to the southeastward, or to windward; and
from thence to her setting the ebb runs to the northwestw^ard, or to s
leeward, and ince versa with the lower transit; hence there is a six-
hours' stream each way. This rule, however, is greatly interfered with
in diflferent localities, as will be seen hereafter, and by the force and
direction of the wind.

It is observed that the southern tide predominates during the sum-
mer months, from the middle of June to tlie middle of August, and
two tides have been then known to follow in succession, partic^ularly if
the wind has been westerly ; and on such ()c<asions the perpendicular rise
was increased by 2 feet. 'Near the commencement of this remarkable
change the stream is observed to set for eight 'or ten <lays continually
to the southward with a force seldom surpassed, and is called by the
fishermen St. John's tide, from its occurring near the day of that saint.
For the remainder of the above period, the ebb or northerly stream will
run only for about one or two hours.

During the months of September, November, March, and April the
northern tide prevails, and with considerable for(*e, being assisted by
the current. At this period also the highest Avater is generally in the
morning, and there is only a half-tide in the evening; the reverse takes
place during the summer months. The establishment for high w^ater at
full and change appears to be about 9h. Om., but it is liable to great un- s
certainly, for sometimes it is as early as 7h. Om. The rise and fall at
springs is from one to IJ feet; but in the months of April and May the
mean level of the s6a is observed to be a foot lower than at other periods,
which agrees with the observations of Dr. Fahlberg. The duratic^ of
the stream (as before stated) is six hours each way, and to which the
stranger must pay strict attention, leaving the time of high water as
a thing altogether of minor importance.

As already observed, the northern stream is called the flood, and
that coming from the southward the ebb; strictly, however, this may
be an error, although not of much consequence, for the change of set
takes place at about half-tide on the shore, and, the rise and fall being so
small, it is <lifficult to say to whitfli set the term ''flood" should be
applied.

It happens, however, that the commencement of the flood stream

.kes place at full and change, at about Gh. Om., and as it runs for six

3ur8 and then changes to the ebb, by remembering this establishment

ir the first beginning of the flood, the turn of tide can of course be
"iilculated for any intermediate day during the lunation.

As Oh. Om. happens to be nearly the time of the moon's rising at full

id change, we have the fisherman's rule explained.

356 *rHE VIRGIN ISLANDS.

Soundings. — The Virgin Islands lie on the southern edge of an ex-
tensive bank of soundings. KW. of Anegada, the bank is said to be
extending, on account of the loose sand and strong current.

The soundings on the south side of the islands differ in a remarkable
manner from those on the north. Here the edge of the bank, bold and
wall-sided, lies at the distance of only from one to 7 miles from the cays,
and close within it is a narrow ledge of coral, about 200 yards wide,
with a depth of from 15 to 19 fathoms, which continues unbroken from
the Horseshoe Reef at Anegada nearly to Crab Island, having imme-
diately within it from 25 to 30 fathoms watey.

The general depth on the north side of the islands is from 28 to 30
fathoms, coral sand, with rocky patches from i mile to 4 miles in extent^
on which the soundings vary from 6 to 15 and 20 fathoms. These
patches lie from 2 to 7 miles from the edge of the bank. Eastward of
640 40' W. the depth is from 15 to 22 fathoms, shoaling to 7 fathoms
on nearing the west end of Anegada.

TTSThale Bank is the most northern, of these patches, and has 10
fathoms water on it, coral rock. Irregular soundings extend nearly 4
miles to the northward, varying from 12 to 20 fathoms. A mile south-
ward of the bank there are 25 fathoms, and east and west of it shoal
water extends for nearly a mile.

Turtle Head is a small coral patch lying S W. of the Whale, with as
little as 6 fathoms watel* on it. A quarter of a mile northward there is
a depth of 25 fathoms, whilst to the southward uneven ground extends
nearly IJ miles, with soundings of from 11 to 18 fathoms. When on
the head the west end of Jost Van Dyke will be seen in one with the
westernmost hill on St. John bearing S. 1° W. (south mag.).

Barracouta Banks are several patches with from 11 to 20 fathoms
water on them, and lie from 2 to 4 miles from the edge of the bank, the
shoMest parts being at their NE. and ^W. ends.

Kingflsh Banks are two coral patches, each about a mile long and
i mile wide, mth 8 fathoms water on them. They are one mile apart,
with a depth of 23 fathoms between.

With the exception of some rocky patches, having about 18 tathoms
water on them, the above are the only offlying shoals on the north side
of the group.

Anegada or Drowned Island is covered with brushwood. Until
the establishment of the lighthouse on Sombrero Island numerous
vessels were wrecked on this island and the dangerous reefs which
suiTound it. Xow the landfall sought by vessels from the northw
is Souil)rero lighthouse, from which an accurate departure can be tal
makiug the Anegada Channel, once so famous for its dangers, perfe
safe with ordinary care and attention.

The island is 9 miles in length ESE. and WNW., and from one
miles in breadth, almost uniformly about 30 feet high, and covered \
brushwood, excepting in a few spots which are cleared for the cultiva^

*•

't <f

••-T>d

k-<

*•'

■-<■'

•. T.,

''Hi

> .'■if

■ u

ANEGADA ISLAND CURRENTS — GROUND SWELL. 357

of com and vegetables. A large portion of the interior is cut up by
extensive salt water lagoons, hence its name. The principal settlement
is on the south side, 6 miles from the west end.

Fresh water may be obtained by digging wells in the sand, particu-
larly near the beach at the west end of the island, but the inhabitants
prefer drinking the rain water caught in the natural cisterns formed in
the rock.

Horseshoe Reef. — The island of Anegada is skirted on its outer or
northern side by a narrow frontier reef to the distance of from 200 yards
at its extreme north point to 1^ miles at its east end; thence a most
dangerous broken reef extends 8E. by S. for 7 miles, upon which most
of the wrecks occur. This portion is called the Horseshoe Reef, and
from its south end detached coral heads and shallow ledges extend 4J
miles 8W. by S., where they terminate at the Herman Reefs, bn which
the sea generally breaks.

Two miles S. 67o W. (S. eso W. mag.) of the southeastern pitch of the
Horseshoe Reef is a heap of dead white coral, 3 feet out of water, called
the White Horse; 2^ miles to the eastward of the pitch end there are
34 fathoms on the edge of soundiags, and within a mile of it there are
10 fathoms. Abreast the Herman Reefs the edge of soundings is little
more than a mile distant, which makes them still more dangerous.

Robert Reef is a small rocky patch with 4^ fathoms water on it ' \^

lyi^Lg 3 J miles within or to the westward of the Herman.

At 1^ miles to the !N^E. of this reef there is also a small rocky head
with 4 fathoms on it.

Hawksbill Bank is a small rocky ledge, on which there are from 3
to 5 fathoms, lying about 2 miles to the N. 23o W. (N. 22^ W. mag.) of
Robert Reef. These patches should be avoided when anchoring under
the lee of Horseshoe Reef. The water is, however, so clear that the
bottom may be seen distinctly in 8 or 9 fathoms.

Cnrrents. — After SE. or southerly winds, which blow at times
throughout the year, but are most frequent in May or June, a NW.
current of sometimes a mile an hour runs along the reefs. For this rea-
son especially vessels bound from the northward through the Anegada
Passage should not fail to sight, by night or day. Sombrero lighthouse?

Caution. — The edge of soundings is so near the reef that the lead is
not a trustworthy warning of the approach to danger, and therefore a
sailing vessel bound to the southward and having a head wind in this

lannel should not approach these reefs nearer than 10 miles, but should

ork to the southward in the eastern part of the channel till past all

inger.

The Rollers, or Ground Swell, frequently occur from October to

ay, and continue sometimes three or four days. In general, they set

after a prevalence of light east or SE. winds. Between Tortola and

lano Islands they have been seen to top and break in 9 fathoms, and
the SW. side of Anegada, in 4J fathoms, anchors are sometimes

358 THE VmGIK ISLANDS.

lifted ; it is o^nseqiieiitly dangerous for sailing vessels to (
any part of tlie northern sliores of the Virgia Islaiids, fo
euddenly, and during their continuance tiie wind is too li
vessel under command. They ajipear to have great int
bottom in loosening the ssmd and in discoloring the wa
miles to the northward Of the islands, as far ^ the edge
In some places near the west end of Anegada, where the bi
posed of ver>-fine aaiid, the formation of the hanks is freque

Anchorage. — There is good temporary anchorage off
of the island in fmm 5 to G fitthoms water, at about a rail
will not be prudent, however, to remain here anytime duri
of the rollers, which fre(tuently occur from October to Ma,
be better during this season to anclior well under the sou
island if intending to remain the night.

The best ancliorage will be found in 6 fatlioms, with
bearing N. 21*^ \V. (N. 2(P W. mag.), the cocoauut trees !
ment at Pearl Point N. 330 E. (S. 34° B. mag.), and the i
69° E. (N. 10° E. mag.). Great care, however, must be
haul up too suddenly after rounding the we-st end and
within the depth of 5 fathoms. Great attention must bi
lead after passing within the 10-fathom lino>.

The bank to the westward of the meridian of Anegadu
chiefly of fine sand, and in light weather vessels may ai
safety with a kedge or stream, taking care, liowever, to avi
banks alremly described.

Virgin Ghirda, the easternmost of the V irgiu Islands, is
gnished by its rising gradually to a peak 1,370 tfeet high
times called Peniston, or Spanish Town. The inhabitan
nnmber, and are principally employed in raising &uit ai
and burning charcoal for the markets of St. Thomas and ^

The outline of the island is exceedingly irregidar.

The center i>ortion is occupied by tlie immense hill, tl
which named Virgin Peak, has been already described,
the east end of the island is a narrow strip of land compc
alar nigged hills, terminating at Paijaros Point in a rema
cle rock lliO feet Iiigh, The southern poition is more rej
line, and nearly .se|>aratcd from the center by a small isth

The most remarkable feature of Virgin Gorda is on its
between Oolirion Point and the south end of the island,
side of this peninsula has been broken up by some violf
nature into immense gi'anite Idocks, which lie scatter
the shore.

The cays and islets to the southward as far as Bound 1
composed of the same kind of rock, and the largest (whic
J mile from the south end of the island), from its having
ance of a town in ruins, is named Fallen -Terusalem.

VIRGIN GORDA — ANCHORAGE PRICKLY PEAR. 359

Many of these blocks are 60 to 70 feet square; some are merely con-
fined in their places by the weight of others leaning on them ; and
many, with deep rents and flssnres in their sides, appear ready to fall
by the slightest shock. In one or two places the sea finds its way
through the crevices and forms beautiful natural baths. It is also a
curious circumstance that similar granite blocks are found scattered
about on Beef Island, on the opposite side of Sir Francis Drake Chan-
nel, and nowhere else. The island is badly watered.

Anchorage. — There are two excellent anchorages on the western
side of Virgin Gorda. The water is smooth at both anchorages, ex-
cept at the season of rollers, and the holding ground good, and they
can easily be reached from either north or south.

Nacker Island. — On the north side of Virgin Gorda there are sev-
eral small slightly wooded cays and islets, the outer or northernmost
of which is Necker Island, lying about 2i miles from Pajaros Point.
It is nearly J mile fbng, north and scmth, and about J mile wide, and
toward its north end it is 110 feet high; its 8B. side is low and s^ndy.
Toward the north it is bold and steep-to, there being from 6 to 10
fathoms water within 300 yards; but on the east and west vsides it is
foul and dangerous to the distance of nearly ^ mile. From the south
side a broken reef extends off nearly J mile leaving a clear channel,
named Virgin Sound, with 9 fathoms water in it, and J mile wide
between the broken reef and the reefs from the islets to the southward;
but the channel can only be navigated by small vessels.

The Invisibles are two small rocky heads with only 3 feet water on
them and do not always break. They lie S. 74° E. (S. 73^ E. mag.) f mile
from theNE. point of Necker; between them and the reef on the east
side of Necker the depths are from 4 to 8 fathoms, but on their north
and east sides there are from 10 to 11 fathoms almost alongside, and
to the distance of a mile off.

Eustatia is a small islet, 170 feet high, lying f mile to the south-
ward of Necker, and nearly i mile from the nearest part of Virgin
Gorda. Its north side is foul to the distance of 200 yards, and thence
a broken reef extends on almost a straight hne along the shore to
Pajaros Point, under the lee of which, in Eustatia Sound, there is a
small safe anchorage for droghers. The entrance is through a very
small cut in the reef, about J mile eastward of the islet; but this part
of Virgin Gorda should be avoided by strangers, as the ground is foul
for some distance outside the cut.

Prickly Pear, the largest of these islets, is a mile in length NW.
and SE., about J mile in breadth, and 230 fiH^t high. Its east end is
not quite J mile from the nearest part of a small peninsula of Virgin
Gorda, and in the spacer between is the Saba Rock, 25 feet high. From
the west end, the Cactus, a dry and broken reef, runs oft' 300 yards in
that direction. The north side is bold, and between it and Necker
there is good temporary anchorage in 7 or 8 fathoms water in Virgin

360 THE VIBGIX ISLANDS,

Soand, bat cai-e miLst be taken to avoid the foal groand to th€ 9W. of
the latter island.

Mosqnito Island, the highest of the islets off the north shore of
Virgin Gorda, lies nearly a mile westward of Prickly Pear. From its
north end, small detached rugged rocks extend off 300 yards^ the outer
one, Mosi^nito R<x:k, being 24 feet high. From it the Colquhoon Beef
(dry in most placre.s) extends to the SE. ^bout ^ mile, and is bold and
steep-to outside.

Gtorda Soand is an excellent and capacious harbor. If miles long
east and west, and f broad, with an average depth of 11 fathoms over
sand and mud; sheltered from all winds, and protected from the rollers.
A vessel may refit with great ease and convenience, under the lee of
Vixen Point, the south end of Prickly Pear Island, and encamp the
crew on the island if necessary. Biras Creek at the SE. corner of the
sound, might be made available for heaving down with very little
trouble.

The entrance to the sound lies between the ends of the Cactus and Col-
quhoun reefs, which are J mile apart.

Beacons. — Two pole beacons surmounted by a triangle painted white,
serve as a leading mark for entering. The front beacon is on Gnat
Point; the rear beacon is 220 yards eastward of the eastward x>oint of
Gun Creek. These beacons in line, bearing south (S. 1° W. mag.), lead
in 27 feet least water between the reefs.

Directions. — Vessels coming from the eastward intending to visit
Gorda Sound, or with a view of passing out to the westward of Anegada^
or to enter Sir Francis Drake Channel by the northern route, on their
way to either of the i)orts to leeward, must approach Virgin Gorda with
extreme caution, es|>ecially in the night, to avoid falling on the Horse-
shoe Reef. In. the daytime the peak of Virgin Gorda will be a guide, as
it is seldom (jlouded and may be seen 30 miles off. In the night, the
latitude must be cfmtinually observed; and if the weather is not suffi-
ciently cleiU' for that purpose, and the longitude uncertain, do not by
any means attempt to make* the land, high as it is. Sombrero light
should be made from tlie northward or eastward before attempting any
of tlie channels.

If coming from the northward, the parallel of Anegada should on no
account be passed in the night. If the island is made (or Virgin Gorda?
which will be seen first), on a southerly bearing, it will be better to run
to the westward of Anegada, and haul up for either of the passages
most convenient; a vessel will always have a free wind for this purpose
It will be far safer to act thus tlian to attempt to pass to windward f
the llorseshcM* Reef, which has been the cause of so many disasters.

Vessels bound to St. Thomas are tempted to run this risk in order I
save perhai)s two days, by having to beat up on the south side of t)i
island; but the latest surveys and these directions will show that thei
is no ncH'essity for running to leeward round the west end of St. Thomj

GORDA SOUND DIRECTIONS ANCHORAGES. 361

' ■?*

and that having passed the west end of Anegada, most of the northern
channels may be safely and freely navigated without loss of time, and
with the saving of much risk and anxiety. :^

Coming from windward, bring Virgin Gorda on a S. 83^ W. (S. 84^ W.
mag.) bearing and run down on this course. When within 7 or 8 miles
of Pajaros Point, Necker Island will come in sight ^nd may be boldly
steered for, taking care not to bring it to the westward of N. 83^ W. '
(N. 820 W. mag.) in order to avoid the Herman Reefs. When Pajaros ,
Point bears S. 44^ W. (S. 45^ W. mag.), distant about IJ miles, haul up !N^«
46^ W. (N. 450 W.tnag.) to avoid the Invisibles, which are not seen
until close upon them. Continue on this course until the land to the
westward (which will be the north end of the (xuano Island, touching
the right extreine of Jost Van Dyke) begins to open of Necker, bear-
ing S. 750 W. (S. 700 W. Aag.), when a vessel may boldly keep away to
the westward, in 10 and 11 fathoms water.

When abreast the spit of the Horseshoe Keef it may be distinctly
seen from aloft, as it breaks in the finest weather; but tlic Herman
Reefs only break with a swell or strong breeze, and the dry sand bore ¥

to the northward of them, being only 3 feet out of water, is scarcely
visible at the former distance. Pajaros Point may be rounded at the
distance of 400 yards.

If bound into Gorda Sound, having opened out the land as before
directed, steer S. 89^ W. (west, mag.) until the peak of Virgin Gorda
bears S. 27° W. (S. 28^ W. mag.), when haul in for the leading mark
given above in the dire<;tion8 for the sound. Having entered the chan-
nel, when abreast of the SE. end of Colquhoun Reef, a vessel must
haul to the wind, and i\ berth must be chosen as most conv^enient, in
the eastern pai*t of the sound.

Tides. — It is high water, full and change, in Gorda Sound at 8h. 30m.,
and the rise is about IJ feet. The tides at the entrance of the sound,
between the reefs, seldom run more than half a knot, and the flood sets
toward Prickly Pear Island. Between Mosquito Island and Anguilla
Point, south of it, the flood sets to the eastward at the rate of one and
14 knots. Between Parajos Point and the Horseshoe Reef it seldom
runs more than one knot, but its duration varies.

Anchorages. — ^There are two excellent anchorages for vessels of any

draft under the western side of Virgin Gorda. Ttie first is formed by

an extensive bay between Mountain Point, tlie NVV. end of the Island,

-^nd Golison Point, 3 miles from it, and is partially protected to theNW.

>y the Seal and Dog Islands. It sehlom, however, blows hard to the

irestward of north, and the only thing to be prepared for is the ground

well in the winter months. At this season it will be better to anchor

n about 13 fathoms water, midway between Great Dog and Virgin

xorda, a mile from either ; where with good ground tackling and a

mg scope of cable out there will be nothing to fear, as the rollers are

ildom accompanied by much wind.

362 THE VIRGIN ISLANDS.

The southeru anchorage between Colison Point and Fallen Jerusalem*
2J miles to the southward of it, is the best, as, if necessary, vessels can
weigh and run out to the westward with more ease than in the former.
The holding ground is good at both places, and, except occasionally,
the water is always smooth. There is a small head of 4:^ fathoms lying
S. 89° W. (west mag.), 800 yards from Colison Point.

Directioiis. — To gain the western roads, either the northern or south-
ern channels may be taken. The passages between the islet« are all
bold and free of danger, with the exception of that between Scrub and
the Dog Islands, in which lies the Tow Rock with 15 feet water on it,
and as it is only 20 yards in extent, it must be carefully approached.

It lies a little more than a mUe N. 74^ W. (N. 73^ W. mag.) of the
West Bog, and the best direction to give is to keep either Dog or
Scrub Island close aboard, as they are bold Und steep-to.

The Great, G-eorge, and West Dogs can not be mistaken, being
three small islets, and the nearest to Virgin Gorda; the two eastern
are 250 and 270 feet high, and the western 150 feet ; 400 yards west-
ward of the George or Northern Dog is the Cockroach Bock.

Seal Dogs are a cluster of three much smaller islets, lying close
together, about 1^ miles from George Dog and one mile trom Moun-
tain Point, with clear channels on both sides. The northernmost islet
is only (5 feet high, the others 74 and 100 feet.

Scrub Island, 450 feet high, lies westward If miles from the West
Dog, and is the easternmost of the numerous small islets and rocks
which lie close off the east end of Tortola, and which are only separated
from each other by small, intricate cuts from 200 to 600 yards wide.

Among these islands, which do not need any further description, are
Guano Island, Great and Little Camanoe Islands, Beef Island, Buck
Island, and Marina Cay. Most of these are high, averaging from 500
to 650 feet, except Marina Cay, which is low.

On the chart an anchorage is marked west of Guano Island, but
during the season of rollers it is unsafe, as they break here in 8 or 9
fathoms.

Southern Channels. — Between the south end of Virgin Gorda and
the east end of St. John, about 14 miles distant, is a range of very
remarkable small, rugged, and most irregularly shaped islets and rocks.
Between most of them are deep and navigable passages leading into
Sir Francis Drake Channel, simple and easy of access in the daytime.
In the sjnaller ones, however, a little precaution is necessary in a sail-
ing vessel to guard against the eddy tides and flaws of wind wl
coming under the lee of the larger islands.

Round Rock is south of Fallen Jerusalem Cay, 220 feet high,
tween them lie the Blinders and other barren rocks, and the grouni^
rocky and foul in the cuts between them.

G-inger Island, 8W. of Round Rock, is irregularly shaped. Betwi
these two islands is Round Rock Passage, the best channel for vesir

CARVAL KOCK NOKMAN ISLAND. 363

coming from the eastward, as the small islands to windward are too
small to obstruct the regular breeze, and the channel is easily recog,
nized by the remarkable appearance of Fallen Jerusalem, a mile to the
northward Of it.

Both sides of the channel are bold and steep -to, and there is no dan-
ger whatever in it.

Between Ginger Island and Coopej: Island, to the westward, the chan-
nel is f mile wide.

Carval Rock is in the southern part of this channel. It is 110 feet
high, bold and steep-to, and may be left on either hand.

Giuger Island is so high that a sailing vessel is very likely to be be-
calmed UDder its lee. For a steamer, or for a sailing vessel with a SB.
breeze, this passage is as good as Kound Eoek Channel.

Cooper Rocks are in the northern part of this channel and just to
the eastward of Cooper Island. The channel between, though deep, is
too narrow to be used by a sailing vessel.

Salt Island. — Ottits NE. point is a rock awash, between which and
Cooper Island is a narrow channel, less than J mile wide, and should
not be attempted by a sailing vessel.

Dead Chest Island is a small islet 2()0 feet high, and a little more
than J mile from it is Blonde Rock, with 12 feet of water on it. Between
this danger and Salt Island is, however, a clear channel nearly a mile
wide. To be sure of avoiding it, keep Salt Island close aboard.

Peter Island forms an elbow. The eastern part is 540 feet high, the
northern part is 440 feet high. The channel between it and Xorman
Island, to the westward, is crooked and seldom used. Besides, it is
obstructed at the S(mthern entrance by the Carrot, a small patch with
10 feet of water on it, lying nearly J mile from the Carrot Bock (84 feet
high) off the south end of Peter Island. It had better, therefore, be
avoided altogether. These islands are inhabited by fishermen.

Oreat Harbor is a snug httle bight on the north side of Peter Ishmd,
and may be entered without the slightest difficulty at any time. The
water is deep close up to the shore, and it has excellent holding ground.
The harbor is open to the NW., but Tortola protects it in that direction
and makes it quite smooth.

Little Harbor, a short distance to leeward of Great Harbor, is of
much the same character, but more confined and more open. There is
no water on Peter Island. Both this island and Salt Island are inhab-
ited bv fishermen.

Norman Island is crooked, and 440 feet high in its western part.
On the western side is a good anchorage in from 7 to 11 fathoms
in a small inlet called the Bight. The shores on each side are steep to,
and the only danger to be avoided is Ringdove Bock. The mark to
clear it is Treasure Point, in line with tlie summit of the western hill.
There is a narrow but deep channel between Ringdove Rock and the
northern point of the entrance.

364 THE VIRGIN ISLANDS.

Although the bight is open to the westward, it is sheltered in that
direction by the island of St. John.

Privateer Bay. — There is good anchorage in this bay, just south of
Treasure Point, with the regular trade wind.

Flanagan or Norman Pass. — ^This passage is the most difficult to
enter from the southeastward, on account of the Santa Monica Bock,
which lies right in the way. Thisfock is very small, with only 10 feet
of water on it. Fort Charlotte, on Tortola, in one with the highest of
the Indian Rocks, N. 2^ B. (N. 3^ E. mag.), leads to the eastward of it,
and Bellevue, the highest hill on the east end of Tortola, in one with
Indian Rocks, X. 17° E. (N. 18° E. mag.), leads to the westward.

The Indians are four remarkable small pinnacle rocks, 50 feet high,
close together, at about 200 yards westward of a small islet 180 feet
high named Pelican Island.

Directions. — When approaching Flanagan Passage from the east-
ward the best way Avill be to haul close round the west side of Norman
Island, which may be done without fear at the distance of about 300
yards.

In beating up or running down along the shore, by keeping Cooper
and Ginger Islands just open of Peter Island, a vessel will pass ^ mile
to the southward of the Santa Monica Rock.

The mark for clearing Ringdove Rock also just clears the Indians.

Sir Franois Drake Channel lies between the islands just described
on the soutb, and Tortola and the islands east of it on the north.
It iwS clear of dangers except in the vicinity of Road. Harbor, in the
island of Tortola, where there are several shallow banks. In the
other parts of the channel a vessel may anchor anywhere to the east-
ward of a line drawn from Buck Island to Dead Chest Island. The bot-
tom is hard and thin and requires a good scope of cable.

With strong north and NB. winds there is a good anchorage on the
SW. side of Beef Island.

Tortola Island is of a very irregular outline and is very mountainous.
In 1885 the inhabitants numbered about 6,300, including a few persons
on Beef, Guano, Camanoe, and Thatch Islands.

Road Harbor is on the SE. side of Tortola, and the only port of en-
try in the British portion of the Virgin Islands. Being completely ex-
posed to the SE., it may be more properly described as a bay surrounded
by an amphitheater of lofty hills, the spurs of which reach the edge of the
shore. Mount Sage overlooking it on the west and Mount Belle\Tie on
the east, the latter 1,270 feet high.

Vessels of large draft should not attempt to enter without a pilot.

Road Toi«rn, the seat of goverimient, stands on the western shore (
the harbor, and inimediately above it a spur of the main ridge wher
Fort Charlotte formerly stood, but no part of it is now seen.

The tiagstaft' formerly used a^s a leading mark for entering is no
placed in the center of the town, near the customhouse.

ROAD TOWN ANCHORAGE — SOPERS HOLE. 366

On the eastern side, imuiecliately opposite, and scattered along the
shore, is the village of Kingston.

The Anchorage is so c^onfined by the numerous shoals at its en-
trance and within it, especially on the lee or western side, that it is only
adapted for vessels of moderate draft, and it is very inconvenient, from
the heavy swells which prevail in the winter season.

Under the lee oif the reef at Fort Burt Point, on the western side of
the entrance to the harbor, there is a small, well sheltered vein of deep
water, which affords a good careening place for coasters of about 9 or
10 feet draft.

Denmark, Scotch, and Lark Banks.— There are from 2 to 6^ fath-
oms water on the Denmark Banks, the eastern extreme of which lies
nearly midway between Hog and Slaney Points, the outer extremes of
the harbor.

Inshore of the Denmark Hanks, in the narrowest part of the entrance
between Fort Burt Point and Kingston, are the Scotch and Lark Hanks ;
the latter, which lies 4:00 yards eastward of the dry reef oft* Fort Burt
Point, has only 2^ fathoms of water on it; the former is about 600 yards
from the eastern shore, and has 2 fathoms on it.

^7ickham and Little Wickham Cays are low, covered with man-
grove bushes, and show well against the cultivated ground behind them j
there are several large cocoanut trees on the SE. part of Wic^kham Cay.

Directions. — Having entered the harbor under easy sail, when Fort
Burt Point bears S. 78^ W. (S. 79o W. mag.) the vessel will be just
within the shoals, and may then round-to and anchor in 10 fathoms, with
Shirley Point bearing about N. 44^ E. (N. 45o E. mag.), distant 400
yards, in from 7 to 13 fathoms water, very uneven bottom.

Handy vessels of light draft, or steamers, having brought Fort Burt
Point on the above bearing, may haul up about N. 24^ W. (N. 23^ W
mag.), and proceed in so far as to bring the cocoanut trees on the SE.
end of Wickham Cay to bear N. 80^ W. (N. 70^ W. mag.), taking care
to anchor eastward of the line of the outer X)art of Slaney Point, touch-
ing the right extreme df Flanagan Island. Tliey will here have room
to weigh and avoid the harbor spit, which stretclies out from the west-
ward into nearly the middle of the anchorage .

Tides. — It is high water, full and change, in Road Harbor at 8h.
30m.; springs rise IJ feet, and the lowest tides arc in April and May.

Sea Coiv Bay may be used as a temporary aucliorage for small ves-
sels.

Sopers Hole is a deep snug bight between Frent^hman Cay and
Little Thatch Island on the south and the western point of Tortola on
the north side, and sheltered from westerly winds by Great Thatcli Is-
land. In the middle of the anchorage there are 12 fathoms, gradually
decreasing to 6 fathoms close to shore.

Directions. — ^There are two passages by which Sopers Hole may be
entered; one between the point, called the West End of Tortola, and

^^.■■:,

■"!)-.

(.'3

' M

Jii

\,^

^♦1

abb THE VIRGIN ISLANDS.

Little Thatch Islaad, and the other between the latter i
Frenchman Cay, If the first is taken, it whoiild be appr
the Thatch Island Cut upon the flood, which will ahoot a vef
taking care to give the we3t point of Little Thatch Island
200 yards.

^ [f coming from the eastward the latter passage will be th<
vesi^el will have a leading wind, and can luft'up close unde:
end of Frenchman Cay, which is steep-t«, and shoot into the
either the flood or ebb.

Thatch Island Cut i» the pai^sage between Thatch Islan
tola, and mast not be attem[)ted by a sailing vessel from the
except with a Sood tide, as tlie eddies and stream are very s

O-reat Thatch Island. — Its eastern point, forming the we
of Thatch Island Cut, is bold and steep-to.

Tides- — In the channel betweoTi St. John and Tortola the
runs to the eastward and the ebb tide to the westward, with
of from 3 to 4 knot.s.

Vessels should be prepared to meet the gosts and bafB
which rush down through the valleys of Tortbla.

Cans Garden Bay is the only aiicliorage on the north side (
where small vesselis may find a temporary shelter. Acrossth
there is a bar with 1'2 feet of water. Inside of tliis bar there (
fathoms, within a reef which runs out from the south side o
The small village of Cane Oarden extends along the ahore i
torn of tlie bay.

St. John Island is of irregular breadth. Earn Head, a )
land, forms the south point of the island; the western portii
posed of irregular hills and peaks. The spiers from the heig
nate abruptly at all the projecting points, and, with the exce
small spot at Coral Bay, nothing is seen but hill and dale.

Coral Bay lies at the east end of the island, at the bott
deep bight just noticed. The eastern side is formed by a loft
tory, which juts out to the SK., and terminates at Moors Poii
to the nearest point of the shore westward the bight is IJ n
and opens to tlie SI5. Tlie shore within this is cut up into thr
bays, and in these again ai'e several little creeks. The westt
the bays is called <_V)riil Harbor, the middle one Hurricane
the eastern one Kound Bay, wliich is immediately under the
of the promontory.

There is no towu or village in Coral Bay, but at Coral Harb
ravian missionaries have a little estiiblishment called Caro
which plane bridle paths lead to all parts of the island.

LLirgo vessels seldom visit tliis bay, and the produi* of the
ing country is carried by coasters to St. Thomas and St. Oro

About halfway between Bam Head and Moors Point is B
84 feet high. There is a cliannel on both sides of it.

EAGLE SHOAL CORAL HARBOR. 367

Eagle ShoaL — In using the channel to the westward, care must be
taken to avoid this shoal.

The shoal consists of two patches of coral, about 40 yards each in
diameter. The easternmost has only 3 feet, and the westernmost 12 feet
of water upon it. They are steep-to, with from C to 7 fathoms all around
them. To dear these patches to the southward, keep Buck Island
open of Ram Head; or do not bring the Ilea^l to the southward of S.
81)0 w. (west mag.) until Turners Point, in the middle of Coral Bay, is
well open eastward to Buck Islet, when stand in to either of the anchor-
ages, keeping cle-ar of the shoal patches off Round Bay.

Leaving the bay with a commanding breeze (not to the southward of
east) a vessel may run through between Sabbat Point and Buck Islet,
and to the leeward of the Eagle Shoal. In doing so, however, do not
bring Sage Mountain in Tortola open eastward of the western hum-
mock on Buck Islet, till clear of the Eagle Shoal, which is about ^ juile
from the shore.

Hurricane Hole. — Of the three anchorages in Coriil Bay this, being
partly sheltered from SE. winds, is the best and safest. A good berth
is in 11 fathoms of water with Turners Point bearing S. 52^ E. (S. ol^
E. mag.) and Harbor Point S. 78^ W. (S. 79° W. mag.).

Round Bay. — ^The best anchorage is in 13 fathoms of water, with
Moors Point bearing 8. 63^ E. (S. 62o E. mag.), 600 yards. As a tem-
porary ancliorage with the usual trade winds this is a good berth, but
with a SE, wind it is very rough. There are several patches of 4 fath-
oms in the bay.

Coral Harbor — ^The anchorage here is smooth, with the ordinary
winds, but being on a lee shore, and having a narrow entrance, only
small fore-aAd-aft vessels can work out safely. After luffing up at the
entrance, the wind becomes so baffling that a vessel will perhaps be
obliged to anchor and warp, sliould she wish to go higher up.

Water, Otter, Princess, and Borck Creeks, in Coral Bay, are snug
places for clearing out; the sandy points on the southern shores of the
two former are very convenient for that purpose. In Water Creek a
large vessel might heave down with safety, as there are from 15 to 20
feet water, close to the shore, or lie moored in perfect securify during
the hurricane months. Generally, in all these anchorages, the gronnd
under 5 fathomsls roj^ky, but in deeper water it is sand and mud, and
fair holding ground.

TVater. — At the head of Coral Bay there is a well of excellent wat^T
convenient to get at; boats may lay ahmgsidetlie wharf in smooth water
and a good road enables the casks to be rolled up to it with little laboi*.
Firew(K)d is plentiful, but it is private property.

The Tides set across the moutli of Coral Bay; the Hood to the 8VV.
and the ebb to the NP]. at the rate of J mile an hour. There is no
tidal stream within the bay, and the rise and fall of springs rarely ex-
ceeds one foot. The time of high water, full and change, varies from
Ih. Om. to 9h. Om.

368 THE VIEGIN ISLANDS.

Great Lameshnr Bay afiurds shelter for small vessels in 9 6
of water jn8t under Cabrite Point.

Reef Bay,n little weatiraid of Lameshur Bay, is easily disting
by a remarkable white cliff, 135 feet high.

There is no shelter e.'icept for boats.

Pish Bay, \ye8tward of Keef Bay, is only 200 yards wide b
the reefs at its entrance, bnt nearly 800 yards deep; within tbei
sonndinf^f* gradnally decrease from 4 fathoms to the shore.

Rendezvona Bay, to tlie westward of Bittless Point, is qni
of danger, but open to the southward.

Great Cnu Bay, at the SW. end of St. John, affords good
for droghers. From between the two bluffs at its entrance th«
gradually decreases from 4 to 3 fathoms, and then suddenly to :

Little Cmz Bay is a small cove at the western extremity
John, hut only fit for coasters. There is a village on the shore,
■white building called the fort. An excellent road leads thence
upper parts of the island and Coral Bay.

Anchor^e. — To the westward of Little Cruz Bay there is a
age iu 11 fathoms water, over sand and mud, with the fort bear
73° E. (S. 72° K. mag.), the tenter of the Two Brothers in one wi
west point of Grass Cay ; and the dry rocks off the east side of 5
Cay in one with the Dog Bock,

DirectiooB. — A vessel may approach this anchorage by the p
between Meeren Cay and St. John, but it can not be reconimen
sailing vessels on ac<'ourit of the baffling winds under the higb
The best mark to run through it from the southward is the <
Bock, off the east end of Congo Cay, and the western hummock >
west end of Jost Van Dyke in one, bearing N. 10° E. (N. 11"^ E.

Caution. — The reef off Turner Bay and the dry rocks off Meen
are bold and steep-to; but care must be taken to guard against
set out of the course by the strong tide that runs at, the rate of 2
between the islands and the main, the flood to the soathward, tl
to the northward. The best way, however, will be to pass to l€
of Meeren Cay, and to stand on until the vessel can feteh the a
age.

Johnson Reef. — At 1^ miles northward of Little Cmz Bay,
mile from Hogsnest Point, is the largest of the three Dnrloe Ci
feet high ; the other two cays, 45 and 18 feet high, are abont 3i
400 yards XE. and NW, of it. Nearly midway between these ca
Whistling Cay, 2.'t0 feet high, is Johnson Beef. It is J mile in I
lies J mile from the shore, and always breaks. There are 3J fa
water 200 yards north of it, 3 fathoms at about the same distant
and west of it, and between it and the shore irregular soundings,
ing from 14 to 10 fathoms.

FranciB Bay, formed by Mary Point, and somewhat prot«ct«d
round as NW, by Whistling Cay, affords good anchorage in 9 fa

LEINSTER BAY ST. THOMAS ISLAND. 369

water, sand. Between Whistling Cay and the shore southward or it
is a bank 800 yards in length and 250 in breadth, fronting the bay,
with 3| to ^ fathoms water on it. ' The cut between Whistling Cay
and the main is clear, but not easily navigated on account of the baffling
winds from the high land forming Mary Point.

Leinster Bay. — On the northern shore, southward of Thatch Island
cut, is an indentation of about | mile in length and about ^ mile deep.
The western part of it, called Leinster Bay, is separated from Francis
Bay by a narrow neck of land only 300 yards across, and the shore is
here fringed with a coral ledge awash, easily seen. Its eastern part is
named Smith Bay, where there is a small cay, called Watermelon, under
which a vessel may anchor at about 200 yards from the shore. This
cay is bold and steep-to, and is separated from the island by a channel
'200 yards wide, carrying 12 feet water. A vessel must shoot up under
its west side, and anchor midway between it and the beach to leeward,
which is about 400 yards distant.

There are several other small bays on the northern side of St. John
where small vessels may find shelter, but being exposed to the rollers
they are not safe.

St. Thomas Island. — The island is mountainous, and in its general
aspect much resembles St. John. A chain of mountains runs along the
middle of the island, with spurs branching to the north and south, and
terminating abruptly at the seashore. The two principal eminences
are Signa] Hill, nearly in the middle of the island, 1,500 feet high, and
West Mountain, 1,650 feet high. The island is surrounded by small
isles and rocks, which are almost universally steep-to, with very few
hidden dangers.

St. Thomas Harbor, on the south side of the island, is excellently
protected from all ordinary winds, and is perfectly easy of access. The
town called Charlotte Amalia owes its commercial importance to its
being a free x)ort, and also to its being headquarters in the West Indies
for numerous steamship lines. It is also the seat of government of the
Danish West Indies. During the last 100 years it has twice suffered
severely from hurricanes and in 1867 from a tidal wave. St. Thomas
is gradually losing the commercial importance and prosperity it once
enjoyed.

Prior to 1880 yellow fever was prevalent, but the cutting of a canal
through a neck of land causes a tidal flow in the harbor, and since 1880
there has been no epidemic.

The population of the island is about 12,000 (1891); of Charlotte
Amalia, about 10,000. It is liglited by gas.

Provisions of all kinds can be obtained at an a<lvance of 25 per cent,
over those of ^ew York.

The aiithority to visit is the governor. The United States is repre-
sented by a consul and vice-consul.

Water can be bad in any quantity; costs J to one cent per gallon.
18402 24

370 THE VIRGIN ISLANDS.

Coal. — ^The usuat supply is about 7,500 tons and costs from $6.50 to
$7.50 per ton. Large vessels drawing 27 feet can coal alongside the dock.
If the coal is brought off in lighters 60 cents per ton is charged; stow-
ing, 10 cents per ton.

Dock. — ^There is one floating dock; length, 280 feet; length of keel
288 feet; inside breadth, 72 feet; greatest draft, 21 feet; capadty,
3,000 tons. Orane lifts 40 tons.

Repairs may be made to steamers. Sailing vessels may be repaired
here, there being ship-carpenters, sail makers, and riggers.

Hospitals. — There is one general, one marine, one for the poor, and
a lazaretto. The charges are 81 per day. The sanitary condition of
the place is good, the streets being clean and well kept.

Fort Charges. — Light dues, one cent per ton. Health officer from
infected ports only; night service, double fees, $4 to $6. Doctor's visit,
$1.50 for each visit or $3 per head if entire crew is contracted for. La-
borers, $1 per day without meals, 40 cents with meals. Stone ballast,
75 cents per ton. Spanish bills of health and manifest to Puerto Rico
and Cuba in ballast, 817. Bill of health for Haiti, $7; for Venezuela,
$6 to $8. Each vessel on arrival will receive a copy of harbor regula-
tions free.

Pilots are not necessary or compulsory. When used the charges are
as follows : For sailing vessels inwards : Draft of 10 feet and under, $2^
and $1 additional for each additional 2 feet up to 22 feet; 22 to 24 feet,
$10; above 24 feet, $15. Outwards: Draft of 12 feet and under, $2;
12 to 14 feet, $3; 14 to 16 feet, $3.50; 16 to 18 feet, $4; 18 to 20 feet,
$5 ; 20 to 22 feet, $6 ; 22 to 24,' $7 ; above 24 feet, $10. From sunset to
sunrise the pilotage is about he^lf as much again in addition. Steamers
pay $6 for 12 feet and under; $8 from 12 to 16 feet; $12 from 16 to 20
feet; $18 from 20 to 24 feet; above 24 feet, $24. Between sunset and
sunrise they pay $8, $12, $18, $24, and $32, respectively. Warping in
harbor, full pilotage; mooring, half pilotage.

Telegraph. — ^There are three cables, and there is telegraphic oommu*
nication with all parts of the world.

Bteamers. — ^There are several lines to the United States, to Europe,
and ports in the West Indies.

Lights. — A lighthouse, painted white, stands on Muhlenfels Point,
and shows 115 feet above the sea a fixed white light, visible 12 miles.

Two small lights are shown in north x)fli,rt of harbor, a red light from
Kings Wharf landing place, and a green light from end of new pier to
the southward of Kings Wharf.

Frenchman Cap. — In approaching the harbor of St. Thomas £
the eastward two small islands to the southward will be observed. *i
most southerly of these is a small islet and is i)erfectly steep-to.

Buck Island, the other, is larger than Frenchman Cap. On
south and east sides it is steep-to; on the north side there are 5 £
oms of water at the distance of 100 yards, and off the west end a le

PACKET ROCK FKEDERIK KNOLL. 371

of rocks ruQs to the same distance. Good landing in a little bay at the
west end.

Packet Rock, at the distance of l-^V niiles northward of the central
part of Back Island and a little more than i mile fr(yn the shore of St.
Thomas, is a small coral shoal^ with only 5 feet of water on it. The sea
does not always break on it, and it is ateep-to, and can only be seen at
a short distance.

There is a clear channel between it and St. Thomas.

To avoid it coming from the eastward do not pass to the northward
of a line drawn from Ram Head through the south extreme of Dog Is-
land till you are to the westward of Buck Island.

The Triangles are from one to 3 feet above low water and about ^
mile from the shore. South of these three rocks, about 200 yards, there
is a small detached rock about 36 yards in diameter and having 17 feet
of water upon it. A black buoy, surmoiinted by a black disk, is moored
100 yards south of the rock.

The houses on the summit of the middle hill of the town well open
westward of Muhlenfels Point clears both these dangers.

Point KnolL — Off Muhlenfels Point at a distance of 150 yards is a
Bmall coral head with 3 fathoms of water on i,t, called Point Knoll.

Scorpion Rock. — In the entrance to the harbor and about half-way
between CoweU Point and Muhlenfels Point lies the Scorpion Bock,
About 27 yards long, 10 yards wide, and having 20 feet of water on it at
the lowest spring tides. At 50 yards distance, on each side of the rook,
there are from 26 to 30 feet. It is marked by a red buoy surmounted
by a blaclc disk.

RkoAo Bank, i mile N. 18o W. (N. no W. mag.) of Point Knoll, con-
sists of three coral heads lying close together with from 15 to 18 feet
water over them. They are marked by a black buoy.

Snport Rock, being kept whitewashed, is easily distinguished by
night or day. At its base are some large bowlders which extend west-
erly 60 yards, and are just covered with water.

On the westernmost of the rocks is an iron beacon 13 feet high and
3 feet in diameter with diamond-shaped head painted white. Between
Bnpert Bocks and Havensight Point there are from 12 to 15 feet of water.

The anchorage for vessels in quarantine lies between Bupert Bock
and Bhode Bank, having from 5 to 3^ fathoms.

Frederik KnoU. — On ^he west side of the entrance the shore is steep-
to except directly off Frederik Point at the narrowest part of the en-
trance, where there are two rocky heads with 15 to 18 feet of water on
them from 75 to 100 yards from the battery. These are the only dan-
gers on the west side of the channel.

Anchoraga. — ^Tbe best anchorage in the harbor for a ship of large
iraft, and a good position for weighing, is with the highest part of Bu-
pert Bock in one with the lighthouse, and Long Bay fairly open, in 5^
&tboms. There are several patches of coral in the N£. part of the har-
bor, the shoalest of which has 16 feet water on it.

372 THE VIRGIN ISLANDS.

Cantion. — ^Care must, however, be taken to observe the port regula-
tion, which forbids a vessel anchoring in firont of the fort so as to mask
it or prevent it from taking a range of the whole entrance of the har-
bor. The sterns ^of vessels' anchoring to the eastward must conae-
qnently not be more westerly than to bring the flagstaff of the fort ta
bear K 240 W. (N. 23° W. mag.), and thB bows of vessels anchoiing on
the western side of the harbor not more easterly than to bring it S". 1(K>
E. (N. 11<^ E. mag.). Merchant vessels discharging cargo lie off the
town to the westward of the fort; those ready for sea, preparatory for
sailing, warp into Long Bay, to the eastward of it.

Pilots. — Although the entrance to St. Thomas Harbor presents no
difi&culties, the assistance of a government pilot, who is also harbor-
master, one of whom always comes alongside to offer his services^ is fre-
quently useful to x)oint out a convenient berth.

DirectionB. — Vessels approaching St. Thomas Harbor from the east-
ward, and intending to take the channel between Buck Island and Packet
Bock, should bring the south extreme of Dog Island in one with Bam
Head (St. John) bearing N. 83o E. (N. 84° E. mag.), which mark will
lead i mile to the southward of the Packet Bock and in mid-channeL

Continue steering about west until Bupert Beacon opens westward
of Muhenfels Point; then steer for Frederik Battery until the leading
marks come on, viz : The tower of the Danish Church in line with the
center of the water battery barracks bearing iN". 10° W. (N. 9^ W,
mag.) ; haul up on this mark, which leads between the Scorpion Bock
and Bhode Shoal, and 100 yards westward of the foul ground off Bupert
Bock, which last having passed, anchor as convenient. The tower of
the Danish Church is low and square, and the water battery barracks
consist of a block of one-storied buildings surrounded by a double
verandah.

Steamers entering from the westward may go in leeward of the Scor-
pion Bock, by steering with Frederik Battery and Kiaer Tower in one
bearing N. 2^ B. (N. 3° E. mag.), until Cowell Point touches the south
end of Sand Bay (Water Island) bearing S. 89? W. (west mag.)} when
they will be abreast the Scorpion, and may then shax>e a mid-channel
course, taking care to give Frederik Point a berth of 200 yards.

At Night there is no difficulty in entering the harbor, but it will be
better to pass between Buck Island and Frenchman Cap, and having
brought the light to bear N. 1^ W. (north mag.), to avoid the Triangles
and the 17-foot rock south of them, stand in boldly towards the en-
trance. The Bupert Bock, being whitewashed, will soon show itself.

When leaving the harbor a vessel will generally have a leading win
especially if she weighs before 9 a. ni.; for although there is no regul;
land wind, it frequently happens that the breeze slackens and inclin
a little out between sunset and the above hour, and this is observed
all the lofty islands. Use the same leading marks, and if the wit
should happen to be to the southward of east, she must run to leewr
of the Scorpion.

ST. THOMAS — TIDES — GREAT KRUM BAY." 373

Tides. — It is high water, full and change, in St. Thomas Harbor,
between 7h. Om. and 9h. Om., and the rise seldom exceeds one foot at
q[>rings. The mean level of the sea is a foot lower in April and May
than at other periods of the year.

Oregerie Channel, immediately westward of St. Thomas Harbor, i&
formed by Water Island on the south and the shore of St. Thomas on
the north. It makes a complete elbow, sweeping round from the west,
northerly, to the east. The eastern arm, named East Gregerie Channel,
is free from danger, with a depth of from 6 to 7 fathoms. At its en-
trance, between Cowell and Sprat Points, it is ^ mile wide, and at the
elbow or NW. end. Between Careen Hill and Banana Point, J mile.
IJie S W. arm, named West Gregerie Channel, is about the same length,
and i mUe wide, witjh a depth of from 6 to 9 fathoms. At the head or
elbow it opens out into a basin i mile in diameter, well sheltered, but
obstructed in the center by the Gregerie Bank and Sandy Point Bock.
A canal connects East Gregerie Channel with St. Thomas Harbor.

dregerie Bank is a small patch of dead coral and sand, about 80
yards long and 40 yards wide, and the least water on it is 15 feet, which
depth lies with Cowell Point just shut in by Banana Point.

Sandy Point Rock is small, with only 2 feet water on it, and lies
near the end of the shallow sand spit which runs off 200 yards to the KIV.
from Sandy Point. When on the rock, Cowell Battery will be seen just
over Banana Point. The distance between it and the Gregerie Bank
is less than 200 yards, with a depth of 22 feet. In the channel to the
northward of the Gregerie the depth is not less than 27 feet at about
100 yards from the bank.

Anchorage. — Anchorage will be found anywhere in Gregerie Channel
elear of the shoals. The safest and most convenient spots are in the
elbow {ind SW. arm, for a vessel will there be more sheltered from the
swell which rolls in from the eastward, and will have a steadier breeze
and more room for weighing. A good berth will be found either to the
NE. or west of the Gregerie Bank; if the latter, Kiaer Tower should be
just over the northern foot of Careen Hill.

BirectionB. — Sailing vessels wishing to take* up an anchorage in
Gregerie Channel had better enter by the eastern arm and leave it by
the western. To sail through, run in boldly in mid-channel, and when
nearing Gregerie Bank keep Cowell Point open of Banana Point until
KisBr Tower begins to open to the northward of Careen HiU; then hard
a starboard, and steer down the center of the western arm, in which
there are no dangers. This will lead about 100 yards northward of the
Gregerie Bank, in 27 feet, but the turning of the elbow is sharp for a
long vessel.

Tides. — The flood in Gregerie Channel sets through to the eastward
at the rate of about half a knot at springs; the ebb with the same force
in the opposite direction.

Gtareat Kmm Bay is a small inlet running up between two lofty hills
at the western side of the entrance to the S W. arm of Gregerie Channel.

374 . ThE VIRGIN ISLANDS.

Bay is close to the westward of Great Krum Bay, about
i ^ile wide between Mosquito and Red Points, ^ mile deep, and opw to
the southward. Off the latter point a narro^w rocky ledge extends along
^ mile to the southward, and on its extreme end is a small coral
head, called Eed Point Shoal, with only 2 feet water on it, and steep-ta
Within the bay the depth from 5 fathoms gradually decreases toward
the shore, but with this dangerous ledge under the lee it is only safe
for droghers.

Porpoise Rocks are three small rocks, just out of water, and con-
nected by a shallow ledge. They are steep-to, and lie westward about
§ mile from the SW. end of Water Island, with a deep and clear chan-
nel between.

Water Island Anchorage. — ^There is excellent anchorage under the
west side of Water Island for vessels of the largest draft. If intending
to anchor here, run in about midway between the Porpoise Bocks and
the island, and come to in 9 fathoms of water, a« soon as the town of
St. Thomas is seen coming open to the northward of the island; or with
the south extreme of the island S. 35o E. (S. 34^ E. mag.), and the
north end of Drif Bay Beach N. 78° E. (S. 79o E. mag.).

Southwest Road, between Perseverance Bay and Flat Gays, is a
good temporary anchorage with the wind as far to the southward as ESE.
The approaches to it are free of danger, except Bed Point Shoal. To
avoid this shoal keep Flag Hill Peak (on the east side of the harbor of
St. Thomas) open to the southward of Mosquito Point, until the south
points of Flat and Turtle Dove Cays are in one S. 50o W. (S. 51o W.
mag.), when haul up and anchor as most convenient. Mosquito Point
and Flag Hill Peak in one X. 81^ E. (X. 82© E. mag.), leads 100 yaids
southward of the Red Point Shoal in 9 fathoms of water.

Tides. — Inshore there is scarcely any stream, but between Flat Cays
and Saba Island the flood during the springs runs to the ESE. at the
rate of about a knot, and the ebb in the opposite direction with the
same velocity.

Great North Side Bay. — On the north side of the island of St
Thomas there are no good anchorages. Directly across the island firom
St. Thomas Harbor is a deep bight called Great North Side Bay, the
eastern side of which is formed by a long tongue of land extending to
the !NW. from the main island and terminates at Picara Point.

The bay is open to the N W., and therefore liable to rollers. A tem-
porary anchorage may be/ound under the weather shore.

The only danger in approaching is the Ornen Eock, lying J mile K.
630 W. (N. 620 W. mag.) of Picara Point.

St. James Bay is at the eastern end of St. Thomas, and between
and Great St. James Island. It is well sheltered, except to the SVt
and aifords a good and secure anchorage except during the hurricar
season. To enter it, pass the rocks called the Stragglers, off the soul
end of Great St. James Island, at a distance of 100 yards, and ancli

cow AND CALF ROCKS GREAT TOBAGO. 375

with the south extreme of these rocks bearing about 8. 29° E. (S. 28^
E. mag.), distant 700 yards, and Fish Cay in the eastern part of the bay,
bearing K 72o E. (N. 73o E. mag.).

Coi^ and Calf Rocks are west of the Stragglers, between which
and the nearest point of St. Thomas Island there is a channel having
irregular soundings of from 5 to 9 fathoms. In passing through this
channel the fort in Little Omz Bay (St. John) — which being white-
washed and standing alone is easily distinguished — should not be
opened to the northward of Great St. James; the fort in one with the
NW. point of that island will bear N. 61© E. (N. 62o E. mag.).

The Soimd.: — There is an excellent anchorage in the space between
the islands of St. Thomas and St. John, quite sheltered from all winds
except southerly ones, which only blow during the hurricane months.

This space is called the Sound, and is secured against rollers, but
the tided are very strong.

The Brothers are two small barren* rocks, 20 feet high, lying in the
middle of the Sound. A ledge runs off gradually from their north side,
deepening to 5 fathoms at the distance of 250 yards; they may be
approached on their south side to the distance of 100 yards.

To enter the Sound from the southward the channel lies between St,
John and Dog Islandi^ at the east end of St. Thomas.

South Channel to the Sound. — The Brothers may be passed on
either side, but care must be taken not to pass to the eastward of ti line
drawn from the west end of Grass Cay to the south end of Meeren Cay,
in order to keep clear of the reef off Turner iiay.

Northern ChannehEt into the Sound.— There are three channels
by which a vessel may enter the Sound from the north, called the Wind-
ward^ Middle, and Leeward Channels. The approaches to the northern
channels between the islands to the northward of Tortola, St. John,
and St. Thomas present no serious difficulty. The eastern passage
between Tortola and Jost Van Dyke is especially clear and safe. It is
only necessary to keep in mid-channel, where the least water is 9
fathoms.

Jost Van Dyke Island is lofty and rugged, bold and steep-to,
and rises to the heiglit of 1,060 feet. On the south side are two small
bays called Great and Little Harbors; they are only fit anchorages for
coasters.

Little Jost Van Dyke Island is separated from the east end of
the greater island by a sliallow ledge 200 yards wide. Close to its east
end is a small islet named Green Cay. South of the cay there is a
small dry rock, and shallow water for nearly J mile.

Sandy Cay. — Its east end is 66 feet high, but to the westward it
terminates in a low sand spit, and both ends are foul to the distance of
200 yards. The channel between it and Jost Van Dyke is J mile wide,
but the Jost Van Dyke shore, which is steep-to, must be kept aboard.

Great Tobago. — A small rock awash and steep-to lies about 100
ards from the north point. The south side of the island is fringed

376 THE VIRGIN ISLANDS.

with coral to a short distance, but all elsewhere the shore is bold, close
home to the cliffs.

Watson Rock, ^ mile from the SW. side of the islaud, is a remark-
able small, barren, perpendicular rock, steep-to, and terminates in a
peak 90 feet high.

Mercuiias Rock. — The channel between Jost Van Dyke and Great
TobagS is clear of dangers with the exception of Mercurias Bock having
7 feet of water on it.

The rock is small and steep-to, and can be easily avoided by keeping
the Jost Van Dyke Shore aboard.

Uttle Tobago is nearly ^ mile in length, i mile in breadth, and 380
feet high. There is a safe and clear channel between these islands,
but as nothing would be gained it will be better to pass throagh
either of the others; should it be necessary, however, to take it^ keep
a little to the windward or eastward of Little Tobago, taking the
bearing of Watson Bock to avoid the King Bock which is awash,
small, bold, and steep-to. Between it and Great Tobago the depth is
6 and 7 fathoms.

Hans LoUik is a high rocky islet, lying 3^ miles SW. of Litde
Tobago.

Little Hans LoUik is a smaller and lower islet 400 yards to the
northward. The two are connected by a coral ledge nearly dry. Still
farther to the north, at a distance of 200 yards, is a third and smi^er
islet with a sunken rock close off its north side.

The western sides of these islets are steep-to, but to the southward
is the Hans LoUik Bock, 700 yards from the south point of Hans LoUik.
This rock is about 200 yards in diameter, is awash, and can be seen
from a ship's deck about one mile.

To the southward of the chain of islets just described are the
northern entrances into the Sound.

Directions. — The channel between Hans LoUik and Little Tobago
is free of danger, but being to leeward of the middle ox inner channels
to the Sound a vessel may have to beat through, and this can only be
accomplished with the flood tide. It is therefore more useful to ves-
sels running through Sir Francis Drake Channel, and northward of
St. John, with the wind weU to the northward; or to those leaving
the Sound. Should the wind be so far to the northward that they can
not fetch through, they may take the channel between St. Thomas
and Hans LoUik, which is a mile wide.

Windward or Inner North Passage lies between the Levant,
and Durloe Cays, and is about 600 yards wide.

Dnrloe Cays are three small islets near the NW. point of St. Jot
and are easily distinguished. The most southerly and largest of th«
cays is 60 feet high. They are clear and steep-to.

Blunder Rocks, off the east end of Lovango Cay, are awash, aD<
extend about 400 yards from the cay.

CONGO CAY CrRKENT HOLE AND PASSAGE. 377

Congo Cay is a short distance north of Lovaugo Cay, and has two
remarkable rocks oil* its eastern i)oint, of which the easternmost, about
400 yards distant, is called the Carval Rock, and marks the western
side of the entrance to the windward channel.

Tides. — In this channel the ebb runs NE. by N., the flood SW., at
the rate of 2 miles an hour. The channel may be used by the largest
vessels as long as a speed of 4 knots can be depended upon, the current
at times reaching 2^ miles an hour. Should the wind die out, a vessel
may anchor, observing that under 10 fathoms the bottom is rocky and
not good holding ground.

The dangers in this channel are all apparent, but, with the ebb tide
running against the wind, there is a tide rip which looks like broken
water, and is apt to alarm a stranger.

Between the Durloe Gays and between them and tlie island of St.
John there are deep and clear passages, but it is better to pass to the
westward of the Durloe Cays. Between Lovango and Mingo Cays there
is a 3-fathom passage, but, as it is narrow and the tide strong, it is only
fit for boats.

Middle Passage, between Grass and Thatch Cays, is about 600 yards
wide, but being to leeward, is mostly used by vessels leaving the Sound.
It may, however, be taken from the northward on the ebb, provided a
vessel can lay up SB. ; and she may work through from this, being
careful to avoid a small rock awash, lying N. 7iP W. (N. 73^ W. mag.)
rather more than 150 yards from the west end of Grass Cay. This dan-
ger can easily be seen from aloft, and as it lies on a line with the north-
em parts of Congo and Grass Cays in one, bearing N. 69^ E. (N. 70^ E.
mag.), in coming from the northward this will be a warning of ap-
proach; and going through from the southward, w^hen Congo is seen
northward of Grass Cay, the vessel may be hauled to the wind.

Tides. — In the middle passage the flood sets to the southward at the
rate of about 2 knots at springs, and takes a SE. direotirm inside; the
ebb runs in the opposite direction with the same strength.

Leeward Passage, between Thatch Cay and the north side of St.
Thomas, is 800 yards wide, and has no danger in it whatever. The
flood sets through to the eastward at the rate of about 2 knots, and
the ebb with the same velocity in the opposite direction. Being so far
to leeward, it is only used by vessels running through from the east-
ward. The west point of Thatch Cay may be rounded close, when they
can haul up, passing either eastward or westward of Hans LoUik.

Shark Islet — Shark Islet is small, rocky, 40 feet high, and lies near
the shore at the east end of St. Thomas. If the channel between Hans
Lollik and the Omen Rock is taken, keep the west point of Thatch Cay
in one with Shark Islet, S. 57° E. (S. 5(y'=> B. mag.), until clear of Hans
Lollik Eock.

Current Hole and Passage is between Current Hole Point, at the
east end of St, Thomas, and great St. James Island, nearly 400 yards

378 THE VIEGIN ISLANDS.

distant. The passage is divided nearly in the center by the Correat
Bock, 15 feet high, and between it and St. Thomas there are only 9 feet
water; but on the St. James side a vessel will carry 23 feet throngh
a small vein not qnite 100 yards in breadth and 200 yards in longtlL
The tides msh throngh the opening with such violence as to cause a
strong race, which gives the name of Current Hole to the small bight
between it and Cabrita Point, the eastern extreme of St. Thomas.

The conrse throngh the channel is S. 22o W. (8. 23° W. mag.). It
is quite safe and may be useful to vessels running to the sonthwaid
through the Sound when unable to weather Dog Island and Bocks. As
soon as Current Bock is passed, steer out 8. 27^ W. (S. 28^ W. mag.),
passing between Cow Bock and the Stragglers, off the SW. point of
Great St. James,, all of which are steep-to and well above water.

Tides. — The flood sets through Current Passage to t^e sonthwaid at
the rate of at least 3 knots, and the ebb with equal force to the north-
ward; and, as it should be taken by a sailing vessel on the ebb, thero
must be a steady, commanding breeze to stem it^

St. James Cut — A depth of 20 feet may be carried throngh the
cut between Oreat and Little St James, passing on either side of tlie
Welk Bock, which lies on the eastern side of the islands.. The duuuiel
is on the Great St. James side, but so circuitous as tq be by no means
safe. The eye will be the best guide for it.

Dog Island Cnt. — ^The opening between Dog Island and Little St
James is barred across with only 3 fathoms of water and having also
a 9-foot rock in mid-channel.

^Neither of the last three channels should be attempted by a sailing
vessel except iu a case of emergency and with a commanding breeze.

Brass Islands are two small islets close off the north side of SU
Thomas, and about 3 miles westward of Hans LoUik; the Inner Brass is
260 feet and the Outer Brass 430 feet high. Between the inner islet and
St. Thomas there is a 5-fathom channel 400 yards wide; and between
the two islets there is a channel of 7 fathoms, 600 yards wide, but they
are only safe for coasters.

Tides. — The flood sets between them to the SW. at the rate of about
a knot, but the ebb is scarcely i^erceptible.

Anchorage. — Under the Inner Brass there is secure and well shd*
tered anchorage for coasters in 6 or 7 fathoms water at about i mile
off shore, with the nortli end of the islet N. 10^ E. (N. ll^ E. mag.).

Lizard Rock is a small, rugged islet, 15 feet high, bold and steep-to
on all sides; it lies about J mile westward of the Inner Brass Island.

West and Salt Cays are only separated from the west end of fc
Thomas by a small boat channel. They are each about J mile long ai
lie close together; Salt Cay, the outer one, is 250 feet high, bold, an
and steep-to.

Dutchman Cap, to the northward of Salt Cay, is a remarkab
small, rocky islet, rising abruptly from the sea to a peak 270 feet hifr"

COCKROACH ISLAND ^PASSAGE ISLANDS. 37IJ

with deep water close aroand. At about 100 feet from its SW. side
there is a small rock 3 feet out of water. Between it and Salt Cay the
soundings are from 14 to 18 fathoms.

Cockroach Island is a small rocky islet of irregular shape, with a
flattish summit and bold perpendicular cliffs 155 feet high. It is nearly
of the same size as Dutchman Cap. Tlie passage between is quite free
of danger.

Cricket Rock is the most northern islet of the group in this direc-
tion. It is 45 feet high, bold, and steep-to, and there is a clear channel
between the two islets.

Savana Island is uninhabited, but used for breeding goats. On its
west side it is steep-to, having 16 fathoms 100 yards froti the rocks.
Some detached dry rocks extend nearly 100 yards from its south point,
with 15 fathoms close to their outer edge; there are also some straggling
rocks 8 or 10 feet high, bold, and steep- to, extending about ^ mile off its
eastern side. Close to its north point is a small sunken rock.

Turkey Cay, in the middle of the Savana Island Passage, is a small
narrow islet, 80 feet high, and surrounded by deep water except at the
south end, where there are 3 fathoms at a^hort distance.

Bait Water Money Rock is about ^ mile to the SE. of the cay^
is 10 feet high, bold, and steep-to, with a clear channel between.

About half way between the north end of Savana Islaud and the west
end of Salt Cay there is a small coral i)atch with only 5 fathoms of
water on it.

Everywhere else in the passage the depths are from 13 to 10 fathoms.

Directions. — The above channel may be safely navigated by sailing
vessels, the oidy caution necessary being to guard against the tides,
which in the Savana Passage run at tlie rate of 3 knots and in the
others about one knot. With the ordinary east wmd a vessel will
scarcely be ^ible to stem the ebb which sets to the l^W. in the pas-
sage, and it will be better in beating up to haul close round the south
end of Savana Islaud and stand well to the southward, so as to
avoid the strength of the inshore tide. With the flood it will be an
advantage to take this passage, as by keeping along shore the whole
of its strength will be gained and smooth water.

Sail Rock — so called from its great resemblance to a vessel under
sail — rises precipitously from the sea to the height of 125 feet. It lies S.
16^ W. (S. 170 W. mag.) 3J miles from Savana Island and is a remarkable
object from off the harbor of St. Thomas. It is about 100 yards in
diameter, quite barren, with a light grayish appearance, from its being
frequented by birds at certaiii seasons. Nearly 200 yards S. 67^ W. (S.
^8^ W. mag.) of it there is a small rock nearly awash, the only danger
lear it; on all other sides it is bold and steep-to.

Passage Islands. — The islands and cays lying between the Virgin
Passage and the east end of Puerto Rico are sometimes called the
Passage Islands. They belong to Spain and are dependencies of Puerto
Rico.

380 THE VIRGIN ISLANDS.

Ctilebra Island, sometimes called Carlit and Serpent Inland, is of a
very irregular outline. It is uninhabited, of moderate elevation, broken
and rugged, tbickly wooded, witli scarcely a level spot on the surface,
and near the center rises to the height of 650 feet. The northern shore
is bold and steep-to.

On all oth^r sides there are small islets and reefs which shelter good
anchorages, and at the easit end there are two excellent harbors, but no
water.

Northeast Cay is oval-shaped, 340 feet high, and thickly wooded.

Bird Cay is 30(^ yards N. 1^ W. (north mag.) of the east end. It
is a remarkable small rocky islet, 60 feet high, and at about a mile
to the KE. of this end are the Shark and Whale Bocks, two small rocky
islets 16 and 10 feet high; S. 46o E. (S. 46^ E. mag.), 800 yards from
these, are the Palada Cays, two small rocky islets, 80 and 84 feet high
^and steep-to.

Culebrita Islet lies to the SE. of Northeast Cay and at about the
dame distance as the latter from the shore. It is of irregular shape,
305 feet high, and thickly wooded. From the south end a reef, nearly
dry, extends in a SSW. direction for 2J miles and protects the Sound
and Mangrove Harbor. Six hundred yards from Pond Point (the NW.
end of the islet) is Davy Cay, a small rocky islet 30 feet high.

Light — From a lighthouse on the highest part of Culebrita Islet a
fixed white light is exhibited, at an elevation of 305 feet, and is visible
in clear weather about 12 miles. (Eeported visible 18 miles.)

Anchorage. — Excellent anchorage will be found within the cays and
islands just described, but the best, called the Sound, is toward their
southern end under the lee of the reef, in front of the Great Harbor, a
clear space 1 J nules in length and J milp in breadth.

The best anchorage in the Sound is with the extreme west end of
Davy Cay, touching the east end of Bird Cay, If. 18o W: (N. 17o W
mag.), and the SE. end of Culebrita, S. 68^ E. (8. 67^ E. mag.), in 10 or
12 fathoms water, sand. Here a vessel will be in a good x>osition for
weighing, and will be protected by the reef to the southward, which,
although broken and scattered, is sufficiently compact to break tbe
sea.

Middle Ground. — In the approach to the Sound the space between
Culebrita and the main island is somewhat obstructed by a shoal on
which the depth varies from 2 to 5 fathoms; the shallowest part lies
about 500 yards from the nearest part of Culebrita.

Weather Channel — ^To enter the Soun4 fr'om the northward betwc
Northeast and Davy Cays, there are three passages. The southern
these between Palada Cays and Culebrita is the most direct, but
too difficult for a stranger, as no mark can 'be given. The second
middle passage is between Palada Cays on the south side and the Shfl
and Whale Rocks on the north. The western and safest passage
between the latter rocks and i^ortheast Cay. From the latter ca;

WEATHER CHANNEL ^DIRECTIONS ^LEE CHANNEL. 381

reef extends to the SE. for ^ Hule, and firom Davy Cay a shallow ledge
rans off nearly 400 yards, forming the Weather Channel, about 300
yards in breadth, and the least depth 23 feet.

Directioiui. — ^To take the western passage, steer boldly down toward
Northeast Cay, and having passed the Whale and Shark Bocks at the
distance of rather more than 200 yards, bring the western extreme of
Davy Cay to touch the extreme of the remarkable bluff at the east end
. of Culebra. Keep them in one, tmtil the southern sandy beach of
Northeast Cay comes on with the north end of Scrub Cay — a small
rocky islef, near the north side of Culebra; then keep away S. 55^ W.
(S. 5Q^ W. mag.), steering for the Dolphin Head — ^a remarkable hill at
the east end of Culebra. When Sandy Point of Culebrita opens out
clear of Pond Point, haul up gradually for the bluff, and anchor as
most convenient. If going above the Middle Ground, keep the Culebra
shore aboard.

Tides. — It is necessary to observe that the flood sets in from the
north, between Northeast Cay and the Palada Cays, at the rate of H
knots, and the ebb runs out with equal force in the opposite direction.

Lee Channel, between Northeast Cay and Culebra, is i mile wide,
and has no danger in it until the Middle Ground is approached. The
wind, however, is generally so unsteady under Northeast Cay, that
without it is so far to the northward as to enable a vessel to lay up ESE.,
it should not be entered in a sailing vessel except on the flood. The
ground is quite clear, and the shore bold, until abreast of Duck Point;
thence to the bluff it is fringed with a reef, to the distance of 100 yards,
distinctly seen from the deck. About i mile to the nortlieastward of
Duck Point there is a small coral patch with a depth of 28 feet on it.

Directions. — ^Entering by the Lee Channel keep midway between
Northeast Cay and Culebra, until nearly abreast of Duck Point, when
the island side should be kept aboard, to avoid the Middle Ground.
The bottom is distinctly seen when in a less depth than 10 fathoms, and
the shoal ground may be avoided by the eye.

South Channel — A vessel may leave the Sound either by the Lee
or the South Channel. The former, however, is the best.

The ^des in the South Channel run 2 knots an hour; the flood SW.
by S., and the ebb NE. by N.

Directione. — Proceeding through the South Channel, after passing
the bluff, border well toward Water Cay, which is 20 feet high, and^
pass it at 200 yards to avoid the Porgee Heads, which are awash inside
the outer reef, and become visible, if the atmosphere is clear, from
abreast Mangrove Harbor. When nearly abreast of Breeze Point, at
the entrance of Mosquito Bay, the east extreme of Water Cay must be
brought to touch the hummock on Culebrita N. 38^ E. (X. 30^ ¥j. mag.),
which mark will lead between the Yellow Shoal and Keef Heads, easily
seen if the sun does not shine directly over them. The Hummock is a
small rocky hill, 93 feet high, on tlie NE. point of Culebrita, somewhat

382 THE VIRGIN ISLANDS.

like a gun quoin, with the thick end to the southward, and is readily
distinguished. In this channel the depth will be from 8 to 13 fathoms,
and perhaps a cast of 5^ fathoms on a small knoll SE. of Breeze Point.
When the peak of Southwest Oay comes open off Soldiers Point (the
south end of Culebra), N. 57^ W. (1^. 56° W. mag.), a vessel will be
clear of the shoals, and may haul to the wind.

There is seldom a leading wind into the Sound through this channel,
but for a steamer it is safe and easy.

Mangrove Harbor is small but well sheltered. Its entrance lies
between Bluff Point on the north and Water and Battle Cays on the
south. The entrance is about 300 yards wide with a depth of 7 to 8
fathoms, decreasing inside to 6 fathoms, with a bottom of sand and
mud. The head of the bay is shallow. In entering the harbor, having
rounded Bluff Pointj^ steer in midway between the reefs, which are
bold and can be seen distinctly, and anchor as convenient. It may not
be easy to get out under sail, as the channel trends l^W. and SE.

The Basin. — On the south side of Mangrove Harbor there is a bi^ht
about 600 yards long and 200 yards wide, and having a depth of 4
fathoms of water. It is separated from the harbor by a bar with 14 feet
of water on it, and is a secure place for a small vessel to anchor.

Mosquito Bay lies close to the entrance of Great Harbor, between
Harbor and Breeze Points. It is a good temporary anchorage, but,
being partially open to the southward, a heavy swell frequently sets in
from that quarter.

Ghreat Har1>or is one of the most secure basins in the Windward
Islands, about a mile in length, and in some parts ^ mile in breadth,
but of irregular shape, and with several small creeks on its shciies.
The entrance is between two bold reefs, leaving a channel nearly 200
yards wide, through the center of which a vessel wiU carry 5 fftthoma
water, and within it 5 to 7 fathoms. The great drawback, however, to
this otherwise advantageous harbor is the presence of four coral shoals
in the fairway to the entrance, almost blocking it up, and for which no
good leading marks can be given. To a steamer they are not so for-
midable, as she has only to steer along the reef between Soldiers Point
and the entrance of the harbor on about a IN". 22<^ E. (N, 23° E. mag.)
course; giving the reef a berth of 300 yards, so as to avoid Yellow and
Grouper Shoals, and having passed them, to steer boldly on through
• the center of the channel.

Yellow Shoal, with only one fathom water on it, is the southernmost,
and its south end lies about N. 81© B. (N. 82© E. mag.) f mile from S
diers Point. The Shrimp has two fathoms on it, and lies about S. 1<
W. (S. 11^ W, mag.), nearly ^ mile from Breeze Point; the Group
with 14 fathoms on it, J mile S. 67o W. (S. 680 W. mag.) of the Shim
and the Snapi)er, with one fathom on it, midway between Breese Poi
and the entrance.

Directions. — ^The best route for a sailing vessel bound into Gtc>
Harbor is to run through the Sound and South Channel, and pa

GRAMPUS SHOALS — ^FUNGY BOWT. 383

between the Grouper and Shrimp Shoals, with the wind abeam, which
must be done with the eye alone, from aloft. In fact the pilotage, from
the absence of any marks, is far too intricate for a stranger without the
assistance of a pilot or good local knowledge. It would also be difficult
for a sailing vessel ^ g®t out of the channel without warping, and with
the wind weU to the northward.

The Ghraxnpns Shoals are a group of small isolated coral heads,
with from 3 to 4 fathoms of water on them, rising from a bank with 10
fathoms of wate£ on it, and extending to a distance of 4 miles to BE.
of Culebra.

There is a passage between these shoals and the reef which extends
to the south from Culebrita, but no safe directions can be given for it.
Large vessels had better pass to the southward of these shoals.

SonthwaBt Cay. — From its center a wooded peak rises 500 feet*.
All along the eastern side, at 200 yards distance, there. is a coral reef,
and the Culebra Shore is also foul for about this distance.

The channel between the north point of Southwest Cay and Stream
Point, on the Culebra Shore, is 700 yards wide, with a shoal in the
center on which the least water is 26 feet, with 6 and 7 fathoms of
water all around it. The tides sweep through this channel with a
velocity of 3 knots; the flood to the south and the ebb to the northward.

There is good anchorage, with the prevailing winds, between South-
west Cay and Culebra. A good berth will be found in 13 fathoms of
water with Scorpion Point, which runs out low and terminates in a
8inall pinnacle, bearing S. SO^ E. (S. 79^ E. mag.), distance 700 yards.

In fact there is good anchorage anyirhere on the lee side of Culebra.

Seine Bay, just to the eastward of Scorpion ]n)int, has a good
beach and excellent fishing with the seine.

Snog Bay, the next cove to the eastward, is a good boat harbor.

North^reat Channela. — ^The channels between the NW. point of
Culebra and the cays and rocks to the westward are clear and easy to
navigate, as all the dangers are apparent to the eye.

Pilot Rock Channel is between the NW. point of the island and
Pilot Bock. All that is to be done in taking this channel is to avoid
the reef, seen running off 300 yards from the point, and steep-to.

Pilot Bock is barren, 30 feet high, bold, and steep-to.

Twin Pass is formed by the Pilot Rock and the Twins; the latter

are two small barren rocky islets, about 20 feet high, lying close to each

other about f mile westward of the Pilot. At J mile SE. from the Twins

is a rock awash, named High Breaker, and steep-to. The best channel

is between it and the Pilot, as there is generally a leading wind through
either way.

Fnngy Bowt is a remarkable barren round, whitish rock, 145 feet

high, with rugged perpendicular sides. Fungy Bowt Channel between

the rock and the Twins is clear and safe, but be careful of a small head

200 yards westward of the Twins, and on which the depth is only one

fathom.

384 THE VIRGIN ISLAl^DS.

Washer Passage is between Fangy Bowt and the Washer, a small
rock only 2 feet out of water, lying K . 35o W. (S. 34o W. mag.) f mile
from Fungy Bowt. This channel is bold and clear, with a depth of 14
and 15 fathoms in it. A vessel may also pass to the westward of the
Washer, which is bold and steep-to.

After passing to the southward of Fungy Bowt another chain of
small islets will be observed lying to the WNW. of Southwest Oay.

Sisters. The three islets nearest Southwest Oay ajre the Sisters, all
nearly of the same size, about 35 feet in height, and not more than ^
mile apart. The two western appear in one when bearing S. 12^ B.
(S. 11^ E. mag.), consequently when on that line the three isleta appear
as only two. The eastern one is 700 yards from the NW. point of
Southwest Oay, with a clear channel between.

' Cross Cay, li miles westward of the Sisters, is narrow, its central
part projects to th^ NE. nearly J mile, thus forming three legs; it is
130 feet high, and covered with long grass and bushes. At about
midway in the channel between it and the Sisters is the Black Bock^
a small islet 15 feet high.

Cactus Cay is 95 feet high. At its south end there is a remarkable
pillar-shaped rock, 75 feet high.

The channels between the cays, just spoken of, are all clear and fiQ^e
of hidden dangers; all the Tocks are steep-to. For sailing vessels,
however, the best passages are to the westward of the Sister Gays, for
under the high land of Southwest Cay the wind is apt to be variable.

Tides. — In all of these channels the flood tide runs to the southward
at the rate of about one mile an hour, and the ebb in the contrary di-
rection at the same rate. The rise and fall seldom exceed a foot, aod,
as is the case near the islands of St. Thomas and St. John, the mean
level of the sea is about a toot lower in April and May than during the
remainder of the year.

The flood coming in from the northward sweeps round the blufif and
over the reef to the SW. of Oulebrita at the rate 'of about 2 knots at the
springs; it there slackens its pace, and meeting the stream setting
down on the western side of Culebra, it then trends to the southward
toward the east end of Crab Island.

The ebb sets over the Oulebrita lleef, taking the lee and weather
channels out of the sound in a reverse direction, and much at the same
rate.

On the west side of Culebra the stream of flood, having reached
Southwest Cay, runs to the SSE. toward che east^end of Crab Islan"

The channels lying between Cactus Oay and the Washer on the e
and the coast of Puerto Eico on the west have not been accurately 6
veyed.

Crab (Vieques) Island. — A ridge of small hills runs nearly its wh
length alon^^ the middle of the island, and risesjjto a^moderate heig
named Mount Pirata, at Vaca Point, the SW. extremity of the isla

©ANES BAY PORT MULA. 385

Between it and Guliebra the soundings are regular and the depth from
12 to 16 fathoms. The east end of the island is low, bold, and steep- to,
and on the south side the edge of sounaings runs along at the distance
of about 1^ miles.

The south coast of- the island is indented by several small bays and
is free from danger*

Danes Bay, the first of any consequence, is about 2 miles from the
east end. Nearly abreast the bay, about J mile from the points, are
two small islets, which may be passed on either side.

To the westward of Danes Bay there are several anchorages for small
vessels : Grant Port, Man-of- War Cay, Tapoon Creek, Port Ferro Har-
bor, and Mosquito Bay. At the entrance of Port Ferro there are 10
feet of water, increasing to 17 feet inside.

Sonnd or Settlement Bay is to the westward of these small harbors
and is defended by a small fort. In front of it are two small islets
called Soldier and Water Cays; the latter, which is the outermost, lies
nearly a mile westward of the SE. point of the bay, and about i mile
from the shore. On the west side, within J mile of it, there is anchor-
age in 4 or 5 fathoms water.

Toward the 8W. point the bottom is rocky and the soundings irreg-
ular.

Arenas Bank. — From Yaca Point the west side of Crab Island trends
about NW. by N. 3 miles to Arenas Point. The edge of soundings is
here about 4 miles distant, and the shore bold and steep-to, as far as
the south end of the sandy beach which forms the NW. extremity of
the island. Here a spit of sand runs off N. 35o W. (N. 34° W.) for 3
miles from Arenas Point, upon which are several spots of only 6 feet
water; those at its extremity are covered with dark weed, but not be-
ing sufficiently discolored are very dangerous.

To avoid the north end of this spit do not open (3ape Mala Pascua of
Karanjo Point, at Puerto Rico, and when El Yunque or Anvil Peak is
shut in with the hill on the western headland of Bahia Honda N. 57^ W.
(N. 56^ W. mag.), a vessel will be to the eastward of it.

Anchorage. — There is good anchorage under the west side of the
island in 5 fathoms water, with Arenas Point N. 67^ E, (N. 68^ B. mag.)
and the SW. point of the island about SE. Towards the SW. point
the bottom is rocky and the soundings irregular.

Water. — A small rivulet empties at the south end of the beach which
forms the 'NW. exti^emity of Crab Island, but near the shore it is
brackish 5 a small supply of good water, however, may be obtained a
short distance above the outlet. Water may be obtained at Port Mula
from a large cistern built in the square of the town of Isabella.

Port Mnla. — Prom Arenas Point the northern shore of the island
trends E. by ^N". ^ N. 8 miles, when it bends abruptly to the northward for
about i mile, forming a small bay called Port Mula. At the mouth

18402 25

386 THE VIRGIN ISLANDS.

of a little stream ou the south side of tUe bay is the priuciita!
of the island, named Isabella 11. It containij aboat 1,(H)0 inha
aud i.s the residence of the governor, who ia iiotiiiaated by the
general of Puerto Kico. At about a mile lulaiid from the vill
hill called Soldier Mount.

Anchorage. — A reef of broken eoral with from 9 to 16 feet ^
it extends nearly across the mouth of the bay. Inside this bai
there are dejithsof from 2Jto 3^ fathoms, but with many shoal]

Anchor ont.side'the bar in not less than ti fathoms as insidi
6-fathom line the sea breaks during strong northerly winds
holding ground is very bad.

Light- — A fixed white light is exhibited irom a post 10 feet
Point Mula and is visible 5 miles.

Mnla Shoals. — There are three dangerous shoals Ijing noi
erly from Port Jfula, about 1 J miles from the shore, called the
Blaueo, Corona, and the Mosi^uito Shoals. All three of thes
are awaah, or nearly so,

The Caballo Blanco bears N. 52o W. (N. Sl^" W. mag.) IJ mil
the north point of Point Mula; the Corona is S. 70° W. (S. 71° V
1£ miles from the Caballo Blanco, and the Mosquito i milf
W. (S. 68° W. mag.) of the Corona.

At about ^ mile westward of this latter shoal there is a sma
of 16 feet water; and a similar one of the same depth, S. 6° 1
E. mag.) of the (faballo Blanco, nearly midway between it i
ahore, and N. 74° W. (S. 73° W. mag.) one mile from Mala Poi

Dirsctions. — In approaehing Port Mala from the eastwai
getting abreast of Point Caballo Colorado, the northern extrem
island, the coast should be skirted at the distance of J mile till i
at Point Mula, which should be rounded at a distance of 60(
when a convenient anchorage may be picked out, with the
bearing S. 46° E. (S. 45° E, mag.). This course will lead betw
Caballo Blanco and the coast of the island.

Cantion. — A vessel beating pp outside these shoals should n
Arenas Point to the westward of S. 55° W. (S. 56° W. mag.);
Mala Paseua to the westward of S. 64^ W. (9. 65° W. mag
Caballo Colorado bears southward of S. 74° E. (S. 73° E. mag,
latter bearing leads northward of the Caballo Blanco.

Cabello Colorado Point is rocky and steep-to, aud is i
miles from Mula Point. Thence to Diavolo Point the shore
about B. J 8. 4 miles; about midway, close to the land, is Be
(or la Campana); to the westward of this rock the shore is f
to the eastward it is bold and clear.

North, uearly ^ mile from Diavolo Point, there Is a small fbck
nearly awash, called the Cockroach Shoal.

PoUcau Harbor. — Eastward of Diavolo Point the shore is ir
a mile from it, and about J mile from the shore is Pelican Gi

-.J»

>''i - — fcJSE
•r . ^ , . *

SAINT CROIX ISLAND CHRISTIANSTED. 387

whence a broken reef runs parallel with the shore for IJ miles; through
it are several small cuts of 12 feet water, leading into snug anchorage .
for coasters.

Saint Croix Island. — This island is 19 miles long, but of irregular
breadth. The sbuth side is nearly straight, and generally low, particu-
larly towards the west end. Near the center of the north shore, at the
head of a deep bight, is the town of Christiansted, the capital of the
island, and seat of government of the Danish colonies. From the town
to the south shore of the island, the distance is about 2 J miles across,
and from thence the breadth gradually decreases to the eastward, and
terminates in a bluff point, with a sugarloaf elevation of moderate
height just within it.

The western portion from the bight, preserves a general breadth of 5
miles, and becomes more elevated on the north side. Mount Eagle, the
loftiest summit in the island, 3J miles east of Hams Bluff, at the NW,
extreme of the island, is 1,164 feet high. Numerous small rivulets
empty themselves into the sea, chiefly on the southern shore, but most
of them disappear in the dry season, and it is consequently badly
watered at that period, and what is obtained is unwholesome until
allowed some time to purify. The island is scantily wooded, but
highly cultivated, and its roads are excellent. Its population is about
18,600.

Caution. — Vessels passing the SW. end of the island should keep
well off at night, as the north side hills may deceive as to the distance
from the island.

Vorth Coast — From Hams Bluff, formed of remarkable steep cliffs,
to Barons Bluff the shore is steep-to and the bank of soundings does
not extend more than ^ mile off shore.

Between Barons Bluff and Salt River Point, but nearer the latter, is a
narrow cut in a reef leading to a deep inlet called Salt River, in which,
however, there is only shelter for boats. Salt River Point is rather low,
and forms the north extreme of St. Croix and the NW. point of the
bight of Christiansted.

Four hundred yards north of the point lies the White Horse, a danger-
ous rock which generally breaks, and between it and the shore there is
a boat channel carrying a depth of 2 fathoms.

Christiansted Harbor is well protected on the north by reefs almost
dry. The harbor is small and only fit for a few vessels drawing not
more than 17 feet.

The population is about 8,000. The streets are clean and the sani-
tary condition is excellent.

Provisions of all kinds can be obtained at a cost of from one-quarter
to one-half more than in the United States.

The United States is represented by a consular agent.

The governor, by law, now resides six months of the year at St. Thomas
and six months at this place.

'-^m

'»!

.'. I

■•t :

''■f.^.
t^

}■
,11

388 ' THE VIRGIN ISLANDS.

Water can be had at a cost of half a cent per gallon. It is rain water
collected in tanks and broiiglit to tlie pier by pipes, from which boats can
take it on board.

Coal can be had in small quantities; cost, about 89 j)er ton.

Telegraph. — There is telegraphic communication with the United
States, St. Thomas, and surrounding islands, also a telegraph and tele-
phone to Frederichste<l.

There are no steamers, but the mail leaves fot St. Thomas twice a
week. ♦

Hospitals. — There is one which is w^ell conducted by two Danish
doctors and has accommodation for 2.'^0 patients; cost, fr(mi $2.50 to 13
per day; one for the insane, one for ulcerated patients. Private pa-
tients have separate apartments.

Port Charges. — Anchorage dues, 22J cents per ton; mooring, $4;
health officer, $:^ for schooners, $5 for barks and brigs; pilotage, il
per foot draft. There are no light dues.

The duties on exports are 5 per (jent on sugar, 3 per cent on rum
and molasses.

Pilots are prompt to answer a signal made for them from any vessel
needing their services. Their station is on Protestant Cay, close off
the town.

Light. — The entrance to the harbor is protected by Fort Louisa
Augusta, from the flagstaff of which there is exhibited a fixed white
light, visible 8 miles; there is also a white light shown in front of the
customhouse and one on building to the left.

Scotch Bank. — From Fort Louisa Augusta, a tongue of sand called
the Scotch Bank, having in places only 4 feet water on it, stretches to
the northeastward for If miles. Between the western edge of this
bank, which runs in a N. by W. direction from the fort and extends off
rather more than J mile, and the east end of the Long Keef Ironting
the town, is the entrance to the harbor. At about 1 J miles eastward
of the fort is a small islet with two hillocks on it, named Green Cay.
The NB. point of the cay, bearing S. 6^ E. (S. 5° E. mag.) and in line
with Sight Mill, leads in eastward of the Scotch Bank; and Barons
Bluff open of Salt River Point S. 86^ W. (S. Sio w. mag.) lea<ls north
of it.

Directions.T— Vessels l)ound to Christiansted generally approach ir
from the north or NE. Tu this case, having passed Buek Island —
observing precautions to avoid the reef — haul in towards Green Cay^
In standing towards the Scotch Bank take care to keep Barons Bl **
open of Salt River Point. Having ni^ared it, Fort Louisa Augusta ^
be seen at the XE. end of the town, when it should be brought in 1
with the first hill to the eastward of a large notch or saddle formed
two hills. Steer in on this line, S. IS^ E. (S. 17^ E. mag.), very ea
fully, and it will leiul to the entrance of the channel, and out,er buo
which lie about 400 yards within it.

Vessels drawing only 10 feet may lie alongside the jetty of the to'

CHRISTIANSTED CHANNELS. 389

ZSastem Channel. — There is a channel over the inner part of the
Scotch Bank with a depth of 12 feet in th^ center, which may be used
by vessels" of light draft. The chart will be tbe best guide.

Kichmond House is a large building with a red roof, standing in
grounds of a park-like appearance on the sloping land near the sea.

For a sailing vessel, although easy of access at almost all periods, it
is difficult to get out of the inner harbor, and in the months of January
and February, when the wind hangs to the northward of east, a ves-
sel may meet with considerable detention. With the usual trade wind
«he must warp up to the entrance; buoys are conveniently placed
for that purpose. Toward daylight it is generally (^alm, when a vessel
may be able to tow out, assisted sometimes by a light land air from the
SE., which will enable her to obtain an offing clear of the shoals before
meeting the regular breeze.

Cantion. — The town of Christiansted is easily made out, but Fort
Louisa Augusta, the front mark of the range leading to the entrance
buoys, has, at a distance, no appearance of a fort and is not easily
distinguished.

Protestant Cay can easily be mistaken for the fort, especially as a
flag is kept flying from a staff on the cay and none on the fort. The
range should be used with caution and only for the purpose of fluding
the entrance buoys.

When expecting vessels of more than usual size the pilots place a
small wooden buoy on the inner (S W.) point of the Scotch Bank.

Changes of ChanneL — After a heavy northerly swell has continued
for several days, the western extremity of the S(50tch Bank will change
its location. This is particularly noticeable at the SW. point. The
Welcome Bank is gradually extendhig into the harbor, but has not
advanced, as yet, enough to cause any change of importance.

There is no great difficulty or danger in entering the harbor provided
the wind is not stroiig nor the sea heavy. Vessels drav^ingover 12 feet
and over 2(X) feet long, especially if they do not turn quickly, should
take a pilot, for the first visit at least. The harbor being small, the
buoys nunienms, of the same color and in close proximity to each other,
make the first entrance confusing to a stranger. All vessels should be
prepared to anchor with a stream anchor by the stern, and should have
ready warping lines on each bow, with boats to run tliem to the buoys.
There iire two turns in the channel over 90^, and the radius of the curve
is not greater tlian 000 feet, while the ra^lical (changes of course occur
within 400 yards' length of each other. Going out less difficulty will be
experienced, as the prevailing wind, the NE. trade, assists the turning.
The harbor is said to be filling up slowly.

Buck Island. ^UO feet high, is one mile in length and rises on the
southein edge of a dangerous c(»ral bank, which extends westward
about 3 iidle and sweeps round one mile north of the island. There are
also several shallow patches as far eastward as 1^ miles.

390 THE VIKGIN 1SL.\JJDS.

The islaud li<^s directly in the route to the harbor, and Bhoold
fore be carefully approm'hed. For tUia purpose Hams BIufiF ii
kept well open of Barons Blulf ; these bluffs in one will lead 40(
outside the reef, in 4 fathoms water. The cbaunel between tl
end of the reef and the NE, end of Scotch Bank 19 1} miles wid
the westward it leads to the eastern channel into Ohri stiansted I
and to the eastward toward Buck Islaud Anchorage.

Aacliorage. — There is good anchorage, iu 4 fothoms, to th
of Buck Islaud, and it is generally chosen by vessels of nai
asnal way of approaching it is from the northward, ronnd the wi
of the reef. The latter may be passed by the eye or by bringi
dwelling house of G-reen Cay Estate (on a mound near the shoi
line with Sight Mill, bearing S. 13° W. (S. 14° W. mag.)- Tl
stands on the center ridge of hills — which is here lower than elsen
and has neither head nor vanes. In running in upon this marl
ever, the vessel will cross over 27 or 28 feet water and then de<
7 fathoms S\V. of the island. Soon after passing within the e
the bank, she may haul up for the ani^horage and anchor when tl
point of Buck Island comes open of the sandy point on its sont
'Back Island Channol. — From (ireen <-'ay the shore of St. C
skirted by a reef all the way to the east end. Within it there i
anchorage for small craft which find their way through a am
north of Coakley Bay Mill and wai-p up. With good local kno
a vessel may enter Buck Island Channel from the 9K. by rum
between the island and the reef skirting St. Croix, keeping th<
extreme of Green Cay in line with Moont Eagle S. 84° W. (S. 1
mag.). The latter from this direction will appear the left of twi
apparently very nearly of the same height; the northern one
Kivei- Mound, rising near the shore 2 miles farther eastward. Tl
watf^r will be 6^ ikthoms, the depth generally being 10 fathon;
great care must be taken to keep the leading mark on until the
is abreast of Buck Islaud, when she may haul to the northward

Lang Bank. — An extensive bank of soundings stretches ol
St. Croix, curving round Buck Island Keef on the north- and
and passing at about ^ mile north of the Scotch Bank at about 1
from the shore. On its extreme edge there is one of those rems
wall-sided narrow coral ledges, which, commencing about 3 m
78'' E, (N. 7!P E, mag.) of Buck Island Keef, sweeps round in a ■
form outward at the extreme east end, and terminates 2 miles ft
cast end of St. Croix; the northern part ha.s a depth of from 1
fathoms on it; the southern portion has from 8 to 10 fathoms on.
in the si)HCp between there are from 12 to 17 fathoms.

The shoalest part of the northern ledge bears N. 73^ E. (N.
mag.) from Buck Island, and K". 50<^ E. (N. 51° E, mag.) from tl
end of St. Croix, and iu heavy weather it brcak.s and become
gerous; it is therefore advisable, under such circumstances, if t

FKEDERICHSTED. 391

from the southward, not to approach the east end within 12 miles, and
not to bear up before Buck Island bears S. 67^ W. (8. 68° W. mag.).

South Coast. — ^The south coast of the island is bordered by a danger-
ous broken coral reef, which extends from the east end to nearly abreast
of Long Point, 3 J miles from the S W. point of the island, where it ter-
minates in the Southwest Shoal, which has only one fathom water on it,
with Long Point bearing N. 32o W. (N. 31^ W. mag.), distant nearly IJ
miles. The most datigerous part is from the latter point to Signal Hill,
8 miles to the eastward, where it runs along shore more than 1^ miles off.
It generally breaks, and as several shallow patches exist outside it should
be cautiously approached. There are several cuts through the reef,
capable of admitting small coasters into tolerable anchorage within.
One of the beat is off the entrance of Krausse Lagoon. At Great Pond
Bay there is a narrow cut leading into safe anchorage for vessels of 10
feet draft.

Frederichsted. — ^The west end of St. Croix forms a bay, and near
the center of its shores is the town of Frederichsted. In front of it
there is goo<^ anchorage in from 6 to 7 fathoms of water, with the fort
bearing S. 80© B. (S. 79^ E. mag.), and Southwest Point S. 16o W. (8.
17° W. mag.). The edge of the bank is not more than J mile from the
shore, consequently in the hurricane season the anchorage is unsafe.
Should the wind blow from the westward, as it sometimes does during
the fill and winter months, a heavy swell rolls in, making tlie anchor-
age uncomfortable and landing difficult.

Shallow water extends J mile from the north point of the bay and
nearly a mile southward of Southwest Point, the SW. extreme of the
island. In rounding the latter point carefully with the lead in not less
than 6 or 7 fathoms water at the distance of a mile, a vessel should not
haul in until the north point bears N. 10° E. (N. 11^ E. mag.). The edge
of the bank lies nearly 3 miles S W. of Southwest Point, and terminates
abruptly; within it is a narrow coral ledge of 7 to 9 fathoms.

There are three small wharvCvS near the customhouse, at either of
which landing is easy.

The population is about 2,500. The town is clean and well kept.
The temperature is from 80° to 90^ F.

The port charges as the same as for Christiansted.

The United States is represented by a consular agent.

Provisions can be obtained at a cost of 30 to 50 per cent more than
in the United States.

VTater can be had from the export wharf at a cost of half a cent per
gallon. The water is collected in cisterns and then pumped.

Coal. — A small amount of coal can be had at a cost of $9 per ton.

Hospitals. — There are two in one building, a civil and a military
hospital. The cost is from $2.50 to $3 per day. Quarantine is main-
tained. The quarantine flag is green.

392 THE VIRGIN ISLANDS.

Telegraph. — There is cominimication with ChriBti»n8t«d
telegraph and telephone.

Lights. — Two fixed white lights are exhibited from iroD pes
end of the center pier, visible 2 miles.

WindB. — Tliere is no regular land breeze at St. Croix, b
the trade wind is tight during the day it generally falls eali
the night. Northers, with the accompanying heavy ground :
not appear to reach this island.

Tides. — Xo perceptible tidal stieam has been observed at i
but a rise and fall takes place of from 4 to 8 in(;hes, accordiu
strength of the wind, which will sometimes raise it to 18 ind
tween this island and St. Thoma-s a slight easterly current 1
observed. High water, full and change, at 7h. ^m.

(CHAPTER XII.

THE WINDWARD ISLANDS — SOIUREUO TO ANTIGUA, INCLUSIVE.

SOMBRERO.

Sombrero Island. — The li|i:htliouse on Sombrero is in latitude 18^
35' 37" N. and long. 63^ 28' 13" W. The island is 18(K) yards long and
400 yards broad, and at its north end it is about 20 feet high; ftx)m
thence it ascends gradually to the middle of the island, where it attains
the height of 40 feet. Its surface is exceedingly rough and rises in
shaq) Jagged points. The crevices between appear to have been scooped
out by the rain and sea water dissolving the coral rock of which the
island is composed. The vegetation consists of a few small beds of
prickly pear. Fish of indifferent quality may be caught in large num-
bers off the island. Several veins and some large deposits of phosphate
of lime are worked by a company. The island belongs to CJreat Britain.

The sides of this island are precipitous and rocky, and quite inacces-
sible except at a little bight on its west side, ^ mile from the south end,
and a short distance to the southward of a small rock awash, where
under very favorable circumstances, by watching an opportunity, a
person may jump on to a flat ledge of the cliff*, and with some difficulty
ascend to the summit. It lies on a small l)ank of soundings, which ex-
tends to the eastw^ard 2 J miles, with 22 fathoms on its edge; to the
southward IJ miles with 47 fathoms at that distance; to the westward
H miles, with from 14 to 24 fathoms; and to the northward 1 J miles
with 27 fathoms, coral crust.

From the island the high land of St. Martin is distinctly seen in clear
w-eather distant 40 miles. Dog Island bears from it S. 35o E. (S. 33^ E.
mag.) 21 miles, and the north end of the Anguilla Bank S. 80^ E. (S.
78^ E. mag.) 24 miles.

Light. — On the SE. side of tlie island is an open iron framework
tower, painted red, from which is exhibited a revolving white light, 150
feet above the sea, whicli attains its greatest brilliancy every minute
and should be visible 20 miles.

Anchorage. — There is anchorage on the west side of the island in 6
and 7 fathoms close to the rocks, also in from 10 to 14 fathoms, and
heavy moorings are laid down for the vessels that ship the produce of
the quarries. The jn evailing winds are from NN E. to S by E. ; w esterly
winds seldom blow home.

1^3

ANGUILLA ISLAND.

Angnilla Island is 14 miles long, and the eaetem half is from
mileB broad, but the western portion tapers gradually away to a
It has an area of about 35 square miles, and the population is
(1891).

The eastern portion of the island is the most elevated, and i
neighborhood of Crocus Bay,' near the center of the island, it is 21
high, but it has no remarkable hills. The western portion de
gradually, and at the end it is only M feet high. The southern «
generally much lower than the northern, and as far westward aa
dezvous Bay it iq fringed with a coral reef, dry in many places,
200 to 400 yards from the shore, and 8t«ep-to. There are, hot
several little cuts through it, which will admit boats of large sizt
good shelter.' The island belongs to Great Britain and the chief
istrate resides at Crocns Bay.

Rsndexvoas Bay, on the southern shore, affords good shell
small vessels. In entering the bay give a berth to the reef, whi(
tends i mile off Shaddick Point, the eastern limit of the bay. I
be seen from aloft. From Blowing Point, about a mile eastwa
Sha^ldick Point, there is a road leading to the two anchorages,
and Crocus Bays on the western coast.

Blowing Rock is a small rocky islet, about 6 feet above the sea,
S. 68= E. (8. 560 E. mag.) J mile from the west end of Anguilla;
bold and steep-to outside, but within it there is only a channel for 1

Anguillita is a small rocky cay, 20 feet high and covered with t
wood, lying i mile S. Bti^ W. (S. 68° W. mag.) of the west end o
island, to which it i.<) almost connected by coral heads, leaving (
passage for boats. It is bold and steep-to on its SW. side.

South Wager is a small barren rock, about 20 feet high, lying ;
400 yards from the northern shore of Anguilla, at IJ miles ttc
western end, which is here formed of remarkable low <-Iifis. Th(
comes conspicuously in sight after rounding AnguilUta, and is ste

From abreast the Sotith Wager, tne shore to Mend Point, at thi
end of Long Bay, is clear, and may be approached freely. From
Point to Iloiid Bay, 2^ miles eastward, the coast is composed
markablc perpendicular clills, 150 feet high.

Cowling. Shoal. — The Dowling Shoal is about 1^ miles in exten
and west, and J mile north and south. Its western edge lies noi
Mead Point, and the channel between, which is about | mile wid*
rios a depth of from 0 to 9 fathoms. Small vessels leaving Road
may run through it, but in beating uj) from the westward it is 1
to keep outside the shoal. Fork Mountain, iu St. Martin, open w
Mead Point bearing 8. :W^ E. (S. 28° K. mag.), leads nearly i mile
ward of the shoal.

Dowling Islet. — On the northern edge of the .shoal there is a
rocky islet of the same name, which is awash with no part she

ROAl) BAY— CROCUS BAY. 395

above water. It is steepto on tbe NW., but foul to the distance of J
mile to the NE. At nearly ^ mile S. 69° E. (S. 67^ E. mag.) of the islet,
on the eastern edge of the shoal, is a small low sandy cay, called Sandy
Island, covered with brushwood to the height of 6 feet; there is no safe
channel between, and to the south and SE. it is foul for more than ^
mile.

Road Bay is a small bight about f mile deep, affording good anchor-
age for small vessels. It is the best and safest anchorage in the group,
with excellent holding ground. On the narrow ridge of sand at the
head of the bay there is a small village, and ba(*.k of it an extensive salt
pond. There is no danger in the bay. The bluff point to the northward
is steep-to, and a vessel may anchor as convenient.

Water and provisions may be had at all times.

Crocna Bay ifl formed by perx>endicular white wooded cliffs. The
bay is limited to the northward by Flat Cap Point, so called from its
terminating in a small fiat topped rock.

The principal settlement is in the SE. corner of the bay, and the
houses are scattered about the valley and adjacent hillM. The custom-
house, with its flagstaff, stands on the south side of the bay, on the
summit of a hill 218 feet high, the loftiest in the island. The best land-
ing place is a little to the northward of the road leading up the valley,
but there is always a heavy surf on the beach.

In the middle of the bay and S. 45° W. (8. 47° W. mag.) about ^ mile
from Flat Cap Point is a coral pat<*h with 5 fathoms over it.

The United States is represented by a consular agent.

Snpplies. — Fresh provisions and firewood may be obtained at Cro-
cus Bay, but no water. Yams are abundant and of excellent quality.

Pilotage is not compulsory, (charges moderate, from $4 to $0 per
vessel.

Dues. — No light dues. Tonnage dues on vessels less than 30 tons
collected once a year at the rate of 24 cents per ton registered meas-
urement. Over 30- ton vessels pay package dues at the rate of 24 cents
per ton of the cargo landed. Vessels loading salt are exempt from any
dues.

Anchorage. — A good berth will be found with Flat Cap Point bear-
ing N. 210 E. (N. 230 E. mag.^ and the customhouse S. 52^ E. (S. 500
E. mag.) in 7 fathoms water, sandy liottom, and excellent holding
ground. The bay is open to the westward, but winds seldom blow from
'^hat quarter. Heavy rollers, however, frequently set in with violence,
naking the anchorage rough and landing difficult.

Directions. — A stranger bound to either Crocus or Road Bay had
setter run to leeward of Dog Island and beat up. If from the east or
iE., run through the clear bold channel between Anguilla and St.
'l artin, haul round Anguilla, and act in the same way. There will be
o difficulty in doing this; there is seldom any current; the water is
,mooth, and if overtaken by night good anchorage will be found any-

396 ANOUILLA ISLAND SCKUB ISLAND.

where under the sonth side of the caya and reefs SW. of Cro
taking care, however, to avoid the Dowling Shoal. Vessels wl
ing the bays and bound to mndward, with the assistance ol
may take the northern channel.

Cnrreat. — A strong: weather or easterly current will ^omei
found in Crocus Bay, to wliich a vessel will swing even in Ires
but there is no perceptible tide.

Nortbam Channel — This opening is between the east end
Islands Beef and Flat Cap Point, and ia 13 miles wide. Xeai
ever, in the center, but rather nearer Angnilla, there is a da:
nai'row le<lge, named Middle Bank, ^ mile long, on wliicli the 1
from 20 to 24 feet. ■ The bottom is distinctly seen on this bank, i
the heavy sea, which generally prevails here in the winter «
frequently breaks, and becomes dangerous, as uo good mark:
given, although thei-e is a clear clianuel on either aide.

The south side of the east end of the Seal Islands Eeef b
heavy weather, and is steep-to, but loul ground extends ou
iVom its KE. side, and is extremely dangerous. If ap]i]
from the northward, with the view of using this channel, b
customhouse in line with the western peak on St. Martin, whi
leads about a mile to windward of Seal Islands Eeef, and 4(
eastward of the middle bank.

Shawl Sock. — Two miles eastward of Flat Cap Point the '
of a dry reef commences and trends to the northeastward at
mile oil' shore, and at 4 miles from the point and J mile out
main body of the reef there is a dangcrona rock, named Shaw
does not always break, and is steep-to. The shore then contii
to within a mile of Snake Point, the KK. end of Anguilla. In
up the vessel's safety will be insured when approaching this 1
rock by projier attention to the lea<l, for here the 20-fathoii
soundings inns along at IJ miles from the shore, decreasiug si

Within the reef, at the west end, there is good shelter for a h
through a narrow intricate opening near the east end droghers
anchorage.

Scrob Island is separated from Anguilla by a narrow eh
deep water about i mile wide, but it should not be used, aa its
side is skirted by a reef nearly dry to the distance of 200 yar
which a vessel may be forcred by tlie sudden Haws which corn*
lee side of all these ishmds.

This island lies on the same line of direction as Anguilla,
miles long and J mile bi'oail; it is covered with brushwood and
trees, which at the west end are about oO feet above the sea.
■end is low, and tlimi it extends a narrow strip of low rocks to the
of j mile; they are 8 or HI feet high, steep-to, and in geuoial
break.-j violently over them, but in approaching them from the ;
ai-e hidden under the high part of the island, and are exceedii

DOG ISLAND AND CHANNEL. 397

gerous, for the soundings are so deep, the depth behig 27 fathoms
within ^ mile of them, that the lead will scarcely give warning.

Near the center of the north shore of Scrub Island there is a little
hill of white sandstone, which, when the sun shines on it, is very
remarkable. There is tolerable landing at the beach at the NW, end
of the island, and go<Kl shooting.

Little Scrub Island lies about f mile westward of the above hill and
is equally conspicuous from the contrast in color, it being a barren pre-
cipitous black rock 40 feet high, and steeii-to.

Dog Island is the westernmost of a group of small islets and cays
extending westward from the NW. side of Anguilla. It is 1^ miles
long, east and west, in the center f mile broad, and about 80 feet high,
and thence tapers gradually to points at its extreme ends. It is cov-
ered with brushwood and grass, affording pasturage to an excellent
breed of horses and sheep.

The east end and south side of Dog Island are bold and steep-to.
At 400 yards from the center of the southern shore there is a remarkable
small black rock, named Bay Rock, 4 feet above the sea, and nearly
abreast of it, just within the bluff rocky point which forms the south
extreme of the island, is the landing place. The west end of the island
is formed by a high, perpendicular cliff', and from it a broken ledge of
rocks extends f mile to the westward, terminating at a small, low, rocky
islet, called West Cay, 6 feet above tlie sea, and steep- to on its west side.

From West Cay the ledge of broken rocks continues to sweep round
the north side of the island to the east end. Near the center at ^ mile
from the shore, is Middle Cay, a remarkable, small barren islet, its
NE. side being a perpendicular black cliff, 60 feet high. It stands
on the edge of the ledge, and on the very brink of soundings; there is
no bottom at 100 fathoms within a mile of it.

One mile to the eastward of Middle Cay and similarly situated is
another small, low rocky islet named East (3ay, covered with brushwood,
and equally steep-to on its north side.

Caution. — In the daytime West Cay may be passed within J mile
without fear, but in the night it should be approached very guardedly,
for the soundings are so deep alongside it that the lead will be of little
use; within a mile of the cay the depth is from 17 to 20 fathoms.

Prickly Pear Cays are two small islets lying east and west of each
other, and separated by a small boat channel. The western cay is a
narrow rugged rock 3 ""1^* "' length, covered with brushwood to the
lieight of 25 feet, up<m which there is no landing. The eastern cay is
I little lower, slightly wooded, with sandy shores, and about J mile long
And J mile broad; landing may be effected here with care, in a little
>ight on the west side.

Dog Island Channel. — Between Prickly Pear Cays and Dog Island
here is a clear channel 2 J miles wide, with a depth in it of from 9 to 10
ikthoms to witliin i mile of the western Prickly Pear, when the sound-

398 FURT ROCKS — TIDES.

ings become so irregular, that in strong winds, especially when accom-
panied by rollers, the sea tops and frequently breaks. It will, ther^re,
be always better to pass to the westward of Dog Island, except with a
free wind and smooth sea.

Flirt Rocks are two small rocky islets; the northwestern, lying about
f mile northward of the Prickly Pear Oays, is 20 feet hi^h, the other 8
or 10 feet. They are foul all around, but only to a short distance.

Seal Reef and Islands: — Seal Keef commences a little eastward of
the Flirt Rocks, and continues unbroken to the eastward, where it fonns
the western side of the north channel into Crocus Bay, and is about 5
miles in length. On its north side it is bold and steep-to, and danger-
ous to approach in the night, for the soundings are not sufficiently reg-
ular to enable a vessel to come nearer than 4 miles; at this distance the
depth is 18 fathoms; within that from 14 to 16 fathoms close up to the
reef. The south side is composed of detached shoals and coral heads,
which extend f mile from the main body of the reef.

At about 1^ miles to the eastward of the Flirt Bocks are severid low
rocky islets, called the Seal Islands, about 5 or 6 feet above the sea.

North Wager is a small black square rock, about 3 feet high, lying
on the south side of Seal Islands Reef, f mile to the eastward of the
Prickly Pear Cays. In beating up to Crocus Bay it serves as a guide
when approaching the reef, and' a vessel should not sta>nd within or to
the northward of it.

Anchorage. — To the southward of the Iforth Wager, from Prickly
Pear Oays to Crocus Bay, there is excellent anchorage in 9 or 10 fathoms
water, over sandy bottom and out of the influence of the rollers.

Caution. — ^Anguilla and the small islands and cays just described
are so low in comparison with St. Martin, that when approaching them
from the northward at night, from their being backed by the high lands
of that island, it is extremely difficult to estimate the distance firom
them; and in attempting to do so frequent accidents have happened on
the north side of Anguilla.

' Tides. — At aU Uie islands of this group, viz. Dog Island, AnguiUa^
St. Martin, and St. Bartholomew, there is a rise and fall of from one
to 2 feet, but the periods are so irregular that the exact time of high
water can not be correctly defined. The following observations, made
by Dr. Fahlberg, a resident of these islands for a long period, are valna-
ble, and no doubt give the best information on the subject:

"About St. Bartholomew, the flood at full and change runs SE., and
it is then generally high water at 10.30 p. m., while the sun is farthes
the north of the equator, but comes about two hours sooner in the s
ceeding months, until the sun gets farthest to the south, when it is h
water at 10.30 a. m., and it runs afterward in the same proportion b
again. The winds, which are of long continuance, sometimes mak
trifling difference. The sea is always lowest at the time when the s
is farthest to the north, and the contrary." *

ST. MARTIN ISLAND — GRANDE BAY. 399 "^ . ^1

I ."*■

During the surveys of these islands, which were conducted during the
winter season, between the months of November and March, by Capt,
E. Barnett, R. N., neither tidal stream nor current were detected, ex- • 'f(^
cept on one or two oc(3asions, when at anchor in Crocus Bay, on the north
side of Anguilla, a strong easterly or weather set wa^s observed 5 and on
one occasion to the eastward of 8t. Bartholomew, after a long period of
strong trade wind, a westerly set ran for a short time one mile an houi^;
but in general no difficulty was found in beating up from (me ivsland to
the other.

ST. MARTIN. •

St. Martin Island is very irregular in outline, the shores being
deeply indented by numerous bays and creeks, some of which afiford
good anchorage. The north part belongs to the French, and is attached
to the government of Guadeloupe, and the remainder to the Dutch.

The west end of the island terminates in a dangerous, low, sandy point.
The NE. end is high and bold 5 and being separated from the main ridge
by a deep, broad valley, when seen at a distance from the WNW. or
E8E. it has the appearance of a separate island. The SE. end is formed
by a high bluif, faced by a perpendicular white clift', from which it re-
ceives the name of Blanche or White Point,

This island is of moderate elevation; the loftiest table ridge, which
runs nearly through the center of the island north and south, being 1,360
feet high. Besides the table- land, it may be recognized by several re-
markable and useful elevations. The Saddle, or Bed Hill, at the west
end of the island, although only 377 feet high, is a striking object when
seen from the north of Dog Island. Morne de la Fortune, 293 feet high,
on the east side of Simson Lagoon, forms a bold promontory and conical
peak. The southernmost bare rocky peak of the western range of hills,
900 feet high, which when seen from the i^W. and SB. resembles a
colossal face leaning backwards, to the SW; and the little conical hill,
697 feet high, on the west side of Grande Bay, are all very remarkable.
Population about 7,000.

Orande Bay, at the SE. end of St. Martin, is the principal anchorage
in the Dutch quarter. The eastern side of the bay is a mile in length,
and is formed by a lofty promontory, which terminates to the southward
at Blanche Point; the western side is formed by a flat, narrow, rocky
neck of land 104 feet high, and nearly 400 yards in length, connected to
the main by a low sandy ridge, which, with the line of shore to the
: orthward, makes this side nearly J mile long. The entrance between
' le headlands is a mile wide, and free of danger.

At about J mile NW. of Blanche Point is the beginning of a narrow
i fcnd bar, which leaves the shore and sweeps round the east and north
i des of the bay at a distance of from J to J mile, with from 6 to 10 feet
• ater on it. Within it there is a narrow deep vein of from 12 to 15 feet
' iter, and about ^ mile from the western shore there is a cut in the

■>»■'

» .1

400 ST. MARTIN ISLAND.

bar, where there is a depth of 11 feet. A small vessel will fimi this
an excellent anchorage; but it will require the assistance of a pilot, as
no marks can be given and the opening shifts.

There is a similar cut at the east end, but the wind under the high
land is so uncertain that it is quite unavailable to sailing vessels.

At the head of the bay, on a low sandy ridge, is the town of Phiiips-
burg, the seat of government. Large quantities of salt are shipped.
The salt pond is back of the town.

The town contains about 2,000 inhabitants.

The United States is represented by a consul and a vice-consul.

Port Charges. — Certificate of measurements, $2; light dues, 1^ cents
per ton. For vessels under 100 tons : Tonnage, 8 cents per ton ; harbor-
master, $2j60; I wharfage, $1. For vessels over ir^O tons, 81 more on
each charge. Vessels taking salt pay no tonnage duej^

Light — A fixed white light is shown on the site of old Fort Amster-
dam. It is 115 feet above the sea, and visible about 10 miles.

Proaeljrte. — ^This very dangerous rock has only 2J fathoms on it
and seldom breaks in the strongest winds. It is not more than 35 yards
in extent with Blanche Point X. 44° B. (N. 4Co E. mag.), distant 1}
miles.

The south and SW. sides of this rock lie just within the 10-fathom
line> and a ledge from 6 to 9 fathoms runs oif to the distance of f mile
to the SE. of it, which serves as a warning when approaching it from
that quarter.

Directions. — When approaching Grande Bay from the eavStward
round Blanche Point at the distance of J mile, then haul up gradually
into the bay, prepared to meet the eddy winds and sudden gusts which
rush off from the higlilands to the NE. and anchor in the center of it.
in a depth most convenient to the vessel's draft, bearing in mind that
within the depth of 5 fathoms the soundings decrease rather suddenly
to 3J and 3 fathoms.

In approaching the bay from the southward or in beating up to it
from the westward great care must be taken to avoid the Proselyte
Rock.

In standing in for Grande Bay from the southward, to windward of
the Proselyte Rock, do not bring Blanche Point to the eastward of
north, or open out the Oostenberg, a conical peak to the westward of
the point, until within the rock.

In working up inshore from the westward, when approaching the
rock, do not open Grouper Islet to the left or northward of the big^^-^^
hill at the east end of St. Bartholomew. When leaving the anchc
and clear to the westward of the rock, the vessel may be hauled t<
wind when the Grouper comes open to the northward of St. Bar*^i
mew.

Pelican Point. — To the westward of Amsterdam Point the o*j
shore of St. Martin is composed of small sandy bays, separated bv ^

8IMS0N BAY MARIGOT BAY. 401

woody heights, steep- to, for the distance of 2 J miles, where it terminates
at Pelican Point, a low rocky point forming the east end of Simson
Bay. From this point a narrow ledge, on which there are from 2 to 4
fathoms water, extends out i mile to the southward, and about 300
yards to the N W. of the point are the Pelican Eocks, 3 or 4 feet above
the sea.

Simson Bay. — From Pelican Point a low sandy shore sweeps round
to the westward, forming Simson Bay, with indifferent anchorage in
the center of it, midway between the jjoints, 4J fatlioms of water. At
the east end of the bay there is a boat channel into the lagoon. Thence
to the west end of the island the shore is low and bounded by sandy
beaches, separated by low rocky and sandy cliffs.

Terre Basse Point is the western extremity of St. Martin. In round -
ing it in the nighttime great care must be exercised, as the spit, run-
ning f mile WSVV. from the point, is so steep- to that the lead will give
little or no warning of its proximity. In the daytime the shoal may be
seen from aloft. If the weather is so cloudy as to make it dif&cult to see
the shoal, keep Fourche Island (lying 2^ miles N\V. of St. Bartholomew)
open to the southward of St. Martin till Terre Basse Point bears to
the southward of east.

After rounding this point in proceeding toward Marigot Bay, do not
come within the depths of 7 fathoms, as this part of the shore is
fringed with reefs and sand banks to the distance of one mile from the
shore.

Marigot Bay affords good shelter from the usual trade winds, but is
open to the XVV. and is exposed to the rollers which sometimes break
i mile off shore, sending a heavy surf into the beach.

The Town of Marigot is situated at the head of the bay and is the
seat of government for the French portion of the island.

Landing is intjonvenient at all times, except at the extreme east end
of the beach, at the foot of the Fort Hill, where there is a small wharf.
Having effected a landing, the boat had better lie off at a grapnel to
the eastward of Bound Hill, which cuts the beach in two nearly in the
center, and is very remarkable; the shore of the bay is skirted by a flat
coral ledge.

Med^e Shoal is the only danger in Marigot Bay. Tliis rocky shoal
is nearly circular, and 200 yards in diameter, having on its NE. edge
as little as 15 feet of water, with from 20 to 24 feet to tlie SW, of it. It
lies X. 80C W. (X, 78o W. mag.), 800 yards from Arago Point, and the
channel between has from 3^ to 4 fathoms in it, but it is always better
to pass outside the slioal.

Light. — A fixed green harbor light, visible 3 miles, is exhibited from
a mast painted white, situated in the SW. corner of the fort; it is not
visible when bearing southward of S. 25^ E. (S. 23^ E. mag.).

Directions. — In approaching Marigot Bay from the eastward, keep
the Saddle or Bed Hill, at the west of St. Martin, in one with the
18402 26

402 ST. MARTIN ISLAND. /

north side of Marigot Bluff, bearing S. 41^ W. (S. 43^ W. mag.), until
Round Hill comes in line with Morne Fortune Peak, S. 7^ E. (S. 5^
£. mag.), then haul in and anchor on this line, or a little to windward
of it, in 4 fathoms of water, with Marigot Bluff bearing S. 77° W.
(S. 790 W. mag.), or the Crole Rock, just open of the land to the north-
east; it is not advisable to go farther in, unless in small vessels, when
a berth may be taken up according to draft, being guided by the chart.

When beating into the bay from the westward it will be better to
keep in the offing until this latter mark comes on, as the breeze will
there be found more steady.

Crole Rock. — ^rom Arago Point to North Point the shore is clear
and steep-to, the soundings regular, and it may be approached to A
mile. The most remarkable object on this part of the coast is the Crole
Rock, a small, barren, black, rocky islet, with a rounded summit, rising
on its north side 120 'feet i)erpendicularly from the sea. It lies abont
If miles westward of Xorth Point and 400 yards from a point adjacent
to the rock, almost equally remarkable, from its terminating in a de-
tached coni(*al peak of somewhat greater elevation.

G-rand Case Bay is a deep sand^^ bay to the southward of Crole
Rock, and is a secure anchorage for di*ogher3. In entering it they are
guided by the eye. From the head of this bay an extensive low
valley, in which there are several cultivated salt ponds, runs across to
Orient Bay, on the opposite side of the island.

North Point. — ^The north point of the island is skirted by a reef for
400 yards; it always shows itself and is steep-to.

Orient Bay lies about If miles southward of North Point, and its
entrance, about i mile wide, is between two small islands snrroonded
by dry reefs. From Pinels, the northern island, the reef extends off
to the distance of nearly i mile. The bay is about a mile deep, and
vessels sometimes visit it ^vith the assistance of a pilot, but being ex-
posed to the full force of the trade wind and heavy sea, it is only
secure for droghers or small fore-and-aft vessels, which And shelter at
both ends of it. From the southern island the shore becomes fonl and
dangerous as far to the southward as abreast Guano Cay; nearly mid-
way, however, there is a small cut leading into a well-sheltered creek,
called the Oyster Pond.

The Oyster Pond has a depth of 10 feet, and small vessels lie np
here in security during the hurricane season. The channel is so nar-
row and crooked that it can only be navigated by the most exx>«rt
pilots, and then only under favorable circumstances.

Cantion. — In general the sea is so heavy on the east side of
Martin that the shore should not be approached by large vess
within the line of the adjacent islets, except m case of necessity.

Tintamarre Island (called also Hat or Flat Island) is a small xm
habited island lying 2 miles eastward of the north point of St. II
tin.

__J

SPANIARD ROCK — FOURCHE ISLAND. 403

The north side is formed by a bold rocky cliflF, topped with trees,
which toward the east end rises ahnost perpendicular from the sea to
the height of 90 feet, and when seen from the eastward is very
remarkable; its south and west sides are low and sandy. It is bor.
dered on all sides but the west by a coral reef, which extends J mile
from the north shore and ^ mile from the south, and terminates at
that distance at the SW. point of the island. There is tolerable land-
ing in the sandy bay at the west end, and a small vessel will find tem-'
porary anchorage at about J mile from this part \)f the shore in 8 or
9 fathoms of water.

Spaniard Rock. — The channel between Tintamarre and Pinels
Island Beef is obstructed by the Spaniard Bock, a small, dangerous
coral head just beneath the surface. In moderate weather it does not
show itself, but with a fresh breeze the sea breaks heavily on it. The
channel should not be attempted except from absolute necessity.

Vessels running or beating through the channel between St. Mar-
tin and Anguilla have only to be careful when approaching this dan-
ger not to shut in the Crole Bock.

The Channel Between St Martin and St. Bartholomew is free
from hidden danger, but is not safe to navigate during the night,
as many of the small rocky islets are quite low, 'and being steep-to
the lead gives no warning of their vicinity.

Qnano Cay is nearly ^ mile^ from the nearest shore. This is a small
rocky islet rising almost abruptly from the sea to the height of 100 feet,
and is slightly wooded. It is bold-to on its SW. and SE. sides, but
nearly J mile to the NE. of it there are two 'small rocks just above
water, over which the sea breaks heavily.

The Mollibeday Rock is similar in form and appearance to Guano
Cay, and its rocky sides, partially wooded, rise abruptly to 100 feet
above the sea. It is foul on its SE. side to the distance of i mile; and
S. 69<^ E. (S. 67° E. mag.) J mile from it, there is a small ledge of rocks
a little above the surface of the water, which always show themselves
by the breakers.

There is a clear channel J mile wide, between the Mollibeday and
the Hen and Chicks, and also between it and Guano Cay; but they
should only be used in case of necessity, especially the latter, which
is about i mile wide.

^ The Hen and Chicks are the outermost rocks on the west side of
the channel between St. Bartholomew and St. Martin, and lie N. 77^
E. (N. 79^ E. mag.) 2 miles from Blanche Point. They are a cluster of
small rocks; the south westernmost is 15 feet high, but the others
are not more than 4 feet, and they are steep to on all sides.

Fourche or Five Islands is the largest and loftiest in the channel. It
is elbow shaped, the northern arm f mile long, the eastern arm J mile,
and it is about 400 yards broad. The latter name is given to it in conse-
q[uence of its having five small peaked hills, which at a certain dis-

404 FOURCHE ISLAND ANCHORAGE — BOULANGER ISLAND.

tance have ySomething the appearance of being so many small islets.
The two western hills are 349 feet high, the others a little lower, there-
fore at a still further distance they will be seen as two islands. At
the east, and also at the west end, there is a small detached rock
lying a short distance trom the shore, with a ledge nearly dry betwe^i.
At about 200 yards westward of the south point there is also a dan-
gerous small rock, which just shows itself above water; with these
exceptions it is bold and steep-to.

Anchorage. — ^There is anchorage off the 8W. side of Fourche, where
a vessel will ride with ease and safety daring the prevailing winds; but
it will be prudent for a sailing vessel not to go £ai*ther into the bight
than about midway between the ends of the island, with the south x>omt
bearing S. 81° E. (8. 79° E. mag.); closer in, the wind becomes baffling
and unsteady. A vessel of large draft, in case of necessity, wishing to
repair damages, may haul in close under the eastern arm, passing west-
ward of the small rock just noticed. There is good landing in the sandy
bay at the XE. comer.

Table Rock lies N. 46^ W. (N. 44 W. mag.), IJ mUes fix)m Fourche
Island, with a clear passage between. This is a small rocky islet, nearly
barren, and when seen from the north or south has somewhat the appear*
ance of a shoe, with the heel to the westward, where it is 25 feet high; it
is clear all round, and may be approached on its west side within ^ mile.

The Ghreat Qrouper is a rocky barren islet, almost circular in form,
about 300 yards in diameter, and very much resembling in appearance
the MoUibeday Rock. It rises abruptly on all sides, and terminates in
a rounded summit, 150*feet above the sea. A coral ledge of dry and
sunken rocks extends to the distance of 200 yards from its south side,
leaving a narrow vein of deep water between it and the Little Groupers j
from all other quarters it may be approached within ^ mile; and the
channel between it and Table Rock may be navigated freely.

The Little Ghroupers form a cluster of small, detached, black, barren
rocks, the southernmost lying S. 21^ W. (S. 23° W. mag.) i mile from
the Great Grouper. This and the northernmost rock are about 15
feet high, but the intermediate ones are much lower; they are steep- to
on all sides.

Boulanger Island, lying eastward 1^ miles from Fourche Island,
IS a small barren, rugged, rocky islet about 50 feet high ; rising abruptly
from the sea on all sides. About 400 yards eastward of it will be seen
a remarkable pillar-shaped rock, nearly of the same height, which, from
its resemblance to a vessel imder sail, is called the Sail Rock. Both .
bold and steep-to, and cannot be mistaken.

Beef Barrel is a small square bLu'k rock, only 14 feet above the s
lying west nearly IJ miles from Colombier Point, the NW. end of
Bartholomew, with a clear channel between it and the 4-fathom pat
about i mile off Colombier Bay. It is bold and steep-to on all sides I
the XW., which is foul to the distance of 200 yards.

ST. BARTHOLOMEW ISLAND GUSTAF. , 405

ST. BARTHOLOMEW.

St. Bartholomew Island (frequently called St. Barts) is a French
possession, being ceded by Sweden to France in 1878, with a popula-
tion of about 2,800.

The exports are unimportant, the commerce depending chiefly uppn
the port being free.

The island is of irregular shape, the coast line being indented with
numerous small bays, separated by rocky headlands. The hills are,
compared with the high land of other islands, only moderate in height.
Near the east end are three hiUs, of about the same height, so placed
with regard to each other that when seen from a distance on the bear-
ings SSW., W. by S., ]SrW. by W., and their opposites only two of them
can be seen.

The north and east sides of the island are fringed, to a short distance
from the shore, by a coral reef which always shows itself; and off its
sides are several small rocky islets, which it will be necessary to de-
scribe, as they interfere with the navigation of the' channels, especially
those on the south side of the island.

The Sngarloaf, lying off the western side of St. Bartholomew, is a
remarkable, small, barren, rocky islet having the exact form its name
imports when seen from any direction, and although similar in appear-
ance to the Grouper Bock, its position and greater elevation readily
point it out. It is an excellent guide to strangers for finding the en-
trance of Gifstaf Harbor, which, from a distance, is not easily made out.
It is high, bold, and steep-to, except on the north side, whence a narrow
ledge of dry and sunken rocks extends 400 yards in that direction; at
its extremity there are two small rocks about 4 feet out of the water,
bold and ste^p-to outside.

G-ttBtaf or Oustavia is the seat of government and a free port«

The only portion of it, however, that can be called a harbor is the
inner part, or little arm of the sea, named the Oarenage, on the shores
of which the town is built; but it will only admit vessels of 5 or 6 feet
draft. At the entrance to the Carenage vessels of from 8 to 12 feet
may lie. The outer harbor or bay is a commodious and safe anchorage,
with the prevailing winds, for a few vessels drawing not over 17 feet;
but, being exposed to the south and west, it is not secure in the hurri-
cane season. Vessels of larger draft will hud temporary anchorage
under the SW. side of the island, between the Syndare Islets and the
west end.

Port charges, including port captain's fees, do not exceed $5 for a
vessel of 500 tons.

The South Channel, 400 yards in width and having 6 fathoms
water, lies between the Saintes and the Syndare islets; the former are
three small, low, rocky islets, about 400 yards from the shore; outside
they are bold and steep-to, but inshore a ledge extends toward Fort

406 ST. BARTHOI/)MEW ISLAND.

Oscar Bluff, leaving a passage not 100 yards wide. The two Syndare
Islets, lying north and south of each other, are barren, ragged, and
separated by a coral ledge about 100 yards long; the northern islet
is 98 feet high, and a ledge extends for about 400 feet from its north
and east sides, and is not easily seen except when the sun is shining;
a ledge also runs out 100 yards from the SE. end of the southern islet,
and upon it are two small, rocky islet^; the oiiter one rises from the
edge of the ledge, and is bold and steep-to.

The West Channel, formed between the Syndare and the shore, is
about 700 yards wide, and the only danger in it is the shallow ground
before noticed, off the north end of the Syndare.

Directions. — Vessels bound to Gustaf from the eastward, or in-
tending to proceed to the southward of St. Bartholomew, should not
bring the east end of the island to bear IS. 2° W. (north mag.) before
they have opened out the Sugarloaf to the southward of Nfegre Point,
to avoid the Roques. With the prevailing wind the South Channel is
the easiest to enter. In taking this channel, pass close westward of
the Saintes, and anchor according to draft.

Should the wind be at east, if well maneuvered, the vessel may fetch
into a berth. Should it be northward of ea^st it becomes so variable
and unsteady, and rashes down with such violence, that the greatest
attention is requisite to keep the vessel well under command to insure
staying. If the Syndare is weathered, she may stand boldly toward
the shore, as far as is necessary to enable her to fetch into a bertii, ac-
cording to her draft. If not, there is room to make a short tack to the
eastward, but a stranger without a pilot had better avoid this risk by
using the West Channel.

In taking the West Channel, if coming from the eastward, the vessel
may pass either outside the Sugarloaf or between it and the Syndare
Islets ; if the latter route is taken , haul close round the west side of the
Whale Rock — which is small, dangerous, awash, and steep-to, lying
nearly 400 yards westward of the Syndare — and tack when necessary
under the shore, which is free of danger. There is a clear and deep
channel between the Whale and the Syndare Islets, but the wind is so
uncertain that it will be better to pass outside, A pilot is always at
hand. The rise and fall of tide depends on the wind.

Colombier Bay, at the NW. end of St. Bartholomew, also affords
shelter and tolerable anchorage; there is a patch of 4 fathoms near
mid-entrance. In the bight of St. Jean Bay on the north side of the
island there is also a narrow cut through the reef which will adn
coasters.

Fregatte and G-oat Islands are of considerable elevation, clotL
with grass and low brushwood, and readily distinguished. The latt
is separated from the KW. end of St. Bartholomew by a Clear chans
i mile wide, but the sea is generally so heavy that it should not be
tempted except in a case of necessity.

TOC VERS ISLET — SABA ISLAND. 407

Toe Vers is a small, pointed, rocky islet. When seen from the east
or west its north point resembles a lofty pillar standing close by the
side of the perpendicular cliff, which is about 120 feet high and very
remarkable. It is steep-to on its north and east sides.

The Tortne is a small flat-topi>ed rocky islet, lying ^ mile from the
NE. point of the island, to which it is connected by a ledge of rocks,
dry in places. A quarter of a mile to the XE. of this islet are the
Grenadiers, a small rocky ledge only 2 or 3 feet above water, on which ,

the sea breaks heavily; it is steep- to on the NE. side.

Coco, the southernmost of the islets off the SE. side of St. Bartholo-
mew, lies south, about J mile from the bold, high bluff which forms the
east side of Grande Saline Bay. It is a narrow, rocky islet, slightly
wooded on its summit, and has a small rock nearly connected to its y

north end; the islet is steep-to on all sides, particularly at its south
end, but it is not advisable to pass inshore of it.

The Roques, or Little Turtle Bocks, are two very small rocky heads
lying close together, } mile to the eastward of Coco Island. They are
only 3 or 4 feet above the sea, and although bold and steep-to are
dangerous in the night, being nearly 1^ miles off shore. Inshore of
them is the Fournis Reef, with a deep channel between, but it will
always be better to pass to the SE. of them.

Grand Saline Bay, to the NW. of Coco Islet, affords temporary
anchorage for small vessels. At the bottom of this bay are great salt
marshes, the working of which has been partially abandoned. Thence
to the SW. of St. Bartholomew the shore is bold and steep-to, and there
is no danger but that described.

SABA.

Saba Island is a Dutch i)osses8ion ; it rises 2,820 feet perpendicularly
from the sea, but its summit is generally in the clouds. It is nearly round
in form, 2 J miles in diameter, bold and steep-to. The 100-fa thorn line
of soundings is about J mile from its west side, and only 600 yards
from its east side. The island is a mass of rngged mountains, with
deep and precipitous ravines, through and over which are only foot-
patlis from house to house.

The principal village is situated in what the inhabitants call the
Bottom, a small valley 960 feet above the sea, and is only visiblewhen
Ladder Point, the SW. point of the island, bears X. 12^ W. (K 11 o W.
mag.). The only commerce is in poultry and vegetables, particularly
sweet potatoes, which are raised in great abundance, and exported to
the neighboring islands. The islanders speak the English language,
and are excellent shipbuilders, and their boats and small craft being
famed all over the Windward Islands, their model is generally adopted.

The principal landing place, called the Southside Landing, is about
800 yards eastward of Ladder Point, and is merely a little rocky cove

408 SABA ISLAND.

on the coast, at the foot of a deep ravine, through which a pathway
leads up to the village.

There is another landing about f mile northward of Ladder Point,
called Ladder Landing from its being at the foot of a pathway traced
out of the rugged precipice, which rises almost perpendicularly out of
the sea. In general a heavy surf breaks all along the shore, and renders
landing extremely difficult and often dangerous.

A lauding may be eftected with the prevailing winds, when moderate,
about i mile to the southward of Torrens Point, the NW. extreme of
Baba. -This is the principal boat building spot. There is a well near
it, but the water, although drinkable, is not good; the inhabitants
chiefly depend on rain water, caught in tanks. Vessels might obtain a
supply from the well, but it would be attended with very great diffi-
culty and risk. Firewood can be purchased, but it is requisite to be-
speak it, and agree to have it brought down to one of the landings.

The anchorages off Saba are neither commodious nor particularly
safe.

Small sailing vessels or steamers may anchor temporarily off the
Southside Landing. Another anchorage, where the bank of soundings
is somewhat wider, is on the western side of the island, between Ladder
Landing and Torrens Point. Here a vessel may anchor in 12 or 15
fathoms, sandy bottom, about 400 yards oft' shore, with the outer part
uf Torrens Point bearing N. 21o B. (N. 22o E. mag.).

Caution. — Sailing vessels should not attempt to anchor at Saba ex-
cept in case of necessity, as the wind under the highland is almost in-
variably baffling and flawy.

Directioiis. — Should necessity compel a sailing vessel to take this
anchorage, it had better be approached from the northward. After
rouading the Diamond Rock (which is a remarkable, small, barren, rocky
islet lying off Torres Point, rising perpendicularly from the sea to the
heiglit of 80 feet, and very bold, for 200 yards), approach the an-
chorage under easy sail. When the north point of Saba is shut in with
Torrens Point, and just before the Pilot Rock (which is 6 feet above
water, and lies between the Diamond and Torrens Point) comes on
with the western peak of the island of St. Martin, bearing K. 21^ E.
(I^. 22^ E. mag.), a vessel may anchor.

The bank here is very steep, and it will be prudent to lay out a kedge
witli a stout hawser to the westward, to prevent the vessel from swing-
ing inshore by the eddying gusts from the mountain, and which will
be found convenient to haul off by when getting under way.

Saba Bank forms nearly a parallelogram, its longest sides lyir
ENE. and WSW. about 32 miles, and its shortest about ISTW. by
and SE. by S. 20 miles. Its nearest part is 2 J miles SW. of Sa
Island.

The eastern edge of the Saba Bank is fringed with a remarkable na
row ledge of living coral, sand, and rock, which is nearly 30 miles ^

SABA BANK ST. EUSTATIUS ISJ.AND. 409

length, varying: in depth from 6 to 10 fathoms; when on this part the
bottom is distinctly seen. It commences about SW. 4 miles from Saba
Island, and trends thence to the SSE. for 11 miles, with a breadth of
from IJ to 2J miles; it then turns SSW. for 8 miles, and is from one to 2
miles broad, and terminates W. by S. 12 miles :^rther on, where it is
merely a ridge of 9 fathoms not ^ mile broad. To the westward, within
this ledge, with the exception of a few small coral patches of 9 and 10
fathoms toward the southern edge, the bottom is clear white coral
sand, with a depth of from 12 to 15 and 20 fathoms, gradually increas-
ing to the edge^ but terminating abrubtly in 30 fathoms. The bottom
can be distinctly seen under a depth of 10 &thoms.

On the northern edge of the bank there is excellent fishing ground,
but the Saba fishermen have frequently found the barracouta caught
here, and on the bank between St. Christopher and St. Eustatius,
poisonous.

Tides. — ^There appears to be no tide on the Saba Bank, and very
little 4;urrent was observed during the survey, which was made in the
winter months. •

ST. EUSTATIUS.

•

St. Xiustatiiis Islazid, generally called Statia by the inhabitants, be-
longing to the Dutch, is lofty and volcanic ; its summit, like that of Saba,
is generally hidden by clouds. The island when seen from the NE. or
S\V., at a distance appears like two distinct islands. On the northern
part are rugged hills; the southern portion is occupied by the volcanic
mountain, on the southern side of which is a bold white clifi' called the
White Wall. The island has been a Dutch colony, with but little in-
terruption, since the year 1600. The lieutenant-governor, who has
Saba also under his control, is subordinate to the government of St.
Martin.

The population is 3,500.

Products. — Formerly it was a place of some importance, but its trade
now is insignificant. Yams are the principal articles of export, with
some sugar, molasses, and rum.

Orange Town, the only town on the island, is on the western shore,
partly on the beach and partly on the cliff above it, 130 feet high. The
two parts, called the lower and upper town, are connected by a road
cut in the face of the clilf. Fort Orange stands on a clitf in front of the
town.

The only safe landing place is on tlie beach abreast of the town, and
here the surf is frequently so heavy that the boat must be veered in
with a long line from a grapnel.

Anchorage. — In approaching the ancliorage, the only danger to be
avoided is a rock, nearly awash, at the SW. end of the island, between
the White Wall and the town.

The best anchorage is 700 yards from the shore, in 10 fathoms, sand,

410 ST. EUSTATIUS ISLAND ST. CHRISTOPHER ISLAND.

with the church and Round Hill in one N. 72© B. (JS. 73o E. mag.) and
the SW. extreme of the island in one with Brimstone Hill (St. Christo-
pher) S. 520 E. (S. 510 E. mag.).

The Wind hardly ever varies to the northward of NB. or to the
southward of east.

Coast. — The northern part of St. Eustatius is bold, and may be
rounded at the distance of 200 yards; but breakers extend from the SB.
side, and in coming from either quarter it will be better to keep i mfle
from the shore, to avoid the baffling winds under the high land.

This island, with St. Christopher and Xevis, may be considered as
a separate cluster, as they rise from a bank of soundings separated from
the adjhfCent islands by channels of a greater depth than 200 fathoms.

ST. CHRISTOPHER.

St. Christopher Island, frequently called St. Kitts, is an English
colony, and with the islands of Nevis and Anguilla forms the presidency
of St. Christopher and Nevis. The climate of the island for a trqpical
one is healthy. The population is 30,800 (1891).

The island is of volcanic origin, the very remarkable peak of Monnt
Misery (generally in the clouds) rising to the height of 4,314 feet. It
is nearly 18 miles in length, but so irregular in form as to vary consid-
erably in breadth; it possesses no harbor and but indifferent roadsteads,
quite unsafe in the hurricane season. At about 4 miles from its SB.
end it is nearly divided into two parts by a low neck of sand, not
^ mile across, and^ consequently, at only a short distance it appears
as two islands, and at a greater distance from the eastward or west-
ward the irregular hills at the SB. end will appear as several detached
islets.

The NW. end of the island is about 5 miles broad, and the center
part is occupied hj a vast rugged mountain ridge, its lofty summit t-er-
minating in Mount Misery. At the SB. end of the ridge, at the back
of the town of Basse Terre, is a striking elevation called Great Monkey
Hill, its rounded wooded summit being 1,319 feet high, ahd at the foot
of the western side of the mountain, close to the shore, is Brimstone
Hill, 779 feet high, equally conspicuous, and easily distinguished by
the extensive fortifications and signal staff which crown its summit.

The SB. end of the island, although much less elevated, has some
very remarkable hills, which, as before observed, are extremely useful
when navigating between the islands, as they are always visible.

The edge of soundings is distant only from J to 2 J miles from t'
shores of the island; the NE. shore is here and there skirted by ar»
which in places affords temporary shelter for boats and droghe
The bank which connects this island to St. Bustatius is from 4 to
miles broad, with a depth of from 15 to 25 fathoms over coral ss
and rock.

The QoTernmdnt consists of a governor, commissioner, an exe
tive council, and a legislative assembly. The governor reside-**

. BASSE TERRE OLD ROAD. 411

Antigua; the seat of government is at Basse Terre, where the com-
missioner resides.

Basse Terra is clean and healthy, the sickly season being from
September to November; population about 10,000.

The authority to call upon is the commissioner. ^

Salutes can be returned.

The United States is represented by a commercial agent and vice-
commercial agent.

Anchorage. — ^The best anchorage is abreast the pier ih from 6 to 7
fathoms. No directions are necessary, as there are no dangers.

Supplies. — Provisions can be had at fisiirly reasonable rates. Flour
at from $6 to $6.50 a barrel; beef at $1:^ a barrel; bread at $3 a barrel;
fresh meat at about 14 cents per pound.

Water is put alongside in puncheons at 60 cents per 100 gallons.

Coal can be had in small quantities at about $10 per ton.

The Cunningham Hospital, a government institution, is well kept.
Sailors from all ships admitted at the rate of 60 cents per day.

Telegraph communication with United States and Europe and the
West Indian Islands.

Communication. — There is steam communication almost weekly
with New York and every two weeks with England. There is alsa
communication with the West Indian Islands.

Port Charges. — Vessels of 30 tons and under pay 24 cents per ton
once a year. Over 30 tons pay package dues on cargo landed, at the
rate of 24 cents per ton, one hogshead or 8 barrels being computed as
one ton. Ships calling for orders, water, or stores pay no charges
whatever.

Stone ballast is put within reach of ships' tackle at 60 cents per ton;
sand at 50 cents per ton.

Stevedore charges 18 cents per hogshead of sugar; molasses, 10 cents
per puncheon; labor on board ship, 72 cents per day.

Cargoes are put alongside free. Inward cargo is landed by the ves-
sel at a cost of about 3} cents per barrel.

Lights. — A fixed red light is shown from a small wooden tower, 33
feet high, on the beach fronting the town of Basse Terre, and is visible
4 miles. A small red light is also shown on the mole head.

Old Road lies about 5 miles westward of Basse Terre, and a little
eastward of the town there is a temporary anchorage in 9 or 10 fath-
oms water, stony ground, at 200 yards from the shore, abreast a river
)f excellent water.

There is also a similar anchorage a little northward of the small fort,
at the foot of Brimstone Hill, with the flagstaff on the hill bearing N",
^30 E. (N. 840 E. mag.), and the church ]^. 4© E. (N. 5° E. mag.); a
convenient 8i)ot for steamers to land troops or supplies.

Caution. — Neither of these anchorages is, however, fit for a sailing
'essel, as the wind under the high land is very baffling. In passing to-

412 ST. CHRISTOPHER ISLAND NEVIS ISLAND.

leeward oi the island sailing vessels should keep at least 3 miles oft
shbre to avoid being becalmed or exposed to the very violent gusts
which frequently rush down without warning through the ravines.

In rounding the NW. end of St. Oliristopher in the nighttime a good
berth must be given to Belltete or Sandy Point, as it is very low and is
foul for i mile off shore.

Deep Bay. — ^The north end of the island has a reef about 1^ miles
long protecting the anchorage. The outer edge of 'the reef lies J mile
off shore, with shallow water a short distance outside of it. Deep Bay
affords good anchorage for coasters.

The NarrowB. — The channel between St. Christopher and the island
of Nevis is called the Narrows. From the westward, against the trade
winds, it can only be used safely by handy coasting vessels, as no lead-
ing marks can be given for. beating, and the off-lying shoals are nu-
merous.

There are also channels for coasters between these shoals and the
chores of the islands, but no good leading marks can be given for them.

Anchorage. — ^Thereis excellent anchorage in the Narrows, with good
holding ground in 6 fathoms of water, with the Cow Bocks bearing N.
550 E. (N. 560 B. mag.), Scotch Bonnet Head N. 13o E. (N. 14^ E. mag.),
and Horseshoe Point N. 57^ W. (N. 56o W. mag.).

Directions. — ^Thc channel for vessels drawing 18 feet is between
Booby Island and St. Christopher, and to the N W. of the Cow Bocks, a
small cluster only 6 feet above the sea lying SW. of Booby Island and
midway in the channel between Nevis and St. Christopher. The east-
ern entrance is obstructed by a dangerous bar of* coral, which extends
for upwards of 2 J miles northwestward from the north end of Nevis. A
second patch lies IJ miles N. 21° E. (N. 22° E.' mag.) of Mosquito Bluff
and about a mile from the nearest shore of St. Christopher.

The passage is between these shoals, on which the sea breaks in sev-
eral places, and as the soundings give no warning, it is necessary to ap-
proach cautiously. For this purpose a vessel should keep an offing of
at least 3 or 4 miles, and steer in with Nags Head, a remarkable peaked
hill, in line with Mosquito Bluff, equally conspicuous, being a small per-
pendicular cliff 90 feet high, lying at the base of the lofty hills forming
the SE. end of the island, bearing S. 52^ W. (S. 53^ W. mag.); when
Lowland Church is just open to the westward of Booby Island S. 13^
W. (S. 140 W. mag.), a vessel will be on the bar between the shoals, in
28 feet least water. Having crossed the bar run direct for Booby Is-
land; pass 400 yards westward of it, and thence steer so as to pa^ """^
the northwestward of the Cow Rocks, at about the same distant
westward of thorn there is no danger to fear.

NEVIS.

Nevis Island is lofty and volcanic, somewhat circular, 7 miles
length, 5f miles in breadth, and its area is about 20 square miles. T]
peak, with it crater, rises from the center of the island to the height

.■ /

CHARLESTOWN MONKEY SHOALS. 413

3,596 feet, but it is seldom visible. There are, however, several other
elevations, which, being almost always unclouded, become most useful
land-marks. On the south side of the island Saddle Hill, 1,432 feet
high, may be readily made out from its features, except from the ESE.
and WNW., when the hummocks are in one. The hill, however, from
these points is equally conspicuous. On the east side of the island are
two remarkable wooded peaks, standing on a fork of the mountain,
2,350 feet high.

On the NW. side, Hurricane Hill, 1,192 feet high, is easily known,
being large and massive and terminating in a peak, and having at its
base a small detached rounded hill, which forms a prominent bluff at
the extreme NW. end of the island, 288 feet high, called Windy Hill.
With the exception of this point and the base of Saddle HiU, the shores
are low, and rise gradually to the interior, the plains and slopes being
highly cultivated.

The island is an EngUsh colony and belongs to the presidency of St.
Christopher. Population about 13,000 (1891).

Charlestoi^n, the capital of the island, has in front of it an excel-
lent anchorage with the prevailing winds, although an open roadstead.

iN'eithe^ coaling nor provisioning facilities exist at Charlestown.

The United States is represented by a consular agent.

Pilots and Dues. — ^There are no regular pilots, and pilotage is un-
necessary. Package dues are collected on all goods landed at the rate
of 24 cents per ton. Vessels not over 30 tons pay tonnage dues as per
register at the rate of 24 cents per ton once a year.

Directions. — Except on the west side, between Fort Charles and
Cades Bay, the shore is fringed with a coral reef, and should not be
approached within f mile, or the depth of 10 fathoms.

In approaching the anchorage off Charlestown from the southward
the lead must be hove quickly, as the 10-fathom line is less than one
mile off shore and steepto.

In the daytime, having rounded the south end of Nevis, if the island
of St. Eustatius can be seen, keep it open of Brimstone Hill on St.
Christopher. This mark will lead clear of the reef on the western side.

When Booby Island comes open of the north side of Nevis steer for
it. This mark will lead just outside the ledge off Fort Charles, and to
an anchorage at about i mile off shore, in 5 fathoms water, abreast the
flagstaff in the town.

It is supposed that the shoal water off Fort Charles (iu ruins) extends
out much farther than the chart shows, as 5 fathoms have been attained
one mile from the shore, tlie center of the town bearing N. 78° E. (N.
790 E. mag.)

Monkey Shoals. — Vessels of large draft approaching the anchorage
off Charlestown from the XW. must avoid the Monkey Shoals, which
are the only dangers on this side of Nevis, and lie N. 46° W. (N. 45^
W. mag.) 4J miles from Fort Charles.

.\4

414 REDONDA ISLET ^^lONTSERRAT ISLAND.

These shoals form two small banks of coral and sand, on which tha:e
83*6 4 fathoms water; they lie on the edge of soundings and occnpy a
space about J mile long, are 400 yards broad, and the discolored wacer
over them may be seen at some distance from aloft.

REDONDA. ,

Redonda Islet is small and rocky, 1^ miles long, f mile broad and
about 1,360 feet high. It is inhabited. Population 120 (1891). Phos-
phate is exported; labor can be supplied if required; fresh water and
provisions in small quantities can be obtained ; wild goats are plentiful
on the northern end of the island. The prevailing winds are from the
ESE. The only landing is at a small pier at the south end of tiie

islet.
Anchorage is good in from 10 to 13 fathoms about 200 yards from the

western side. Moorings are laid for ships to ride to, as the eddy winds

cause a ship to swing constantly.

MONTSBERAT.

Montserrat Island, discovered by Columbus during his second voy-
age, was named by him fi^om its resemblance to the mountain ot the same
name near Barcelona, which is rugged, uneven, and exhibits many lofty
peaks, as its name in the Spanish language implies. The first settle-
ment on the island was formed by the English in 1632, and is now a
presidency forming part of the colony of the Leeward Islands.

Government is similar to that of St. Christopher.

Population is about 11,700 (1891).

Its products are sugar and lime juice.

The island is of volcanic origin, and its lofty heights, clothed with
wood to their summits, may, when unclouded, be seen at a distance of
about 45 miles ; the highest is Soufriere Hill, 3,002 feet high. Its shores
are bold, steep, and free of danger. Its east and NW. sides are precip-
itous, but -the SE. and west sides slope gradually to the sea and are
highly cultivated.'

Water. — Many springs of excellent water flow into the sea; but on
account of the surf, watering is attended with difficulty.

Anchorage. — The anchorage ground off Brausby Point is extensive,
the depths moderate, and the holdiug ground good.

The anchorage off the town of Plymouth is not good, owing to the
great depth of water, but the anchorage given on the chart is very good.

The best anchorage is about f mile from Plymouth Wharf.

PlymoutlL — The town is well built, and is the cleanest in the sn
islands. The streets are paved; there is an excellent market pis
with plentiful supplies for one ship at least, the mutton and pot«t
being excellent. There is a very good wharf, and landing is as easy aj
Basse Terre, St. Kitts, or iJTevis. With westerly winds, rollers prev

Montserrat is as good a port of call as any in the West Indies.

BARBUDA ISLAND, 415

The United States is represented by a consular agent.

During the hurricane months a vessel should put to sea immediately
on the approach of bad weather.

Idght. — When the mail steamer is expected, a fixed light is shown
from a staff on the beach in front of the town of Plymouth.

Pilots and Dnes. — There are no regular pilots, and pilotage is unnec-
essary. There are no dues of any kind.

Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at Montserrat, at 6h. Om.
approx. ; springs rise one foot 6 inches, neaps 6 inches, but they are
irregular. Off the north and south points the western stream at times
runs 2 knots, the eastern being weak^ along its other shores it runs
about half a knot.

BARBUDA.

Barbnda Island contains 580 inhabitants (1891).

It is attached to the presidency of Antigua.

It is only partially cultivated, but quantities of cattle, horses, sheep,
and deer are raised, as well as corn, tobacco, and sugar.

The north, south, and west sides of the island are low, sandy, and
scantily wooded, with nothing remarkable on them except on the south
side, where about 2 miles from the S W. point there is an old martello
tower, in a ruinous state, near the beach, and a little to the eastward
of it a remarkable clump of trees, which are useful objects in approach-
ing this side.

From Spanish Point, the north side of whict is a white cliff 35 feet
high, the eastern shore of the island begins to rise, and about midway,
over a space of 2 miles, it is composed of i>erpendicular cliffs 200 feet in
height, and is the highest part of the island. On this side a dry broken
coral ledge skirts the shore at the distance of about ^ mile, upon which
the sea breaks with great violence, and it is so steep that there is no
bottom, with 90 fathoms 1^ miles outside it.

At the NW. end of the island the ledge is composed of detached coral
heads, which do not break. Here, however, the soundings give warn-
ing of approach, and a vessel in the nighttime, when passing the west
side of the island, should not come within the depth of 10 fathoms.

The west side of Barbuda is formed by a low, narrow sand ridge,
scantily wooded, at the back of wliich is an extensive lagoon, carrying
from 5 to 12 feet of water. The entrance to it lies a short distance to
the eastward of Billy Point, at the XW. end of the island, but it is ob
itructed by a bar of mud.

The bank on this side extends for a considerable distance to the west-
vskvd. This coast is foul in places for 2 miles off shore; vessels should
liot approach within the depth of 6 fathoms without caution.

The south sidii of Barbuda is by far the most dangerous, and must
>e approached with extreme caution, for the lead is of little use ; indeed ,
n the nighttime it should be avoided, if possible, altogether.

416 BARBUDA ISLAND ANTIGUA ISLAND.

This island is connected with. Antigua by a bank varying in depiii
from 7 to 30 fathoms.

Supplies. — No good water can be procured at Barbuda. The inhab-
itants use rain water. Fresh provisions and wood can, however, be
readily procured, and at moderate prices.

Anchorage. — ^There is excellent anchorage on the south side of the
island to the westward, and under the lee of the shoals which shelter
it with the wind as far to the southward as SE. The best position for
communicating with the island will be found at about J mile frotioi the
shore, with the river fort bearing N. 10° B. (N. ll^ B. mag.), and
Palmetto Point N. 64° W. (N. 63o W. mag.), in 5i fathoms. Be care-
ful, however, when standing in, not to bring the fort to the northward
of N. 10° B. (X. no E. mag.), until (^uite certain that the vessel is to
the northward of the shoals.

Both this and the anchorage on the west side of the island are ex-
posed to rollers ; but, as they take the vessel in the stern, she is eased
of the strain on her (iable and rides far more comfortably than if at
most of the anchorages about Antigua. At this period, however, land-
ing is attended with great difficulty and risk, for, should the boat be
thrown ashore broadside on, the liext wave would inevitably destroy
her. From a short distance to the westward of the river fort a^ far as
the SB. end of the island the beach is skirted by small coral heads,
with deep water between, through which the way must be picked to the
landing. The clearest spot will be found abreast the fort.

Navigators undertaking to pass between Barbuda and Antigua in
the nighttime should be very sure of their latitude, as the soundings
are so irregular that it would be difficult to tell from them which way
to steer.

ANTIGUA.

Antigua Island was discovered by Columbus on his second voyage
in 1493.

It was first settled by the English in 1032, and, with the exception of
a short interval from 1666 to 1668, has ever since been an English
colony.

Population in 1891, 36,119. Area, 108 square miles.

The government consists of the governor, an executive council, and
a legislative council.

The island is of moderate elevation compared with the lofty islands
to the southward, so that the heights are but seldom obscured by clou''^

The shores are deeply indented, particularly on the NB. side, wh<"
there are muny bays and creeks navigable for small vessels.

This end of the island is low, but it rises gradually in height tow;
its SW. end, where the hills heroine very irregular and so remarkable
to servo the purpose of guides throu<?h the dangerous reefs and she
which surround almost the* whole ishind. The only clear space is
the soutli side between WiUoughby Bay and Old Road, where it is b4

GREEN ISLAND WILLOUGHBY BAY. 417

and steep-to. Elsewhere it should be approacHed with great caution
and with the lead continually going.

Bank of SonndingB. — ^Antigua lies in the middle of the southern
edge of an extensive bank of coral and sand, which extends a little
northward of Barbuda, on its NE. edge.

Shoal Ghronnd. — On twp different occasions 7^ fathoms have been
struck between latitudes 17o Oi' 04" ]Sr..and 17o 06' N. and longitude
620 01' W. and 62© 02' 20" W.

Oraan Island forms the east end of Antigua, the eastern extreme of
which terminates in a bold, rocky headland, 170 teet high, called Man-
of- War Point, which is steep-to and may be rounded at the distance of
one mile. The sea generally rolls in so heavily that it should not be
approached within this distance, and great caution should be observed
when closing with Green Isls^nd either from the northward or south-
ward. '

Tan Ponnd Bay is nearly i mile to the SW. of Man-of-War Point,
and is unnavigable from the heavy swell which always rolls in at the
entrance. Eicket Harbor, at the SW. end of the island, affords shelter
for droghers under the lee of the reef. •

York Island is a small rocky islet, about 1 J miles SW. of Man-of-
War Point, at the south side of the southern entrance to Nonesuch Bay.
This island is nearly connected by dry reefs to the shore of Antigua,
which thence takes a S W. direction for IJ miles, where it terminates in
two bold, precipitous, rocky headlands 215 feet high, very remarkable
from the eastward, especially when the morning sun shines on the
white cliffs. In this space are the small bays of Marie Galante, Exchange,
and Half moon. The shore is skirted by a reef, but in moderate weather
it may be approached to a mile.

From Hudson Point, the southernmost of the above headlands, the
coast takes a sudden turn about W. by N. for 3 miles, and then runs
to the S8E. for 2^ miles, forming a deep bight named Willougbby Bay.

WiUoughby Bay is ca)>able of affording safe anchorage to large ves-
sels, but is so difficult and dangerous of access that it is seldom visited,
the produce of this part of the country being sent by droghers to St.
John. The head of the bay is low and sandy, and its entrance is pro-
tected by a coral ledge, dry in many x>art8, througli which there are
two cuts, that to the NB. named Horseshoe Channel; the other is
nearly 200 yards wide, but so crooked and intricate that no good marks
can be given for its safe uavigation.

Diractions. — To enter Willougbby Bay by the Horseshoe Channel,
run down about a mile off the reef, until Cocliranes Mill, on the low
land at the head of the bay, is in one with the low rocky point on the
south side of Christian Cove, bearing ]S. 50° W. (N. 49^ W. mag.)
which mark will lead through the narrow cut; on the point there is the
ruin of a small fort, 40 feet above the sea, but it is scarcely visible.

With the prevailing winds, vessels can not fetch out; and, as no safe
1840L> 27

418 ANTIGUA ISLAND.

directions cah be given for the other channel, the anchorage in this
bay is only free to steamers, and they will require the assistance of an
experienced pilot. The bay is exposed to the fhll force of the sea,
which makes it even dangerous to approach in strong winds.

Shirley Heights is a remarkable, bold, rocky, promontory rising
almost perpendicularly from the sea to the height of 545 feet. On the
Hat summit will be seen the barracks and other buildings formerly oc-
cupied by the garrison, but now abandoned and in ruins. Between
WiUoughby Bay and the heights are two small inlets, Mamora Bay and
Indian Creek, which afford safe anchorage to droghers of small size;
the entrance to the former is obstructed by a bar with 10 feet of water
on it; the mouth of the latter is about 200 yards wide and has a shoal
nearly in the center on which the sea generally breaks.

English Harbor, being entirely occupied by the government as a-
naval arsenal, is mostly visited by vessels of war, and is perfectly shel-
tered from all winds and sea. Water may be obtained with facility by
hauling the vessel to the wharf, where it is conveyed on board through
pipes. The harbor is very confined in space, and its turnings are so
sharp that vessels of great length must warp in.

Vessels of 17 feet draft may moor alongside the northern wharf of
the dockyard, with a bower anchor to the eastward; or, if wanting
coal, alongside the eastern wharf, with an anchor to the southward,
securing with her own hawsers or chains. There are 22 feet wat^r dose
off this wharf. At times the tide ranges 3 feet, but it is very irregular.

There are no stores in the dockyard except coal.

Supplies are scarce and dear.

A sailing vessel should not attempt to enter the harbor with the wind
to the northward of east, but should anchor outside and prepare to tow
or warp in.

There are no hidden dangers, and for a steamer or sailing vessel un-
dertaking to enter without a pilot it is only necessary to keep in mid-
channel. Long steamers will find it difficult to make the short turn
round Barclay Point, and it will be more convenient for them to anchor
in Freeman Bay, where moorings are laid down.

The wind generally moderates toward evening, and the land breeze
in the early morning will enable a sailing vessel to leave the harbor
without much difficulty.

Pilots and Dues. — Pilotage is compulsory on all vessels over 60 tons.
Vessels of over 30 tons burden pay 18 cents per ton on aU cargo land«l
or taken on board. Vessels under 30 tons pay 18 cents per ton regis
once a year.

Beacons. — Two white beacons are placed on the eastern shore
Freeman Bay and are the leading marks for entering the harbor.

Directions. — Intending to anchor in Freeman Bay, keep the abo^
beacons in line bearing N. 54^ B. (N*. 55^ E. mag.), and let go port 2
chor when the white wall of the navy j^ard is in line with the we

> '.:

« ' fcH

FALMOUTH HARBOR — ^DIRECTIONS. 419

■

end of the dockyard office, and secure with a hawser from the port I

quarter to the rock at Freeman Point.

To proceed alongside the yard, keep the leading marks on until within
Barclay Point; in rounding this point to go up the harbor, do not ap-
proach the point until the extreme of black wharf, in the navy yard, ia
nearly in line with the XE. comer of the dockyard, then turn as sharply
as possible.

I Falmonth Harbor affords excellent anchorage for a few vessels of
large draft 5 it is, however, never mside use of, except by droghers.
A sailing vessel of large draft would have to warp through against the
prevailing wind.

The heads of the inner part of Falmouth and English Harbors are
only separated from each other by a narrow, low, sandy ridge, about
200 yards across.

Pilots and Dues same as at English Harbor.

Directions. — Standing in for Falmouth Harbor from the eastward,
having passed Shirley Heights, the entrance immediately shows itself,
and a vessel may then steer boldly toward the center of the opening,
until the east end of the ruined fort on Blake Islet comes in one with a
remarkable house on the western slope of Monk Hill, bearing N. 7<^ W.
(N. 60 W. mag.). This mark will lead through the entrance, and hav-
ing passed the Bishop Shoal, which always shows itself, haul up and
anchor as most convenient, according to the vessePs draft.

Aspect — Westward of Falmouth Harbor is the loftiest part of An-
tigua, in many places the rugged, irregular hills rising abruptly from
the shore, particularly between that harbor and Old Boad Bluff. In
the immediate vicinity of the harbor are two conspicuous elevations,
which are frequently of great value to vessels navigating the north side
of the island. The first is Monk Hill, on the north side of the harbor,
readily distinguished by the fort and signal staff which crowns its sum-
mit, the SE. side overlooking a rocky precipice 695 feet above the level
of the sea.

The other, on the NW. side of the harbor, nearly IJ miles westward
of Monk Hill, is a much larger conical hill, thickly wooded, and rises to
the height of 1,058 feet. When seen from the NE. and SW. its summit
appears to terminate in a peak; but from the XW. and north, and points
opposite it, forms two peaks, and is consequently sometimes named the
Saddle Hill. It is also called Falmouth Peak, which seems a preferable
name, as there is another hill called the Saddle.

In clear weather both Monk Hill and Falmouth Peak may be seen
from Barbuda, 45 miles distant. The hills farther westward are higher,
but, with the exception of Baggy Peak, slightly elevated above the ad-
joining hills, are not particularly remarkable.

Old Road Bluff, 2| miles westward of Falmouth, is a remarkable,
bold, rounded headland, 135 feet high, steep-to, and easily recognized
from the east or west, as it is then seen to stand out a short distance

•»j

**'

420 ANTIGUA ISLAND.

from under the high land within it. Nearly midway between it ani
Falmouth Harbor, is Ding-a-Ding Nook, a small bay in which drogheia
find temporary shelter; tlie coast here maybe approached within i
mile. On the west side of the bluff the shore turns suddenly to the
northward for J mile, forming the east side of Carlisle Bay.

Old Road or Carlisle Bay. — ^A sandy beach sweeps round the head
of this bay, and terminates on its west side in a bold, rocky point, on
which there is an old fortj the village will be seen just to the north-
ward of it.

There is anchorage about midway between the Old Boad Bluff and
the fort in 4 or 5 fathoms water J mile or more from the shore. A long
ground swell, however, generally sweeps in from the southward, causing
a vessel to roll heavily ; and landing is sometimes difficult, as the surf
breaks a considerable distance from the shore.

Cade Bay and Ree£ — At 1^ miles westward of Old Eoad Bluffy on
a projecting rocky point, will be seen a small rounded eminence, called
Goat Head, 115 feet high, which is very remarkable, especially when
seen from off the west end of the island.. Between it and Carlisle Bay
are three small sandy beaches skirted by a coral ledge. From Goat
Head to the SW. end of the island, the shore is low and sandy, with
swampy ground at the back; and it is still skirted by a flat coral ledge
nearly dry, through which are one or two boat channels leading to good
landing.

This part of the coast is also bordered with barrier reefs nearly dry
in many places; and at the west end there is frequently a small sandy
cay, which is occasionally heaped up or washed away by the violent
action of the rollers.

This danger, named Cade Reef, lies about a mile from the shore, and
runs nearly parallel to it. Its east end lies south, distant about f mile
from Goat Head, and extends thence to the westward 2 miles. Its
outer edge is completely wall sided, and consequently very dangerous
to approach during the night, as the lead will give no warning, and be-
ing under highland no estimated distance can be depended upon. In
the daytime it may generally be seen, and will be avoided by keeping
the governor's house on Dow Hill open of Old Boad Bluff.

Middle Ree^ an inner danger, is within the barrier, lying nearly J
mile from the shore and running also parallel to it.

Anchorage. — Between it and the land there is excellent anchorage
off Cade Bay, where there is a good watering place. The eastern or
Goat Head Channel leading into it has not less than 25 feet water and
is easy of access, but too narrow to work out of; a vessel wull therefore
have to run out through the western passage, which is barred by a flat,
rocky ledge, on which there is not more than 21 feet of water.

Birections.— Vessels running for the anchorage in Cade Bay, or
taking the inner route to St. John between the reefs and the shore,
should haul close round Old Road Bluff towards Morris Old Mill, passing

-«it

Jt-.

* ftJ*J

OLD FORT POINT REED POINT. 421

Curtain Bluft*, which forms the eastern side of Morris Bay, within J mile.
When abreast the mill, if the weather be clear overhead, discolored ^

water will be seen off the end of th6 reef and the edge of the ledge
which runs off Goat Head, making clear a mid-channel coarse.

Xo leading mark can be given, so that for a stranger a pilotisneces- <|

sary. The best anchorage for watering is with Morris Old Mill in line
with Goat Head and the large house on the Harvey Estate — which will
be seen near the head of the valley under Boggy Peak — ^bearing N. 32<^
B. (K 330 E. mag.). Bound-to under easy sail, so as to take as little
sweep as possible. The above berth will place a vessel about midway
between the reef and the shore.

Old Port Point— The 8 W. end of Antigua terminates at Old Fort
Point, which is low and rocky; there are the ruins of a fort near the
extremity, and the barrack will be seen a little within them. Close on
the south side of the point is Johnson Islet, a rock 18 feet above the
«ea, covered with brushwood; being, however, under the high land?
these objects are not easily made out until on a NW, or SE. bearing.

West Coast of A"*^g"^ from Old Fort Point turns sharply to the
northward for 2f miles to Beed Point. In this space are three small,
«andy, shallow bays named Picartes, Prys, and Morris, which are sep-
arated from each other by remarkably bold bluff headlands about 100
feet in height. The high land of Antigua may be said to terminate at
Morris Bay; in the vicinity, however, there are several hills which are
of great value to vessels navigating the west side of the island, and are
conspicuous after passing Old Fort Point. Six of them are close to^
gether on the south side of Five Island Harbor.

The Saddle, 596 feet, and Flat Top, 500 feet high, are the most east-
ern, and are at once distinguished by their names; Leonards, Pearns,
and Mosquito Hills are conical, with peaked summits thickly wooded;
the two former are nearly the same height, 450 feet, the latter much
lower. Mount Thomas or Bound Hill, 547 feet high, rises on the north
side of Five Island Harbor, and makes as a large rounded wooded hill
from all directions except the NNW., when it appears more peaked; f
mile to the westward of it there is a narrow table ridge of moderate
elevation, terminating near its east end in a small peak, 463 feet in
height, named Table Hill, which may be seen at a long distance and
is a valuable landmark.

Reed Point lies at the foot of a wooded hill of moderate height, sep- .
arated from the shore by a narrow neck of low, swampy land, forming
the south side of Mosquite Cove, which is shallow, nearly J mile deep
east and west, and 4 mile wide from Beed Point to the opposite shore
under Mosquito Hill. Pearns Point, at the NW. extremity of the cove,
is low and rocky.

All this part of the coast is extremely dangerous to approach, as it
is fronted by a coral ledge, the outward edge of wliich is about 2 miles
to the westward of Frys Bay. The ledge is studded with rocky heads

422 ANTIGUA ISLAND.

having as little as 9 feet water on them, and f mile off Frys Bay is one
which is nearly awash.

There is, however, a good channel within the shoals for vessels of 14
feet draft, provided the trade wind is not too far to the northward
and they have a pilot.

The Five Islands are readily distingaished when seen from the
northward or southward ; but from the westward, being backed by high
land, they are not easily made out, except the largest, which is 50 feet
above the sea. There are in fact but four islets, for the NB, part of
the highest, which is called the fifth, from its appearing disconnected
at a certain distance, is attached to its western end by a low rocky
ledge. They are all, with the exception of the largest, low, small, rug-
ged, rocky, and scantily clothed with brushwood. The channel, with
15 feet of water, lies between the highest and the one eastward of it.

Five Island Harbor, a bight northeastward of the Five Islands^
1 J miles deep, and, although exposed to the rollers, is a secure anchor-
age with the prevailing winds for vessels of 16 feet draft. The 8W,
point of the entrance is formed by a remarkable red cliff, about 30 feet
high, i mile to the northeastward of Peams Point, separating two sandy
beaches;* and thence across to Pelican Point, at the northern entrance,
it is nearly a mile wide. In the inner part of the harbor is a remark-
able small round islet, called Maiden Island, with precipitous rocky
sides, crowned with small trees, the tops of which are 90 feet above the
sea.

The anchorage is obstructed by Cook Shoal, a small rocky head with
9 feet water on it in the center of the harbor, with Sandy Island in one
with PeUcan Point and Maiden Island N. 72^ E. (N. 73o E. mag.). It is
also obstructed at its entran(^e by the Pelican Shoal of 15 feet water,
which lies with Drew Hill in one with Maiden Island, and the Ship-
stem Islet just shut in with Ferris Point. Pelican Islet is small, rocky,
8 feet above the sea, 400 yards westward of Pelican Point, and is foul
on its east and west sides for 200 yards.

Directions. — Vessels of 16 feet draft approaching Five Island Harbor
from the southward pass outside the shoals; if from the northward,
within them. In the former case it will be better to beat in to the
southward of the Pelican Shoal, between it and the Five Islands; a ves-
sel may stand toward the latter without fear, as they are bold and
steep-to, and toward the shoal no nearer than to bring Drew Hill a lit-
tle open southward of Maiden Island, being K. 83o B. (I^. 84^ E. mag.)
When Johnson Islet is seen through the Five Island Channel she wiJ
be to the eastward of the shoal, and the board may be longer to th
northward. When within the points of the entrance she may stand i
to 300 yards from the shore, until the leading mark for the Cook Shoi
is nearly on. It will be better to pass to the northward of this shoa'
therefore in standing towards it tack when Drew Hill comes on wit
Maiden Island. When ^rithin the shoal proceed as far in as conve
ient, the lead being a suflBcient guide.

THE COAST ST. JOHN HARBOR. 423

Coming from the northward the wind will be free, and when past
Ferris Point keep the shore abroad to about 400 yards, and, haying
roundecl Pelican Islet, work into the anchorage. Leaving the harbor,
run out with Seaforth Bluft' shut in with the south side of Maiden
Island, which leads northward of Cook and Pelican Shoals and south-
ward of Hurst Shoals.

The Coast from Pelican Point trends KNE. 1^ miles to Ferris
Point, a wooded bluff of moderate elevation. Thence it trends to the
NJS., forming two sandy bays, named Galley and Goat Hill, and termi-
nating at Goat Hill, which is remarkable, 176 feet above the sea, and
crowned with a small fort with signal staff, and which, seen from the
south westward, open of Ferris Point, is well defined. Nearly 200 yards
westward of Goat Hill Point there is a small flat-topped rocky islet,
slightly wooded, called the Ship -stern, its west side having somewhat
that appearance, being a bold perpendicular cliff about 60 feet high,
with several large masses of rock lying at its base, which are very re-
markable when seen from the SW. or NE.

Midway between Pelican and Ferris Points, about 300 yards from the'
shore, is the Hawks Bill, a small, barren, black, rocky islet, 25 feet high,
steep and bold-to on its west side, which may be passed at the distance
of 200 yards. Its west side being composed of soft sandstone, has been
cut into by the action of the sea, forming a perpendicular cliff to nearly
the top of the rock, where it overhangs, projecting out almost horizon-
tally some feet.

St. John Harbor, at the head of which is sitaated the city of St.
John, the capital of the island, is the chief commercial port in Antigua?
from whence is finally shipped almost all the produce of the island,
which is brought by droghers from the outports. The city lies on the
side pf a gentle acclivity, which at the upper part is about 80 feet above
the sea, and contains about 10,000 inhabitants. From the offing its lo-
cality is at once pointed out by the cathedral, a large, massive, white
structure, with two lofty towers, the vanes of which are 163 feet above
the sea.

The harbor is secure against all winds except hurricanes, but Con-
fined and not at all convenient; vessels of 12 feet draft can not come
within f mile of the wharves, and those drawing over 14 feet are obliged
to load in St. John Road. It is also exposed to rollers, which break
over the jetties and inflict serious damage. These, however, seldom
occur.

Eat Islet is small, rugged, steep, and rocky; on its summit is a large
building and lofty signal staff, which are conspicuous objects; the wall
surrounding the building is 137 feet above the sea. The islet is con-
nected to the shore by a well built causeway, with a carriage road to
the foot of the hill. There is a signal station on Eat Islet which sig-
nals the approach of vessels, although they are generally signaled first
from the station on Goat Hill.

424 ANTIGUA ISLAND.

The N" W, point of the harbor terminates in a small rocky bluff 37 feet
high, on which is Fort James, and the breadth across the entrance is
i mile. A little without the entrance a tlat of sand runs along the
whole front of the harbor, on which the greatest depth at low water is
15^ feet, which is near the southern shore, and the channel is not 100
yards wide.

There are three principal channels which may be used to enter the
road and harbor of St. John, the Northwest, West, and Southwest or
Sandy Island Channel. The West Ohannel is, however, but seldom
used, except by vessels leaving the harbor.

The city has a public library and many other charitable societies.

The authority to call on is the governor.

The XJnited States is represented by a consul and vice-consul.

Supplies. — Provisions of all kinds can be obtained.

Water costs 50 cents per puncheon, but is bad, and there are no &cili-
ties for watering.

Goal might be obtained in small quantities, at a high price, from scnne
of the sugar refineries.

HospitaL — ^There is one, to which is united the insane asylum and
the poorhouse. It has an efficient staft*.

Telegraph. — ^The island is in telegraphic communication with the
United States and Europe.

Steamers call here from the United States, Europe, and tiie West
India islands.

Port Charges. — ^Pilotage is compulsory. Bates are: inward, under
6 feet, $4.80; 8 feet, 86.76; 9 feet, $7.20; 10 feet, $8.64; every foot bee
yond, $1.50 per foot. Tonnage dues, 18 cents per ton of cargo landed.
Ballast, sand, 60 cents; stone, 96 cents per ton. Labor, 60 to 75 cents
per day. Harbor fees, from 120 to 150 tons, $3.84; 160 to 200 tons,
$4.80; 200 to 250 tons, $5.76; 300 tons and upward, $7.68.

Landing Place. — The best landing place is at the foot of High
street, marked at night with three lights, red, green, and white, like a
steamer's lights end on. There are no regulations governing the land-
ing."

Pilots. — Vessels bound in from windward, having made theea«t side
of Antigna, generally pass round the north end and"*receive their pilot,
who is always on the lookout in the office near Parham. The shore,
however, should not be approached within at least 3 miles, as it is
everywhere foul and exceedingly dangerous to strangers.

Lights. — A fiixed white light, 50 feet above the sea, and visible about
13 miles, is exhibited on Sandy Island, from a black open iron- work
structure with red lantern. The light, bearing S. 21o W. (S. 22^ W.
mag.), clears the Diamond Bank, and ^'^. 10^ E. (^. 11^ E. mag.) the
Hurst and Irish Shoals. .

Fort James light is a fixed red light, visible through an arc comprised
between Ledwell Point and the center of Week Bay. It is elevated 48

ST. JOHN KOAD SANDY ISLAND.

425

feet above high water, and should be seen, in clear weatber, from a
distance of about 5 miles. This light, bearing S. 69^ E. (S. 68° E. magO^
leads between Sandy Island and Warrington Bank.

Pillar K#ck light is a fixed green light, obscured b3' Goat Hill through
an arc of about 16<^, also inshore of Kid Point. Jt is elevated 106 feet
above high water^ and should be visible, in clear weather, from a dis-
tance of about 10 miles. The lighthouse is a white pillar, 17 feet high.

The termination of deep water and west end of the bar is marked by
the light on Pillar Rock. Vessels drawing more than 12 feet must
keep this light eastward of south (S. 1^ W. mi«.).

Onmitt — ^The usual set is to the n<H*thward and westward, but
when the trades are unusually strong there is a decided set from the
northward and eastward, which banks up the water inside of the bar to
49ome extent.

St. John Road lies immediately northward of the bar, and may be
«aid to extend from Goat Hill to the Great Sister, a space of 2 miles,
but it is obstructed in the center by the Wamngton Bank and the Mi4-
dle Ground.

Warrington Bank is 800 yards in length and nearly the same in
breadth. It has 6 feet water on its shoalest part and is extremely dan-
gerous to approach.

Buoy. — A square wooden bell buoy, painted red, surmounted by a
<sage, has been placed to mark the Warrington Bank.

The buoy lies oif the south end of the shoal in 6| fathoms of water,
with Mount Thomas on the east shoulder of Goat Hill bearing S. 8^
E. (S. 70 E. mag.), and Drews Hill, over Fort James, S. 630 e. (S. 62o
E. mag.).

Vessels of all sizes can pass close to the buoy on its south side. The
reef lies north and NB. from the buoy.

Middle G-ronnd is a circular bank 400 yards in diameter, with a
depth of from 20 to 23 feet on it.

The mark for the cut between these banks is Table Hill in one with
Fort Barrington on Goat Hill S. 10© W. (S. 17° W. mag.) ; but it should
only be taken in a case of necessity. To the eastward of the Middle
<Tround there is a clear ship channel 600 yards wide.

Anchorage. — ^There is good anchorage both to the NE. and SE. of
these banks; that to the NE. is the best and most convenient, as boats
will in general fetch in to the entrance of the harbor, and it is always
used by vessels completing their caijgoes outside.

The Sisters. — The (ireat Sister is a small rocky islet lying about 5
mile from the shore, and when seen from the NW. has the appearance
of a wedge, with its thick end to the SW., which is 36 feet high, bold
and steep-to within 200 yards to seaward. About J mile from this islet
are the Little Sisters, a small cluster of rocks only 4 or 5 feet above the
isea.

Sandy Island. — ^The approach to St. John Harbor is also obstructed

■r'A!

426 ANTIGUA ISLAND.

to the westward by a shallow bank from i to f mile in extent, on the
eastern^ side of which is a small cay called Sandy Island, clothed with
stunted trees, the tops of which are 13 feet above the sea. Weymouth
Reef, a dry ledge, extends 8. mo W. (S. 67° W. mag.) 800 yaMs from it

Diamond Bank, the outermost danger, ^ mile long east and west^
and 600 yards broad, is a coral ledge, and although nearly awash sel-
dom breaks; under favorable circumstances, however, the disoolored.
water may be seen from aloft, when near it. It lies also near the west
end of the dangerous coral reef which extends hence to the eastward
almost continuously along the north shore of Antigua, at the distance
of from one to 2 mUes. The Diamond Channel between these reefii, i
mile wide, has a depth of from 4| to 6 fathoms. A two masted iron
steamer wa« wrecked on north side of this reef late in 1891, and will
probably remain until she goes to pieces.

Bannister Bank, nearly midway between the Diamond and theOreat
Sister, is nearly i mile long east and west, and ^ mile broad, with as
li|)tle as 17 feet water on it. The mark for its south end is Boon Mill
in line with Hodge Hill bearing S. 83^ E. (8. 82o E. mag).

Diamond ChanneL — Hutchiilsons Old Mill, difficult to distinguish,
on the south side of St. John Harbor, in line with Great Sister S. 3^
E. (S. 2o E. mag.), leads tlirough in 4 J fathoms water, and between the
Bannister Bank and the eastern reef in 4 fathoms. Use this range with
care. When Hodge HiU comes on with Boon Old Mill S. 83^ B. (8. 82o
E. mag.) keep away to pass about 400 yards westward of Great Sister;
thence haul in for the anchorage. For this channel local knowledge is
requisite.

Northwest ChanneL — ^With the wind scant, and no pilot, it will
be better to run westward of the Diamond Bank, hauling to the south-
ward when Mount Thomas, a dark peak, is in line with Qtotxt Hill S. 7^
E. (S. 6o E. mag.). Keep this course, S. 7° E. (S. 6° Rmag.), till Hodge
Hill is in one with Boon Old Mill S. 83o E. (S. 82° E. mag.), when haul
up for the anchorage.

Sandy Island Channel — Vessels bound to St. John from the south-
ward should take this channel if of too great a draft for the inner pas-
sage. Ai)proaching it, the dangerous steep-to shoals on the west side
of the island must be borne in mind ; the lead kept carefully going, and
the ship's position assured by the change in bearing of the lighthouse
and by bearings of prominent objects of Antigua, care being taken not
to mistake Pearns Hill for others near it. A possible set of the current,
which is uncertain, should also be guarded against.

Being about 24 miles westward of Old Fort Point, and with Ha\ 8
Bill open west of Five Islands, a N. 1° W. (north mag.) course maj B
steered, which leads ^ mile outside the shoals. Do not bring San r
Island northward of 'N, 10^ E. (N. lio E. mag.) until Maiden Islanc $
in one with Pelican Eock, when being abreast Hurst Shoals you •" f
haul into the channel, which is more than a mile wide.

WEST CHANNEL — ^LONG ISLAND. 427

Having passed to the eastwariJ of Sandy Island there is no danger
Hntil the Warrington Bank is approached, when the directions for the
Northwest Channel must be followed. If intending to anchor off the
bar, or to enter the harbor, a vessel may do so by the West Channel.

Ships passing westward of Sandy Island shonld insure their distance
&om it by carefully maintained bearings of the light, and by the use of
the lead.

West Channel, between Warrington Bank and Goat Hill, is J mile
wide, and as the wind is generally blowing out it is but seldom used in
entering.

Vessels*bound to the eastward will gain by taking the Diamond Chan-
nel, but they should be able to lay through.

Boon Point is the extreme northern end of the island. The shore
turns abruptly to the eastward and forms a bight, which terminates
about 2 miles distant at Hodge Point. This part of the shore is low^
rocky, and skirted by sunken shoals, an^ there is only one spot, nearly
f mile westward of Hodge Point and named Port Eoyal Bay, where
boats can effect a landing with safety. The hill just within this point
becomes a useful object in the navigation of this extremely dangerous
neighborhood.

From Hodge Point the coast t.akes a SE. direction for 2} miles ta
Port Byham, Judge Bay Point being intermediate. The shore is low
and foul. From the fort the shore becomes deeply indented, and forms,
two deep bights, the southern of which is Parham Harbor.

Parham Sonnd is about f mile in extent east and west, and ^ mile
north and south. It is capable of receiving a few vessels of large draft,,
is well sheltered, has good holding ground, and not exposed to the roll-
ers. The Yam Piece Shoals, which are detached coral patches, extend
nearly a mile from the west end of Long Island, and shelter the anchor-
age fix)m the !N'E.

Directions. — Parham Sound may be approached from several points
between NB. and NW. through narrow openings in the Kettle Bottom
Shoals. The leading marks for them are given on the chart, but they
are far too dangerous for a stranger, and it is only a well experienced
pilot that can make use of them.

Vessels leaving Parham Sound for St. John will find it of advantage
to pass within the shojils through Boon Channel, which is quite straight
and clear, and nearly f mile broad in its narrowest part except at its
east end, where between the NW. point of Prickly Pear Edge and Sil-
ver Eock Shoal, it is only J mile across.

Long Island protects the north side of North Sound and the east
side of Parham Sound. It is very irregular in shape, nearly a mile in
length east and west, and f mile in breadth at its west end, decreasing
toward the east, where it terminates in a point. The shores ai^e low,
but on its SW. end there are some trees 40 feet high. Two hundred
yards northward of the XW. point is Moor Islet, small, rocky, and 8

428 ANTIGUA ISLAND.

feet high; and ^ mile eastward is Little Bird Islet, of similar cliaracter,
bat only 20 feet high; both are asefal objects in navigating the chan-
nels through the reefs.

Bird Island Channel. — ^The entrance to this channel, which leads
into North Sound, is a mile northward of G-reat Bird Island, and the
few vessels that visit the sound enter by it; but it is so exceedingly
dangerous to approach, narrow, and intricate, though deep enough for
any ship, that no directions can be given, and it can only be navigated
by the most experienced pilots. As the wind blows continually in, the
passage out of the sound must be taken through a narrow channel
between Maid and Long Islands, in which there is a depth x>f 14 ftet,
but it should be buoyed beforehand.

Farluun Harbor is capable of admitting vessels drawing 13 feet,
but the channels to it are so narrow and intricate that the few vessels
which load here receive their cargoes in the North Sound, or Beads.
The town of Parham stands in the SE. corner of the bight, under a
wooded hill 165 feet high, on the west side of which is the churclu a
conspicuous object from the offing. It was at one period the seat of
government, and is still of some importance, being the place of transit
for the greater part of the commerce of this end of Antigua.

The eastern side of the harbor is protected by a long, irregular, low,
swampy neck of land, about | mile in length, which terminates at North
Sound Point in a small hill 60 feet high. From the east side of the
neck numerous small islets, rocks, and reefs sweep all round to the
N W., inclosing a large basin of water, completely sheltered, called the
North Sound.

G-reat Bird Island is the most remarkable of the islets which
inclose North Sound, and a valuable object to the pilots. It is of
irregular form, its west side very low, but its east side is a narrow
atrip of black, barren rock 600 yards long, rising perpendicularly flrom
the sea to the height of 110 feet, and may be seen from a long distance,
the north end particularly, as it forms a bold headland. The N£.
point of the dangerous reef and coral ledge which extends all along the
north side of Antigua as far as the Diamond Bank bears fix>m the bluff
N. 120 W. (N. 110 w. mag.) IJ miles.

Three Fathom Bank lies NE., a mile from Bird Island Reef. It is
about f mile in length and GOO yards in breadth, with a depth of fh>m
Si to 4^ fathoms, over coral and white sand, with irregular soundings
around.

Four Fathom Bank, lies 1:^ miles from Three Fathom Bank. It s
composed of small detached rocky heads, lying nearly in line, N W. a I
BE. for I mile, having a depth of 4^ and 4J fathoms, and on which the i
is generally a heavy sea. Beating to the eastward, do not pass sout •
ward of these banks before the hill at the east end of G-reen Isla^ I
bears S. 7^ E. (S. 6^ B. mag.).

'Vi^l

,i«5^

';<!

GUANA BAY — CUBBENT. 429"

Guana and Belfast Baya — Between Ouana Island and Indian Town vlr'

Point the shore is exceedingly irregular and forms two deep bights^
Guana Bay to the north and Belfast Bay to the south. Both are well
sheltered by the islets and numerous reefs to the eastward, and of
Bufficient depth for vessels of large draft; but the channels are far too
intricate for them to navigate, particularly as the prevailing winds,
which are her^ accompanied by a heavy, short sea, make even an
approach to this part very hazardous. They are frequented by droghers ,
which are sometimes exposed to accidents and long delays, as they
can not beat out except under favorable circumstances. GPhere is a
boat channel between the bays and !N^orth Sound, through the Narrows
at the west end of Guana Island.

ITonsnch Bay. — Between Indian Town and Man-of-War Points the
shore again forms a deep bight called Nonsuch Bay, which is so com-
pletely protected by reefs, nearly dry, as to be a secure harbor, with a
depth of from 5 to 8 fathoms; but it is equally difficult to navigate as
those just described, and quite closed against sailing vessels of large
draft. -

Tide8.-^The rise of tide at Antigua sometimes amounts to 2 feet,
but is generally less, and so uncertain in its periods as to be of little
nse to navigation. No regular tidal stream can be detected.

The Cnnrent is equally variable in its movements, and the oldest
pilots can give no certain account of either its strength or direction.
During the period of the survey of these islands, between NovembAr
and May, Uttle or no current was met with between Antigua and
Barbuda, although this is the period when the trade wind blows
strongest. In June it has been found running strong to the westward,,
on the south side of Antigua, when at the same time there was little or
none on the north side, and an eddy stream, close inshore;

• i

• ) ft

4 ' r

!
•*

CHAPTER XIII.

; THE WINDWABD ISLANDS— GITADBLUPE, DOMINIOA, AND MABTINIQUE.

I aUADELtJPE.

G-uadelupe Island was discovered by Golambas during his second
voyage, in 1493. It was colonized by the French in 1635, and with but
slight interruption has remained ever since in their possession.

The island is separated by the Eiver 8al6e into two parts, the western,
or Guadelupe proper, called Basse Terre, and the eastern, called Grande
Terre. The whole territory is under a governor appointed by the French
Government, and with the dependencies of Marie Galante, the Saintes^
Petite Terre, and Desirade, has a population of 178,000 inhabitants.

The north part of the island of St. Martin is also under the control
of the government of Guadelupe.

Although only separated by a shallow arm of the sea, the eastern and
western portions of the island di£fer very materially in appearance and
ii. their geological character.

Basse Terre^ the western portion/is of volcanic origin; the soil b
clayey and the surface rugged and uneven. A chain of lofty, wooded
mountains traverse this part of the island from NNW. to SSE. The
most northern i>eak of tMs chain is called St. Bose; the most soatheis,
Trou aux Chiens. Near the southern end is the Soufri^re, an active
volcano, and near the middle are two conical peaks called the MameJIes.
The last eruption of Soufri6re took plack in 1799.

On the western side of the mountains the declivities are steep, with
rapid torrents rushing down to the sea, but on the eastern slope the
descent is more gradual.

There are among the mountains numerous mineral springs of variou
descriptions.

Grande Terre, the eastern division of the island, is almost a level
plain, having a limestone formation, with two ranges of small hiDs — one
on the northern shore, 300 feet high, called the heights of Bertrand,
and another, farther south and running nearly parallel with the so k-
ern shore, called the hills of 3t. Anne. These hills are about 375 et
high and are separated by deep gorges, having at the bottom g g-
gish and sometimes stagnant streams, which gradually filter intc be
sea through the sand bars at their mouths.

The principal productions of the island are sugar and manioc, ba ill
kinds of tropical fruits and vegetables are raised, and large quantr es

430

PORT CHARGES— CLIMATE TEMPERATURE. 431

of sugar, coffee, cocoa, rum, molasses, annato, cotton, dyewoods, etc.,
are exported. The importations consist principally of rice, salt, fish,
•wines,, machinery', hardware, cotton, silk, and worsted goods.

Port Charges. — By a law taking effect January 1, 1888, vessels of
all nationalities are exempted from all port charges; this law applies to
all the ports in the island of Guadelupe.

Pilots. — Pilotage is compulsory to vessels over 60 tons. Rates as
follows: 15 to 30 tons, $2; 30 to 60 tons, $6; 60 to 80 tons, $12; 80 to
100 tons, $15; 100 to 150 tons, $22.75; 150 to 200 tons, $27.85; 200 to
250 tons, $33; 250 to 300 tons, $38; 300 to 350 tons, $43; 350 to 500 tons,
$48; above 500 tons, 10 cents per ton.

IVater Tax. — ^To be paid at Pointe ^ Pitre only. Five cents per
ton register whether taken or not.

Interpreter's Fees. — One dollar for 60 tons and under; $6, 60 to
100 tons; $7, 101 to 150 tons; $9, 151 to 200 tons; $12, 201 to 250 tons;
*16, 251 to 300 tons; $21, 301 to 350 tons, and $27 above 350 tons.

BAails. — ^Guadelupe has mail communication with the other West
India islands and with Europe at least four times a month, while almost
daily communication takes place between the different towns of the
island and its dependencies. The mails with America are irregular.

Telegraph. — By means of the telegraph cable landed at Basse Terre
and joined to numerous land lines, the ports of the island are in con-
stant communication with the United States and Europe.

Climate. — Except during the rainy season, the climate of Guade-
lupe varied slightly as regards either barometric pressure, temperature,
or winds. The barometer rises regularly every day till about 9.30 a. m.,
then falling till 4.30 p. m., rises again till 10 o'clock in the evening,
when it again falls till 4.30 a. m., oscillating during each twenty-four
hours between 29.99 inches and 30.07 inches. The mean daily height
also varies during the year, being lowest in October, increasing till
March or April, then remaining nearly stationary till July, when the
maximum height is attained, after which the mean daily pressure grad-
ually decreases during the rainy season. The abnormal variations of
the barometer are almost always accompanied by hurricanes, which
take place during the rainy season, between July and November. When
observed at other times of the year they indicate atmospheric disturb-
ances taking place at a distance too great to be otherwise felt in this
island.

Temperature. — ^The mean temperature of Guadeloupe is about 71)^
Fahrenheit throughout the island, except at Basse Terre, where it is
80^, Its minimum is reached between January and March, ranging
fi*om 70^ early in the morning to 84^ at noon, while during the rainy
season the lea-^t temperature is about 70°, rising in the middle of* tbe
day to 88^, sometimes, but very rarely, attaining a height of 05^.

Rain. — ^The average amount of moisture in the air of Guadeloupe is
very great. If complete saturation to the point of precipitation be con-

432

GUADELOUPE ISLAND.

sidered as unity, the usaal amount of moisture may be represented a»
from 0.64 to 0.73.

Heavy rains are most frequent from the middle of July to the middk
of October, being then attended by violent thunder squaUs.

Showers fall occasionally at all times of the year, but are less fre-
quent on the weather side of the island than to leeward.

At Pointe k Pitre the annual rainfall is nearly 40 inches; at Basse
Terre nearly 60.

T^inds. — The winds blow almost constantly from the eastward.
The following table shows the mean observations for three years:

Nnmber of davH
daring the year.

Direction of the wiiKl.

North. XNE: • NE

5i ! 68i

Eaat.

136i

ESE. SE. * SSE.

South.

26i I 40i

Ligkt

westerly

ain.

During the mouths of December, January, February, and March the
wind has the most northing, somewhat heavy but short squalls from .
north and XE., attended with copious showers, being not infrequent
about the end of the year.

In February the wind blows freshly from the east during the day,
with flue weather, the breeze decreasing every evening and rising again
about 8 or 9 o'clock in the morning.

In May the winds become comparatively regular between ESE. and
SE., continuing until ]S"ovember, when they gradually draw round to
the northward. The commen(*.ement of the rainy season, about the end
of May or beginning of June, is marked by thick weather, with a heavy
swell along the coasts. Generally, however, with the exception of
squalls and occasional hurricanes, calms and light, variable winds pre-
vail during the rainy season. Calms also occur sometimes during
March and April. Tlie summit of the Soufriere Mountain is generally
visible shortly after sunrise for a quarter or a half an hour, when it be-
comes hidden. If during the day it is again uncovered it is an indica-
tion of calms and fine weather.

When the breeze is fresh on the weather side of the island it also
blows strongly to leeward, but when it is light to windward it is very
apt to be calm on the lee side of the island, or else a light westerly
wind is experienced, modifying very agreeably the excessive heat fre-
quently felt.

Rollers. — At Basse Terre rollers are experienced during the ra
season, while at Port du ]\loule they are only felt toward the end of
year.

Earthquakes arc frequent at (raudeloupe. The most violent on reec
was in Febnuiry, 184.'J, when the town of Pointe k Pitre was destroy

Chateaux Point, the eastern extreme of Guadeloupe, is a bluff, rocl
point, of quite remarkable appearance, having ofif its northern side ♦^^

W-^^

.='-^';

» fi

' .■!>'i

PORT ST. FRANgOIS GOZIER ISLET. . 433 ' S

sharp-peaked, rocky isleta. The poiut is clear of danger and may be
passed close-to.

Port St. Francois, about 6 miles westward of Chateaux Point, is
only a reef harbor, about 200 yards in diameter and with a depth of 13
feet. With a SE. wind a heavy sea sets in here.

There are two sugar factories in the neighborhood, but no stores can
be procured, and vessels must be entered and cleared at the custom-
house of Pointe A- Pitre.

The position of the harbor may be known by the houses of the town,
partly in ruins.

During the season of XE. winds vessels may anchor to the south-
ward of Port St. Trangois, J mile off shore, in 6 fatiioms of water, with
a bottom of sand and broken shells. ;!

St. Anne Anchorage, 7 miles farther west, is fit for vessels draw-
ing not more than 13 feet. The harbor, though small, is well shel- |
tered and not difficult to enter. The best channel, called the Grande .*•
P{ws, is on the eastern side of the reefs which protect the mouth of the j
harbor. At the western end of the village is the jail, having a squar /)
tower in the middle, surmounted by a pointed roof, and inland a little v
way are the gray ruins of the Plaisance Mill, which must not be con- ^i
founded with another ruined ihill close to the beach. f,

Bnoy. — A red buoy is moored off tlte entrance to Grande Passe
westward of the 5-fathom patch, with the east side of the jail bearing
K. 310 W. (N. 30O W. mag.). :^

Directions. — Vessels approacliing St. Anne, intending to make the
anchorage, should bring Grande Passe buoy in line with the east side
of the jail and hold this alignment N. 31^ W. (X. 30° W. mag.) through
the pass to the anchorage.

At the anchorage the holding ground is very bad; with the wind
from SE. a heavy sea sets in. Several vessels on getting under weigh
have gone ashore on the reef to leeward.

Le Diamant. — At about 3 miles westward of St. Anne and J mile
off shore is the Dianiant Rock, a little above water. West of it is Sable
Islet, small and covered with sand, except the north poiut, which is
wooded.

Petit Havre. — Between the shore and the coral bank on which are
the above islets is an indifferent anchorage in 3 J fathoms, with Simonet
MiU X. 1^ W (north mag.) and Petit Havre Point :^. 78^ E. (X. 79^ E.
mag.).

Qozier Islet, 3 miles westward of Sable Islet, is circular, very low, ,
sandy, and about J mile in diameter; it lies about .J mile off the
town of the same name, and in the channel between there are from 10
to 16 feet water ; it is fringed with a coral reef. A berth of ^ mile should
be given this islet. At Gozier commences the outer line of shoals
and cays, which extend about 6 miles in a SW. direction to Goyave
Point.

18402 ^28

434 GUADELOUPE ISLAND.

Light.— On Gk)zier Islet is a tower built of masonry, from which is
exhibited a fixed white light visible 12 miles.

Pilots. — Pilots for Pointe k Pitre and aH the neighoriug ports axe
stationed on Gozier Islet. They do not go out at night.

The Bay of Pointe k Pitre, or Petit Col de Sac BCarin, is of some
extent, with numerous islets, cays, and dangerous banks. The largest
and most conspicuous of these islets are Cochons, F Anglais, Frigate de
Haut, and Frigate de Bas, butit isoften difficultto distinguish themfrom
the land. The outer edge of the banks named Mouchoir Carr6, Mouton
Vert, and Caye *k Dupont is about IJ miles SE. of the islets; these
banks are on the west side of the channel leading to Grande Bay, and
the Saintes kept open of Guadeloupe clears them to the eastward. For
a large ship a pilot is most necessary.

Two and a half miles S. 67° W. (S. 68^ W. mag.) of Gozier Islet is.
the Mouchoir Carr6 ; it is of small extent, with about 12 feet water on
it, and generally breaks. A bell buoy surmounted by a mirror is moored
northeastward of Mouchoir Carr6. West of this about J mije is Oaye
Plate, a coral patch with 18 feet water on it. About a mile S. 22^ W. (S. 23o
W. mag.) of Mouchoir Carr6 is Mouton Vert, on which there are 16 feet
water; it extends i mile to the !5rw., and there is at that end a patch
with 12 feet water on it; although the sea rolls heavily over this bank,
it does not break, and is therefore not so easily distinguished. Three-
quarters of a mile to the southward of this is the Caye k Dupont, i mile
in extent and with two patches awash. Nearly mid-channel between
these two latter shoals is a coral head, with 18 feet water on it. About
J mile to the southward of Caye k Dupont is the northern edge of the
Caye Martinique, and which extends to Goyave Point. The channels,^
however, between the shoals and islets within them are navigable for
small vessels bound to Petit Bourg, Goyave, and St. Marie.

Grande Bay is a slight indentation in the land just. outside the en-
trance to Pointe ^ Pitre. The western limit of the bay is a bold head-
land, on which is a fortification called Fleur d'Ep6e. There is good
temporary anchorage here in 4J fathoms, with the fort N. 33^ E, (N. 34^
E. mag.) and Gozier lighthouse S. 74^ E. (S. 73^ E! mag.). Vessels
loading in any of the neighboring sugar ports anchor here while effect-
ing their clearance at the customhouse of Pointe h Pitre.

Bacchus Point, one of the most important landmarks in approach-
ing Pointe A Pitre, lies on the western side of the bay. It is a triangular
bluff surmountM by two hillocks, and is marked by horizontal shelve*
all along the face of the bluff.

Cochons Island is in the northern part of the bay, and forms tl
western side of the channel leading to Pointe k Pitre. It is easily di
tinguished by the fort and flagstaff on its eastern end. It is low at
wooded, steep-to on the southern side, and on the eastern side has
coral reef awash at low water, and running off 300 yards.

Pointe a Pitre Harbor, near the entrance of the Eiver Sal^e,
approached through a somewhat crooked channel. It is formed

POINTE A PITRE. 435

Uochons Island and the neighboring islands on the west, and by jbhe
(^ys and reefs extending from the shore on the east.

The beacons on the west side of the harbor mark shoals of small
extent having passages between them.

A spit extends westward from off the northern wharf, having at its
extreme a bank of 6 feet.

The town of Pointe k Pitre, on the NB. side of the harbor, is one of
the most important commercial places in the Windward Islands. It is
a clean, well-kept, thriving place, of 18,000 inhabitants. It was settled
in 1763, and was in 1843 destroyed by an earthquake.

The harbor is perfectly secure, even in hurricanes. On the eastern
side is an extensive sugar fiict^ry called the Usine d'Arbousier.

The United States is represented by a consul and vice-consul.

Authorities to visit: The mayor and captain of the port.

"Water can be obtained by sending ships' boats to the pipe at the
wharf.

Provisions of all kinds can be obtained at reasonable rates.

Coal — There is a very small quantity to be bought 5 cost from $6 to
$7 per ton. The sugar factories import from 30,000 to 40,000 tons a
year, but it is for their own use only.

Hospitals. — There is one military hospital, in charge of a naval
surgeon ; capacity of about 120 patients, and is kept very clean. Sailors
from foreign vessels are admitted for about $1 per day.

There^s also a civil hospital; capacity, about 200 patients; charge,
35 cents. The sanitary condition is very good, the city being clean.
Malaria and dysentery are common.

Telegraph. — A land line connects the city wit^ Basse Terre, and
from there is a cable connecting the island with the United States and
Europe.

Steamers. — The French Line and Koyal Mail Line steamers call at
this place.

Repairs can be made here to small vessels, but no extensive repairs
can be made.

Beacons. — ^The beacon on Rose Bank is painted white, surmounted
by a black disk; and the beacon on Couillons Bank is black, surmounted
on a black disk.

Proven9al Bank is marked by two beacons similar to the last men-
tioned. *

Dredging operations are in progress to deepen the several shoals in
the harbor to a depth of 4J fathoms.

A mooring buoy is laid down for the mail steamers.

Harbor Lights. — ^A white light on buoy off Cochons Island, to be left
to westward; a red and green light on buoy SW. of Caye d'Arge'ht; a
green light on buoy off Rat Island, and a green light on buoy off Man- '
roux Island, to be left to the eastward; a fixed light, visible 7 miles
from a ma*st on Manroux Island. An iron beacon, painted red. and sur-
rounded by a cage, is situated on Fouillole Point, close to the water's

436

GUADELOUPE ISLAND.

edge. A sector of red light over au arc of 13^ is exhibited from the
beacon at au elevation of 77 feet above the sea, and is visible in clear
weather from a distance of G miles. These last two lights in line leads
eastward of Monchoir Carre.

. Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at Pointe ^ Pitre at lOh.
Om. ; springs rise 1 J feet.

Directions. — ^Vessels approaching Guadeloupe from windward should
endeavor to make the island of Desirade, keeping on the parallel of 16'^
20^ On making this island, which can be seen at a distance of 30 miles,
the course lies between Ohateaux Point and Petite Terre, and thai
along the coast of Grande Terre, keeping at least one mile off shore on
account of the 17-foot bank. When abreast of Gozier Island, haul to
the northward to take a pilot if intending to go inside.

With a vessel dra^Wng 20 feet or more, and being to the SW. of Gro-
zier Island, bring Jarry Mill, now in ruins and not easily picked up,
the west side of the harbor, to bear N. 46^ W. (N. 45^ W. mag.). It
will then be just open to the eastward of the east x)oint of Gochons
Island, and open to the southward of the only outer buoy; this line
will lead up to the outer anchorage or to the entrance buoy.

Vessels coming from the west and south will usually have to tack
before they can fetch the entrance. In approaching the entrance of
Point k Pitre, they should not stand so far to the westward as to shut
in the Saintes Islands with Oapesterre Point.

On nearing the entrance by keeping to windward of a line drawn
•from the Usine d'Arbousier through Manroux Island lighthouse, S. 12^
E. (S. 11^ E. mag.), the outer shoals will be avoided.

If Desirade Island should be made during the night, the navigator
should keep in sight the light on Petite Terre, visible 15 miles in clear
weather, and guided by it there will be no difficulty in coasting along
the south side of Grande Terre, keeping in from 11 to 14 fathoms of
water until Gozier Island light is made. Care should be taken to keep
clear of the coral reefs on the west side of the bay by keeping this light
bearing to the nortliward of N. 44<^ E. (N. 45<^ E. mag.) till daylight.
Although the buoys are lighted, strangers should not attempt to enter
at night.

Vessels generally go to sea with the land breeze at early daylight,
usually taking a tow boat at the cost of 10 cents a ton.

Bound to the United States or Europe they generally pass to leeward
of Guadeloupe. Some navigators prefer to go to windward of Gran^^ft '
Terre, beating through the channel north of Marie Galante and passi
between Chateaux Point and the island of Desirade.

Petit Bourg is frequented by small vessels and may be reach
after passing within the line of outer shoals, by passing close to t
southward of Fregate de Haut Island and of Hache Island, and ke<
ing on the same course i mile farther, when good anchorage in 20 fl
will be found 300 yards off shore.

GOYAVE ANCHORAGE BASSE TERRE. 437

Goyave Anchorage. — Local knowledge is necessary to take a ship
in and out.

St. Marie is an important port of export for sngar. Its locality
is easily distinguished by three red bluffs just north of the town.

It is an excellent anchorage for vessels not drawing over 15 feet, but
the approaches are intricate, and the assistance of a pilot is necessary.

Lights. — A fixed white light on the shore, about 153 yards eastward
from the site of the old house with a red roof. The house no longer exists-

A fixed white light on piles at northern extremity of the one-fathom
shoal, west side of Le Gros Loup. ^

A fixed red light from a buoy moored on the NW. edge of Le Gros
Loup.

There are two jetties or piers at Port St. Marie; one, 'about 153
yards west from the Jiarbor light, is a landing constructed and main-
tained by the colony; the harbor light is at the inner end of the other,
which has been completely abandoned.

There are three beacons not lighted in the harbor; one at the SE.
extremity of Les Peignes, one at the XE. point of the Caye i\ Saut6,
and one at the SE. extremity of Caye Bateau.

The District of Capesterre, lying south of St. Marie, was formerly
the richest and most highly cultivated part of Guadeloupe. Rising
high above it is Madelaine Mountain, with numerous torrents rushing
down its abrupt slopes.

Off Citpesterre Point the soundings are very irregular, and a berth
of one mile at least should be given to the coast.

Coast. — The coast from Capesterre Point to Vieux Fort Point forms
a series of points and open exi)osed bays into which droghers come for
sugar.

Vieuz Fort Point, the SW. point of Guadeloupe, is formed of black-
ish rocks with a large rock close off of it.

Basse Terre. — The anchorage is a perfectly open roadstead, with
very deep water at a short distance from shore. With the wind from
south or west the anchorage is very unsafe, and vessels should at once
go to sea, but during the season of strong trades, although a somewhat
heavy swell almost always sets in, the anchorage is safe. Even during
this season heavy rollers sometimes cut off all communications with the
shore for a time.

Vessels approaching the anchorage from the southward should haul
close round the south point of the island, keeping always prepared for
the violent puffs of wind which rush down from the mountain, and,
keeping the shore close aboard, should haul up for the anchorage inside
the mooring buoy of the steamers, and anclior oft' the town, as most con-
venient, in from 16 to 22 fathoms, 300 to 400 yards from the shore.

The town of Basse Terre is tlie seat of government of the island, and
has a population of about 9,000.

There is a tine hospital for forei,ij:ners at the foot of Camp Jacob.

438 GUADELOUPE ISLAND.

Telegraph. — There is frequent . mail communication with other
islands, and the West India and Panama Telegraph Company have an
office here.

Water can be easily obtained from a pipe emptying near the center
of the town. Fresh provisions may be obtained.

Light& — ^A red harbor light, visible 7 miles, is exhibited from the
quay, and a similar one, but of less elevation, at the end of the wharf.

Signal — Signals are made from the mast at the port office.

West CoaEft of G-uadeloupe. — Between Basse Terre and Grande
Anse, 20 miles to the Xil^W., there are many small bays affording
anchorage for small vessels. The principal are named Du Plessis,
Barque, and Bouillante; the latter is 9 miles from Basse Terre, and
receives ite name from the two hot springs in the neighborhood. At IJ
miles farther on is Criquet Bay, sheltered on the west by Goyave or
Pigeon Island, leaving between it and the shore a channel called the
Passe des Vaisseaux. Beyond this are those of Caillou, with the town
of the same name or Point Koire, where landing will be found to the
south of the village on a beach • of gray sand. Ferrj'^, Deshayes, and
lastly Grande Anse, which is separated from the last named by the
lofty promontory of Gi'os Morne.

From Gros Morne the coast trends to the N^E. tor 5 miles.

Q*rand Sec is a bank which commences off Point Ferry between J
and f mile from the shore and extends northward to within | mile of
Kahouanne Island. Off Point Breton, on this bank, there is» a depth
of a little over 30 feet of water.

La Perle Shoal, on which are 6 feet water, is about j^ mile west of
the point of same name and a little more than a mile S. 19° W. (S. 20^
W. mag.) from the south point of Kahouanne Island. The bank runs
to the northward for ^ mile and is parallel with the shore. Between
the bank and shore there are 30 feet of water, but this passage shoidd
not be attempted.

Tdte a TAnglais, a small gray islet skirted by reefs, lie^ about IJ
miles off the XW. point of Guadeloupe; thence the coast turns sud-
denly ejistward, continues very high, and should be navigated with
extreme caution.

Lights. — A fixed red light is exhibited at an elevation of 69 feet from
the north point of entrance to Barque Cove, -^l^sible 9 miles. A fixed
white li^ht is also sliown from a mast 20 feet high, in the inner part of
the cove.

Winds and Currents. — On the western coast of Guadeloupe the
is a land breeze almost every night, extending about 2 miles off shoi
and exceedingly useful to vessels bound either north or south.

Outside of this limit light variable breezes and calms, lasting sever
days, are sometimes experienced, so that vessels which do not approac
the land close enough to benefit from the land breeze would do well
keep 20 or 25 miles oft' shore to avoid these calms.

GUADELOUPE, NORTH COAST MAHAUT BAY. 439

CnrrentB. — ^A strong SE. current, depending on the strength of the
NE. trade wind, is frequently felt off the west coast of Guadeloupe,
Tides are very little felt.

North Coast of Guadeloupe. — About 1^ miles northward of Yieux;
Fort Point lies Kahouanne Island, at the west end of a reef which ex-
tends along the shore, increasing its distance off to 3 miles, to within
about 2 miles of the west side of Grande Terre. On this reef are several *
small cays, which serve to warn a vessel of her approach to the reef
when beating to windward; and withm it there is a good channel for
small vessels. There are also several cuts through it, navigable for
vessels bound to the small bays of Bose, Lamentin, and Mahaut. .

The best of these passes are Grande Goul6e, between the reefs which
extend from the east side of Anglais Islet and the west side of Blanc
Isle, in which there is a depth of 6 fia.thoms; Passe k Caret, west of the
islet of that ncune, has a depth of 4^ fathoms; and Passe ^ Colas, the
most eastern, is of greater depth, but neither of them can be navigated
safely without the assistance of a pilot, though the water is so clear
that the shoals can generally be seen from a short way aloft. In work-
ing up the channel within, it will be advisable to border towards the
reef, particularly after passing to the eastward of BosCfBay, when the
shore becomes skirted by reefs and cays.

The Pilots who are familiar with the intricate channels of Cul de
Sac Marin are almost all fishermen, and, like those of the Bahama Bank,
endeavor in navigating these channels to have the sun behind them,
And are guided to great degree by the color of the water in avoiding
dangerous shoals.

Grand Cul de Sac Marin is the large bay between the Points
Allegr6 and Grisgris. The whole bay is bordered by the reef previ-
ously mentioned, extending from one to 3 miles off shore, and is studded
with islets and shoals. The sea is smooth, but the bay can not be navi-
gated without a pilot.

Rose Bay is sheltered on the north by a reef, through which are two
amall openings, with a depth of from 15 to 22 feet; the western opening
leads to the small bay of Kam^e; the Grande Coulee Passe lies north
of it. On this part of the shore a long, low, narrow, level plain lies at
the foot of the great mountain range.

Lamentin Bay. — N6gre Point, the extremity of a narrow ridge of
land, separates Mahaut Bay from that to the west, named Cercelle; and
west of the latter is the bay of Lamentin, with the town of the same
name. These bays are obstruc^ted by sand banks, and only navigable
for very small vessels.

A small river of the same name runs into the sea at the head of the
bay, and Grande River, the principal stream of Guadeloupe, which rises
in the central mountains, empties itself near the north i)oint of the bay.

Mahaut Bay is about 6 miles eastward of Rose Bay, on the north
side of the narrow tongue of land which separates Grande Terre from

'. '.'if •■ .

■^

440 GUADELOUPE ISLAND.

Capeaterre. There is exc^ellent anchorage iu the outer part in 7 or S

fathoms water, and farther in off the town in from 3J to 4^ fathoms.

The best pass to enter is the Caret.

To the eastward of Maliaut Bay, and SE. of the little islet of Chris-

tophe, is the north entrance to 8alee River, which separates Capes-
terre from Grande Terre.

Petit Canal Bay, on the west side of Grande Terre, extends from
Macoa Point, off which is Macou Island, which lies 4 miles northward
of the entrance to the River Sal^e, to Grisgris Point, 3 miles to the
northward of it; it is, however, only an anchorage for droghers, who
find their way by the eye, through the reefs fronting it to the westward.

Port Louis is an o[)en roadstead. The anchorage is tolerably well
sheltered from June to October, although a XNW. swell is felt; at
other times, however, it is quite exposed.

It is easily recognized by the high chimney of the usine, or sugar
factory, one mile east of the town.

The population is about 4,100. Provisions are scarce and dear and
rain water only can be obtained. Vessels come here to load sugar, but
must enter and clear at the customhouse at Pointe ^ Pitre.

Anchorage. — ^The best anchorage will be found directly abreast of
the town in 8 fathoms of water, about J mile oft' shore.

This part of the coast is foul to the distance of nearly J mile, and the
bank of soundings only extends about § mile oft' shore. Five feet of
water will be found at the end of the wharf.

Light. — A fixed white light is shown from a mast on the beach at an
elevation of 30 feet and is visible from 4 to 5 miles.

Q-rande 'T'lgie, or North Point, is quite remarkable, being formed by
a sharp rocky point, something like a ship's cutwater, and surmounted
by a flat table-land. From Grand Yigie as far as St. Marguerite Bay
the east coast of Guadeloupe is bold and clear, w'ith rocky cliffs about
2iK) feet high.

St. Marguerite Bay is an open roadstead, without any protection
from the trade wind, and conseciuently not safe. From this bay the
shore again becomes foul to tlie distance of from one to 400 yards as far
as Chateaux Point.

Port du Monle, nearly midway between Xoith and Chateaux
Points, is exposed to the trade winds and is only protected by a reef
which is partially under water. The harbor is bad and the entrance
to the same is less than 200 yards wide, with a rough and rock bot-
tom. Vessels often strike on the bar and wrecks are of frequc '^
occurrence. . There is often a heavy swell on the bar which mi
detain vessels from entering or leaving. Vessels lying in port a
obliged to moor head and stern, one anchor to the reef and the otl
cable to the shore. Even in the smoothest time there is quite a sw
and, when there is any wind, vessels roll badly. The city is about :
miles from Pointe a Pitre witli which it is connected by a maci^

PORT DU MOULE — DESIRADE ISLAND. * 441

■

amized government road. A mail post and a diligence ply between the
places and there is telegraphic commnnication.

It is the second town in size of Grande Terre and has a population
of about 10,000.

Signals are made to approaching vessels firom the office of the cap-
tain of the port and are as follows :

A square red flag at the masthead indicates that it is impossible to
enter the harbor and to keep well in the offing; the same flag at hair
mast, that the entrance is not practicable, but may become so at a
moment's notice and to keep as near the harbor as possible with safety.

The pilot flag, blue with white center, denotes that the pilot haa
left the shore; the flag remains hoisted until the harbormaster makes
signal for entering by hauling down the pilot flag and hoisting a
white and blue diamond flag.

When the pilot is on board and the red flag is hoisted at mast-
head, it recalls him on shore and the vessel should keep well in the
offing until next warning.

Vessels should not go to the westward of the port, as there is always,
a current in towards the shore and it is usually calm from five to six
in the evening.

Light. — ^A fixed wlute liglit is shown from a mast *47 feet high and
should be visible 7 miles, between WSW. and SE. through south. It
serves as a guide to the entrance, and vessels at night should bring it
to bear S. 22^ W. (S. 23^ W. mag.) and keep on that bearing under
short sail so as to be ready to receive a pilot at daylight.

Pilots. — ^The harbor can only be entered with the aid of a pilots
who is ready to board vessels when the bar is passable.

La Conronne Rock, 1^ miles eastward of Port du Moule, is an
excellent landmark.

Gourde Islet — From Port du Moule to Chateaux Point there ia
no safe anchorage. About 4.J miles NW. of the latter is Gourde
Islet, which is rather remarkable and lies just outside the reef, which
is steep-to.

Rollers, which are frequent from October to May among the Virgin
Islands and the groups NW. of Guadeloupe, sometimes extend to this
Island, and as they set in from the SW., vessels should be prepared
during these months.

DESIBADE.

Desirade Island lies about 5 miles eastward of Guadeloupe, of which
is a dependency, is 6 miles long, from one mile to 1-^ wide, and about
)0 feet high. The population is about 1,000. The climate is very dry,
'tie rain falling. Cotton is cultivated.

The eastern point of the island should be given a good berth on ac-
)unt of the Mouton Eock, lying 000 yards off it and generally break-

442 • dp:sirade island — petite teree.

The channel between Desirade and Chateaux Point is frequently used
»l)y vessels bound to the northward. The Desirade Shore should be kept
•aboard.

Corrents. — After strong easterly winds there is a westerly current
of 2 knots and upwards off Colibris Point.

Water is only to be obtained from a deep ravine on the NB. side of
the island.

Grande Anse is the principal town of Desirade. Small vessels can
pass through a cut in the reef and find sheltered anchorage inside, and
in fine weather larger vessels may anchor outside in o fathoms of water
with the church bearing north (N. 1^ E. mag.) ; but the soundings sure
irregular.

Mahault Bay, near the eastern end of the island, is a similar small
reef harbor for coasters. The government has established here a leper
hospital.

Oalet "Anchorage. — There is good anchorage under the SW. end ci
the island, in 5 fathoms water, with the two rocks off Point Colibris in
line, and a remarkable tree in one with a house on the beach near the
middle of the bay, but this anchorage is mostly visited by a double
swell, rendering communication diflBcult; a better anchorage is off
Orande Anse, as above, but only in fine weather, and on no acconnt
under 5 fatlioms, as under this deptli coral heads prevail.

Sonndings. — From about the meridian of the center of Desirade, the
soundings of more than 90 fathoms on the edo:e of the bank decrease rap-
idly westward, and about midway between Desirade and Petite Terre
there are only 10 and 12 fathoms water. The water is here much dis-
■colored, showing in light and dark patches for a considerable distance, and
the bottom distinctly seen. The depth between Desirade and Petite
Terre varies from 9 to 15 fathoms; about midway between Chateaux
Point and the S W. end of Desirade the depth is upwards of 188 fathoms.

PETITE TEBBE.

Petite Terre is the name given to the low, sandy islets separated
by a narrow cut and lying SE. from Chateaux Point. The northeast-
ern islet is called Terre d'en Ilaut; the southwestern one Terre d'en
Bas. They are mostly covered with vegetation and have a narrow
sand beach along the water's edge. The inhabitants are mostly fisher-
men. All its shores are foul and rocky, to the distance of from J to J
mile; there is a rock named Baleine du Sud (South Whale) S. 19^ ^^
(S. 20^ W. mag.) about i mile from the lighthouse; also a shoal p»
of IJ fathoms nearly a mile south from the west end of the isla
shoal watet also extends nearly a mile westward of the west end.

When coming from the eastward, a depth of from 13 to 20 latht
will be found at 2 miles north and south of the island, and it she
not be approached within this distance.

MARIE •GALANTE ISLAND ST. LOUIS BAY. 443

Light. — A lighthouse stands 202 yards from the east eud of Petite
Terre Island and exhibits 108 feet above the sea a fixed white light,
visible 15 miles*

Bank. — Sans Nom (Vaisseanx Banks), about 9 miles westward of
Petite Terre and southward of Port St. Fran5oi8, Guadeloupe, is a
bank with as little as 6 fathoms of water on it, and there is also said
to be a 7-fathom bank about 7 miles to the NW. of Marie Galante, but
this is very doubtful.

MARIE GALANTE.

Marie Ocdante Island, under the government of Guadeloupe, lies
13 miles eastward of the Saintes, in the channel between Dominica and
<3ruadeloupe, 16 miles NNB. of the former and 15 mile» southward of
the east end of the latter. The area of the island is about 60 squaife
miles, and its i)opiilation about 15,000. Its shape is nearly oval, being
10 miles long north and south and about 8 miles east and west. It is of
moderate elevation ahd rises gradually from the south towards its NE.
end, its general appearance being flat and low. The southern and
eastern shores are dangerous, being skirted by a reef to the distance
of from 2 to 3 miles. The west side is comparatively clear and affords
anchorage off almost all parts; the soundings generally are regular and
gradually diminish towards the shore, but there are patches and atten-
tion to the lead is required.

Qjrand Bourg, at the SW. extremity of the island, is the principal
town and has a population of about 6,500. The harbor is formed by
low cays, only uncovered at low water, and is very small, with a depth
of from 10 to 15 feet. The channel between the cays leading to it has
16 feet of water and is GOO feet wide. Large vessels anchor outside the
reef in about 8 fathoms of water, with the church tower in line with
the end of the breakers, bearing X. 44^ E. (X. 45oE. mag.). The bank
of soundings is quite narrow, and f mile outside of the reef there di*e
2S fathoms of water.

Light. — A fixed white light is show^ from a mast, 46 feet above the
sea, which may be seen in clear weather above 7 miles.

The light mast in line with the churcli leads between the Mayeux
Shoal and the X W. point of the great reef. This mark also points out the
best anchorage in the outer roads in not less than 8 J fathoms, as closer
in a vessel rolls very much, but the anchorage of St. Louis should be
preferred, where fresh provisions can be procured.

St. Louis Bay is the best anchorage for large vessels. The holding
j ound is good and there is anchorage J mile off the village, in 4 fath-
i us of water. The bay is full of excellent fish, and by hauling a seine
I rge quantities may be easily taken.

Vieiix Fort is a small village of little importance. Abreast of it is
s ;mall islet of the same name, with a 15-foot channel between the islet
i d the mainland.

444

MARIE GAL ANTE ISLAND LES SAINTBS.

Directions. — Coming from the northward give Vieux Fort Islet aod
Oimeti^re Point a berth of a mile, and after passing the latter a vessel
may haul in for the anchorage at St. Louis. Prom FoUe Point to the
southward the coast should not be Approached within a mile, and, m
before observed, the south end of the island is very dangerous, and
should not be rounded within the distance of 3 miles.

Anchorage in 5 fathoms of water will be found ^ mile off shore, with
Vieux Fort Islet bearing X. 44° E. (N. 45^ E. mag.) at the same dis-
tance.

A Shoal, with from 3 to 5 fathoms of water, extends i mile north-
ward of this islet, with a 5-fathom patch lying J mile from the islet N»
120 w. (N. no W. mag).

Capesterre on the southeastern side of the island has a small reef-
harbor, where coasters load the sugar brought from the plantations of
the east and NE. parts of the island.

LES SAINTES.

Les Saintes, so called from their having been discovered on AH
Saints' Day, form a group of islands attached to the Government of
Guadeloupe, and lie in the channel between Guadeloupe and Dominica^
from both of which they are separated by clear fcd deep channels.

Terre d'en Haut, or St. Peter, the largest and easternmost of the
group, is separated from Terre d'en Bas, or St. Paul, the westernmost,
by a channel ^ mile wide, navigable for Vessels of any size. There is
but little vegetation on the island. The inhabitants are skillful fisher-
men and boatmen.

The climate of these islands is exceedingly healthy; fevers are said
never to occur.

Water is scarce, people generally depending on rain water and the
fall of rain being less than in the neighboring isliind. Fresh provisions
can generally be obtained.

Terre d'en Haut (St. Peter) is of a very irregular shape. Mount
Chameau, at the SW. end, has a tower on it, the summit of which is
1,036 feet above the sea. On one of tlie northern hills is Fort Xapoleon,
used as a military prison, and the XW. end of the island ends in a st-eep
promonotory called the Sugarloaf.

The town and principal anchorage are on the west side of the isl^id,
in a bay abreast of Cabrit Islet.

The shore of Terre d'en Haut is generally clear of danger; tber« ia.
however, 100 yards N. 33o E. (X. 34o E. mag.) from Point Portail (at
foot of the hill surmounted by Fort Xapolex)n), a rock (le Caille) witf
feet of water on it, which breaks when the sea is at all rough. All re
Terre d'en Haut are small bays and coves, in most of which landf ~
practicable.

There is temporary anchorage in 10 fathoms of water between Bun
Point and Kedonde Islet, off the southern point of the island; bu^

•V,

■-■■*-

ST. GEORGB ISLET — SUGARLOAF PASSAGE. 445

l>est anchorage is off the town, a good harbor, with a depth of from 9
tx> 14 fathoms, and well sheltered to the westward by Cabrit Island.

For vessels not wishing to enter this harbor, good anchorage may be
found between the Sugarloaf and the 8W. side of Cabrit Islet, in 11
fathoms of water, with a bottom of sand and coral.

Cabrit or St. Qeorge Islet serves as' a quarantine statiou. There

is also a penitentiary on it. Vessels in quarantine anchor here, abreast

of the cove, with the south point of the islet bearing about S. 68^ E.

<S. 67^ E. mag.) in 11 fathoms of water, with a bottom of sand and

shells.

The Northern Channel (Baleine Pass or Whale Passage), between
Terre d'en Haut and Cabrit, is about 400 yards wide, with a depth of
from 10 to 18 fathoms. Nearly in the center of the entrance is Whale ,

Shoal, a rocky patch, on which there are only 2 feet water. It is steep-to '^1

and lies 700 yards S. 78^ W. (S. 79^ W. mag.) of Portail Point, the JTW. ;|

-end of the island. ' Whale Rock, or la Baleine, has 8 or 10 feet above yi

water and lies somewhat more than 200 yards from the XW. shore of
Terre d'en Haut.

Should the shoal not break, the water is so clear that it may readily
be seen from aloft. The channel westward of the Whale Shoal is called
the Whale Passage, and that eastward, or between Whale Shoal and
the rock of the same name, the Passage des Yaisseaux.

Sngarloaf Passage lies bet^Teen the southern point of Cabrit Island
and Red Head, both of which points are steep-to and clear of danger;
but the Gh^)nnel is obstructed by a coral shoal 100 yards in diameter, ^ -^jl

on which there are only 7 feet of water. A white buoy is moored on i;

the SE. extremity of this shoal. The water does not generally break ^

on this shoal, but the discolored water indicates its position. Sugarloaf I

Passage is convenient for leaving Bourg Anchorage. "^j

Directions. — Vessels bound into the harbor of Terre d'en Haut by
the northern channel may enter by either the west or east passage. .;

The former is the best, except with the wind to the southward of east,
when the latter may be taken with advantage.

By the west passage, which is nearly 400 yards wide, having passed
the north end of the island at tlie distance of about J mile, steer to the
westward until the white chapel (to the southward of the churcli), a ;!

very cousjiicuous object, is in line with a beacon with a black triangle
on it (the beacon is on top of a hill; the old church is dififtcult to make
c it), which leads westward of the Whale Shoal. A vessel may then
1 bul up for the passage and anchor as convenient off the town, about
^ K) yards from the shore, with the Whale Kock just open of the land.

By the eastern passage steer as above directed until Boisjoli Bluff is
I in between the Sugarloaf and Sandy Point, S. 41^ W. (S. 42^ W.
1 ig.) This mark clears le Caille Eock and leads through the passage
1 Htween the Whale Eock and shoal. When the church in the town
< lens out, haul up lor the anchorage.

it)

446 TERRE d'eN basse ISLAND ^AVES ISLET.

The anchorage here is good, safe, spacious, and yery healthy. Ves-
sels resort here when driven from Guadeloupe or Port de France by
sickness. The climate is said to be particularly £Ekvorable for the cure
of dysentery. There is a small hospital, to which convalescents from
Guadeloupe are often sent, besides sick from the ships and garrison.
Excellent grapes are grown,' but other fruits or supplies are very
limited; the little creeks pertaining to the group are rich in fish; game
may iye had on Gros Islet.

Leaving the anchorage it will be better to take the Sugarloaf Pas-
sage, passing either to the northward or southward of the 6-foot patch«
In the former case, stand to the NW. until the south side of Pat6 Islet
is in one with Ptit^ Point, which mark will lead 100 yards north of the
shoal.

In the latter case, run out with the church on an X. 89° E. (east mag.)
bearing; when the NW. hill of Cabrit is open of Sandy Point you wiU
be westward of the patch.

Tides. — It is high water, full and change, at this group at 6h. 45m. f
the rise averages from 18 to 22 inches, but it is much influenced by the
winds.

Terre d'en Bas (St. Paul).— Its shores are but' slightly indented^
and free of danger to within 200 yards. At its north end, about J mile
from the shore, is the small, low, rocky islet called Pat6, bold and
steep-to on its east side, but it is foul on its west side to nearly mid-
way between it and Pat6 Point, at wjiich distance is a shoal of 15 feet,
thus contracting the passage between them to the breadth of ^00 yards.
By bordering on the shore of Terre d'en Bas, a vessel may run if neces-
sary through this channel, and have not less than 6 fathoms water.

There is anchorage, but only for fine weather, on the west side of
Terre d'en Bas, just to the northward of Gros Cape, the SW. extreme;
and on the east side of the island there are two small coves conveiuent
for droghers.

Q-rand Islet (St. John), about 800 yards southward of Bedonde Islet^
is 551 feet above the sea. Off its west end are the rocky islets Goche and
Augustins, the channels between bemg narrow and only fit for boats.

These three islets are bold, but foul ground extends off them in many
places for about 400 yards. Southwest Channel between Terre d'en Bas
and Augustins Islets carries deep water, but off the west end of the
latter a reef projects for nearly 400 yards. The SB. extreme of Cabrit
Islet, in line with Boisjoli Point X. 41° E. (N. 42o E. mag.), le?»^«
through in mid-channel.

Great Cay Channel between Grand Islet and Bedonde is free
danger, but the 10-foot patch west of the latter should be given a bei

AVES ISLET.

Aves Islet, in latitude 13^ 42' X., lon^-itude 63o 37' 46" W., is
called from the multitudes of sea birds of various kinds which fre<j'^

AVEB ISLET ANCHORAGE — DOMINICA. 447

it. The island is about 10 feet above the level of the sea. It is or
coral formation, and is skirted by a reef on the N W., north, and south
sides. On the west side there is anchorage and a landing place. The
islet appears to rise from a bank of soundings of considerable extent^
which has not been minutely examined, but which seems to be irregular
in depth. Fishermen from St. Eustatius and other neighboring islands-
visit the island in March and April to gather sea bird's eggs, which
are taken to St. Thomas and sold in large quantities. !N'o fi*esh water-
is to be found.

The tide rises about 3 feet; the flood runs to the 2TW.

Landing is sometimes impracthsable on account of rollers.

The islet may be seen at a distancs of 8 miles during the day, but at
night not farther than 2 miles.

Anchorage will be found with the middle of the islet about ^N'B.,.
with a bottom of sand and rock. Care should be taken to anchor on a.
sandy spot, which maybe easily picked out by the eye. The fishermen,
who resort to Aves Islet state that the anchorage inshore, or within ^
mile of the landing place, is not good, and that when a ground swell sets
in the water breaks heavily. On account of this ground swell, vessels-
are occasionally prevented from leaving the island for spveral days, and
a detention of three weeks has occurred.

The sea birds usually visit the islet about the beginning of March,,
and the egg season ends at the same time as the fishing season.

There are no trees on the islet, and the vegetation is very scanty;
the grass, however, is about 6 inches high. There is no appearance of
guano now.

During the fishing season a schooner tnakes three voyages between.

Aves, St. Thomas, Saba, and St. Eustatius Islands.

DOMINICA.

Dominica has been in possession of Great Britain since 1783. It is
of volcanic origin, with lofty rugged mountains running through the
center of the island from north to south. The Soufri^re, near the south-
ern end of the island, has several openings, around which sulphur in
large quantities can be obtained. In tlie Roseau Valley there are sev-
eral boiling sulphur springs, the principal one being 4 miles from the
sea, and on the Wotten Waven Estate.

About 6 miles NB. of Roseau, and more than half way across the
i and, on top of a high mountain and surrounded by others more lofty,
ii a lake of fresh water covering several acres. The valleys are fertile
a ,d watered by numerous streams, which abound with excellent fish,
a tid there is an abundance of game in the island. The division of the
y ear is into the wet and dry seasons, although rain falls at all times or
t e year. The only difterence is, that a much greater quantity falls in
t e rainy or hurricane season, beginning in July and ending in Octo-
b T, than at any other period. The average temperature in Roseau, in.

448 DOMINICA ISLAND.

A period of five years, was 79.40, average maximuiu 83.93, and the min-
imum 74.88.

The population is 26,841 (1891).

There are several good roadsteads on the western side of the islanc}
the principal of which is Roseau, the capital of the island. Woodbridge
Bay, on the north side of the town, has also good anchorage.

Climate. — The southern part of the island is healthy, mild fevers
alone prevailing, as in other healthy parts of the West Indies. The
town of Portsmouth and the northwestern part are considered unhealthy.

Government. — Dominica belongs to the general establishment of
the Leeward Islands.

The local government is vested in a commissioner, aided by an exec-
utive council of 7 members and a legislative assembly of 14 members.

Caution. — ^Vessels sailing under the lee of Dominica should be on
their guard against the heavy squalls which come off the high land and
through the deep valleys, blowing with great force during the strong
trades. Off Soufri^re Bay and the Layou Valley are the two most dan-
gerous places. When the trades are light calms are frequent.

Cachacrou, or Scott Head, the SW. point of Dominica, a small
promontory 234 feet high, and connected to the island by a narrow
neck, is a conspicuous object, and when seen from the north or south
clear of the land appears as an island. S. 89^ W. (west mag.), i mile
from the north part of the head, is a rock with 7 feet on it at low water.
Scott Head should not be approached to within a distance of i mile.

Soufridre Bay is north of Scott Head, and 1^ miles wide; this can
not be recommended as an anchorage, as it is verj'^ steep-to.

Point Michelle. — On the point is a well-built Boman Catholic church,
with a large conspicuous cross south of it. Oft' this point, with the
church 80utli*of jS", 89^ E. (east mag.) and 300 yards off shore, a vessel
may anchor in from 5 to 8 fathoms. Care must be taken to let go the
anchor smartly, as the water deepens so suddenly that drifting a few
hundred feet will change the depth from 10 to 20 or 30 fathoms.

Tides. — To leeward of the island no dependence can be placed on the
turn of the tide. For several days the set may be north or south, with
the direction of the coast, the strength in some places being two knots
an hour; and within a divstauce of 10 miles, the set may be quite in
opposite directions. On the windward side the Hood and ebb are reg-
ular; off Point k Peine the flood runs with a velocity of Ij^o niDes per
hour. Off the NE. part of the island the flood attains a velocity c
miles per hour; but the ebb, only ^ mQe an hour, is hardly i)erceptil

Roseau. — The town stands on one of the few sloping points found
the coa^st of Dominica, and immediately south of the Roseau River. 1
table-land of Mount Bruce, dotted over with old military buildini
overlooks the town. Fort Young and the conspicuous square-bu
courthouse are slightly higher than the other buildmgs in the sot
part of Roseau. The spire of the Roman Catholic cathedral is the m

A* .Tft

ROSEAU — WOODBklDGE BAY. 449

conspicuous object, and is distinctly seen when approacliiiig from the
north or south.

The United States is fepreseuted by a consular agent. • 'i^

Supplies. — ^The market at Roseau is generally well supplied. Beef ' ^:
can be obtained at 12 cents per pound, pork at the same price, and mut-
ton at 16 cents per pound. The island vegetables, of great variety, are
excellent and cheap, and fruit is plentiful. Vessels lying here water
from the river.

Telegraph. — The telegraph cables, connecting the island with all the
principal West India Islands and tlie United ^tates, are landed in
Woodbridge Bay, a short distance north of Roseau River.

Lights. — Two vertical white lights are shown from a Hagstaff in Fort
UToung. A landing pier extends about 66 yards in a SW. direction
from the mole. On the head of this pier a lantern light is shown,
showing red to seaward and white to the land. There is a mooring
buoy for mail steamers, from which is shown a r^d light when the
steamers are due.

Dues. — There are no light dues. Tonnage dues are 26 cents per ton
on all (*argo landed or taken aboard. Vessels taking fruit on board
are exempt.

Anchorage. — Anchorage oif Roseau can be had opposite Fort Young,
in from 12 to 15 fathoms water. The precaution of letting go the anchor
smartly must be strictly observed, as the distance between the deptlis
of 9 and 30 fathoms is only about 150 yards. The anchorage off the town
can not be recommended, as it is very steep and there is scarcely room
for a small vessel to swing toward the beach.

Tides. — It is high water, full and change, approximately, at Roseau
at Ih. 30m. Springs rise one f<x)t 6 inches.

Woodbridge Bay is IJ miles wide, and lies between Roseau on the
south and the high land of Mount Daniel on the north. A conspicuous
row of palms, rdnning in an easterly direction and leading up from the
Goodwill Estate, which is in the southern part of the bay, is an excel-
lent guide. The table-lands at the back of the bay, intersected by
ravines, are much lower than Mounts Bruce and Daniel, Off the north
point of the bay rocks extend for 200 yards, and, on a coast so steep
and free from dangers, show out conspicuously.

Anchorage can be obtained in from 10 to 12 fathoms, 300 yards from
the beach, with the Goodwill Chimney just open to the southward of
the conspicuous row of palms bearing S. 74° E. (9. 73° E. mag.), and
3cott Head touching the shingly point of Roseau River.

"V^Tater may be obtained from a river in Woodbridge Bay, but the
beach being rough and stony, it is attended with much inconvenience.

Layou River. — The coast from Mount Daniel runs in a NNW,

iirection, with slightly indented bays. Layou River, the largest in

i}he island, is just 6 miles from the shingly point of Roseau River; when

sen from the westward the entrance may be easily distinguished by

18402 ^29

•»'^>i

450

DOMINICA ISLAND.

the lowness of the land. The source of the river lies aear the foot of
the Couronne Hill, which is comparatively low wheUi seen with Dia-
blotiu to the north, and Trois Pi tons U) the south.

Ghood Anchorage for drogliers can be obtained north or south of
the entrance to the river, 400 yards from the shore, the depths being S
and 10 fathoms. The northern anchorage is most fre4]uented by small
craft shipping wood or sujjar. In a SW. by S. dirttction from the
entrance of the river the water is v(»ry deep, and at anchoring distance
offshore there are 40 fathoms. Wood in large quantities is shipped
from this river. ^

Qrand Savanna is the largest sloping piece of land on the western
side of the ishnid. This land is generally extremely parched in appear-
ance, with littlc! or no cultivation.

Anchorage. — The western point of Orand Savanna brought to liear
N. 67^ E. (N. t>8^ B. mag.), distant about 600 yards, and in from 10 to
20 fathoms, rock and sand, is the best anchorage ground. Closer in-
shore there are several patches of mushroom rocks, which a vessel's
cable is likely to foul and be difficult to recover.

Wood and Water. — A small river immediately north of the Grand
Savanna is favorable for watering, aiyi wood can be obtained at $2.75
per cord.

Barbers Block is a conspicuous hill 5 miles to the northward of
Grand Savanna. When seen from the north or south it is, as it« name
denotes, like a barber's block, the facial part being the summit and
shoulders of the hill. From a westerly view it makes like a sliarp cone.

Prince Rupert Bluflf is a steep bluff surmounted by two remarkable
hills, known as the East and West Cabris. To vessels coming from
northward or southward they appear as islands, but they are joined to
the shore by a neck of low, swampy ground. This prominent peninsula
forms the north side of Prince" Rupert Bay.

PrinCe Rupert Bay is the best anchorage in Dominica. In the NE.
part of the bay and facing the beach is the small and dilapidated town
of Portsmouth. The Roman Catholic Church, with its tall spire, stands
a few hundred feet from the shore. The Methodist Chapel, a white
building, is ^ mile inland and on the foot of a long, low spur. Mome
an Diable stands to the NE. of the bay, the spurs from its summit
meeting those fi-om Mount Diablotin, at the back of the bay, in a neck
about 600 feet high.

Snpplies. — This bay is the best and most convenient place for obtain-
ing wood and water. Wood is brought alongside at about $3 per coj
The Indian River, which is south of the Roman Catholic Church, i
good place to water from. A market is held in the town on Saturd
and is generally well supplied.

If bound to this bay from the eastward, it will be better to pasf
windward of the island and round its north end to avoid the risk
being becalmed under the high lands.

DOUGLAS BAY ST. DAVID BAY. 451

Anchorage. — The most couvenient auchorage is in about 8 fathoms,
sandy bottom, vrith the Roman Catholic Cliurch bearing N. 50° B. (N.
510 E. mag.), and the extreme of Prince Rupert Bluff N. 57^ W. (N. 56^
W. mag.). Nrorth or south of this position the anchorage is good, but
not so convenient for obtaining wood and water.

Douglas Bay Is directly north of Prince Rupert Bluff. Small vessels
visit this place for firewood. Anchorage may be found in from 6 to 8
fathoms, saody bottom, 3(M) yards off shore. From the north point of
Douglas Bay to Cape Melvill, the NW. point of Dominica, the coast is
cliffy and steep- to.

Point Jaquet lies 2 mileseastwardof Cape Melville, the coast between
is a bold and lofty cliff, 1,000 feet high.

La Soye Point — The coast from Point Jaqiiet to the SE. continues
it« rugged character until in the neighborhood of La Soye Point, where
landing may be had. A small anchorage of 4 fathoms is formed by
La Soye Point and Reef stretching to the NW., but is very confined,
scarcely allowing a small schooner room to swing at her anchors; ves-
sels are steadied by hawsers made fast to the shore. A pier is built
inside the point and the landing is easy.

Crmnpton Point is the northeastern point of the island.

The Coast. — ^The character of D6miuica in the l^B. quarter presents
a distinct contrast when compared with any other portion. The land
rises from the sea less abruptly, the soundings off the coast showing a
continuation of this gradual slope, 100 fathoms being found 3^ miles
off shore. Mounts Concorde and Grand Bois, in the NE. are, respect-
ively, 2,106 and 3,034 feet in height, the latter being 3 miles from the
coast.

Captain*Scott Rock, the only danger off the windward side of tiie
island, is under water, and lies 500 yards from the first point north of
Pagoua Bay. There are 16 and 18 fathoms on the eastern side of the
rock, the sea breaking heavily over it in strong trades.

Pagoua Bay. — ^The northern shore of this bay, known as North End,
trends round to the north and west to Petit Marigot, one of the few
landing places on the windward side of the island.

^ St. David Bay lies midway between the north and south points of
Dominica. On its south aide is a small rocky islet, which, with an ad-
jacent promontory, affords shelter for droghers. With a northerly wind
a heavy sea sets in, making it difficult for vessels to put to sea. The
anchorage is only safe with -the wind south of KNE. In the valley is
the well-cultivated estate, Castle Bruce. All its produce is shipped in
droghers, which anchor under the rocky islet. A large pier is being
built near the center of the bay. A conspicuous range, 2,400 feet high,
rises over St. David Bay, and runs to the northward almost parallel to
the coast for nearly 5 miles, terminating near Pagoua Point.

Point k Peine is one of the most eastern points of the island. On
either side is a deei> indentation known as Grand Marigot on the north.

4")2 DOMINICA ISLAND MAKTINIQUE,

and Petit Soufri^re on the wmth. Over Point k Peine is a sharp hilL
which rises to the height of 1,044 feet. The point forming the south
part of Petit Soufriere Bay is liosalie; soath of this is an estate of the
same name, at the foot of a deep valley, which commences but a few
hundred feet from the top of one of the highest mountains.

Monnt Pais Bonche, 1,585 feet high, rising over the dark, steep, and
rugged cliffs, is the continuation of a sharp and defined ridge of hills
on tlie SE. i)art of the island, tlie highest point being 3 277 feet above
the sea. The coast here is very steep, tlie depth of 10<) fathoms being
found at little more than J mile from the shore.

Point Mnlatre is 2 miles northward of Monnt Paix Bouche, and is
the cx)mmen(!ement of a regular line of cliffs. La Plaine, on which
stands a Roman Catholic Church, is on the most level part of this laud,
and is distant 3 miles from I*oint Mulatre. The Grand Soufriere ftange,
3,554 feet high, rising over Point Mulatre and la Plaine, are connected
by ridges with the mai^ chain of mountains which runs through the
island.

Qrand Bay is the principal and safest anchorage on the windward
side of the island. The largest and best cultivated estate near the bay
is Geneva, with a water mill J mile from the beach. Grand Bay termi-
nates in a com]>aratively low i)oint, called Carib. Under this point and
close inshore small vessels may anchor in from 5 to 10 fathoms and
find shelter during the greatest strength of the trades, when the wind
is north and east. When the trade becomes slack and inclined to veer
round to the SE., the anchorage is not safe.

Mome Fou8, 2 miles ea«t of Scott Head, is a remarkable conical
cliff, rising to the height of 1,251 feet. When viewed with the higher
land as a background, the steep cliff which falls almost perpendicular
to the sea has a most striking appearance, and when seen clear of |he
land it appears as a cone. The eastern extreme of this cliff is known
as Pointe des Fous.

MARTINIQUE.

Martinique Island was settled in 1635 by the French, to whom it
now belongs. Its area is about 380 square miles, one-third of the snr.
face consisting of plains, the rest being mountainous.

This island is very lofty and irregular in height, and may be readily
distinguished by three remarkable mountains of different forms, rising
far above the general chain which runs through the whole of the island
from N W. to SE., and may be seen about 45 miles off. The most north-
em of 'these is Mount Peh'Ms 4,428 feet above the sea, rising nearh
miles to the SK. of Capo JSt. Martin, and its summit, when seen from
distance, appears rounded, and presents nothing remarkable. The !
tons du Carbet, which rise 3 J miles from the western shore, between 1
Bays of St. Pierre and Fort de France, are a group of conical pea
with very stecp^and abrupt declivities, the most elevated being 3,1
feet high; but their summits being generally in the clouds, are seld<

CLMATE — ^WINDS. 453

visible. At the SE. end of the isiaiid the Yauclin Mountain rises to the
height of 1,657 feet, and has the appearance of a flattened cone. It
rises at the east end of a chain of hills, which are divided toward the
south into two branches, one terminating at Saline Point, and the other
uniting itself with the steep ridges that command the bays of Fort de
France on the north, and Grande Anse du Diamant on the south.

The 'KE. and west shores of Martinique are clear, bold, and steep-to,
from the Sugarloaf Rock on the NW. side of Trinity Bay, round to
Fort de France, and from Bemiers Islet at the south side of entrance to
Fort de f^rance, S£. to Grande Anse du Diamant; but the south, SE.,
and east shores are iri^egular, deeply indented, and dangerous, particu-
larly the latter, which is skirted by low islets and reefs, extending about
2^ miles from the coast, and should be very carefully approached.

The soil is generally formed of pumice mixed with decayed vegetable
matter; in the southern part being more fertile than the northern, where
the land is barren and rocky.

The population of the island is about 105,000.

Within the last few years extensive central factories for the manu-
facture of sugar and rum have been established at various places dn
the shores of the island. The system pursued of purchasing sugar caiie
from the planters and manufacturing the products in large quantities
with every appliance of modern skill and science has been of very great
benefit. Government is administered by a governor and a privy coun-
cil, aided by a colonial council.

Climate. — The year is divided in Martinique into two periods of un-
equal length — the wet season from July to October, and the dry season
lasting the rest of the year. The dry season only merits its name in
comparison with the other, as a very considerable amount of rain falls
during it^ continuance, and although the showers do not last very long
they are copious and frequent.

The weather during the rainy season is much more variable and the
rains heavier than during the so-called dry season.

The amount of moisture in the air is very great. The average range
of the ]>aropieter is from 30*".0 to 30"M2, but on the approach of a hurri-
cane it has been known to descend as low as 29"'.53.

At a height of 6J feet above the level of the sea the maximum tem-
perature in the shade has been found to be 05^ F. and the niinimum OSo
F., while the mean yearly temperature is 78'^.8 K.

^SVinds. — During the dry season th(» winds are generally between

jast and NE., \vithout varying much either in direction or force; but

luring tne rainy season they are far less regular, varying from ENE. to

rest, passing by the south. This is not only the most unhealthy season

f the year, bnt also that of Imnneanes, which frequently occur between

uly and October, and are often a<'COiiipanied by more or less violent

locks of earthquake and heavy rollers. Hardly a year passes, in fact,

ithout earthquake shocks at Martinique.

454 MARTINIQUE ISLAND.

Signal Stations. — The following are the signal stations in the colony,
with which vessels can communicate by means of the International Code:

Port de France. — On the northern extremity of Fort St. Louis.
Latitude 14° 36' 07" X., longitude 61° 04' 30" W,

St Pierre.— On Bertin Place. Latitude 14o 44' 35" N., longitude
610 11' 04" W.

Le Precheur. — On Mount Folic. From this station t^essels are sig-
naled coming from Dominica Island and St. Lucia Channel. Latitude
140 47' 25" N., longitude 61^ 13' 23" W.

The longitudes depend upon that of St. Marthe Battery, determined
telegraphicaUy in 1876 as being 61o 11' 12" W.

The Pearl Rock of the NW. coast may be passed on either side.
Sailing ships, however, had better keep a little farther off shore, to
avoid the calms under the high land, and the same vigilance must be
exercised here that is required to leeward of all these islands, to guard
against the squalls which rush down through the valleys.

St. Pierre Bay lies between Point La Mare on the north and Point
Carbet on the south, the shore between them being low and sandy.

St. Pierre. — The roadstead is entirely o]>en to the westward; and
from fTuly to November, when the trade winds are interrupted and hur-
ricanes and rollers occur, it is by no means a safe anchorage.

On the shore is the town of St. Pierre, the chief commercial port of
the island, and having a population of 38,000.

The sanitary condition is very good. The prevalent diseases are ma-
laria and dysentery. Yellow fever becomes epidemic about once in eight
or nine years, but never endemic.

The authorities to visit are the mayor and captain of the port. Sa-
lutes can be returned from St. Martha Battery.

The United States is represented by a consul and vice-consul.

Anchorage. — ^The best anchorage for men-of war is a little to the
southward of St. Marthe Point, about 400 yards off shore, in 20 fathoms
of water. The bank of soundings extends a litt'e farther off shore
here than abreast of the town, is less steep, and is called the Plateau
du Carbet.

On the edge of the bank there is a buoy, outside of which there is no
good anchorage.

The anchorage for merchant vessels extends from St. Marthe Point
northward to the River Peres, the northern boundary of the city.
French vessels occupy tlie space south of Place Bertin, those un<?**
other flags being moored farther to the northward.

In approaching the anchorage of St. Pierre, although the vessel n.
seem to be very close inshore, the anchor should never be let go till 1
lead shows that the anchorage has been reaehed.

Caution. — Since the hurricane of August, 1891, vessels must ancj
northward of ftie range on St. Marthe Battery to avoid Ibuling 1
anchors and chains which now strew the bottom of the old anchora

The buoys are all sunk or out of place. February, 1892,

ST. PIERBE LE PRAcHEUR. 455

The Cnrrants in the offing from St. Pierre Eoad generally Bet to the
southward.

Supplies. — Water of excellent quality can be procureil. Casks can
be filled in the boats by iron pipes leading from the fountain near the
landing placte.

Provisions and ship's stores can be had here of good quality. No
coaling facilities.

Telegraph. — The West India and Panama Telegraph Company have
an office here, the submarine cable connecting the island with Dominica
and St. Lucia and all parts of the world.

Steamers-:— Regularly between New York and Martinique.

Hospitala — Tliere are two hospitals. The military has a capacity
for 200 patients; cost, $2.20 per day. The civil hospital is in charge of
Sisters of Charity; cost, 80 cents a day.

Pilots. — A pilot will quickly boaid a vessel if signal is made. Their
headciuarters, the office of tiie captain of the i)ort. They will use their
own boats to ruu hawsers to buoy. Pilotage is not necessary, but
compulsory. Pilots can be had here for the east coa»st of Martinque.

Pilotage.— Vessels between 60 and 1(K) tons, 8H.60; 100 to 150 tons,
$13; 150 to 200 t^ns, * 10.40; 2(M> to 2r)0 tons, 820; 2^0 to 300 tons,
*23.(M); 3(m to 350 tons, $27; over 350 tons, §30.00.

Dues. — Stamp on inward manifest, 5 cents. Permit to load and un-
load, *2.00. Passport, 8I.2i>. Sanitary dues, 3 cents per ton. Anchor-
age dues, $5. Water tax, 2 cents per ton. Light dues, $4. Buoy. 2
cents per ton. On pilotage, light dues^ and bnoy, 10 per cent additional
is <*harged. Stamps for outward manifest and clearance, 16 cents.

Boat Landing. — The regular boat landing is at the head of the pier
of the Bertin Place lighthouse. The pi^ is of wood and kept in ex-
cellent condition. No charge for man-of-war boats.

Lights. — ^A fixed white light is exhibited from a mast on the summit
of St. Marthe Point, visible in clear weather 5 miles. On the same
I>oint, westward of the former, is a fixed green light visible 2 miles.
The white and green lights in line lead to the anchorage. (The masts
from which these lights are shown are not readily made out in the day-
time until close-to, then by their triangular bases.) A red fixed light,
visible 0 miles, is exhibited at an elevation of 57 feet from a lighthouse
in the south extremitv of Phice Bertin.

Le Prdsheur (The Preacher) is a village 4 or 5 miles north of St.
Pierre, where small coasters moor. Some fresh provisions can be ob-
tained hei*e; there is a convalescent home in connection with the hos-
pital of St. Pierre.

Directions. — Vessels bound to St. Pierre Boad from the eastward
generally pass round the north end of Martinique, which is bold and
steep-to, and presents no danger. In ai>proaching the road from either
the north or south, the shore must be kept close aboard. The current
generally sets to the southward.

456 MABTINIQCE ISLAND.

The most prominent objects in approaching the roadstead &om the
northward and eastward are the towers (white) of the Moailla^e
Church, shown on the chart, and the statue of the Virgin Mary. The
latter, constructed of white marble, forms a very conspicuous land-
mark against the green background above and around it. It is situ-
ated on the edge of the blutif, above and a short distance to the left of
the range on the St. Marthe Battery. AVhen first sighted it looks
very much like a monument. The battery is overgrown with verdure
and hard to make out until close in to the anchorage. Running in
with the statue east picks up a good anchorage.

Carbet Village. — ^One and a half miles southward from St. Pierre
is tlie village of Carbet, built on the beach in a very picturesque jwsi-
tion. It is recognized by a church with a very slender spire.

The coast from St. Pierre to Point Negro is formed by cliflfs, inter-
sected by bays frequented by coasters.

Anse de la Case Pilote is a small anchorage about 4 miles to the
NW. of Negro Point. It is seldom visited by large vessels.

Anse de la Case Navire is a small bay 1^ miles to the NW. of Negro
Point, in which there is good holding ground, in 8 or 9 fathoms ot
water, about 200 yards from the shore. Care must be taken to shoot
gently into the bay under easy sail, for the bank is so st.eep that there
is a depth of 36 fathoms about 200 yards farther out, over rocky bottom.
The best berth will be found from abreast of the battery to abreast of
the westernmost houses. There is a rivulet of excellent water at the
village.

Fort de France Bay lies between Negro Point and Gape Solomon,
the bold headland whicli forms the north side of Grande Anse d'Arlet,
6J milQs south of it. its widt^, however, may be more properly confined
to the space between the point and Ramiers Islet, 3^ miles distant, and
from this line it extends eastward about 5 miles. The bottom is iiTegular,
and varies considerably in depth, but its shores are so indented as to
aftbrd several se(nire anchorages against all winds. The passages to
them, however, are intricate, and the assistance of a pilot is necessary.

Pilots vau be obtained at Fort de France as also at St. Pierre for
the east coast of Martini(iue. Pilotage is obligatory. The rates of
pilotage and dues the same as St. Pierre.

Fort de France, tlie capital of the island, lies on the north side of
the bay. It is built on a low plain bounded on the west by the River
Madame and is the headquarters for the French naval forces in the
West Indies. The governor of the island resides here.

Mail ste imers ply regularly.

At several places on the shores of Fort de France Bay central suga
factories, or mbwH^ have been established.

With the assistance of a pilot the approjich to these factories is n
difScult for vessels intending to load there.

The United States is represented by an agent.

FORT DE FRANCE. 457

Supplies. — All sorts of supplies, provisious, aud naval stores may
be obtaiDed with ease at Fort de France.

Coal in small quantities may be obtained Irom the Gompaguie
G^n^rale Transatlantique or fiom the French Government supply.
There is no coal on regular sale.

'Water is sup])lied from the government water boats.

The Anchorage for men-of-war lies oft tlie town aud is protected by
Fort St. Louis, built on a narrow peninsula, rising abruptly from the
sea and separating the anchorage called Flamands Roads from the
Garenage.

A bank of gravel and rock extends about ^ mile to the south and
S W. of the peninsula, its edges being marked by two squnre black
buoys, with beacons elevated about 14 feet, carrying a sphere and a
revolving plate with the word "Stop" written on the buoys, about 600
yards from the south point of the fort, in 4^ and 5 fathoms water.

There is a wreck S. 22o W. (S. 23^ W. mag.) of Fort St. Lonis on the
shoal, near which a boat buoy is moored. The wreck is above water.

Good anchorage will be found with the flagstaff on the fort bearing
N. 53^ E. (N. 54^ K. mag.) and Negro Point fiom N. 46^ W. (N. 45^
W. mag.) to N. 80° W. (X. 79^ W. mag.). Small vessels may proceed
farther in towards the town, according to their draft. This anchorage
is secure from November to July; but during the hurricane season
vessels of war are secured in the bay of Trois Islets.

Boat Landing. — The regular lauding is at the pier Just west of Fort
St. James. No cliarge for man-of-war boats.

Buoyage. — The system of buoyage adopted at Fort de France is that
all black buoys are to be left on the port hand and red buoys, with
horizontal whit^ band, on the starboard hand on entering; parti-col-
colored buoys are elbow buoys.

Caution. — Vessels coming to the anchorage from the southward in
thick weather should be careful not to mistake the electric light for
the one on Fort St. Louis.

Directions. — The approach to the anchorage in Flamands Koads
presents no diftieulties wliatever. Should it be necessary t<i go farther
in, a pilot should be taken. To anchor at night bring the light on Fort
St. Louis to bear N. 72^ E. (N. 73^ E. mag.) and steer for it. Anchor
on that line when Negro Point light bears N. 08^ W. (N. 67*^ W. mag.).
The «!hannel leading to the cove east of Fort St. Louis, called the
rSar^uage, is buoyed, and the largest ships can haul alongside of the
^ aarves there for rei)airs and coal.

Dock. — An excellent dry dock has been completed, belonging to t\ub
'. 'ench Government. It is 393.6 feet long, 360.8 feet on blocks and
: .1.5 feet beam, and drawing 27.8 feet. The dock charges are (55 cents
] T ton for the tirst day and 9^ cents per ton for each succeeding day.

The Tide is very weak in Fortde France Bay; it is high water at
i 11 and change at 4h., and the rise is about one foot.

458 MARTINIQUE ISLAND.

Lights. — Oil Negro Point, in the fort, is shown o4 feet above the aea
a fixed white light, and should be visible 7 to 8 miles. A fixed red
light with two fixed white sectors is shown from the S W. part of Fort
St. Louis. It shows red seawai-d between N. 62^ W. (N. iil^ W. laag.)
and S. 62^ E. (S. 01^ E. mag.) shows white shoreward on each side of
red sector over an arc of 45^. Thft light is shown at an elevation of 27
feet, and is visible 9 miles. A fixed white light is shown in the Car-
enage. The buoy at the SW. extremity of St. Louis Bank shows a
white light, and the buoy at the SE. extremity a red light, and the buoy
on the SW. point of Carriere Point a white light, on the ai-rival and
departure of mails or when required. The docks of the Oompagnie
Transatlantique packet are lighted by electric lights when the steaniers
are in. Two lights are shown at the boat landings; one at Flaniand^
Roads west of Fort St. Louis shows red to seaward, white inshore, the
other is at Car^nage on south landing.

Coh6 da Lamentin is to the eastward of the Garenage and nearly
2 miles farther up the bay is an inlet forming a secure anchorage; south
of it, on the south side of the bay, is another secure anchoi*age. This
part of the bay is nearly cut off from the western portion by coral
banks extending from both northern and southern shores of the bay.
and the assistance of a pilot is necessary.

Passe des Trois Islets. — The three shoals on the south side of
Paftse des Trois Islets are each marked by a buoy. A buoy is moored
in 20 feet water at 800 yards XW. of Pointe la Rose. The north side of
Passe des Trois Islets is marked by three buoys ; the westernmost lies
in 23 feet water, the middle and easternmost buoys in 28 feet; the en-
trance to Cohe du Lamentin lies between these two buoys.

Banc de la Vierge is a rocky knoll, about 400 yards ia extent, witli
a depth of 8f fathoms, and should be avoided in coming to an anchor-
^ When on the knoll, the flagstaff of Fort St. Louis bears N. 60^ E.
(N. 70O E. mag.) and Xegro Point K 20o W. (N. 28° W. mag.).

Banc du Mitan is a small rocky patch lying on the south side of
the general anchorage in Fort de France Bay. It has only 4 fathoms
water on it, and lies with the flagstaff of Fort St. Louis bearing N.
330 E. (X. 340 E. mag.) and Negro Point N. 40o W. (N. 45o W. mag.).
It is marked by a c(mical red and black buoy in horizontal stripes.

Banc da Gros Islet is a shoal lying still farther to the southward,
and nearly midway between Negro Point and Ramiers Islet; the least
water on it is 20 feet. Between this bank and the shore to the south-
ward, the bottom is uneven and rocky, the de])th varying from 4^ t4
fathoms; it shows itself by the light color of the water, and is nan
the White Bank. It is marked by a beacon buoy, painted black i
red in bands, moored in the middle of the bank; the beacon is n^
14 feet high and carries a sphere and revolving plate.

G-rande and Petite Anse d'Arlet and Petite Anse da Diam.
Bays. — The two former are separated by a bold promontory cf^'

LE DIAMANT SALINE POINT. 45D

Bourgos Point. All three of these coves have saudy beaches aud afford
good temx)orary anchorage ^ mile olf shore in from 7 to 10 fathoms of
water. There are no hidden dangers aud the shore is perfectly bold
as fsEki^ as the east side of the Mome du Diamant.

Anchorages on South Side of Martinique. — Eastward of the
Morue da Diamant are the following anchorages for small vessels:
Grande Anse du Diamant, Anse du Marigot, Ausi^ du Geron, and
Anse des Trois Rivieres. At the latter place a central sugar factory •
has been established. Pilote River has also an anchorage off its mouth.
In entering, pass eastward of St. Luce Cay, which is surrounded by
reefs. In appro^K'hing the anchorage of (iraiwle Anse du Diamant the
Olbian Reef must be avoided, lying ^ mile from the shore on the east
side of the bay and having 0 feet of water on it.

Le Diamant or Diamond Rock lies SK. about a mile from the
Morne du Diamant, which forms the SW. point of Martinique, with a
clear channel between, named the Fours. The rock is very remarkable^
nearly S([uare in form, each side about 800 yards long, aud rises almost
perpendicfularly to the height of TiT-i feet above the sea. It is inaccess-
ible except at a small spot on the west side, where landing may be
effected under favorable circumstan<;es. The south and west sides of
the rock are steep-to, but to the northward a small bank of 5J and 6
fathoms extends to the distance of J ;nile, and 200 yards to the east-
ward there is little as 4 fathoms water. At f mile 8. 68^ E. (8. (>7o E.
mag.) from the rock, there is also a small detached coral bank with 4^
fathoms water on it. Morne du Diamant rises abruptly from the shore
to the height of 1,568 feet, and may generally be seen at a great dis-
tance; it is bold and steep-to.

Col de Sac Marin betweeu the shoals is so narrow that large ves-
sels can not work in under sail. The water is so clear that the shoals
and rocks can be easily seen and avoided. The entrance is obstructed
by tlie Singe Bank, having only 3 feet of water on it, and forming two
channels at the entrance. Tiie southeastern channel is the best. The
eastern point of the entrance is flat and marshy, and is called Marin
Point. The best anchorage will be found with this point bearing
8. 440 W. (8. 450 W. mag.) and the Piton Crfeve Coeur, a hUl 603 feet
high on the eastern side of the bay 8. 74^ B. (8. 73^ B. mig.). In this
berth a vessel will have 12 fathoms of water and good holding ground.
The anchorage nearer the town is only fit for coasters. At the hea<l of
the bay, near the village ot* Marin, a central sugar factory has been
established.

There are beacons and buoys for facilitating the navigation of the
channel.

Saline Point, the south point of the island, is very low, and reefs
extend off about J mile; about i mile to the 8E. of the point is the
small islet of Cabrit.

460 MARTINIQUE ISLAND.

Cabrit Islet is al^o lo\r, and foul ground extends for ^ mile SW. oi
the islet. The shore should not be approached in this neighborhood
nearer than a mile.

Directions. — Vessels coming from the south or SE., and bound to
either of the anchorages just described, will first make the Yaoclin
Mountain, which will be a guide to Point Saline.

The bank of soundings is so steep, that by day the eye will greatly
assist the lead, the discolored water being easily seen from aloft. Hav-
ing passed Dunkerque Point, large vessels should approach Borgnesse,
the west point of entrance to Oul de Sac Marin, carefully, to avoid the
shoal ground off St. Anne, and anchor about i mile SW. of the latter
pointy if under sail, and be ready to warp or tow in, as the breeze
slackens towards the evening.

If bound to the westward, having passed Cabrit Islet, a N. 74<^ W.
(N. 730 W. mag.) course for 10 J miles, will lead to abreast the Diamond
Bock, when hug the shore close aboard, and choose an anchorage aa
before directed. It is necessary, however, to observe that when nndet
the lee of the high lands, preparation must be made to meet the sudden
and violent gusts which rush down the gorges of the mountains, and
which are the more dangerous as they come upon a vessel when she is
probably becalmed and quite unmanageable. A vessel may pass
between the Diamond Bock and the coast, but no real advantage will
be gained.

XSast Coast — Tlie eastern shore of Martinique, as far north as the
peninsula of Oaravelle, is bordered by coral banks and reefs which
extend off shore to a distance of 2J miles. There are several passages
through these reefs leading to harbors and anchorages inside.

Vauclin Point is the extremity of a fork of the great mountain of
that name, which separates the Oul de Sac Vauclin from those of Gren-
ade and Sans Souci to the northward of it. The ridge slopes uni-
formly but rapidly, terminating at a small steep hill on the shore, 210
feet above the sea. The main bank and outer reefs mav be said to end
at the Vauclin Pass, but the coast continues to be skirted by inner ones
nearly 1^ miles off the coast, which incline gradually to the shore, and
extend about ^ mile at Cabrit Islet.

Vauclin Pass is only available for small coasters. To enter from
the southward bring the little hill on Vauclin Point to bear X. 37° W.
(N. 3(P W. mag.), which course will lead through between the reefs,
which are only 200 yards apart towards the inner end of the channel.
The depth varies from 7 to 8 fathoms.

Brigot Pass, about l.J miles to the northward of the above, is narrc
and too danj^erous for any vessel to attempt witliout the assistance
a pilot.

Pinsonelle Pass, 2i miles to the northward of Brigot and the fl*
to the southward of Mitan, is formed between the Sans Souci Cays a
Pinsonelle Cay. To run through, bring the Vauclin Mountain ^'

■'-f

■f^<i

MITAN CHANNEL CARACOLI CHANNEL. 461

S. 66° W. (S. 56^ W. mag.) bearing, upon which line there will not be a
less depth than 4^ fathoms.

Caution. — ^The establishment of central sugar factories, or unifies^ at
various i>oints on the east coast of Martinique and oC neighboring porta
of entry for tlie exportation of their productions renders it necessary to
caution shipmasters as to chartering their vessels to load at those ports,,
unless they have some previous knowledge of the locality.

Such factories have beeif established at Simon Francois, Oalion, and
St« Marie. All these ports can be reached without much difficulty,
but they are difficult to get away from, owing to the strong NE. wind
blowing directly on to this coast and the heavy sea.

Mitan Channel lies nearly midway between Thiery Isle and Mitau
Cay, 2J jniles north of it. The latter is a small low cay on the inner
edge of the reef. It lies east 2^ miles from Rose Point; about a mile
N. 18^ W. (N. 170 VV. mag.) of it is the Loui) ^arou, a similar small
cay.

Thiery Isle is the easternmost of a group of small islets lying about
1^ miles from the nearest shore It is about 100 feet high and its sum-
mit has the appearance of a roiuuled cap <Jovered with brushwood; 1^
miles S. 68*^ E. (S. 67^ E. mag.) of it, and on the outer reef is a dry^
flat, rocky ledge, called Pinsonnelle Cay, which forms the 8E. danger
of the Mitan Channel. The mail steiimer Mississippi was wrecked on
this cay in 1809.

Caracoli Channel is formed between Caracoli Point, the SE. end of
the peninsula of Caravelle and the north end of the coral bank which
extends hence to the southward about 2J miles from the shore along
the whole of this side of the island. There are several small channels
through it, but the Caracoli is by far the best for vessels b<nmd to any
of the anchorages within it.

Caracoli Point is a remarkable bare, steep, rocky headland 95 feet
above the sea; the land slopes from the heights above, and at its foot a
flat bank of coral extends for about 200 yards. The north end of the
main bank bears from it 8. 23° E. (S. 22° E. mag.) one mile; nearly mid-
way between, however, lies a small coral bank, with 5^ fathoms water,
causing a heavy roll of the sea, and should be avoided by bordering
towards the'point; it may be generally distinguislied by the discolored
water.

Directiona. — With the wind at NE. or even ENE., and moderate
weather, vessels bound out from either (Talion Bay or le Havre du Robert
ill And the Mitan Channel preferable to the Cara<;oli. In general
le sea is mu(*,h smoother to the southward of Mitan than at any other
)art of the reef. Leaving tlwi former, care must be taken to avoid
he Loup Marseillais, which is a narrow ledge, with 10 feet watt*T on it,
nng about i mile N. 80^ \V. (N. 79^ W. mag.) of Loup Carou; it gener-
ally breaks. Leaving le Havre du Robert, Mount Tartane open of Ram-
ille Islet leads eastward of the reefs which extend off Chardon Isle

•^^- >.

'"J

'v*

* *.'

»^

;.'i

<t»i

462 MARTINIQUE ISLAND.

and Rose Point, and having brought Mltan Cay to bear N. 10^ E. (N.
no E. mag.) about a mile, haul to the wind through the channel.

CnlB de Sac Vanclin, Sans Sonci, Simon, and Fregate are small
coves, where small .vessels may, with the assistance of a pilot, find good
anchorage: At Simon there is a central sugar factory. As the water
is everywhere very clear the shoals are easily seen, particularly in
good weather and when the sun is astern.

Fran9oi6 Anchorage, where a central sugar factory has been estab-
lished, is 8 miles to the southward of Oaracoli Point, The town lies at
the head of a small bay about f mile long, and the anchorage is well
sheltered and has excellent holding grouud. It is, however, so sur-
rounded by reefs and shoals, and the cliahnels are so narrow, that the
assistance of a pilot, is indispensable.

Le Havre du Robert, at its entrance between Ohardons Islet and
<xrotte Rock, is not more than about 900 yards in breadth, but beoomess
much wid^r within. The south side of the channel is bouiuied by reefs
nearly dry which extend off in every direction from Bose Point, and
from which rise the two small islets named Bose and Ghardon. The
e€lge of the reef is nearly 200 yards from the latter, and is steep-to.
Grotte Rock on the north side, is steep-to, and is connected with a
bank of coral and gravel (barely covered by the sea) to a small islet of
the same name, which is also unite<t in a similar manner to Bauiville
Islet at the south point of Gallon Bay.

Anchorage.— About If miles to the westward of Grotte Bock is the
islet of Petite Martinique, to the westward of which is the best anchor-
age for large vessels. Here smooth water and good holding gronnd
will be found, with from 5 to 6 fathoms of water. Abreast of the town
from 13 to 16 feet of water will be found.

The town of Robert lies on the NW. shore of the bay. It contains
about 6,500 inhabitants, and moderate quantities of provisions may be
obtained. The rise of tide is about 5 feet, but it depends on the foroe
of the trade winds.

Directions. — Having entered within the main bank by GaracoU Chan-
nel, there is no difficulty in making or entering le Havre du Robert,
for the reefs are nearly dry, and readily distinguished by the discolored
water. It is not, however, so easy to beat out of, being very narrow,
and the eye must be the chief guide. Having passed outside the islets
a course may be shaped either for the Oaracoli or theMitan Chann^

Gkdion Bay, on the south side of the peninsula of Caravelte, is 4
miles wide at the entrance between Ramville Islet, which is about
feet high and has a bushy and rounded summit, and GaraeoU Po^
but the bay becomes contracted towards its inner end, and betw
Banane Point and Brunet Point, it is not more than a mile in brea'
The western shore is much indented, and forms several bays, wl
however, are skirted and obstructed by numerous coral shoals, ai
heavy swell sets in. The River Gallon, with its sugar factory ab^

CAEACOLI CHANNEL DIRECTIONS TBINITE BAY. 463

mile within its mouth, empties into the bay to the SW. of a remarkable
conical wooded islet of the same name. The only safe anchorage against
all winds is on the north side of the bay, under the west side of Brnnet
Point, which lies 2^ miles to the 8W. of Caracoli Point, and is 8t(^p-to
and bold. Within Oaracoli Point is the <Jul de Sac de la Tartane, but
it is choked with reefs, and ot no importance. •

Directions. — Having entered the Caracoli Channel, in running do^ii
the south side of the Peninsula of Caravelle, the shore should not be
approached witliiu J mile until Brunet Point b^ars N. 35^ W. (N. 34°
W. mag.), when haul in and anchor as convenient, about J mile from
the eastern shore, with the point bearing 9. '>7^ E. (8. 56^ E. mag.), and
a large house north of it N. 22^ E. (X. 23° E. mag.) in 4^ fathoms water.
In leaving this anchorage a sailing vessel will have to beat out, and
care must be taken to avoid the two small banks. Loup Banane and
Loap Charpentier, which lie wthout the reefs which skirt the whole of
the south side of the bay; the former has 9 feet water on it, and lies S.
lo E. (south mag.) 1,20(> yards from Brnnet Point; the latter is nearly IJ
miles S. 23° E. (S. 22^ E. mag.) of the same point, east of Banane Point,
and has 13 feet on it. To the eastward of these shoals, the bay is free
of danger till nearing the inner side of the main bank, on which, imme-
diately in front of the bay, and nearly 3 miles S. 18° E. (S. 17° E.
mag.) of Caracoli Point, there is a dry spot called Loup Bordelais.

Pilots. — It is said that pilots can not always be depended upon, as
they frequently do not present themselves till the vessel is close to the
anchorage and no longer needs their assistance.

Cftnvelld Peniiisiila, of which Carai^li Point is the SE. extremity,
is of very irregular breadth, varying from J mile to 2 miles. The nar
row isthmus which connects the peninsula with the main land is only ^
mile wide and separates the two bays of Trinity and GaUon. Farther
to the eastward the land is higher, gradually rising to the summit of
Mount Tartane.

The Caravella Rock, 1| miles north of the peninsula, affords an
excellent landmark for vessels approaching this part of the island. It
is steep-to, quite barren, and its peaked summit has been completely
whitened by birds. From a distance it looks like a vessel under sail.
The channel between Caravelle Peninsula and this rock is deep and free
from danger.

Light. — On.the summit of Caracoli Hill, at the extremity of Caravelle
"Peninsula, and i mile inland, is a gray tower, which exhibits, at 410
above the sea, a fixed white light, visible in <*lear weather about 12
Tniles. Caravelle Rock is 2 ,V miles north of tlie light.

Triiiit6 Bay aiibrds a safe anchorage during ordinary winds, and,
lext to St. Pierre and Fort de France the most important commercial
►ort, having a population of over 7,000. The bay is somewhat sheltered
f) the northward by a shallow, rocky bank, on which there are several
langerous shoals. The irregular depths on the bank raise so rough a

464 MARTINIQUE ISLAND.

sea that large vessels from the northward had better pass between the
western end of the bank and the shore than try to cross it.

The northern side of Caravelle peninsula forms the eastern shore of
Trinity Bay. It is composed of low, reddish cliffs and sandy bays^
skirted at a distance of 200 to 600 yards by a coral reef, on which the
sea generally breaks.

St. Anbin Isle is an excellent landmark in approaching Trinite Bay.
This isle is high and steep, with a round, bushy summit.* Its north side
is steep-to and clear of danger, but to the ESE. it is foul for J mile, and
its south side is joined to the shore by a coral reef nearly dry in places.

Loup lyUnistre has 6 to 9 feet of water on it, and as the sea breaks
heiivily nearly at all times, it tbrras a useful guide to the entrance of
the bay.

Between this reef and Caravelle peninsula there are many other reels^
which make the passage to the eastward of the reef dangerous.

The Mitan Bank is small, carries a depth of only 11 feet, and does
not always break. It bears N. 33^ E. (N. 34^ E. mag.) from the fort,
8. 680 E. (S. 67 o E. mag.) from the highest part of St. Aubin Isle, and
lies on a line between the fort and Loup Ministre.

Loup de St Marie. — The western end of the bank on which the Loup
Ministre lies terminates about li mile north of St. Aubin Isle, but
rather less than one mile farther N. 68° W. (N, 67^ W. mag.) is the Ijonp
de St. Marie, with 5J fathoms of water on it. With strong NE. winds the
sea breaks heavily.

There is a clear channel between this shoal and the west end of the
Loup Ministre Bank, as well as between it and St. Marie Islet, in front
of the village of the same name, and joined to the mainland by a sandy
bank.

The Beau Sejour mill (situated on the isthmus connecting Caravelle
Peninsula with the mainland) kept open a little to the eastward of St.
Aubin Isle carries a vessel to windward of the Loup de St. Marie;
kept open to the westward it leads to leeward of the same danger.

Water. — The best watering place in Trinity Bay is under the house
at Beau Sejour.

Directions. — Approaching Trinite Bay from the northward keep well
to windward and do not bring the (>araveUe *Rock to bear northward of
N. 80^ E. (east mag.) until the windmill of Beau Sejour comes nearly,
in line with St. Aubin Isle, then haul up on the hiding mark for the
channel either to windward or leeward of Loup St. Marie, and when Isle
St. Marie bears S. 84- W. (S. So^ W. mag.), shape a course to pa^s abi
J mile to the eastward of St. Aubin Isle.

Good outer anchorage will be found in 9 fathoms with Fort P<
beariuj,^ S. 39^ \V. (S. 40^ W. mag.) and the mill of Beau Sejour 8.
E. (S. .36^ E. mag.); but if more convenient proceed farther in, the c
being a sufficient guide, as the shoal ground on either side will be d
tinctly seen.

i»-

ST. MARIE ISLET — TIDES AND CURRENT. ' 465

■..»«"J

• ■■''a.

<--i

WiMi the wind from east or SE. a vessel must beat in, and in order
to avoid Loup 'Ministre Bank, should it not break, St. Aubin Isle should
not be brought to the southward of 8. lio B. (8. 10° B. mag.) till it is
within one mile of the vessel.

With the prevailing winds it is usiuilly difficult to leave the bay. In
beating out, the eastern re^fs, which are visible, should be kept aboard
until the reef stretching off 400 yards from Port Point can be cleared.
After this is done the edges of the channel are plainly marked by the
breakers. Care must be taken to keep clear of the Mitan Bank.

Pilots for this bay and adjacent anchorages are generally to be found
in the ofling.

St. Marie Islet, in front of the village of the same name, is con-
nected to the shore by a narrow sand bank. A reef is reported to skirt
the shore southward of the islet and to extend from the islet two-thirds
of the distance across the bay.

St. Marie Anchorage. — Immediately to the westward of St. Marie
Islet is the mouth of the river of th0 same name. A central sugar factory
has been established near the mouth of the river, but the anchorage off
it is very much exposed and is unsafe.

The localitv is marked by the chimnevs of the UHtne, Vessels lie in •*

from 5 to 8 fathoms of water about J mile off shore. ^

Coast. — From Sugarloaf Point to Macouba Point, the north point
of the island, the coast is bold, steep-to, and affords no anchorage. It
consists of small sandy bays, separated from each other by bold, rocky
bluffs, and is exposed to the fuH'force of the wind and sea.

Tides and Current. — The time of high water at Martinique depends
greatly on the strength of the trade wind, but in general, at ftiU and
change, it is at 4h. From the same influence the rise and fall at le
Havre du Robert is about 5 feet, while at Fort de France Bay it is only
about one foot. The stream is entirely influenced by the great equi-
noctial current, consequently, near Saline Point on the south, and the
Pearl Eock on the NW. side of the island, the stream runs generally to
the westward. On the east side, with the wind at NE., it runs to the
SW., and with SE. winds to the NW., and sometimes at the rate of 3
knots. On the west side, however, close in shore, there is scarcely any
stream at all, and after a prevalence of light winds it is sometimes
found running strong to the NE. and east.

In the channel between Martinique and St. Lucia the current is
frequently impercex}tible.
18402 ;3()

-1

J^n

CHAPTER XIV.

THE WINDWARD ISLANDS. — ST. LUCIA TO BARBADOS INCLUSIVE.
, ST. LUCIA,

St Lucia' Island was first settled by the French in 1635, and after
yarious changes came into the possession of the English in ld03, and
has ever since remained in their hands. The traces of French oecapa-
tion are still apiparent, a large portion of the population speaking that
language.

The government is conducted by an administrator, who is subordi-
nate to the governor-in-chief of the Windward Islands, aided by an
executive and a legislative council.

G*eneral Description. — The island is 23^ miles long, north and south,
by 12 miles in breadth. It is mountainous, and broken up by gorges,
water courses, and ravines, and for the most part is covered with forest
and tropical vegetation. Piton Morne Gimie, the highest peak in the
island, is 3,145 feet above the sea; the great and small Pitons, of 2,619
and 2,461 feet, respectively, occupy isolated positions on the SW. part
of the island. These latter peaks are very prominent marks in approach-
ing the island.

La Sorci^re, 2,221 feet high, when seen from the NB., api>ear8 as a
perfect cone, but from the SE. as a round-backed mountain; the«e
mountains are seldom entirely free from clouds.

There is a great variety of timber, used for building and various pur-
poses ; logwood is x)Ientiful.

The island is proportioned into eight districts : D'Bnnery, Dauphin-
Gros Islet, Castries, Ause La Eaye, Suufriere, Choiseuil, Vieuxfort, and
Micoud-Praslin.

Population in 1885 numbered 40,681.

Steam launches ply from Port Castries to Soufriere, Choiseuil, Laborie,
and Vieuxfort. This, except by special messenger, is the only means of
communication between Port Castries and the other parts of the isla**''
Trading vessels must make Port Castries their first port of o^ll, as be;
the only port of entry.

The climate in the valleys and lower parts of the island is hot i
unhealthy ; on the elevated parts cool but very damp. The temperat
during the summer months at Port Castries varies between 88^° s
70^ Fahr., and in winter between 85^ and 65^ Fahr.

« 466

/■f:

POINTE DE CAP— CAPE MARQUIS.

467

The easterly trade wiud blows more or less throaghout the year, but
is always squally.

Baiu falls at times all the year round, but it is much heavier fipom
June to October than at other times. Annual rainfall at Port Castries,
between 1883 and 1886, was 73.2 inches to 118.2 inches.

The products are sugar, rum, molasses, cocoa, and some spices.

Tropical fruits are tolerably plentiful, also some kinds of vegetables.

Fish, may be caught with pots, line, and seine, and turtles can be
obtained.

Wild hogs can be found in the forests; waterfowl, snipe, and par-
tridges are found in the valleys.

The Weather Coast practically includes the whole north and east
coast of the island.

Pointe de Cap, the north extreme of the island, is bold but com-
paratively low, consisting of several small peaks, partially wooded, from
429 to 535 feet high; the summit is in lat. 14o 06 J' N., long. 60° 51 i'
W.; it is free from dangers, and the 20-fathom line^ extends from about
2^ miles off shore.

When beating round this point it is recommended to hug the shore,
and so avoid the current. .^

Pointe Hardie. — The NE. point of the island U sloping and well de-
fined ; there is a dangerous rock ^ mile east of it, named Oros Loup,
which generally breaks.

Esperance Harbor is a narrow creek, but affords neither protection
or room for vessels other than pirogues or native boats frequenting it for
shipping logwood.

Between Pointe Hardie and Esperance Harbor the bottom for nearly
^ mile off shore is foul and uneven, and should be given a wide berth,
In fine weather, however, landing at Case en Bas and Fayolle may be
effected through the boat channels.

From Esperance Harbor to Cape Marquis the shore is rocky, bold and
flt^ep-to, with moderately high peaked hills in the rear of it.

Cape Marquis (pronounced Machi in the colloquial) is an abrupt
rocky point 75 feet high, at the extremity of a steep slope from a con-
sphiiuous peaked hill named Gaiac. Immediately south of this cape, in
Petit Trou, there is a landing in ordinary weather. From here the coast
trends to the southward and SSW.

The Coast from Anse Marquis to d'Ennery is for the most part wild
and cUffy. Landing may be effected under favorable circumstances at
Pointe Dauphin and Anse Marquis. The summit of Pointe Tariti is a
conspicuous cone, 424 feet high. There is a rock awash 400 yards off
Pointe Tortue.

At Trou Halhal there is a good landing in ordinary weather.

La Bouche, at its entrance, is a conspicuous mushroom-shaped rock
50 feet high. Pointe Mammelles, as its name implies, consists of a
series of high cones terminating in a sandstone cliff 572 feet above the

^Ui

468 ST. LUCIA ISLAND.

Aea. There is a rock 98 feet high oft' it, and another 130 feet high to
the southward of it.

In Fond d^Orr bay small sloops anchor occasionally to ship sugar, but
it is unsafe, and a swell rolls in on the beach.

Porte d'Ennery is the only place on the weather coast that may be
called an anchorage; a slight protection is afforded- by the island and
peculiar shaped rocks at its entrance, inside which the anchor may be
dropped as convenient. It is used occasionally during crop tiDie by
the smaller class of sailing vessels, aud sometimes steamers anchor
there for an hour or so, but in case of the former, before sailing in,
arrangements must be made at Port Castries for being towed out, as it
is not possible to beat out without great risk. The cost of being towed
is about $100. The hospital is conspicuous from seaward.

Port Praslin (pronounced praly) is 2 miles south of Port-e d'Ennery,
and is now almost deserted, there being only a few huts; it is small and
shallow.

Pointe Ghapeau is a remarkable double point on which a red patch
shows in the morning sun. In Anse May Boyau there is a tramway
leading to the Fond Devaux Estate, from which small droghers occa-
sionally ship sugar and logwood.

Port Micoud may be described as a good boat hai*bor. None but the
smallest sloops venture in, and the passage, which is on the south Ride
of the entrance reef, is very narrow. The village is small and poor.

Pointe Vierge is low, flat, and prominent.

Port SaTannes is sometimes used by small sloops, and sugar is shipped
therefrom the estates in the vicinity; its access is difUcult and the
ground very foul to the southward; there is, however, a boat channel
inside the reef fronting this shore. The Saxannes Estate, with it»
chimneys, shows up well in the morning sun, with Mount Victorin
immediately behind it.

Cape Moule a Chiquei the south extreme of the island, is a fine,
bold, and precipitous headland, in latitude 13° 42f' N. and longitude
60O 57/ w,^ vrith a double summit of nearly equal height on the eastern
point. At a long distance it appears as an island on account of the
low land immediately north of it. It may be passed close- to, but
l-j^ miles southward of it is a coral shoal named Fond Blanc, with 6
fathoms on it, which it is advisable to keep clear of.

The' 20-fathoni line extends nearly 4 miles south of this cape.

South Coast — Vieux Fort Bay. — ^This bay has excellent anchorafire«
the protection being afforded by the Moule ^ Ohique Peninsula. 1
only danger in the bay is the coral bank extending 1,400 yards S
of the town, having two shoal heads, la Caille Reef, awash, and e
fathom patch at the outer extremity.

This is best avoided by using the lead and bearings of Point Cses
Sailing vessels will have to beat up to the anchorage, the winds bei
somewhat baffling. Steamers, however, can get Fort Cross Hill ''

LABORIE SOUFRIEHE. 469

feet high, immediately east of the pier) iu line mth Mount Bellevnid
N. 30O E. (^. 30° E. mag.) and anchor at a convenient distance from
the town. The holding ground is good. The town is a poor one, and
not considered healthy, in consequence of the trade wind blowing over
the swamp and marsh at the back of the town.

Water can be obtained here, but it is not particularly good. Also
fish, fruits,, and vegetables, and fresh meat.

Laborie is a small village 3^ miles KW. of CiBsar Point, and is con-
nected with Vieux Fort by a good road. The bay does not seem to , ;^;
be much frequented. The anchorage is confined; the entrance is nar-
row, and a swell often sets into it. A steam launch calls in from Port
Castries four times a week. i

The Laborie Beefs break heavily, except in calm weather. Prom here
to River Dor^e the ground is foul for nearly J mile off shore, the prin-
cipal shoals being the Balembouche Bocks.

Balembouche Rocks. — These rocks lie ^ mile east of the Biver
Dor^e, and 400 yards from the shore, but the shoal waiter off them
extends to the southward for nearly i mile.

They break as a rule when there is any swell; and there is a passage
for boats inside.

When standing in toward the shore, keep Maria Islet well open of the
point immediately west of the Anse Noir Estate, bearing S. 82^ E. (S.
S20 E. mag.).

West; or Lee Coast. — From Point Beaumont the land trends to the
north and NNE. Tile two Pitoiis or Sugarloaves are so unmistaka-
ble that they need no description. The water off them is very deep,
and the squalls come down oceasioually with great violence.

Soufriteo. — This is a picturesque town, clean and well ordered, and
although hot it is said to be very healthy, which is probably caused by
the deodorizing influence of the sulphur springs, the smell of which
impregnates the air for miles around, and may be noticed some dis-
tance out to sea. The sulphur springs are about 2 miles outside the
town.

It is unfortunate that Soufriere possesses no anchorage; small vessels
can, however, drop their anchor in 20 fathoms, about 160 yards from
the beach, haul their stems into the shore, and secure to the trees.

Directions. — In entering Soufri^re Bay the wind must be guarded

against, as it rushes off from the valleys with such force as to endanger

♦he spars; therefore, before entering, sail should bereduced, andif the

)reeze outside is strong, a reef taken in. When beating in, the wind

vill be found more steady on the south side than on the north.

Caution. — Having ajiproached to within a short distance of the town

strong hawser should be sent to the shore and made fast to one of
he trees on the beach in front of it, and anotlier hawser coiled in a
oat ready to leave fhe ship and bend on, if required. The moment
he end of tlie hawser is on board all sail must be quickly furled, for

470 ST. LUCIA ISLAND.

should it part it would be useless to drop theanclior, as it would imme-
diately drag into deep water.

It will be necessary to hang the vessel by the stern by a stream chain
from either quarter, and drop a bower anchor on the edge of the bank,
in case the wind should veer to the westward; this, however, never
takes place except in the hurricane months, and at all other times the
sea is as smooth as in a mill pond.

Roseau Bay. — ^Vessels anchor here during crop time, about 400 yards
from the shore, and ship sugar from the Roseau factory, a tramway and
pier being constructed for that purpose.

Maxigot Harbor is a very small but protected anchorage, and is
seldom frequented.

G-rand Cul do Sac Bay is an open bay, i mile broad, situated 2 miles
south of Port Castries, and affords good anchorage to all sized vessels-
Its northern shores are cliffy, precipitous, and steep-to. The head of
the bay is a sandy beach, about the center of which the River Cul de
Sac discharges itself, off which the shoal water extends for nearly 400
yards. The south shore line consists of rock and sand, which, except
off the Telegraph hut, is fronted by a coral shoal extending 200 yards
from the shore.

When entering from the northward, Ciceron Point c&n be passed close
to; but from the south, Point Bananes must be given a good berth, on
account of the rocks extending 200 yards north of it. The pier head in
line with the factory chimney, and Seine Point bearing south (south mag.),
is a good position for most vessels to anchor in 13 fathoms, mud. The
submarine cable enters the sea at the Telegraph hut in this bay.

Port Castries, on the west or lee side, about 7 miles from the north
end of the island, is one of the most secure harbors in the West Indies;
it is about one mile in length ESE. and WNW., averaging J mile wide,
and although the distance between the shoals is only from 300 to 400
yards, and the wind blowing generally down the harbor (light and baf-
fling sometimes), yet a handy, well-manned vessel should be able to beat
in. Steamers should experience no difficulty.

At the head of the harbor m the town of Castries, the capital of the
island. The towu is well laid out, but its streets are ill paved and Wst
of the houses unpretending. Great improvement, however, has been
effected during the last few years in the harbor and wharfage accommo-
dation.

A concrete wharf has been constructed on the north side of the to'

with a depth of 27 feet alongside, and a good channel dredged up t<

Dredging is still proceeding. Vielle Yille and Cocoanut Shoals '

be left, as they protetjt the harbor from heavy seas.

Land at the head of the harbor has been reclaimed.

Above the town of Castries, on the south side, rises the Mome t

tun^, 845 feet high, on which stands Fort Charlotte and the milife

quarters. The climate there is cool and liealthy. The administri

POET CASTRIES. 471

resides here temporarily. These buildings are conspicuous from sea- '
ward. The place is being strongly fortified and garrisoned. The new
barracks and buildings on the hills on both sides of the entrance fhr-
nish excellent marks for identifying the position of Fort Castries.

Salutes can be returned. The authority to visit is the administra-
tor.

CoaL — ^A large quantity (about 20,000 tons) is generally kept in store.
Vessels can be coaled at the rate of from 70 to 80 tons per hour if along-
side the wharves, at which there is a greatest depth of 27 feet. There
are five coal hulks, in addition to the stores at the wharves, of capacity
from 750 to 98 tons. Lighters are kept loaded ready for delivery. Coal-
" ing can be carried on at all times, day or night. Average price, from $6
to $6.60.

Telegraph. — ^There is telegraphic communication with the United
States and South America.

Hospitals. — The island is divided into four hospital districts, each
having a hospital. There is also a lunatic asylum and a hospital for
lepers.

The Victoria Hospital, opened in 1887, on Bananes Point, is a fine and
the most imposing building in the harbor. All vessels liable to tonnage
dues pay a hospital tax, wbioh entitles, them to use the hospital.

Port Charges. — Tonnage dues, 24 cents per ton ; harbor master's
dues, 5 cents per ton ; clearance, 96 cents ; hospital dues, 1 cent per
ton; 72 cents per ton on all coal landed in Port Castries. There is also
a cargo tax of 48 cents per ton on cargo landed from regular steamers,
but these steamers are exempt from other port dues.

Pilotage. — Steamers in or out, between 6 a. m. and 7 p. m., $4.86;
between 7 and 10 p. m, $7,29; after 10 p. m., $9.72. Sailing vessels,
not exceeding 50 tons, 96 cents; between 50 and 100 tons, $1.92; be-
tween 100 and 200 tons, $2.88 ; over 200 tons, $4.86. After 7 p. m. and
before 6 a. m., double the above rates.

For moving a vessel in harbor, $1.20; after 7 p. m., $2.40,

Lights. — The Vigie is the name given to the promontory, 295 feet
high, which forms the north shore of the harbor; it is low about its
junction with the mainland, gradually rising to a wedge-like summit at
its extremity. On its highest part stands an octagonal lighthouse,
painted with vertical black and white stripes, from which is exhibited
a fixed white light, visible 12 miles. It has a signal staff, from which
vessels sighted are signaled, and a gun wliicli is fired at 8 p. m., and
on the arrival of the mail steamer.

The Tapion, on the south side of the entrance, is a semi-detached
tabular- shaped ro(5k, 80 feet high, reddish in color, not easily made out
from the northward. A fixed red light is exhibited from an old battery
on its summit; visible 2 miles.

When a vessel enters or leaves the harbor at night and the harbor
master is informed, a red light is shown from the outer perch, which

472 ST. LUCIA ISLAND.

marks Vielle ViUe Shoal and a green light from the perch on Ooeoaaut
Shoal.

Bange lights are shown to mark the middle of the channel.

The front light, fixed red, is situated on western wharf of Market
Place, 330 feet 8. 87^ W, (S. 87^ W. mag.) from the Government fli«-
staff, and is at present shown from a temporary tripod, pending comple-
tion of the piling of the wharf.

The rear light, fixed green, bears S. 59^ 30' E. (S. 59^ 30' E, mag.)
distant 2,500 feet from the front light, which bearing, with the lights
in line, leads into the harbor.

The lights are shown from skeleton iron frames with day marks.

Perches. — Vieille Ville Shoal is marked by 3 perches. The old '
(outer) perch on that shoal has been moved about 100 feet westward
into 22 feet of water.

The middle perch is in 10 feet of water 500 feet S. 68o E. (S. 68° E.
mag.) from the outer perch.

The eastern perch is in 10 feet of water about 467 yards N. 89^ E. (S,
89*^ E. mag.) from the outer perch.

Supplies. — Fresh provisions (not plentiful) can be obtained at the
following rate: Beef, 14 cents per pound; mutton 16 cents per pound;
vegetables, 4 cents; bread, 5 cents; fish, turtle, and poultry also.
Water, conducted by pipes from the head of Castries Valley, is free, but
for drinking purposes rain water is preferable. The supply is insuffi-
cient^

Buoy. — A red can buoy, surmounted by a diamond-shaped top,
painted yellow, has been placed to mark quarantine ground, SW. from
Vigie lighthouse. Vessels liable to be quarantined should anchor to
the westward of this buoy, leaving a clear channel between their an-
chorage and Tapion Rock.

Directions. — From the northward, vessels of Ught draft may haul
close around Vigie Point, but those of heavy draft, in order to avoid
the 29-foot patch 300 yards from the point, should keep the Tapion Bock
in line with one of the buildings on Mome Fortune, until the Victoria
Hospital is shut in by Cocoanut Point. From the southward, all vessels
must avoid the Tapion Shoal. Labrellotte Point, bearing about y. 34^
E. (N. 340 E.), kept well open to the west extreme of the Vigie, will clear
. it until the town of Castries opens out clear of Cocoanut Point.

At the mouth of the harbor the vessel will be met by the harbor
master, who, when a clean bill of health is presented, will give pratique,
without which no vessel is allowed within 300 yards of the wharf.

A steamer can then proceed into harbor, steer between the Cocoanu
and Vielle Ville Shoals, and anchoring or proceeding to the coal wha
as required.

Sailing vessels must beat up by the lead, and estimate distance &<
shore or shoal ; the wind is often baffling, but sometimes permits a si
to lay right into the anchorage.

ANSE DU CHOC— GROS I«LET BAY 473

Vesaelsj are not allowed to make fast to buoys without the harbor
master's sanction.

When bound to Port Castries from Barbados, pass round the north
end of the Island, and, in shaping course, make a lar^e allowance for a
lee or westerly current, which generally prevails; this route will avoid
the squalls and baMin^ winds on the west side of the island.

A Bank of soundings from 10 to 27 fathoms was lately reported by
the French cruiser La Florie off the NE. of St. Lucia, between 14^ 03'
and 14^ 14' K and 00^ 3G' and 60^ 47' W. longitude.

* This has been unsuccessfully searched for by the French and English
men-of-war.

Ansa da Choc is a bight about 3 miles in length between Port Cas-
tries and Labrellotte Point, in which a vessel may anchor in 6 or 8
fathoms of water, to the westward of Choc or Rat Islet (and (m which
the Yaws Hospital now stands), near the center of the bay.

About i mile NE. of Choc Islet is the entrance to the Choc or Unicm
Biver.

Wlien approaching this bay be careful to avoid a rocky shoal, nearly
one mile long and 400 yards broad, parallel to, and distant from the
shore about ^ mile, its north end joining Labrellotte Point at the north
extreme of the bay.

The south end of the shoal lies about NW. from the Choc River; U>
avoid it keep Pigeon Island open of Labrellotte Point.

OroB Islet Bay, is about 4 miles XNE. of Port Castries, is less con-
fined, and a good anchorage.

It is formed between Pigeon Island on the north, and Fourreur, or
Barrel of Beef, a small round rock 18 feet high, on the south, which lies
S. 34^ W. (S. 340 W. mag.) and N. 34^ E. (N. 34° E. mag.) distant 1^
miles from each other, and, measured from this line, the bay is Jibout
one mile deep.

Pigeon Island is bold and steei>-to, 341 feet high, 800 yards in length
^E. and SW., and half that distance in breadth. On its south hill is
Fort Rodney, and at its east end are the ruins of military quarters, and
a very old tank contains good drinking wat<n'. It is about J mile from
the shore, with only a boat channel between.

There is a passage for small craft between Fourreur Islet and the
mainland.

The village of Gros Islet stands on its eastern shore, and is connected
with Port Castries by a good rojwi about 7 miles in length. There is a
' itering place in Trou Gascon.

Direction. — As there is no danger in entering Gros Islet Bay, both
] dnts may be rounded at 200 yards. A sailing vessel will most prob-
s ly have to beat in; the best anchorage will be found with Gros Islet
i turch in line with a conical hill 314 feet over Beausejour Estate, bear*
j ^ S.79^ E. (S. 790 E. mag.), and Fort Charlotte on Morne. Fortune,
i m inside the summit of Labrellotte Point, S. 17^ W. (8. 17^ W. mag.)
j 10 fathoms of water.

474 ST. LUCIA ISLAND ST. VINCENT.

Cnrrent — Around the island of St. Lucia the current generaUy sets
to the north and N W., being deflected by the trend of the coast, with
a velocity varying up to 2^ knots; it divides off Point Brandon, Cape
Moule ^ Ohique, one part running along the south coast, the* other up
the weather coast; they would seem to meet again somewhere off the
north coast according to their force and velocity, for, generally speaking,
there is a small area off that coast which has less, or is free from current.

The apx>earance or absence of rips, and their unstable positions, would
seem to indicate that the parting and meeting of~ the two portions of
the stream varies according to their strength. When the current is
weak, or there is none, it is probable that the tidal stream predominatesi
and it appears also to effect its velocity when strong. Perhaps, also,
the tidal influence close inshore is stronger than that of the current,
which may account for the eddies said to be reported by fishermen.

In the channels between the Windward Island the prevailing set of
the currents is to the west, tending IN'W. The strength varies, but much
increases in the vicinity of the shoi*es of the islands, where it may
attain a rate of 3 knots.

The U. S. 8. Chicago experienced little current between St Thomas
and Domiuica and Martinique; abreast these two islands a KW. current
was felt, and approacliing St. Lucia it ran with a strength of about 2
knots an hour. (December, 1891.)

ST. VINCENT. ^

St. Vincent Island has been in the possession of the English since
1783. A lofty range of mountains running north and south occupies
the cent;er of the island, Mount Soufri^re, in the NW. end of the island,
rising to a height of 4,048 feet. This mountain is volcanic, and may
be seen at a distance of 55 miles. On its NW. side it rises abruptly,
but on its NE. side it gradually slopes to an extensive plain.

The shores are almost everywhere bold and rocky except on the
east side, where the slope is gradual, with several sandy bays, where
coasters load produce for Kingstown, the capital of the island and place
of export.

The climate is said to be healthier than that of any of the other West
India Islands. Population about 45,(K)0.

Tlie government is vested in a governor, with an executive and a leg-
islative council.

BZingstown Bay and Anchorage on the SW. side of St. Vincent *-
the principal anchora^^e, on the shore of which is the town of the sa
name, the capital of the island, which lies along the shore of the bay j
is backed by the mountains.

Salutes can be returned.

The authority to visit is the governor, or in his absence the adu
istrator.

Population is about 5,000. The city is very clean and healthy,
can be obtained at reasonable rates. Water is brough

KINGSTOWN DIRECTIONS. 475

•

the city in iron pipes; vessels water at the wharf — cost 30 cents per 100
gallons. Supplied free to vessels of war on application to port office.

Coal — There is no coal.

Hospitals. — ^The Colonial Hospital accommodates about 60 patients.
Patients pay $5 on entering, which is the only charge. There is a quar-
antine and a lepers' hospital.

Telograph. — ^There is telegraphic communication with the other West
India Islands and thence to the United States and F^urope.

Steamers. — ^Tliere are two regular lines to England. Mail connec-
tion with United States via Trinidad. Local mail to Georgetown and
Chateau Belair.

Iianding — ^The only landing is at the pier in front of police yard.
It is in good condition and free.

Port Charges. — ^Tonnage dues, 36 cents per register ton or per ton
of cargo landed. Ballast, 72 cents per ton. Harbor dues on steamers,
$9.72; ships or barks, $7.21>; brigs or brigantines, $4.86; schooners or
sloops of 40 tons or more, 82.43; from 20 to 40 tons, $1.92; below 20
tons, 96 cents.

Pilotage not necessary or compulsory. When a pilot is taken the
fees are as follows: Sailing vessels under 100 tons, $2.40; over 100 tons,
2 cents for each ton in addition to $2.40. Steamers drawing 8 feet and
under, $9.72; between 8 and 14 feet, $17; over 14 feet, for every foot or
fraction thereof, $1.44.

Current — In December, 1891, in entering the harbor the U. S. S.
Kearsarge experienced a current of nearly 2 knots setting toward John-
son Point. This point should therefore be given a wide berth.

Directions. — Kingstown Bay is generally entered from the south-
ward. Having closed with the south point of St. Vincent, which slox)es
gradually, steer along the land at the distance of about f mile, when
Young and Duvernette Islets on the NW. side of Calliaqua Bay, and
the high land over Kingstown will be seen, and shortly the high bluff
of Battery or Old Woman Point will come open. Pass this islet about
i mile off and haul in for Cane Garden Point, the SE. extreme of Kings-
town Bay, which slopes gently toward the sea.

If bound into the bay in a sailing vessel, haul close around Cane
Garden Point, but take care not to be taken aback, and look out for the
lofty sails, as the wind is often scant and unsteady and the squalls from
the high land are heavy. A vessel may stand over to the western shore
without fear, and having tacked, the best anchorage is in 10 fathoms
water, dark sand and good holding ground, with the i^hurch bearing
north (north mag.) about J mile from the shore. If more convenient, a
erth will be found farther out in 15 fiithoms, with the church about N^
50 E. (N. 6^ E. mag.) and Old Woman Point N. 82° W. (N. 82- \Y. mag.).

As' the wind during the middle of the day frequently nishes down
tie valleys with great violence, be prei)ared to give the vessel a good
;cope of cable or she may drift off the bank. At night the breeze

476 ST. VINCENT ISLANT).

generally falls light, a weather current sets round the bay, and should
the anchorage be crowded, it may be necessary to steady her with
another anchor. Off the pier there is a mooring buoy for the mail
steamer.

Tidea — It is high water, fiill and change, in Kingstown Bay, at 3h.
Om., springs rise about IJ feet, neaps one foot.

Signals. — There is a signal mast on Fort Charlotte which signals tiie
approach of vessels.

Light. — A fixed white light 640 feet above the sea, visible 6 milea, is
shown from Fort Charlotte.

Toung and Duvernette Islets are on the south side of the island.
The latter is the outer and smaller of the*two, is conical in shape, 2M
feet high, and surmounted by an old fort.

These islets are bordered on the east and south sides by a rocky bank
extending off 200 yards.

There is a narrow 5-fathom channel between these islets and the
mainlaild.

Cailiaqna or Tjrrrel Bay, immediately east of these two islets, is a
secure anchorage, but is now only frequented by coasters. Between
this bay and Young Island a reef runs 400 yards off shore to the south-
ward. The bay has a convenient sandy beach for shipping cargo. Two
rivulets run into it, and the anchorage is secure. The village is smalL
A pilot is necessary.

Lagoon. — On the east side of this bay is a snug little harbor protected
by the reefs, called the Lagoon, with 6 to 9 fathoms water, mud bottom,
but the entrance through the reef from the S W. carries only 2 fathoms.

Buccament Bay, about 2^ miles l^W, of Kingstown, is noted for the
stream of excellent water which flows into it. It lies KJTW. and SSB.,
witba depth of 26 fathoms across, within 100 yards of the shore; a
vessel may anchor at that distance off shore, a little to the northward
of the river, in 17 fathoms of water.

Layn Bay. — About 3 miles to the ^W. of Old Woman Point is Layn
Bay, with 20 to 25 fathoms water at 200 yards from the shore. The
SE. point is steep-to, and this side of the bay is sandy; the NW. side
is rocky, and a small reef extends from the point.

Barronallie Bay lies about 5^ miles to the NW. of Kingstown. Its
north side is formed by some remarkable rocks called the Bottle and
Olass, which are clear of danger, and have a boat channel within them.

Anchorage. — If coming from the northward, haul close round these
rocks and anchor in 20 fathoms of water, sandy bottom, with the ro<
bearing X. 45o W. (X. 45o W. ma^.) and the barracks K 62© B. (X. i
E. mag.). The bottom on the north side of the bay is foul. The wi
is so variable and unsteady under the highland that if intending
remain any time it will be better to warp in, and drop a second anc
to the eastward in about 12 fathoms. If coming fr'om the soathwa
the shore may be kept aboard equally close, and the vessel may pr'^

;.'■

CHATEAU BELAIR ^DE VOLET POINT. 47T < ; ' V^

bly shoot far enough in to drop the inner anchor first. The water
being deep so close in the anchorage is only fit for small vessels.
"Water may be obtained from a stream at the head of the bay.
Caution. — To navigate under the lee of highland, is generally ex.
tremely tedious and uncertain. A vessel may be becalmed for hours^
or indeed days, when the trade wind is light. When it is strong, pre- '

caution is necessary, and the mariner should be prepared for the sudden*
gust^ which rush with violence down the valleys. As the anchorages
generally lie close to the sliore, and the banks extend but little olf and
steep-to, if taken aback there may be some danger of getting on the
rocks; the boats should therefore be ready to tow. Anchors must not
alone be depended upon.

Coast — From the Bottle and Glass Rocks to the NVV. extreme of
St. Vincent, it is all along bold, and a vessel may stand in to ^ mile •
from the shore. Between are several small bays.

Chateau Belair, the largest, affords anchorage at about 400 yards
off its eastern shore in 13 or 14 fathoms of water, with the north point
of the bay bearing X. 3^ E. (N. 3^ E. mag.) the west point S. 71)^ W. (S.
•790 W. mag.) and the town S. 17° W. (S. 17^ W. mag.).

In the middle of the bay there is no bottom with 50 fathoms, nor on
the west side with 30 fathoms, at 100 yards from the shore. The land-
ing is not good, and with northerly winds a heavy surf rolls in on the
beach. Chateau Belair is separated from the little bay southward of
it by Chateau Belair Island, which is about i mile in length with a
rock 7 feet high close off its southern point. Southward of this rock
is a narrow passage carrying 6 fathoms water, which is used by boats
and sometimes by droghers.

Wallibn Village is about 1 J miles north of Chateau Belair, off which
exposed anchomge will Wfound in 17 fathoms 150 yards off shore, with
the NW, extreme of Chateau Belair just open. This is the anchorage
recommended for visiting the Soufriere, the landing is indifferent, but
canoes can be hired that land passengers safely.

Coast. — The part 0I the island northward of a line from Chateau

Belair to Black Point on the east coast is known as the Karib Country.

The only land commupication from the east to the west side of the

island is by a track over the Soufriere, practicable for horses, part of

the way. Native boats frequently go around from one side to the other.

De Volet Point— From Wallibn the coast trends NNE. 3i miles to

^e Volet Point, and is remarkable chiefly for its numerous and varied

arp spurs. Morne Ronde Point, 154 feet high, shows as hummock from

le southward, and has a Karib village near it. A chain of small rocks

ts out rA> yards from Larikai Point. De Volet Point stands out promi-

-^.ntly, and near it is the Windsor Forest Arrowroot Estate. There

good landing on the sandy beach in Grand Baleine, J mile eastward

[ De Volet Point, and also good water there. Quashie Point or Cape

olle (locally, Copper Hole) is bold and prominent. Booby Rock is lO*

■I .jti

'•V

478 ST. VINCENT ISLAND.

feet high, with Fancy Pass inside, that may be used by boats in fine
weather. The red shingle roofs of the Fancy Arrowroot Estate show
well when the sun is shining on them.

Porter Point, 08 feet high, is sharp, cliff}'-, and conspicuous. In Owia
Bay there is temporary anchorage in fine weather for small droghera,
which ship arrowroot from the estate.

* O'v^ia Point, the NE. extreme of St. Vincent, is 245 feet high, with
the houses of the estate on its summit. Cow and Calves, a cham of
rocks, the highest elevated 45 feet, lie off this point. Espagnol Point ia
similar in shape to Owia Point, but without the well-defined summit,
and it has mo buildings on it.

East Coast. — From Espagnol Point the coast turns abruptly to the
southward, and as far as Turema Point the country is cut by spurs and
ravines, like those on the north coast. Between Turema Point, 70 feet
high, and Black Point, the spurs are comparatively broadband flat,
rising in gentle slope towards the Soufriere and Morne Garu Moun-
tains. Some of the finest estates in St. Vincent, their buildings and
chimneys conspicuous from seaward, are situated on these slopes.
This part of the coast is lined with bowlders, on which the sea breaks
heavily.

Piers. — There are wooden piers at Eabaka and Greorgetown, from
which sugar is shipped in boats specially constructed for the purpose.
A buoy, to which droghers moor, lies off' each pier.

The piers and buoys are private property.

Q'eorgeto'v^n may be recognized from seaward by its square churdL
tower, built of dark-colored volcanic stone.

Black Point, dark in appearence and well defined, is 54 feet high at
its extremity, and easily recognized as the first point southward of
Georgetown. The whole of the coast describe above between Chateau
Belair and Black Point is free from outlying dangers, and may be ap-
proached to i mile.

Current and Tides. — The main current, within a distance of 5 miles
of St. Vincent, was always found setting to the northward, but within
a mile of the coast tidal influence is felt; J mile southward of Callia-
qua. Cane Garden, and Johnston Points, the ebb stream runs west and
KW. about 2 knots, and the flood to the southward and SE. one knot,
at springs, the streams apparently turning at high and low water by
the shore, but subject to great irregularities from wind and current
The tide sweeps round Kingstown Bay, the flood to the westward, the
ebb to the eastward, sometimes attaining a velocity of nearly 2 kn .

Route to Barbados. — ^The passage from St. Vincent to Barbae ,
in a sailing vessel, is best made by working to windward between
Vincent and Bequia, and w^hen able to weather the Grenadines, stre i
to the south\tard for about 12 hours, and in 3 taeks Bardados will f
ally be reached. The passage, at times, is performed in 36 hours.

THE GRENADINES ADMIRALTY BAY. 479

THE GRENADINES.

The Ghrenadines form a chain of iabout 100 islands, cays, and rocks,
60 miles long north and south, lying between St. Vincent and Grenada.

They, with the adjacent islands, were ^settled by the French about
1650. They are now in the possession of the English Government.

The islands are of moderate height, none exceeding 1,100 feet', and
have no offlying dangers. They may be safely approached either in
the daytime or by moonlight, and have several channels between them.

The eastern edge of the bank, or lOO-fathom line of soundings, is 10
miles from the islands, with depths between ranging from 10 to 25
fathoms, whilst the bank to the westward does not extend nearly so far.

Bequia Islandi the northernmost of the Grenadines, is of irregular
breadth, its coast line forming several bays.

Its population is about 900, all of whom are utterly lazy and apa-
thetic. The island is attached to the government of St. Vincent.

Admiralty Bay, on J;he western side of Bequia Island, is about §
mile deep, and in the inner part near the head, which is narrowed by
shaUows on either side, a vessel would be well sheltered from all winds
except the SW., -and when blowing from this direction, which is an
exceedingly rare occurrence, would, in a measure, be protected from the
sea, as it would be broken in passing over the Belmont Shallow, and
the two banks projecting from the north side of the bay. The inner
part of the bay is not of much extent, but deep enough for any vessel,
and the channel to it between Belmont Shallow, bordering the shore of
the bay on the south and the opposite bank, is clear, distinct, and trace-
able from its darker color and deeper appearance.

This part of the bay could only be entered by a large vessel under
steam or by warping; the water is quite smooth, and small vessels
work in.

Sappliea. — Water is scarce and not good. Poultry may be had occa-
sionally in small quantities, and sometimes fish, but no vegetables.

The Wash Rock lies at about 100 yards off the north point of
Rocky Bay, at \ mile southward of the i^W. point of the island. To
clear it keep the town of Kingstown, or Mount St. Andrew, in the island
of St. Vincent, open of the XW, point of Bequia, bearing N. 11^ E.
(N. 11^ E. mag.). A vessel of large draft from the northward, after

passing the Wash Bock, should not haul up too much to avoid the
3-fathom bank extending SE. from Fort Point, the north extreme of
,he bay, until the leading mark is on, or slie may anchor in 15 or 16
athoms water in the outer part of the bay. AH the banks in this bay,
nth leas than 5 fathoms on them, assist the pilotage by the light-col .
jred water.

Friendship Bay is a circular indentation, on the SE. side of Bequia
island, affording anchorage and shelter to vessels of 10 feet draft. It
s formed by St. Elair Point on the east and the cay of the same name

480 THE GRENADINES.

on the west, the cay being joined by a reef to Bequia. Tbe channel is
midway between the cay and point. This place is frequented by Amw-
iean whaling schooners.

Quatre Isle and Cays. — Quatre Isle, 1^ miles south of Bequia, U
400 feet high, IJ miles in length, narrow, with an indentation on the
NW.^ and one or two projecting points on the east and south, forming
little bays. There are three cays between it and Bequia, and Pige^m
Islet, 220 feet high, lies J mile off its west end. These islets and C4iys
with the south part of Bequia projecting westward, inclose a large
space, with moderately smooth and everywhere deep water, forming an
opeii but safe anchorage at any time, excepting tiie hurricane season^
even then, with steam power, it is as safe as any other place, and there
is no difficulty in leaving it at all times.

There are four channels formed bv these islets and cavs, which may
be taken either way by vessels with steam i)ower, but under sail should
only be used from east to west with a commanding breeze, as the cur-
rents are strong. As a general rule pass in the middle of each chauuelf
except between Quatre and Petit Nevis (325 feet high), where keep
nearer Quatre to avoid a shoal off the SW. end oC Petit Nevis, on
which the sea generally breaks. But as little can be gained either in
distance or position by taking either of these small channels, neither of
them should be used unless in cases of ne(*.essity.

Batto'wia Island is a bold-looking cliffy island, B8G feet above the sea,
with the Bullet, an isolated lump 318 feet high, close to its north end,
shaped somewhat like a conical bullet, which cannot be mistaken. To
the NW. of the Bullet, distant 300 yards, is a breaker, but so near the
land that it could scarcely be touched, unless by a vessel keeping un-
reasonably close. Between the islands of Battowia and Baliceaux is
Church Cay and Reef. The narrow channels carrying 2 fathoms water
on either side of it are fit only for small vessels with a fiiir ^vind.

Baliceaux Island is 1^ miles in length, i to i mile in breadth, and
430 feet high' A 5-fathom bank extends off its western side, on the
edge of which with caution a vessel may anchor, but the water is never
smooth, although there is no danger for vessels of small draft. There
are two shallow patches close in on the NW., and a reef uncovered on
the SW. side of the island. The landing is not very good. A few deer
exist on the island, but none are to be found on any other of this group*

At the north end of the island Is Cactus Cay, iiS feet high, and at a
J mile north of it is Black Rock, 41 feet high, with a 2-fathom shoal
between.

Tides and Currents. — The edge of the bank is about 4 miles e^
ward of the two latter islands, and continues its northern direction .
about 10 miles noi*th of Battowia Islan<l ; it then trends in the direct'
and passes close to Bequia without joining the St. Vincent Bank. 1
space between the two banks is, however, narrow, and not over 300 fe
oms deep. In this channel the current and tide almost always sets

ALL- AWASH ISLET MUSTIQUE' ISLAND. 481

the westward near the middle, but the ebb tide makes to the eastward
in a less depth than 70 fathoms.

At 6h., fall and change, the ebb stream begins to run to the eastward, .
and advantage may be taken of it to work to windward during its con-
tinuance under the lee of Bequia, on the St. Vincent Shore, and between
Bequia and the weather islets or cays ; but a vessel will have little
chance of making easting when the flood and current are setting west-
ward. When the ebb stream sots to windward along the shore of Be-
quia Island against a strong trade wind, a heavy confused sea will be
^ound in this channel.

AU-a'v^ash Islet, li miles east of the Pillory Rocks, is the prominent
islet or rock called All-awash, 223 feet high, steep-to, and which can be
passed on either side. A vessel can work to windwainl here with the
assistance of the ebb tide.

Pillory Islets and Rocks. — Close oif the north end of Mustique is
Double Rock, 20 feet high, and J mile tarther is Single Rock, 15 feet
high; the channel between the rocks has from 7 to 8 fathoms water.
The Pillories are three islets in a WSVV* and EXE. direction, over a
space of about § mile. They are from f to a mile north of Mustique;
the yestern islet is 6/> feet high, the middle «S5 feet, and the easternmost
and largest 190 feet. Between these islets and Single Bock is a narrow
passage carrying 3 J fathoms water. The above channels may be taken
by small vessels from east to west, but only in cases of urgent necessity.

A group of rocks partly uncovered, and the largest 70 feet high, lies
N. 680 E. (N. 680 E. mag.) of the Great Pillory; they are named the
Pillory Rocks, and between them and the islets there is a clear channel
i mile wide, with 8 and 9 fathoms water; but there is a sunken rock
with 8 feet of water (m it, and which generally breaks S. ()2o E. (S. 62^
E. mag.) distant § mile from the Great Pillory; and at only ^ mile from
the Great Pillory in the same line is another rock awash, and always to
be seen. It will be prudent to give these rocks a wide berth.

Mnstiqne Island is the larger island of that name, 2^ miles in length
one in breadth, and at its south end 475 feet high. The channel be-
tween the Mustiques has 7 fathoms water, and is clear of danger with the
exception of the reefs extending 300 yards from Petit Coy and the SW.
end of Mustique; as also the IJ-fathom shoal, on which the sea breaks,
lying ea^, distant J mile from the south end of the island.

In anchoring in Grand Bay, on the west side of the island, a vessel
should pass west ahd northward of the Montezuma Shoal, and enter be-
tween it and the north point of the bay, or make short tacks in the south
part of the bay.

The east side of the island is skirted by reefs, and off it is Rabbit Islet
srith the Brooks, 60 feet high, and other rocks; but as there is no an-
horage a vessel should avoid this side of the island.

There are (tattle and sheep on Mustique Island, but if fresh beef is re-
ijuired, notice is retiuired by the manager to catch and kill the animals.
18402 31

482 THE GRENADINES.

Montezuma Shoal is aboat 350 yards iu diameter, with only 3 feet
water on it, and lies ^ mile from the north extreme of Grraud Bay, or the
middle point of the island. This shoal is extremely dangerous, as when
the water is smooth it does not break, and can not be seen until too
late to avoid it. A vessel may also anchor north of the shoal off Chel-
tenham.

Petit Mastiqae is '340 feet high and about ^ mile in length. A rock
uncovered lies 200 yards off the south point of the islet, and another
rock one foot above water, 800 yards southwestward of its west end,
leaving a narrow channel between the latter and the island. The Petit
Coy, 75 feet high, and surrounded by a reef, lies at about J mile off the
north extreme of the islet. The water is shoal for about 300 yards north
of it.

Savan Islets form a group of small islets and rocks extending north
and south over the space of a mile. The largest islet is about 000 yards
long, 200 yards wide, 133 feet high, and, being covered with grass, has
a bright green appearance when seen in the sun.

Savan Rock, lOo feet high, is remarkable for having whitish sides and
somewhat the appearance of the Sail Rock, but from its being the south-
ern of this group it can not be mistaken for the isolated Sail Bock.
These islets and rocks are more or less skirted by reefs, and rise from
a bank having from 4 to 10 fathoms water on it. Temporary anchorage
will be found for small vessels NW. of the largest islet, but there is al-
ways a swell. The channel between this group and Petit Cannonan is
about 3J miles in breadth, and clear of danger.

Petit Cannouan is 3^ miles northward of Cannonan. It is 6<K) yards
long, 400 yards wide, and rises 222 feet high, with 10 to 16 fathoms
water around it. Between it and Cannouan there are from 17 to 2S
fathoms and no danger.

Cannouan Island is of an irregular outline, 3| miles in length north
and south, and its northern part IJ miles in breadth, where it rises tea
peak 853 feet above the sea, but the middle part is not so high, or in one
plaee more than J mile across; the southern part projects westward and
forms on that side Charlestown Bay, where there is anchorage. The
island is more or less bordered by reefs, and on the SE. and south sides
they extend off to about J mile.

Both the NW. and SW. points of the island are bold and may be
passed at the distance of 200 yards; but it is not advisable to go so
near the NW. i)oint in a sailing vessel, as the peak checks the wind and
causes flaws and eddies, but this will not occur near the SW. pr
The popiUation is about 500. A large vessel should anchor in Cha
town Bay in 17 fathoms water, sand, with the north points in linr
90 E. (N. 90 E. mag.) and the SW. point S. 51o W. (8. 51o W. mi
Small vessels may anchor close inshore. Within the 15-fathom lir
soundings the water shoals suddenly.

To the northward of Friendship Point, the SE. extreme of the i&i

MAYERO ISLAND. . 483

there is secure anchorage for small vessels inside a sandy &ay and the
reef. It should be approached from the SW. with smooth water. If
the wind be fresh, a vessel should not attempt to pass Friendship Point,
as it fronts the channel formed by an open space in the reef east of it,
or to enter by this channel ; and as this anchorage could only be resorted
to on any particular occasion, a person with local knowledge should be
obtained. Anchorage will also be found westward of Dove Cays.

About § mile X. 67^ VV. (N. 67^ W. mag.) of the X W. point of Cannouan >^
Island is a small bank with 6J fathoms water on it. Vessels of large
draft should avoid it, as with the heavy swell, and the doubt which
always exists as to whether the shallowest wat^^r is absolutely known,
it will be more prudent.

Mayero Island. — The next group southward consists of Mayero
Island, the Catholic Islet and Bocks, and Tobago Cays and Eeefs. Ma-
yero Island, 347 feet high, is the largest, about 1^ miles in length, nearly
a mile in extreme breadth, and contains about 260 inhabitants, who live 4l

by fishing and raising a few vegetables. Catholic Islet and Rocks are |

about one mile XVV. of Mayero Island; the islet is 160 feet, and the
rocks, at about ^ mile to the S W. of it, 77 feet high ; the passage between
them has 6 fathoms water, and may be taken with a fair wind in cases
of necessity.

At 400 yards XW. of the Xorth Catholic Rocks is a shoal with 3^ fath-
oms water on it, which must be avoided by vessels of large draft. A
rock 8 feet above water and a small sand cay, called tlie Dry Shingle,
are connected to the islet on the east side at the distance of J mile by
a bank which encircles it. Between Mayero Islaud and the Dry Shin-
gle is a good channel nearly 600 yards in width and with 5 fathoms
water, for vessels from the northward for Mayero Anchorage.

Anchorage. — Good anchorage in 6 or 7 fathoms water may be had
on a bank extending about 3 mile westward from Mayero Island. The
best and most roomy berth for leaving with any wind is near the edge
of the bank with the middle of the island bearing X. 08° B. (X. 67^ B. j^

mag.), but as the trade wind is almost always between XB. and SB., a >

vessel may anchor much closer in out of the swell, taking care, however, ^

to avoid a 3-foot shoal at 300 yards off the middle point of the island. i

The XW. point of Cannouan Island well open of the XW. point of -^

Mayero leads to the westward of the shoal; the two points in line lead ;>

on it. 1

In working for this anchorage, keep on the parallel of Mayero, and ;

0 not open the channel between it and Union Island unless the tide is "[

jetting to the northward, i

On the east side of Mayero Island is a secure anchorage for small ves-
els in from 6 to 9 fathoms water, under cover of the extensive reefs

hich surround this side of the island. The passage in is from the
ottthward between the reefs on the east and those skirting the shore
f the island.

- S'5

. 1

484 . THE GRENADINES.

Tobago *Cay8. — At 1| miles eastward of Mayero Island are four
small islets called Tobago Cays. They extend over a spa^e of about f
mile; three of them are nearly in line north and south, tlie two north-
ernmost being the largest, and the middle one 150 feet high; the fourth
islet is east of the middle one. They are within a semicircular reet^
just awash, named the Horseshoe, the extremes of which are nearly 2J
miles north and south of each other. There are two small sand banks
about 2 feet above water rising from the reefs at about ^ mile 8W. and
SE. of the islets. Tlie space between these cays and Mayero Island is
also filled with reefs having narrow channels between them.

Good anchorage for small vessels, in smooth water, will be found
under the lee of the cays and between them and the Horseshoe Reef, the
latter forming a perfect breakwater. The route to tihe anchorage is
from the northward between Baline Reef at the NVV. end of the Horse-
shoe and Mayero Island, keeping nearer the latter, to avoid a rock with
6 feet water on it, lying S. 23^ W. (S. 22^ W. mag.) 500 yards from the
Baline Reef. Small vessels may pass between Baline Reef and the
NW. end of the Horseshoe. A vessel may leave the anchorage by the
channels to the southward, but a sailing vessel can not well get to it by
them.

"Worlds End Reef. — The most eastern danger belonging to the group
of the Tobago Cays and reefs is the Worlds End Reef, which lies in an
ESE. direction, and its eastern extreme distant nearly 2i miles from the
highest of the islets. It is Ij^ miles in length, about f mile in breadth,
and dangerous for sailing vessels to be near in light winds, as the cur-
rent sets strong over it. It has probably received its name from the
fishermen having a long pull to reach it from the cays.

Egg Reef and Sandy Cay. — Close to the westward of Worlds End
is Vjgg Reef, se])arated by a narrow passage, and westward of the lat-
ter is sandy cay with a tree on it, encompassed by a re^f above water,
with channels on either side of it. The cay is 6 feet high and the tree
20 feet. These channels are narrow, deep, and may be taken in case of
necessity. There is anchorage sheltered from the north under the lee
of Egg Reef. Vessels should, however, avoid the vicinity of the whole
of these reefs eastward of Tobago Cays, as the tides are strong.

Sail Rock is a small islet or rock 203 feet high, rising from the SfcJ.
end of a small bank with 0 fathoms water oVer it, immediately within
the 20-fathom line of soundings. It is [V^ miles eastward of thCL Worlds
End Reef, (•lear of danger, and bottom will be found on the edge of the
great bank at the distance of 5 miles eastward.

The widest and best channel to the westward when near and soui
ward of tlie Sail li<:>ck is between the reefs bordering Little St. Vine
and Prune Island nortli of them; or, if more convenient, a vessel n
pass southward of the Worlds End Reef, and between Union Isk
and the Mayero group. But if a more northerly course is preferi
the channel between the latter group and Cannouan Island may

UNION ISLAND ^PRUNE ISLAND. 485

taken. lu porsuiiig this latter route a vessel should pass about 800
yards northward of the Ohannel Bock, which lies in mid-channel, is
somewhat flat, and 8 feet above water.

Half a mile SW. of the Channel Bock is a shoal awash, with deep
water on either side of it, but the passage north of the Channel Bock
is wide and clear, and should be taken. The flood tide runs through
these channels at from 2 to 2^ mUes an hour, and the ebb to the east-
ward at from one to 1^ miles an hour.

Union Island lies SW. of Mayero Islands, and is the southernmost
of those islands attached to the government of St. Vincent, The pop-
ulation in 1861 was 477. It is more or less skirted by reefs which con-
nect to it Frigate Islet, distant about § mile on the south, and Bed Islet,
140 feet high, close to it on the east. About J mile from its north side
is a small sand cay.

Chatham Bay, on the west side, affords fair anchorage for large ves-
sels in 17 fathoms water, sand; but care should be taken not to go far
into the bay, as there is a small shoal with G feet water on it at about
J mile from the shore, and a little inside the depth of 10 fathoms.
Small vessels may anchor farther in on tlie north side of the bay. There
are no dangers in entering the bay, which should be from the north-
ward on the port tack, (rive the XW. i)oint of the island a berth of
about 300 yards and pass close to a remarkable small islet, 52 feet high,
at the north point of the bay, and when abreast it, with good way on,
siiorten sail and the vessel will shoot into the anchorage. Temporary
ancliorage may be had to the SW. of Frigate Islet in 8 fathoms of
water, if wishing to communicate with the villages on the SB. side of
the island. Small vessels may go close to Frigate Islet into 2 or 3
fathoms.

Clifton Cove, at the east end of the island, is a secure smooth an-
chorage for small vessels, close to the NE. of a hirge house. The chan-
nel into it is close to tlie reef which ])rotects the anchorage.

Supplies. — In Chatham Bay fish can be procured with the seine in
great abundance. Firewood is plentiful, but no water. The inhabit-
ants are entirely dependent on what is collected in tanks during the
rainy season.

Prone Island, about ^ mile in length and 164 feet high, lies one mile

east of Union Island. Nearly midway between them, or rather more

than i mile west of the SW. end of I^rune Island, is a shoal nearly

^wash, with channels of 4 fathoms water on either side of it, that may

>e taken by small vessels, but not recommended for general use.

Prune Island is nearly surrounded by reefs, and on the north side

they extend off nearly J mile. The navigable channel between the N W.

md of the reefs and those extending from Union Island is less than J

mile wide, with from 4 to 13 fathoms water. The route through from

lie northward is mid-channel, and westward of the shoal nearly awash

^est of the SW. end of Prune Island.

"»

.i».'

T I .

*»

486

THE GRENADINES.

Frigate Island, 250 feet high, is connected by a bank and reefs to
the south part of Union Island.

Carriacou is 6§ miles in length in a NE. and SW. direction, and 2^
miles extreme breadth, with its highest part reaching 960 feet above the
sea. The eastern and southern sides are more or less bordered by reefs
above water, which protect shallow anchorages inside them. The west-
ern side of the island is clearer, and the water deeper, and there are two
good anchorages for large vessels. The island exports a small quantity
of sugar and cotton, and carries on a. small trade with Grenada and
Trinidad, but depends mainly on the former for its own supplies.

Wood is plentiful at Carriacou, but water is scarcely to be had, a«
there are no running streams, and the inhabitants depend on rain for
their supply.

Tjrell Bay, called also Southwest or Great Oar^nage Bay, at the west
end of the island, is an indentation formed by two points, one projecting
to the I^W.j the other to the SW. The inner part of the bay is circular
and more than i mile in diameter.

Anchorage. — Large vessels may anchor in the jiiorthern and outer
part of the bay, in from 15 to o fathoms water, sandy bottom, at about
400 yards from the shore; small vessels anchor in the inner part in
from 5 to 2 fathoms. A reef extends to the northward from the south
side of the bay for nearly 400 yards, and a shoal with IJ fathoms water
on it lies in the northern part, both within the line of anchorage for
large vessels. Small vessels can pass between and above them almost
up to the beach.

In the northern part of this bay, inside the low land, is a lagoon
nearly J mile in length, with from 4 to 26 feet of water in it. The
entrance to it, called the Carenage, is through a lane of deep water
northward of the 1 J-fathom shoal in the north part of the bay.

The west point of Carriacou is foul for neaily 200 yards; % mile off
this point are the Sister Rocks, 73 feet high, with a shoal extending S.
670 E. (S. 680 E. mag.) for nearly 100 yards.

Hillsboro Bay or G-rand Ance. — From Cistern Pointy projecting
a little northward from the west point oi* the island, the shore curves
to the eastward and nortliward, forming Hillsboro Bay, on the shore of
which stands the little village of that name, and off it is the principal
anchorage in Carriacou. Xearly ^ mile northward of Cistern Point is
Mabouya Island, 13.") feet high, about the same distance easStward of
which is a low sandy islet with trees 30 feet high. At one mile N. iv4<^
E. (N. 53^ E. mag.) of the east end of Sandy Islet, and the same distai
from the village is the small isle of Jack a Dan, 33 feet high. A si
with 4 feet water on it lies between Jack a Dan and Craigstone Po
east of it, rather nearer the point than the islet, leaving a nan
cliaunel can-ying 7 fathoms water between Jack a Dan and the sh<
The passage between the shoal and the shore has 16 feet in it.

A bank IJ miles in extent east and west, with 5 to 7 fathoms w«

HIX-LSBORO BAY DIRECTIONS — LITTLE MAKTINll

on it, lies one mile NW. of the north part of the island, w1
may anchor if necessary.

Directions. — The north point of Carria«ou is clear, and me
at a distance of 400 yards. For HilUboro Bay a vessel ma;
to Jack *a Dan on its west side, and anchor in 14 fathom
aand, and coral, with the isle bearing N, W^ "W. (N. 11^ W
tant 000 yards, and Sandy Isle on with the Sister Itocks. ]
a vessel may anchor farther to the eiistward, but not in
fathoms, as Irom this depth the water suddenly 8hoals.to
and the wind sometimes comes from the WW., causing a sy
vessels can go in almost to the beach. Landing is exceed
except when interrapted by the >'\\'. swell. Anchorage foi
may also be taken in 17 fathoms, with Jack a Dan bearir
(S. 46° E, mag.), distant one mile.

Watering and O-rand Bays, on the east side of €ai
protected by reefs, which are uncovered and ."tkirt the w
aide of the ishmd at from ^ t«> a mile distant. The niirthe:
Limlair or Watering Bay, the southern, Grand Bay, ott' tw
the same name, and they afford anchorage for small vess*
draft. There are three channels for entering, but that I
reefs at the north end, northward of the dry sand bank, is
The two -sottthem channels, although deep breaks in the n
ficnlt to enter without local knowledge.

Little Martiniqae, 74.5 feet high lies about -i miles east^
north point of Carriacon, and J mile north of it is Little i
275 feet high. Off the S\V. side of Little Martinique ar
Little Tobago and Pota, the former :iOO and the latter 80 fee
the NW". side of Little Ht. Vincent are two sand banks 3
water, lying, respectively, at a lung ^ mile ami mile distanc
easternmost a reef, uncovered, sweejis round the whole eas
the island. At 400 yards S. 32^ W. (S. 31o W. mag.)
Tobago is "a rock, with 1^ fathoms water on it, and S. li'"
W. mag.) 3 mile from the western sand bank, are some shi
with 2 fathoms over them.

The channel between the Carriacon Coast Reefs and the is
Tobago is SWt yards' wide. In using it from the 8K. keeji oi
breadth of the channel from the edge of the reef, and when
of the NW. part of Little Tobago a vessel will be to the n
'he 1^ fathom rock. Between the rock and the reef there ai
0 fethoms water, but the tides in this channel are very str
i not recommended. Fota Chaunel, or that between Lii
nd Fota, although narrow, is better than the former. A
ttle above wat^r extends rather more than .50 yarils north
'obago.

Between Fota and Little Martini<iHe is apa^sage carrying
rater, but it is not so good as the Fota Channel.

488 THE GRENADINES.

Cautiqn. — ^As the tide sets fully 3 knots through the above channels,
it is necessary in working through from the NW. that the tide should
be setting to the SE ; and in standing to the southward do not ap-
proach too near the Carriacou Reefs, as the sea runs heavily on them.

Anchorage. — ^At about i mile off the N W. side of Little Martinique,
protected by Little St. Vincent, the sand banks,' and reef surrounding
these islands, there is most excellent anchorage in from 8 to 12 fathoms
water, taking care to avoid the 2.frtthom shoals, S. 12^ W. (S. 11^ W.
mag.) f mile from the west sand bank.

Martinique Channel — Between Union Island and E^efs and those
of Carriacou and Little St. Vincent is a clear channel carrying not less
than 7 fathoms water, except on the 5 fathom bank off the NW. end
of Carriacou, and which is recommended in preference to the channels
between Carriacou and Little Martinique.

Anchorage. — There is anchorage for small vessels close under the
west side of Frigate Islet, and large vessels will find temporary anchor-
age to the SW. of the islet.

Large and Frigate islets are the largest of a number of islets and
rocks, which, with Saline, White, Musliroom, Rose, and the Bonaparte,
form a group at the south end of Carriacou Island. Between the Bona
parte Eocks there is a narrow channel 9 fathoms deep, but a rock almost
dry lies a little to the northward of the fairway, which renders it unlit
to pass through. In the channel between Large IslQt and the Bona-
I)arte Rocks, southward of it, is a shoal stretching to the northward
from the latter, and one with 3 fathoms water on it at ^ mile to the
NW. of the rocks, and nearly the same distance SW. of the west end
of Large Islet. The current runs with greixt strength, which renders
it dangerous to use this channel or to approach the rocks on the
eastern side, unless ip cases of extreme necessity. A rock one foot out
of water lies 250 yards westward of Large Islet.

Frigate Channel, between Large and Frigate islets, is narrow, but
clear of danger, and may be used bj^ passing to the southward of Rose
Rock, 32 feet high. There is also a channel carrying 5 fathoms water
between Rose Rock and Frigate Islet.

Saline Channels. — The channel between Frigate and Saline Islets is
1,400 yards wide, carries 18 fathoms water, and maybe used from east
to west by any sized ship. A rock one foot above wat^r lies NW. 400
yards from the NW. point of Frigate Islet. There is also a narrow
channel with 4 fathoms water in it northward of Saline Islet, between
, it and Cassada Rocks (20 feet high) and White Islet. Also a chann<
to 10 fathoms deep on the north side of ('assada Rocks aud AVhit^ Is,
and the reef adjoining them. In using this latter channel pass abc
i mile westward of "White Islet and southward of Mushroom Islet. T
latter may be passed close to on the south side.

There is a narrow passage to the northward between the Mushro
Islet and Little Mushroom, but rocks above water lie off the SW. tu\
of Carriacou, at the distance of 300 yards.

'T»''

DE CAILLE AND RONDE ISLETS TII>ES AND CURRENTS. 489

Caution. — The above chaunels can be taken only from east to west^
with the asaal trade winds, except by steamers. Small vessels having*
local knowledge, with the assistance of the tide, may work througli
them.

Anchorage for small vessels, in 5 fathoms water, will be found in the
N W. bay of Larj^e Islet, 207 yards from the shore. Also on the XW.
side of Frigate Islet. Between Saline Islet and Cassada Rocks and Reef
there is good shelter for small vessels, taking care not to be set to lee-
ward on White Islet.

De Caille and Ronde Islets. — Rather more than 1^ miles to the
northward of the London Bridge Islets or Bocks (75 feet high), off the
NW. end of Grenada, is De Oaille Islet, 242 feet high, and close to the
north of it Ronde Islet, 518 feet high. There is a narrow channel between
them having 3 fathoms of water, but which breaks during strong winds.
There are passages to the Sister Racks to the west\«ird, and also between
them and Ronde Islet. The Sisters are two groups of islets or rocks,
16<) and 85 feet high, at about J and nearly a mile, respectively, west of
the SW. end of Ronde Islet.

Between Ronde and Diamond Islet, or Kick'era Jenny, ddS feet high,
is a passage less than J mile wide, carrying 7 fatlioms the least water.
In the center of the channel there is a deep hole with 39 fathoms wat^r
in it. The tide runs strong through this channel. The Tantes, 250 feet
high, lie 1^ miles eastward of the north part of Ronde Islet, free from
hidden danger, and may be passed clf)se to on either side. The chan-
nel between them and Ronde Islet is deej) and clear, but the tide being
strong, it is not recommended. »

Anchorage, with the usual trade wind, for small vessels, in conven-
ient depths, will be found un<ler the lee of De Caille Islet, in the south
and N\V. bays of Ronde Islet, and on the west side of the Tantes.

Tides and Currents. — The strength, duration, and general direction
of the tides among the Grenadines are very much influenced by local
causes; but generally in the course of twentyfbur hours there are two
tides each way. It is generally high water at full and change at 3*»,
the tide seldom rising and falling as mui'h as one foot. The flood or
tide settling to the westward is aided and accelerated by the westerly
equatorial current, and in proportion as this takes place the ebb stream
to the eastward is retarded or overcome.

The direction of the tides is governed to a great extent by the incli-
nation of the trade winds, which, although they do not vary much from
east, still grejitly affect the tide.

The flood tide is of longer duration, usually, than the ebb, and in mid-
3haunel will sometimes, aided by the current, run all day, while close
X) the islands the ebb tide may be found running to the eastward.

When the ebb tide runs against a strong trade wind, a heavy, con-
fused sea is raised.

The average strength of the tides in the channels is about 2 knots

' - -/'J

t I..J

- ■•■4"..]

Ii •«

:?^

490 GRENADA ISLAND.

and in some places 3 knots an hour. Sometimes, however, aided by the
current, the flood tide rushes through the passages at the rate of 4
knots.

GRENADA.

G-renada Island was lirst settled by the French in 1650, and has
been since 1783 an English colony. Population, 42,000.

The land is of volcanic origin, and is traversed by a chain of moun-
tains oi irregular height. The island has the reputation of being a
healthier residence than most of the other West India Islands.

The appearance of the island is that of a gradual rise of hills from
the shore to the mountains in the center, resembling in its principal
features other of the West India volcanic islands, but dissimilar to
those of calcareous formation^ such as Barbados, Barbuda^ or the Baha-
mas. There are thrQg lakes, or rather large ponds, in the island, formed
as basins, having all the appearance of extinct craters. That of Grand
Etang, 7 miles from St. George and 1,759 feet above the sea, is 13 acres
in extent, 16 feet deep, and tlie source of the Great and largest river.

Grenada is a weU- watered country. Every valley has a stream, and
the larger ones are never dry. During rainy weather they sometimes be-
come impassable, and at various times accidents have occurred to per-
sons trying to cross them. Nearly all the beds of the rivers are full of
lai'ge, slippery boulders of water- worn trap rock with deep holes be-
tween them, and the beaches where the streams run into the sea are
generally soft. Horses occasionally get deep into these quicksands.
These streams are almost all used as the principal motive power for
making sugar.

The average quantity of rain falling per annum, from observations by
Dr. Stephenson, is 70 inches. No long continuous rain seems to occur,
but showers constantly, and at times every five minutes, with bright
sunshine between.

During July, August, and September tlie temperature in the low
grounds is from Sij^ to 90^. From December to March it is a little
cooler, and at night the thermometer is sometimes down to 72^ and not
above 80^ in the day. The maximum temperature in the low grounds
for five years was 89^, the minimum 77°, and the medium 83°. The
hottest season is from June to October, when the thermometer ranges
from 770 to 880.

Tlie island has the character of possessing a healthy climate, but it
does not appear to have any advantage in this respect over the otl
West India Islands. Fevers are often prevalent in all stages, in
slightly bilious to yellow fever. Deaths from the latter are by no me«
infrequent, and persons who have been some time in the island are b
exempt from them.

The island rises from a bank on which are the Grenadines and wh.,
extends to the SW. of the island and probably joins the Margai*^

WINDS TIDES DIHECTIONS.

Bank. Tbe lOO-fothom line of soundinga i» at an average
7 miles Irom the east coast of the islaud and from the islets t
of it. The bank has about ^T fathoms Dear the edge, de<
about 20 fathoms at ^ mile from the shore. Tbe western t
baiik is much nearer, averaging only i mile from tbe island.

It is Buriounded by re«fs and banks, which make off from
limiting the harbors, thus milking tbe pilotage almost every^
intricate, and necessitating great cantion when approaching

(jovemment of (Jrenada and Carriacou la vested in a g
chief, an executive council, and a legislative council.

Winds. — The trade wind blows almost without interru
between NE. and SE., sometimes very fresh indeed; but hm
of very rare occurrence.

Tides and Cnrrents. — The general set of tbe current is t
ward, and in approaching its shores this current must I
allowed for.

Between Grenada and Trinidad the westerly current nij
cially strong, ranging from 24 to 72 miles a day, when tbe trt
height.

Off' the bank to the southward tbe current generally sets
hour to tbe westward. Ou the bank it is checked by th
which set« round the S\V, point of the island and along
shore, but which is oidy felt for two or three hours, while 1
and flood tide run for eight or nine hours to the westward.
Bacolet, ou the SE. side of tbe island, where the ebb scarce
the current united to the flood stream runs down sfi-ong fo
and weak for two hours, while the ebb tid(^ overcomes tbe ci
for four hours.

During the wet season, from June till the fall of the year
often entirely overcome by tbe current, probably caused bj
discharge*! from tbe South American litvers. Therefore a sa
from St. (ieorge to Grenville Bay should go round the nt
the island, as it is scarcely possible to work imat Grand Bn
Scarcely any tide or current is felt under the lee of Grens
any, it is qaite uneerttiin, except close alongshore, where
weak. The water in the southern harbors is unaffected by 1

Caatton. — Very stnmg currents have been met with totli
of the islands from Grenada to Guadeloupe. In May a XN
nf 2 knots per hour has been encountered, while off the SW
Lucia nearly a 6-knot current w;is met.

Cireetiona — Vessels api>roacbing Grenada fi-om the XE. i
against tbe effect of the equatorial current, or indraft in
ibbean Sea, which, meeting the NE. shore of South Americ
joncentrated and passes Grenada with accelerated force; it
dightly ranniug across the Atlantic, if far south, but when ii
:ade of Barbados will be generally found setting to the WS

492 GRENADA ISLAND.

one to sometimes 3 miles an hour, for which an allowance must be
made. Having made the NE. part of the island during daylight, and
bound to St. George in the SW., a vessel may pass through either of
the channels north of Grenada, or run round its south shore and work
up from the SW. point to the town. The three main channels between
Grenada and Carriacou are deep, safe, and can not be mistaken; they
are always used by those well acquainted with the navigation.

The first channel, commencing from Grenada, is between Levera, a
conical shaped island 343 feet high, lying close off the XE. point of
Grenada, and London Bridge, a remarkable islet of rock, 75 feet high,
with a hole in it, two smaller islets near it, and a rock uncovered at 400
yards to the SW. of it. A bank with 6 to 10 fathoms water surrounds
these rocks, and X. 82^ E. (X. 81° E. mag.) distant One mile from them
is a bank with 8 fathoms water over it. In taking this channel steer
midway between the rocks and Levera Island, and the least depth of
water will be 17 fathoms.

The channel north of London Bridge Eocks, or between them and Isle
de CaUle is clear of danger, and carries 23 fathoms close to the latter.
In passing through give the London Bridge Rocks a berth of more than
^ mile.

The channel between Diamond Islet or Kick'em Jenny and the islets
south of the island of Carriacou is 5 miles wide, clear of danger, and
caiTies over the bank from 25 to 30 fathoms water. A shoal with 16
feet wat^r over it lies S. 76o W. (S. 75© W. mag.) 800 yards from the
Bonaparte Rocks, at the south end of the Carriacou Group, which is the
only danger to be avoided.

After passing through either of the above channels, the west coast
of Grenada may be approached to the distance of i mile until off the
town of St. George, the only dangers near which, for a vessel of more
than 18 feet draft, are the Annas and Three-Fathom Shoals, rising ftom
s, bank, extending from the south point of entrance to the harbor, which
will be avoided by not going farther to the southward" than to bring Port
George Point on, with the south end of the military hospital bearing
S. 850 E. (S. SG"^ E. mag.) until the harbor master arrives on board; or
a vessel may round Fort George Point at a distance of 400 yards and
anchor.

Should a vessel prefer to run round the south end of the island, keep
from 1 J to 2 miles from the coast to avoid the shallow ground which
extends off aU the southern ])oints of the island until near the Porpoise
Rocks, off Prickly Point, which may be passed at the distance of ^n
but in rounding Glover Island and Saline Point, which is bold, i)crp
dicular, and 100 feet liigh, in a heavy ship, keej) fully one mile of
avoid the curve of the coast bank of 21 feet between the island i
point, and the Seringapatam Shoal. After passing Saline Point,
called from a salt pond, Mcnmt Moritz open of St. Eloy Point will L
to the northward clear of all the shoals, or keep without the 10-fatl*

LONDON BRIDGE ROCKS ST. GEORGE. 493

line of soundings; the eye will assist, as under that depth the bottom
here is easily seen.

London Bridg^e Rocks. — These rocks form a small cluster, one of
them being 75 feet high, with a hole through it, and having two smaller
ones near it. There is a rock just uncovered lying 400 yards SW. of it*

St. George, the principal town in the island, stands on a point of
laud ranging from 115 to 180 feet high, which forms the harbor called
the Car^nage, in a bay of the same name. The bank otf the town is
intersected by veins of deep water. It affords, however, excellent
anchoring ground, but it is necessary to guard against the inconven-
ience of anchoring in tlie deep-water holes.

A ground swell sets in here from the month of Koveuiber to March,
sometimes causing. a swell in the Cai^nage. The ground swell takes
place in the same months throughout all the islands. The locality of
the harbor or Oarenage may be easily known by the extensive fortified
heights immediately above it, which reach 750 feet above the sea.

On its Sfci. side is a large indentation with shallow water, the south-
ern part of which, separated fi*om the northern by a point of land, is
somewhat circular. Although small, the harbor is secure^ and is
entered by vessels of the largest draft, through a deep channel carry-
ing from 23 to 11 fathoms water to the anchorage. The harbor master
acts as pilot. Tlie usual anchorage for vessels of war is in the bay.

St. George is healthy and recommended as a good port in which ta
give liberty.

Sailing vessels from the southward whose draft will admit of cross-
ing the Annas Shoal should make a tack into Grand Anse Bay, to take
advantage of the flaws of wind which occasionally come from the SE.,
and which enable them to lay well up for the Car^nage.

Anchcwr when 200 yards off the coal wharf, or in the middle of the
Car^nage. If intending to make any stay, it will be requisite to moor
open hawser to the SW., as there is but little room to swing at single
anchor. In leaving the harbor it will be necessary to place the vessel's
head in the right direction before starting, and in a vess(»l of 26 feet
draft the elbows of the channel should be buoved.

Vessels of large draft and men of war generally anchor outside of
Fort George Point. A good berth will be fimnd J mile off* shore in 7
fathoms of water, saiuly bottom, with Fort George flagstaff bearing
S. 830 E. (S. 840 K. mag.) and Boismorice Point N. 5^ W. (X. <P W.
mag.).

Coal and Supplies. — Facilities for coaling are poor. There is not a
Mifficient stock of coal in store to supply a ship, and the 00 or 70 tons
on hand in St. George is of the quality known as blacksmith's coal,
and un^t for steaming purposes. Water can be had in any quantity at
the watering place at the quay, but vessels.must use their own boats
bo bring it on board, as there are no water lighters. Water, if taken,
J paid for ticcording to the tonnage. A hydrant for watering ships has

494 GRENADA ISLAND.

been established at the foot of Halifax street. Provisioas to a limited
extent can be procured at an advance on New York prices. Fruit is
plentiful, but exorbitant prices are charged for it. Ice is brought in
small sailing vessels from Trinidad, but the supply is by no means cer-
tain.

The authority to visit is th6 lieutenant-governor.

There is one general hospital, also one for the insane. These are
apparently w^ll conducted.

Steamers leave for the United States about every two weeks.

Pilotage is not compulsory.

Harbor dues, 36 cents per ton.

Telegraph. — St. George, is connected by the cable of the West India
and Panama Telegraph Company with St. Vincent, on the north and
Trinidad on the south.

Light. — Fort George is a fixed white light, elevated 192 feet above
high water, and should be visible, in clear weather, from a distance of
10 miles.

The illuminating apparatus is dioptric, or by lenses, of the fifth order.

The lighthouse, 10 feet high and constructed of brick, is erected on
the extremity of the northern bastion of Fort George.

The Annas and Three Fathom Shoals. — From the south point of
entrance to the harbor, a bank about J mile in breadth, with an 'aver-
age depth of 4 fathoms on it, extends westward for about f mile. There
are, however, shoaler patches on it with 19 and 20 feet water over them.
The Annas Shoal, the N W. of these, is ^ mile from Fort George Point.
A square buoy, surmounted by a stafi' and cone, is moored in 19 feet
water on the SW. part of this shoal. The south extreme of the pouit
on with the south end of the military hospital, bearing S. 85^ E. (S.
SQ^ E. mag.), leads rather less than 200 yards to the north of it. The
Three Fathom Banks are from 200 to 400 yards south of the Annas,
and 400 yards southeastward of them are other patches, having only
16 feet water on it. The right extreme of Fort George Point on with
the governor's house X. 59^ E. (X. 58^ B. mag.) leads to the southward
of them.

Tides. — It is high water, full and change, in St. George Harbor at
2h. 40m.; springs rise IJ feet, and neaps 8 inches. An extraordinary
high tide may rise 2J feet.

Buoys. — A red and white square buoy is moored in 18 feet of water
with Fort George Point bearing IS". 69o E. (N. 68° E. mag.) distant 220
yards. A spar buoy surmounted by a cask painted in red and wl
stripes is moored in 19 feet with Fort George Point bearing X. dS^
(X. 64^ W. mag.) 200 yards. These buoys should be left to port in en
ing the Car^nage. Two si)ar buoys, each surmounted by a c*
painted white, are moored- in depths of 19 feet, one with Fort Gee
Point N. 420 W. (N. 43° W. mag.) distant 400 yards, the other \
that point X. 81° W. (X. 820 W. mag.) 550 yards. These two br
should be left on the starboard hand.

LONG POINT — PRICKLY BAY. 495

- Long Point — Two miles SW. of tte entrance to St. George Harbor
is Ijook or Goat Poiot, to the northward of which is an indentation in
tlie coast called Grand Ajise Bay,

Long Point Sboal is ^K) yards west of Long Point, having only 2
feet of water on it, and on which the aea generally breaks. In approach-
ing St. George Harbor from the southward, the eastern extremity of
fort George Point kejit on with the government house, a large red
brick building on the lirst ridge bearing S. 57^ E. (N. Sfio K. mag,),
will lead clear of the shoal. Thi-re is a narrow channel between Long
Point and tbe shoal, bnt it sliould only be used in case of necessity,

Ancfaorogo. — TItere is good anchorage in o or 6 fathoms of water on
tUe bank extending to the SW. ft'om Iji>ng Point Shoal, at rattier more
than a mile to the NE. of Saline Point, and a long ^ mile from the
shore. This anchorage is the resort of the American whaling vessels in
bad weather, or for the purpose of boiling oil during the season from
Febniary to May. Tliere ia a hole 10 to 13 fathoms deep nearer the
shore, about | mile in extent.

Saline Point, ho called from a salt pond near it, is bold, i>erpeudicu-
lar, and 100 feet high. It should not be approached in a large ship
nearer than one mile, to avoid the Seringapatam Shoal and the bank
Joining Saline Point and (ilover Island.

Seringapatam Shoal, with 21 feet water on it, lies S. 49° W. (S. 48°
W. mag.), 700 yards from Saline Point. This shoal is about 300 yards
in extent, with 6 and 7 fatlioms water around it. The sea over it is
always in a disturbed state. Vessels of Ifi feet drait may pass Saline
Point at the distance of 200 yards. At 11^ miles S. 71° W. (S. 70^ W.
mag.) from Saline Point are some shallow patches, and on one of them
only 29 feet water.

Olover Island.— At IJ miles S. 44° E. (3. 45° E. mag.) of Saline
Point, and g mile from tlie shore, is (ilover Island, 41 feet high, which
at,a distance appears like a sail. Small vessels find convenient anchor-
age under its lee in waiting for tide, when working to windward along
the south shore.

The Porpoises are a clustt^r of rocks about 200 yards in extent, 3
feet above water, steep-to, and lying S. 78^ E. (S. 70=* E.) 1^ miles from
tlie south end of Glover Islaiul, and 250 yanls within the 10-fathom
line of soundings. About i mile S. 78° E. (S. 7!!=' li. mag.) of them is a
shoal spot with 3J fathoms water on it.

Prickly Bay lies to the westward of Prickly Point, the most sonth-
ern of Greuiida ; it is ei\sy of acce.ss, and affords good temporary antthor-
age for vessels of 18 teet draft. There is a shoal with I J fathoms water
ju it at about J mile from thu head of the bay not distinctly seen. To
the westward are True Blue and Hardy Bays, which may be used by
vessels of 15 feet dratt.

Directions. — A vessel fi-om the eastward should steer ^ mile to the
southward of the Porpoise Bocks, and haul up for Prickly Point, passing

496. THK GRENADINES.

it at the distance of 200 yards, over a bar of 2o feet water, and auebor
where convenient in 0 to 8 fathoms, keeping southward of the shoal at
the bead of the bay. A little to the westward of the track in, abreast
Prickly Point, there is some shoal ground with 21 feet over it.

Mount Hardman Bay is also a safe anchorage in 4 or 5 fathoms
water, but the channel to it is tortuous. It may, however, be used by
small vessels by keeping the south point of Hog Island bearing about
north until at a distance of J mile from it; then stt*er N. 50^ \V. (X. 51^
W. mag.) for Mount Ilardman Point, and through the reefs by the eye,
the water being smooth.

Clarkes Court Bay. — ^The entrance is formed by Calivem'y and Hog
Islands, and the shoals and reefs extending from them. It is capable
of holding a large number of vessels, and would present no difficulty
in entering under steam were the shallows buoyed. The anchoring
ground is about a mile in length and 000 yards wide, in 7 and 8 fath-
oms water, muddy bottom. The passage is through a narrow vein of
deep water, between the banks on either side with 2 to 4 fathoms on
them. . Here vessels may lie quite secure even in a hurricane.

Directions. — Being to the eastward of Caliveney Island, ai)proach
it with caution, and bring the two eastern points of Hog Island in line
bearing X. 28° W. (X. 29^ W. mag.) taking care not to go leeward of
this mark. When the south extreme of Caliveney Island is in line with
Fort Jeudy Point, haul up midway between the reefs, or close with the
weather shore, and anchor in the bay where convenient, avoiding the
shoal before mentioned.

There is good anchorage for small vessels between Hog Island and
the main in 4 fathoms of water; the channel is narrow, but may be
taken in tine weather.

Port Egmont is an inlet carryhig 8 fathoms water to the upper part,
where there is a narrow passage to an inner harbor, landlocked, 4 and
5J fathoms deep, with 21 feet water at the entrance, and where vessels
may lie hidden from seaward.

There is secure anchorage for small vessels on the west side of Adam
Islet, south of Egmont Point, which forms the west side of entrance to
the port, but it is difficult for a sailing vessel to get to sea, the course
out being SE.

Directions. — Bring the east extreme of Gray Islet north of Adam
Islet, on with the extreme point of the west side of the harbor, and a
hill to the northward of it hearing about X. 19^ W. (X. 20o W. mag.)
which will lead to the entrance of the harbor; when the land to
eastward of Fort Jeudy Point is shut in, steer more to the northw
skirting the weather bank, and should the wind be so far to the no
ward as XK., be prepared to anchor quickly wlien the flaws take
vessel, and then warp in. There is no room to work in or out of t
harbor, but a vessel will be able to sail in ynth the wind to tlie so'
ward of east, or out with the wind to the northward of it.

CALIVENEY HARBOR ^8T. ANDREW BAY. 497

Caliveney Harbor is a small basin extending east and west about
^ mile in extent, and separated from Bacaye by a narrow neck of land.
The entrance will be known by Westerhall Point trending to the east-
ward, with light-colored clifts on the SE. side, and having three sepa-
rate hills on it. Fort Jendy point, 70 feet high, to the westward stretches
well to the southward, and has a detached rock off it.

Directions. — Having made out the entrance of the harbor, steer N.
440 W. (N. 450 W. mag.) midway between the shallows at the south ex-
treme of Westerhall Point, and those from the eastern part of Fort
Jeudy Point, through the line of deep water until within the basin,
then anchor in the eastern part in 3^ or 4 fathoms. It will be neces-
sary to warp out, unless the wind should be from the northward.

Bacaye Harbor lies within the projecting point of Westerhall and
affords excellent anchorage for small vessels in 4 fathoms water. It is,
however, necessary to warp out in fine weather as far to windward as
the B"E. bank of Little Bacaye, so as to weather the rocks off Wester-
hall Point. Little Bacaye has a hole of deep water with a sheltering
reef.

8^ David Harbor is the first of any importance on the south coast,
in coming from the eastward. The entrance is formed by St. David
Point and the reef extending from Middle Point immediately westward
of it; from the latter a dangerous ledge extends to the southward be-
yond St. David Point. The harbor is capable of affording accommo-
dation for vessels of moderate draft, and temporaiy anchorage will also
be found in Little Bacolet Bay to the westward of the reef; the latter
is easier of access.

Water may be obtained here from the river of Little Bacolet, which
empties itself close to the anchorage.

Direction8.-7Bring a prominent building, a church about halfway

up the hills, to bear N.80 E. (N. 7^ E. mag.), and Mount Sinai, the high-

4sst southern mountain, N. 18^ W. (N. 19° W. mag.), the square, cliffy

point of St. David will then be recognized, whicli with Little Bacolet

Point forms a larger indentation than the bays to windward of it. In

entering the harbor, steer midway between St. David Point, which is

foul, and the reef extending from Middle Point. In a sailing vessel

keep sufficiently near the weather shore and be in readiness to anchor

should the flaws of wind c^me too much from the northward, then warp

in and anchor east of Middle Point in 5J fathoms of water. In leav-

-- "j it will be necessary to have the wind to the northward of east and

»lo8e with the weather shore before standing out of the harbor.

^oast. — From St. David Point to Orenville Bay the east coast of

^nada is indented with numerous small bays, only frequented by

sters for the collection of produce. Tlie bays are all more or less

n to wind and sea.

t Andre^w Bay. — At the south end of Grenville Bay is Marquis
'id, inside which is St. Andrew Bay and village, the latter consist
18402 32

498 GRENADA ISLAND.

ing of a few small hnts. The mark for going in between the shoals on
either side is the western extreme of Marquis Island on with the north
of two houses or stores on Grenville Bay beach X. 37° W. (N. 38^ W.
mag.) ; anchor midway between the reefs with the west end of the island
north. It is difficult to get out of this bay, and it is hardly fit for any
vessel but a drogher.

G-renville Bay and village, between Marquis Island and Telescope
Point, IJ miles apart, is the second place of imi>ortance in the island,
and vessels of 400 tons load here at moorings. The bay is encumbered
with reefs, and there is much diflSiulty and danger in entering, and
sometimes a protracted delay in leaving it. Vessels lie under cover of
the end of an outer reef from the open Atlantic until lightened to 12 feet
draft, and in the same place whilst loading above it. Within the inner
reef it is smooth and safe for vessels of 10 feet draft, but it is necessary
to warp out through the channel between the reefs for a long J mile to
sea, which requires the finest weather, with the wind welj to the north-
ward, but droghers of 30 tons can work out.

There are no distinct marks for entering this bay; two small -poleB
a few feet high are erected, which can only be seen with difficulty by
those having local knowledge, consequently the bay should not be
entered without the aid of a pilot.

Caation. — In coming in from seaward for Grenville Bay, it will be
necessary to guai'd against being set to leeward by the current. Here
it runs so strong to the SW. that avesselmissingthe bay wUl have to go
round the island and again come in from the NE. The stream, striking
Grenada on its eastern face, turns along shore both to the NW. and
SW., and which at this point is not overcome by the tide,

The Coast from Grenville Bay to Bedford Point runs nearly north
for 6 mUes. It is an open sandy shore, with shallows off it, exposed to
the whole force of the trade wind, and on which the sea breaks, and in
strong breezes everywhere within the 5-fathom line of soundings, as
it does generally on the whole of the east and south coasts. OS this
part of the coast are the Telescope, Conference, Antony, and Bird Islets
or Rocks; the former islet lies nearly f mile off the point of the same
name, is 65 feet high, and steep- to; the latter is the easternmost, nearly
3^ miles from Bedford Point, and 50 feet high.

Sandy and Green Islands. — Anchorages under their lee are safe
and accessible, but, as the lee tide sets strong round Bedford Point and
the trade wind tends to [increase it, there would be considerable d^^
in loadmg vessels at either of these anchorages. Sandy Island is
rounded by a reef which extends southward about ^ mile. The "'
side of Green Island is also foul 200 yards off.

Irvins Bay is the principal anchorage on the north side of Gre*.
where about one-half ofjthe annual crop of the island is shipped,
sels generally moor on a 7-fathom bank extending from the shore *
"»en hawse to the NE. It is recommended to drop the outer ^~

t*-

SAUTEURS BAY BARBADOS. 499

i»

■Vi

»i

with the south end of the island of Levera in line with the north ex.
treme of Grenada, and to place the starboard or inshore anchor to the
southeastward, with about 70 fathoms of cable on the outer and 30
fathoms on the inner anchor. The ship will then be about 800 yards ^'-H
from the shore. This anchorage is exposed, and the wind occasionally
blows hard from XNE. It is not, however, dangerous in the spring of
the year, the holding ground being good. Droghers and small vessels
may take shelter in Levera Bay, under the lee of the island of the same
name.' *

Sauteurs or St Patrick Bay. — To the eastward of St. David Point,
the N W. extreme of Grenada, is Laurant Point. Shallow water extends
off about i mile from both points. One mile SE. from the latter is the
village of Sauteurs, or St. Patrick, in a bay of the same name. Some
rocks extend to the NW. from the point forming the east side of the
bay, which shelters small boats only. The extremity of the point is a
high, perpendicular cliflf, called Le Mome des Sauteurs, or the Hill of •
the Leapers.

IVest Coast — Between St. David Point, the northern extremity of
the island, and St. George Harbor, the following bays abreast of the
villages of the same name afford temporary anchorage for coasters, viz :

Duquesne, Crayfish, St. Marks or Grand Pauvre, Goyave or Char-
lottetown, Halifax, and Grand Mai Bays. There is also anchorage on
the 5-fathom bank 2 miles north of Grand Mai Bay. All these bays are
exposed to the northward and westward and are very subject to strong
gusts off the land.

BARBADOS.

Barbados Island was taken possession of by the English in 1605,
in whose hands it has since remained.

Kotwithstiuiding its small extent, Barbados presents considerable
variety of surface, as valley, hill, table-land, etc. A deep valley, run-
ning almost east from Bridgetown, divides the island into two parts, of
which the northern is by much the larger. The general appearance of
the island is low and level.

From the west coast the land rises in successive distinct terraces,

interrupted by numerous and deep ravines, to the central ridge, from

which, And principally from Mount Hillaby, hills of a conical form range

in a IfB. direction toward the sea. This high land is called Scotland ;

hills are rugged and worn by the heavy rains and torrents which

ir down their sides. Between the east and south points the ground

learly level, sloping gently to the sea cliffs, while from the east to

north point the outline is broken and irregular. In clear weather

highest hills may be seen at a distance of about 40 miles.

e north, west, and south parts of the island consist of rocks of

^iline limestone, with beds of calcareous marl, containing numerous

^nt shells of various species; the east is composed of strata of sili-

500 BABBADOS ISULND.

ceou8 sandstoue, intermixed with furru^iuous matter, calcareous sand-
stone passing into siliceous limestone, different kinds of clay, selenite,
earthy marls, frequently containing minute fragments of pumice, strata
of volcanic ashes, seams of bitumen, and springs of petroleum. The
island has the appearance of a well-kept garden.

The rivers are small except during the rainy season, when they are
much increased; the average yearly rainfall amounts to 58 inches, and
the greatest known occurred in October, 1867, when G inches fell in four
hours. There are several chalybeate springs, contivining chiefly iron,
carbtmic acid, and fixed alkali, in dittereut proportions. Barbados is
considered to be one of the healthiest islands in the West Indies, and
the climate, though wiirm, is very salubrious. In the foi-enoon the
mean temperature during the year is about 80^, and in the afternoon
82°, the minimum being 75^ and the maximum 87°.

The island is divided into eleven parishes or districts. The population
in 1881 was 171,800. The chief staple articles produced in Barbados
are sugar, arrowroot, aloes, and cotton.

The G-ovenunent is vested in a governor, an executive council, a
legislative council, and a house of assembly. Bridgetown, on the SW.
side of the island, is the seat of government.

Northeast Coast. — From Kitridge Point, the east end of Barbados,
the coast, forming a slight indentation, trends about NW. to the north
point, and is formed of rocky cliffs varying from 50 to 800 feet in height,
intersected by sandy bays and beaches, which are skirted by a coral
reef, always breaking, and which encircles almost the whole island; in
this space the reef extends from about J to J mile from the shore.
Conset Bay affords shelter for boats, but is difBcult of access.

The east end of the island is about 50 or 00 feet high, and continaea
flat for about 2 miles inland, when it becomes more elevated. Moncrieffe
Hill signalpost is 3 miles west of the east point, and stands 521 feet
above the level of the sea. At 3 or 4 miles to the NW. the island begins
to rise in rugged hills abruptly from the shore, and at 8 ndles from the
north end and about midway between the eiistem and western sides of
the island is Mount Hillaby, the highest peak of the island. The liigh
ridge terminates at Pico Teneriffe, about 4 miles from the north point
of the island, a remarkable hill 209 feet high, which at a distance ap-
pears almost detached from the shore.

Light. — A white lighthouse stands 300 yards within the cliff ot Bag-
ged Point, from which is exhibited, at an elevation of 213 feet ^^^^'^
the sea, a revolving white light, giving flashes every two minuf ~
in dear weather should be seen from a distance of 21 miles.

On account of the prevailing strong current running westwai^
the Cobbler Reef, mariners are cautioned in closing the land t^ '
well to the northeastward of the light.

North Coast from Pico Teneriffe is composed entirely of low .^^
cliffs from 40 to 00 feet in height, and sweeps round the north
the island in a semicircle to Harrison Point on the opposite s^^-

WEST COAST — CARLISLE BAY. 501

se two points the island is abont 4^ miles broad. For the
im the uortb point inland the ground is level and open, and
aenues to rise gntdnally to the southward. The reef in tliis
1-8 the shore at tlie distance of about a half mile.
BBt. — From Harrison Point to Peltoau Lslaiid the shore ia
IT, but a short distaurc inland it begins to rise in sucee^fsive
i-i\ceri, ioterrnpted by ravines toward the central ridge.
:e8 may be traced all the way from Bridgetown to near Har-

wliere they terminate in a bold bluff. The shore is sliglitly
th sand beaches, the poiutH being fringed by coral reefs,
vrri.son Point extend nearly ^ mile, and are daugeroas.
tations. — On roof of harbor master's office, opposite the
;es consulate; on Highgate, and near lighthouse on Need-

The international code is used.

Town, about 3^ miles south of Harrison Poii|;t, is tlie most
? pliire next to Bridgetown; off it there i» anchorage, bnt
id is not t^qneiited, as it is toiind more convenient to sliip
; in droghers, or small craft, and convey it to the vessels in
^

r Boleto'wn, a small village ai>out 4 miles farther to the
lia,i also anchorage olt' it, and the roadstead is used for the
sp as thiit of Sjieights Town.

md Loi^ Shoals. — Pelii-an Shoals lii> abont 4 miles south-
etown, 1^ miles northward of Peli<-an Ishind, and ^ mite otT
y are nearly dry, with 5 fathoms water about 200 yards
a. Detached eoral patches IiealK)Ht 1,1W0 yards off Spring
nt, westward of Pelican Slioals, the shoalcst of which,
i Shoal, lias i fatlioms water on it, an<) is marked by a hell
'elican Island quarantine station lH>nriMg 3. 40° E. {S. 3!)°
slant l-,*r miles,

[Bland is a small, low, locky ij-Iot with a qnariintine bnild-
1 black, lying about 300 yards from the shore, and forms the
' Carlisle Bay. St. Ann Clock Tower, in hnc with gateway,
. 56^ E. mag.) leads J mile outside the foul ground extend-
h'can Island.

Bay, the principal andiorage, along the sliorcs of which is
idgetown, the capital of IJarbados, is an indenlatioQ of
i and fonucd between Pelican island and Xeedliam Point,
nlk is moored in the bay.

:ery chimneys are situated at the bottom of the bay and
duable range for entering. The chimneys are rectaiipiliir
built of brick and are painted or whitewashed. The hack
,bout 70 feet, and the front about Sri feet high. There is a
cafed tree just to the northward of range, cloae-toand in
back chimney. A red tile-roofed large buihling, back
ly on the range (to the northward).
leys in line bearing JJ". T3° E, (S. 74^' E.) lead in.

502 BARBADOS ISLAND.

Bridgetoixrn, the capital, is situated mainly north of a riyolet in
Carlisle Bay, but it extends along the shores of the bay for nearly 2
miles. Though irregularly built, it cont-ains several handsome houses
and a large square, adorned with a good statue of Xelson. Besides
the churches there are several chapels and 100 schools. A college is
pleasantly situated on the eastern side of the island. The town is
abundantly sui)plied with excellent water led hi from the east coast
and the center of the island; an effective system of hydrants is main-
tiiined.

Bridgetown has an extensive commerce with the neighboring islands,
large amounts of merchandise imported from the United States and
Europe being roshipped here for consumption in Tobago, Grenada, St.
Lucia, and St. Vincent. Numerous vessels also seeking employment
call here tor charters and are engaged to load at other islands.

The population is about 19,000.

The authoriti(*s to visit are the governor and officer commanding the
troops. The United Stat.es is represented by a consul and vice-consul.

Coal can be obtained in quantity and good Equality. Cost about
$7.75 per ton in the bunkers. It is brought alongside in lighters hold-
ing 20 tons.

Supplies. — The supply of pro\isions is ample; water is plentiful,
and is delivered on board in the tanks or boilers at a cost of 50 cents
per 100 tons. Minor repairs can be made. No dock.

Steamers. — Several lines of steamers from Europe and the United
States call regularly. It is the principal station in the West Indies of
the Royal Mail Steam Packet Company.

Tel^raph. — The island is in telegra]>hic communication with the
United States, Europe, and the West India Islands.

Hospitals. — ^There is a general hospital, with accommodations for
about 250 patients; a quarantine and a hospital for the insane. The
military hospital is only for the use of the garrison. All are well kept.

Pilots are unne^je;!jsary ; everything is handled by lighters, and labor
is cheap. If a pilot is taken the master of the vessel is still held re-
sponsible.

Boat Landing. — The landing is at the sea wall just inside the mouth
of the Carc'Miage, immediately in front of the United States consulate.
There is also an official landing at the engineer's wharf. Both are ex-
cellent, and there is no charge for man-of-war boats.

Port Charges. — Anchorage dues, 82 if cargo landed or taken on
board exceeds 2 tons. Vessels not exceeding 100 tons pay $2 p
dues 5 from 100 to 200 tons, §2.50 j 200 to 300 tons, 83; exceedir-
tons, $4. Vessels under 75 tons only pay these dues twice a
Mole hciid dues: On coming witliin harbor, for groundage, vesseL
1 cent for each and every ton. For loading or unloading within r
head, 2 cents for each and every ton; for lieaving down 3 cents fo
and every ton.

BEIDGETOWN. 503

ge dues are 24 c^nta per toD registered toiiaage or measure-
goods landed or takeii on board. Ships under 75 tons are
' toimage dues only once a year for cargo landed or taken on
Ships arriving and departing in ballast and passenger ships
3unage.

at — ^The current is tidal, sets along the shore, and varies iu
from nothing to almost 2 knots an hoar. Generally, when
i breeze of a force of 3 or above, vessela ride head to the wind.
, 9. 8. Chicago between the north end of St. Lucia and Bridge-
nd a current of about | knot per hour to the NN W, (Decern-
.)

I. — A fixed light is exhibited &om a lighttower, painted white,
liam Point, at an elevation of 00 feet above the aea. The light
d when bearing to the northward of east, and white when to
iward of east. The light may be seen in clear weather Itom
[nllee. A fixed red light Is exhibited at the adjutant-general's
isible one mUe.

3rage. — Merchant vessels anchor iu the northern part of the
1 mail steamers have two mooring buoys. For a large vessel
berth is in 16 fathoms, with gateway and clock tower inline S.
i. oG*^ E. mag.) and Clapham Mill open north of Britton Mill
1. {X. 87° £. mag.). Smaller vessels anchor inshore of this ao-
to draft. The bottom is foul and uneven in many parts, bat an
s seldom lost. In the bay the tides are weak and irregnlar.
8 of suitable draft moor alongside the wharves of the Car^nage,
18 11 feet at its entrance at low water, and iiy>m 12 to 14 leet

I — Cleaxing Murkw. — From Xeedham Point, wliich may be
lown by tlie Torts and signal staff at its extremity, a shallow
it extends tiOO yards to the westwanl, and a red buoy is moored
on it in 5 fathoms water, but as the buoy occasionally breaks adrift, vea.
selfl approaching from the eastwai-d should not cross the spit until they
have brought the east end of Pelican Island N. 21° W. f N. 20° W. mag.),
and when the flagstaff of Fort Charles on the point is iu one with St.
Ann Castle they can haul to the northeastward and anchor as con-
venient.

In the northern part of the bay there are two coral patches, having
■from 4 to y fathonui water on them, but they will be avoided by not
standing farther in that direction than to bring the refinery chimneys
Landing on the shore in the ceutt^r of the bay S.88= E. (S.870E.mag.).'
lese I'himneys in line Ijearing N. 73° E. (N. 74° E. mag.) lead in clear.
Che leadiTig mark for the spit off Needham Point leads also westward
the knolls.

loath Coaat. — Oistin Bay. — The coast from Xeedham Point runs in
E. by S. direction 4J miles to Oistin Town, and from thence it bends
tdually rouud to the SE. for IJ miles to the extreme south point of

504 BARBADOS ISLAND.

Barbados, forming Oistin Bay, iu which there is anchorage for small ves-
sels in from 5 to 10 fathoms water; clear groand will be found in about
6 fathoms, with Christ Church N. IQo B. (N. lio B. mag.) and Kendal
Point S. 630 E. (9. (>2o E. mag.). In hauling up for this anchorage, take
care to give a good berth to the south spit, which extends to the SW.
nearly f mile from South Point. The whole of this shore is flat and
low, but at a short distance inland the ground rises somewhat in ter-
races, and i mile northward of Christ Church attains the height of 18ft
feet.

Light. — ^A lighthouse painted in alternate red and white bands stand}
200 yards inshore of South Point. From it is exhibited, at an elevatioi
of 145 feet above the sea, a red light which revolves once every minute;
after an eclipse of 12 seconds, it again appears, gradually increasiDg ii
24 seconds to its greatest brilliancy, and then in 24 seconds more b
eclipsed. Coming from the northeastward the light is first seen when
bearing S. 58^ W. (S, 59° W. mag.) and should be kept well open b
order to clear Cobbler Reef. It is visible from the distsmce of about IS
miles.

Cobbler Reel — From South Point the coast trends about NEL S
miles to Eatridge Point, curving outwards a little about midway. The
shore is flat, and composed chiefly of bold rocky cliflfe from 50 to 60 feet
high; in some places, however, the cliffs have been undermined by the
sea, and fallen in huge masses on the beach beneath. This is the most
dangerous part of the island, coral reefs extending almost continuously
at from 400 to 600 yards off shore, having from one to 4 feet water, ami
generally breaking heavily for the whole distance. There is a boat
channel inside these shoals. Abreast New Fall Cliff and 600 yards
from the coast is the SW. extreme of Cobbler Keef, which extends at
about the same distance off shore nearly as far as Lords Castle, Long
Bay, having two gaps in the ridge, of 2^ and IJ fathoms. Here the
reef increases its distance from the cdast to 1^ miles off Palmetto Bar,
which is 1,400 yards southward of Kitridge Point. The Cobbler Beef
here is about ^ mile in width, with from 2 to 8 feet water, and breaks
heavily even in the finest weather; inside the reef there are 3 and 4
^fathoms, with smooth water. Eastward of the Cobbler Beef, and nearly
IJ miles from the coast, a remarkable coral ridge, with from 7 to 10
fathoms on it, curves and extends to the SW. at nearly an uniform dis-
tance off shore till abreast the South Point. Between this and the
inner reefs there are from 12 to 20 fathoms. To seaward of these reefi*,
the water quickly deepens to the 100-fathom line, which will be
about 2 miles off shore. At spring tides there are overfalls ^
Cobbler and South Point Reefs.

Directions. — In approaching Barbados from the eastward tu.
tude of 130 X., which is that of South Point, should be attair-*-^
considerable distance to the eastward of the island.

In these latitudes, where the atmosphere is in general so

BARBADOS — DIRECTIONS.

in the rainy seanoD), tliia may be readily mi
.ay dawn and evening twiliglit tUe meridi^
id Bonth for latitude, and of others east a

; light Iiaa been made from the SE. care
oach the shore within S miles until it beai
when a course may be shaped for Needhai
liing Bariwdos from the northward keep
aid of tliu island in order to pass to wind
ded the (.'obbler Reef at the distance of •
ted about 2 miles olf shore. Should it be
e NK., the light on lliigged I'oint will be
I; to clear the Cobbler lleef it munt not be
uf X. fi8a W. (X (i7o W. mag.) till the 8

coming from this direction get to leewi
eat of the island, a berth of about 2 mile^
off the XW. {)[)iut, and the «hore must be ;
lings extend some short distauce outside tl
'und at about i mile; a depth of not le
r them. Approacliiug Carlisle Bay from
[ i-oitnd L'elican Island until the clock tow

bearing S. 'M^ B. {S. 5;'jo e. mag.)
loH from the ejistward toward nightfall, it
lilt the first land seen will bo that near
h, and uot the sonth point of the island, wli
er (the upper ridge tiiUing abruptly to the 1
eering a careful couise to pii^ss the anpp
itauce have, tmm this mistake and the inc
iie land, frequently run into danger; the li{
w be tlie guide, as previously stated, for a
ere the l(>l)-fathom line is only § mile off si
Is bound to Carlisle Bay from the soutliv
South Point a berth of at least 2 or 3 mite
lul up about S. 730 W. {N. 720 W. mag.) :
t on Needham Point will soon be seen. Ki
the point, and on hauling up into the ba
3n, bear iu mind that the rocky spit froii
the anchoring ground is fiill of holes, and
sels.

the bay from tlie northward, when the li
listward of S. 51^ E. (S. 50"^ E. mag.) to cleai
1.

len beating up to Barbados from the wi
lirectly under its le© iu order to avoid t
ets strong to the westwanl. Sometimes, h

606 BARBADOS ISLAKD.

current varies its direction to NW., and even as far as north, particu-
larly between the island and Tobago, and its rate is chiefly governed
by the strength of the wind ; in the rainy season it is sometimes scarcely
perceptible.

Winds and Weather. — January is generally dry at Barbados; the
breeze sets in early, and it is altogether one of the flnest and most;
healthy months of the year, February partakes of the same character,
March and April are the driest months. May is also dry in the early
part, but rain sets in towards the end. In June the breeze is light, the
clouds are heavy, with frequent sh'owers. July is like May and June
with heavy rainfall; rain descends in torrents. August and Septem-
ber are very similar, with calms and light airs from the southward.
October is very rainy, but toward the middle becomes drier, and the
refreshing trade wind sets in after thunder storms. November is still
rainy, the winds variable, and not unfrequently from the SW. De-
cember has almost daily slight showers, but the month is cool, and the
trade wind steady.

Aguje

Aguje
Aguje

Alacra
Albatr
Albion
A 1 boys

Alcatr

Alejan
Alert 1
Alert ]
Alfred
Alfred
Alfred
Algan

Algarr

Algod<
Algod(

Algodt
Algodf
Allart
Allawt

Allen (
Alliga'
Allitra'

AUigai
Alligai
Alligai

AllijfaU. ,

Alligator Reef, light

Almacenee Cays 320

Almedinas Reef 128

Almcndaras River 155

Alorso Rojos Point 149

Alta Vela Island 313

Altarn, the Iti4

Altode Ajl Hill 124

Alto de Juan Danue .-. 123

AlverTowQ 87

AmbarCay 187

Ambergris Cay ..- 'J^

American Shoal, light. _ 2.i

Amsterdam Fort --- .-. 40(1

Anaiuuya River 297

Ananae Port 2J4

Anaaoo Bay 341

Anasco River 341

Anchorage Bay 24*^

Anderson Cay iif)

Andres Bay - 303

AndroB Island -'14

AndroB Island, pilots 3H

Andrna Island, tides 54

Anegada Channel -- ■Tiii

Anegada Island 3.50

Anegada Island, anchorage... liUS

Anegada Island, caution 357

Anegada Inland, currents 5, 357

Anegada Island, rollers 357

Anegado Shoal 338

Angeles Castle 181

Anfrlais Bay - 290

Anglaialslot-- 282

AncuilaCay 47

AnguiUa Island 394

Angnilla Island, caution 3i)>i

Anguilla Island , lldes 398

A nguilla Point _ 30 1

Angnilla Point, tides 381

AnguilkCay. -., 3I<I

AnguillitoCay 394

Anoaa Shoal 4!h4

Annatti. Bay 230

Annatto Bay anchorage 230

Annatto Bay, direciious 230

Anseii Navire--- 450

Acse i» Veau Village 28;t

Anse Choc - 473

Anse do la Case Pilote 4;'j0

Anse des Trois rlviSreB 459

Anse du Cenm 45it

Anse la Raye District 4 0

Ansa Marigot ,. 4511

I Anse Marquis - -,

I Anse May Bayou

j Antigua Island

, Antigua Island, aspec'

Antigua Island, bank (
ings .

Antijjua Island, currei
' Antigua Island, shoal

Antigua Island, tid^s.
I Antigua Island, west <
i Anton Cay

Anton Hill, channels .

Antonio Knoll

Antonio Point

' AntonioPorl

Antonio Port, beacont

Antonio Port, directio

Antonio Port, eastern

Antonio Port, light..

■ Antonio Port, light d
Antonio Port, repairs
Antonto Port, rock...
Antonio Port, suppliei
Antonio Port, telegra
Antonio Port, we-stert

I Antony Rock

.'\nvil Mountain

I Anvil Peak

Apostles Battery

! Aquin Bay ;

I Aquin Cay [or Grosse

I Aquin flummook

I Arago Point _ . _

[ Araha del Norte

Arbolitos Piitut

I Arcadins Islets

' Arcadins Islets, light

■ A rcahais Village

Ai-ecibo Harbor

Arecibo Harbor,"porti
Arecibo Port

' Arecibo River

! Arena Cay ...:

I Ari-naGm-da

! Are n lis Bank

j Ai-emtsCay 15(

I Arenas Point--.'...-.

I Argus Bank

' .A.rimao River -

■ Arnftud Bay

Arroyo Bay

I Arroyo Bay, ancboraf
I Arroyo Village

irges. :M<> I Bahama

147 Batama

:i4j light d

27ii Bahama

:'age . _ 27li Bahia de

M Bahiade

M Bahia de

.) HI BahiaH.

M BahiaHi

84 BahiaHi

283 Balen.-H

1<(2 Baiguire

44(i Baitiquit

- ;i-l Baitiquit

;i2.-> Baitiqui*

autlon 3i"i Baillquit

325 Baja Baj

t 322 BajoGra

• 322 Bajo La

14« BajoNu.

310 BajoNu«

44fi Balandm

446 Baiandrs

309 Balandra

300 Balandra

149 BalcuneM

2;"iT : Baleice 1

108 Balelnel

108 Baloine 1

108 Baleloe (

Baleiaeb
Baliceau

297 BalineR

311 Batembo

307 Balleaat.

- 312 Bamboo'

497 Bamboo

434 Banana I

IKK Bananel

109 Bananes

419 1 Bancdel

42 Bancdin

;t8 Baneu F(

JB 42 Banes Hi

:t6 Banil'la

link _ . :W Bani Tov

idcays ;t*i Elaniqiie

t 5,37 Bank of

re 37 i Banner!

aa»age 52 I Banni^ite

;s,citr- j BantaRl

5 j BaqiLHt.;

:» I Baracoa(

Boracoa Port 1

Bftracoa Port, light 1

Baracoa Port, pilote 1

Baracoa Port. steamerB .- ]

Baracoa Port, suppliea J

Baracoa Port, telegraph 1

Barauoa Port, tides 1

Baroooa Port, winds and cur-
rents ■- - 111,1

Baracoa River ]

Baradaires Bay 1

Barahona Hat'bor .'

Barahona Harbor, directioas, i

Barahona Harbor, supplies . _ - i

Barbados Isituid ■)

Barbados Island, banks clear-
ing marks t

Barbados lal and, currents 503,.'

Barbados Island, directions... S

Barbados Island, government. ;:

Barbados Island, north coast . £
Barbados Island, northeast

coast -- t

Barbados Island, signal sta-
tions _ 5

Barbados Island, south coast.. S

Barbados Island, west coast. . . fi
Barbados Island, winds and

weather S

BarbaraHill i

Barber's Block i

Barbuda Island 4

Barbuda Island, anchorage 4

Barbuda Island, supplies 4

Barcadero-- - I

Barclay Point - 4

BarcoB Bight 1

Barcoa Channel 133-1 45, 1

B^rcosPoint 1

Bardo Perdero Shoal 2

Bare Bush Cay 2

Bariay Port 1

Barigua Beach 1

Bariguita Reef I

Barigutta River 1

Bariguita Shoals 1

Barildii Bee ut Point 2

Bario de la Puntilla 3

Barlovento Point 111. iZi, 1

Bamett Harbor

Barons Bluff 3

Bare Point _ 2

Barque Bay 4

I Barque Light

! Barrack BeetB

Barracota

j Barracouta Banks

' Barrancas Point

I Barrel of Beef lelet- . .

Barren Rock

' BarrilcB IsletB

' Barriles PasBage

! Barrionuevo Cape

j Bari-ouallie Bay

Barron allie Bay, anchi
i Barrouallie Bay, cauti<
I Barrouallie Bay, watet

Baa de Sainte Anne Ri

Basin, the-

! Basse Terre

I Basse Terre, anchoragi

Bassa Terre, communh
I B:iase Terre, hospital..

I 6assB Terre Islands

: Bassa Terre, port chari
. Basse Terre, supplies-.
I Bassa Terre, telegraph
I Basse Terre Road, llgli

; Batabano, directions-. ,

I Batabano, light

! Batabano, pilots

I Batabano Channels

Batabano Gulf

: Battery Point

j Battle Cay --

I Battowia Island

I Battowia Island, tidee i

j BaxaCape -.

j Bay Inlet

i Bay Point

Bay Port

I Bay Rook

I Bayahiba Anchorage .
I Bayahondes Trees

Bayardelles Bays

! Bayou Islet

j Beacon Hill _

I Beacon Shoal -..

Beak Cay-

I Beata Channels -

' Beata Island

I Beata Island, anchoragi

! Beata Island, note

I Beata Point

Qt,

nt, tides

Point

ur. house and WBt^r.

'soin Peninsula

[■Boin Point

.;lRock

»y -

Daves

he Point-

he Rock

Point-

Hill

Shallow

Point-

lands, anchorage '

lands, northaudsouth

lands, pilots

land

land, supplies

Cays

iCay

Islands

Islands, anchoragee.

Islands, buoys

Islands, channels

Islands, coal

Islands, current

Islands, directions ..

Islands, dock

Island, government.

Islands, lig-ht

iHlands, light dues . .

Islands, passages

Mands. pilots

Islands, reef

Islands, seasons

Islands, soundings

ng reef

islands, steamers

Islands, supplies

lalands, telegraph --

Islands, tides

Islands, time signal-
Islands, wharfage...

islands, winds

Bay

Zaye

Berracos Point 163

Berry Islands 49

Berry Islands, pilotB. 38

Berlin Place 454

Berlin Place, signal station-.. 454

Bertrand Hills 430

BitSnac Mountain ....'. 275

Bight, the 363

Bight Bay 249

Bight Village SI

Bigie Bay 288

Billy Point - 415

Biras Creek 360

Bird Cay 380

Bird Island Chwinel 428

Bird Island Reef 428

Bird Islet 51,4S8

Bird Point 80

Bird Rock 86

Bird Rock, light .._ 86

Bird Rock, reef 85

Biscoyne Key 26

Bishop Shoal 41&

Black Cay- 283

Blaclt Mangrove Point nj

Black Point-- 478

Black River 221

Black River, anchorage 220

Black River Bay 221

Black Rock.- - 73,384,480

Black Spring Point , 219

Blackwood Bush Cay 51

Blake Islet 419

Blanc Isle 439

Blanca Battery 165

Blanca de Gonalves Point 274

Blanche Point 3»

Blanco Cay i;«, 151, 178, 184

Blanco Channel 179

Blanco Pass --_ 151

Blanco Zarza Cay 176

Blewlields 222

Blewfields, anchorage 223

Blewfields, directions 223

Blewfiolds, water 222

Blinders, the 362

Blonde Rock 363

Blossom Bank 220

Blossom Channel 55

Blowt-r Rock - 241

Blowing Point - 236,:J94

Blowing Rock-- - 394

Blue Hills 58,86

512

INDEX.

Page.

Blue Hole.- - 239

Blue Mountains 201

Bluff Point 223,278,387

Blunder Rock 376

BocaCanete 129

BocaChica 128,348

BooaChicaCay 128

Boca Chica Point 315

Boca de Alcatraces 132

Boca de Caballones 172

Boca de Caravelas 123

Boca de Lanzanillo 129

Boca de Marcos 128

Boca de Marillanes 129

Boca de Marillanes , directions , 131

Boca de la Cristo 130

Boca del Inferno , 347

Boca del Seron 129

BocaGrande 173

Boca G rande , anchorage 174

Boca Grande, tides and winds. 174

Boca Grande Channel 31

Boca Grande Channel, direc-
tions 31

Boca Grande Key 31

Boca Guajoba .*,_. 124

Boca Sagua la Grande 131

BoddenTown 246

Boeuf Bay 315

Boggy Peak 421

BogueCays... 228

Boiler Channel 16

Boisjoli Bluff 445

Boisjoli Point 444

Bolsmorice Point 493

BomaPort 110

Boma River 110

BonBay _ 2^5

Bonaparte Rocks 488

Bonds Cay ^. 50

Bonita Point 320

BonitoCay 184

Booby Cay 81,225

Booby Island 412

Booby Island, ledge 61

Booby Rocks 55, 72

Booby Rock 477

Boon Channel 427

Boon Point 427

Boqueron Bay - 344

Boq ueron , coast of 345

Borck Creek 367

Borgne Bay 269

Page.

Borgne River 269

Borgnesse Point - 460

Boston Bay 239

Bottle and Glass Rocks 476

Bottom, the 407

Boucassin Village 277

Bouillante Bay 438

Boulanger Island 404

Bourg Anchorage _ 445

Bourgos Point 459

Boury Point 287

BowdenPier 203

Boyau Islet 261

Boyet Point 320

Braba Point 121

Brandon Point _. 474

Bransby Point-.. 414

Brass Islands - 378

Brass Islands.anchorage, tides. 378

Brava Point.- 120

Brazaletta Hill 216

Brea Point- 352

Breeze Point 381

Breton Cay - 174

Breton Point 438

Bridge Point 63

Bridgetown 502

Bridgetown, anchorage 508

Bridgetown, boat landimg 502

Bridgetown, clearing marks . . 503

Bridgetown, directions 504

Bridgetown, hospital 502

Bridgetown, lights 503

Bridgetown, pilots, port

charges 502

Bridgetown . steamers 502

Bridgetown, supplies - 502

Bridgetown, telegraph 502

Bri arand Cay , anchorage 173

BrigotPass 460

Brillante Shoal.. 351

Brimstone Hill 410

Broa Bay. 185

Broa Bay, water 185

Broad JStag Shoal

Brooks Islet

Brothers, the 4'

Brothers Rocks

Brown Bank

Browns Cay

Brune Bank -

Brunet Point

Bruquen Point

P«8.

'oint, light 340

«le)C«y m

Jo 28!)

;Bay 476

id- 370,389

dCbannel 3W

d Reel.l 390

366

Eleef 22H

aranxa Bank 170

taCay 1«

taPMB 147

lAFoint 147

taRiver 147

It 150

237

Point 234

1 „ 480

arbor 50

k 110

Liichorage 300

aye 174

Bay 314

Int 289

> Point 220

intaln 307

191

213

131

Aver 181

BnooShoBl 386

lay 321

lUfle 321

liver 321

iBay 179

Cay 173

Channel 172

Channel, anchorage 173

Channel, direotlons 173

Channel, pilots 173

153,154

aution 153

ireotlons 153

iippllea 153

Dint 116

Cabazote Barlovento

Cabazot« Sotarento

Cabbage Tree Cay

Cabello B^y

Cabello Bay, supplies

Cabello Colorado

Cabello Colorado Point

Cabeza de Toro

Cabezatt Cay

Cabonioo Fort

Cftbra Islet

Cabras Islands — -

Cabras Isleta

Cabrestacte Bank

Cabrietta Point

CabrUlon Point

CabrisHilU

Cabrit Islet

Cabrlta Island

Cabrlta Point

Cabrite Point ^

Cabron Cape

Caooo Cay-

CacaoToint

Caohacrou Point

Caclmba Point

Cactus Cay i

Caotus Beef

Cade Bay

Cade Bay, anchorage

Cade Bay, directions

Cade Bay, reef

Cadena Point

Cades Bay _

Caesar Point

Caglo Point

Caglo River -

Caibarlen

Calbarlen, light

Caibarlen, pilotage

Calbarien, weather BlgaalB.

CaiooH Bank

Calcos Creek

Caicos Group _

Calcos Passage

Caigoo no Caigo Point

CaiHo Shoal

CallloD Town and Bay

Caiman Bluff

Caiman Cay ....

Caiman Point .

Caimanera

Caimanera, light

614

INDEX.

Page.

Caimanera Point 169

Caimlto 186

Cajon Point 144

Calapatch Reef 190

Calavera Cay 194

Caldera Bay 308

Caldera Bay , anchorag^e 308

Caldera Bay, caution 308

Caldera Bay, tide 308

Caldera Bay, water 308

Caldera Bay, winds 308

Caldera Point 308

CalSta Anchorag^e 157

Cal6taPoint 156

Cal6ta Buena Point 181

Caletilla Beach 157

Caleton Anchorage 300

California Bank 213

Caliveney Harbor 497

Callveney Harbor, directions . 497

Caliveney Island 496

CalliaquaBay 476

Calliaqua Bay, lagoon 476

Calliaqua Point . 478

Calonna Point 188

Calonna River 188

Camacho Point and Landing . . 135

Camarioca Pass 137

Camarioca River 135

Camello Point 112

Camels Hump 283

Camerons Cap 233

Cai5a Gorda Islet 352

Caila River 157

CanandaiguaBank 292

Cananova Inlet 117

Canas 148

Canaveral Cape 23

Canaveral Cape, anchorage ... 23

Canaveral Cape , light 24

Canaveral Cape , shoal 23

Candelaria Mount 120

Candeleros Point 334

Cane Point 226

Cane Garden Bay , village 366

Cane Garden Point 475

CanesBeach 112

Canes Point 112

Cane te Anchorage 115

Caney Peint.-. 177

Canimay River 137

Caninguln Opening 110

Cannouan Island 482

Canones Point 118

CantilesCays 190

Canuelo Islet 337

CaobaBay 158

CaobaBeacon . 162

CaobaCay 163

Caobas Creek 175

Cape Canaveral 23

Cape Canaveral , light 24

Cape Cruz 167

Cape Cruz, caution 168

Cape Cruz, pilots 168

Cape Cruz, light 167

Cape Cruz Reef - 168

Cape Florida 26

Cape Frances Viejo 254

Cape Haiti Harbor 262

Cape Haiti, boat landing 263

Cape Haiti, buoyage 264

Cape Haiti coal 263

Cape Haiti, currents 266

Cape Haiti, directions 265

Cape Haiti, pilots 283

Cape Haiti, port charges 233

Cape Haiti,reefs 263

Cape Haiti, signals 263

Cape Haiti, shoals 264

Cape Haiti, steamers 263

Cape Haiti, supplies 263

Cape Haiti, tides 263

Cape Haiti, town 262

Cape Haiti, winds - 266

Cape Haiti, wrecks 264

Cape Mala Pascua 334

Cape Maysi 107

CapePepe ' 191

CapeRojo 314,345

Cape Rojo,light 345

Cape San Antonio 143

Capesterre 444

Capesterre District 437

Capesterre Point 437

Capitan River 296

Capitana Point .^

Captain Scott Rock

Caraool Bay «

Caracol Point

Caracoles Anchorage

Caracoles River

Cararcoli Channel

Cararcoli Point -».

INDEX.

515

Page.

Cararcoli HiU, light 463

Cftravelaf Chios and Grande

Points 145

Caravelas Anchorage 123

Caravelle Peninsula 463

CaravelleRock 463

Carbet Point 454

Carbet Village 456

Carcasses Bay 288

Carcasses Point 288

Carcovado Point 353

Card enas Bay and Town ^ 134

Cardenas Bay, directions 135

Cardenas, light 135

Cardenas, pilots 135

Cardenas, steamers 135

Cardenas, supplies 134

Cardones Island 349

Cardones Island, light 350

Careen mil ...^ 373

Careening Island Beacon 216

Car6nage, the 119, 406, 457, 486, 493

Car6nage Point 282

CarenasCay 182

CareneroCay 129,293

CareneroCays 171

Carenero Islet 321

Carenero Point 152, 269, 349

Carenero Reef 129

CaretPass 439

Carib Pomt 452

Carlisle Bay 218,420,501

Carlisle Bay, directions 218, 503

Carlisle Bay, light 503

Carlit Island 380

Carmichael Point 91

CameroCay 277

Carolina 366

Carraguco Point 187

Carriacou Island 486

Carr iacou Island, west point of . 486
Carriacou Island, wood and

water 486

Carriacou Reefs, caution 488

riere Point 458

rot Rock 363

valRock 363,368,377

yafort, light 24

as Range 192

13 River 192

jajal Reef 179

oo de San Vincente Bank.. 120

^ en Bas 467

Casigua Cay 151

Casilda Harbor 180

Caeilda Harbor, coal 180

Casilda Harbor, tides 180

Casilda Harbor, tugs 180

Casilda Point 177

Casilda Port 179

Cassada Rocks ^ 488

Cassada Rocks, anchorage 489

Castillo Point 293

Castle Bruce Estate 451

Castle Harbor 16

Castle Island 88

Castle Island, light 88

Castle Rock 45,88

Castries Port 470

Castries Port, buoy, perches .. 472

Castries Port, coal 471

Castries Port, directions 472

Castries Port, hospital 471

Castries Port, lights 471

Castries Port, pilotage 471

Castries Port, port charges ... 471

Castries Port, supplies 472

Castries Valley 472

Cat Cays 45

Cat Cays, water 45

Cat Island 80

CatalinaBay 307

Catalina Island 301

Catalina Point 307

Catalinita Island 300

Catherine Fort 17

Catholic Islet and Rocks 483

Catuano Pass 300

Caucedo Point 303

Cauto River , 170

Cavagan Point 116

Cay Bamba 130

Cay Boquerones 149

Cay Breton 174

Cay Confltes- 124

Cay Confltes, anchorage 124

Cay Cruz 125

Cay Fanduco -.1- 344

Cay Frances 127

Cay Frances, anchorage .. 127

Cay Frances, water 127

Cay Grande 173

Cay Jaula 126

Cay Palomo 130

CayRatones 151

Cay Romano ...••« 124

516

INDEX.

Page.

CaySabinal 123

Cay Sal - 46

Cay Sal Bank 46

Cay Sal Bank, anchorage 47

Cay Sal Bank, caution 46

Cay Sal Bank, directions 47

Cay Sal Bank, tides 47

Cay St. Domingo 75

Cay Verde 74,124,137

Caye k Saute 437

CayekDupont 434

Caye Bateau 437

Caye D' Argent-... 435

Caye Martinique 434

Caye Plate 434

Cayaguaneque Port 114

Cayamas Point 185

Cayemites Bay 283

Cayemites Bay , anchorage 284

Cayemites Bay, directions 284

Cayemites Bay, reef 284

CayeSjBayof.: - 321

Cayes, Bay of, caution 322

Cayes, Bay of, directions 323

Cayes, Bay of, eastern route .. 325

Cayes, Bay of , pilots 323

Cayes, Bay of, western route.. 325

Cayes, Bay of, winds 323

Cayes, Jacmel 316

CayitoReef 360

Caymans Islands, .The 246

Caymans Islands, supplies 249

Caymans Islands, tides 249

Caymans Islands, wind and

weather. ••••• 249

Cayman Bank 247

Cayman Brae 248

Cayman Brae, anchorage 249

Cayman Brae, caution 249

CayoCruz 140

Cayo Moa Port 116

Cayo Moa Port, directions 117

Cayo Moa Port, shoals 117

Cayo Moa Port, tides 117

Cayo de Moa Bay 116

CayosdeMoa 116

Cayuelo 164

Cazones Bay 184

Cazones, Gulf of 184

Cebollae Port 117

Cedar Point 40

Ceiba (Colba) Cay 171

Cercelle Ba^- 439

Cerro Gordo Hummocks 362

Cerro Gordo Mountains .. 307

Cerro Montuoso - 348

Cerro Point 112

Chaddock Bars la

Chaloupe Bay 285

ChalupaCay 134

Channel Cay 73

Channel Rock 39,4^

Chardons Isle* 462

Charles Fort 413

Charles Island 63

Charles Town 413

Charles Town, anchorage 413

Charles Town, anchorage, dU

rections - -*. 413

Charles Town, pilots, dues 413

Charleston Bay 482

Charlotte Town 499

Charlotte Amalia Town 369

Chateau Belalr Bay and Island 477

Chateaudin Road and Point. . . 322

Ch&teaux Point 432

Ch&tenay Mountain •275

Chatham Bay 485

Chatham Bay, supplies 485

Cheltenham 482

Cheroki Point z 39

Cheroki Soimd 39

Cherrystone Hill 17

Chico Bay and Shoal 292

ChinchUline Cay 292

Chinchorros Banks 333

Cinchorros Banks, caution.... 333

Chorrera Harbor 155

ChouchouBay 268

Chiquito River • 346

Christian Cove 417

Christiansted Harbor ^ 387

Christiansted Harbor, anchor-
age 390

Christiansted Harbor, caution. 389
Christiansted Harbor, chan-
nels 389

Christiansted Harbor, coal, wa-
ter ...

Christiansted Harbor, direc-
tions -

Christiansted Harbor, hospital
Christiansted Harbor, light...
Christiansted Harbor, pilots. . .
Christiansted Harbor, pon

charges

Christiansted Harbor, tele
graph

. . 207

251-3W>

470

Cookburn Hiirbor, buo;

Cockburn Harbor, lig

B 182

Cockroach Rock

CocoCav

Coooanut Plum CajB..
CocodrlloBay

Cojima River

.plies,... 71
as 72

Colombier Bay

Colombier Point

ichorage. 498
ireotloaB. 496

Colorado Port

Colorado Bboal

Colquboun Reef

Compadree Shoal

Conception Island

Conception Island, our
Conception Island, wat
Conch Cay

, 107,164

Conteronce Met

Congo Cay

ConsetBay

618

INDEX.

Page.

Conetantin Bay 278

Convento River 188

Ck)ok Shoal 422

CJooper Hole 477

Ck)oper Island , , 363

Cooper Bocks 363

Coquielle Shoal 266

Coral Bay 366

Coral Bay, directions 367

Coral Bay, tides 367

Coral Bay, water 367

Coral Harbor 367

Corcho Point 346

Cordillera, Chain of 330

Cordilleras Islets 330

Corona Shoal 386

Corona de Matemillos Reef ... "123

Corozos Cay 296

Corral Point 193

Corridon Point 273

'Corridon Point, anchorage . . _ 273

Corrientes Bay 195

Corrientes Cape 195

Corrientes Cape , anchorage . . _ 195

Cortes Bay 188

Coteaux Bay 290

Coteaux Point 290

Cotland Cay 40

Cotton Cay 101

Cotton Field Point 82

Cotton Tree Spit 203

Cotuy Town 296

Couillons Bank 435

Couronne Hill 450

Cousin Cove 226

Coutelas Bay 315

Cove, the 67

Cove Cay 98

Cow Bay Point 204

Cow Cay ..., 98

Cow Rock 378

Cow Rocks 412

Cow and Calf Rocks 375

Cow and Calves Rocks 478

Cow and Bull Rocks 65

Cowell Battery 373

Cowell Point 371

Crab Island 384

Crab Island, water 385

Crab Pond Point 222

Craigston Points 486

Crayfish Bay 499

Creek Point 88

Creek Pond 211

Cricket Rock 379

CriquetBay 438

Cristal Rang^ 1 118

CristoCay 130.

Cristobal Group iU

Cristobal Point 184

Cristobal River 187

Crocus Bay 395

Crocus Bay, anchorage 395

Crocus Bay, current 396

Crocus Bay , directions 395

Crocus Bay, dues 395

Crocus Bay, pilotage 395

Crocus Bay, supplies 395

Crole Rock., 402

Crooked Island 86

Crooked Island, anchorage ... 86

Crooked Island, group 86

Crooked Island, light 86

Crooked Island, supplies 87

Crooked Island , tides 87

Crooked Island , water 87

Crooked Island Passage 84

Crooked Island Passage, cur-
rent 85

Crooked Island Passage, direc-
tions ^

Cross Cay — 384

Cross Harbor 43

Crow Lane Harbor 18

Cruces Anchorage 123

Crumpton Point 451

Cruz Cape r 167

Cruz Cape, caution 168

Cruz Cape, light 167

Cruz Cay 186

Cruz del Padre Cay 133

Cruz del Padre Cay, light 133

Cruz del Padre Cay, water ' 133

Cuatro Reales Channel - 171

Cuba 106

Cuba, hurricanes 106

Cuba, remarks 106

Cuba, north coast ...

Cuba, north side , cnrrent

Cuba, shores of, caution

Cuba, south side, current

Cuba, south side, caution

Cuba, south side, winds

Cuba, west end, tides .««•

Cucana Bank — — .

Cucaracha Rocks

P«tft

216

113

29S

108

ftte

4B2

Ada

460

1 Village...

459

italna

277

ioud

462

482

lln

4(12 1

land Cay...

. 194

anchorage..

. 380 !

llrectlons --

381 1

lldoB

381 !

!>!1« 1

SSO i

light

- 380 I

■ 3tll 1

, water

:i02 ■

rbor

161 !

l.> '

377 '

.Int

377 1

1, tides

378 1

_ S. 4-'9 ■

dOB

wan Sea....

orlal

a Stream...

. r>. m

dines, the ..

489

loupe

43<)

tream

. ,i, :,(\:>

llque

4(li')

Currente, Mona Pusage 5,3:

Currents, Pedro Bank 2^

Currents, Puerto Rico

Currents, Sombrero Island ... 5, If

Currents, South America,

Currents, St. Lucia 4'

CurrentA, Trinidad

Currents, Windward Islands. .

Currents, Windward Passage . 5, li

Curtain Bluff 4'.

Cutlass Point 21

Cuyaguatege River 1^

DamassinBay 21

Dame Marie Bay 2f

Dame Marie Bay, anchorage.. 2i

Dame Marie Cape 2^

Danes Bay 38

Darvill Spit -- 7

DaviaCove.- 22

DavyCay 3f.

Dead Chest Island 348, 3(]

Dead Chest Island, wat<;r 3J

DeadmenCays.- - 4

DeCaille Islet 4f

Deep Bay 41

De Horsey Patch 2(

Delaport Bay £

Denmark Banks 3f

Derpumbadero - 2S

Descubridor Shoal 3;

Desecheo Island 3£

Deshayes Bay 4;j

Deslrade Island 44

Deairado Island, currents, water 4-1

Deslrade Island, soundings. .. 44

Devil Point- 27

Devil Table -. 21

De Volet Point 47

Diable Mount-.- 21

Diablo Bay 3S

Diablo Mount - 193, K

Dlablotin Mountain 4!"

Diamant, Mome du 4.'i

Diamante de Af uera Shoal IC

Diamond Bank 4^

Diamond Cay_ , 31

Diamond Channel 4;

Diamond Islet-- 323,48

Diamond Point 76,32

Diamond Bock-- --..323.408,43

Diana Bank f

520

INDEX.

Page.

Diana Cay 134

Dlavolo Point .-- 386

Diego Cay .-. 148

Diego Pass 148

Diego Perez Cay 184

Diego Perez Cay, light 184

Diego Perez Channel 184

Difuntos Point 152

Ding-a-Ding Bay 420

DiosCay 187,194

Dios Cays 150

Dittless Point 368

Dixon Hill 83

Doce Leguas Labyrinth 172

Doce Leguas Labyrinth Bank. 172

Doctor Reef 220

Dog Island 378,397

Dog Island Channel 397

Dog Island Cut 378

Dog Island Rocks 47

Dog Island, tides 398

Dog Islets 362

Dog Rock 368

Dollar Harbor 45

Dolly Cays 55,381

Dolphin Head 191,223

Dominica Island 446

Dom inica Island , caution 448

Dominica Island, climate 448

Dominica Island, government. 448

Dominica Island , tides 448

Don Diego Bastion 305

Don Juan Thomas Cay 153

Dorne River 469

Double Rock . 481

Double Breasted Bars, the 41

Double-headed Shot Cays 46

Double-headed Shot Cays,

liffht 46

Double-headed Shot Cays, tide 47

Douglas Bay 451

Douglas Channel 61

Douglas Channel, directions.. 61

Douglas Channel, tides 61

Douglas Road 61

Douglas Rocks 61

Dove Cays 483

Dover Point 237

Dow Hill 420

Dowling Shoal and Islet 394

Drax HallRiver 234

Drew Hill 422

Drick Bay 291

Drift Bay 374

Drift Bay Beach 374

Drift River 240

Drowned Island - 3o«

Drunkenmans Cay 212

Dry Harbor 232

Dry Harbor, anchorage 233

Dry Harbor, directions 232

Dry Harbor, supplies 233

Dryrocks, eastern 27

Dryrocks, western 27

DryShingle 190,483

Dry Shingle Key 28

DryTortugas 31

Dry Tortugas, light 26

Dryad Shoal 319

Duaba Beach 112

Duaba Point 112

DuabaRiver 112

Duck Key 39

Duck Key, light 39^

Duck Point 381

Dunbar Shoals 102

Dunkerque Point - - 460

Dunmore Point 65

Dunmore Town 65

Duns Point 229

DuPlessisBay 438

Duquesne 499

DurloeCays 376

Dutchman Cap 378

Duvernette Islet 476

EagleMount 387

Eagle Shoal 367

Earthquakes 8

EastCabris Hill 450

East Caicos Island , 95

East Cay 102,324,397

EasbChannel 206,211

East Channel, directions. . .208, 209, 211

East Dry Rocks 27

East Flamand Bay 318

East Guano Cay

East Harbor ..^

East Harbor, anchorage

East Harbor, mail

Ea&t Isaac -

East Middle Ground

EastPoint ^ 248

East Reef 91

Eitet Triangle Rock

irt, directions

» Islet

)HIU

I directions

:o, anotior&^

de Baraooa Peak . .

, caution

light

r, the

[stand

[sland, directionB .
[sland, eaat aide - - -

island, pilot§

[slaud, point

[aland, tides

Etook

kP«

trbor, beacons

krbor, directions...
irbor, pilots, dues. .
j-bor, supplies

Point

Pprt lei

Port, ancliorage . . .
Port, directions

^ys

Harbor - -
mlng— .

Eetaca Point

Eatancia Colorado Bay

EsteroBalzB Arriba

Esterode Mo»-

Estero Nuevo Greek

Esteron Shoal

Estrella Point

EstudlosBank

EtronduPorc

Eustatia Islet

Exchange Bay

Exvima Harbor

. Gxuma Harbor, directions

I Ex u ma Sound

, ExuinaGreat, Island

ExumaGreat, Island, pilots ...

Exuma Little, Itiland

I FdbricaCroek

' PibricaGroupl

Factory Cays

Fsjardo Port .•

PajardoPort, channels

Fajardo Port, directions

Fajardo Port, pilots -

Fajardo Port, quarantine dues

Fajardo Port, supplies

Falcones Cays

Fallen Jerus^em Islet

Falmouth

Falmouth, ballaat ground

I Falmouth, buoys

I Falmouth, current

I Falmouth, directions

I Falmouth, entrance

Falmouth, quarantine ground.

Falmouth, supplies .--

Falmouth Harbor ___

Falmouth Harbor, directions. .

Falmouth Harbor, peak

Falmouth Harbor, pilots and

FalaeCape 286,2

False Cape, current

False Diamond. Rock

Faluch (Middle) Passage

Fanchon I'oint

Fancy Pass

Fandueo Cay

I Fantaaque Point

Fayotte

I Fawn Shoal

522

INDEX.

Feliciano Shoal 140

Ferdinanda de Xagiia 181

FeretBay 324

Fernandez Cay 81

Ferris Point . 422

Ferro Port and Harbor 385

Ferry Bay and Point 438

FigtreeBay 237

FifiTuera Point 346

Finley Cay 67

Flsga Point 188

Fish Bay 368

Fish Cays 87,98

Fish Cays , anchorage 87

Fish Muds 41

Fisherman Bay 204

Fisherman Ledge 163

Fisherman Point 162

Five Fathom Hole Anchorage 17
Five Fathom Hole Anchorage,

leading mark 17

Five Island Harbor. 422

Five Island Harbor, directions 422

Five Islands, the 403,422

Flag Hill Peak 374

Flag Point 233

Flamand Bay ..-. 321

Flamand Point 318

Flamands Roads 457

Flamands Roads, directions . . . 457

Flamenco Cay 184,194

Flamenco Channel 194

Flamencos Bay 284

Flamingo Cay 72

Flanagan Island 364

Flanagan Pass. 364

Flanagan Pass, directions b64

Flat Cap Point 395

Flat Cays 89,374

Flat Island 402

Flat Top Hill 421

Flechas Point 292

Fleeming Channel 62

Fleeming Channel, beacons. .. 62

Fleeming Channel, directions. 62

Fleeming Channel , tides 62

Fleeming Key 27

Fleur d'Epee Fort 434

Flirt Rocks 398

Florida Cape 26

Florida Coast 23

Florida Keys. 25

Florida Reefs, day marks 26

Pace.

Florida Straits 22

Florida Straits, coast U

Florida Straits, description ... 22
Florida Straits, general direc-
tions 33

Florida Straits, Gulf Stream.. 6
Florida Straits, life-saving sta-
tions 24

Florida Straits, lights 24

Florida Straits, reef beacons . . 26

Florida Straits, winds 23

Folle Point ::-. 444

Folly Point 239

Pond Blanc 468

Fond d'Orr Bay 468

Fond la Grange Bay 268

Fontaine Bay 316

Fork Mountain 394

FormigasBank 199

Fort Hill 401

Fort Islet 280

Port Point 231, 236, 256, 464, 479

Fort Alexander 280

Fort Augusta --- 209

Fort Augusta, light 210

Fort Barrington _.- 425

Fort Bizolton 280

Fort Burt Point 365

Fort Byham 427

Fort Castries 275,471

Fort Charles 206,413

Fort Charles Beach 207

Fort Charlotte 58, 364, 470, 476

Fort Crossbill 468

Fort Dauphin Port, bay 261

Fort Dauphin Port, tides 261

Fort Fincastle 58

Fort George 483

Fort George Cay 96

Port Georfire Point 493

Fort Henrietta 93

FortJames, light 424

Fort Jefferson — 31

Fort Jeudy Point 496

Fort Louisa Augusta

Fort Matachin

Fort Montague

Fort Napoleon

Fort Oscar Bluff

FortPicolet

Fort Rodney

Fort St. George

Fort St. Louis ^'"

INDEX.

523

Page.

Port San Francieioo 259

Fort San Joe^ 305

Port San Orange 409

Port Stewart Bay 237

Port Victoria 205

PortVitton 264

Port Young 448

Portde Prance 456

Port de France y anchorage 457

Port de Franoe, boat landings. 457

Port de France , buoyage 457

Port de France , cannon 457

Port de Prance, dock 457

Port de France, pilota 456

Fort de France, signal station. 454

Port de France, supplies 457

Fort de France Bay 456

Fort de France Ba^^ Car^nage,

lights, buoys, etc 458

Port de France Bay, directions 457

Fort de France Bay , lights . . . 458

Fort de France Bay, tide 457

Fortune Island 87

Fortune, Morne - 470

FosoRoad 277

Fota Islet and Channel 487

PouCape 272

Fouillola Point 435"

Fouillola, beacon and light . . . 435

Four-Fathom Bank 428

Fourche Islands 403

Fourche Islands, anchorage . . . 404

Foumier Point 316

FournisReef 407

Fourreur Islet 473

Fours Channel 459

Fous, Morne--- 452

Fous, Point des 452

Powey Rocks, beacon 26

Fowey Rocks, light 24

FraderaRock __ 129

PragAta Point 257

FragosoCay 128

Fraile Islet 259

'^aile Point 109

•aile Rock 313

iilecito Point 109

Jin9ai8 Cape 262

m^ais Port 266

jrnc^sCay 127

anc6s Cay, anchorage 127

'anc^s Cay, water, light 127

uio^s Point 191

Pftge.

France Port 191

fVanc^s Port, water 191

Frances Viejo Cape 254

Francis Bay 36S

Francis Cape 188

Fran9ois Anchorage 462

Fran9ois Bay 462

Frankford Bank 28

Frankfurt Point 235

Frazers Hog Cay 51

Prederichsted 391

Frederichsted, hospital 391

Prederichsted, lights 392

Frederichsted , supplies 391

Frederichsted Bay 391

Frederik Battery 372

Frederik Point 371

Frederik Knoll 371

Free Point 236

Freeman Bay 418

Freeman Point 41^

Fregate, Cul-de-sac 462

Fregate de has Islet 434

Fregate de haut Islet 434

Fregate le Croissant 278

Fregatte Island 406

French Cay. 99

Frenchman Bay 219

Frenchman Cap Island 370

Frenchman Cay 365

Frenchman Point 249

Fria Cave Rock 109

Friars Cap 223

Friendship Bay 479

Friendship Point 482

Frigate Channel 48a

Frigate Islet 486,488

Frigate Islet, anchorage 485, 488

Fries Cays

Frozen Cay

Frys Bay

Fungy Bowt Channel
Fungy Bowt Rock - . .

348
50
421
383
383

Galfac Hill 467

Galafre River 188

GalateaRock 204

GaleraPass 149

GalerasPort 254

Galet Anchorage 278,442

GaletBay 278

Galet Point 278

524

INDEX.

Page.

Calindo Cay « water 133

GalinditoCay 133

Gallon Bay 462

Gallon Bay, directions 463

Gallon Bay, pilots 463

Gallon River 462

Gallardo Bank 346

Gallegos Point 149

Galley Bay 423

Gallina Point 235

Galliot Cut 69

Gallows Point 209

Garden Key 31

Gardener Rocks 83

GamachaBay 146'

Gaspar Point 165

Gaspas Point 188

Gatas Islets 350

Gato Point 188

Gavilan River 181

Gavilancito River 181

Geneva Estate 452

George Dog Islet 362

George Fort 18

George Island 64

Georgetown 478

Georgia River 226

Geronimo Point 146

GibaraPort 120

Gibara River and Saddle 120

Gibbs Hill 18

Gibbs Hill, light 18

Ginger Cay 77

Ginger Island 362

Gingerbread Ground 48

Glass Window, the 64

Glover Island 495

GnatPoint 360

Goat Cay - 49

Goat Head ..- 420

Goat Head, Channel 420

Goat Hill 423

Goat Hill Bay 423

•Goat Island 216,407

Goat Point 495

Gobernadora Point 151

Golding Cay 54

Goleta Point 254

Gom^reBank 293

GonaKves Bay 1 274

Gonalves Bay, direction 274

GonaYves Bay, tides 275

GonaXves Bay, town 274

Gonatves Bay, port charges . . . 274

Gonave Bank 1 277

Gonave Channel - 281

Cronav^ Island 277

Gonave Island, anchorage 278

Gonave Island , current 278

Ganave Island, northeast coast 278

Gonave Island, southeast co^st 278

Gonave Island, south west ooast 278

Gonave Island, water 279

Goods HUl »5

Gorda Bank 166

GordaCay 43

Gorda Cay, water 43

Gorda Point 120, 154, 165, 181, 202

Gorda Rock 10©

Gorda Sound 360

Gorda Sound, anchorage 361

Gorda Sound, beacons 360

Gorda Sound , directions 360

Gorda Sound, tides 361

Gordas Channel 186

GouldingCay 69

Gourde Islet 441

Government- Hill -- 96

Governor Harbor 66

Governor Harbor , water •• 67

Governor Island - 15

Goyave 437

Goyave Anchorage 437

Goyave Bay 489

Goyave Island - ♦. 438

Goyave Point 433

Gozier Islet 433

Gozier Islet, light 434

Gracla Point 121

Grampus Shoals t 383

Gran Boucaud Point 288

Gran Piedra Mountain 164

Granchora Anchorage .J 299

Grand Bay 278,452,481,487

Grand Cays 41

Grand Point 269

Grand Reef 284

Grand AnceBay L

Grand Anse Bay — . 285,

Grand Anse Town —

Grand Bacolet Bay —

Grand Baleine

Grcmd Cayman

Grand Cayman, anchorage

Grand Cayman, caution

Grand Cayman, supplies ......

443

and 98

lutlon 96

..'. 402

Onwd Cul de S«o Bay 470

Gnud Cul de Sao Marine 439

Gnuid Gul de Sac, pilots 439

Grand Eatero River 264

Grand Etangr Lake 490

Grand Go*TC Bay- - 282

Grand laleU 446

Grand MalBa; 499

Grand Mai Bay , anal)oragp« . . . 499

Grand Marlgot Bay 269,451

Grand Pauvr« Bay 499

Grand P^erra Bay 275

Grand Savanna -. 450

Gr«nd Savanna, anchora^ 450

Grand Savanna, wood and

water .., 450

Grand Sec Bay 438

Grand SouIrlSre Range 462

Grand Turk lalond 102

Grand Turk Island, anchorage 100
Grand Turk Island, ballast

ground ^ 100

Grand Turk Island. Ufrhte 103

Grand Turk Island, pilots, dues 103

Grand Turk Island, steamers.. 103

Grand Turk Island, wreck 100

Grande Bay 399,434

Grande Bay, directions 400

GrandeBay^ light 400

Grande B»y, port charges 400

Grande Bay Point ^. 289

Grande Bay River 277,318

Grande Anse Bay 438

Grande Anse d'Arlet Bay .• 458

Grande Anse du Diamant 468

Grande Coulto Ease 439

Grande Pbbs and Bay 433

Grande River 439

Grande Saline Bay 407

Grande Terre 430

mde Vigie Point 440

ands Goaiere Bay 315

anja Banks 25«

■anjaHUi 257

anja Point 258

tntPort 385

apinCay 203

sasCay 368

isy Bay, anchorage 17

£X. 525

Gravols Point 291,328

Gray Islet 4»ft

Great Breaker 224

Great Cut 101

Great Harbor 363

Great Harbor, directions 363

Great Harbor Cay 49

Great Reef 322

Great River ,. _ 227,490

Great River, directions 228

Great Abaco laland- 38

Great Abaco Island, anchorage 39

Great Abaco Island, oautloa . - 39

Great Abaoo lalaod, Ughte 39

Great BaooletBay 491

Great Bahama Bank___ 43

Great Bahama Bank, caution . 52

Great Bahama Bank, directions 51

Great Bahama Bank, tides - 52

Great Bahuna Bank, north-
west end - 4S

Great Bahama Bank, south

side 75

Great Bahama Bank, south

side, directions 77

Great Bahama Bank, south-
west side 46

Great Bird Island 428

Great Breaker 224

Great Cabrae Island 33S

Great Camanoe Island 362

Great Carenilge Bay 486

Great Cay k I'Eau 324

Great Cay Channel 446

Great Cayemites Island 284

GreatCruzBay 368

Great Dog Islets 362

GreatEgg HUl 63

Great Egg Island-- 63

Great Egg Iflland, light 64

Great Emma Island 6ft

Great Exuma Island, pilots ... 3S

Great Grouper Jalete 404

Great Guana Cay 40

Great Harbor 49,382

Great Harbor, directions 49

Great Harbor Cay 60

Great Inagua Island 91

Great Inagua Island, light 94

Great Inagua Island, east

coast. W

Great Inagua Island, north

coast 81

526

Great Inagua lalaod, south

coast d2

Great InagvLA Islaad, west coast 03

Great Isaac _ 43

Great Isaac, dangerous shoal

near 43

Great Isaac, light 43

Great Krum Bay 373

Great Lameshur Bay 368

Great Meste Bay 320

Great Monkey Hill 410

Great North Side Bay 374

Great Pillory 481

Great Piflero Islet ..^ 332

Great Pond Bay 391

Great EUgged Island 73

Great Ragged Island, water .. 73

Great Saline Bay 407

Great Sister Islet 424

Great Stirrup Cay 49

Great Stirrup Cay, light 49

Great Stirrup Cay, tides 50

Great St. James Island 374

Great Tobago Island 375

Green Bay 211

Green Cay 55,83,375,388

Green Cay Anchorage 60

Green Island 226,417,498

Green Island Harbor 225

Green Island Harbor, direc-
tions 225

Green Turtle Cay 41

Green Turtle Cay, supplies ... 41

Green TurtleCay, tides 41

Green Turtle Cay, water 41

Gregerie Channel - « 373

Gregerie Channel ( East) 373

Gregerie Channel (West) 373

Gregerie Channel, anchorage. 373

Gregerie Channel , bank 373

Gregerie Channel, directions . 373

Gregerie Channel, tides 373

Grenada Island 490

Grenada Island, caution 491

Grenada Island, directions 491

Grenada Island, the coast.. 497, 498, 499
Grenada Island, tides and cur-
rents 491

Grenada Islands, winds 491

Grenade, Cul de sac 460

Grenadiers Ledge 407

Grenadines 479

Grenadines, tides, currents ... 480,489

Grenville Bay 498

Gren yille Bay, caution . . ...•. . 498 -

GrenviUe VUlage m

Griflgrifl Point ^ 439

Groe Cape 44«

Gro8 Islet .278,446,473

Groe Islet Bay 473

Groe Islet Bay, directions 473

Groe Islet, Banc du 458

Groslslet VUlage 473

Groe Loup 467

GrosMome - ... 438

Grosse Cay 318

Groese Pointe Port S4

Grotte Rock 462

Grouper Islet 400

Grouper Rocks ..._ 405

Grouper $hoal 382

GuaCays 169

GuaPoint 169

Gua River 169

Guadeloupe Island 431

Guadeloupe Island, climate ... 431
Guadeloupe Island, earth-
quakes 432

Guadeloupe Island, Interpre-
ters _ 431

Guadeloupe Island, mails . . .« . 431

Guadeloupe Island,north coast. 439

Guadeloupe Island, pilots .... 431
Guadeloupe Island, port

charires — * *.... 431

Guadeloupe Island, rain ...... 431

Guadeloupe Island, rollers .... 441

Guadeloupe Island, telegraph. 431
Guadeloupe Island, tempera-
ture 431

Guadeloupe Island, winds 431

Guadeloupe Island, west coast. 438
Guadeloupe Island, west coast

currents 439

Guadeloupe Island, winds and

currents 498

Guadeloupe Reef 342

Guarda-la«vaca, shore

Guardaraya de Tacobo, cove . .

Guardaraya Point

Guardaraya River

Guardhouse Point ...

Guasimal Creek

Guarabo Anchorage

Guarabo Point

Guarabo River

INDEX.

527

Ouayacanes

Guay aoanes Anchorage

Ouayaoanea Point

GuayamaBeef

Guayama Roadstead

Guay ama Boadstead,direction8

Guayanilla Bay

GuayanUla Port and Point ...

Guayximico River

Guespes River

Guijano Port

GuillermoCay

Gain Bays

Guinchos Cay

Gulf of Batabano

Gulf Stream

Gull Rook

Gun Creek

Gun Cay

Gun Cay, anchorage

Gun Cay, light

Gun Cay Ledge

Gun Cay Point

Gustaf Harbor

Gustaf Harbor, directions

Gustavia (Gustaf )

GuadianaBay

Guadiana Point

Guadiana River

GuajabaCay

Guajaba Island

Guajabana Mount

Guajaibon Peak

Guallean Point and River

Guana Bay

Guana Island

Guanaba

Guanae Point

Guanaja

Guanajibo Point

Guanid Leap

Guanal Point

Guanayara River

Guane Town

sines River

&nica Port

anica Port, directions

mima Cays

anima River

anitoBay

miquilla Point

miquilla Shoal

njay Point

298
302
158
346
347
347
352
352
180
276
353
126
113
77
183
6-8
48
360
44,207
• 44
44
208
208
405
406
405
146
146
146
123
123
127
144
334
429
429
296
109
124
341
109
109
181
146
146
352
352
187
187
169
344
345
122

Pageb

Guano Cay 403

Guano Island 362

Guano Island, rollers 357

Guanos Point 138,156

Guantdnamo Port 161

Guant^amo Port, cable 162

Guantdnamo Port, directions . 163

Guantdnamo Port, dues 162

Guantdnamo Port, pilots 162

Guant^amo Port, water 162

Guantdnamo River 162

Guaraguao 300

Hacha Channel 187

Hache Island 436

Haines Cay 50

Haiti 251

Haiti, south coast, current 5, 300

Haiti, southeast coast, tides ... 298

Haiti, westcoast, winds 274

Haiti, winds and seasons 252

Haiti Cape 262

HalfmoonBay 213,417

HalfmoonCays 215

Halfmoon Shoal 31

Halifax Bay ...- 499

Halle Point 275

Hambre Cay 194

Hamilton Harbor 18

Hamilton Island 18

Hammock Rock 349

Hams Bluff 387

Hanover Sound 60

Hanover Sound, tides .60

Hans Lollick Channel, direc-
tions 376

Hans Lollick Island 376

Hans Lollick Rock 376

Harbor Island 65

Harbor Point 71,367

Harbor Rock 231

Harbor Shoal 203-207

Hardy Bay 496

Harrison Point 600

Hat or Flat Island 402

Hattie Weston Reef : 153

Haulover Point 96

Haut du Cap River 262

Haut Pond Banks , 258

Havana 138

Havana, anchorage dues 140

Havana, buoys , beacons 140

Havana, directions. 141

528

INDEX.

Page.

Havana, docks - 139

Havana, light 141

Havana, mooring charges 140

Havana, pilots 139

Havana, rates 140

Havana, semaphore 140

Havana, storm signals 140

Havana, tides 141

Havana, time signal 140

Havana, tonnage tax 140

Havana, tug-boats 140

Havensight Point 371

Havre du Robert .- 462

Havre du Robert, directions - - - 462

Hawk Channel 23

Hawks BUI Bank - 357

Hawks Rock 423

Hawks Nest Anchorage and

Point 81,101

Hawks Nest Anchorage, direc-
tions ,— . 81,101

Hawks Nest Islet 50

Healthshire (or Helflhire) Bea-
con 213

Healthshire Hummock 213

Hembra Opening 108

Hembra Point 108

Hen Island 16

Hen and Chickens Islets 43

Hen and Chicks Rocks 403

Henderson Port 208

Henne Bay 273

Henri Cape 262

Henri Islet 319

Henrietta Fort 93

Henry Banks 44

Herman Reefs 357

Hermanos Islets 330

Hermanos Passage 330

HermanosRocks 330

Hernandez Point 295

HerraduraBay 120

Herradura Cays 127

HerreraRocks 110

Herrero River 336

Hetzel Shoal 23

Hicacal Cay 131

Hicacal Light 101

Hicacal Point 163

Hidden Harbor 161

Higgs Island 18

High Breaker 383

High Cay 54

Highborn Cay 67

Highborn Cut 68

Highborn Cut, tides — 68

Highgate 601

Hijos Guillermo Cays 127

Hill ol the Leapers 4d»

Hillaby Mount 499

HillsboroBay 486

Hil Isboro Bay, directions . 487

Hinchinbroke Elocks 8a

Hobson Breaker 74

Hodge HiU .1 426

Hodge Point 427

Hog Cay 7a

Hog Island - 56,496

Hog Island, light 66

Hog Point 73,366

Hog Fish Cut 16

Hogsnest Point 868

Hogsty^Reef - 06

Holand6s Point 196

Hole Town 601

Hole in the Wall 38

Holein the Wall Point 39

Hole in the Wall Point, light. 89

Holguin Port 120

HolmesCay j 60

Homenaje Point 394

Homers Cove « 224

Hondito Point lU

Hondo River 181

HoneycombReef 221

Hook Sand 61

HopeBay 837

Hopewell Rock 231

Horseshoe Channel ^ 417

Horseshoe Reef 300,367,484

Horseshoe Reef, tides 361

Horseshoe Point 412

Hospital Bay 274,287

Hospital Cay 163

Hospital Point 287

Hospital Reef 226

Howe Port 80

Hudson Point

Humacao Port an d River .....

Hummocks, the ..... ..

Hunt Bay i

Hurricane Hill

Hurricane Hole 6f

Hurricanes, general informa-
tion

Hurst Shoals .•

INDEX.

529

Ibard Point 287

IcacasBayand Point 334

IcacoB Point _ 123,135

Icacos Rocks 351

IcaqueBay 269

Icaque Point 269

loely Rock 74

Iguanojo Point 177

Iguanojo River, water 177

Imia Beach 158

ImiaPoint 159

Imia River, anchorage 158

Inagtia Island, Great 91

Inagua Island, Little 91

Inagua Islands, pilots 38

Indian Cay 42

Indian Cays 194

Indian Creek 418

Indian Point 192

Indian River 24,192,450

Indian Rocks 3W

Indian Town Point 429

Indio Passage 353

In^s de Soto Cay 149

Infernito el, islet 297

Inginac Shoals 280

Ingles Point 168

Ingleses Islets 193

Ingleses Point 147

Inner Channel 41

Inner North Passage 376

Inner Shoal 231

Invisibles Rocks 359

Ireland Island, dock 18

Ireland Island, tides 18

Ireland Island , time signal 18

Irish Shoal 424

IroisBay 288

IroisPoint 288

Irois Village 288

Iron Coast 271,318

IronHills 138

IrvinsBay 498

^"-ftc Shoal 31

bella de Torres Mountain . . 255

bella Bay 257

bella Bay, supplies 257

bellaCape 257

bella Town 385

twlla II. Village 386

>of Pines 190

of Pines, east coast 193

18402 34

191
193
302

Isle of Pines, south and west

coasts

Isle of Pines, tides

IsletaCay

Jaba Bay and Point 159

JacaquaPort 348

Jacaqua River 348

Jack a Dan Islet 486

Jack Taylor Reef 189

Jacks Bay 236

Jacks Hole 219

Jackson Point 248,254

Jackson Port 254

Jacmel 316

Jacmel, anchorage dues 317

Jacmel , directions • 316

Jacmel, dues 317

Jacmel, land and sea breezes.. 317

Jacmel, pilots 317

Jacmel, steamers 317

Jacmel, supplies 317

Jacmel Bay u.. 316

Jacmel Cape _ 316

Jaguey Point 149

' JaimaQeta River 154

I Jaina River 306

' Jaitecico Hill 113

Jamaica Bay ^ 88

Jamaica Cay 72

Jamaica 201

Jamaica, earthquakes 201

Jamaica, hurricanes 201

Jamaica, north coast, current- 5
Jamaica, north coast, wind and

weather 228

Jamaica, population 201

Jamaica, south coast, currents. 205

Jamaica, seasons 201

James^ Cistern , 67

James Fort and Bluff 424

James Hill 92

James Point 65

James Town 501

Jaquet Point - 451

Jaragua Beach 114

Jaragua Point. 114

Jaragua Port 115

Jardinesand Jardinillos Bank. . 188

Jarro Point 121

JarucoBank 138

Jaruco Hills 138

530 INI

Jaruco River — 138

Jaruco Tower 138

Jatibonlco River 173, 1&^

Jatibonico River, water 1T6

Jftuco C«ve - 157

Jauoo River- loT

JauUCay 126

Jayau River 296

Jean Bart Reef 2U1

Jefferson, Fort 31

J^rdmleBay 285

Wremle Point --- 285

J^r^mUTown 285

Jer vis Roadstead _ 17

Jlbaracon Point --- 112

Jioaco Islet- 296

Jlcaco Port and Point 296

Jlcaco Port, caution 296

Jicaqulto Bajr 257

Jiffuero Point 341

JoaBay Ifll

JobaboBay 179

Jobabo Point 179

JobosPort 347

Johnson Point 478

Johnson Islet 421

Johnaon Reef 368

Joj.". Bay - 157

Joju Bay, anchorage 158

JojdLeap 157

JoJA River and Point 15«

Jose Mount.. 191

Joseph Islet 287

Jost Van Dyke Island 375

Joultera Cays- 54

JuanCtaro Cay 121

Juan d'Olio, anchoratfe 302

Juan Luis Cays 185

Juan Rabel Bay 271

Juan Rabel Bay, current 271

Juan Rabel Point 271

Juan SaezHill 124

JuanitaPort 257

Judge Bay Point - 427

JuItBay- 291

Julia, Capo 327

Juliana Bay 307

Jumentoa, the 72

Jumentos Cays 72

Juniper Hole 96

Jupiter Inlet 24

Jupifer Inlet, light 24

Juratfua River 164

Jururu Port

JutlaaCay

JutlasCays

JutlBBPasB

JutlaaRoef

Kahousune Island

Kansan Reefs

Kelly HouBri

KendalPoint

Kettle Bottom Shoals 427

Key West -■-- *

Key West, buoya 28,29,30

Key W^st, communication K

Key West, dock ---- 2^

Key West, entrance channels. 'T.

Key West, entrance channels,

dangers -

Key West, entrance channels,

directions 28,29

Key West, harbor

Key West, hospital

Key West Island

Key West, light -..

Key West, pilots

Key Weal, quarantine

Key West, weather signals...

KlaerHiil

Klser Tower

Kick 'cm Jenny

Kid Point

King Point

King Rock

King Fish Banks

Kingston Harbor

Kingston Harbor .directions 208, 209,

Kingston Harbor, light-

Kingston, boat channel

Kington, coal --

Kingston, dues -,.

Kingston, pilotage

Kingston, quarantine

Kingston, steamers

Kingston, supplies

Kingston , telegraph

Kingston, turning marks

Kingston Bay, anchorage

Kingston Bay, cove

Kington Bay, current

Kingston Bay, directions

Kingston Bay, hoapitale

Kingston Bay, landing

INDEX.

531

Kingston Bay, light 476

Kingston Bay, pilotage 475

Kingston Bay, port charges . . 475

Kingston Bay , signals 476

Kingston Bay , steamers 475

Kingston Bay, supplies 474

Kingston Bay, tides 476

Kingston Bay , village 365

Kitridge Point 500

Knoll Point 371

Krausse Lagoon.. 391

KureaReef - 300

L» Anglais Islet 434

La Baleine 445

La Bella Paps 132

LaBoucheRock 467

LaCailleReef 468

LaCaletaBay 303

LaCaletaBay, pilots. 303

LaCampana 386

La Couronne Rock 441

La Croix Bay 288

La Cruz Cay 130

La Cruz Point 166

LaFlorieBank 473

LaGrasLoup 437

La Hotte Mountains 289

La Mare Point 454

La Perle Shoal 438

LaPlaineHill 452

La Plaine Hill Point 452

LaRocaCape 254

LaSorci^re 466

La Soye Point 451

LaSoyeReef 451

La Vega de Conception 295

La Vega Real 251

Laberinto de Doce Veguas,

bank 172

Laborie Bay 287

Laborie Point 287

Laborie Reef s 469

Laborie Village 469

jrellotte Point 472

ider Landing 408

dder Point 407

^oonHill 92

gunaCay 192

guna de Cortes 188

joBank 136

■laRock 255

mentin Bay and River 439

Fftge.

Lamentin Point 280

Lamottes Bank 204

Lances Point 226

Landrail Point 86

Landrail Rock 63

Lang Bank 390

Lantern Head 92

Lanzanillo Anchorage 129

Lanzanillo Cay. 129

Lanzanillo Channel 129

Larga Beach 118,191

Larga Beach Point 109

Larga Beach Reef 110

Large Islet 488

Large Islet Anchorage 488

Largo Bank 332

Largo Cay 152,163,189

Larikai Point 477

Lark Bank 365

Lark Channel 55

Lark Point 71

LasCartilas 295

Las Coronas Banks 345

Las Lavand^ras Shoal 184

Las Manohas Shoals 343

Las Manchas Shoals, buoys 343

Lataniers Point 323

Lateriana River 254

Laurant Point 499

Lavandera Point 150

Lavanderas, the 46

Lavanderas Rocks 332

Lavanderas Reef 76

Lavaud Bay 269

Layou Anchorage 450

LayouRiver 449

Layou Valley 448

Layu Bay 476

LeCailleRock 444

Le Diamant Rock 433,459

Le Grand-Mouton Shoal 264

Le Havre du Robert 462

Le Havre du Robert, anchor-
age 462

Le Havre du Robert, direc-
tions 462

Le Morne des Sauteurs. -.--,. 499

Le Petit Mouton Shoal 264

Le Precheur (the Preacher).. 455

Le Precheur Signal Station . . 454

Le Trompeuse Shoal 264

Leap of Jojo Point 157

Leavey Island 67

532

INDEX.

Ledwell Point 424

Lee Channel 881

Lee Channel, directions 381

Lee Passage 224

Lee Passage, directions 224

Lee Stocking Island 69

Leeward Passage 877

LeguaCay 150

Leinster Bay 369

Leith Hall Spit 203

Lei!aGays 145

L^ogane Point 282

L6ogane Town and Riyer 282

Leonards Hill 421

Les Peigues 437

Les Salntes Islands 444

Les Saintes Islands, directions

for 445

Les Saintes Islands, tides 446

Les Saintes Islands, water 444

Lesser Caymans, population . . 249

Levantados Cay 292

LeveraBay 499

Le vera Island 499

Leviza Cay 150

Leviza Pass 151

L'Hermitano Port 254

Liamuiga Island - 274

Liaro Point. 274

LignumviteeCay ...v 50

Liguanea Mountain 213

Lima Bank 334

LimaPoint * 333

Limb6 Channel -. 268

Limb^ Islet 268

Limbo Point 268

Limb6 Point, caution 268

LlmeCay 206

Lime Cay Shoal 207

Limlair Bay 487

LimonadeBay 262

Limon Port 254

Limones Anchorage 169

Limones Cay 169

Limones River - 169

Lirio Point 292

List of H. O. Agents 563-565

List of H. O. Publications 557-562

Little Algarrobo Point. 341

Little Ambergris Cay 98

Little Bacaye 497

Little Bacolet Bay and River. 497

Little Bahama Bank- 38

Little Bahama Bank, tides... 41

Little Bahama Bank, west side 42

Little Bar 13

Little Bay i 224

Little Bird Islet 428

LittleCaioos »

Little Camanoe Island 362

Little Cayemi tes Island ^

Little Cayman 217

Little Cayman , anchorage 24S

Little Cruz Bay 368

Little Cruz Bay, anchorage. . - 368

Little Cruz Bay, directions.. . 368

Little Egg Island 63

Little Egg Island, anchorage. 63

Little Exuma Island - 70

Little Gonave Islet 278

Little Grouper Rocks 404

Little Hajia Lollik Met 376

Little Harbor 39,363

Little Harbor, light 39

Little Harbor Cay 50

Little Harbor Point 39

Little Inagu^ Island W

Little Isaacs 48

Little Jost Van Dyke Island.. 375

Little Marigot Cay 269

Little Martinique Island - 487

Little Martinique, anchorage. 488

Little Martinique^ caution 488

Little MesteBay 320

Little Mushroom Islet 488

Little Pedro Point 219

Little Pinero Islet 332

Little Plum Point 206

Little Ragged Island "4

Little Ragged Island, anchor-
age ''4

Little Bagged Island, tides. - . "^

Little St. James Island 318

Littlest. Vincent 484

Little Sale Cay ^^

Little San Salvador ^

Little Scrub Island 397

Little Sisters Rocks "^

Little Stirrup Cay 9

Little Thatch Islands 5

Little Tobago Islet.. 37 •

Little Turtle Rocks '^

Little Wickham Cay 5

Liverpool Shoal ^

Livisa Port ^

Lizard Rock ^

INDEX.

b3S

Liana Cay 173

Liana Point and Beach .^ 157

Lloyd Rock .- 74

LoboeCay 76

Loboa Cay, ligrht : 76

Locos Point 289

Loggerhead Buoy 32

Loggerhead Buoy , caution 32

Loggerhead Key- 31

Loggerhead Key, light 25

Loiaa River 336

Loma de Banao Peak 177

LombardoCove 267

London Bridge Rocks 493

Long Acre Point 220

Long Banks 52

Long Bar z^ 13

Long Bay 224,371,394,504

Long Cay ^ 56,87,98

Long Cay, anchorage 98

Long Cay, pilots 38

Long Island 70,427

Long Island, pilots 38

Long Point ....205,391,495

Long Point Shoal ._ 495,501

Long Point Shoal, anchorage. 495

Long Reef- 388

Long Wharf 216

Lords Castle 504

Lorton Rock 63

Loe AUares .: 164

Los Ballenatos Islets 122

Los Cabazos Shoal 154

Los Embarcaderos Point 336

Louis Port 440

Louis Port, anchorage, light. . 440

Loup Banane 463

Loup Bordelais — — 463

Loup Charpentier 463

Loup Garou 461

Loup Marsaillaia « 461

Loup Ministre 464

Loup St. Marie 464

Lovango Cay 376

N Cape 164

wCay 245

w Cay , anchorage . 246

¥er White Horses 205,273

idina Point 220

cea Point 226

creoia Point 118

'jrecia Point, light - 119

Page.

Luquillo. 336

Luquillo Mountain 330

LyfordCay 5©

Lynyard Cay 39

Mabouya Island 486

Macaguanigua River 112

Macao Point 297

Macao Port 297

Machos de Fuera Cay 175

MackieBank — 51

Mackie Bank, buoy 51

Macoris Point 254

MacorisPort - 254,302

MaoorisRiver 302

Macoris River, caution 302

Macoris River, water 302

Macou Island and Point 440

Macouba Point 466

Madame River 456

Madelaine Mountain 437

Maestra Mountains 164

Magallanes Bank 75

Magdalena Point 303

Magna River 296

Maguana Reef '116

Mahault Bay 442

Mahaut Bay • 439

Maho Point 322

Mahotidre Bay 278

Maid Island 428

Maiden Cay 206

Maidenlsland 422

Maiden Rock 206

Main Ship Channel.-. 29

Main Ship Channel, buoys 29

Main Ship Channel, directions 29

Majagua Point 352

Majana Bay 187

Maj ana Point 110

Major Rocks 86

Mai Ailo Point 161

Malaa Aguas Bay 149

Mai ague ta Inlet 121

Malahambre Bay 184

Malahambre Cay 185

Mala Pasa Anchorage 311

Mala Pascua Cape 334, 347

Malcolm Bay 220

MalcolmPoint 220

Malcolm Road 96

534

INDEX.

Paife.

Maldonado Point 336

Mai Pais River 193

Mamm6eBay 234

Mamelles Peaks 430

Mamora Bay 418

Man Island 65

Man of War Bay - . _ 94

Man of War Bay, water 94

Man of War Cay 40,70,93

Man of War Cay, anchorage.. 385

Man of War Cay, tides 40

Man of War Channel 40, 72

Man of War Channel, direc-
tions - 72

Man of War Harbor 26

Man of War Point 417,429

ManagtaPaps 138

Managuaco Beach 158

ManatiHill. 121

Manati Point. 175,296

ManatiPort 121

Manati River 339

Manchioneal Harbor 240

Manchiontfal Harbor, supplies. 240

Manchon de CabuUon 321

Mangle Bay Opening 108

Mangle Cay (Buba) 134

Mangle Point 115,188

Mangles Cays 145

Mangles Islets 193

Mangles Point 154,278

Mangli to Beach 110

Manglito Point 118

Mangorita Point 109

Mangrove Harbor -382

Mangrove Harbor, directions. 382

Manhattan Shoal 15

Manlmani River 151

ManimarPass 151

Manroux Island 435

Manroux Lighthouse 435

MantuaTown 146

Manuel Gomez Cays 173

Manzanillo Bay 169,260

Manzanillo Bay, anchorage ... 169

Manzanillo Bay , beacons 1 70

Manzanillo Bay, directions .-. 169

Manzanillo Bay , pilotage 170

Manzanello Bay , tides 170

Manzanillo Bay, water 260

Manzanillo Cays 169

Manzanillo Point 260

Mapurisi Point 114

Maravi Point 112

Maravi Port - 113

Maravi Por t,/8upplie8 113

Maravi Port, tides 113

Marca de Limones 16ft

Mardi Gras Shoal 264

Mare Islet 278

Marechaux Cape 316

Margarita Reef 353

Maria Aguilar Point 169, 178

Maria Islet 469

Maria Port 235

Maria Port, directions 236

MariaPort, pilot... 236

Maria Port, quarantine 236

Maria Port, supplies 236

Marias Point 267

Marie Galante Bay 417

Marie Galante Island 443

Marie Galante, light 443

Mariel Port 154

Mariel Port, buoys, and bea-
cons.._ 154

Mariel Tableland... 154

MarigotBay.. 401

Marigot Bay, directions 401

Marigot Bay, light 401

Marigot Bluflf 402

Marigot Harbor 470

Marigot Mount 268

Marigot Point 268,316

Marigot Town - 401

Mariguana Island ftO

Marillanes Bank . - - 130

Marin Point and Village 459

Marina Cay 362

Marinavo Bay 122

Marion Rock 46

Marion Rock , caution . 46

Mariposa Cays 131

Market Fish Cay 60

Marquesas Keys 31

Marquis Cape 467

Marquis Island -lo*

Martel

Martha Brae River

Martin Gfircia Point

Martinique Cay

Martinique Channel

Martinique Channel, anchor-
age

Martinique Island

Martinique Island, caution..

INDEX.

535

Martinique Island, climate ...
Martinique Island, currents .-
Martinique Island, east coast,

anchorage

Martinique Island, signal sta-
tions

Martinique Island, south coast,

anchorage

Martinique Island, winds

Mary Cays

Mary Point

Masio Port .._

Masio Port, directions

Massacre River..

Mata Point

MfitaPort *.

Mata Port, supplies

Mata Port, tides

Matanilla Reefs

Matanilla Shoal

Matansa Port

Matanza Port

Matanzas, buoys

Matanzas, hospitals

Matanzas, pilots

Matanzas, steamers

Matanzas, winds

Matanzas, Pan de

Matanzas Port and Town

Matanzas Port, anchorage

Matanzas Port, directions

Matanzas Port, supplies

Matanzas Port, tides, winds . . _

Matanzas Port, water

Matasola Point

Mate Cays

Mate Channel

Mateo Island

Maternillos Point

Maternillos Point, light

Mathew Town Road

Mathew Town Road, pilots . . .

Mathew Town Road, tides

Mathew Town Road, water ._.

inabo Port

unabo Town _

ya Point _

jrabeque Point

yabaque River

^agiiez _

j^agiiez, port charges

^agQez, quarantine

'ag(Jez> steamers

Page.

453

460

454

459
454

368
179
179
260
110
110
110
110
41
41
352
254
136
136
136
136
137
138
135
136
137
136
137
136
308
171
171
353
123
123
93
93
93
03
334
334

ia>

185
185
342
342
342
342

Page,

MayagQez , supplies 342

MayagQez Bay 341

MayagUez Bay, directions M4:

MayagUez Bay , lights 342

MayagQez Bay , tides 342

MayagUez River 341

Mayero Group 483

Mayero Islafid, anchorage 483

Mayeux Shoal 443

Maymon River 297

Mayors Hill 71

Maysi Bank 108

May si Bank, caution, currents . 108

Maysi Cape 107,156

Maysi Cape, light 107

MaysiReef 108

Maysi River ^ 108

McQueen Village 81

Mead Point 394

M^dano Islet 131

Medano Vizcaino Cay 1 88

Medanos de Manati Bank 175

Medanos de Manati Cay 175

Medee Shoal 407

Media Cay 163

Media Luna Cay 126,171

Media Luna Shoal 345

Medio Cay 128

Medio Mundi Point 332

Medio River 150

MeerenCay 3(i8

MellaBank 320

Melones Point 344

Melvil Cape 451

Memory Rock - 42

Memory Rock, tides 42

Mercurias Rock _ 376

MereenCay .- :>()8

Mesa de Manati - 121

Meseta Point 352

Meste Bays 320

Michelle Poinrt 448

Micond Port 408

Middle Bank 3^Hi

Middle Cay... 243,3^)7

Middle Cay Anchorage 243

Middle Channel 'HJl

Middle Ground 27, 52, 62, 381, 42r.

Middle Ground, beacon 27

Middle Ground Shoal 28

Middle Ground Shoal, buoys . . 28

Middle Isaac 48

Middle Passage 353,377

536

IND£X.

Pag«.

Middle Passage, tides 377

Middle Point 93,211,497

Middle Reef 420

Middle Sambo Shoal 27

Middle Shoal 41,122,231

Miel Anohorage 110

Miel Bay - 110

Miel Bay, supplies .' - . . Ill

Miel Beach Ill

MielRiver Ill

Milieu Bay 289

Milk River 218

Milk River, beacon 218

Miller Anchorage 66

Miller Hill 66

Mills Breaker 13

Mills Breaker Channel.... 13

MilpaBank 181

Milpa Point 181

Mingo Cay 377

Minister Head 286

Minos --.. 300

Minos Point 300

Miragohne Bay 282

Miragohne Bay, water 283

Miragokne Peak 283

Mira Por Vos Islets 88

Mira Por Vos Islets, tide and

current 89

Mitan Bank 464

MitanCay 461

Mitan Channel 461

Mitan Channel, directions 461

MoaCays 116

Moa Range, mountains 116

MoaRiver 116

Moco Point 220

Molas Point _ 134

Molasses Reef ._ _- 93

Molasses Road 92

Mollibeday Rock 403

MonaCay 133

Mona Island 327

Mona Island , caution 328

Mona Island , current 328

Mona Island, tide 328

Mona Island, water 328

Mona Passage 327

Mona Passage, current 5, 329

Mona Passage, directions 329

Moncrieffo Hill, signal 500

Mongon Cape 312

Monito Cay 133

PaC«L

Monito Island ..-.: 328

Monk HUl 419

Monkey Shoals 413

MonoCay 133

Mont Serral 136

Monte Chico Islet 260

Monte ChrlBti Anchorage 259

Monte Chri^ti Anchorage, di-
rections -- 259

Monte Christi Bank 258

Monte Chriflti Bay 269

Monte Christi Shoal 258

Monte Grande Islet! 280

Monterey Cay -- 186

MontesTO Bay ---.- 228

Montego Bay, anchorage 228

Montego Bay, communication. 229

Montego Bay , directions 229

Montego Bay, light 229

Montego Bay , supplies 229

Montego Point 228

Montezuma Shoal 482

Montrou Point 1 278

Montserrat Island 414

Montserrat Island, anchorage . 414

Montserrat Island , light 414

Montserrat Island, tides - 415

Moor Islet - 427

Moor Reef 222

Moors Point 386

Morant Bay ..^ 203

MorantCays 199

Morant Cays, anchorage - 200

Morant Cays , direo tions 201

MorantCays, current and tides 201

Morant Point 202

Morant Poin t, caution 202

Morant Point, light 202

Morant Point Reef 262

Morant Port 203

Morant Port, buoys 203

Morant Port, dangers 203

Morant Port, directions 203

Mordazo Cays '"'

Merely Hill

Morena Point -

Moretes Port -

Morgans BluflP

Morillo de Bahia Honda

Morillos Islets

Morne h. Vigie —

Morne de la Fortune

Morne des Guespes ...«...•-..

tMDEX.

537

Page.

Morne du Diable 450

Mome du Dlamant 459

Morne Fortune 470

Morrie FouB 452

Morne Garu Mountains 478

Morne Ronde Point 477

Morne Rouge 315

Morne Rouge Point 318

Moro Roxo Point 267

Morris Bay 421

Morris Old Mill 421

Morris Shoal 215

Morro Castle 138,164

Morro Fort 337

Morro Island 336

Morro of San Juan 336.

Morro Point 139,165,337

Morro Point, shoal off 139

Mortero Point 302

Moselle Bank 44

Moselle Bank, buoy 44

Mosquito Bay 374,382

Mosquito Bluflf 412

Mosquito Cay 319

Mosquito Cove 227,421

Mosquito Hill 421

Mosquito Inlet, light 24

Mosquito Island .-. 360

Mosquito Island, tides 36

Mosquito Point 374,421

Mosquito Rock 360

Mosquito Shoal 386

Mouchoir Bank 105

Mouchoir Carr^ Bank 105, 434

Mouchoir Carr6 Bank, buoy . . 434

Moule Port ^ 440

Moule Port, light 440

Moule k Chique Cape 468

Moule k Chique Peninsula 468

Mount Atalaya 345

Mount Belle vue 219, 364, 469

Mount Bruce , 448

Mount Chameau 444

Mount Concorde 451

►unt Daniel 449

unt Diablotin 450

unt Eagle 387

)unt Edgecumbe 222

)unt el Pilon de Azucar 253

>unt Folic 454

lunt Grand Bois 451

untGuajabane 127

unt Hardman Bay 496

Mount Hardman Point 496

Mount Hill 18

Mount Hillaby 499

Mount Marigot.- 268

Mount Misery 410

Mount Morltz 492

Mount Paix Bouche 452

Mount Pel6e. 452

Mount Pirata 384

Mount Pisgah 86

MountRedondo 297

Mount Sage 364

Mount Sama 117

Mount Sinai .-.^.-; 497

Mount St. Andrew 479

MountTartane 461

Mount Thomas 421

Mount Victoria 46§

Mountain Point 361

Moustlque Bay 270

MoutonRock 441

Mouton Vert Bank 434

MucarasReef 76

MuelaCay - 133

Muertos Beach 157

Muertos Cays 47

MuertoB Island - 348

Muertos Island , anchorage 349

Muertos Island . light 349

Muertos Island , wood and water 349

Muertos Point - 131

Muhlenfels Point 371

Mula Point 386

Mula Port 385

Mula Port, anchorage 386

Mula Port, caution 386

Mula Port, light 386

Mula Shoals 386

Mulas Point - 118

Mulata Bay, loading place 151

Muldtas Channel 180

Mulitas Channel, caution 180

Muldtas Reef 1^0

Mulatre Point 452

Mufio Point 180

Murray Anchorage 17

Mushroom Islet 488

Mushroom Rock 67

Musquito Bank _ 335

Mustique Island 4^1

Nags Head - 412

538

INDEX.'

Page.

Naguabo Port and Town 334

Naguabo, port dues 334

NaguaboBiver 334

NaguarageBay 113

Najallo River 306

Naranjo Point — 119

NaranjoPort 119

Naranjo Port, tide 119

Naranjo Port, wood and water 119

Naranjo Table 119

Narrows, the 13,412, 429

Narrows, the, anchorage 17, 412

Narrows, the, buoys 13

Narrows, the, pilots 12

Nassau _ 56

Nassau, anchorages , 58

Nassau, boat landing 59

Nassau, coal -- 56

Nassau, directions ^7

Nassau, dues 57

Nassau, eastern channel 59

Nassau, lights 56

Nassau , marine railway 57

Nassau, northwest coast 59

Nassau, pilots . -^ 57

Nassau, steamers 57

Nassau, supplies 56

Nassau, telegraph 57

Nassau, tides 58

Nault Bays- 287

Navas Port 113

Navassa Island 198

Navassa Island, anchorage 199

Navidad Bank 105

Navire, Anse de 456

Navv Island.. 238

Nayba, la 297

Necker Island 359

Needham Point 503

Needham Point, lights, spit . . 503

Negra Point 107,156

Negre Point 406,439

Negril Harbor 225

Negro Bay 226

Negro Point • 456

Negro Point, light 458

Nepfro Shoal 345

NeivaBay 310

Neiva River 2;")1,310

Neiva River, current 306

Nelson Port 82

Nelson Reef 255

Nettle Point 240

P3ce.

Nevifllsland 412

New Anchorage 62

New Bank 220

New Shoal..-. 1^5,207

New Bore Bank -. 245

New Bore Bank, anchorage. . . 246

New Fall Cliff 504

New Ground Shoal - - 31

New Providence Island 56

Nibujon Beach 114

Nibujon Point 114

NioolaReef 131

Nicolas Channel.- -. 46

Nigua River 306

Nigua River, caution 306

Nina Shoal - 34B

NipePort 117

Nisaito Anchorage 311

Nisaito River 311

Nisao Point and Roadstead . . . 306

Nisao Point, tide 306

Nisao River 251,306

Ni8€k) River, water 307

Nisibou River 297

NobushCay 72

Noire Point — - 43ft

Nombre de Dios Bay 149

NonsuchBay 429

Nonnettes Port- 326

Norman Island 363

Norman Pass 364

Norman Pond Cay 69

Normands Rivulet 31ft

North Bar Channel 39

North Cay 56

North End 451

NorthPoint 402,440

North Rock (Bahamas) 44, 67

North Rock ( Bermudas) 12

North Rock ( Mira Por Vos) . . . 88

North Rock Channels 13

North Sound 427

North Sound Point 42S

North Caicos Island 96

North Caicos Island, water

North Elbow Cay _

North Elbow Cay, light

North Negril Point

North Wager Anchorage

North Wager Rock

North Yack River-

Northeast Bank

Northeast Breaker

INDEX.

539-

Page

Northeast Cay 200,242,380

Northeast Cay, anchorage,

water 200.243

Northeast Cay and Point 92, 249

Northeast Cay and Rock 48, 49

Northern Channel 396

Northwest Cay 95

Northwest Channel 30, 383, 426

Northwest Channel, buoys 30

Northwest Channel, d 1 r e c -

tions 30

Northwest Channel, light 25

Northwest Point 91

Northwest Providence Chan-
nel 52

Northwest Ridge 245

NuevaGerona 191

Nue vas Grandes Port 121

Nuevitas Town 122

Nuevitas del Principe 122

Nuevitas del Principe, light.. 123
Nuevitas del Principe, mails.. 122
Neu vitas del Principe, pilots . 123
Nuevitas del Principe, steam-
ers 122

Nuevitas del Principe, sup-
plies 122

Nuevitas del Principe, tele-
graph _ 122

Nurse Cay 73

Nurse Channel - 73

Nurse Sandbanks 78

Obispo Islet 331

Ocampo River 159

Ocean Bight 92

Ocean Point 39

Ocho Rios 235

OchoRiosBay 235

OcoaBay 309

OcoaGulf _ 307

Ocoa Point.- 309

OcoaRoad 309

io Shoal 23

bin Bay and Town 503

del Toro Mountain 168

.Grande Reef 346

jian Reef 459

' Bahama Channel 46, 106

Bahama Channel, north

ie, tides 77

Bahama Channel, remarks 78

Old Bahama Channel, winds . .

Old Fort Point

Old Harbor

Old Road

Old Road Bluff

Old Woman Point

Oostenberg Peak

OraCabeza

Orange Bay

Orange Cay

Orange Islet

Orange Point

Orange Town _

Orange Town, anchorage, fort.

Ordnance Islands

Organos Mountains

Orient Bay

Oriental Point

i Ornen Rock

Oscar Fort

Oscar Fort Bluff

Otter Creek

Owen Rock

Owia Bay and Point

Oyster Pond Creek

Ozama River

Ozama River, aspect

Ozama River, tides

Ozama River, winds

Page.
79

229,421
216
420
419
475
400
235

225, 315

45, 319

225

225, 316
409
409
16
195
402
181
374
406
406
367
255
478
402
304
305
304
305

Packet Rock 371

Padre Point 183

Padre Port.. 121

Pagee Point 236

Paget Island _ 18

Pagoua Bay 451

Pagoua Point 451

PaixPort 269

Pajaros Point 117,358

Palada Cays -_. 380

PalancaCay 184

Palanca Shoal. 116

Palas Rock 133

Palenque Point 307

PalenquePort _ 306

Palisades 205

Palm Point 203

Palmas Atlas 339

Palmas Point 307

Palmetto Bay 504

Palmetto Point 66,91,237,416

Palmilla Point 299

640

INDEX.

Palmiste Pcdnt 28$

PalomaCay 293

PalomasCays 173

Palominos Islet 332

Pan de Azucar 177

PandeSama 118

PantonCove.. 49

Paradls Point 273

Paratte Point 220

Paredon Chlca Cay 126

Paredon del Medio Cay 126

Paredon Grande Cay 125

Paredon Grande Cay, light 125

Paredon Grande Cay , tides . - . . 126

Paredon Grande Cay, water _ . 126

Paredon Point 123

Pargo Channel 133

Parguera Village 353

Parham Harbor 428

Parham Pilots 424

Parham Sound 427

Parham^Sound, directions 427

Parham Town 428

Park Bay l... 278

Parker Bay 222

Pasabanao Point 175

Pasacaballos Point 181

Pasacaballos Point, caution. -_ 183

Pascal Point _.. 319

Pascual Islet 292

Paso Real Town ,... 146

Passage Cays _ 190

Passage Islands 379

Passed Caret 439

Passe a Colet 439

Passe des Troia Islets 458

Passe des Vaisseaux 438,445

Pastillo Port , 348

Pat6 Islet and Point 445

Patilla Point 257

Patillas Port and Bay 346

Patira Islet 315

Patte Large Bay . • 28.')

Patte Large Point 285

Paulino Point 320

PayaBay 303

Paz Bank J80

PeakoBay .-. 216

Pear Cay 72

Pear Cut 72

Pear Hummock 101

Pear Tree Bottom 233

PearlPoint 273

Pearl Point, anchorage 27 J

Pearl Rock... 464

PearnsHill 421

Pearns Point 42r

Pechems Point and Port 254

Pedemales Anchorage 415

Pedernales Bays 314

Pedemales Point and Hiver . _ 314

Pedro Bay 219

Pedro Bank 1 -.. 241

Pedro Bank, caution 241, 242

Pedro Bank, current 245

Pedro Bank, shoals. . . .^I, 242, 243, 244

Pedro Bank, tides _ 245

Pedro Bluflf 219

Pedro Cays 24^

Pedro Point 225

Peine, Pointe k 451

Velegrino Reef 341

Pelican Cay 386

Pelican Cays 40,215

Pelican Cays and Reefs 280

Pelican Channel 216

Pelican Harbor. 39^386

Pelican Harbor, tides 39

Pelican Island 364,501

Pelican Islet 422

Pelican Point ..- 400,422

Pelican Rocks 401

Pelican Shoals 422,501

Pelican Spit 209

Pena Pobre Reef 268

Penas Altas 136

Penas Blancas Point 340

Peniston 358

Penoncillo Point 350

Peauelas River 352

PepeCape ^. 191

Perdenales Point _ 191

Peres River - 454

P^rez Point 269

PerlaCay .._*../ 169

Pero Point 203

Perpetua Point 143,196

Perseverance Bay —

Pescadores Point 152,

Pesquero Nuevo Point

Pestel Town

Petatillos Banks... -

Peter Island -

Petit Bourg - -.

Petit Canal Bay

Petit Cannouan

INDkx.

541

Fuge.

Petit Cay 50

Petit Coy 482

Petit Cul de Sac Marin 434

Petit Goave Bay 282

PeUt Havre Islets 433

Petit Havre Point 433

Petit Marigot : 451

Petit Mustique 482

Petit Nevis Island 480

Petit Riviere Bay 269

Petit Souf ri^re Bay 452

Petit Trou 311,467

Petite Anse Bays, anchorage. 459

Petite Anse d' Arlet Bay 458

Petite Anse du Diamant Bay . 458

Petite Anse Villagre 262

Petite Martinique Islet 462

Petite Riviere Bay and Town. 286

Petite Terre 44J

Petite Terre, bank 443

Petite Terre, light 443

Petite Trou Village 283

Petrona Point 348

Phaeton Shoal 258

PhUippotCay 266

Philips Reef 95

Phillipsburg Town 400

Picara Point 374

Pioartes Bay 421

Pickle Bank 250

Picket Rock 44

Picket Rock, beacon 44

Pico de Potrerillo 177

Pico Teneriflfe 500

Picolet Point 262,283

Picuda Point 352

Piedra Grapin Islet 292

PiedraPoint 121

Piedras Bank 333

PiedrasCay 133,183

Piedras Cay , anchorage 1 34

PiedrasCay, light i;W, 184

PiedrasCay, tides 134

Piedras Point 191,196

edrasReef 183

edras Gordas Point 159

Sges Bay and Point 315

jrre Blanche Shoal 343

erre Head 273

erre Joseph Bay and Point. 2S7

fi: Point 74

_o:eonCay8 55,74,318

^eon I8lan4 215,473

Pigeon Islet

Pillar Rock and Light

Pillory Islets and Rocks . . .

Pilon Cays

Pilot Point

Pilot Rock

Pilot Rock Channel

Pilote River •

Piment Port

Pimeato Point

Pimlico Islands

Pinalillo Point

PinAr del Rio

Pinels Island

Pinels Island Reef

Pinero Islets

Pinipiniche Cays

Pinsonelle Cay

Pinsonelle Pass

Pintado Bank

Pintado, Coast of

Pintado Point

i PipaCay

Piraguas Islets

Pirogues Rocks

Piron Bay

Pit Bank

Pit Bank, buoy

Pitajaya

Pitajaya Passage

Pitman Cove

Piton Cr6 ve Coeur Hill

Pi ton Morne Gimie

Pitons

Pitons du Carbet

Pitre Point and Bays

Place Bartin

Placer Point

Placeres Blancos -..

Plaisance Mill

Plana Cays

Plana Cays, anchorage

Plana Cays, water

Plantain Garden Bay

Plantain Garden River

Plata, Puerto

Plata Point

Plateau au Carbet

Platform, the

Platform Bay, village

Platform Point

Playa Blanca Beach

Playa Blanca Beach, water

Page.

438.480
425
481
171

123, 173

383, 40g
383
459
273

222,290
62
146
188
402
403
337
171
460
460
156
156

107, 156
193
332
281
278
226
.226
363

67
459
466
466
452
314
454
152
298
433
89
90
90
240
240
255
113
454
273
273

314r

156
157

542

iiTdex.

Page.

Playa de Andres 303

PI aya de Caleta Beach 156

Playeta Beach.... 298

Playuela Point Ill

PlumPoint- 206

Plum Point, light 206

Plumajes Point 1-16

Plymouth Town and Anchor-
age 414

Plymouth, pilots and dues 415

Points a Peine 451

Pointe k Peine, tides 448

Pointe kPitr6 Bay 434

Pointe a Pitr6 434

Pointe a Pitre, beacons 435

Points h Pitre, directions .... 436

Pointe a Pitr6, hospital 435

Pointe a Pitr6, lighte. 435

Points a Pitr6, pilots 434

Pointe k Pitr6, steamers 435

Pointo a Pitre, supplies 435

Pointo a Pitre , telegraph 435

Pointe a Pitr6, tides 436

Points Chapeau 468

Pointu Dauphin ._ 467

Points de Cap 467

Pointy des Fous 452

Pointe Hardie 467

Pointe la Rose 458

Pointe Mammelles 467

Point6 Tarite 467

Pointe Tortus 467

Pointe Vierge 468

Polink Point 215

Ponce Bay 349

Ponce Town 350

Ponce Town, directions 350

Ponce Town, harbor rules 351

Ponce Town, light 350

Ponce Town, port charges li50

Ponce Town, supplies 350

Ponce Town, tides 352

Pond Point 380

Porgee Heads 381

Pork Fish Rocks 60

Porpoise Rocks - 374,495

Port Antonio. . - 237

Port au Prince _ 27i>

Port au Prince, anchorage 28J

Port au Prince, directions 280

Port au Prince , lights 280

Port au Prince, mooring buoys 280

Port au Prince, pilots 279

Port au Prince, port charges . 2S0

I Port au Prince, steamers, mail 279

I Port au Prince, supplies, coal. 279

i Port au Prince, tides 280

Port au Prince, water 279

Port au Prince, winds 281

Port Baltequieri 160

Port Bay 113

PortCasilda.* 179

Port Cavo Moa 116

Port du Monte 440

Port du Monte, light 441

Port du Monte, pilots 441

Port du Monte , signals 441

PortEgmont 496

Port Francais 266

Port Guantanamo 161

'PortGuijano 353

Port Henderson 208

PortMaravi 113

Port Mariel 154

Port Masio -. 179

Port Mata 110

Port Navas 113

PortNipe 117

Port Ponce 349

Port Royal 205

Port Royal, directions. 208, 209, 213, 214

Port Royal, lights 206,210

Port Royal , supplies 214

Port Royal, tides 214

Port Royal Bay 427

Port Royal Beach 207

Port Royal Point 206

Port Royal Spit 207

PortTaco 114

Portail Point 444

Port6 d'Ennery 468

Porter Point 478

Portillo Harbor 168

Portillo Harbor, anchorage ... 168

Portillo Harbor, directions ... 168

Portland Bight 215

Portland Bight, directions

Portland Bluff

Portland Cay...

Portland Harbor

Portland Point

Portland Reef

Portland Ridge

Portland Rock

• I

INDEX.

543

Portland Rock, anchorage 241

Portsmouth Town 450

Portugal Point 270

Portuguese Shoals. 213

Potrerillo Peak 177

PotterCay 61

Poules Islet 282

PowellPoint 66

Pozuelo Point 347

Praslin Point 468

Predicator Point 315

Prickly Bay 495

Prickly Bay , d irections 495

Prickly Pear Cays. 397

Prickly Pear Edge 427

Prickly Pear Islet 359

Prickly Point 495

Priestman River Bay 239

Prince Rupert Bay 450

Prince Rupert Bay, anchorage 451

Prince Rupert Bay, supplies.. 450

Prince Rupert Bluff 450

Princes Peak 281

Princess Creek mi

Principal Island, the (Bei*-

muda) 19

Principe Point 322

Privateer Bay 364

Proselyte Rock 400

Protestant Cay 389

Provencal Bank 435

Providenciales Island 9()

Pro videnciales Island , cau tion . 97

Prune Island 485

PueblaNuevo 136 i

Puerca Island 333

Puerca Point ;«2

PuercoCove 121

Puercos Cay J21

Puercos River 150

Puerta Point 299 i

Puerto Caballas 257 |

Puerto Plata 255 i

Puerto Plata, directions 256 '

lerto Plata, light 256 '

erto Plata, pilots 256 ,

lerto Plata, port charges 256

lerto Plata, steamers 256 ■

lerto Plata, supplies 265

lerto Plata, tides 2.^6

lerto Plata, water 256

erto Plata> winds 256

srto Rico Island : 330

Puerto Rico Island, charges.. 330
Puerto Rico Island, currents. . 5, 353
Puerto Rico Island, custom reg-
ulation r. 3:^0

Puerto Rico Island, hurricanes 300
Puerto Rico Island, east coast,

directions 335

Puerto Rico Island, east coast,

tides 336

Puerto Rico Island, north

coast - 336

Puerto Rico Island, south

coast 346

Puerto Rico Island , winds 353

Puerto Vie jo de Azua 310

Puertos Point 108

PugaCay 178

Punta de Afuera Cay 145

PuntaCana -298

Punta Cana, caution 298

Punta de la Cruz 293

Punta Larga Shoal ' 338

Puntanal 298

Puntilla Point 3;i8

Puntilla Shoal 338

Purgator io Point 150

Quashie Point 477

Quatre Isle and Cays 480

Quebrada de Moa Opening 116

QuecheCay 126

Queens Channel 55

Quemado Point 108,156

Quiabon River 3C0

Quicksands, the 31

Qulntus Rocks 62

Quintus Rocks, beacon 62

Quita Espuela Mountain 254

Rabaka 478

Rabbit Islet- 481

RabbitRock 45

Rabihorcado Cay 174,193

Rabihorcado Islets . . . ^ 1 93

Raccroc Bay 315

RackumCay 207

Racoon Cay 73

Racoon Cut 73

Rafael Cape 297

Ragged Island Harbor 73

Ragged Island, directions 74

Ragged Island , pilots 38

544

INDEX.

Page.

Ragged Point, light 500

RamHead 366

BamaPoint Ill

Ram6e Bay 439

Kamier Cay 318

Ramiers lalet 456

Ramos Islet r- 331

Ramville Islet 462

RanchatasBay 297

Rancho del Cuba Anchorage . - 310

Rancho River 187

Ranchos Point • 307

RapadoCay 147

RapadoPass 148

Rapado Chico Cay 148

Raquette Islet 324

Rasa Point ^ 109

RasitaPoint 108

Rat Cay 319

Rat Island 423,435

Rat Islet 267,473

Ratones Cay 1^

Ratones Islet 349

Ratones Point 349

Ravient Reef 220

Real Point 152

Real de Cabo Rojo Port 344

Real River 296

Rebecca Shoal 31

Rebecca Shoal, light 25

Rebellines Cay 145

Bebellines Cay, anchorage 145

Red Bay 54

Red Cliff 203

Red Cliffs 240

Red Head Point 445

Red HiU 399

Red Hill Point 267

Red Islet 485

Red Rock 386

Red Pomt 374

Red Point Shoal 374

Redonda Islet 414

Redonda Islet, anchorage 414

Redonde Islet - 444

Redondo Cay 186

RedondoRock 109

ReduanPass 151

Reed Point - 421

Reef Bay - 368

Reef Harbor --. 248

RegalleCay 319

Regla Point 154

Regla Shoal 140

Rendezvous Bay 368, 394

Renon Village 321

Revolving Storms -

Rhode Bank 371

Rhodes Bay 22^

Ricket Harbor 417

Riding Place Anchorage 101

Riding Rock 45

Riding Rock Point 83

Rincon Bay --.- 341

Ringdove Rock 363

Rio Bueno 232

Rio Bueno, anchorage 232

Rio Bueno, water 232

Rio Novo Anchorage - - 235

Riocito Anchorage 311

River Sal^e 315,434

River Sal6e Bay 315

Riviere Islet 325

Road Bay 395

Road Bay Bluff 395

Road Harbor 364

Road Town 364

Read Town, anchorage 365

Road Town , directions 365

Road Town, tides 365

Robert Reef 357

Robert Town 462

Robertson Shoal 217

RocaCape 254

Roche a Bateau Bay 291

Rochelois Bank 281

Rochelois Point 283

Rochelois Village 283

Rochers Point 324

Rock Fort 212

Rock Key 27

Rock Sound 66

Rocky Bay 479

Rocky Point 43,217,282

Rodriguez Bank 343

Rojo Cape 314,345,353

RoUe Cape 477

RoUe Town, ruins of '^^

Romana River

Romana River, anchorage

Romana River, directions

Romana River, water

Romano Cay

Rompidas Ledge

Roncadora Pass

Ronde Islet

Page-

48a

407 Saba Bank ..

4o2 Saba Bank, t

18i> Saba Island.

190 Saba Island,

190 Saba lalaad,

190 Saba Island,

190 Saba Rock . .

190 Sabana Bay

195 Sabana Beac!

iXi Sabana la Mt

439 Sabana la Mi

01 Sabana la M«

fll Sabana la Mi

ft! Sabanilla Po:

462 Sabbat Point

402 SabinalCay .

M8 Sable Cay . . .

448 Sable Islet ..

449 Saddle o( Ba;
449 Saddle Hill..
449 . Sage Mounta
449 Saguala Gra
449 Sagtia ta Ura
449 SagualaGra
410 ' Saguala Grai
447 Saguala Gra
28.'> Sagua la Grai
2liA Sogua la Gra
3tl7 Sagua Rlrer

. 401,421 Sail Rock -.,

227 Sailing direc

3(i2 Hydrograp

:)62 St. Andt-ew I

4.1 St. Andi'ew ^

314 St. Ann Bay

314 St. Ann Bay,

2H6 St. Ann Bay.

K St. Ann Bay,

9 St. Ann Cast

23H St. Ann Peal

M St. Anne Am

(M St. Anne, dlr

257 St. Anne Hil

m St. Anne She

R3 St. Anne To5

W2 St. Aubin Isl

38 St. Auguatin.

83 St. Baftholoi

2;B St. Bartholoi

371 St. BartB....

(W St. Cathorint

546

INDEX.

Pftg«.

St. Catherine Point 17

St. Christophe Islet 440

St. Christopher Island 410

St. Christopher Island, direc-
tions 412

St. Christopher Island, cau-
tion - 411

St. Christopher Island, govern-
ment - 410

St. Croix Island -.- 387

St. Croix Island, caution 387

St. Croix Island, north coast. . . 387

St. Croix Island, south coast. . 391

St. Croix Island, tides 392

St Croix Island, winds 392

St. David Bay 451

St. David Harbor 497

St. David Harbor, directions . 497

St. David Harbor, water 497

St. David Head. 18

St. David Island 18

St. David Light 18

St. David Point 497

St. Domingo Cay 75

St. Domingo Point 188

St. Elair Point.- " 479

St. Eloy Point 492

St. Eustatius 409

St. Eustatius, coast 410

St. Eustatius, products 409

St. Eustatius, winds. 410

St. Francois Port 433

St. George 17,493

St. George, buoys 494

St. George, light 494

St. Georire, pilots _ 494

St. George , telegraph 494

St. George, tides 494

St . George, supplies . . _ _ 493

St. George Bay 82

St. George Cape 82,319

St. George Channel 15

St. George Fort 493

St. George Harbor 15, 494

St. George Harbor, directions. 494

St. George Harbor, tides 16, 494

St. George Island 11

St. George Islet 445

St. HelenaShoal 338

St. Honore Point 266

St. Honore Port 2m

St. James Bay w. 374

St. James Cut 378

St. Jean Bay 406

St. John Channel 424

St. John City 423

St. John Harbor- 423

St. John Harbor, current 425

St. John Harbor, directions - . . 426

St. John Harbor, hospital 424

St. John Harbor, landing 434

St. John Harbor, lights 424

S t . John Harbor, pilots 424

St. John Harbor, port charges 424

St. John Harbor , su pplies 424

St . John Harbor, telegraph . . . 424

St. John Island 366,446

St. John Island, tides 366

St. JohnPoint , 22

St. John Road 425

St. John Road, anchorage 425

St. John Road, directions 426

St. Johns Point 224

St. Joseph Fort 264

St. Joseph Point- 264

St.Kitt6 410

St. Louis Bay 319,443

St. Louis Bank 458

St. Louis Bank, directions 31 9

St. Louis Fort 319

St. Louis Town ' 319

St. Luce Cay 459

St. Luoea Harbor 226

St. Lucea Harbor, directions.. 226

St. Lucea Harbor, supplies 226

St. Lucia Island 466

St. Lucia Island, Bank north-
east of 473

St. Lucia Island , current 474

St. Lucie Inlet 24

St. Margarets 237

St. Marguerite Bay 440

St. Marie - 437

St. Marie, lights 437

St. Marie Anohoi*age 465

St. Marielsle 465

St. Mark Bay 278

St. Mark Bay, anchorage '^^ ^^^

St. Mark Channel

St. Mark Point

St. Mark River

St. Mark Battery, longitude e

St. Marthe Point, light

St. Martin Cai)e

St. Martin Island

St. Martin Island, caution...

, tides

, directions . .
, tel'^graph . .

mdiniT--

atatlOD

ifS

aph

)r, anchorage

jr, caution . .
or, charges..

)r, directions

>r, hospital..
>r, lights. ...

3r, pilots 3'

)r, BteomcrB.

]r, telegraph

ir, tides.

ir, water

, caution

id, cur

'bodOB . .

' Salntes Islands, Les 444

. Sainteslales 40«

Sal Cay 4G

Sal Point.-- 285

' Sale Trou River 315

Sale Trou Town 3li>

SaldeBay 290

. Salfe River ; _ 290,434

' Salina Point 88

SallnasBay _._ 307,353

Salinas Point 183,187,193,306,333

' Salinas de Coamo Port 347

Salinas de Cotuno Port, direc-
tions ___ 348

Salinas de Coamo Port, water. 348

Saline Channels - 488

Saline Channels, anchorage... 489

Saline Channels, caution. 489

I Saline lalet 488

' Saline Point 91,459,405

I Salt Cay- - 60,103,378

, Salt Cay, anchorage.- 60,103

I Salt Island 216,363

i Salt Pond Bay 204

Salt Pond Hill 91,208

Salt River-.. 216,268,:W7

! Salt Biver Mound 390

I Salt River Point 387

Salt Water Money Rock 379

SalutPort 291

Sama Mount - 118

Sama Peak 118

Sama Point 119

j Sama Port 119

I SamanaBay.- 291

bamanaCape.. 253,291

I SamanaCay. ., 84

I Samana Cay, anchorage 84

Samana Cay, water 84

SamanaGuU 294

Samana Peninsula 253

' Sambo Shoal, eastern 27

Sambo Shoal, middle 27

Samho Shoal, western 27

Samphire Cays 02

Samuel Point 225

San Antonio Cape 143,196

San AntonioCape, anchorage. 143

San Antonio Cape, currents... 142

San Antonio Cape, light 143

San Antonio Channel 336

San Autin River 135

San Carlos Town 340

548

INDEX.

San Cayetano Bay 150

San Diego River 188

San Felipe Battery 137

San Felipe Cay 120

San Felipe Cays ■.,.. 195

San Felipe Cays, tide 1 95

San B^ernando de Nue vitas 122

San Francisco Point 340

San Francisco, loading place . 146

San Francisco Village 340

San Juan, harbor 337

San Juan, inner harbor 339

San Juan, life-boat 337

San Juan, light 337

San Juan, pilots 337

San Juan, quarantine 337

San Juan, steamers 337

San Juan, supplies 337

San Juan, telegraph 337

San Juan Cape (Head) 336

San Juan Cape (Head), light . . 330

San Juan Channel 330

San Juan City 336

San Juan de los Hemedios 128

San Juan Peak 183

San Juan Point ._ 180

San Juan Port _ 254,336

San Juan Port, directions "338

San Juan Port, light 337

San Juan Port, semaphore 337

San Juan Port, tides 339

San Juan River 137, 181 , 302

San Lorenzo Bay 296

San Marcos- Creek 176

San Mark River 256

San Nicolas Point 162

San Pedro Rock 302

San Pedro 302

San Salvador Island 83

San Salvador, caution 84

San Salvador, light 83

San Salvador, pilots 38

Pan Severino Castle 137

San TelmoBank 140

Sanchez 295

Sanchez, climate 295

Sanchez , directions 295

Sanchez, landing 295

Sanchez . supplies 295

Sancti Espiritu Town 176

Sand Bay 372

Sand Cay 99,103,117

Sand Cay, beacon 104

Sand Cay, shoal

SandCliflf PoinU

Sand Hill Point

Sand Hill Range

Sand Key

Sand Key, beacon

Sand Key, light

Sandy Cay . . . . -42, 61, 117, 125,

Sandy Island 395,

Sandy Island Channel

Sandy Island, light

Sandy Point 82, 228, 373,

Sandy Point Rock

Sandy Reef

Sans Nom Bank

Sans Souci Cays

Sans Souci, Cul de sac

Santa Barbara Port

Santa Barbara de Samana

Santa Barbara de Samana, cau-
tion

Santa Barbara de Samana, di-
rections

Santa Barbara de Samana, j)i-
lotage -

Santa Barbara de Samana, port
charges

Santa Barbara de Samana,
steamers

Santa Barbara de Samana, sup-
plies

Santa Barbara de Samana,
tides

Santa Cruz

Santa Cruz, tides

Santa Cruz del Ceibo

Santa Cruz Mountains

Santa Cruz Port, light

Santa F6 River

Santa Isabel

Santa Isabella Bay

Santa Lucia Point

Santa Lucia River

Santa Maria Cays

Santa Monica Rock

Santa Rosa Bay

Santaren Channel

Santiago Cay

Santiago Islet

Santiago Port

Santiago de Cuba

Santiago de Cuba, buoys, b
cons

Page.

280
247
220
219

375, 484

422,425

426

424

412,445

373

225

443

460

462

292

294

293

294

294
171
172
302
221

i:38

193
148
327
149
146
127

Uuba, coal

Ihiba, communioa-

'ZulM, directions _

[^uba, dcuk -

Cuba, dues

^uba, piloU

Tuba, Kupplies -.,
^btt, telegrapb . -

Cuba, tides

!;uba, tu^ _

^uba, winds

go Island

go, charges, parte

go Bay

igo Harbiir Mid

go Harbor Cove -
go Harbor, direc-

go Harbor, light.
go Harbor, pilots,

Igo Harbor, «up-

go Harbor, atoam-

go Harbor, tides,
go Harbor, winds

, caution -.

, shoal off

, tides, currents .
, water and wood _

age

ioA Rock

d Passage, direc*

pr, supplies

id--

■Shoal

<i Scotch Bank 36r),3«8

Scotch Bonnet Head 412

7 Scotland 4»9

5 ScottBay 349

6 , Scott Head 448

7 ScrubCay 381

i> Scrublaland.- - 362,398

G Sea Cow Bay --..- IWJ

8 Sea Venture Shoal.-- 16

7 Seaforth Bluff- 423

4 Seal Cays !«►

7 Seal Reef and Islands- 3fl8

2 Seal Dog Islets - 3«2

Seco River 11»,167

2 Seine Bay 3B3

■i Seine Point 470

Seguro Bay- 114

^ Seringapatam Shoal 496

4 Seringue Point, soundings.... 386
Serpent Island SSO

5 Settlement Bay :IS5

'i : Settlement Point 43

I Seven Islands afiO

4 I Seven Islands, anchorage 2tiO

' Seven Islands, curi-ents and

1 j tides 2tiO

Severn Shoal -.. I(S

4 Shaddick Point 394

4 Sliannun Beacon 62

i) Shannon Shoal 242

H Shark Islet - 377

0 Shark Rock .1«0

II ' Shawl Rock :i9t(

0 SheepCay -_- 277

B SheernessBay 23«

4 Ship Channel (Bahamas) tl7

9 , Ship Channel ( Bermudal 13

9 , Ship Channel {Jamaica)- 209

9 Ship Channel Cay t>T

I' j Ship Channel, directions 68

2 I Ship Channel, tides Ifl,il7

9 I Ship Head 2:17

Ship Rock--.- 2:n

9 Ship Stern Inlet - 42:1

!i i Shipton Point - 240.422

3 Shirley Heights 4I«

7 , Shirley Point.- 'i'-^i

>i Shoe Hole Road 01

8 ; Shot Cay -- 9tt

6 : Shrimp Shoal 3k2

li j Sierras de Acosta 144

3 I Sierras de Sancti Espirtu 177

1 I Sierras Morenas 1:12

650

INDEX.

Page.

Signal Hill 369,391

^igaia Bay 112

Sigua Coast 112

Slguanea Bay 191

Siguanea Bay, tides 192

Siguanea Hills-.. 192

Siguanea Hills , water 192

Siguapa Anchorage -_-^ 134

SiguapaTown 134

Silencio Point 109

Silla de Caballo 329

Sillade Romano 124*

Silver Bank 105

Silver Cay 56

Silver Rock Shoal _... 427

Simon, Cul de sac 462

Simson Bay. 401

Simson Lagoon 399

Singe Bank.. -.. 459

Single Rock 481

^ir Francis Drake Channel 364

Sister Rocks-- 486

Sisters Cuts 55

Sisters Isleta 384,425

Sisters Rocks 50

Six Shilling Cays 62

Six Shilling Cays, beacon 62

Six Shilling Channel " 62

Six Shilling Channel, direc-
tions -- 62

Six Shilling Channel, tides ... 62

Slaney Point 365

Slaughter Harbor 49

Small Cut 101

Small Point 212

Smith Bay 369

Smith Cay 164

Smith Island , 16

Snake Point 396

Snapper Shoal 382

Snug Bay 383

Sooo River 302

Soco River, anchorage . - 302

Soldier Cay 385

Soldiers Point 382

Solomon Cape 459

Sombrero Island 393

Sombrero Island, anchorage . . 393

Sombrero Island, light 393

Sombrero Key. 25

Sombrero Key, light 25

Sombrero Rock 158

Sombrero Rock, caution _ 158

. Somerset Island 18

SopersHole 365

Sopers Hole, directions 365

Soufri^reBay 448,469

Soufri^re Bay, caution .-1 469

Soufri^re Bay, directions 469

Soufri^re Hill 414

Souf ri^re Mountain 447

Souf ri^re Mountain, view 430

Souf ri^re Town 469

Sou! ri^re Volcano 430

Sound, the 375,380

Sound , the , channels 375

Sound, the, directions 381

Sound Bay ' 385

South Bluff 88

South Channel Rocks 67

South Channel , tides 381

South Head 76

South Knolls 212

South Point 71,202

South Point, light 504

South Rock 74,99

South Cay 54,89,95,244

South Channel 212, 381, 406

South Channel, directions. 21 3, 381, 406

Southeast Cay, water 200

Southeast Channel 28, 223

Southeast Channel, buoys 28

Southeast Channel, directions . 28

Southwest Anchorage, pilots. . 57

Southwest Bank 101

Southwest Bay 59,486

Southwest Cay 200,243,383

Southwest Cay, anchorage,

water 243

Southwest Channel 29, 424, 446

Southwest Channel , buoys 30

Southwest Channel, directions 30

Southwest Key 32

Southwest Point 92, 225, 248, 391

Southwest Reef 55,63

Southwest Road, tides 374

Southwest Rock

South Booby Point

South Calcos Island

South Hole Sound

South Negril Point

South Pelican Spit

South Riding Rock

South Wager Rock

South Whale Cay

South Whale Rock

INDEX.

551

Page.

South Yack River 251

Southampton Reef 81

Southern Channels 362

Sou thside Channels 55

Southside Landing 407

Soye Point 316

Spaniard Rock 1 403

Spanish Point 415

Spanish Town 358

Sparrowhawk Hill 247

Speights Town 501

Spider Reef 231

Sprat Point 373

Spring Garden Point 237, 501

Squalls 5

Stakes Bay 249

Start Point 90

StarvegutBay 220

Statia 409

Statira Shoal 92

Stephenson Rock 71

Stephenson Rock , water 71

StirrupCays 49

Stocking Island 69

Stocking Island, beacon 69

Stony Shoal 135

Strachan Cay 71

Stragglers Rocks 378

Stream Point 3S3

Sugarloaf 405,444

Sugarloaf Channel 445

Sugarloaf Islet 405

Sugarloaf Passage 445

Sugarloaf Point - 465

Sugarloaf Rock 453

Summer Point 82

Swimmer Rock 99

Syndare Islets 40()

Tabaco Point 148

Tabara River 310

TablazoShoal 338

Table Hill 277,421

"" ible Rock 404

blones Cay 193

CO Port 114

CO Port, supplies 114

*co Port, tides 114

^creRiver 158

Igeuse Cay 319

iabacoa River 177

Tallabacoa River, water 177

TamisoCay 293

TanamoPort 117

Tantes Islets 489

Tantes Islets, anchorage 489

Tapion Bluff 315

TapionCliflP 289

Tapion Point 289

Tapion River 260

TapiottRock 471

Tapion Rock, light 471

TapoonCreek 385

Tarpum Bay 6G

Tartane, Cul de sac 463

Tasmanian Shoal 357

Tflivora River 310

Taylor Fort .- 26

Telescope Point 498

Telescope Rock 498

Tenpound Bay 417

TerceroCay 1. 260

Terrabassa River 260

Terre Basse Point 401

Terre Basse Point, caution 401

Terre d'en-Bas Island 446

Terre d'en-Bas Islet 442

Terre d'en-Haut Harbor 444

Terre d'en-Haut Harbor, direc-
tions 445

Terre d'en-Haut Island 444

Terre d'en-Haut Islet 442

Terremeto Cay 353

Terremeto Passage ^^53

Tete a I'Anglais Islet 438

ThatchCay..- » 377

Thatch Island 366

Thatch Island Cut 366

Thiery Isle 461

Thomas Bay :n4

Thompson Cay 51

Thorn Hill 227

Three Fathom Banks 213

Three Fathom Shoal 494

Three Rivers Bay 290

Thunder Channel 55

Tibiz Point 302

TiburonBay 289

Tiburon Bay, anchorage 2^0

Tiburon Bay, supplies 289

Tiburon Cape 2ss

Titchfields 237

Titchfields Peninsula 23s

P«8«. [

TitchfleldB Point StS ■

TierraCaye 177

Tierra Baja Road 270

TillooCay _ 40

Tin tamarra Island 402

Tintorero Point lo8

Tobacco ECock _ 14

TobagoCays, reefs 484

Tocinera Point 121>

Toe Vera Islet ^ 407

Tolete Point 146,175

Tongue of the Ocean 54

Tongue of tbe Ocean ChanneU 5^>

Tony Rock M

Tony Rock, beacon 58

Tor Point 280

Tor Point, light 280

ToraBeach 113

Torbec VUla^e 322

ToroCay 147,163

ToroCay, beacon. _ 182

TororuCay 2S0

Torrecilla Point 304

Torrens Point 40B

Tortola Island 394

Tortola Island, rocks a>7

Torlola Island, tides.- 366

Tortue Bay 275

Tortue Islet . - 407

Tortuga Channel 270

Tortuga Channel , current 270

Tortuga Island 270

Tortugas Islands _ . . 31

Tortugas Islands, directions.. 32

Tortugas Island^, lights 25

Tortuguero Port . - 309

Tortuguero Town - - _ 339

Tortuguilla Anchorage 123

Tortuguilla Point 161

Toulan Point 320

Tourmaline Reef 342

Tourterelle Battery _ ,325

Tow Rock 362

Town Cut _ 18

TrabucaCay _ iftii

Traviesa Cays 193

Treasure Point 363

Triangles, the _.. 371

Triangles, rocks 44

Tribularlos de Minerva Reef. . 125

Trinidad 178

Trinidad, porUof 178

Trinidad port charges 178

Trinity Bay

Trinity Bay, directions

Trinity Bay, light

Trinity Bay, pilots

Trinity Bay, wat«r

Troie Islets Bay

Trols Pitons Mountain

Trou k Coohon Bay

Trouaux Chlens Peak

TroudeForban

TrouBay -

Trou Gascon

TrouEathal

Trou Jacob Bay

Trou Jacob Cliff

True Blue Bay

Truyes Bay

Tuna Point

Tunas Port-

Turema Point

Turkey Cay

Turks Islands

Turks Islands Passage - -

Turks IslandsPassage, caution
Turks Islands Passage, dirao-

tiona

Turner Bay _

Turner Bay, caution

Turner Point

Turquino Peak 1

Turtle Cove

Turtle Crawle

Turtle Dove Cay

Turtle Head

Turtle Heads

Twelve Apostles Bluff

Twelve League Labyrinth

Twin Pass.-

Twins, the

TyrrelBay 4

Tyrrel Bay, anchorage ....'...

Ucarls Village

Union Island

Union River

Upper White Horses 5

Usine d'ArlKiuHier

Utuado Town

Uvas Cays

UveroBay

UveroCays

r U7

int 253,384

Land 323

land, tides 324

ilegaa Point 33t>

y)Point 112

Bank 283

.Bay lai

int :i44

■S 314

:Bank8 44;i

Oul desao 4ti2

aountaln 4,')3

Pass _ 4«0

Point-.- 4(i0

I'lllage 4B0

■y 2(18

ly 74,124,131

Gonalvea Point 274

Point 274

r - 30!t

Fort, flagataft 17

UleShoal 472

uices Cape 2r)4

n 307

oint :m

sland 384

lurg Village 322

irtBay 4U8

irt Bay, wat«r 46S

rtlBlet 444

rt I»let, anchorage... 444

rt Islet, diret'tlona .. 444

rtlslet.ahoal 444

rtPoint 437

rt Vlllajre 44;i

int 181

8, andlipht 471

int -- , 472

Bank 147

lands 3.J4

lands, currents 3

lands, rollers _ . _ 357

lands, soundings 3-~ilI

lands, tides :i."k>

sak --.- aw

mnd... 359

jrda Island ti-'S

orda Island, anchor-

Virginia Key 25

Vita Port 119

Viuda Nipples 127

Vixen Point 360'

Wag Water Rivei- 236-

Walker Cay 41

W;aiibu Village 477

Waningio.i Bank, buoy 42i>

Wash Rock 479

Washer Cay 330

Washer Pas^sage 384

Washer Rock ..-. 384

Washerwomans Cut 55

Watch Cay - - 72

Water Cay 46,382.

Water Cay; caution 46

Water Creek.. 367

Water Hills 192

Water Island. 373

Water UlaDd, anchorage 374

Watering Bay 487

Waterm Mon Uay 3l>!)

Watlinjfs Island, light--. 83

WataonRook. 376

Wax Cay 68

Wax Cay Cut. 88

Wax Cay Cut, tides 68

Weary Hill 347

Weather Channel 380

Weather (;hannel, directions. 381

Weather Channel, tides 381

Week Bay..- 421

Welcome Bank 389

WelkRock 378

West Bay 5»

WestCay- 324,378,397

West Cay, caution 397

West Channel 406,427

West Channel, directions 406

West Harbor- - 65,317

West Harbor, directions 217

West Mountain -- 369

West Point - 324

West Reef 97

WestCabrlB Hill- 450

WestCaicos Island 97

West Caicos Island .anchorage - S7

West Dog Island,- 363

West End, anchorage 82

WestMiddle Knoll 213

West Middle Rwjk 2n

554

INDEX.

:\« I

Page.

West Middle Shoal 212

West Sand Spit 09

West Triangle Rock 230

Westerhall Point 497

Western Channels 268

Western Dry Rock 2i

Western Harbor 237

Western Plana Cay 90

Weymouth Reefs 426

Whale Bank 356

Whale Breaker 91

Whale Cay-. _ 41,50

Whale Cay, channel- 41

Whale House 16

Whale Passage 445

Whale Point 51

Whale Rock .._ 380,406,44,5

Whale Rocks _.. 286

Whale Shoal 445

Whistling Cay ..- 368

White Bank 68,458

White Bluff 67

White Cay 70,83

White Cays 99

White Cliffs 99

WhiteGround 172,345

White Horse Rock .- 387

White Horses 219

White House Point 222

White Islet 488

White Islet, anchorage 488

White Point 399

White River Mouth 235

White Shoal 215

White Wall Cliff 409

Whitehead Spit 28

Whitehead Spit, buoy, direc-
tions from 28

M^ckham Cav. 365

Wide Opening _ 69

Wide 0])ening, tides 68

Willoutrhbv Bav 417

Willoughby Bay, directions .. 417

Wilson Point- 74

Winding Bay 39,80

Winds and Weather, general . 1
Winds and Weather, hurri-
canes 2,5

Windward Channel 198

Windward Channel, currents . 5. IHS

Windward Channel, dii'ections li**^

Windward Islands, currents . . 5

Windward Passage 376

•* I

Windward. Passage, tides

Windy Hiil..

Wood Cay

Woodbridge Bay

Woodbridge Bay, anchorage.

Woodbridge Bay, water

Woods Island

Worlds End Reef

Wreck Hill

Wreck Reef

Xagua Bank

Xagua Port

Xagua Port, directions

Xagua Port, light

Xagua Port, pilots

Xagua Port, supplies _

Xagua Port, tides

Yabucoa Port

Yabucoa Village -

Yacabo Bay, anchorage

Yacabo Point

Yacabo River _.

Yagua Reef -

Yaguanabo River.. _

Yaguaneque Port

Yaguasey Point 1..,

Yaguasey Shoal

YaguePeak .-.

YallahsBay

Yallahs Hills

Yallahs Point

Yam Piece Shoals

Yamaniquey Anchorage

YaquePeak -

Yaque River

Yaquezi Point.

Yara River. ._

Yasica River -.1

Yatera River

Yeguana River

Yeguas Point

Yeague Point

Yellow Bank

Yellow Shoal

York Island -

Youner Islet

Yufri Shoal

Yuma Bay

Yuma Bay, anchorage

377
413

42
449
449
449
239
484

16
213

183
181
182
181
182
181
182

334

159

173

181

117

116

305

a(H

202

427

115

251

259

261

169

254

161

296

index:. 555

ty.tlde 299 YunaKiver 254,296

»rt 299 ! Yunquede Baraooa 107,329

HlgueyRiver 251 | g.

Anchorage 109 , Zaoheo Island 328

Etoef 109 I ZancudolBlet 331

River ICI9,]37 ZarzaCreok 176

Valley 136 Zarza Point and River 176

Lnt 259 I Zarza de Fuera Cay 175

LIST OF HYDROGRAPHIC OFFICE PUBLICATIONS, ETC.

NORTH ATLANTIC OCEAN.

General Examination of the Atlantic Ocean, By Capt. Charles
Philippe De Kerhallet. Translated hy Capt. R. H. Wyman,

0. S. N. 8vo. 1870. Hydrographic Offlct;

Supplement No. 1. Iw6. Hydrographic OfBce

Seneral DirectionB for the Atlantic Ocean. From the French of
F. Labroaee. Translated by Lieut. Commander J. B. Coghlao,
U.S.N. 8vo. 1873. Hydrographic Office. Second edition.. --

N'ova Scotia, Bay o( Fundy, and South Shore of Gulf of St. Law-
rence. Compiled by R. H. Orr. 8vo. IgHi, Hydrographic
Office 1.50

5al[ and River St. Lawrence and Cape BretoD Island. Compiled
byR.H.Orr. 8vo. 1891. Hydrogrraphic Office 1.50

rhe Navigation of the Caribbean Sea and the Gulf of Mexioo.
Vol. 1. The Weat India lalandB, including the Bahama Banks
and Islands, and the Bermuda lulandB. Compiled by R.C. Ray,
U. S. N. 8vo. 18<I2. Hydrographic Office. Third edition

The Navigation of the Caribbean Sea and the Gulf of Mexico.
Vol. II. Coasts from the Rio Grande del Norte to Cape Orange
with adjacent ialandi and dangers. ECevised by R. C. Ray, U.

S.N. «vo. 1890. Hydrographic Office-.-- 1.50

Supplement. 1891

Newfoundland and Labrador. C()mpiled by Lieut. W. W. Gilpat-"
rick and Ensign .lohn Gibaon, U. S. N. 8vo. 1884. Hydro-
graphic Office 1,00

Newfoundland and Labrador. Supplement. 8vo. 1HH6, Com-

Siled by Lieut. R. G. Davenport and Eoidgn John Gibson, U. S.
r. Hydrographic Office

Sui)plement No. 2. I8ill. Hydrographic Office

Sailing,'- DirectioitB for the Kattet^at, Sound, and theGreat and Little
Belts to the Baltic Sea. Compiled bv Commander William Gil>

son, U. S. N. 8vo, 1881. Hydrographic Office _..

Supplement No. 1. lH8(i. Hydrographic Office i .ii»

Sailing Directions for the English Channel. Part I. South Coast

of England. 8 vo. 1872. Hydrographic Office 1. 50

Supplement. Second edition. ](i8!i. Hydrographic Office .. .10

Sup})lement No. 2. 18it]. Hydrographic Office 10

Sailing Directions for the English Channel. Part II. Compiled
by Master AsherC. Baker, U.S. N. Hto, 1877. Hydrographic

Office - - 2.50

Supplement. Second edition. 188H. Hydrographic Office. . . , 10

Supplement No. 2. 1S92. Hydrographic Office : .10

Doasts and I'orts of the Bay of Biscay. Translated and compiled
by Lieuts. G. M. Totbsn and Seaton Schroeder, U. S. N. 8vo.

1876. Hydrographic Office . - 2. 50

Supplement. Socondedition. 1«M). Hydrographic Office.. . ,10
Winds. Currents, and Navigation of the Gulf of Cadiz, the Wcalern
Coast of the Spanish Peninsula, and the Sti'ait of Gibraltar.
by Capt. R. H. Wyman, U. S. N. 8vo. 1870. Hydrographic
Office - l.nn

558 LIST OF HYDROGBAPHIC OFFICE PUBLICATIONS, ETC.

50-61
53

4«

15
93

NORTH ATi^ANTic OCEAN — continued.

Northwest, West, and South Coasts, of Spain, and the Coast of
Portugal from Point Estaca to Cape Trafalgar. Translated and
compiled by Lieut. George M. Totten, U. S. X. 8vo. 1874. Hy-

drographic Office _

Supplement. Second edition. 1890. Hydrographic Office..

General Examination of the Mediterranean Sea. Bv Capt. A. Le
Gras, I. F. N. Translated by Capt. R. H. Wyman. U. S. N. 8vo.
1870. Hydrograph ic Office .-

Mediterranean. Part I. S. and SE. Coasts of Spain from Mala
Bahia to Cape Creux. Balearic Islands and N. Coast of Africa
from Ceutato La Cala. Translated and compiled by Lieut. Com-
mander H. H. Gorringe, U. S. N. 8vo. 1^75. Hydrographic

Office -.- - - _

Supplement. Third edition. 1892. Hydrographic Office.

Mediterranean. Part II. South Coast of France ; West Coast of
Italy : Tuscan Archipelago ; Corsica and Sardinia. By Lieut.
Commander H. H. Gorringe, U. S. X., assisted by Lieut. Seaton

Schroeder, U. S. N. Svo. 1878. Hydrographic Office..

Supplement. Third ed i tion . 1 892. Hydrographic Office . -

Mediterranean. Part III. Coast of Tunis; Sardinia; Sicily and
Malta Channels ; Lipari Islands : Sicily : Strait of Messina :
Coast of Tripoli : Coast of Egj-pt : Syria. " By Lieut. Commander
H. H. Gorringe, U. S. N., assisted by Lieut. Seaton Schroeder,

U.S.N. 8vo. 1879. Hydrogarphic Office :

Supplement. Third edition. 1892. Hydrographic Office. .

Mediterranean. Part IV. Gulf of Gioja to Cape Santa Maria di
Leuca. South Coast of Italy, the Adriatic Sea, Ionian Islands, the
Coasts of Albania and Greece to Cape Malea, with Cerigo Island,
including the Gulfs of Patras and Corinth. 18S3. Hydrographic

Office - -

Supplement. Third edition. 1892. Hydrographic Office .

The AaK>re8, Madeiras, Canaries, and Cape Verde Islands. .Trans-
lated and compiled by Lieuts. G. M. Totten and W. H. Parker,
•U.S.N. One volume. 8vo. 1873 and 1874. Hydrographic Of fioe
Three supplements. No. 1. Hydrographic Office

The West Coast of Africa. Part I. From Cape Spartel to Sierra
Leone. Translated and compiled by Lieut. Commander H. H.
Gorringe, U. S. N. One volume. 8vo. 1873. Hydrographic

Office

Supplement No. 1, 1886. Hvdrographic Office -

The West Coast of Africa. Part II. From Sierm Leone to Cape
Lopez. Translated and compiled by Lieut. L. Chenery, U. S.

N. 8 vo. 1875. Hydrographic Office _

Supplement No. 1, 1886. Hydrographic Office

Papers on the Eastern and Northern Extension of the Gulf Stream.
From the German of Dr. A. Peterman, Dr. W. Von Freeden, and
Dr. A. Miihry. Translated by E. R. Knorr. 4to. 1871. Hydro-
graphic Office - - -

First. Second, Third, Fourth, Fifth, and Sixth Supplements to
Papers on the Eastern and Northern Extension of the Gulf
Stream. (Pamphlets.) 1872-'75. Hydrographic Office

Memoir of the Dangers and Ice in the North Atlantic. (Pamphlet. )
1868. Bureau of Navigation -

Ice and Ice Movements in North Atlantic Ocean. By EnsigE
Hugh Rodman, U. S. N. (Pamphlet.) im). Hydrographic
Office

SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN.

The West Coast of Africa. Part III. From Cape Lopez to 1
Cape of Good Hope,. including the Islands in the Bight of Biafn

* Not for sale.

$1.50
.10

2.00

2.50
.10

2.00
.20

2.00
.10

(*)

/•»\

LIST OF HYDROGRAPHIC OFFICE PUBLICATIONS, ETC. 66ft

No.

Title of book.

54
55

20
41

416

SOUTH ATLANTIC OCEAN--COntinued .

and Ascension and St. Helena Islands. Translated and com-
piled by Lieut. Commander J. R. Bartlett, U. S. N. 8vo. 1877.

Hydro^raphic Office _

Supplement No. 1 . 18S6. Hydrographic Office

The East Coast of South Amerieai. From Cape Orange to Cape
VirgcinB, including Faulkland, South Oeorgia. Sandwich, and
South Shetland Islands. Compiled by R. H. Orr. 8vo. 1889.

Hydrographic Office _

Supplement. 1891. Hydrographic Office

The Rio de la Plata. Translated and compiled by Lieut. Com-
mander H. H. Gorringe, U. S. N. 8vo. 1875. Hydrographic

Office _

Supplement No. 1 . 1886. Hydrographic Office

Navigation of the Strait of Magellan. Translated from the French
by Commodore J. C. P. de Krafft and Commander William Gib-
son, U. S. N. 188.3. Hydrographic Office -

Remarks by Capt. M. A. Lefevre, of the French Navy, on the voy-
age of the Vaudreuil through the Patagonian Channels and Ma-
gellan Strait. Translated by Lieut. George M. Totten, U. S. N.
(Pamphlet.) 1874. Hydrographic Office

PACIFIC OCEAN.

General Examination of the Pacific Ocean. By Capt. Charles
Phillippe De Kerhallet, French Imperial Navy. Translated
under the direction of Commodore Charles Henry Davie, U. S. N.

8vo. 1867 - -

Supplement No. 1 . 1886. Hydrographic Office

The Navigation of the Pacific Ocean. Translated from the French
of Mons. F. Labrosse, by Lieut. J. W. Miller, U. S. N. 8vo. 1874,
Hydrographic Office . ( Edition exhausted )

Th# West Coast of South America, including Magellan Strait,
Tierre del Fuego, and the Outlying Islands. Compiled by R. C.

Ray, U. S. N. 8vo. 1890. Hydrographic Office -

Supplement. Second Edition. 18i)2. Hydrographic Office..

The West Coast of Mexico and Central America!^ from the Boundary
Line between the United States and Mexico to Panama, including
the Gulf of California. Compiled by Lieut. F. E. Sawyer, U.S.N.

1887. Hydrographic Office ._

Supplement. 1890. Hydrographic Office _.

The Coast of British Columbia. From Juan de Fuca Strait to Port-
land Canal, including Vancouver and Queen Charlotte Islands.
Compiled by R. C. Ray, U. S. N. 8vo. 1891. Hydrographic Of-
fice -'

Supplement. 1891. Hydrographic Office

Directory for Coast of Alaska and Bering Sea. 8vo. Bureau of
Navigation. ( Edition exhausted)

List of Reported Dangers in the North Pacific Ocean. 8vo. 1871.

Hydrographic Office

Supplement No. 2. 1891. Hydrographic Office .. _

Supplement to Reported Dangers in the North Pacific Ocean. Com-
piled and arranged by Commander Wm. Gibson, U. S. N. 8vo.
1880. Hydrographic Office - _.

List of Reported Dangers in the South Pacific Ocean. Compiled and
arranged b\^ Lieut. J. E. Pillsbury, U. S. N. 8vo. 1879. Hydro-
graphic Office *.

Supplement. 1891. Hydrographic Office

Ice and Ice Movements in Bering Sea and the Arctic Basin. By
Ensign E. Simpson, U. S. N. (Pamphlet). 1890. Hydrographic
Office

Price.

$1.50

.la

1.00
.10

1.50
.10

.20

L50
.10

L20
.10

.50
.10

1.50
.10

LOO
.15

LOO

1.00
.15

.20

560 LIST OF HYDROGRAPHIC OFFICE PUBLICATIONS, ETC.

75
33

32 I

INDIAN OCEAN.

Sailing Directions of the Indian Ocean, the winds, monsoons, cur-
rents, and passage, including also the Java Sea, Sulu Sea, Af-
uera Sea, and the Philippine Islands. Compiled by Lieut. F. E.

Sawyer, U. S. N, 1SS7. HydrographicOffice

Supplements. 1889 and 1860. HydrographicOffice -

General Examination of Indian Ocean, with Directions for the Nav-
igation of Torres Straits, etc. By Capt. Charles Phillippe De
Kerhallet, I. F. N. Translated by Capt. R. H. Wyman, U. S. N.

8vo. 1870. Hydrographic Offlc 3

Supplement No. 1 . 188(). Hydrographic Offic 3

Physical Geography of the Red Sea, with Sailing Directions. By
Capt. W. Krop, I. A. N. Translated by E. R. Knorr. 8vo. 1872.
Hydrographic Office

$1.00
.10

2.00

.25

LIGHT-LISTS. ^

List of Lights (No. 1) of North and South America (excepting the
United States), including the West Indies and Pacific Islands.
8vo. 1891. HydrographicOffice-,

List of Lights (No. 5) of the North, Baltic, and White Seas, includ-
ing the Coasts of Denmark, Prussia, Russia, Sweden, and Nor-
way. 8vo. Hydrographic Offic 3 .-

List of Lights (No. 6) of the British Islands. 8vo. Hydrographic
Office. (Edition exhausted)

List of Lights (No. 4) of the Atlantic Coast of Europe, including
Spain, Portugal, France, Belgium, and Holland. Bvo. Hydro-
graphic Office. {Edition exhausted)

List of Lights (No. 3) of the West Coast of Africa and the Med-
iterranean Sea, including the West and North Coasts of Africa,
the Mediterranean, the Adriatic, the Black Seas, and the Sea of

Azof. 8vo. Hydrographic Office

Supplement. 18JK). Hydrographic Office *. - . .

List of Lights (No. 2) of South and EJast Coasts of Africa, and the
East Indies, including the East India Islands, China, Japan. Aus-
tralia, Tasmania, and New Zealand. 8vo. HydrographicOffice.
Supplement. 1 8JK). Hydrographic Office

17
71

57
49
90
91

NAVIGATION BOOKS.

List of Geographical Positions. By Lieut. Commander P. M.

Green, U. S. N. 1883. Bureau of Navigation

The New American Practical Navigator. By Nathaniel Bowditch,

LL.D. Svo. Edition of 1892. Bureau of Navigation

Bowditch *s Useful Tables. New edition, with additional Tables.

8vo. 1892. Bureau of Navigatitm ^ _..

Projection Tables. 8 vo. 1 809. Bureau of Navigation

Azimuth Tables for parallels of latitude between 61^ N. and 61^ S.

By Lieut. W. H. H. Southerland, U. S. N. 1883. Hydi-ographic

Office - -

.25

.25
.25

.25
.16

Arctic Azimuth Tables for parallels of latitude between 70^ and
88-. Prepared by Lleuts. Seaton Schroeder and Richard Wai-
wright.U. S. N. 12rao. 18S1. HydrographicOffice

Tables for Finding the distance of an Object by two Bearing^
(Pamphlet.) 1874. HydrographicOffice

The Rimte of Mail Steamers between the English Channel and Ne
York. 1873. (Pamphlet.) HydrographicOffice

The Development of Great Circle Sailing, By G. W. Littlehale
8vo. ISSn. HydrographicOffice

Table of Meridional Parts for the Terrestrial Spheroid, Compre
sion i.:,n!i«s By G. W. Littlehales and J. S. Siebert. ^vo. 188
Hydrographic Office

.75

2.25

1.25
1.50

4.2:->

LIST OF HYDEOGRAPHIC OFFICE PUBLICATIONS, ETC. 561

2^0.

14
101

Title of book.

Price.

COMPASSES AND DEVIATION.

Magnetism of Ships and the Deviations of the Compass. By Poia-
son, Aity, Smith, Evans, and Randall, with other papers and docu-
ments. Edited by B. Franklin Greene. 8vo. 1867. Bureau of
Navigation

Magnetism of Ships and the Deviations of the Compass. Compris-
inep the three reports of the Liverpool Compass Commission,
with additional papers by Mr. Archibald Smith, F. B. S., etc.,
and Staff-Captain F. J. Evans, K. N. 8vo. 1869. Bureau of
Navigation .*

Ship's Compasses, including the subject of Binnacles and Swinging
Ship. By Commodore T. A. Jenkins, U. S. N. 8vo. 1869. Bu-
reau of Ini avigation

Finding the Compass Error on board Ship. By B. F. Greene.
Professor of Mathematics, U. S. N. 8vo. 1875. Bureau of
Navigation

METEROLOGICAL.

The Way to Avoid the Center of our Violent Gales. 8vo. 1868.

Bureau of Navigation _

Practical Hints in regard to West India Hurricanes. By Lieut. G.

L. Dyer, U. S. N. 1887. (Pamphlet.) Hydrographic OflQce

Nautical Monograph No. 5. The Great Storm off the Atlantic

Coast of the United States, March 11-14, 1888. By Everett Hay-

U. S.N. 1888. Hydrographic Office

SURVEYS.

General Instructions for Hydrographic Surveyors. (Pamphlet.)
1868. Bureau of Navigation

The Methods and Results of the Survey of the West Coaat of Lower
California by the Officers of the U. 3. S. Ranger during the sea-
son of 1889 and 1890. By Lieut. O. W. Lowry, U. S. N., and G.
W. Littlehales. 8 vo. 1892. Hydrographic Office

SIGNALS.

International Signal Code. Revised and corrected to 1890,|includ-
ing the semaphore and storm-signal service of the maritime
countries, the life-saving service and time-ball system of the
United States. Prepared by Lieut. Chas. M. McCarteney, U. S.
N. 8vo. 1890. Bureau of Navigation

MISCELLANEOUS PUBLICATIONS.

11 U. S. Hydrographic Office papers. Occasional publications, 1 to 6
65 Report on the Telegraphic Determination of Differences of Lon-
gitude in the West Indies and Central America. By Lieut. Com-
mander F. M. Green, U. S. N. 4to. 1877 . Bureau of Navigation.
•a ' Report on the Telegraphic Determination of Differences of Lon-
gitude on the East Coast of South America. By Lieut. Com-
mander F. M. Green, U. S. N. 4to. 1880. Bureau of Navigation.
Report on the Telegraphic Determination of Longitude In the East
Indies, China, and Japan. By Lieut. Commander F. M. Green,

U. S. N. 1881-82. Bureau of Navigation

Report of Telegraphic Determinations of Longitudes in Mexico,
Central America^ and West Coast of South America. By Lieut.
Commander C. U. Davis, Lieuts. J. A. Norrisand Charles Laird,
U. S. N. 1885. Bureau of Navigation

* Not for sale.
18402 36

$3.00

3.00
.40

2.76

.10
.10

(*)

.20

3.00

(*)

{*)

(*)

562 LIST OP HYDBOGBAPHIC OFFICE PUBLICATIONS, ETC.

No.

95
98

TiUe of book.

Priea

MISCELLANEOUS PUBLICATIONS— Continued.

Report on the Telegraphic Determination of Longitudes in Mexico,
Central America, the West Indies, and on the North Coast of
South America, with the Latitudes of the several Stations. B^
Lieuts. J. A. Norris and Charles Laird, U. S. N. To which it
appended a Report on Magnetic Observations in Mexico and the
West Indies, ^y Lieut. Charles Laird and Ensigns J. H. L.
Holcombe and L. M. Garrett, U. S. N. 1891. Bureau of Navi-
gation -^ --

Report of the International Meteorologic Congress at Paris, 1889.
By Lieut. Aaron Ward, U. S. N. (Pamphlet.) 1890

The average form of Isolated Submarine Pei^ and the interval
which should obtain between deep-sea soundings taken to disclose
the character of the bottom of the ocean. By G. W. Littlehales.
8vo. 1890. Hydrographic Office -

Report on Uniform System for Spelling Foreign Geographic Names.
By Lieut. C. M. McCarteney, U. S. N., Boynton Leach and
Gustave Herrle. (Pamphlet.) 1891. Hydrographic Office

(*)
$0.20

.70

(*)

* Not for sale.

AGENTS FOR THE SALE OF HYDROGRAPHIC OFFICE CHARTS, SAILING

DIRECTIONS, ETC.

AGENTS IN UNITED STATES.

O. H. Cummin^s, Eastport, Me.
N. C. Wallace, Mlllbridge, Me.
Albert W. Bee, Bar Harbor, Me.
Spear, May & Stover, 408 Main street, Rockland, Me.
George Bliss, Waldoborough, Me.
William O. McCobb, Booth Bay Harbor, Me.
Charles F. Hayden, Bath, Me.

William Senter& Co., No. 51 Exchange street, Portland, Me.
P. A. Chisolm, No. 161 Main street, Gloucester, Mass.
Henry P. Ives, 232 Essex street, Salem, Mass.
Chas. C. Hutchinson, No. 126 Commercial street, Boston, Mass.
Samuel Thaxter & Son, No. 125 Stats street, Boston, Mass.
D. W. Stevens, Vineyard Haven, Mass.
.C. H. Sherman & Son, New Bedford, Mass.
Geo. A. Stockwell, Providence, R. I.
J. M. K. Southwick, 185 Thames street, Newport, R. I.

C. C. Ball, Block Island.

D. B. Hempst3d, 25 Bank street. New London, Conn.
Seargt. P. Daniels, New London, Conn.

Jas. H. Stivers, 72 Water street, Stonington, Conn.

R. D. Stevens, Customhouse, Hartford, Conn.

H. S. Babcock, Customhouse, New Haven, Conn.

A. H. Kellam, New Haven, Conn.

T. S. & J. D. Negus, No. 140 Water street, New York City.

R. Merrill's Sons, 179 Water streat, New York City.

Michael Rupp & Co., No. 39 South street, New York City.

D. Eggert's Sons. No, 74 Wall street, New York City.
John Bliss & Co., No. 128 Front street. New York City.
Thomas Manning, No. 53 Beaver street. New York City.

E. Steiger & Co., 25 Park Place, New York Ciiy.

Thomas S. Faulkner, Emigrant Clearing House, Ellis Island, N. Y.

Prank M. Porch, Customhouse, Bridgeion, N. J.

Riggs & Bro., No. 221 Walnut street, Philadelphia, Pa.

^ J. Sloano & Co., cor. Pratt 8tre3t and Spesr's Wharf, Baltimore, Md.

, V.' O'Neal, No. 502 East Pratt street, Baltimore, Md.

m. J. Pitts, 53 South Gay street, Baltimore, Md.

J. Chapman, No. 915 Pennsylvania avenue, Washington, D. C.

. H. Lowdermilk & Co., 1424 P street NW., Washington, D. C.

H. Hickcox, 906 M street NW., Washington, D. C.

Bell's Sons, South Fairfax street, Alexandria, Va.

F. Greenwood & Bro., 158 Main street, Norfolk, Va.

Lckery A Co., 124 Main street; Norfolk, Va.

563

564 HX^DBOGRAPHIC OFFICE AGENTS.

Godfrey Hart, No. 24 South Front street, Wilmington, N. C.
W. N. HarriBs, with Geo. Harries & CJo., North Water street, WiLDiin:grton ,
N. C.
W. A. Wilson, No. 115 East Bay straet, Charleston, S. C.
J. P. Johnson, Customhouse, Savannah, Ga.
W. S. Cherry & Co., No. 89 Bay street, Savannah, Ga.
Horace Drew, Jacksonville Fla.
Robert Hanson, Titusville, Fla.
Brelsford Bros., Palm Beach, Fla.

Alfred Brost, office of light-house inspector. Key West, Fla.
Babbitt & Co., Franklin street, Tampa, Fla.
C. D. Webster, 83 and 85 Tarpon avenue, Tarpon Springs, Fla.
J. £. Grady, Apalachicola, Fla.

Henry Horsier & Co., 70H and 708 South Palafox street, Pensacola, Fla.
J. R. Edwards, Mobile, Ala.
Chamberlain & Co., Mobile, Ala.
Jas. I. Friar, Pascagoula. Miss.
L. Frigerio, No. 161 Canal street. New Orleans, La.
Woodward, Wight & Co., Nos. 38, 40, 42 Canal street. New Orleans La.
Frigerio & SchuUy, 85 Royal street, New Orleans, La.
Chas. F. Trube, Galveston, Tex.

Rand, McNally & Co., 14S-154 Monroe street, Chicago, El.
Dodge & Burbeck, corner Fifth and D streets, San Diego, Cal.
W. L. Banning, San Pedro, Cal.

Stoll & Thayer Co., 139 South Spring street, Los Angelea Cal.
H. A. C. McPhail, Santa Barbara, Cal.
S. S. Arnheim, No. 8 Stuart street, San Francisco, Cal.
Dillon & Co., No. 310 California street, San Francisco, Cal.
Louis Weule, No. 418 Battery street, San Francisco, Cal.
Griffen & Reed, Astoria, Oregon.
James E. Matthews, Eureka, Humboldt County, Cal.
J. K. Gill & Co., Nos. 28 and 30 First street, Portland, Oregon.
James Jones, Port Townsend, Wash.
Waterman & Katz, Port Townsend, Wash.
£. C. Vaughan, Tacoma, Wash.
Boeringer & Co., Tacoma, Wash.
G. Davies & Co., Seattle, Wash.
W. H. Pumphrey, Seattle, Wash.

AGENTS IN FOREIGN PORTS.

Garrett Byrne, St. Johns, Newfoundland.

Robert H. Cogswell, Halifax, Nova Scotia.

J. & A. McMillan, St. John, New Brunswick

Hunter & Grant, Hamilton, Ontario.

T. Darling & Co., Nassau, Bahamas.

E. J. D. Astwood, Turks Island.

Edwin W. Wilson, 41 and 43 Obispo street, Havana, Cuba.

Juan B. Carbo, United States Vice-Consul, Cienfuegos, Cuba.

J. P. Thorsen, St. Thomas, West Indies.

James Gall, Kingston, Jamaica.

G. Aneiaux, United States Consulate, Barbados, West Indies.

John A. Donnatien, Port Spain, Trinidad, West Indies.

Para, Brazil, at the consulate.

HTDROOBAPHIC OFFICE AQEMTS.

565

Arthur B. Dallaa, Pernambuco, Brazil.

St. Helena Island, at the consulate.

John Newton, 2 Oalle de la Oonstitucion, Callao, Peru.

F. A* Markert, Guiqrmas, Mexico.

M. W. Waitt & Ck>.» 77 Government street, Victoria, British Columbia.
Philip, Son & Nephew, 41 to 51 South Castle street, Liverpool, England,.
Alexander Dobbie & Son, 18 Clyde Place, Glasgow, Scotland.
V. & M. Lepetit, 15 Rue de Paris, Havre, France.

G. W. liOhmann, Schllefmuhle 21, Bremen, Germany.
Charles Gaupp & Co., Hongkong, China.

Russell L. Webb, Manila, Philippine Islands.
18402 37

." .

■k

f^k

Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Books

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "The navigation of the Caribbean Sea and Gulf of Mexico"

See other formats